JP6519392B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, an effect of notifying whether the player wins the person have enough run, Privilege after completion those or (e.g., probability variation gaming state) an effect that notifies whether granted , there are things to be executed during the current or a game.

JP, 2009-178292, A

  However, conventional gaming machines have a problem that the interest of the player can not be improved.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 can display the discrimination means for performing discrimination and the first identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. and Do display means, said first identification information dynamic display means capable of displaying the for indicating a discrimination result of said discriminating means from the by dynamic display the first identification information in the display unit And, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player based on the display means displaying the first identification information corresponding to the specific determination result. The first game state and the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state is set as the game state after the end of the bonus game, and one game state is set from among the plurality of game states and a gaming state setting means for, place After a plurality of display areas capable of displaying second identification information for making a suggestion of the second aspect and the second identification information dynamically displayed in the plurality of display areas, a part of the display areas is made in advance By displaying the specified specific identification information, it is suggested that the specific determination result is obtained, and the second identification information of the specific combination determined in advance is displayed for the plurality of display areas. and a display control unit which can indicate the setting of the second game state, said display control means, the first identification information corresponding to the specific determination result is dynamically displayed by The dynamic display of the second identification information is started based on the start of the first period which is at least a part of the period, and at least one of the periods during which the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means Department, and In a second successive periods in one period, in which the second identification information to the plurality of display areas are displayed controllably configured to be displayed state.

Gaming machine of claim 2, in claim 1 gaming machine wherein said display means is shall be provided in viewable a position the player.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the determination means for performing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the display means capable of displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the display Dynamic display means capable of displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means after dynamically displaying the first identification information in the means, and specifying the display means A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player based on the display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result of Game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as a subsequent game state; Second to make a given suggestion After dynamically displaying the plurality of display areas capable of displaying the identification information and the second identification information in the plurality of display areas, specific identification information determined in advance for some of the display areas is displayed Setting the second gaming state by displaying the second identification information of a specific combination determined in advance with respect to the plurality of display areas, suggesting that the specific determination result is obtained by causing and a display control unit that can suggest, the display control means is at least part of the period in which the first identification information corresponding to the specific determination result is dynamically displayed The dynamic display of the second identification information is started based on the start of the first period, and it is at least a part of the period during which the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, in the first period Consecutive second term In, in which the second identification information to the plurality of display areas are displayed controllably configured to be displayed state.

  This has the effect of improving the player's interest.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation | movement unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a top raising and lowering unit. It is a front view of a top raising and lowering unit. It is a front view of a top raising and lowering unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of an upper raising / lowering unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the upper lifting unit. (A) is a front view of the first gear, (b) is a rear view of the first gear, (c) is a front view of the second gear, (d) is a second gear It is a rear view of. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission apparatus. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission apparatus. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission apparatus. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission apparatus. It is a front perspective view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a liquid crystal lifting and lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive side slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a drive side slide member. It is a rear view of a drive side slide member. (A) is a front perspective view of a connecting member, (b) is a front view of the connecting member in the direction of arrow XXVIb in FIG. 26 (a), and (c) is an arrow in FIG. 26 (a) It is a rear view of the connection member in XXVIc direction view. It is a rear view of a 2nd channel | path formation member and a connection member. It is a rear view of a 2nd channel | path formation member and a connection member. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal elevator unit as viewed in the direction of arrows XXX in FIG. 29. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and a left rocking unit. It is a front perspective view of a left rocking unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left rocking unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left rocking unit. It is a front view of a rocking operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking operation unit. It is a front view of a rocking operation unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid-crystal raising / lowering unit and a left rocking unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid-crystal raising / lowering unit and a left rocking unit. It is a front view of rotation unit. It is a front perspective view of rotation unit. It is a front view of rotation unit in the state where a guide member was removed. It is a front perspective view of a rotation unit in the state where a guide member was removed. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit in the state where a rotation member, a part of throwing device, and a guide member were removed. It is a front schematic diagram of a guide member. (A) is a front view of the one side rotation drive member and the other side rotation member, (b) is a sectional view of the one side rotation member and the other side rotation member along the line LIb-LIb in FIG. is there. It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit cut | disconnected in the plane containing the rotating shaft of a center transmission member. It is a front view of a case member and a drive mechanism. (A) is a front view of a rotation member, (b) is a side view of the rotation member in the arrow LIVb direction view of Fig.54 (a). It is a rear view of the rotation member in the arrow LV direction view of FIG.54 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of a division member, (b) is a rear perspective view of a division member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a division member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a division member. (A) And (b) is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned to 1st area. (A) And (b) is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned to 2nd area. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a throwing apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a throwing apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an arm rotation mechanism. It is a front view of the throwing apparatus in the state by which the arm member of an arm rotation mechanism is arrange | positioned in a holding position. It is a front view of the throwing apparatus in the state by which the arm member of the arm rotation mechanism is arrange | positioned in the separation position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the holding piece protrusion-retraction mechanism in the state by which the holding piece was arrange | positioned in the protrusion position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the holding piece protrusion-retraction mechanism in the state by which the holding piece was arrange | positioned in the retracted position. (A) is a front perspective view of a holding piece retraction mechanism in the state where the holding piece is disposed at the projecting position, and (b) is a partial enlargement of the retention piece protrusion mechanism at line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of a holding piece retraction mechanism in the state where the holding piece is disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a partial enlargement of the retention piece protrusion mechanism at the line LXIXb-LXIXb of FIG. 69 (a) FIG. It is a front perspective view of a guide member. It is a rear perspective view of a guide member. It is a front view of a guide member and a rotation member. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotation member in the first section, and (b) is a partial enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotation member in the second section. (A) to (d) are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation drive member is rotated by 30 degrees. It is a state relation figure showing the relation between the state of engagement or release of the one side rotation drive member and the other side rotation drive member to a division member, and the phase. (A) to (c) are state transition diagrams for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member. It is the partial enlarged side view which expanded the part in 1st area of a rotation member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the left rocking | swiveling unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the main body member of the tip wall member, (b) is a top view of the main body member of the tip wall member, (c) is a line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 79 (b) It is a sectional view of the body member of a tip wall member, and (d) is a front view of the body member of a tip wall member. It is a front view of a left rocking unit. It is a front view of a left rocking unit. It is a front view of a left rocking unit. (A) to (c) are partial front views of a left rocking unit and a liquid crystal lifting unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal raising and lowering unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. (A) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member in a 4th embodiment, (b) is a side view of the drive side slide member in the arrow LXXXIXb direction view of FIG. 89 (a), (c) FIG. 7 is a partial front view of a drive-side slide member. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode in the variation display of symbols, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode in the case where the combination of the symbols to be dislocated is stopped and displayed. . (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case where a combination of symbols serving as a jackpot is stopped and displayed, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during execution of a time saving suggestion effect is there. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case where the outset is informed in the time-short suggestion effect, and (b) shows an example of the display mode in the case where the hit is informed in the time-short suggestion effect FIG. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode under execution of increase production. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during execution of roulette chance production, and (b) is a figure showing a state in which a thrown ball performs a swing operation on a holding piece . (A) is a figure which showed the state which the ball | bowl fell off to the pocket in roulette chance production | presentation, (b) is a figure which showed the state which the ball | bowl fell to the pocket. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode in the case where the additional effect is executed, (b) shows an example of the display mode in the case where the lucky number of the additional portion is notified in the increase effect FIG. It is a front view of back surface LED. It is the figure which showed the case where the one part lighting area of back surface LED was set to the lighting state of 100% of lighting rates. It is a front view of a rotation member in, when the lighting area of a part of back LED is set to the lighting state of lighting rate 100%. (A) is a front view of the back surface LED when the lighting state is set for each lighting region of the back surface LED, (b) is a setting of the lighting state for each lighting region of the back surface LED It is a front view of the rotation member in the case where it carried out. (A) is a front view of the rear surface LED at the time when the rear surface LED makes 1/3 rotation after setting of the lighting state, and (b) is when the rear surface LED makes 1/3 rotation after setting of the lighting state It is a front view of a rotation member. (A) is a front view of the back surface LED in the case of correcting the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the correction section, and (b) is the case in the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the correction section It is a front view of a rotation member. (A) is a figure showing the case where the ball in rocking movement is arranged out of the detection range of the ball detection sensor, (b) is the ball in rocking movement within the detection range of the ball detection sensor It is the figure which showed the case where it arrange | positioned to. (A) And (b) is an explanatory view about control of a stepping motor. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device, b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, and (c) is a first It is a block diagram showing composition of a classification selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the hit type selection table for special figures 1. As shown in FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the hit classification selection table for 2nd figure. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the method of state transition of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the medium-sized, big hit table normally, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the normal inside-out table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a time-situ medium-sized big hit table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the detailed contents of the consecutive table in the short-sized medium-sized big hit table at that time FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the time-slip medium out table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the detailed contents of the consecutive table in the short-time out-side table at that time. FIG. (A) is a timing chart showing the time change of the aspect of the outlier roulette chance, and (b) is the timing chart showing the time change of the aspect of the outlier roulette chance when the fluctuation is interrupted during the time saving is there. (A) is a timing chart showing the time change of the aspect of the roulette chance, and (b) is a timing chart showing the time change of the aspect of the roulette chance, when the fluctuation is interrupted during the time saving. is there. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the game result setting table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the state setting table. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM in a main control apparatus. (A) is a block diagram which shows the structure of ROM in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the operation scenario table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the upper lift unit table, (c) is the content of the specific opening table It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. It is the model which showed the content of the initial stage operation table typically. It is the model which showed the content of the rotation position discrimination | determination table typically. It is the model which showed the content of the hit position storage area typically. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the lighting position storage area, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first storage area, (c) is a second storage area And (d) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the third storage area. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the model which showed the content of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed the content of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol 1 change start processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol 2 winning a prize processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows state setting processing at the time of closing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the origin return process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fall control processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge | emission detection process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern command process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize information command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the connection release determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the execution command processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the initial operation processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the lighting setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the state command processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pocket distribution process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 prize command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display number selection process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory function setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the stop classification command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the round number command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back surface image change command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the error command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transmission setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece in the second control example, and (b) is a front view of the holding piece in the second control example. It is the model which showed typically the correspondence of arrangement | positioning of each ball | bowl detection sensor and the area in a 2nd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the amplitude discrimination table in the second control example It is. It is the model which showed typically the content of the rocking angle discrimination | determination table in a 2nd control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fall control processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the amplitude discrimination | determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows rocking angle control processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the execution command process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the arrangement | positioning identification process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the specific process during rotation performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the non-specification process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the specific process during rocking | fluctuation performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of time change of the effect mode when the middle change is set during the hit mode in the third control example, and (b) is in the third control example, It is the timing chart which showed an example of time change of a production | presentation aspect at the time of out-of-middle fluctuation being set up in continuous mode. (A) is a timing chart showing a time-dependent change of an effect aspect in the case where a short change is determined after a two-time consecutive short change has been determined in the third control example and in the third control mode, (B) is a timing chart showing a time change of the presentation mode when the short variation is determined three consecutive times in the continuous mode. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the third control example is there. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for consecutive villa middle hit in the 3rd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for continuous release in the 3rd control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the overlay area selection table typically . It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd example of a control. It is the model which showed typically the content of the hit position storage area in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pocket distribution process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the addition position determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 prize-winning command processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous variation variation pattern selection table in the fourth control example It is a figure, (c) is a block diagram showing the composition of the operation scenario table in the 4th control example, and (d) shows the contents of the upper swing production table in the 4th control example typically. It is a schematic diagram. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 prize command processing 4 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 4th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern selection process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the upper fluctuation production process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the operation | movement aspect of the left rocking unit in, when left rocking production is performing in the 5th control example. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining pitching depression production in the 5th example of control. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the left swinging unit table in the fifth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the first left swinging unit table in the fifth control example It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd left rocking unit table in the 5th control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows fall control processing 5 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows notice preparation setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pitching depression production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pocket distribution process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 prize command processing 5 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. (A) And (b) is a figure showing the display mode of the change display performed during "normal mode" in the example of the 6th control. (A) And (b) is a figure showing the display mode of the change display performed during "preparation mode" in the 6th example of control. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the symbol position selection table in the sixth control example FIG. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the display position selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop position selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 6th control example. It is the timing chart which showed an example of the signal waveform of the lighting control command in the 1st example of control.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to Figs. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface on the left side thereof. . On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61 and 62. The opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640a, the second variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (FIG. It is attached to the back side of reference). The base plate 60 is made of a light transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640a, the second variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, It is being fixed by the tapping screw etc. from the front side of the game board 13.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640a. . Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640a, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to a probability variation big hit or a symbol corresponding to a large hit or not by a lighted state, and indicates the number of holding balls by a lighted state, and by a 7 segment display device, a round of big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the winning of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640a. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, probability variation jackpots A to K and usual jackpots A and B are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "the probability variation big hit A-K" is a big hit of the maximum round number of 2 rounds in all, and shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, when it comes to "normal jackpot A, B", the maximum round number shifts to the special symbol low probability state after the jackpot of two rounds.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second ball entry port 640a by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second entry ball opening It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win to 640a. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  During a definite change or during a short time, not only the hitting probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time for opening the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the motorized accessory 640b is in the open state (opened state), the ball reaches the second entry ball opening 640a in comparison with the case where the motorized auxiliary object 640b is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won to the second entry ball opening 640a during a definite change or during a time reduction, and it is possible to increase the number of times a big hit lottery is performed.

  In addition to changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640a or changing the opening time during a definite change or during a short time, it is possible to make a single hit. A change may be made to increase the number of times the motorized part 640b is opened more than during normal times. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640b is open during the time and one hit when the electric symbol 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is opened. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, the time during which the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640a is opened or the number of times the motorized accessory 640b is opened at one time does not occur during definite change or time, but the second symbol Only the hit probability may be changed to be increased relative to the normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640a as a trigger, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display 37A, 37B, the third The third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of symbols, and the LED that performs variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of the through gate 67 And a second symbol display device 83 (not shown).

  Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights the symbol of “o” and the symbol of “x” as a display symbol (a second symbol (not shown)) alternately for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 To perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) in the second symbol display device 83. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, in the second symbol display device 83, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized role object 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640a It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a predetermined time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the motorized role 640b of the second entrance 640a to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to set a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second entrance ball hole 640a during definite variation and during time saving.

  In addition, by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the motorized symbol 640b per hit, or the like during the definite variation or time, the second entrance 640a during the definite variation or time When the ball is in a state in which the ball is likely to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640b with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right of the game board can pass Is configured. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed by the second symbol display device 83, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out If there is, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the first It may be performed using a part of the three-symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 where balls can be won is disposed. When the ball is won in the first ball entrance 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second ball entry port 640 a where balls can be won is disposed on the right side in a front view of the first ball entry port 64. When the ball wins on the second entrance 640a, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on to cause the main A lottery for a big hit is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640a is also one of winning openings through which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won at the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize ball 640a is the same are configured. However, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second win ball 640a is different, for example, the first entry The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won on the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is hit on the second entrance 640 a may be five.

  The second ball entry port 640a is accompanied by an electric symbol 640b. The electric role part 640b is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role part 640b is in a closed state (protruding state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second ball entry port 640a. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric role object 640b is in the open state ( In this state, the ball easily wins the second entrance 640 a.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the electrically operated accessory 640 b is in the open state (retracted state) is increased. Furthermore, during the definite change and during the short time, the time during which the motorized accessory 640b is opened also becomes longer than the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second ball entry port 640a compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

  Here, the probability of becoming a big hit is the same in the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball reaches the second entrance 640a. is there. However, as the type of jackpot that is selected when it becomes a jackpot, the selection ratio of jackpot types that can obtain a relatively large number of prize balls is set higher when the ball is won in the second entrance 640 a It is done. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have a motorized part like the second ball entry port 640a, and the ball is always in a state where it can be won.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640a is often in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640a. Aim the ball to the left of the variable display unit 80 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and winning many prizes at the first entrance 64 A player who aims to be a big hit will be advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640a is likely to be in the open state during definite variation or time, and it is easy to win the second ball entry port 640a. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 toward the second entrance 640 a (so-called “right strike”), and the through gate 67 is passed to drive the electric part It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a big hit by winning the second entrance 640 a while making the open state.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A first variable winning device 82a is disposed at the upper left of the first ball entrance 64, and a first specified winning hole 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the first variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball can not win into the first specified winning opening 82. On the other hand, the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed in accordance with a predetermined opening pattern according to the jackpot type at the time of a specific jackpot (for example, a probability variation jackpot A). As a predetermined opening pattern, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) in which opening for 0.6 seconds and opening for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times and an opening pattern for opening only 0.052 seconds (opening pattern B) And are provided.

  The opening and closing operation according to the predetermined opening pattern by the first variable winning device 82a can be repeated, for example, twice (two rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done. In each round, even if the opening pattern is not completed, if it is detected that a predetermined number (for example, 10) or more balls have won the first specified winning hole 82, the first forcedly The variable winning device 82a is closed to set the end of the round.

  A second variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular second specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first ball entry 64 or the second ball entry 640a becomes a big hit, the stop of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of a big hit is shown. In the case where the jackpot type is the type corresponding to the second specified winning opening 65a, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is likely to be won to the second specified winning opening 65a. In this special game state, the second specified winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won). That is, a long opening time is set as compared to the jackpot type in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened. Therefore, in the jackpot type in which the second specified winning opening 65a is opened, in many cases, it is possible to win an upper limit number (for example, 10) of balls with respect to the second specified winning opening 65a. You can get more prize balls against. Therefore, when it becomes a big hit, it can be made to wish that it is a big hit type that the 2nd specified winning a prize mouth 65a is opened, so it can be made to pay attention to the 2nd specified winning a prize mouth 65a when becoming a big hit. .

  The second specified winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the second specified winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the second specified winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, twice (two rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the second variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the second specified winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (for opening / closing driving forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate ( Not shown). The second specified winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the second specified winning opening 65a is easy to win, It operates so as to alternately repeat the state with the closed state of.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball flowing down the game area, which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, is guided to the ball discharging passage (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, main components of the pachinko machine 10 such as a big hit lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 by the MPU 201 Execute the process

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the second specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large open port solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side with the lower side as an axis and a solenoid for driving the motorized part etc. is connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands for these via the input / output port 205 And send control signals.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, various sensors 230, a frame button 22 and the like are connected.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.

  6 and 7, the state in which the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position is the second path forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the first path forming member of the left swing unit 500 in FIG. In FIG. 10, the state in which the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed at the raised position is illustrated in a state in which it is coupled with 520. Further, FIGS. 6 to 10 illustrate the state in which the upper lifting unit 300 is disposed at the raised position.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 10, the operation unit 200 is provided with a rear case 210 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the rear case 210, an upper lifting unit 300, a liquid crystal lifting unit 400, and a left swing unit 500, a rotation unit 600 and a light emitting decoration member 700 are accommodated respectively.

  The rear case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 211 to the front, It forms in the box shape which one side open | released. In the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, a recess having a substantially circular shape is recessed at the center, and the rotation unit 600 is accommodated in the recess. The liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the rotating unit 600, and the upper lifting unit 300, the left swing unit 500 and the decorative light emitting member 700 are the upper edge, the left edge and the lower edge of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. It is arranged in each department.

  The upper elevating unit 300 includes elevating bodies 330 in which a plurality (four in the present embodiment) are arranged in parallel in the width direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 8). It is formed to be vertically movable (see FIGS. 12 and 13). In the state where the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, when the lifting body 330 is disposed at the raised position, almost the entire surface of the third symbol display device 81 is visible (see FIG. 8). When 330 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIG. 12), a part of the third symbol display device 81 is made invisible by the elevating body 330.

  The liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed in a vertical posture in which the axis is vertically aligned, and a pair of guide rods 451 disposed at predetermined intervals in the width direction, and both ends of the guide rods 451 in the width direction A drive-side slide member 420 and a driven-side slide member 430 which are slidably displaceably supported, and a drive motor 441 for driving the drive-side slide member 420 up and down. Thus, the driven slide member 430 is driven up and down.

  That is, when the drive-side slide member 420 is raised, the drive-side slide member 420 pushes the driven-side slide member 430 upward while resisting the action of gravity, while the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered. In accordance with the lowering of the drive-side slide member 420, the driven-side slide member 430 is lowered by its own weight.

  A second passage forming member 422 is disposed in the drive-side slide member 420, and the display device 81 in FIG. 3 is disposed in the driven-side slide member 430. When the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the connecting position between the raised position and the lowered position, the second passage forming member 422 can be connected to the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 9). Further, when the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the raised position, the upper region of the third symbol display device 81 is disposed on the back side of the upper lifting unit 300 (see FIG. 10).

  The left swinging unit 500 includes a first passage forming member 520 which is swung in the direction of moving the distal end side up and down around the proximal end side. When the first passage forming member 520 is swung in the direction of lifting the tip end, it is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 9), and the tip end is connected to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, When the tip end side is swung in a swinging direction, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10), and the connection with the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is released.

  The ball flowing down the game area is allowed to flow into the left rocking unit 500, and the left rocking unit 500 is flowed in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged in the connection position (see FIG. 9). In the state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position while the second ball is sent to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520 (see FIG. 10) The ball which has flowed in is sent to the game area through a passage which will be described later, which is provided separately from the first passage forming member 520.

  The rotation unit 600 is a rendering device configured to simulate a roulette. That is, a member (rotating member 640) corresponding to a wheel (rotary disc) formed rotatably and the wheel is divided in the circumferential direction and colored red or black and different numbers are displayed respectively And a portion corresponding to the pocket (display plate 646 and partition plate 647), and the ball B thrown from the device (pitching device 650) on the inner peripheral side of the wheel corresponds to a plurality of pockets. It is formed to fall into either.

  When the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIG. 8), almost the entire rotation unit 600 is shielded by the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 so as not to be visible from the player. When placed (see FIG. 9), a part (lower part) of the member corresponding to the wheel is exposed, and when the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 10), In addition to the part (lower part) of the corresponding member, the ball B held on the inner peripheral side of the member corresponding to the wheel and the path from the ball B to be thrown to the portion corresponding to the pocket Exposed, these are made visible to the player.

  The light emitting decorative member 700 includes a case body formed of a light transmitting material and a plurality of LEDs disposed inside the case body, and an aspect of light emitted from the LED (for example, the light emitting LED By changing the number and the light emission time, effects by light emission are performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 20, detailed configurations of the upper lifting unit 300, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, the left swing unit 500, the rotation unit 600, and the light emitting decoration member 700 will be described. First, the upper lifting unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 20.

  FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the upper lifting unit 300, and FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views of the upper lifting unit 300. As shown in FIG. 11 and 12 show a state in which all the elevators 330 arranged in parallel in the width direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 12) are arranged at the rising position, and in FIG. The state of being placed in the position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, in the upper lifting unit 300, a plurality (four in the present embodiment) of lifting bodies 330 are disposed in the width direction of the horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped base member 310, and each lifting body 330 is It is configured to be movable up and down between a raised position (see FIG. 12) and a lowered position (see FIG. 13). Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15, the configuration of the drive mechanism of each elevator 330 will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the upper lifting unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear exploded perspective view of the upper lifting unit 300. As shown in FIG.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 14 and 15, the upper lifting unit 300 includes a base member 310 in the form of a horizontally long rectangular plate and a space for housing the transmission device 350 between the base member 310 and the base member 310. A back cover 320 fastened and fixed to the back side, and an elevating body 330 in which a rack 332 is accommodated between the base member 310 and the back cover 320 and a circular effect portion 331 is disposed on the front side of the base member 310; A driving device 340 that is fastened and fixed to the back cover member 320 and generates a driving force necessary for the elevation operation of the elevating body, and a transmission device 350 that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device 340 to the elevating body 330 Prepare.

  The cover member 310 has a semicircular shape in which the center of the circle is disposed at the lower end, and a semicircular recessed portion 311 recessed from the front side to the back, and the rack 332 of the elevating body 330 from the rear side. And a guide rib 312 protruding in a rib shape toward a position with a slight gap in the left-right direction.

  The semicircular recessed portion 311 is formed with a radius slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rendering portion 331 of the elevating body 330, and the center of the circle of the semicircular recessed portion 311 and the center of the rendering portion 331 are vertically linear Is placed at the matching position. Thereby, when the effect part 331 moves upward, it becomes possible to move to the front of the position interfering with the semicircular recessed part 311 on the front side of the base member 310, and the upper and lower width of the base member 310 is secured. The rising movement width of the effect part 331 can also be secured large.

  The guide rib portion 312 is a rib-like portion extending in the vertical direction, and is protruded to a position where it can contact the left and right side surfaces of the rack 332 of the lifting and lowering body 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress that the elevating body 330 moves in the lateral direction (parallel movement or tilting operation) while moving up and down.

  In addition, by configuring the semicircular recessed portion 311 as a recessed portion recessed from the front side to the back side, the area in which the back side can be made invisible can be expanded compared to the case where the space penetrates in the front and rear direction. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for arranging the mechanism portion (a portion such as a gear or a motor which is not intended to make the player visually recognize).

  The rear cover 320 has a main body 321 formed in the shape of a case whose front side and lower side are open, a columnar support portion 322 projecting from the main body 321 to the front side, and a front surface from the support portion 322 A guide hole 323 which is a long hole drilled with the extending direction aligned with the vertical direction at a position displaced in the left-right direction and a bottom portion around which the upper pivot portion 322 is convexly supported And a locking portion 324 formed in a rib shape provided along the radial direction of 322.

  The shaft support portion 322 is a portion for supporting the pair of gear members 351 and 352 of the transmission device 350, and the guide hole 323 is a hole for guiding the lifting and lowering operation of the lifting and lowering body 330.

  The locking portion 324 is disposed on the upper side in the vertical direction and the lower side in the vertical direction with respect to the axis of the upper shaft support portion 322, and in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the rising position or the lowering position, respectively. The end of the locking arc 351 c of the gear 351 is a portion that can be abutted in the rotational direction.

  The lifting body 330 has a rendering portion 331 configured in a circular plate shape, and a rack 332 fixed to the back surface of the rendering portion 331 and extending in the vertical direction at a position spaced from the rear side surface of the rendering portion 331 And.

  The effect portion 331 is a portion in which a circular liquid crystal panel is disposed inside a circular outer frame, and effects are displayed by displaying a pattern or a figure on the liquid crystal panel.

  The rack 332 is provided with a slide shaft 332 a which is provided so as to protrude on the back side and to a position where it is inserted into the guide hole 323 of the back cover 320.

  The slide shaft 332 a is not in a form in which a plurality of slide shafts are provided in a convex shape, but in a form in which one is provided in a convex state. Therefore, since the number of the guide holes 323 can be reduced to one, the movement distance of the rack 332 can be secured large while suppressing the space for the guide holes 323 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 332 can be brought into contact with the guide rib portion 312 in the left-right direction, the rack 332 is in the left-right direction even if there is one connection position with the guide hole 323 of the rack 332. Can be prevented from Thus, the effect part 331 can be prevented from swinging in the left-right direction when the elevating body 330 moves up and down, and the gap between the second gear 352 and the rack 332 is changed to prevent deterioration of the meshing relationship. be able to.

  The drive device 340 includes a drive motor 341 which is a drive source fastened and fixed to the back cover 320, and a drive gear 342 which is rotated by the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 and transmits the drive force to the transmission device 350. .

  The transmission device 350 is engaged with the first gear 351 that is supported by the support portion 322 and engaged with the drive gear 342, and engaged with the first gear 351 and the rack 332 and supported by the support portion 322. And a second gear 352.

  As described above, since the plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevators 330 are provided with the independent drive motors 341, in addition to the operation in which all the elevators 330 interlock with each other, the elevators 330 can be It can be moved up and down individually. In addition, since the technical idea of each raising / lowering body 330 is common, below, the raising / lowering body 330 arrange | positioned by the left end of FIG. 11 is demonstrated, and the description about the other raising / lowering body 330 is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) is a front view of the first gear 351, FIG. 16 (b) is a rear view of the first gear 351, and FIG. 16 (c) is a front view of the second gear 352. FIG. 16 (d) is a rear view of the second gear 352.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b), the first gear 351 has a through hole through which the shaft support 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and a main body 351a having gear teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface. And an overhanging length of about half the length of the gear teeth (a pitch circle C1 connecting the contact points of the meshing teeth is extended to a portion where the formation of the gear teeth is omitted on the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 351a Abutment portions 351b radially extended in an overhanging length), and locking provided in an arc shape centered on the axis along a direction parallel to the axis from the back side surface of the main body portion 351a And an arc portion 351c.

  The contact portion 351b has an arc shape with a radius r around the center axis of the main portion 351a in the radial direction, and the tooth thickness of two to three gear teeth formed in the main portion 351a (arc An angle of the center of is composed of a tooth thickness in the range of approximately 45 degrees to 60 degrees). That is, since the formation length in the circumferential direction of the main portion 351a is longer than the thickness of one gear tooth, strength in the circumferential direction can be secured compared to the gear teeth of the main portion 351a.

  The locking arc portion 351c is a portion where the circumferential tip can contact the locking portion 324 (see FIG. 14) of the back cover 320 in the circumferential direction, and regulates the rotation angle of the first gear 351. There is a role.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 (c) and 16 (d), the second gear 352 is composed of two layers of gears having different tooth shapes on the front side and the back side, and the intermediate plate 353 is formed in a donut shape. And an irregular gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 353 and having a partially deformed tooth shape, and a spur gear shape on the rear side of the intermediate plate 353 and meshed with the rack 332 (see FIG. 15) And a transmission gear portion 355.

  The intermediate plate 352 is formed to project radially outward of the tips of the gear teeth of the differential gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, contact is possible by overlapping with the mating member (first gear 351 or rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) to be meshed in a direction parallel to the tooth surface (see FIG. 17). It is possible to suppress movement in a direction parallel to the tooth surface at the time of raising and lowering operation of 330.

  The irregular gear portion 354 is a portion engaged with the first gear 351 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11), and has a through hole through which the pivot portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted. A main body portion 354a to be formed, a receiving portion 354b overhangingly formed on a portion where formation of gear teeth is omitted on an outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a, and one end of the receiving portion 354b (FIG. 16C right side And an adjacent gear tooth 354c provided adjacent to the end portion).

  The receiving portion 354b is a front view counterclockwise side from the adjacent gear teeth 354c along the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a (a side where the first gear 351 bites into the adjacent gear portion 354c when moving the elevating body 330 upward) A portion formed by an arrangement angle (about 30 degrees to 50 degrees) for two gear teeth, and in a state where the transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322 Tooth length of the adjacent gear tooth 354c between the curved wall portion 354b1 curved along the arc shape of the radius r formed by and the circumferential wall surface of the curved wall portion 354b1 and the adjacent gear tooth 354c And a connecting wall portion 354b2 formed with about half the height of the teeth (the length of the teeth extending to the pitch circle C2 connecting the contact points of the meshing teeth). Therefore, the side face on the connection wall portion 354b2 side of the adjacent gear tooth 354c has an extension length of about half the radial extension length of the side face on the opposite side of the connection wall portion 354b2 of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, The connection wall portion 354b2 is formed integrally with the connection wall portion 354b2 so as to radially project from the connection wall portion 354b2.

  As shown in FIG. 16C, in a state in which the transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the pivot portion 322, the second gear 352 curves along an arc having a radius r formed by the tip end surface of the contact portion 351b. When the portion 354b1 is disposed, the adjacent gear teeth 354c are disposed outside the arc having the radius r (the second gear 352 side) (the adjacent gear teeth 354c have the radius r). Stay in formation at a position that does not interfere with the circle).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the raising and lowering operation of the raising and lowering body 330 will be described. In addition, since the operation | movement path | route of raise operation and fall operation is common, here, raise operation is demonstrated and description of fall operation is abbreviate | omitted.

  17 to 20 are front views of the lifting and lowering body 330 and the transmission device 350 in which the lifting operation of the lifting and lowering body 330 is illustrated in time series. In FIG. 17, the elevating body 330 is disposed at the lowered position, and in FIG. 18, the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the state illustrated in FIG. A state in which the distance raising operation is performed and the circumferential end of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 starts meshing with the adjacent gear teeth 354c of the second gear 352 is illustrated, and in FIG. 19, the state illustrated in FIG. The first gear 351 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, and the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the end face of the contact portion 351b in the circumferential direction is not in contact with the adjacent gear teeth 354c. In the state shown in FIG. 20, only the first gear 351 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 17 to 20, the elevating body 330 is moved up and down by transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 341 (see FIG. 14) to the rack 332 through the driving gear 342 and the transmission device 350. Ru. More specifically, the drive force of the drive gear 342 is transmitted from the first gear 351 meshed with the drive gear 342 to the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 meshed with the first gear 351, The rotation of the second gear 352 is transmitted to the rack engaged with the transmission gear portion 355 (see FIG. 16D) of the second gear 352, whereby the elevating body 330 moves up and down.

  In the lowered position illustrated in FIG. 17, the slide shaft 332 a (see FIG. 15) of the rack 332 is disposed at the lower end of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) of the back cover 320. Therefore, the rack 332 can be mechanically prevented from moving further downward.

  Further, in the state illustrated in FIG. 17, the circumferential gear end portion of the locking arc portion 351 c of the first gear 351 abuts on the lower locking portion 324 of the back cover 320 so that the first gear 351 is engaged. In the front view clockwise direction (direction in which the rack 332 is moved downward) is mechanically prevented.

  Thereby, even if the drive gear 342 is over-rotated due to a poor control of the drive motor 341 or the like, a load is generated to further rotate the first gear 351 from the state illustrated in FIG. By mechanically preventing the rotation of the first gear 351, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the second gear 352, and the rack 332 can be prevented from moving downward, so that the slide shaft 322a (see FIG. 15 can be pressed against the lower surface of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) to prevent the slide shaft 322a or the guide hole 323 from being broken.

  As illustrated in FIG. 18, in the process of raising and lowering the raising and lowering body 330, the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b whose circumferential thickness is larger than that of the other gear teeth meshes with the adjacent gear teeth 354c. Therefore, the load (load due to the weight of the elevator 330) transmitted in the reverse direction from the second gear 352 to the first gear 351 can be received by the contact portion 351b, which has a greater strength compared to other gear teeth. The durability of the first gear 351 can be improved.

  The contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is extended to the pitch circle C1, and the connection wall portion 354b2 of the second gear 352 is extended to the pitch circle C2. Therefore, in the state of FIG. It comes close to a position where it rubs against the wall portion 354b2. Therefore, the contact portion 351b can be brought into contact with the adjacent gear teeth 354c at a portion close to the root of the adjacent gear teeth 354c, and the durability of the adjacent gear teeth 354c can be improved.

  Further, since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are connected to one side surface in the circumferential direction to the connecting wall portion 354b2, strength against a load received from the circumferential direction is improved as compared with the other gear teeth. In other words, since the radial extension length of the side surface on the connection wall portion 354b2 side is shortened, resistance to deformation in the direction perpendicular to the length direction of the adjacent gear teeth 354c increases, and the connection wall portion By integrally forming the 354b2 with the adjacent gear teeth 354c, the total tooth thickness of the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the connecting wall portion 354b2 as a portion receiving a force applied to the adjacent gear teeth 354c is increased. , Resistance to deformation in the circumferential direction of the adjacent gear teeth 354c is increased. Thus, damage to the adjacent gear teeth 354c when the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is received can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the state immediately after the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, the arc-shaped tip portion of the abutting portion 351b abuts on the adjacent gear tooth 354c. In this state, since the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 are not in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of the first gear 351, the transmission of the driving force in the rotational direction of the first gear 351 to the second gear 352 is released. Ru.

  Therefore, the force supporting the weight of the lift 330 engaged with the second gear 352 is not transmitted from the first gear 351, and the lift 330 moves in the falling direction, so the second gear 352 moves the rack 332. It rotates in the direction of lowering movement (counterclockwise in FIG. 19).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, the contact portion 351b is disposed in the range in which the adjacent gear teeth 354c rotate (inside of the circle formed by the tips of the adjacent gear teeth 354c). When rotating 352, it is necessary to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c by the adjacent gear teeth 354c.

  Since the outer peripheral shape of the contact portion 351b is an arc shape centering on the central axis of the main portion 351a, the load applied to the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 351b is an axial component toward the shaft side of the first gear 351 It is decomposed into Fa and a circumferential component Fb along the tangential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

  The axial component Fa is not a direction in which the first gear 351 can be rotated, and in a state where the rigidity of the first gear 351 is secured (in a structure in which the first gear 351 does not expand and contract in the radial direction) It is difficult to push 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c.

  The circumferential component Fb is directed in the rotational direction of the first gear 351, but the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b contact each other at a point, so the component Fb slides between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b. As the first gear 351 is difficult to rotate, it is difficult to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the circumferential component Fb.

  Therefore, the second gear 352 is prevented from rotating because the adjacent gear tooth 354c is prevented from pushing the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c. The state of the elevator 330 is maintained.

  The abutting portion 351b and the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b are both formed in an arc shape having a radius r centered on the first gear 351, and as illustrated in FIG. Since the surfaces are abutted along the direction, the rotation of the first gear 351 can be firmly received using the entire area of the curved wall portion 354b1. As a result, even if the stopping of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is delayed after the elevating body 330 reaches the raised position, the first gear 351 can be prevented from over-rotation, and the drive motor 341 is stopped. It is possible to prevent the delay of the vehicle from affecting the operation mode of the elevator 330.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the first gear 351 rotates to a state where the locking arc portion 351c abuts on the upper locking portion 324, and stops. 18 to 20, the second gear 352 is rotated by pushing the circumferential end face of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 by pushing the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, so that the adjacent gear tooth is formed. The state in which the adjacent gear teeth 354c abut on the tooth top surface of the contact portion 351b in the state illustrated in FIG. 20 can be reliably formed.

  From the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, since the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, the second gear 352 is restricted from rotating in the direction of moving the rack 332 upward (clockwise in FIG. 20). Be done. Therefore, even if the first gear 351 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 19 with respect to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 does not rotate with it. Therefore, the state in which the tooth top surface of the contact portion 351b faces the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be reliably formed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 20, in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, the curved wall portion 354b1 follows the arc shape of the radius r which the second gear 352 forms the tip surface of the contact portion 351b. Since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are disposed on the outer side of the arc having the radius r (the second gear 352 side), only the first gear 351 is rotated in the same rotational direction (from the state illustrated in FIG. 19). 19 can be rotated counterclockwise).

  At this time, since the tooth thickness of the contact portion 351b is thicker (approximately 2 to 3 gear teeth thick) than the other gear teeth, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is made gentle. can do. That is, for example, even if the first gear 351 stops from the state shown in FIG. 19 to the intermediate phase in the state shown in FIG. 20, the relationship between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact position of the contact portion 351b is the same. The rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted.

  Further, the rotation of the second gear 352 in both directions can be restricted while the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is made gentle. That is, even if the second gear 352 starts to rotate clockwise in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b abuts on the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b, so that the load direction is described in detail. The rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted in the same manner as when the set gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b are in contact with each other. Therefore, since movement of the rack 332 in both the upper and lower directions is restricted in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, generation of rattling of the elevating body 330 can be suppressed. It is difficult for the conventional crank mechanism to perform restriction in the upper and lower directions (in particular, restriction in the upward direction), and is achieved for the first time by the gear shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 as in this embodiment. It is a thing.

  Thus, the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 can prevent the second gear 352 from rotating in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position. It is unnecessary to continuously apply the driving force of the driving motor 341 (see FIG. 14) with a size larger than its own weight in order to maintain the lifting position in the raised position, and energy consumption can be suppressed.

  In addition, although it is possible to maintain the lifting body 330 in the raised position by utilizing the dead point of the crank mechanism, in that case, there is a problem that the crank mechanism is enlarged corresponding to the movement distance of the lifting body 330. there were. In the present embodiment, the crank mechanism is unnecessary, and the rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted by the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, so that the transmission portion can be miniaturized.

  A method of releasing the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352 will be described. In the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, a separate member that interferes with the contact portion 351b in the rotational direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 20) when the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is rotated in the reverse direction is not provided. Therefore, the rotation operation in the direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 20) in which the elevating body 330 of the first gear 351 is moved downward is permitted.

  When the first gear 351 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 20 to the state shown in FIG. 19 and is further rotated in the same direction, the restriction on the rotation direction of the second gear 352 is released (the contact portion 351 b The tip end surface is separated from the adjacent gear teeth 354c), and the elevating body 330 can be lowered. That is, the rotation restriction of the second gear 352 can be released by the rotation operation of the first gear 351, and the first gear 351 can be made another operation to release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352. Since it is unnecessary, the structure of the first gear 351 can be simplified.

  Next, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 33. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 has a drive side slide member 420 having an effect part 422a having a circular liquid crystal portion and moving up and down, and a member moving up following the drive side slide member 420. A driven side slide member 430 having the third symbol display device 81, wherein the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 communicate with the common guide rod 451 and operate in the same direction Be done.

  FIG. 22 is a front exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. As shown in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 22, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 includes a base member 410 configured by a pair of long plate-like members, a drive-side slide member 420 configured to be vertically movable up and down, and drive thereof A driven side slide member 430 disposed above the side slide member 420 and configured to be vertically movable, a drive device 440 that generates a drive force for the drive side slide member 420 to move up and down, and the drive device 440 Transmission device 450 having a pair of guide rods 451 for transmitting the driving force to the drive side slide member 420 and guiding the operation of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430, and the lower end portions of the pair of base members 410 And the lower front plate member 460 connected to the drive-side slide member 420 and the left side of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. And a cover member 470 which is disposed on the front side of the upper, and mainly includes a.

  The base member 410 is a main body member 411 configured as a long long plate-like member, and a U-shaped concave portion disposed at the upper and lower end portions of the main body member 411 at positions mutually corresponding in the vertical direction A guide rod support portion 412 configured, and an engagement member disposed on the inner side (side approaching the other base member 410) than the vertical line drawn from the guide rod support portion 412 and extended on the front side of the main body member 411 A first axially supporting portion 414 convexly formed in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411 on the opposite side of the locking portion 413 with the stop portion 413 and the vertical line drawn from the guide rod support portion 412, and its first A downward regulating member 415 pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 414 and restricting the downward movement of the drive-side slide member 420, and a cylindrical protrusion disposed on the front side of the main body member 411 disposed below the first pivotal support portion 414 A second shaft support 416, the elevation regulating member 417 for regulating the upward movement of the driven sliding member 430 while being axially supported on the second shaft support portion 416 mainly comprises a.

  The guide rod support portion 412 is a portion that supports both ends of the guide rod 451 of the transmission device 450, and is formed with an opening width that can accommodate the guide rod 451. In the present embodiment, when the cover member 470 is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, the opening on the front side of the guide rod support portion 412 is closed and the guide rod 451 is fixed to the guide rod support portion 412.

  The locking portion 413 is a portion vertically and downwardly in contact with the lower side surface of the fall prevention portion 435 of the driven side slide member 430, and the driven side slide member 430 is further moved downward from the contact state. Regulate.

  The lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 rotate as the driving slide member 420 moves up and down to restrict movement of the driven slide member 430. The details will be described later.

  The drive-side slide member 420 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 at both left and right ends, and is moved up and down by the sliding operation of the rack 452.

  The driven slide member 430 does not have an independent drive device, and is slidably supported by the guide rods 451 at both left and right ends, and is driven to move up and down according to the elevating operation of the drive slide member 420. The driven-side slide member 430 has a third symbol display device 81, a main body member 431 which is elongated in the left-right direction, functional portions 432 arranged on both ends in the left-right direction of the main body member 431, and its functional portions A guide hole 433 which is a hole drilled in the vertical direction at 432 and through which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and a hook-like portion 434 which is extended to be inclined upward and outward at the lower end of the functional portion 432; A fall prevention portion 435 is provided mainly on the back side on the inner side of the guide hole 433 at the upper end portion of the functional portion 432 (the side close to the other guide hole 433).

  The hook portion 434 is a portion hooked on the elevation restricting member 417. In the state where the driven side slide member 430 is disposed at the lowered position, the rising restricting member 417 is engaged with and engaged with the engagement surface 434a which is the upper side surface of the hook-like portion 434 (see FIG. 29). The member 430 can be prevented from operating in the upward direction (for example, it can be prevented from rebounding from falling). Further, since the hooked portion 434 is inclined upward and the engaging claw portion 417e of the elevation restricting member 417 is formed in parallel with the inclination, the engagement between the hooked portion 434 and the elevation restricting member 417 causes Wobble can also be suppressed.

  The shape of the end of the hook-like portion 434 (outside of the end of the engaging claw 417e (the portion on the right in FIG. 29 in the state shown in FIG. 29)) is the movement locus of the engaging claw 417e. The shape is also fit downward. Therefore, the rotation restricting member 417 can be rotated even in a state in which the engagement claws 417e and the hooks 434 engage with each other and apply a load to each other.

  The drive device 440 includes a drive motor 441 fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and a drive gear 442 rotated by the drive force of the drive motor.

  The transmission device 450 includes a pair of guide rods 451 fixed to the guide rod support portion 412 of the base member 410 and a drive side slide member 420 supported by the guide rods 451 so as to be slidably movable. A rack 452 meshed with the inner side (the inner side of the pair of drive gears 442) and a longitudinally long plate-like abutting wall 453 extending from the vicinity of the tooth base of the rack 452 to the front side are mainly included.

  The abutment wall 453 has a role of rotating the elevation restricting member 417 to the release side and a role of urging the rack 452 away from the drive gear 442 under the urging force of the elevation restricting member 417, the details will be described later. Do.

  The lower front plate member 460 is bent so that the left and right end portions are fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and the central portion is offset by a predetermined amount on the back side compared to the left and right end portions. The main body member 461 having a shape, a guide hole 462 drilled in the left half of the main body member 461 along the left-right direction (in a manner inclined upward as approaching the outer side), and extending above the main body member 461 And a cylindrical passage portion 463 whose upper end portion is opened on the front side.

  The guide hole 462 is a long hole in which the slide shaft 423 b of the wire housing member 423 is slidably guided.

  The cylindrical passage portion 463 is a cylindrical member through which a ball can pass, and in the state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 31), the second passage formation of the drive side slide member 420 is formed. It is a member through which the ball flowing down through the member 422 passes.

  The detailed configuration of the drive-side slide member 420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. FIG. 23 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, FIG. 24 is an exploded back perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the drive side slide member 420.

  As illustrated in FIG. 23 to FIG. 25, the drive-side slide member 420 is a disc having a main body member 421 configured as a plate-like member elongated in the left-right direction and a rendering portion 422 a configured from circular liquid crystal. A second passage forming member 422 in which a portion is fastened and fixed to the central portion of the main body member 421 from the front side and a groove through which a ball can pass is extended from the disk portion to the left in front view; A wire housing member 423 whose one end is pivotally supported at the lower left end in a front view of the forming member 422 and whose other end is supported by the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460; And a connecting member 424 which functions as a portion which has a passage portion which is axially supported and penetrates along the circumferential direction of the shaft and which serves as a portion for introducing a ball into the groove portion 422b of the second flow path forming member 422.

  The main body member 421 opens on the front side to a guide portion 421a constituting a part of a cylindrical portion into which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted and a portion extending from the central portion to the left in front view Mainly provided with a groove 421b disposed to be inclined downward to the left in a mode, and a discharge opening 421c formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction with a size equal to or larger than the diameter of the ball at the lower left end of the groove 421b. .

  The guide portion 421a is a groove portion opened in the back side and extending in the vertical direction and having a circular arc shape in cross section, and the open portion is closed by the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 (see FIG. 22). A cylindrical portion into which 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted is formed.

  The groove 421 b is a member that forms a ball passage in cooperation with the second passage forming member 422, and the ball flowing down along the groove 421 b is discharged to the back side of the main body member 421 through the discharge opening 421 c. Ru.

  The second passage forming member 422 includes an effect portion 422a formed of a circular liquid crystal, and an axially supporting portion 422b projecting in a cylindrical shape from the disk portion disposed on the back side of the circular liquid crystal to the back side. A sensor member 422c disposed below the pivotal support portion 422b for detecting passage of a ball, and a groove open to the back side with a width allowing the ball passing through the sensor member 422c to flow downward, in the front and back direction with the groove portion 421b A shape capable of accommodating the connection member 424 between the groove portion 422d having the same shape, the guide portion 422e constituting the cylindrical portion into which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and the shaft support portion 422b and the sensor member 422c. And a housing recess 422f that is recessed at the bottom.

  The pivot portion 422 b is a portion on which the connection member 424 is pivotally supported. In a state where the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed at the connection position, after the ball flowing down the left swing unit 500 passes the sensor member 422c via the connection member 424, the ball passes the passage formed by the groove portions 422d and 421b. Do.

  The wire storage member 423 is a member for storing a wire which is extended from the lower front member 460 or the like and connected to the effect portion 422a or the like, and has a length pivotally supported by the lower left end portion of the second passage forming member 422 in front view A main body portion 423a which is a rod-like portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a cylindrical slide shaft 423b which is provided on the back side from the lower end portion of the main body portion 423a.

  The main body portion 423a is a member that accommodates the wiring in an inner portion formed in a U-shaped cross section, and is formed in a curved shape in a manner to be convex in the direction away from the second passage forming member 422 in the longitudinal direction Ru. As a result, the wiring can be loosened along the curved shape near the pivotally supported position with the second passage forming member 422, and the wiring can be prevented from being bent and broken.

  The slide shaft 423 b is a rod-like portion inserted into the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460.

  Next, the configuration of the connection member 424 will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.26 (a) is a front perspective view of the connection member 424, FIG.26 (b) is a front view of the connection member 424 in the arrow XXVIb direction view of Fig.26 (a), and FIG.26 (c) is a front view. FIG. 27 is a rear view of the connection member 424 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIc in FIG. 26 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the connecting member 424 is formed in a cylindrical shape and extends in the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 424a which is axially supported by the shaft support portion 422b, and the cylindrical portion 424a. A plate-shaped upper side wall portion 424b to be provided, and a curved plate-shaped lower side wall portion 424c disposed opposite to the upper side wall portion 424b with a length equal to or greater than the diameter of the ball below the upper side wall portion 424b in a front view And a connection cover 424d which connects the rear side ends of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c and is covered between the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c, and is wound around the cylindrical portion 424a A torsion spring 424e is mainly provided to apply a downward force (counterclockwise in FIG. 25) to the member 424.

  The upper side wall portion 424b is formed in such a manner that the width increases from the radial end of the cylindrical portion 424a toward the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a, and the side surface is formed along a straight line in FIG. It is a plate-like part.

  The lower side wall portion 424c is a plate-like portion curved along an arc centered on the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a, and a space having a length allowing passage of a sphere is made between the lower side wall portion 424c and the upper side wall portion 424b. It is arranged.

  The connection cover 424d is a plate member that prevents the ball passing through the connection member 424 from spilling to the back side. The open portion of the connection member 424 configured on the opposite side (front side) of the connection cover 424d is closed by the bottom of the accommodation recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422 being in contact with the front side. Thereby, the ball can be prevented from spilling from the open portion of the connection member 424.

  The operation of the connecting member 424 with respect to the second passage forming member 422 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. 27 and 28 are rear views of the second passage forming member 422 and the connecting member 424. FIG. Note that FIG. 27 illustrates a downward inclined state in which the open portion formed by the upper side wall 424 b and the lower side wall 424 c of the connection member 424 faces in the left-right direction, and in FIG. The open portion configured by the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c of the member 424 is illustrated in an upward inclined state in which the obliquely upward direction is shown, FIG. 27 corresponds to the separated state described later (see FIG. 41), This corresponds to the communication state (see FIG. 42) described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the connection member 424 is rotatable about the pivot portion 422 b in a state of being accommodated in the accommodation recess 422 f of the second passage formation member 422, and the connection member 424 is of the second passage formation member 422. The front end faces of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c are in contact with the bottom of the housing recess 422f.

  The housing concave portion 422f is formed in an arc shape centered on the pivot portion 422b along the outer diameter of the lower side wall portion 424c at a portion opposed to the lower side wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 in the state illustrated in FIG. Curved wall 422f1 and the surface facing the curved wall 422f1 are smoothly connected with the upper side wall 424b of the connecting member 424 in a dented upward inclined state (see FIG. 42) in a direction away from the curved wall 422f1. And an opposing wall 422 f 2 having a curved surface.

  The curved wall portion 422f1 is in radial contact with the lower side wall portion 424c in the downward inclined state of the connection member 424, so that the positional deviation of the connection member 424 in the axial radial direction can be suppressed.

  Therefore, even if the fitting between the pivotally supporting portion 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened (a large gap, for example, a state having a gap between 0.5 mm and 1 mm in size), the connecting member When the lower side 424 is inclined downward, the posture of the connecting member 424 can be maintained with high accuracy by the contact between the lower side wall 424 c and the curved wall 422 f 1.

  On the other hand, in the case where the fitting between the bearing portion 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened, the operating resistance generated in the bearing portion is reduced, so connection is not made unless loads from other members occur. The member 424 can be reliably maintained in the downward inclined state by the action of gravity and the biasing force of the torsion spring 424e. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the connection member 424 from being maintained in the upward inclined state even when no load is generated from other members.

  The opposing wall 422 f 2 is a portion for guiding a ball from the connection member 424 to the sensor member 422 c. In the present embodiment, the sphere can be smoothly guided to the sensor member 422c by curving the surface disposed facing the curved wall portion 422f1.

  The upper inclined state is formed in a communication state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left rocking unit 500 and the connection member 424 are in communication. In this state, since the lower side wall portion 424c is separated from the opening of the sensor member 422c, the ball rolling and passing through the lower side wall portion 424c of the connecting member 424 rolls on the curved wall portion 422f1, and the ball of the sensor member 422c It passes through the opening and flows down the groove 422d.

  On the other hand, the downward inclined state is formed in the separated state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the connection member 424 are separated. In this state, the lower side wall portion 424c extends to the inside of the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the lower end portion of the lower side wall portion 422c and the wall surface of the accommodation recess 422f disposed opposite to the lower end portion (sensor member 422c By setting the dimension between and the wall surface extending vertically upward to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere, the sphere is prevented from passing through the connection member 424 (the sphere is ejected from the lower end).

  Therefore, as described later, even if the ball reaches the connecting member 424 in the separated state, the flow of the ball can be stagnated by the connecting member 424.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 33, the raising and lowering operations of the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 will be described. First, the positional relationship between the drive-side slide member 420, the driven-side slide member 430, and the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG.

  FIG. 29 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXX in FIG. In FIGS. 29 and 30, a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 are disposed at the lowered position is illustrated, and the illustration of the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. Transmission member 450 is made visible. Further, in FIG. 29, the downward regulating member 415 and the upward regulating member 417 on the right side in a front view are partially enlarged, and the rack immediately before the abutting wall 453 and the release projection 417c of the upward regulating member 417 abut. The outline of 452 is illustrated in phantom.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the driven-side slide member 430, in the lowered position, the fall prevention portion 435 abuts on the locking portion 413 of the base member 410 from the lower side, and the hooked portion 434 rises. The restricting member 417 is abutted from the upper side. As described above, since the driven slide member 430 is configured to be restricted in movement from both the upper and lower directions, rattling of the driven slide member 430 in the vertical direction at the lowered position can be suppressed.

  Further, since the elevation restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 are disposed on both sides of the guide rod 451 inserted into the guide hole 433 and they can be brought into contact with the functional portion 432 of the driven slide member 430 It is possible to suppress rattling of the portion 432 in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide rod 451 (horizontal direction in FIG. 29). Therefore, even if the driven slide member 430 is disturbed, such as when it is placed at the lowered position or when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player, the driven slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the rendering effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the positions of the elevation restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 in the vertical direction are shifted, the functional portion 432 rattles in an oblique direction (for example, a direction connecting the locking portion 413 and the elevation restricting member 417). Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the driven slide member 430 is disturbed, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player at the moment of being placed at the lowered position, the driven slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the rendering effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  Since the locking portion 413 is displaced upward as compared with the elevation restricting member 417, the locking portion 413 is disposed at a position far from the drive-side slide member 420, and the locking portion 413 is on the drive-side slide. It is possible to make it difficult to hinder the lifting and lowering operation of the member 420. Therefore, the design freedom of the drive-side slide member 420 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the descent restricting member 415 is disposed in front of the elevation restricting member 417, and the height at which the abutment wall 453 of the transmission device 450 is formed (the overhang length of the rack 452 from near the tooth base) Since the height of the lower limit member 415 reaches the height before reaching the lower limit member 415, the lower limit member 415 and the abutment wall 453 do not abut each other in the rotational direction of the lower limit member 415. In addition, since the hooked portion 434 is disposed at the same position as the rising restricting member 417 in the front-rear direction, the hooked portion 434 and the falling restricting member 415 do not contact in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, the rack 452 includes a protruding plate 453a protruding from the upper end of the contact wall 453 to the front side, and the protruding plate 453a can be brought into contact with the descent regulating member 415 in the rotational direction.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. In FIG. 31, the drive-side slide member 420 is moved upward from the lowered position to be disposed at the connection position, and the illustration of the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 31, the descent restricting member 415 and the elevating restricting member 417 on the right side in a front view are partially enlarged.

  In the state where the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the connection position, a ball can be introduced to the connection member 424 via the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 42).

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the elevation restricting member 417 is a member that covers the brim-like portion 434 from the upper side in a state before the upper end of the abutment wall 453 is abutted against the elevation restricting member 417. Rotational operation is enabled between the engaged state shown in FIG. 29 and the released state shown in FIG. The release state is not limited to the state shown in FIG. 31 but means a state in which the elevation restricting member 417 is rotated from the vertical upper side of the hook-like portion 434 to an attitude in which the elevation restricting member 417 is retracted.

  The elevation restricting member 417 includes a cylindrical portion 417a pivotally supported by the second support portion 416, an extending plate 417b linearly extended in a tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 417a, and one of the extending plates 417b. A release projection 417c vertically projecting from an end (lower end), an engagement projection 417d vertically projecting from the other end of the extension plate 417b, and the engagement projection An engagement portion extending in parallel with the extending direction of the hook-like portion 434 in an engaged state at a convex end of 417 d and disposed above the tip end of the hook-like portion 434 (upper left in FIG. 29) Joint claw portion 417e, a separation slope portion 417f which is inclined downward on the upper side surface of the convex end portion of the engagement convex portion 417d, and one end portion is wound around the cylindrical portion 417a on the main body member 411 of the base member 410 How to roll up elevation control member 417 by being locked Mainly it includes a spring 417g torsion biasing (Figure 29 enlarged view counterclockwise direction), the.

  The extending plate 417b extends upward from the axis of the cylindrical portion 417a. Thus, when the release projection 417c is pushed up, the other end of the extension plate 417b can be moved in the direction away from the driven slide member 430, and the release operation can be performed.

  The engagement claw portion 417 e engages with the hook-like portion 434 even when the driven slide member 430 moves upward in the engaged state (the engagement claw portion between the hook-like portion 434 and the functional portion 432 The movement of the driven slide member 430 is strongly suppressed by the entry of 417 e).

  The release operation of the elevation restricting member 417 will be described. First, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the upper end of the abutting wall 453 abuts on the release convex portion 417c, while the rise restricting member 417 is maintained in the engaged state. From this state, when the rack 452 is moved up to the state shown in FIG. 31, the end of the abutment wall 453 pushes up the release convex portion 413c to raise the up-regulation member 417 outward (clockwise in FIG. 31). , And the engagement projection 417d is retracted from above the hooked portion 434 (released state).

  That is, the release operation of the elevation restricting member 417 can be performed only by the elevation operation of the rack 452. Therefore, for example, the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) is also used as a drive device for performing the release operation of the elevation restricting member 417 as compared with the case where the solenoid member for performing the release operation of the elevation restriction member 417 is separately provided. The number of drive devices can be reduced (product cost can be reduced). Moreover, it can suppress that the raise control member 417 is operated carelessly.

  In other words, according to the present embodiment, since the elevation restricting member 417 is operated according to the arrangement of the rack 452, compared with the case where the elevation restricting member 417 is operated by another drive source (such as a solenoid), The operation timings of the rack 452 and the elevation restricting member 417 do not match, and it is possible to suppress an operation failure, and when the driven slide member 430 ascends, the elevation restricting member 417 reliably shifts to the release state It can be done. For example, it is possible to suppress that the rack 452 is moved upward while the elevation restricting member 417 is in the engaged state, and an excessive load is applied to the hooked portion 434 and the engagement convex portion 417d of the elevation restricting member 417.

  Further, the rack 452 is moved upward, and the rising restricting member 417 is shifted to the release state immediately before the upper end of the rack 452 and the lower end of the driven slide member 430 are abutted. In the state where the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 are separated from each other, the driven side slide member 430 is configured as shown in FIG. When the member 430 and the drive-side slide member 420 are in contact with each other, the release state (see FIG. 31) can be configured, and the drive force required to raise the driven-side slide member 430 can be suppressed.

  Here, when the drive-side slide member 420 pushes up the driven-side slide member 430 during the upward movement of the drive-side slide member 420 as in the present embodiment, the driven-side slide member 430 and the engaging portion are released. Can also be performed by pushing up the driven slide member 430, but in this case, it is necessary to set the engagement state to a degree that can be released by the pushing up force of the driven slide member 430, making firm engagement difficult. It becomes. Further, in this case, there is a problem that the reaction caused by the reaction between the driven slide member 430 and the engagement portion is vibrated and the posture becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the engagement is released by rotating the elevation restricting member 417 and retracting the elevation restricting member 417 from above the collar portion 434 of the driven slide member 430. The force that can be applied to the driven slide member 430 can be different from the force that causes the elevation restricting member 417 to rotate. Therefore, it is possible to increase the force for suppressing the upward movement of the driven slide member 430 in the engaged state while suppressing the force required for the release.

  In addition, since the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 do not abut each other when performing the release operation of the elevation restricting member 417, the reaction on the driven-side slide member 430 is less likely to occur. Can stabilize the posture of

  In the connection state shown in FIG. 31, the discharge opening 421 c of the drive side slide member 420 and the cylindrical passage portion 463 of the lower front plate member 460 are communicated. Thereby, it becomes possible to discharge the ball which has flowed down the second passage forming member 422 into the cylindrical passage portion 463.

  32 and 33 are front views of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. FIG. In FIG. 32, the drive-side slide member 420 is moved upward from the state illustrated in FIG. 31, and the convex plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is in contact with the descent regulating member 415. The drive side slide member 420 is moved upward from the state shown in FIG. 32, and the state in which the convex plate 453a is disposed at the raised position where it rides on the upper side of the descent restriction member 415 is shown. Further, in FIG. 33, the vicinity of the descent regulating member 415 is partially enlarged.

  In the state illustrated in FIG. 32, the release convex portion 417 c of the elevation regulating member 417 is in contact with the abutment wall 453 of the transmission device 450. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission devices 450 are disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction, and the direction in which the release convex portion 417c abuts on the abutting wall 453 is also symmetrical in the left-right direction. Therefore, the release projection 417c functions as a guide for guiding the drive-side slide member 420, and it is possible to suppress the rattling of the drive-side slide member 420 in the lateral direction during the raising and lowering operation.

  The rise restricting member 417 is urged in the leftward and rightward direction of the liquid crystal lift unit 400 by the torsion spring 417g, so the load of the liquid crystal lift unit 400 in the leftward and rightward directions from the release projection 417c to the abutting wall 453 is It is put on. As a result, the drive-side slide member 420 is biased in a constant direction along the left-right direction, so that the attitude of the drive-side slide member 420 in the elevating operation can be stabilized.

  Furthermore, when the drive-side slide member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction, the elastic force applied from the release projection 417c to the abutment wall 453 returns the drive-side slide member 420 to the central position. The elevation restricting member 417 is left-right asymmetric.

  That is, on the side where the abutting wall 453 moves in the direction approaching the release convex portion 417c, the rising regulating member 417 is further rotated to the releasing side, the deformation amount of the torsion spring 417g is increased, and the biasing force is increased. While the force pushing back the contact wall 453 is increased, the rising restricting member 417 is rotated in the direction opposite to the releasing side on the side where the abutting wall 453 moves in the direction away from the releasing convex portion 417c, so that the torsion spring 417g The amount of deformation is reduced, the biasing force is reduced, and the force for pushing the abutment wall 453 is reduced. Thereby, when the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down, rattling in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

  Since the drive gear 442 and the elevation restricting member 417 are disposed on the same side with respect to the rack 452, the biasing force of the torsion spring 417g acts in the direction of moving the rack 452 away from the drive gear 442, so the drive side slide member 420 The rack 452 and the drive gear 442 come close to each other in the lateral direction, and the drive resistance can be suppressed from rising (the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be stabilized).

  That is, when the drive side slide member 420 rattles in the left and right direction and the rack 452 moves in the direction toward the drive gear 442, the elevation restricting member 417 is externally wound (the engagement convex portion 417 d is the left and right outside of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 Rotation in the direction of rotation) increases the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g and increases the biasing force, thereby increasing the biasing force for pushing back the drive-side slide member 420 while driving the rack 452 When moving away from the gear 442, the guide rod 451 supports the rack 452 so that the rack 452 separates from the drive gear 442 more than the gap provided in the support structure between the guide rod 451 and the rack 452. Are regulated. As a result, the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 becomes narrow, so that excessive meshing resistance can be suppressed, and the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 becomes wide, and tooth misalignment occurs. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, when the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 are disposed at the raised position, the lower surface of the convex plate 453 a of the transmission device 450 is the release convex portion 415 c of the descent regulating member 415. Contact with the upper side (locked).

  The protruding plate 453a includes an inclined side surface 453a1 in a mode in which the lower side is inclined upward and outward as it goes to the left and right.

  The downward inclined member 415 has a cylindrical portion 415a pivotally supported by the first shaft support portion 414, an extending plate 415b linearly extended in a tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 415a, and one of the extending plates 415b. A release convex portion 415c which is vertically protruded from an end (upper end) and whose tip is formed in a semicircular shape, and one end is engaged with the main body member 411 of the base member 410 by being wound around the cylindrical portion 415a. A torsion spring 415d is mainly provided which biases the lowering regulating member 415 in the inward winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 33) by being stopped.

  As illustrated in FIG. 33, the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 is locked by the lowering control member 415. Therefore, the supply of the driving force of the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) can be stopped while the rack 452 is held at the raised position, and the power consumption of the drive motor 441 can be reduced.

  Further, the rotating operation of the lowering regulating member 415 to the locked state illustrated in FIG. 33 is performed by the rack 452 being lifted and the convex plate 453a crossing over the release convex portion 415c of the lowering regulating member 415. Therefore, the driving force for moving the rack 452 upward and the driving force for forming the locking state of the lowering control member 415 can both be generated by the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 2). That is, the drive motor 441 can be shared, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Referring back to FIG. 30, the positional relationship in the front-rear direction of the lowering control member 415, the rising control member 417, and the contact wall 453 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the descent restricting member 415 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 30) compared to the elevating restricting member 417, and the abutting wall 453 can abut on the elevating restricting member 417 in the vertical direction of FIG. The rear side surface of the lowering restricting member 415 can be brought into surface contact with the front side surface of the abutment wall 453.

  Referring back to FIG. The lowering regulating member 415 and the abutting wall 453 abut in the front-rear direction. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 33, the abutting wall 453 and the elevation restricting member 417 abut in the left and right direction (FIG. 33 left and right direction), and the abutting wall 453 and the lowering restricting member 415 extend in the front and rear direction (FIG. Vertically). As a result, it is possible to suppress rattling of the drive-side slide member 420 in the left-right direction by the elevation restricting member 417, and at the same time in the front-rear direction (a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442) It is possible to suppress the clinging.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress the reduction in the area of the toothed surface by relative movement of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 in the direction parallel to the tooth surface, and to make the rack 452 fall forward in the state of being placed in the raised position. Can be prevented.

  From the state shown in FIG. 33, when the rack 452 is lowered by rotating the drive gear 442 in the direction to lower the rack 452, the convex plate 453a applies a load to the release convex portion 415c, whereby the descent restriction member 415 is rotated outward (clockwise in the enlarged view of FIG. 33). As a result, the locking by the lowering regulating member 415 is released, and the driving slide member 420 can be lowered. That is, since the locking by the lowering regulating member 415 can be released by the driving force of the drive motor 441 (it can be used as the driving source), the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the locking of the lowering restricting member 415 is released by the lowering operation of the drive side slide member 420, the operation timing is shifted and the lowering is restricted, as in the case of rotating the lowering restricting member 415 by another driving source. The drive-side slide member 420 is lowered before the restriction of the member 415 is released, and an overload can be prevented from occurring in the drive source and the lowering control member 415.

  As in the present embodiment, in the structure in which both the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 are maintained at the raised position at the raised position, the locking at the raised position of each member is performed on the driven-side slide member 430. In this case, the structure for connecting and disconnecting the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 is complicated and the cost is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the driven slide member 420 is maintained at the raised position by locking the driven slide member 420, the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 are maintained at the raised position. In order to reduce the required configuration (only the drive unit 450 and the drive side slide member 420 can be used). Further, by making the interlocking between the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 exclusively by the action of gravity, the structure between the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 can be simplified. it can.

  When the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the driven slide member 430 is lowered on the rack 452, but for example, the guide rod 451 becomes dirty and the guide rod 451 and the guide hole 433 (see FIG. And the lowering speed of the driven slide member 430 may be smaller than the lowering speed of the rack 452. Even in this case, when the follower-side slide member 430 abuts on the elevation restricting member 417, the hook shaped portion 434 can act on the separation inclined portion 417f of the elevation restricting member 417 to rotate the elevation restricting member 417. As a result of the own weight of the driven slide member 430, the elevation restricting member 417 and the hook-like portion 434 can be engaged.

  Next, the left swinging unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42. FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the left swinging unit 500. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 34, the left swinging unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the first variable winning device 82a of the gaming board 13 and the first specified winning opening 82, and the ball for winning the first specified winning opening 82 is A flow passage is provided on the inside. In the present embodiment, a sensor member 82b is disposed between the first variable winning device 82a and the first specified winning opening 82 for detecting passage of a ball. The sensor member 82 b is a part of the various switches 208 (see FIG. 4).

  FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the left swinging unit 500. FIG. As shown in FIG. 35, the left swinging unit 500 is configured to hang the first passage forming member 520 downward to the right in front view, and is a unit that effects by swinging the first passage forming member 520. is there.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swinging unit 500, and FIG. 37 is an exploded back perspective view of the left swinging unit 500. As illustrated in FIGS. 36 and 37, the left swinging unit 500 includes a base member 510 forming a frame, a first passage forming member 520 pivotally supported by the base member 510, and a swinging operation, and the base A driving device 530 which is fastened and fixed to the member 510 and generates a driving force of the first passage forming member 520, a transmission device 540 which transmits the driving force of the driving device 530 to the first passage forming member 520, and covers on the front side And a cover member 550 having an introduction cylindrical portion 552 which is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and connected to the first specified winning opening 82 of the game board 13.

  The base member 510 includes a main body member 511 formed of a plate-like body in front view L-shape, a shaft support hole 512 drilled in a circular shape in the front-rear direction in the front view right end portion of the main body member, The first wall portion 513 disposed vertically above the hole 512 and configured in a flat plate shape to turn the surface in the front and rear direction, and one or more balls from the lower left end portion of the first wall portion 513 And a second wall portion 514 which is arranged in a curved plate shape and which faces the surface in the left and right direction, and a ball which is disposed on the back side of the second wall portion 514 and reaches the second wall portion 514 Down flow passage 515 to be flowed down, shaft support portion 516 disposed on the left lower side of shaft support hole 512 in a front view and protruding cylindrically on the front side, and lock disposed around the axis of shaft support portion 516 A wall 517, and a detection sensor 518 disposed above the pivot 516 to detect the phase of the transmission device; To prepare for.

  The shaft support hole 512 is a hole through which the shaft support portion 521 c of the first passage forming member 520 is inserted, and the first passage forming member 520 is pivoted about the shaft support hole 512.

  The first wall portion 513 includes a pair of guide wall portions 513a extending from the left and right direction end portions to the front side.

  The locking wall portion 517 includes an arc wall portion 517a configured in an arc shape centering on the shaft support portion 516 above the shaft support portion 516, and an inclined wall portion 517b extended downward in the front view. .

  The arc wall portion 517 a is an end surface of the detection sensor 518 and extends to a circumferential end surface of the shaft support 516.

  The first passage forming member 520 is a long rod-like distribution base member 521, which is a member supported by the shaft support hole 512, and the distribution base member 521 disposed on the front side of the distribution base member 521. And a passage cover member 522 which is fastened and fixed and forms a passage through which a ball can flow down with the distribution base member 521.

  The distribution base member 521 is a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 521a that constitutes one side of the flow-down passage of the ball, and one ball along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 521a from the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a. An intermediate plate portion 521b disposed at a position separated by a gap V1 for a minute, and a shaft support portion 521c which is formed in a cylindrical shape on the back side near the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a and is inserted into the shaft support hole 512 And an elongated hole 521d bored in a plate-like portion extending in the radial direction of the axial support portion 521c along the extending direction, and an end on the side of the hanging plate portion 521a of the intermediate plate portion 521b Distribution convex part 521e configured in a manner that the width is shortened toward the radially outer side of the shaft support part 521c, and the clearance V1 along the left side surface of the distribution convex part 521e in a rear view The upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a is extended to the front side Mainly and a curved wall portion 521f which is curved along the arc shape having a center.

  The hanging plate portion 521a has a shape in which the lower part from the middle part is bent downward as compared to the upper part from the middle part, and the ball feeding part is thinned by scraping the front thick part at the lower end part 521 a1 is provided.

  The gap V1 is a space that allows the ball that has reached the right side in a front view of the distribution projection 521e to pass in the front direction.

  The passage cover member 522 is a plate-like plate-like portion 522a provided on the front side of the distribution base member 521, and extends in the form of a plate toward the back side from both lateral ends of the plate-like portion 522a. And an upper and lower wall portion 522b.

  The plate-like portion 522a is formed of a light transmitting resin material, and the ball receiving portion 522a1 bent at the back side at a portion of the lower end portion of the distribution base member 521 disposed on the front side of the ball feeding portion 521a1. Prepare.

  The upper and lower wall portions 522b roll the ball that has passed through the gap V1, and the inclination angle changes at the middle portion as in the case of the hanging plate portion 521a. it can.

  In the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b, a step is provided inside the tip portion. The step has the function of displacing the rolling balls in the opposing direction of the upper and lower wall portions 522b (the direction from one wall portion to the other wall portion) to decelerate the balls.

  Further, the ball that has reached the lower end portion of the first passage forming member 520 is directed at the rear surface side by the ball feeding portion 521a1 and the ball receiving portion 522a1. Thereby, the speed of the ball before discharge can be decelerated, and the discharge of the ball can be stabilized.

  The drive device 530 includes a drive motor 531 and a drive gear 532 rotatably supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 531. The drive gear 532 is meshed with the main gear portion 541 of the transmission device 540.

  The transmission device 540 includes a main gear portion 541 supported by the support portion 516 and meshed with the drive gear 532 and a first passage forming member projecting in a cylindrical shape on the front side from an eccentric position of the main gear portion 541. The eccentric convex portion 542 which is inserted into the long hole 521 d of 520, is extended in the radial direction from the main body gear portion 541 and configured to be able to abut against the locking wall portion 517 and to be able to pass through the gap of the detection sensor 518 Mainly includes an extension portion 543.

  The cover member 550 is connected to the first specified winning opening 82 at the plate-like main body member 551 disposed on the base member 510 and the right end of the main body 551 in a front view, and the rear side end is the first A cylindrical introduction cylindrical portion 552 in contact with the wall portion 513; and a pair of guide wall portions 553 extending downward from the left and right ends of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 on the back side surface of the main body member 551; Prepare mainly.

  The guide wall 553 is a portion overlapping the guide wall 513 a of the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The ball having passed through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 flows downward between the guide wall portions 513a and 553.

  The rocking operation of the first passage forming member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40 are front views of the rocking operation unit 500. FIG. In FIGS. 38 to 40, the cover member 550 is not shown, and the outer shape of the first passage forming member 520 seen in cross section at the middle position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a is shown. The outer shape is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  Further, in FIG. 38, the state in which the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position is the case where the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state illustrated in FIG. In FIG. 39 (b), the first passage forming member 520 swings by a predetermined amount from the state illustrated in FIG. 39 (a) in the state where the minute convex portion 521e is disposed at the middle position of the pair of guide wall portions 513a. The state immediately before coming into contact with the connecting member 424 is illustrated in FIG. 40 in which the first passage forming member 520 is rocked by a predetermined amount from the state illustrated in FIG. Ru.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 is caused by the transmission device 540 being rotated and the position of the elongated hole 521d being moved with the movement of the eccentric convex portion 542.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the release position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support 516 and the eccentric protrusion 542 intersects perpendicularly with the direction X2 coincident with the extending direction of the long hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support 521c). Do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 is directed to the shaft support portion 516 by the rotation operation of the first passage forming member 520, the generation of the load for rotating the transmission device 540 can be suppressed. Thus, the attitude of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  Further, in the release position, the extension portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is disposed in the gap of the detection sensor 518 and abuts on the end of the arc wall portion 517a. That is, the extension portion 543 has both a role as a part used for detecting the phase of the transmission device 540 and a role as a detent member.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the release position, the distribution projection 521e is disposed to face the guide wall 513a on the right side of the base member 510 in a front view. Therefore, the balls which reach the first wall 513 and pass between the guide walls 513a and 553 are distributed to the path on the left side in a front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and discharged out of the game area through the flow-down passage 515. Be done.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, at the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position, the distribution projection 521e is disposed at an intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510. Therefore, the ball reaching the first wall 513 and passing between the guide walls 513a and 553 is stopped flowing down by the distribution projection 521e (it stays on the tip of the distribution projection 521e and remains) ).

  As shown in FIG. 39B, in the state immediately before the first passage forming member 520 abuts on the connection member 424, the distribution projection 521e is disposed between the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510. Therefore, the ball reaching the first wall 513 and passing between the guide walls 513a and 553 is stopped flowing down by the distribution convex part 521e (while riding on the tip of the distribution convex part 521e, stay). As a result, in the state of FIG. 39 (b), the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520 and is sent to the connection member 424 so that the ball is prevented from reaching the opposing wall 422 f 2.

  Here, since the opposite wall 422 f 2 is smoothly connected to the upper side wall 424 b of the connection member 424 in the upper inclined state (see FIG. 42), the upper end portion is connected to the connection member 424 in the lower inclined state (see FIG. 41). It protrudes from the lower end of the upper side wall 424 b to the left in a front view. Therefore, when the ball is thrown to the connection member 424 in the downward inclined state and the ball collides with the upper end portion of the opposing wall 422f2, the opposing wall 422f2 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39B, the introduction of the ball into the first passage forming member 520 is prevented, so that the ball can be prevented from colliding with the opposing wall portion 422f2. Damage to the facing wall portion 422f2 can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 40, at the connection position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support 516 and the eccentric protrusion 542 and the direction X2 coincident with the extending direction of the long hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support 521c) intersect perpendicularly Do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 is directed to the shaft support portion 516 by the rotation operation of the first passage forming member 520, the generation of the load for rotating the transmission device 540 can be suppressed. Thus, the attitude of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  In the connection position, the extending portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is in contact with the inclined wall 517 b. Thereby, the extension portion 543 is abutted against the inclined wall portion 517b, and while the phase for stopping the transmission device 540 is stabilized, the extension portion is compared with the case where the load is locally applied to the extension portion 543. The durability of 543 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the connected state, the distribution projection 521e is disposed to face the guide wall 513a on the left side of the base member 510 in a front view. Therefore, the ball reaching the first wall 513 and passing between the guide walls 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the right in the front view by the distribution projection 521e, and moves to the front through the gap V1. And then roll along the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522 b (see FIG. 37) of the passage cover member 522.

  The flow of balls in the connected state will be described. First, the ball winning from the game area through the first variable winning device 82a to the first specified winning opening 82 moves back and forth toward the back side through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 (see FIG. 36), and the first wall portion When coming into contact with 513, it moves down the passage formed by the guide wall portions 513a and 553, moves forward and backward toward the front side through the gap V1 of the first passage forming member 520, the upper and lower wall portions of the passage cover member 522 Roll on the lower wall of 522b.

  That is, before the ball flows down the inside of the first passage forming member 520, the ball is sent in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even if balls are supplied to the first specified winning opening 82 in a beaded connection, the balls can be smoothly flowed into the first passage forming member 520 by suppressing the bounce of the balls and the like. In addition, it is possible to change the direction of the speed of the ball by flowing down the ball sent in the front-rear direction along the curved wall portion 521f (see FIG. 37), and the ball smoothly flows into the first passage forming member 520 It can be done.

  In the first passage forming member 520, the direction in which the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend is changed at the intermediate portion. That is, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 are extended along the straight line Y1 from the middle portion to the base end side (axial support portion 521c side), and from the middle portion to the tip end side (opposite to the base end side) Up to the straight line Y2 which is inclined downward from the straight line Y1.

  Therefore, the speed of the balls rolling on the inside of the first passage forming member 520 is slower in the time from the proximal end to the middle to reach the middle than in the time from the middle to the tip Become. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the ball immediately after the ball is introduced into the first passage forming member 520.

  Also, as compared with the case where the first passage forming member 520 is configured in a straight shape along the straight line Y1, in the connection position (see FIG. 42), the direction in which the ball is fed from the first passage forming member 520 The angle with the direction (vertical direction) in which the sphere is introduced to the sensor member 422c can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to stabilize the ball feeding from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 38 to 40, the rotation of the transmission device 540 causes the first passage forming member 520 to rock, and the arrangement of the distribution convex portion 521e switches the path in which the ball flows down.

  Here, when the wall member arranged to face the distribution convex portion 521e in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed, the distribution convex portion 521e approaches the diameter of the sphere or less with respect to the wall member When the configuration is adopted, when the ball stagnates in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the ball is caught between the distribution convex portion 521e and the wall member, which may cause malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position shown in FIG. 40, a space larger than the diameter of the sphere is provided between the distribution projection 521e and the second wall 514, and the distribution projection A wall member is not disposed on the opposite side of the second wall portion 514 across the 521 e and is opened. Therefore, the situation where the ball is caught in the rotational direction of the distribution convex portion 521e does not occur, and malfunction can be prevented.

  The connection of the flow path between the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swinging unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. 41 and 42 are partial front views of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swinging unit 500. FIG. In FIGS. 41 and 42, the second passage forming member 422 is viewed in cross section and the connecting member 424 is visible, and the first passage forming member 520 has an outer shape at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a. The distribution convex portion 521 e is visible.

  Further, FIGS. 41 and 42 illustrate a state in which liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 31), and in FIG. 41, left swing unit 500 is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 38). The left swing unit 500 is shown in FIG. 42 in the connected position (see FIG. 40).

  When the first passage forming member 520 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 41 to the state shown in FIG. 42, the tip end portion abuts on the lower side surface of the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424, Swing it. That is, since the connecting member 424 is moved along with the moving direction of the first passage forming member 520, for example, even when the stop position of the drive-side slide member 420 is slightly deviated from the ideal position, the first The formation of a gap between the tip of the passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424 can be suppressed. Thereby, the balls are prevented from falling between the tip of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424, and the ball feeding from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422 is stabilized. Can.

  By swinging the connecting member 424, the lower side wall portion 424c, on which the ball descended from the first passage forming member 520 rolls, is moved in a direction approaching the tip of the first passage forming member 520. The gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 can be narrowed, and the balls are prevented from falling from the gap between the rolling surfaces of the first channel forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 Because it is possible, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42, the lower side wall portion 424c is inclined downward toward the sensor member 422c communicated with the groove portion 422d (see FIG. 27). Thereby, the ball can be rolled along its descending inclination, and the ball feeding to the second passage forming member 422 can be stabilized.

  The swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 is performed by detecting passage of a ball of the sensor member 82b (see FIG. 34) or the sensor member 422c. For example, in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the connection position shown in FIG. 42, the number of detected spheres of the sensor member 82b and the sensor member 422c match (the ball remains in the first passage forming member 520). (Not shown) by causing the first passage forming member 520 to start swinging toward the release position (see FIG. 41) at the timing, thereby preventing the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 out of the game area can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the distribution of the balls by the movement of the distribution convex portion 521e and the swinging of the first passage forming member 520 cause the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 to contact with each other. The driving force necessary for the movement to form the flow-down path of the ball in contact is shared (the driving force of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) for operating the first passage forming member 520 (see FIG. 36)) Since the states are synchronized, it is possible to avoid, for example, a situation in which the ball is introduced to the first passage forming member 520 in the state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from being discharged out of the game area from the tip of the first passage forming member 520.

  In addition, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed at the upper end portion of the distribution base member 521, and is a wall portion (forming the upper end) that divides the passage of the ball flowing down the front side of the hanging plate portion 521a (see FIG. 36). Double as As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced as compared with the case of distributing with other parts, and the balls distributed to the first path forming member 520 side can be reliably suspended by the hanging plate portion 521a and the path cover member It can be introduced into the passage between 522.

  Next, the rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 77. FIG. 43 is a front view of the rotation unit 600, and FIG. 44 is a front perspective view of the rotation unit 600. FIG. 45 is a front view of the rotation unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed, and FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the rotation unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotation unit 600, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 48, the rotation unit 600 includes a case member 610 formed in the shape of a container whose one side is open, a guide member 620 provided on one side of the case member 610, and the cases. A drive mechanism 630 disposed between the facing of the member 610 and the guide member 620, a rotary member 640 rotationally driven by the drive force of the drive mechanism 630, and a throwing ball disposed on the inner circumferential side of the rotary member 640 A device 650 and a guide member 680 disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotation member 640 are mainly provided.

  The case member 610 includes a bottom wall portion 611 substantially circular in a front view, and a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 612 erected from the bottom wall portion 611 toward the front, and these wall portions 611 and 612 make one surface It is formed in the shape of an open container. The guide member 620 is formed in the shape of a circular disk in a front view, and is disposed (secured) at the standing front end of the outer wall portion 612 of the case member 610. Thus, an inner space is formed between the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610 and the guide member 620, and the drive mechanism 630 is disposed in the inner space.

  The guide member 620 is a member for holding the rotation member 640 in a displaceable manner, and the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are recessed in the front thereof. The connection link action groove 621 and the rising and falling link action groove 622 are U-shaped concave grooves that extend along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the connection link member 644 and the rise and fall link described later of the rotating member 640 The insertion portions 644a and 648a of the member 648 are respectively inserted.

  The groove widths of the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are set to dimensions equal to or slightly larger than the diameters of the insertion link portions 644 a and 648 a of the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connection link member 644 and the rising and lowering link member 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connection link action groove 621 and the raising and lowering link action groove 622.

  When the rotation member 640 is driven to rotate, the connection link action groove 621 acts on the connection link member 644 to increase or decrease the distance between the divided members DV (see FIG. 73), while the rising link action groove 622 It acts on the undulating link member 648 to cause the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 to be undulated (see FIGS. 59 and 60). Here, with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 will be described.

  FIG. 49 is a front view of the rotation unit 600 with the rotation member 640, a part of the throwing device 650 and the guide member 680 removed, and FIG. 50 is a front schematic view of the guide member 620. In FIG. 50, the shapes of the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. Such a two-dot chain line is illustrated as a line passing through the center of the groove width of each of the action grooves 621 and 622.

  As shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the connection link action groove 621 is curved in a circular arc with a radius R2 around the axis O and a large diameter portion 621a curved in a circular arc with a radius R1 around the axis O And a pair of connecting portions 621c connecting between the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b. The radius R1 of the large diameter portion 621a is set to be larger than the radius R2 of the small diameter portion 621b (R2 <R1).

  The undulation link action groove 622 includes a large diameter portion 622a curved in an arc at a radius R3 around the axis O, a small diameter portion 622b curved in an arc at a radius R4 around the axis O, and the large diameter portions It consists of a pair of connection part 622c which connects between 622a and the small diameter part 622b. The radius R3 of the large diameter portion 622a is set to be larger than the radius R4 of the small diameter portion 622b (R4 <R3).

  In the present embodiment, the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b of the connection link action groove 621 and the large diameter portion 622a and the small diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622 are concentrically arranged around the axis O. In this case, the axial center O coincides with the rotation center when the rotation member 640 is rotated. Therefore, when the rotation member 640 is rotated, the large diameter portions 621a and 622a and the small diameter portions 622a and 622b of the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 act on the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648, respectively. By suppressing the force, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  In addition, the pair of connection portions 621c of the connection link action groove 621 are disposed at positions 180 degrees out of phase. Similarly, the pair of connection portions 622c of the undulation link action groove 622 are disposed at positions 180 degrees out of phase. Therefore, when the rotation member 640 is driven to rotate, the force applied to the connection link member 644 from the one connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621 and the force applied to the connection link member 644 from the other connection portion 621c. Can be offset. Similarly, it is possible to offset the force exerted from one of the connection portions 622c of the relief link action groove 622 to the relief link member 648 and the force exerted from the other connection portion 622c to the relief link member 648. Thus, the force applied to the rotating member 640 can be made uniform as a whole, so that the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced. .

  In the present embodiment, the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the upset link action groove 622 are formed in different phases. That is, in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621, the insertion portion 648a of the rising and falling link member 648 is the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter The insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is a connection link in a state in which the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is inserted into the connection portion 622c of the undulation link action groove 622 while being inserted into any one of the portions 622b. It is inserted into either the large diameter portion 621 a or the small diameter portion 621 b of the action groove 621.

  The connection portions 621c and 622c are portions for changing the distance between the division members DV or displacing the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647. Therefore, a relatively large reaction force is received from the connection portions 621c and 622c. By preventing 644a and 648a from being simultaneously inserted into the connection portions 621c and 622c, necessary driving force can be dispersed. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Referring back to FIGS. 43 to 48, the drive mechanism 630 will be described. The drive mechanism 630 is a mechanism for rotationally driving the rotation member 640, and includes a drive motor 631, a pinion gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 631, and a leading gear (pin 1). A central transmission body 634 having a transmission gear train in which the transmission gear 633a is engaged, a gear 634a engaged in a gear (second transmission gear 633b) at the end of the transmission gear line, and the central transmission member 634 The one-side distribution gear train and the other-side distribution gear train in which the leading gears (first distribution gears 635a and 636a) are engaged with the gear 634a, and the gear at the end of the one-side distribution gear train and the other-side gear train It mainly includes a one-side rotation drive member 637 and a other-side rotation drive member 638 having gears 637a and 638a engaged with the three distribution gears 635c and 636c). Second distribution gears 635b and 636b are interposed between the first distribution gears 635a and 636a and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c, respectively.

  The one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are members serving as the end (the output end of the drive mechanism 630) of the transmission path for transmitting the rotation drive force generated from the drive motor 631. The rotation driving force rotates itself, and the rotation causes the rotation member 640 to rotate. Here, the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  51 (a) is a front view of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation member 638, and FIG. 51 (b) is a one side rotation member 637 and the other along line LIb-LIb in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of a side rotation member 638.

  Since the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are members formed in the same shape, only the one side rotation drive member 637 will be described, and the other side rotation drive member 638 will be described. Only the reference numerals are given in the diagram of FIG. 51, and the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the one side rotation drive member 637 is formed in a disk shape, and the engaging portions 637b are notched at a plurality of locations (three locations in this embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer edge thereof. It is formed.

  The engaging portion 637b is a portion engaged with the engaged portion 641 (see FIG. 56) of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and the width (the distance between the opposing surfaces is increased from the open side toward the concave side) In the front view (axial direction view) substantially V-shaped to be narrowed. As will be described later, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement of the engagement portion 637b and the engaged portion 641, and the rotation member 640 is It can be rotated.

  The one side rotation drive member 637 is formed with a connection wall 637c that partially connects the opposing inner surfaces of the engagement portion 637b. The connection wall 637c is formed in a curved shape in a front view (axial view) arc shape around the axial center of the one side rotation drive member 637, and the open side of the engagement portion 637b (one side rotation drive member 637 Only the inner surfaces of the outer edge side of) are connected, and the inner surfaces of the recessed portion deep side of the engaging portion 637b are not connected.

  Here, when the rotation member 640 is driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637, engagement and release of the engagement portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 are intermittently repeated (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 starts to engage with the engaging portion 637b, an impact load is input, and there is a possibility that the one-side rotation driving member 637 may be damaged. On the other hand, when the weight of the one side rotation drive member 637 is increased, the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 needs a large output.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the connection wall 637c is formed only on the release side of the engaging portion 637b, reinforcement against impact load when the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 start to be engaged And weight reduction can be made to be compatible effectively. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced while improving the durability of the one-side drive member 637.

  Referring back to FIGS. 43 to 48, description will be made. Each component of the drive mechanism 630 is disposed in the case member 610 except for the central transmission member 634 (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, the central transmission member 634 is rotatably held on the back side of the guide member 620. Here, the holding structure of the central transmission member 634 to the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 600 cut along a plane including the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634. As shown in FIG. 52, the central transmitter 634 is formed in a hat shape having a circular shape in a front view and a depressed central portion, and a gear 634a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the depressed portion at the central portion. An overhanging portion 634 b is formed in a flange shape projecting radially outward from the portion.

  A pair of holding collars 623 and 624 (see FIGS. 47 and 48) are superimposed on three positions (that is, positions at an interval of 120 degrees) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the back side of the guide member 620. The overhanging portion 634 b of the central transmission member 634 is slidably inserted between the opposing pair of holding collars 623 and 624. Thus, the central transmission member 634 can be rotatably held by the guide member 620 via the pair of holding collars 623 and 624.

  That is, the displacement of the central transmission member 634 in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52) with respect to the guide member 620 can be restricted by bringing the outer circumferential surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 into contact with the outer circumferential surface of the central transmission member 634. The displacement of the central transmission member 634 relative to the guide member 620 in the axial direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 52) is restricted by bringing the overhanging portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 into contact with the opposing surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624. it can.

  In this case, the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 are formed in a circular shape in a front view (a view in the rotation axis direction of the center transmission member 634). Accordingly, the outer circumferential surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 and the outer circumferential surface of the central transmission member 634 can be in a circumscribed relationship (that is, point contact) with each other. Thus, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance when the central transmission member 634 rotates. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Further, by thus holding the outer edge side (the overhanging portion 634b) of the central transmission member 634, the central recessed portion of the central transmission member 634 is pivoted to the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610. Since it is not necessary to support it and a space for arranging components for supporting the shaft is not necessary, it is possible to secure an arrangement space for the throwing device 650, which will be described later.

  Next, the operation of the drive mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a front view of the case member 610 and the drive mechanism 630, in which the central transmission member 634 is viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the drive mechanism 630, the central transmission member 634 is disposed at a position concentric with the axis O, which is the rotation center of the rotation member 640, and the second transmission is made to the gear 634a of the central transmission member 634. The gear 633 b and the third distribution gears 635 c and 636 c are disposed in a meshed state. The third distribution gears 635c and 636c are disposed at positions 180 degrees out of phase (that is, positions opposed to each other across the axis O).

  Therefore, when the drive motor 631 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to the second transmission gear 633 b via the pinion gear 632 and the first transmission gear 633 a, and along with the rotation of the second transmission gear 633 b, The central transmission member 634 is rotated.

  When the central transmission member 634 is rotated, with the rotation of the central transmission member 634, the pair of first distribution gears 635a and 636a are respectively rotated, and the rotation is performed by the second distribution gears 635b and 636b and the third distribution. It is transmitted to the gears 637a and 638a (see FIG. 48) of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 via the gears 635c and 636c, and the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 rotate. Be done.

  As described above, since the central transmission gear 634 is engaged with the first distribution gear 635a and the second distribution gear 636a, by rotating the central transmission gear 634 by the rotational drive force of the drive motor 631, the one-side rotational drive member The 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 can be rotated in a synchronized state. As a result, the drive of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In this case, since the central transmission gear 634 is disposed concentrically with the axial center O of the rotating member 640, the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotational drive members 637 and 638 are viewed in the axial O direction. In the above, the inner side (the axial center O direction side) of the outer edge portion of the rotating member 640 can be provided. That is, since the central transmission gear 634 and the one side and the other side rotational driving members 637 and 638 do not protrude outward beyond the outer shape of the rotating member 640, the size can be reduced accordingly.

  In the state where the guide member 620 is disposed in the case member 610, the engaging portions 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 radially outward of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. 638b is exposed (see FIG. 49), and the engaged portions 641 of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 can be engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b. Therefore, by rotating the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 through the engagement of the engaging portions 637b and 638b and the engaged portion 641. Thus, the rotating member 640 can be rotated.

  In this case, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are disposed at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase (that is, opposite to each other across the axis O). Therefore, as described later, the rotation position of the rotation member 640 can be stabilized by separating the position (engagement position) for applying the driving force to the rotation member 640 to the maximum.

  In addition, the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are disposed in a posture (rotational position) in which the phases of the engagement portion 637b and the engagement portion 638b are different from each other. That is, when one of the engaging portion 637 b or the engaging portion 638 b is not engaged with the engaged portion 641, the other of the engaging portion 637 b or the engaging portion 638 b engages with the engaged portion 641. Are arranged to be avoided (allowing one and the other to be disengaged simultaneously). Therefore, as will be described later, intermittent transmission of the driving force from the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 to the rotation member 640 can be suppressed, and the rotation of the rotation member 640 can be stabilized.

  Referring back to FIGS. 43 to 48, description will be made. As described above, the rotation member 640 is a front-view annular member that is rotated by receiving the driving force of the rotation mechanism 630, and in a posture that is concentric with the central transmission member 634 and the guide member 620, the guide member 620. It is disposed on the front side of the In the present embodiment, the rotation member 640 is rotated counterclockwise (leftward) in a front view. Here, the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60.

  54 (a) is a front view of the rotation member 640, and FIG. 54 (b) is a side view of the rotation member 640 as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVb of FIG. 54 (a). 55 is a rear view of the rotation member 640 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LV in FIG. 54 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the rotating member 640 includes a plurality of (30 in the present embodiment) dividing members DV, and the plurality of dividing members DV are endlessly connected to each other along the circumferential direction. Thus, it is formed in an annular shape in a front view.

  In this case, the plurality of divided members DV are formed so as to be able to change the distance between the adjacent divided members DV. That is, in the rotating member 640, a first section S1 in which the divided members DV are circumferentially connected at a first interval, and a second interval in which the divided members DV are narrower than the first interval And a second section S2 connected in the circumferential direction is formed. Note that, between the first section S1 and the second section S2, the interval between the divided members DV transitions from the first interval in the first section S1 to the second interval in the second section S2 (or vice versa) Section is formed.

  Fig. 56 (a) is a front perspective view of the divided member DV, and Fig. 56 (b) is a rear perspective view of the divided member DV. FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the divided member DV, and FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the divided member DV. 56 to 58, the connecting link member 644 of the adjacent divided members DV is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to understand the connection structure of the divided members DV.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the to-be-detected portion 641 c is formed on a part (15 in the present embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, while the other divided members DV are formed. Formation of the to-be-detected part 641c is abbreviate | omitted. The division members DV in which the detection portions 641c are formed and the division members DV in which the formation of the detection portions 641c is omitted have the same configuration except for the presence or absence of the detection portions 641c. Therefore, in the following, the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed will be described, and the description of the divided member DV in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the divided member DV includes an engaged portion 641, a back side main body 642 on which the engaged portion 641 is disposed on the back side, and a front side of the back side main body 642. Disposed on the front side of the front side main body 643 and a connection link member 644 whose proximal end is rotatably supported between the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643. And the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 held displaceably by the plate holding member 645, and the front side main body 643 and the plate holding member 645 so as to be slidably displaced. And an undulating link member 648.

  As described above, the engaged portion 641 is a portion engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotary drive members 637 and 638 of the drive mechanism 630, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangular shape in a front view It is disposed in such a posture as to protrude from the back of one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 56 (b)) of the back side main body 642.

  A facing portion 641a facing the back surface of the back main body 642 at a predetermined distance is formed on the attachment surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the back main body 642, and the facing portion 641a and the back main body are formed. The outer edge of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the facing surfaces 642 and 642. Thereby, floating of the divided member DV (one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642) from the front surface of the guide member 620 can be suppressed.

  Further, a pair of sliding rollers 641b formed in a cylindrical shape is rotatably supported on the side of the mounting surface of the engaged portion 641 to the rear side main body 642. The sliding roller 641b can have its rotation axis orthogonal to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the movement plane of the divided member DV) and its outer peripheral surface can be in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. Arranged in a posture. Thereby, the sliding resistance at the time of the division member DV being displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a plate-like portion to be detected 641 c is formed on the opposite side of the surface to be attached of the engaged portion 641 to the rear side main body 642. The to-be-detected portion 641c is a plate-like portion detected by the detection sensor 684 disposed in the guide member 680, and is in a horizontal posture on the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the movement plane of the division member DV). Ru.

  The back side main body 642 is a portion mounted on the front surface of the guide member 620 and sliding on the front surface of the guide member 620 when the rotation member 640 rotates, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view. In the state where the rotation member 640 is disposed in the guide member 620, the back side main body 642 is disposed in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. That is, each back side main body portion 642 is disposed in a radiation straight line centered on the axis O (see FIG. 54).

  The back side main body 642 is a front face of one side (the lower side in FIG. 57) of the connecting link opening 642a and the ups and downs link opening 642b which are groove-shaped openings extending linearly along the longitudinal direction. A shaft support portion 642c which is formed and pivotally supports the base end side of the connection link member 644 between the front side main body 643 (shaft support portion 643b) and a bent portion protruding from the back surface of the other side in the longitudinal direction (the upper side in FIG. 58) And 642d.

  The connection link opening 642a is an opening through which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 of the adjacent divided member DV is slidably inserted, and the insertion of the insertion portion 644a into the connection link opening 642a allows the division member to be divided. The DV can be connected to the adjacent dividing member DV via the connecting link member 644. Further, the connecting link member 644 inserts the tip end of the insertion portion 644 a inserted into the connecting link opening 642 a into the connecting link action groove 621 of the guide member 620.

  The opening width of the connection link opening 642a is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644. Therefore, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connection link opening 642a.

  When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 receives an action from the connection link action groove 621 of the guide member 620 when the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a has a connection link opening 642a. By sliding along the distance L, it is possible to allow the posture of the connection link member 644 to change in accordance with the action from the connection link action groove 621. As a result, the posture of the connection link member 644 with respect to the rear side main body 642 can be generated, and the distance between the divided members DV can be increased or decreased.

  The relief link opening 642b is an opening through which the insertion portion 648a of the relief link member 648 is slidably inserted, and the relief link member 648 is a guide member for the tip of the insertion portion 648a inserted in the relief link opening 642b. It is inserted into the undulation link action groove 622 of 620.

  The opening width of the opening for relief link 642b is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 648a of the relief link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the undulation link opening 642b.

  When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 receives an action from the undulation link action groove 622 of the guiding member 620, the insertion portion 648a is the opening 642b for the undulation link. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 can be undulated by sliding along the same.

  As described above, since the bearing portion 642c is formed on one side (the lower side in FIG. 57) of the back side main body 642, the base end side of the connection link member 644 is viewed in front view with the engaged portion 641. It can be pivotally supported at the overlapping position. Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 is driven by the engaging portions 637 b and 638 b of the respective rotational driving members 637 and 638 and the dividing member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guiding member 620, the displacement is made adjacent It can be easily transmitted to the dividing member DV via the connecting link member 644.

  The bending portion 642d is provided to project from the back of the other side (the upper side in FIG. 58) of the back side main body 642 in the longitudinal direction, and the protruding tip is opposed to the back side of the back side main body 642 with a predetermined distance. The inner edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the facing surfaces of the bent portion of the protruding tip and the back side main body 642. Thereby, floating of the divided member DV (the other side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642) from the front surface of the guide member 620 can be suppressed.

  The bent portion 642d is disposed in a posture in which the base portion can be in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the inner edge portion of the guide member 620, and the facing distance between the base portion of the bent portion 642d and the sliding roller 641b described above is The dimension is set equal to or slightly larger than the radial width of the guide member 620. Thus, the displacement of the divided member DV in the radial direction of the guide member 620 can be restricted, so that the main body member DV (rear side main body 642) remains in the posture along the radial direction of the guide member 620. Can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620.

  The front side main body 643 is a member formed in a plate shape having a rectangular shape in front view having substantially the same size as the rear side main body 642, and is a groove-like opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction. A link slide groove 643a, and a pivot portion 643b formed on the back of one longitudinal direction side (the lower side in FIG. 58) and pivotally supporting the base end side of the connection link member 644 between the back side main body 642 (shaft support portion 642c) and And a support plate 643c which is provided so as to protrude from the front surface and rotatably supports the partition plate 647.

  The relief link slide groove 643a is a linear groove in which the relief link member 648 is slidably disposed, and extends in parallel with the relief link opening 642b. That is, by causing the relief link member 648 to slide along the relief link slide groove 643a, the insertion portion 648a slides along the relief link opening 642b.

  The width dimension of the other side in the longitudinal direction is smaller than the width dimension of one side in the longitudinal direction in the front view. That is, the width dimension of the portion positioned on the inner peripheral side is smaller than the width dimension of the portion positioned on the outer peripheral side of the rotation member 640 so as to form a wedge in a front view. Therefore, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made smaller, the divided members DV can be made to be close to each other, and the space required for the disposition of the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, in the second section S2, the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 are in contact with the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 in the circumferential direction (see FIGS. 54 and 73). .

  The connection link member 644 is a long member, and the proximal end side is rotatably supported by the back side main body 642 and the shaft supporting portions 642c and 643b of the front side main body 643 and the columnar insertion portion on the front end side 644a is formed. The insertion portion 644a is projected in a posture parallel to the rotation axis of the connection link member 644, and as described above, the connection link of the guide member 620 via the connection link opening 642a of the back side main body 642 in the adjacent divided member DV. The working groove 621 is inserted.

  The diameter of the insertion portion 644a is set to be substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the groove width of the connection link opening 642a and the connection link operation groove 621. Therefore, during rotation of the rotation member 640, positional deviation of the division member DV with respect to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can be minimized, and the interval between the division members DV can be easily maintained constant. Thereby, since the position variation of to-be-detected part 641c can be suppressed, the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684 (refer FIG. 71) can be aimed at improvement.

  Note that the base end side (that is, the pivoting portions 642c and 643b of the respective main bodies 642 and 643) rotatably supported by the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 of the connection link member 644 is from the connection link opening 642a. Is also disposed at a position close to the engaged portion 641. In the present embodiment, the proximal end side of the connection link member 644 is disposed at a position overlapping the engaged portion 641 in a front view (a view in the axial center O direction of the rotation member 640).

  As a result, the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the one side and the other side rotational driving members 637 and 638 are engaged with the engaged portions 641 of the divided members DV, and the one side and the other side rotational driving members 637 and 638 rotate. When the division member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement of the division member DV can be easily transmitted to the adjacent division member DV via the connection link member 644. As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  The ups and downs link member 648 is a member held slidably movably in the ups and downs link slide groove 643a of the front side main body 643. A columnar insertion portion 648a is formed on the back side, and an action groove 648b is formed on the front side. It is formed. The insertion portion 648a is projected in a posture parallel to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644, and as described above, in the relief link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 via the relief link opening 642b of the back side main body 642. It is inserted.

  The action groove 648 b is a portion for acting on the operated portion 646 d of the display plate 646 by the sliding displacement of the elevation link member 648 to make the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 undulate, and the action groove 648 b The groove is formed to extend linearly along the sliding direction, and the acting portion 646d of the display plate 646 is slidably inserted between the opposing surfaces of the groove-like portion.

  The display plate 646 has a plate portion 646a formed in a plate shape having a rectangular shape in a front view, a shaft portion 646b and a connecting shaft 646c formed on one side of the plate portion 646a, and the action groove 648b of the relief link member 648 And a plate-like operated portion 646d inserted between the surfaces. The operated portion 646d is bent in a substantially S-shape in a front view, and therefore, when the undulating link member 648 is slide-displaced, the operated portion 646d is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement, The display plate 646 can be rotated about the shaft portion 646b.

  The dividing plate 647 has a plate-like plate portion 647a formed in a trapezoidal shape in a front view, a pair of shaft portions 647b formed on one side of the plate portion 647a, and the same side as the pair of shaft portions 647b And a pivot 647c rotatably supporting the connecting shaft 646c of the display plate 646.

  Here, as described above, the rotating unit 600 is configured to simulate a roulette that rotates a wheel in which a plurality of pockets are continuously provided in the circumferential direction and drops a thrown ball into one of the pockets. The space enclosed by the display plate 646 and the division plate 647 of one division member DV and the division plate 647 of the division member DV adjacent to each other is a pocket, and the display plate 646 (the plate portion 646a) Alternatively, the color is black and different numbers (1 to 29) are displayed.

  In the present embodiment, one display plate 646 has a green color and displays a predetermined mark (star shape). In addition, in the rotating member 640, only the display plate 646 located in the first section S1 is viewed by the player. That is, the display plate 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member disposed on the front side of the display plate 646 so as to be invisible to the player.

  The plate holding member 645 is provided with a shaft support portion 645a for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 646b of the display plate 646, and a shaft support portion 645b for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 647b of the partition plate 647. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are rotatably supported on the upper surface side (front side) of the front side main body 643 by the pivotal support by 645a and 645b.

  In this case, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, the display plate 646 is rotated with the shaft portion 646b as the rotation center in accordance with the slide displacement of the rising and lowering link member 648. The rotation is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support 647c, and the partition plate 647 is rotated about the shaft 647b. The rotation of the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

  59 (a) and 59 (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the dividing member DV in the state of being disposed in the first section S1, and FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b) are: It is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division member DV in the state arrange | positioned to 2nd area S2. 59 and 60 illustrate a state in which a part of the configuration is seen through for ease of understanding, and the illustration of the connection link member 644, the detection portion 641c, and the bending portion 642d is omitted. .

  As shown in FIG. 59, when the dividing member DV is disposed in the first section S1, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is a small diameter portion 622b (see FIG. 50) of the undulating link action groove 622 of the guiding member 620. It is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slidingly displaced on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the inner peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotary member 640, the axis O side), Thus, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is disposed in the horizontal posture, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is disposed in the standing posture.

  Note that the horizontal posture is a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is parallel to the back surface (that is, the movement plane of the divided member DV) of the back side main body 642, and the standing posture is a plate of the division plate 647. The portion 647a is in an attitude that is orthogonally parallel to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the movement plane of the divided member DV).

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the dividing member DV is disposed in the second section S2, the large diameter portion 622a (see FIG. 50) of the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 in the undulating link action groove 622 of the guiding member 620. Is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slidingly displaced to one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the outer peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the side opposite to the axis O). As a result, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted from the horizontal posture to the plate portion 647a side of the partition plate 647 to be disposed in the inclined posture, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is from the standing posture The display plate 646 is inclined to the side of the plate portion 646a and arranged in the inclined posture.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, by rotating the display plate 646 with the slide displacement of the relief link member 648, The partition plate 647 can also be rotated via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support 647c.

  Thus, it is not necessary to separately provide the relief link action groove and the relief link member for each of the mechanism for rotating the display plate 646 and the mechanism for rotating the partition plate 647, and in both mechanisms. The link action groove and the undulating link member can be made common. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is heavier in weight than the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 60 (ie, the state in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is tilted downward), the state shown in FIG. When the plate portion 646a of the plate 646 is in the horizontal posture and the plate portion 647a of the dividing plate 647 is in the standing posture, the rotation action of the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) is used. Thus, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and promptly.

  That is, since the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward, it can form a horizontal posture by being rotated by its own weight in the direction to be tilted downward, and the rotation of the display plate 646 (self-weight) Is transmitted to the dividing plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the pivot portion 647c, so that the dividing plate 647 can be lifted to form a standing posture. Therefore, even in the case where the rotation is inhibited by the adhesion of dirt, dust or the like, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and promptly.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection length of the display plate 646 from the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a is set to be larger than the projection length of the partition portion 647a from the shaft portion 647b. Therefore, the center of gravity of the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 can be separated from the shaft portion 646b, and the center of gravity of the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 can be made closer to the shaft portion 647b. As a result, the state shown in FIG. Can be performed more reliably and promptly by using the weight of the display plate 646.

  Referring back to FIGS. 43 to 48, description will be made. The throwing device 650 is a device for throwing the ball B to the rotating member 640, is housed in a central recess in the central transmission member 634 of the drive mechanism 630, and is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Here, the pitching device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 61 to FIG.

  61 and 62 are exploded front perspective views of the throwing device 650. FIG. Note that, in FIG. 62, a state in which the holding piece retraction mechanism 670 is attached to the case body 651 is illustrated, and the passage member 655 is not illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the throwing device 650 has a case body 651 formed in the shape of a container whose front side is open, an arm rotation mechanism 660 disposed inside the case body 651, and a holding piece. A mechanism 670, a passage member 655 disposed on the front side of the case body 651, and a sphere B spherically formed of a translucent material are mainly included.

  The case body 651 has a bottom wall portion 651a substantially circular in a front view, a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 651b erected from the bottom wall portion 651a to the front, and a radially outer side from an outer peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b And an overhanging wall portion 651c formed in a flange-like manner, and the overhanging wall portion 651c is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the guide member 620, whereby the standing front end (opening portion) of the outer wall portion 651b Are substantially aligned with the front surface of the rotation member 640 (the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646).

  A ball holding portion 652 is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 651a. In the ball holding portion 652, a spherical depression having a size corresponding to the outer diameter of the ball B is formed on the front, and the depression is taken as the holding position (initial position) of the ball B. That is, when the ball B is disposed in the ball holding portion 652, the ball B is held between the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b and the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 (see FIG. 44).

  In this case, the ball throwing device 650 is disposed with the holding piece 677 of the holding piece advancing and retracting mechanism 670 positioned at the lowermost position, and when the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 is rotated, the ball B is the outer wall portion The inner peripheral surface 651 b (inner peripheral passage 651 c 1) is rolled to be held on the holding piece 677 at the protruding position of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 (see FIG. 68). Here, the arm rotation mechanism 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 63 to FIG.

  FIG. 63 is an exploded front perspective view of the arm rotation mechanism 660. As shown in FIG. 64 is a front view of the throwing device 660 in a state where the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is disposed at the holding position, and FIG. 65 is a view when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is disposed at the separation position. It is a front view of the pitching apparatus 660 in the closed state. In FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, a state in which the front case 662 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is removed is shown for ease of understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the arm rotation mechanism 660 includes a back case 661 disposed on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651, and a front case 662 disposed on the front of the back case 661; A crank member 663 and an arm member 664 rotatably held between opposing surfaces of the rear case 661 and the front case 662, and a drive motor 665 and a pinion gear 666 for driving the crank member 663 and the arm member 664 Prepare.

  Shafts 661a and 661b are provided in a protruding manner on the rear case 661, and a crank member 663 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661a and an arm member 664 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661b. In the crank member 663, a gear 663a in which a pinion gear 676 is engaged is engraved on the outer peripheral surface, and a pin portion 663b is protruded at a position eccentric from the rotation center (shaft 661a). Further, in the arm member 664, a sliding groove 664a through which the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is slidably inserted is linearly extended, and a rotation center (shaft 661b is provided with respect to the sliding groove 664a. In the opposite position sandwiching), a curved portion 664b in a front view shape obtained by dividing an annular shape into halves is formed.

  Therefore, the drive motor 665 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction, and the crank member 663 is rotated through the rotation of the pinion gear 666 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 655, and the pin portion 663 b of the crank member 663. By acting on the slide groove 664a of the arm member 664, the arm member 664 can be rotated in one direction or the other direction with the shaft 661b as the center of rotation.

  That is, the arm member 664 causes the curved position of the curved portion 664b to follow the outer peripheral portion of the ball holding portion 652 to hold the ball B in the ball holding portion 652 (see FIG. 64). It is possible to rotate (swing) between a separated position (see FIG. 65) where the ball B is dropped from the ball holding portion 652 to the inner circumferential passage 651c1 by being separated from the portion 652.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664 b (a range of about 90 degrees of the central angle of the side (lower side) separated from the shaft 661 b) is formed by the cantilever plate 664 c. The cantilever plate 664c is a plate-like member that curves along the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b, and a shaft 664c1 provided on the base end side is rotatably supported by the curved portion 664b and has a distal end side. By the elastic force of the leaf spring 667a of the limit switch 667 disposed on the back side (peripheral surface side) of the head, it is maintained in a posture lifted upward (radially inward).

  Therefore, when the ball B is held by the ball holding portion 652 in a state where the arm member 664 is disposed at the holding position, the weight of the ball B pushes down the cantilever plate 664c with the shaft 664c1 as a rotation center. When the ball B is not held by the ball holding portion 652 while the limit switch 667 is turned on, the cantilever plate 664c is lifted as described above, and the limit switch 667 is turned off. As a result, the presence or absence of the sphere B in the sphere holding portion 652 can be detected.

  In this case, the curved portion 664b of the arm member 664 and the recess of the ball holding portion 652 are formed in such a size that the ball B can be displaced in a state where the arm member 664 is disposed at the holding position. That is, the inner diameter of the curved portion 664 b and the inner diameter of the recess of the ball holding portion 652 are larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is hit or shaken by the player and an external force (vibration) is input, the ball B can be displaced with the input of the vibration. That is, when the ball B is displaced (vibrated), the cantilever plate 664c can be displaced in accordance with the vibration, and the limit switch 667 can be turned on / off. As a result, by monitoring the state of the limit switch 667, the input of the external force to the pachinko machine 10 can be detected using the arm rotation mechanism 660.

  Referring back to FIGS. 61 and 62, description will be made. As described above, when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is rotated to the separated position, the ball B is rolled on the inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651 c 1) of the outer wall portion 651 b. It is held on the holding piece 677 in the projecting position (see FIG. 68). The holding piece inserting and retracting mechanism 670 is formed so that the holding piece 677 can be inserted and withdrawn between the projecting position and the inserting position, and the ball B can be inserted into the inserting position by inserting the holding piece 677 into the inserting position. Is thrown on the divided member DV (display plate 646) of any of the divided members DV. Here, the holding piece retraction mechanism 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69. FIG.

  FIG. 66 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retraction mechanism 670 in a state in which the holding piece 677 is disposed in the protruding position, and FIG. 67 is a holding piece retraction mechanism 670 in a state in which the holding piece 677 is disposed in the retracted position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of.

  FIG. 68 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece projection / retraction mechanism 670 in a state in which the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position, and FIG. 68 (b) is a holding at line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 16 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of a single-in / out mechanism 670. 69 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece projecting / retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 69 (b) is a line LXIXb-LXIXb of FIG. 69 (a). 18 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the holding piece advancing and retracting mechanism 670 in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the holding piece advancing and retracting mechanism 670 is formed to be curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 and disposed on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651. Back case 671, a front case 672 disposed on the front of the back case 671, a slide member 673 slidably held between opposing surfaces of the back case 671 and the front case 672, and a slide member thereof A drive motor 675 and a pinion gear 676 for driving 673, and a holding piece 677 which is brought out and retracted according to the slide displacement of the slide member 673.

  The rear case 671 is provided with two pairs of roller members 674 facing each other at a predetermined interval, and holds the slide member 673 so as to be slidably displaceable between the roller members 674 of each set. The rear case 671 is provided with a sliding base 671a in the form of a rectangular plate in top view viewed from the circumferential direction one end side (lower part) toward the front side, and the upper surface of the sliding base 671a and the front base 672 The slide displacement (protrusion to the front side and immersion to the rear side) of the holding piece 677 is guided between the lower surface (outer peripheral surface) of

  The slide member 673 has a pin portion 673a protruding from one circumferential end (downward portion) thereof, and a rack gear 673b has a pinion gear 676 meshed with the other circumferential circumferential end (information portion). Engraved along the surface. Further, in the holding piece 677, a sliding groove 677a through which the pin portion 673a of the sliding member 673 is slidably inserted is bent and extended in a substantially Z shape. That is, the sliding groove 677a has its one end side (right side in FIG. 66) offset to the front side than the other end side (left side in FIG. 66).

  Therefore, the drive motor 675 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction, and the pinion gear 676 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 675 is rotated to slide the slide member 673 through the rack gear 673b. By causing the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 to act on the slide groove 677a of the holding piece 677, the holding piece 677 can be protruded to the front side or retracted to the back side. That is, the holding piece 677 is slidably displaceable between a projecting position (see FIG. 68) which protrudes to the front side and a retracted position (see FIG. 69) which is sunk to the back side.

  Here, the upper surface of the holding piece 677 is located on the back side (the right side in FIGS. 68B and 69B) and the inner circumferential surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 (that is, the inner circumferential passage 651c1) And a curved surface 677b which is smoothly curved in the circumferential direction with the inner circumferential passage 651c1 and extends to the edge of the curved surface 677b and is directed to the front side (the left side in FIGS. 68B and 69B). A rising inclined surface 677c is formed to be inclined according to and a falling inclined surface 677d connected to the edge of the rising inclined surface 677c and inclined downward toward the front side.

  Therefore, in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the projecting position (see FIGS. 68A and 68B), the ball is dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolls on the inner circumferential passage 651c1 to curve the holding piece 677. The rolling of the ball B reaching the surface 677b to the front side (left side in FIG. 68B) is restricted by the rising inclination of the rising inclined surface 677c, and is held on the holding piece 677 (curved surface 677b) Can.

  On the other hand, when the holding piece 677 is sunk from the projecting position to the back side and disposed at the sunk position (see FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b)), the front side of the front case 672 faces the back (Fig. 69 (b). The ball B, whose movement to the right) is restricted, is positioned on the descending inclined surface 677d, over the ascending inclined surface 677c as the holding piece 677 is displaced in the immersion direction (rear side). Thereby, the ball B can be rolled along the downward inclination of the downward inclined surface 677d, and the ball B can be thrown to the front side (the divided member DV of the rotation member 640).

  The curved surface 677 b is smoothly connected to the inner circumferential passage 651 c 1 on both sides in the circumferential direction, and therefore the ball B dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolling on one inner circumferential passage 651 c 1 is a curve of the holding piece 677 It can pass over the surface 677 b and roll to the other inner circumferential passage 651 c 1. That is, the ball B can be reciprocated between the inner circumferential passage 651 c 1 on one circumferential side and the inner circumferential passage 651 c 1 on the other circumferential side via the curved surface 677 b. Further, since the curved surface 677b of the holding piece 677 is located lower than the inner circumferential passage 651c1, when the ball B loses its momentum and its rolling converges, the ball B is positioned on the curved surface 677b. It can be done.

  Referring back to FIG. As described above, the passage member 655 is disposed on the front side of the case body 651. The passage member 655 is positioned on the front side of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece advancing and retracting mechanism 670, and the ball B thrown by the immersing operation (immersion to the immersing position) of the holding piece 677 is divided member DV of the rotating member 640 And a return passage 655b serving as a passage for returning the ball B sent from the division member DV of the rotating member 640 to the ball holding portion 652.

  The ball sending passage 655a has a width substantially the same as the downward inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece advancing and retracting mechanism 670, and has a substantially U-shaped cross section groove portion 655a1 and a front surface from the groove portion 655a1. A front portion 655a2 which is continuous with the side edge portion and which is substantially flush with the display plate 646 in the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640, and erected from both sides in the width direction of the front portion 655a2 And a pair of opposing portions 655a3 facing each other at substantially the same intervals as the opposing intervals of the partition plates 647.

  Therefore, when the holding piece 677 of the holding piece advancing and retracting mechanism 670 is retracted to the retracted position, the ball B which rolls the descending inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 is received by the groove 655a1, and the extending direction of the groove 655a1 By rolling along, it is possible to throw the ball B while suppressing rattling.

  In addition, the front portion 655a2 is flush with the display plate 646 of the dividing member DV, and the facing distance between the pair of facing portions 655a3 is substantially the same as the facing distance of the dividing plate 647 of the dividing member DV. The ball B can be smoothly placed on the display plate 646 of the divided member DV. When the ball B is thrown, the rotary member 640 is stopped at a phase (rotational position) in which the dividing plate 647 of the dividing member DV matches the facing portion 655a3 based on the detection result by the detection sensor 684 described later.

  The return passage 655b includes a rolling portion 655b1 as a rolling surface that rolls on the downstream side when the ball B sent from the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 is received on the upstream side, and a downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1. It has an upright portion 655b2 which is erected and curved to turn the rolling direction of the ball B to the back side.

  The rolling portion 655b1 is disposed on the inner peripheral side edge of the rotating member 640 on the upstream side and in the front side of the ball holding portion 652b in a front view of the ball throwing device 650. The rolling portion 655b1 is inclined downward from the upstream side to the downstream side, and the downstream side is inclined downward to the ball holding portion 652.

  The ball B placed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 and transported in the circumferential direction along with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is radially inward by the action of the dividing plate 647 and the return guide 681 b of the guide member 680 described later. When the ball B is pushed out and sent to the upstream side of the return passage 655b, the ball B rolls the rolling portion 655b1 to the downstream side and is dropped to the ball holding portion 652 while being guided by the standing portion 655b2. Ru.

  Referring back to FIGS. 43 to 48, description will be made. As described above, the guide member 680 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. The guide member 680 is a member disposed along the lower portion of the rotation member 640, and guides the ball B on the dividing member DV of the rotation member 640 during conveyance accompanying the rotation of the rotation member 640 (ie, The ball B is supported from below, and the detection sensor 684 for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotation member 640 is held. Here, the guide member 680 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

  FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the guide member 680, and FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the guide member 680. As shown in FIG. 70, the guide member 680 includes a base 681 disposed in the case member 610, a plate-like transmission plate 682 disposed on the front side of the base 681, and a back side of the transmission plate 682 And a plurality of (six in this embodiment) detection sensors 684 disposed on the base 681.

  The base portion 681 is a member formed in a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape at a central angle of approximately 120 degrees (that is, a shape curved in a circular arc shape in front view), and a guide surface 681 a is formed on the inner peripheral surface side . The guide surface 681a is disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the rotation member 640, and faces the sphere B disposed on the division member DV (that is, the space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647). That is, the ball B, which is disposed on the divided member DV of the rotation member 640 and is conveyed as the rotation member 640 rotates, is supported from below.

  Further, on the inner circumferential surface side of the base portion 681, a return guide 681 b is formed which is continuous with the downstream side (right side in FIG. 70) of the guide surface 681 a. The return guide 681 b is a portion for sending the ball B transported along with the rotation of the rotation member 640 to the return passage 655 b of the passage member 655, and has a smaller width than the guide surface 681 a. By being formed in a shape projecting inward, it is disposed to face the divided member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 (see FIGS. 43 and 44).

  Therefore, when the ball B is placed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 and conveyed in the circumferential direction as the rotating member 640 rotates, the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) of the divided member DV returns the guide The ball B is pressed against the inner circumferential surface of 681 b. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is further rotated, the ball B is pushed radially inward by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681 b, and is conveyed to the upstream side of the return passage 655 b.

  Here, even if the formation of the return guide 681 b is omitted, if the rotating member 640 is rotated to a position where the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647 a) is inclined downward toward the return passage 655 b, the partition plate The ball B can be dropped to the return path 655b along the descending slope of 647. However, in this case, since the ball B is transported upward before the ball B starts rolling by its own weight, the falling position when the ball B is dropped becomes high, and Since the ball B is dropped after being rolled along the descending slope, the momentum when the ball B drops is large. As a result, the return passage 655b may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, by providing the return guide 681 b, the drop position when the ball B is dropped to the return passage 655 b can be lowered and the ball B slides with the return guide 681 b. Since the ball is thrown to the return path 655b while being being carried out, the ball throwing speed can be reduced. As a result, damage to the return passage 655 b can be suppressed.

  The transmission plate 682 is a portion facing the division member DV (display plate 646) of the rotation member 640 at a predetermined interval (interval capable of holding the sphere B), and a part of the upper edge side portion in the center in the width direction is It extends upward to a position facing the throwing passage 655a (front portion 655a2) of the passage member 655. Thereby, it can suppress that the ball B thrown to the division member DV of the rotation member 640 from the throwing apparatus 650 jumps out outside.

  In addition, the transmission plate 682 is used not only for the dividing member DV into which the ball B is thrown (that is, the dividing member DV having the same phase as the front portion 655a2 of the throwing passage 655a), but also the downstream side of the dividing member DV (the ball B). Since the division member DV adjacent to the downstream side in the transport direction is also formed in a size (width dimension) which can partially face, the ramping of the ball B thrown from the throwing passage 655 a Convergence can be facilitated, and the ball B can be stably transported to the return guide 681 b.

  On the other hand, the transmitting plate 682 has a size (width dimension) capable of facing the dividing member DV to which the ball B is thrown and the dividing member DV adjacent to the downstream side of the dividing member DV. And it does not face with respect to the dividing member DV located downstream from the adjacent dividing member DV. That is, the ball B can be exposed between the edge of the transmission plate 682 in the transport direction downstream side (right side in FIG. 70) of the ball B and the return guide 681 b, and the player visually recognizes the transport of the ball B It can be easy.

  In addition, since the whole of the transmitting plate 682 is formed of the light transmitting material, it is possible to allow the player to see through the member or the ball B located on the back side. Therefore, the thrown ball B passes through the throwing passage 655a and falls between the display plate 647 and the transmission plate 682 of the divided member DV while being supported by the guide surface 681a by the rotation of the rotating member 640. The player can be made to visually recognize a series of modes being transported.

  The cantilever plate 683 is a member that forms the inner peripheral surface of the base 681 together with the guide surface 681 a, and is formed as a plate-like body that curves along the guide surface 681 a (that is, the inner peripheral surface of the base 681). One end side of the cantilever plate 683 is rotatably supported by the base 681 by a shaft 685 at one circumferential end side, and the other circumferential end is fixed by the elastic force of a plate spring of a limit switch (not shown) disposed at the base 681 It is maintained in a posture of being lifted upward (radially inward).

  In the posture in which the other circumferential end of the cantilever plate 683 is lifted upward, the limit switch is off, and when the ball B is thrown from the throwing device 650 to the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, the ball B is The weight depresses the cantilever plate 683 with the shaft 685 as the center of rotation, and turns on the limit switch. Thereby, it can be detected that the ball B thrown from the throwing device 650 is disposed at the proper position (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

  On the other hand, when the ball B is conveyed with the rotation of the rotation member 640 and the weight of the ball B acting on the cantilever plate 683 is set to a predetermined value or less, the posture in which the cantilever plate 683 is lifted as described above. The limit switch is turned off.

  The detection sensor 684 is a sensor device for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotation member 640, and is formed as a noncontact sensor in which the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit are disposed opposite to each other. The opposing spaces of the parts are disposed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction while being positioned on the movement locus of the detection subject 641c of the divided member DV in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54). The interval between the detection sensors 684 is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641 c) in the first section S1.

  Therefore, a plurality of (six in the present embodiment) division members DV adjacent in the circumferential direction can be arranged at positions corresponding to the detection sensor 684, and the rotation members 640 correspond to a predetermined amount (that is, corresponding to the first interval). The division member DV detected by each detection sensor 684 can be shifted in the circumferential direction each time it is rotated by the rotation amount).

  In this case, as described above, the to-be-detected portion 641c is formed on a part of the plurality of divided members DV (15 in the present embodiment) divided members DV, while the remaining divided members DV Formation of the to-be-detected part 641c is abbreviate | omitted. Therefore, in the detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detection portion 641c is formed is disposed, the light reception by the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emission portion is blocked by the detection portion 641c, and the detection signal is turned on The detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detection portion 641c is not formed is disposed, the light receiving portion can receive the light emitted from the light emitting portion, and the detection signal is turned off (see FIG. 76). As a result, as described later, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on a combination of detection results of the detection sensors 684.

  In the present embodiment, two (on / off) detection results are performed by the six detection sensors 684 based on the presence or absence of the detection target 641c of the divided member DV, so 64 (= 2 to the sixth power) A combination of streets can be formed. In this case, since the number of division members DV is 30, the detection sensor 684 detects which of the plurality of division members DV is located at the reference position, as described later. It can always be determined based on the result.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72 to FIG. 77, the operation of the rotation unit 200 will be described. First, the operation of changing the distance between the divided members DV when the rotating member 640 is rotated will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.

  FIG. 72 is a front view of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640. FIG. FIG. 73 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640 in the first section S1, and FIG. 73 (b) is a portion of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640 in the second section S2. It is an enlarged front view.

  In order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, in FIGS. 72 and 73, only the back side main body 642, the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 of the components of the dividing member DV are illustrated. In FIG. 73, the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are hatched.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the rotation member 640 is a member formed rotatably about the axis O (that is, along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620), and the plurality of divided members DV in the circumferential direction It is formed endlessly connected to That is, while the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is rotatably supported by the back side main body 642, each dividing member DV is back side of the dividing member DV to which the insertion portion 644a at the tip side of the connecting link member 644 is adjacent. The connection link action groove 621 is inserted through the connection link opening 642 a in the main body 642.

  As described above, the back side main body 642 of the divided member DV is in contact with the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the guide member 620 with the sliding roller 641b on one longitudinal side and the bending portion 642 on the other longitudinal side. When the guide member 620 is moved in the circumferential direction, the posture with respect to the guide member 620 is a posture in which the axial center O is located on the extension of the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (that is, radiation about the axial center O) Maintained in a straight posture). That is, only movement with the posture maintained is permitted.

  In this case, the large diameter portion 621a of the connection link action groove 621 is formed closer to the base end side (the side rotatably supported by the shaft) of the connection link member 644 than the small diameter portion 621b. In a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the action groove 621 (see FIG. 73A), the posture in which the connection link member 644 is tilted with respect to the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 The back side main bodies 642 can be separated from each other. That is, the space between the divided members DV (the back side main body 642) in the first section S1 can be set as a large space (first space).

  On the other hand, the small diameter portion 621b of the connection link action groove 621 is formed at a position farther from the base end side (the side pivotally supported rotatably) of the connection link member 644 than the large diameter portion 621a. When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted through the small diameter portion 621b of the groove 621 (see FIG. 73 (b)), the connection link member 644 is placed along the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642, Side bodies 642 can be brought close to each other. That is, the space between the divided members DV (the back side main body 642) in the second section S2 can be set as a small space (second space).

  Here, as described above, the rotating member 640 is a rendering device formed by imitating a roulette, and identification information such as numbers and marks is displayed on the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a). That is, by causing the player to visually recognize the identification information to be displayed on the display plate 646, an effect is performed. Therefore, in consideration of the player's visibility, it is preferable that the display plate 646 (display of identification information) be large, and in order to secure variations of the rendering effect, the number of display plates 646 (identification information It is preferable that there are many types).

  In this case, in consideration of the player's visibility, the display of the identification information (that is, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646) needs to secure a certain size or more, but the size is maintained. However, if the number of displayed identification information (the number of display plates 646) is increased, the diameter of the rotating member 640 is increased and the rotating member 640 can not fit in the predetermined arrangement space, but can fit in the predetermined space. If the diameter is reduced, the number of displayed identification information (the number of display plates 646) decreases, and it is not possible to secure variations of the rendering effect.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and the interval narrower than the first interval in the first section S1 As described above, it is possible to form the second section S2 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at an interval of 2 on the rotating member 640, and as described above, the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) located in the first section S1. The player is made to visually recognize (the display plate 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member).

  Therefore, compared with the case where all the plurality of divided members DV are connected at the first interval, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space necessary for arranging the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. While the display of the identification information (ie, the display plate 646) secures a certain size or more, the number of display of the identification information (the number of display plates 646) can be increased. As a result, it is impossible to secure the player's visibility and the variation of the rendering effect.

  Here, in the first section S1, as described above, the dividing member DV is arranged such that the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is in the horizontal posture (the posture parallel to the movement plane of the dividing member DV), The identification information displayed on the screen 646 can be easily viewed from the player.

  On the other hand, in the second section S2, as described above, the dividing member DV is in the posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 lifts the tip end side relative to the horizontal position in the first section S1. Interference with DV can be suppressed, and the divided members DV can be brought closer to each other. That is, the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 can be narrowed. As a result, the length in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space necessary for the arrangement can be suppressed.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is disposed displaceably (rotatable) on the upper surface of the front side main body 643, and in the second section S2, the plate portion 646a is divided by the adjacent divided members DV (plate holding It can be lifted above the top surface of the member 645) (ie, at a position where it does not interfere) (see FIG. 54). Therefore, the division members DV can be brought close to a position where the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 contact each other. That is, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made narrower. As a result, it is possible to shorten the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 and to reduce the space required for the arrangement of the rotating member.

  Next, the drive operation of the rotation member 640 by the drive mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d) are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation drive member 637 is rotated by 30 degrees, and the one-side rotation drive member 637 seen from the front is illustrated.

  FIGS. 74 (b), 74 (c) and 74 (d) correspond to the states rotated by 30 degrees, 60 degrees and 90 degrees from FIG. 74 (a), respectively. In FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV is illustrated in a cross-sectional view, and the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 is a two-dot chain line. It is illustrated using.

  Here, the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are formed in the same shape as described above. In the drive operation of the rotation member 640 by these, the same drive operation demonstrates only the drive operation by the one side rotation drive member 637, and the description of the drive operation by the other side rotation drive member 638 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the movement locus of the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 is partially the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. It is disposed in the overlapping position, and in the overlapping portion, the engaging portion 637 b is rotatable in a state of being engaged with the engaged portion 641. The circular movement trajectory of the engaging portion 637b is an inscribed circle having a diameter smaller than the circular movement trajectory of the engaged portion 641.

  When the one-side rotation drive member 637 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 53), the rotation is transmitted to the division member DV via the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641. And the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the movement is transmitted to the adjacent divided members DV via the respective connection link members 644, whereby the rotating member 640 is circumferentially It is rotated in the direction.

  In this case, as described above, the engaged portion 641 of the dividing member DV is formed on one longitudinal side of the rear side main body 642 (see FIGS. 57 and 58). That is, the engaged portion 641 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotary member 640 formed in an annular shape. Therefore, the amount of rotation of the rotary member 640 with respect to the unit rotation amount of the one side rotation drive member 637 can be reduced (the amount of rotation of the one side rotation drive member 637 required to rotate the rotation member 640 by the unit rotation amount can be increased. ). Therefore, the apparent speed reduction ratio can be reduced accordingly. In other words, since the driving force is applied to a position far from the axial center O of the rotating member 640, the rotational torque applied to the rotating member 640 can be increased. As a result, the rotational drive (in particular, rotational drive from the stopped state) of the rotary member 640 can be stabilized, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Here, since the drive mechanism 630 includes the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, and they are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53) The driving force applied from the mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be dispersed at different positions in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, and the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members DV can be suppressed. That is, even in the case where the rotating member 640 is formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of divided members DV in the circumferential direction as described above, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, since the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are disposed at positions where the phases are different by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53) The driving force from each rotation drive member 637, 638 can be applied to two of the most spaced apart of the rotation members 640 (a plurality of divided members DV), and as a result, displacement (rotation) of the rotation members 640 It can be stabilized.

  In this case, in the state of the division member DV, the first insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 pivotally supported by the division member DV is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the connection link action groove 621 of the guide member 620. In this embodiment, one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side are present, in which there are three types of states, the second state inserted into the small diameter portion 621b, and the third state inserted into the connection portion 621c. The rotation drive member 638 can apply a driving force to the division member DV in the third state (that is, the engagement portions 637 b and 638 b can be engaged with the engaged portions 641 of the division member DV in the third state) ) Are arranged.

  Thus, the driving force can be applied to the divided members DV in the state of transitioning the distance between the adjacent divided members DV from the first distance to the second distance (or the opposite). Since the division member DV receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portion 621c, the rotation (the movement of each division member DV in the circumferential direction) of the entire rotation member 640 in which the plurality of division members DV are endlessly connected By directly driving the divided member DV which receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portion 621c by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, the plurality of divided members DV are endless Can be stably displaced (rotated) as a whole.

  The period in which the driving force is transmitted from the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 to the division member DV completely matches the period in which the division member DV is in the third state described above. It is not necessary, as long as the period during which the former driving force is transmitted and the period during which the latter is in the third state overlap at least in part.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the upset link action groove 622 are formed at different positions. That is, when the dividing member DV is in the above-described third state, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 disposed in the dividing member DV is the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622 It is inserted.

  Therefore, when the division member DV is moved in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 supported by the division member DV passes through the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621. Thereafter, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 passes through the connection portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 (or vice versa).

  As a result, the reaction force is not received from both the connection portion 621 c of the connection link action groove 621 and the connection portion 622 c of the undulation link action groove 622 at the same time, and the timing of receiving the reaction force can be made different. As a result, the necessary drive force can be dispersed, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, since the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 are disposed with their phases (rotational positions of the engaging portions 637 b and 638 b) different from each other, displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 Can be stabilized. Here, the phase relationship between the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a state relationship diagram showing a relationship between a state of engagement or release of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 with respect to the division member DV and a phase. In FIG. 75, the state relationship diagram of the upper stage corresponds to the one-side rotation drive member 637, and the state relationship diagram of the lower stage corresponds to the other-side rotation drive member 638, respectively. Further, in FIG. 75, the horizontal axis indicates the phase, and the vertical axis indicates the engaged or released state.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 75, the first engaging portion 637b of the engaging portions 637b formed at three positions of the one-side rotation driving member 637 engages with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. When the phase at the time of starting the movement is defined as 0 ° (reference position), the one-side rotary drive member 637 continues until the phase reaches approximately 100 ° (ie, until it rotates 100 ° from the reference position) The first engaging portion 637b is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV, and the driving force is transmitted to the division member DV, while the engagement is released when the phase is approximately 100 ° to 120 °. The transmission of the driving force to the division member DV is released.

  After that, the second engaging portion 637b and the third engaging portion 637b of the engaging portions 637b formed at the three positions of the one side rotation driving member 637 are the case of the first engaging portion 637b. The same engagement and release states (i.e., engagement between approximately 100 degrees of rotation and release between approximately 20 degrees of rotation) are respectively repeated.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 75, the engagement portions 638b formed at the three positions of the other side rotation drive member 638 also have the same engagement and release as those of the one side rotation drive member 637 described above. State of the rotation angle (i.e., engagement between the rotation angle of about 100 degrees and release of the rotation angle of about 20 degrees).

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as described above, the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are disposed with different phases (rotational positions of the engagement portions 637b and 638b). Ru. That is, in the other side rotational drive member 638, the phase at which the first engagement portion 638b of the engagement portions 638b formed at the three positions starts to engage with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV is The first engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 is set to a phase delayed by approximately 40 ° from the phase (reference position) at which engagement is started.

  Thus, while one of the one-side rotation drive member 637 or the other-side rotation drive member 638 is disengaged from the split member DV (that is, the transmission of the driving force is released), one side The phases (rotational positions) of the engagement portions 637b and 638b are set such that the other of the rotation drive member 637 or the other side rotation drive member 638 engages with the divided member DV. Thereby, it is possible to avoid that the state in which the engagement with the division member DV is released is simultaneously formed in both the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638. As a result, the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized by suppressing the intermittent transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640.

  That is, as described above, in the configuration in which the rotating member 640 is formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of divided members DV, if the transmission of the driving force from the drive mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 becomes intermittent, Due to the transmission and release of the driving force, the distance between the divided members DV is likely to be increased or decreased. Therefore, the posture as the whole rotation member 640 becomes unstable, and the displacement (rotation) becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if either one of the one side rotation drive member 637 or the other side rotation drive member 638 is in the released state, the other is engaged, and the driving force to the rotation member 640 Since it can form the state which is always transmitted, it can be easy to keep the interval of division members DV constant. As a result, the posture of the rotating member 640 formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of divided members DV can be stabilized, and the displacement (rotation) can be stabilized.

  Next, the detection operation of the rotational position of the rotation member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76 is a state transition diagram for each unit rotation amount of the rotation member 640, and illustrates a state in which the arrangement of the detection sensor 684 and the division member DV is developed in a straight line.

  In FIG. 76, for convenience of explanation, reference numerals “A to F” are shown for the detection sensor 684 and reference numerals “1 to 10, 30” are shown for the divided member DV. The detection state is illustrated by the symbol "on, off". Further, in FIG. 76, the detection target portion 641c is hatched for easy understanding.

  Here, in the description of FIG. 76, each detection sensor 684 is a detection sensor A, a detection sensor B,... Using the reference numerals “A to F” “1 to 10, 30” attached in the drawing. In addition to the detection sensor F, the division members DV are referred to as a first division member DV, a second division member DV,.

  As shown in FIG. 76A, when the rotating member 640 is rotated and the first divided member DV reaches a phase (rotational position) detectable by the detection sensor A, the second divided member DV to the sixth The divided members DV are disposed at phases detectable by the detection sensors B to F, respectively.

  Therefore, in the detection sensors A and C to F, the light reception by the light receiving unit of the light emitted from the light emitting unit is blocked by the detection target 641 c of the first divided member DV and the third to sixth divided members DV. In the detection sensor B, the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emitting portion can be received by the light receiving portion, and the detection portion 641 c is not detected. Therefore, the detection state is turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), the divided member DV is circumferentially (FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b)) By moving in the left direction of (1), the divided members DV to be detected by the detection sensors A to F are changed (shifted by one). Therefore, in the detection sensors B to E, the detection state is turned on by the light shielding of the third to seventh divided members DV (the to-be-detected portion 641c), while in the detection sensors A and F, the detection state is turned off. Ru.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (b), the divided members DV to be detected by the detection sensors A to F are changed ( In the detection sensors A to D and F, the detection state is turned on by the light shielding of the third to sixth divided members DV and the eighth divided members DV (detected portions 641 c) In the sensor E, the detection state is turned off.

  Even after that, each time the rotation member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount, the division members DV to be detected by the detection sensors A to F are changed (shifted by one), and the number of division members DV When the operation is repeated by 30 in the form (that is, the rotating member 640 is rotated once), the state shown in FIG. 76 (a) is restored.

  In this case, as described above, there are two types of rotating members 640, one in which the detection portion 641c is formed and one in which the formation of the detection portion 641c is omitted. By connecting these two types of divided members DV in the circumferential direction, the detection portions 641 c are arranged at predetermined intervals that become uneven in the circumferential direction. The predetermined arrangement is a combination of the presence / absence of the detection target 641c (ie, the detection sensor A even if any adjacent six division members DV are taken out of the 30 division members DV connected in the circumferential direction). Each of the detection states of to F means sequences that are different combinations.

  Therefore, a table of such combinations (a table in which the detection states of the detection sensors A to F are associated with the divided members DV to be detected at the time of detection) is created in advance and stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 By setting, the phase (rotational position) of the rotary member 640 can be grasped by referring to the table each time the detection sensors A to F detect. That is, it is possible to determine which of the plurality (30 in the present embodiment) of the dividing members DV is located at the reference position.

  Here, the rotary member 640 is provided with a slit continuous in the circumferential direction, and the slit is detected by the detection sensor 684, and the pulse number of the pulse signal is accumulated and added, based on the accumulated pulse number. The amount of rotation (phase) of the rotating member 640 from the reference position can also be detected. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a light reception failure or the like of the light receiving portion of the detection sensor 684, a shift occurs between the rotation amount of the rotation member 640 and the cumulative addition number of pulse numbers, and the phase of the rotation member 640 is accurate. Can not be detected. That is, even if the detection failure occurs even once, it affects the subsequent detection results, and the influence on the detection results is accumulated each time the detection failure occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of detection target portions 641c arranged at unequal intervals (predetermined arrangement) along the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640, and the movement of the plurality of detection target portions 641c Since the plurality of detection sensors 684 (detection sensors A to F) disposed on the locus are provided, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is detected based on the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F. be able to. That is, the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on only the current detection result detected by the detecting sensors A to F, and in the detection of the phase of the rotating member 640, the past of the detecting sensors A to F Therefore, even if a detection failure occurs in the past, the detection result is not affected by the detection failure, so that the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected accurately.

  As described above, the interval between the detection sensors A to F is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641 c) in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54).

  Therefore, the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F can be made different each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV. That is, the phase (rotational position) of the rotation member 640 can be detected with the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV in the first section S1 as the minimum unit. As a result, the ball B is thrown from the throwing device 650 to any divided member DV (that is, any pocket of the rotating member 640 imitating a roulette) among the plurality of divided members DV connected in the circumferential direction. be able to.

  Further, as described above, the arrangement interval of the detection sensors A to F is set based on the interval of the divided members DV in the first section S1 (that is, the detection sensors A to F are divided members DV in the first section S1 Space required for the arrangement of the detection sensors A to F, as compared with the case where the distance between the divided members DV in the second section S2 is used as a reference, by arranging the detection target portion 64 Can be secured easily, and design freedom can be enhanced.

  In other words, when the detection sensors A to F are disposed at positions where the detection portion 641 c of the divided member DV can be detected in the second section S2, a space for arranging the detection sensors A to F is secured. Since it is necessary to do so, limitations occur in narrowing the distance (second distance) between the divided members DV. On the other hand, since the detection sensors A to F are disposed on the first section S1 side, the setting of the interval (the second interval) of the divided members DV in the second section S2 is not limited. The distance of 2 can be made narrower. As a result, it is possible to reduce the space required for the disposition of the rotation member 640.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the two detection results (on / off) based on the presence or absence of the detection target portion 641c of the divided member DV are respectively detected by the six detection sensors 684, so 64 (= 2) can be formed.

  In this case, since the number of dividing members DV is thirty, it is sufficient to have five detection sensors 684 (that is, a combination of 32 (= 2 5 powers can be formed)). However, in this case, a state occurs in which all the detection results of the five detection sensors 684 are turned off (the light is not blocked by the detected portion 641c), so at a predetermined phase (rotational position) corresponding to that state. The timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 can not be obtained.

  On the other hand, by using the six detection sensors 684 as in the present embodiment, the detection results of all the detection sensors 684 of the six detection sensors 684 are turned off (a state in which the light is not blocked by the detection portion 641c) Can be avoided. That is, in at least one detection sensor 684 of the six detection sensors 684, the detection result can be turned on (blocked by the detection portion 641), so that all phases (rotation In the position, the timing at which the detection result of the detection sensor 684 is acquired can be obtained.

  FIG. 77 is a partially enlarged side view in which a portion of the rotation member 640 in the first section S1 is enlarged. As shown in FIG. 77, in the first section S1, the display plate 646 of the divided member DV has its plate portion 646a disposed in a horizontal posture, and the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a (FIGS. 57 and 58). The opposite side (see FIG. 77, left side) is facing the side of the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent dividing member DV.

  In the present embodiment, the side surface of the display plate 646 opposite to the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a is curved in an arc shape (see the enlarged portion in FIG. 77). Therefore, when the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is rotated about the shaft portion 646b and disposed in a horizontal posture, the side opposite to the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a is the plate holding member 645 of the division member DV adjacent thereto. As a result, interference with the side surface of the plate portion 646a can be suppressed, and as a result, the distance between the side (arc side surface) opposite to the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a and the side surface of the plate holding member 645 can be narrowed.

  Thereby, in the first section S1, when attempting to relatively displace the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV in the direction to narrow the gap (first gap) between them, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 Such relative displacement can be restricted by the side surface being in contact with the side surface of the plate holding member 645. Therefore, it is possible to suppress positional deviation of the detection target portions 641c of the divided members DV in the direction of narrowing their intervals, and as a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684 can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the first section S1, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is the end of the connection link opening 642a in the back side main body 642 of the adjacent divided member DV (the end portion in the extending direction, FIG. 73 (a (See FIG. 73 (a)), when the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV attempt to make a relative displacement in a direction to widen their spacing (first spacing), The phase displacement can be restricted by the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 being in contact with the end of the connection link opening 642a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress displacement of the detection portions 641c of the divided members DV in the direction of widening their intervals, and as a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684 can be improved.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83. In each embodiment described above, the case where the tip of the first passage forming member 520 is always open has been described, but the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment is disposed at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 , And the tip wall member 2560 which opens and closes a passage. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 78 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swinging unit 2500 in the second embodiment. In FIG. 78, the state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position is illustrated.

  As illustrated in FIG. 78, the left swinging unit 2500 includes a base member 2510 that discharges a ball to the rear right of the first wall portion 513 in the front view, an extending direction of the distribution base member 2521 and an elongated hole 2521d. It mainly includes a first passage forming member 2520 which is substantially in a straight line with the extending direction, and a tip wall member 2560 which opens and closes the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  The base member 2510 includes a lateral flow passage 2515 extending rearward from the right side of the guide wall 513a. Although the outer shape of the introductory cylindrical portion 552 is different from the outer shape of the introductory cylindrical portion 552 in the first embodiment, the technical concept is the same, so the description will be omitted in this embodiment.

  The lateral downflow passage 2515 is a passage for discharging the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.

  The first passage forming member 2520 includes a distribution base member 2521 and a passage cover member 2522. The distribution base member 2521 is a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 2521a that constitutes one side of the flow-down passage of the ball, a long hole 2521d extending along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and a gap V1. The second distribution projection 2521g opposite to the distribution projection 521e in the front view right side and the front surface side of the hanging plate in the front view right side of the second distribution projection 2521g And a discharge recess 2521 h recessed from the side surface.

  In the lower end portion of the hanging plate portion 2521a, a recessed portion 2521a2 in which a portion on the side facing the passage cover member 2522 on the lower side wall surface (left side in FIG. 78) And an axial support hole 2521 a 3 circularly bored in a direction opposite to the passage cover member on the opposite side to 2522.

  The recessed portion 2521a2 is a recessed portion which forms an opening on the lower side surface of the first passage forming member 2520 in cooperation with the recessed portion 2522b1 of the passage cover member 2522. The tip wall member 2560 passes through the opening constituted by the recessed portion 2521a by the rotational operation.

  The shaft support hole 2521a3 is a hole in which the main body portion 2561a of the tip wall member 2560 is pivotally supported by the pin member on the rod, and is disposed at a position (coaxial position) corresponding to the shaft support hole 2522a2 of the passage cover member 2522 Ru.

  The second distribution convex portion 2521 g is a portion configured to have substantially the same shape as the distribution convex portion 521 e, and is a portion that distributes the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 to the left and right. The discharge recess 2521 h is disposed with a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere between the first recess 521 and the first wall 513, and reaches the first wall 513 and reaches the right of the second distribution protrusion 2521 g in the front view The distributed balls are introduced from the discharge recess 2521 h into the lateral flow passage 2515 and then discharged out of the game area.

  The passage cover member 2522 extends in a plate shape from a plate-like plate-like portion 2522 a which is provided on the front side of the distribution base member 2521 and both ends of the plate-like portion 2522 a in the width direction And an upper and lower wall portion 2522b.

  The plate-like portion 2522a includes the ball receiving portion 522a1 described above in the first embodiment, and the axial support hole 2522a2 which is formed in a circular shape coaxially with the axial support hole 2521a3 of the distribution base member 2521 at the lower end. Prepare. The axial support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 are holes for rotatably supporting the tip wall member 2560.

  The upper and lower wall portion 2522b is provided with a recessed portion 2522b1 which is recessed at a position facing the recessed portion 2521a2 and which forms an opening through which a ball can pass in cooperation with the recessed portion 2521a2.

  The distal end wall member 2560 is disposed between the distribution base member 2521 and the passage cover member 2522 at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 and rotates in a rod-like pin member coaxially with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 It mainly includes a body member 2561 of a substantially Z shape in a front view substantially pivotally supported, and a torsion spring 2562 biasing the body member 2561 clockwise in a front view.

  The torsion spring 2562 is configured in such a manner that one arm is fixed to the tip of the passage cover member 2522 and the other arm abuts on a locking pin 2561 e provided on the back surface side of the tip wall member 2560.

  Referring to FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 will be described. 79 (a) and 79 (d) are front views of the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560, and FIG. 79 (b) is a top view of the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560, FIG. FIG. 79 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 along the line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 79 (b). 79 (a) and 79 (d), the shape of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 79 (a), the first passage forming member 2520 is at the release position (FIG. The state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connecting position (see FIG. 81) is illustrated in FIG. 79 (d).

  As shown in FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 is a cylindrical main body portion 2561a coaxially supported by the axial support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 (see FIG. 78), and the radial direction from the main body portion 2561a. The plate-like plate portion 2561b formed in a straight line, the flow-through hole 2561c drilled with a diameter equal to or greater than the diameter of the sphere in the thickness direction of the plate portion 2561b, and the opposite side to the main portion 2561a of the plate portion 2561b Curved wall portion 2561d extending along an arc centering on the main body portion 2561a from an end portion of the lock portion, and a locking pin protruding in parallel with the axial direction of the main body portion 2561a at the tip end portion of the curved wall portion 2561d And a portion smaller than the opening of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520, which is a portion disposed on the opposite side of the curved wall portion 2561d with the main body member 2561a. A pushing portion 2561F, mainly comprises.

  In the plate portion 2561b, the radial length (length in the extending direction) of the main body portion 2561a is formed longer than the dimension in the short direction (vertical direction in FIG. 80) of the opening at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 Ru. Thereby, the rotation stop position of the tip wall member 2560 in the biasing direction of the torsion spring 2562 (see FIG. 78) can be set to a position where the plate portion 2561b and the upper side wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b abut (see FIG. 79 (d)).

  In the released state (see FIG. 79 (d)), the curved wall portion 2561d stops the downward flow by causing the ball to collide with the abutting wall 2561d1 disposed opposite to the ball that has flowed down the first passage forming member 2520. On the other hand, in the connected state, the ball is allowed to pass by moving downward of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball having passed through the flow-down hole 2561c is disposed on the back side of the abutting wall 2561d1. By rolling on 2561 d 2, it has a role of making the subsequent flow down smoothly.

  Next, the operation of the left swinging unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. 80 to 82 are front views of the left swinging unit 2500. FIG. In FIGS. 80 to 82, the cover member 550 is not shown, and in FIG. 80, the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position, and in FIG. A state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount in a front view is illustrated, and in FIG. 82, a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by the outline at the middle position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and the second distribution projection 2521g is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position, the ball which has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is a right side in a front view of the second distribution projection 2521g. And the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise in a front view, and the discharge recess 2521 h is disposed on the front side of the side flow downstream passage 2515. Thus, the ball can flow down the lateral flow passage 2515, and the ball is discharged out of the game area. Thus, it is possible to prevent the balls from being supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 in the state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 80, the balls introduced into the discharge recess 2521h stay in the discharge recess 2521h until the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, so that the next coming ball enters the discharge recess 2521h. This can be prevented, and the next coming ball can be fixed to the outside (upper side in FIG. 80) of the rotation trajectory of the tip of the second distribution projection 2521g.

  The first passage forming member 2520 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front, and the second distribution convex portion 2521 g is guided by the ball held on the outer side (the upper side in FIG. 80) of the rotation locus of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521 g By being disposed at a position along the right side wall of the wall 513a, it is introduced to the left of the second distribution projection 2521g and is supplied between the upper and lower walls 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. Ru. Thereby, even if a plurality of balls reach the first wall portion 513 in the state shown in FIG. 80, the balls introduced into the discharge recess 2521 h can be fixed to one.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position, the first passage is formed from the proximal end (left end in FIG. 80) to the distal end (right end in FIG. 80). The member 2520 is configured to be inclined upward. Therefore, even if the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated in a state in which the balls supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 remain and the state shown in FIG. Flows toward the proximal end by the action of gravity, so that the ball can be prevented from falling from the distal end.

  As shown in FIG. 81, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the state between the release position and the connection position, the ball which has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 has the second distribution convex. Get on the tip of the part 2521g and stop flowing down. Thus, when the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed between the release position and the connection position, the balls are supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522 b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. It can be prevented.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 81, it is inclined downward toward the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. Therefore, when the opening at the tip end is always open, the ball remains between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 as shown in FIG. May fall from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball may be caught in another unit (the rotation unit 600 or the like (see FIG. 5)) to cause malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the tip wall member 2560 is disposed at the opening of the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and the curved wall portion 2561d functions as a lid of the opening. Can be reliably prevented from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  As shown in FIG. 82, when the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position, the ball which has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 is a left front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521 g. , And is moved to the front through the gap V1 (see FIG. 78), supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 and extending the first passage forming member 2520 Flow down along the

  In the connection position, the push-in portion 2561f of the tip wall member 2560 abuts on the wall surface of the accommodation recess 422f of the drive-side slide member 420 (the wall surface of the accommodation recess 422f is disposed on the displacement trajectory of the push-in portion 2561f) The curved wall portion 2561 d of the wall member 2560 is rotated in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 82) in which the first passage forming member 2520 protrudes outward. That is, since the rotation of the tip wall member 2560 is generated by the change of the position of the first passage forming member 2520, the driving force of the tip wall member 2560 can be used also as the driving force of the first passage forming member 2520. Thereby, the product cost can be reduced.

  At this time, the tip wall member 2560 is rotated to the posture where the plate portion 2561b is in the surface position with respect to the upper and lower wall portions 2522b at the connection position, so that the ball reaching the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is smoothed. It is possible to send the ball to the flow-down hole 2561c (without jumping as in the case where a step occurs between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b and the plate portion 2561b).

  The ball having passed through the flow-through hole 2561 c is guided to the sensor member 422 c of the drive-side slide member 420 by rolling the rolling wall 2561 d 2 of the curved wall portion 2561 d. That is, the curved wall portion 2561 d has a role to stop the ball that has reached the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 and a role to guide the ball that has been thrown from the first passage forming member 2520 through the flowing hole 2561 c. It is shared by.

  In the connection position (see FIG. 82), the plate portion 2561b is in surface position with the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. The plate portion 2561b is in a state of being inserted inside (upper side in FIG. 82) than the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. That is, the ball can pass through the flow-through hole 2561c only after reaching the connection position (the state in which the ball is stopped by the curved wall portion 2561d is ensured until the connection position is reached).

  Thereby, in a state where the ball remains inside the first passage forming member 2520, the ball is moved to the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 even when the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from the connection position to the release position. Can be reliably prevented from falling. This is maintained even when a plurality of balls are sent in succession.

  With reference to FIG. 83, a case will be described where a plurality of balls are sent in series in the first passage forming member 2520. 83 (a) to 83 (c) are partial front views of the left swinging unit 2500 and the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. FIG. In FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c), the ball passages of the first passage forming member 2520 and the second passage forming member 422 are partially viewed in cross section, and in FIG. 83 (a), the first passage is A state in which the forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position is illustrated, and in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (c), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), and the tip wall member 2560 is rotated. The situation is illustrated.

  Further, in FIG. 83 (a) to FIG. 83 (c), a ball that flows downward following the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the push-in portion 2561f is in contact with the housing recess 422f in the connected state, and includes the concave portion 2561f1 on the lower side of FIG. 83 (a) starting from the abutting position. The recessed portion 2561f1 is recessed closer to the shaft support 516 than the arc C21 centered on the shaft support 516 (see FIG. 37). Therefore, as the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from FIG. 83 (a), the tip wall member 2560 starts to rotate by the biasing force of the torsion spring 2562. In FIG. 83 (a), the ball disposed on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d is a feed ball P21, and the ball disposed on the left side is a residual ball P22.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated, the tip wall member 2560 is rotated, whereby the curved wall portion 2561d enters the inside of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. As a result, the residual sphere P22 is abutted against the abutment wall 2561d, and the downward movement of the residual sphere P22 is stopped.

  On the other hand, since the feed ball P21 is disposed on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d, it does not stop flowing down by the abutment wall 2561d, and passes through the flow-through hole 2561c to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520 It is possible to throw a ball.

  In this case, although the feed ball P21 may be lifted at the upper end of the curved wall portion 2561d (see FIG. 83 (b)), the upper wall portions of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b face each other in the moving direction of the curved wall portion 2561d. Therefore, the feeding ball P21 can be pushed by the wall to ensure that the feeding ball P21 passes through the flow-off hole 2561c. Thereby, the diameter of the opening of the flow-through hole 2561c can be suppressed to the same extent as the diameter of the sphere, and the flow-down path of the ball flowing down the flow-through hole 2561c can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (c), from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (c), and the curved wall portion 2561d is of the drive side slide member 420. Even if the feed ball P21 remains on the side of the curved wall portion 2561d when it is moved above the curved wall portion 422f1, the rolling wall 2561d2 functions as a rolling portion of the feed ball P21, and the rolling wall The feed ball P21 is allowed to flow down while the distance between the lower end of the 2561 d2 and the upper end of the curved wall 422f1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the ball (duration of the first passage before the feed ball P21 flows down) By stopping the member 2520 at the position of FIG. 83 (c) or reducing the speed in the vicinity of FIG. 83 (c)), it is ensured that the ball flows down from the first passage forming member 2520 to the second passage forming member 422. To do It can be.

Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 88. In each embodiment mentioned above, although the case where the 3rd symbol display 81 was arranged in the horizontal direction center position of the follower side slide member 430 was explained, the liquid crystal lifting and lowering unit 3400 in the 3rd embodiment is the 3rd symbol display A device 81 is disposed to the left of the driven slide member 3430 in the left-right direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 84 to 88 are front views of the liquid crystal elevation unit 3400 according to the third embodiment, illustrating the elevation operation of the drive side slide member 420 and the follower side slide member 3430 in chronological order. In FIGS. 84 to 88, the left and right members of the cover member 470 are not shown, and the vicinity of the descent restricting member 415 and the elevating restricting member 417 is partially enlarged.

  Further, FIG. 84 illustrates the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 immediately after contacting the driven slide member 3430. In FIG. 85, the rack 452 is moved upward from the state illustrated in FIG. And FIG. 86 shows a state in which only the drive-side slide member 420 is moved downward from the state of FIG. 85 and is disposed at the lowered position, as shown in FIG. Then, the driven slide member 3430 is dropped from the state shown in FIG. 86, and the separation operation surface 434b which is the lower side surface of the hook portion 434 abuts against the separation inclined portion 417f of the elevation restriction member 417. A state in which the 417 is rotated by a predetermined amount is illustrated, and in FIG. 88, the driven slide member 3430 is further dropped from the state illustrated in FIG. State dynamic side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position is illustrated.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 84 to 88, the liquid crystal lifting unit 3400 includes the base member 410, the drive side slide member 420, the driven side slide member 3430, the drive device 440, the transmission device 450, and the lower front. A plate member 460, a cover member 470, and a solenoid 3480 disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and operating in a mode for preventing the falling of the driven slide member 3430 are provided.

  In the base member 410, the lowering regulating member 415 and the raising regulating member 417 are disposed only on the left side of the front view, and the arrangement of the right side of the front view is omitted.

  The driven-side slide member 3430 has a third symbol display device 81 at a position eccentric to the left in front view from the left and right center position, and a body member 3431 elongated in the left and right direction, and the left and right direction of the body member 3431 Rises in the left and right outer directions at the lower end of the functional portion 432 arranged at both ends, a guide hole 433 which is a hole drilled in the vertical direction in the functional portion 432 and through which the guide rod 451 is inserted A wedge-shaped portion 434 extended in an inclined manner, and a fall preventing portion 435 extended on the back side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end portion of the functional portion 432 (side approaching the other guide hole 433); Mainly to

  The main body member 3431 is provided with a locking convex portion 3431 a which is provided on the upper end thereof so as to be convex leftward in a front view. The locking convex portion 3431 a is a portion that is locked by a solenoid 3480 disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and prevented from falling. The locking convex portion 3431a is inclined downward as its upper surface is directed to the tip in the convex direction.

  The solenoid 3480 includes a rod member 3481 capable of projecting and retracting to the right in a front view, and the lower surface of the rod member 3481 is inclined upward as it goes to the tip in the projecting direction. The solenoid 3480 is in an invaginated state when energized and in an overhanging state when not energized, and in the overhanging state, the end of the rod member 3481 projects to the left and right center relative to the end of the locking projection 3431a. It consists of

  As shown in FIG. 84, the third symbol display device 81 is disposed close to the left in front view. Thus, while securing the size of the third symbol display device 81, the areas divided into the left and right of the third symbol display device 81 are collected at one place (the right side of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 84) By setting it as a large area | region, the freedom degree of the magnitude | size of the movable member which can be arrange | positioned in the vacant area | region can be improved.

  Since the third symbol display device 81 is disposed close to the left side in a front view, the load given to the rack 452 from the driven side slide member 420 is asymmetrical (the left side becomes larger). Since the left and right racks 452 are connected by the drive side slide member 420, the asymmetry of the load on the rack 452 tends to make the postures of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise in a front view.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 84, the wire housing member 423 is disposed at the lower end portion of the left side of the second passage forming member 422 in a front view. At this time, since the center of gravity G31 of the wire housing member 423 is disposed to the left from the center position of the drive side slide member 420, the weight of the wire housing member 423 and the wires housed in the wire housing member 423 causes the drive side The slide member 420 receives a load and may be inclined counterclockwise in a front view.

  As described above, since the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are easily inclined counterclockwise in a front view, rattling of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 during lifting and lowering operations can be obtained by the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack It can be limited to rattle between the state where 452 maintains the horizontal attitude (see FIG. 87) and the state where drive side slide member 420 and rack 452 are inclined counterclockwise in a front view (drive side slide It is possible to prevent the member 420 and the rack 452 from being inclined clockwise in a front view from the horizontal position.

  Therefore, while the lowering regulating member 415 and the raising regulating member 417 disposed on the left side of the front view effectively suppress the inclination of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452, the elevating operation of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 is guided Do. On the other hand, since the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are not inclined to the right in the front view, it is not necessary to arrange the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 outside the functional part 432 on the right in front view Costs (material costs and assembly man-hours) can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the raised position, the wire housing member 423 rises as compared with the state shown in FIG. 84, and its center of gravity G31 is compared with the state shown in FIG. It is moved to the left in front view.

  Therefore, the load in the direction in which the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are inclined in the counterclockwise direction in the front view is increased, and the meshing relationship between the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the raised position, the convex plate 453a is abutted against and supported by the lowering regulating member 415. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the attitude of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 from being inclined counterclockwise in a front view.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at the raised position, the locking convex portion 3431 rides over the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the locking convex portion 3431 is placed on the rod member 3481 .

  At this time, when the rod member 3481 is pushed in the left-right direction along the inclination of the upper surface of the engagement convex portion 3431, the engagement convex portion 3431 can get over the rod member 3481. Thus, the locking projection 3431 can be placed on the rod 3481 of the solenoid 3480 while the solenoid 3480 is not electrically connected.

  As shown in FIG. 86, even if the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered with the driven-side slide member 3430 disposed at the raised position, the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 is the locking projection 3431a of the driven-side slide member 3430. By supporting the lower slide member 3430. The lower slide member 3430 is prevented from moving downward in conjunction with the drive slide member 420, and the lower slide member 3430 is maintained at the raised position.

  At this time, the driven side slide member 3430 is disposed at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is located on the left in front view from the center position, and the center of gravity is located on the left side. Also, the driven slide member 3430 can be suppressed from falling.

  That is, when the position of the center of gravity of the driven slide member 3430 is at the center in the left-right direction, the driven slide member 3430 may be shaken clockwise or counterclockwise in a front view due to vibration or the like. When the driven side slide member 3430 is inclined clockwise in a front view in a state where the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side, there is a risk that the locking convex portion 3431 a may slip off the rod member 3481.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position of the center of gravity of the driven-side slide member 3430 is on the left side in front view, so the driven-side slide member 3430 is inclined clockwise from the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) due to vibration or the like. Being suppressed.

  Therefore, the locking convex portion 3431a tends to be inclined in the direction in which the locking convex portion 3431a approaches the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the contact of the locking convex portion 3431a and the rod member 3481 is maintained. It is suppressed from falling off.

  Therefore, the driven side slide member 3430 can be stably maintained at the raised position without arranging the solenoids 3480 on both sides in the left and right direction of the driven side slide member 3430. Therefore, the number of the solenoids 3480 can be reduced. The operation of the driven slide member 3430 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 87, when the solenoid 3480 is energized and the rod member 3481 is retracted, the driven-side slide member 3430 falls. In the process of the driven-side slide member 3430 falling, since the positions of the hook-shaped portion 434 and the lowering regulating member 415 are shifted in the front-rear direction, the hook-shaped portion 434 is caught on the lowering regulating member 415 and causes malfunction It can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 87, when the collar-like portion 434 falls in a state of being in contact with the separation inclined portion 417f of the elevation restricting member 417, the elevation restricting member 417 is rotated outward (in FIG. 87 counterclockwise) Released state).

  As shown in FIG. 88, when the driven side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position, the elevation restricting member 417 is rotated inward (clockwise in FIG. 88), and the engaging claw portion 417e of the elevation restricting member 417; The bowl-shaped portion 434 is disposed to face in the vertical direction (engaged state).

  As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the elevation restricting member 417 is rotated with respect to the hook-like portion 434 of the driven slide member 3430 so that the state changes from the released state to the engaged state, so that there is no change in posture. To increase the load and posture change amount required to change the released state and the engaged state as compared with the case of engaging in the case where the released state and the engaged state are changed by the elasticity of the member, etc. be able to. This makes it easy to maintain the engaged state in which the hook-like portion 434 of the driven slide member 3430 and the elevation restricting member 417 engage.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the rising restricting member 417 is rotationally operated by the fall of the driven side slide member 3430. That is, there is no need to separately provide a drive device to form the engagement state of the elevation restricting member 417. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above-described embodiments, the opposing wall 422f2 is projected from the lower end of the upper side wall 424b of the connecting member 424 at the lower inclined position. However, the drive-side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment has a curved shape. An opposing wall 4422f2 disposed opposite to the wall 422f1 is configured as a planar wall extending in the vertical direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a partial front view of the drive-side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 89 (b) is a side view of the drive-side slide member 4420 in the arrow LXXXIXb direction view of FIG. 89 (a). 89 (c) is a partial front view of the drive-side slide member 4420. FIG. In FIGS. 89A and 89C, the drive-side slide member 4420 is viewed in cross section at the center position of the connection member 4424 in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the sheet of FIG. 89A). 89 (a) and 89 (b) show the downward inclined state of the connection member 4424, and FIG. 89 (c) shows the upward inclined state of the connection member 4424.

  The connection member 4424 includes an extending claw portion 4424f extending from the lower end portion of the upper side wall portion 424b to the right in a front view.

  The extending claw portion 4424f is disposed to face the curved wall portion 422f1 in the upper inclined state, and is bent in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1 and curved, and as shown in FIG. 89 (b), (B) Left and right direction) A pair of recessed portions are provided in the middle portion.

  The second passage forming member 4422 includes an opposing wall portion 4422f2 disposed to face the curved wall portion 422f1. The facing wall portion 4422f2 is a plate portion extending in the vertical direction along the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the recessed portion is arranged in a manner not to interfere with the extending claw portion 4424f in FIG. 89 (a). In the state, it is extended to a position overlapping with the extending claw portion 4424f.

  According to the present embodiment, in the downward inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (a), a portion (such as a protruding portion) that is broken when the ball collides with the path of the ball is not provided. When the ball is thrown from the ball 520 to the connecting member 4424, it is possible to prevent the member from being broken by colliding with the ball.

  In the upper inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (b), since the extending claw portion 4424f and the facing wall portion 4422f2 guide the ball, it is possible to suppress the ball from being clogged in the vicinity of the sensor member 422c.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 179. In this control example, regardless of whether or not the special symbol is in a definite variation state, the regular symbol's time saving status is configured to be more advantageous for the player than the normal symbol's normal status (low probability status). ing. More specifically, it is compared with the case where it becomes a big hit by the drawing of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the drawing of the special symbol 1) executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. The one that became a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the lottery of the special symbol 2) executed based on the ball entering the second entry ball opening 640a, a large number of prize balls The jackpot type that can be acquired (the jackpot type in which the second specified winning opening 65a is opened) is configured to be easily selected. That is, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the motorized role piece 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640a becomes easy to be released, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be executed. It becomes easy to acquire the award ball. Therefore, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, the electric combination 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is difficult to release, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes difficult to be executed (the lottery of the special symbol 1 is Because it becomes easy to carry out), it becomes difficult to obtain a large number of prize balls even if it becomes a jackpot. Therefore, the normal state of the normal symbol is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the time saving state of the normal symbol.

  In addition, although details will be described later, in the present control example, when the big hit in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol is set with high probability (for example, 97.5%) after the end of the big hit. The time saving state of this normal symbol continues until it becomes the next big hit. That is, when it becomes a jackpot once in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the big hit and the time saving state of the normal symbol are repeated with a high probability (97.5%). Therefore, as long as the short-time condition continues to be set after the big hit, it is possible to repeatedly win the big hit without reducing the holding balls, so it is possible to obtain an advantageous state where it is possible to obtain a large number of winning balls. Hereinafter, the state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol which continues until the jackpot is set next is referred to as a "continuously mode".

  On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability state) of the ordinary symbol, even if the jackpot is reached, it is difficult to set the time saving state of the ordinary symbol after the end of the jackpot. In addition, even if the time saving state of the normal symbol is given, most of the set time shortening state ends by the time the lottery of the special symbol is performed seven times. That is, most of the time period of the normal symbol set after the jackpot is 7 times or less (once or 7 times). As described above, if you win the jackpot during this short state, you will transition to "Running mode" with a high probability (97.5%), but with the jackpot again in the limited number of lottery after the end of the jackpot Because it is difficult to become, in many cases, it will return to the normal state of the normal pattern without becoming a jackpot. That is, the normal state (low probability state) of the ordinary symbol which easily holds the ball, and the big hit where it is difficult to obtain the winning ball (the big hit where the first variable winning device 82a is opened) are easily repeated. Thus, the normal state of the normal symbol is disadvantageous to the player. Hereinafter, for the convenience of description, the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol is referred to as a "normal mode". In addition, the time-shortened state in which the number of times there is a possibility of transitioning after the end of the big hit, which ends after the big hit is over when the lottery of a predetermined number of special symbols is executed, is referred to as "preparation mode".

  The game can be sharpened by providing the player with the “continuous mode” which is advantageous for the player and the “normal mode” which is disadvantageous for the player. Thus, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 90-96, the aspect of the various effects performed in the pachinko machine 10 is demonstrated. FIG. 90 and FIG. 91 (a) are diagrams showing an example of the variation display (variation pattern effect) executed when the drawing of the special symbol is executed in the "normal mode" (the normal state of the normal symbol). FIGS. 91 (b) and 92 are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode to be executed in the jackpot when the jackpot in the "normal mode" is obtained, and Figs. 93 to 96 are a jackpot. In the case of transition to the "preparation mode" after completion (a short period of time has been granted once or seven times), it is an effect mode that indicates whether to shift from the "preparation mode" to the "continuous mode". It is a figure showing an example.

  First, with reference to FIG. 90 and FIG. 91 (a), an effect mode when variable display is performed in the "normal mode" will be described. In the “normal mode”, it is informed whether the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit by the numbers (numbers) displayed for the effect section 331 of the upper lifting unit 300. More specifically, among the five types of numbers (predetermined) selected in advance by the player, any one of four types is displayed on each of the display portions 331a to 331d constituting the effect portion 331. As a result, the jackpot is notified. On the other hand, when at least one of the display portions 331a to 331d displays a number different from any of the predetermined five types of numbers, it is notified that the special symbol is out.

  The combination of five types of numbers indicating the lottery results of the special symbols is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), a combination of five types of numbers inside a small rectangular region Ds2 formed on the right side in the front view in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (Lucky number) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 90 (a), five types of “2”, “7”, “13”, “17” and “25” are displayed as a combination (lucky number) of five types determined in advance. ing. Further, in the large area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, characters of "Let's get a lucky number!" Are displayed. By these display contents, five kinds of numbers ("2", "7", "13", "17", "25") displayed as lucky numbers are displayed on the effect part 331, and a special symbol is displayed. The player can easily recognize that the player is going to win the jackpot. The player can select, for example, the five types of lucky numbers displayed in the small area Ds2 from the game menu screen. The game menu screen is a screen displayed by operating the frame button 22 in the game stop state, for example. By setting the lucky number to be selectable by the player, the combination of the numbers (patterns) displayed on the effect part 331 in the case of winning a special symbol is set to the player's favorite number (pattern). Can. That is, the winning symbol can be changed in accordance with the taste of each player.

  Further, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a holding symbol indicating the current number of holding balls is displayed on the inside of the vertically elongated, substantially rectangular small region Ds1 formed on the left side in front view. In the example of FIG. 90 (a), since the case where the number of holding balls is four is shown, four holding symbols displayed as black circles are displayed in the small area Ds1. The player can easily recognize the number of holding balls by visually recognizing the number of the holding symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (a), when the lottery of the special symbol is started, the variable display of the symbol is executed in each of the display parts 331a to 331d of the effect part 331. When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a number different from the lucky number is displayed on at least one display section (see FIG. 90 (b)). FIG. 90 (b) shows the display unit 331b and the display unit 331c with numbers ("8" and "1") different from the lucky number displayed in the out-of-order variable display, and the display unit 331a and the display An example in which a lucky number (“17” and “2”) is displayed is shown in a section 331 d.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (b), when the combination of dislodging is stopped and displayed on the effect part 331, the character "Sorry ..." in the large area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out.

  The numbers displayed on the display portions 331a to 331d of the effect portion 331 are set differently depending on whether the numbers are lucky numbers. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), when any number defined as the lucky number is displayed, a white number is displayed (display sections 331a, 331d). On the other hand, when a number different from the lucky number is displayed, the number is displayed in black letters (display portions 331 b and 331 c). By changing the display mode of the numbers according to whether or not the number is a lucky number, the player can more easily recognize whether or not the number displayed on each of the display portions 331a to 331d is a lucky number. be able to.

  In this control example, the lucky number is displayed in white and the numbers other than the lucky number are displayed in black. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be able to easily distinguish whether it is a lucky number or not by displaying the lucky number in red letters, setting the background of the lucky number to be red and setting the background of numbers other than the lucky number to be white. It may be configured to be able to easily distinguish whether it is a lucky number or not, and it may be configured to be easily distinguishable whether or not it is a lucky number by increasing the character size of the lucky number.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, any one of five types of lucky numbers is displayed on each of the display portions 331a to 331d. In the example of FIG. 91 (a), among the five numbers (“2”, “7”, “13”, “17”, “25”) that are lucky numbers, “17”, “25”, “ 2 "and" 13 "are displayed as white numbers respectively. In addition to displaying a lucky number on each of the display portions 331a to 331d, the character "Success !!" is displayed on the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. With these display contents, it is possible to easily recognize that the player has made a big hit.

  In this control example, although four out of the five types of lucky numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed on each of the display portions 331a to 331d one by one, the configuration is such that a big hit is notified. Not limited to this. For example, the jackpot may be notified by simply displaying the same number on each of the display portions 331a to 331d without defining the lucky number. As a result, it is sufficient to focus only on whether the same numbers are identical or not, and it is not necessary to compare the lucky numbers with the numbers displayed on the display portions 331a to 331d. It can be made easy. Further, for example, the variable display of the symbols may not necessarily be performed by each of the display portions 331a to 331d, and the variable display of the symbols may be performed in the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, since each display part 331a-331d can be abbreviate | omitted, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Moreover, the yield rate at the time of production can be improved by the reduction of the number of parts. Also, the failure rate can be reduced.

  Next, the effects performed at the jackpot in the “normal mode” will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 (b) and 92. Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the first variable winning device 82a repeats the opening for 0.6 seconds and the closing for 0.9 seconds 20 times per round (opening pattern A And an opening pattern (opening pattern B) in which opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once per round. In FIG. 91 (b) and FIG. 92, the jackpot effect when the open pattern A is set will be described.

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display content in the jackpot in which the release pattern A is set. Here, when the jackpot type in which the open pattern A is set in the “normal mode” is won, first, the drive-side slide member 420 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 are connected. Placed in position. Thereafter, the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed in accordance with the opening pattern A. By connecting the drive-side slide member 420 and the first passage forming member 520 before setting the opening pattern A, all balls winning to the first variable winning device 82a can be made the first passage forming member It can be made to flow down to the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 via 520. In this control example, every time the ball entering the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 (every time passage of the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c of the second passage forming member 422) A time-shortening suggestion effect is performed to indicate whether or not the time-shortening state of the normal symbol is set.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the characters “Let's arrange lucky numbers !!” are displayed in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. In each of the display portions 331a to 331d, the lucky number displayed when informing the big hit continues to be displayed during the big hit. Furthermore, in the effect part 422a of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, the variable display of the symbol is executed. The player displays the remaining one type of number different from the number displayed on each of the display portions 331a to 331d among the five types of lucky numbers (refer to the small area Ds2) by these display contents. It is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that an advantageous time saving state is set. In the variable display of the symbol performed in the effect unit 422a, the stop display is performed every time the ball reaches the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 (the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c).

  FIG. 92 (a) is a diagram showing a case where the ball entering the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal lifting and lowering unit 400, and the detachment is notified. As shown in FIG. 92 (a), when out-of-range is notified, the effect section 422a is a number different from the lucky number (see the small area Ds2) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. "3" is displayed stopped. Further, for the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "failure ..." are displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is undecided whether or not the time saving state is given after the end of the jackpot. In addition, even if the disconnection is notified, if the open period of the open pattern A remains, the fluctuation display (refer to FIG. 91 (b)) of the symbol is resumed in the effect section 422a. That is, the more the variable display is performed as the ball enters the first variable winning device 82a, the more the variable display is executed, so it is possible to positively make the ball want to win the first variable winning device 82a . Thus, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved.

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the ball entering the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal lifting and lowering unit 400, and the time saving state of the normal symbol is notified. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), when it is determined that the ball has passed through the sensor member 422c of the liquid crystal lifting and lowering unit 400, "7" which is one kind of lucky number is displayed for the effect portion 422a. Stop display. That is, among the five types of lucky numbers, numbers different from the four types of lucky numbers displayed in a stopped state on the display portions 331a to 331d in order to notify a big hit are stopped and displayed. Further, for the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, characters of “very successful !! roulette chance GET !!” are displayed. These displays make it possible for the player to easily recognize transition to the "preparation mode" (time saving state of the normal symbol) after the jackpot is over.

  In this control example, a number (symbol) different from the lucky number is displayed on the effect unit 422a when not transitioning to the "preparation mode", and is defined as the lucky number when transitioning to the "preparation mode" Although it is comprised so that one of a number (pattern) may be displayed on the presentation part 422a, it is not restricted to this. For example, an image of a wall may be displayed on the effect unit 422a at the start of the jackpot, and an effect may be performed in which the wall displayed is broken little by little each time passage of a ball is detected by the sensor member 422c. Then, as the wall collapses, the lucky number displayed behind the wall is exposed, and the wall completely collapses so that the lucky number can be acquired ("preparation mode" is notified). May be In this manner, whenever the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a is detected by the sensor member 422c, the player is given an effect such that the acquisition of the lucky number is approaching. On the other hand, it is possible to launch the ball more positively during the big hit. Thus, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game.

  In this control example, when the "preparation mode" is notified, the lucky number is displayed to the effect unit 422a, but the numbers (patterns) displayed to the effect unit 422a are necessarily lucky. It is not limited to the number. A symbol unrelated to the lucky number may be displayed, or, for example, the transition to the "preparation mode" may be notified by displaying a symbol with the letter "V".

  In this control example, in the big hit where “the open pattern A” is set, the variable display is performed each time the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c, but the variable display is always performed each time the ball is detected. It is not necessary to notify (informing whether or not to shift to the preparation mode). For example, the variable display may be performed only once during the jackpot. Specifically, for example, an effect (variation display) as to whether or not the lucky number is displayed is triggered by the passage of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls through the sensor member 422c. It is also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more positively launch the ball in order to quickly know whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode". Thus, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved. In this case, if the number of balls passing through the sensor member 422c is less than a predetermined number (for example, 10) before the final round of the big hit is over, the "preparation mode" is entered in the ending period. Whether to shift or not may be notified, or it may be configured to notify whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode" when the jackpot is finished and the first variable display is executed. Thereby, even if it is not possible to enter a predetermined number of balls into the first variable winning device 82a during a big hit, it is informed whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode". Since this is possible, it is possible to make the player accurately grasp the gaming state after the big hit. In addition, the number of balls to be awarded to the first variable winning device 82a does not need to be fixed each time an effect (variation display) of whether or not the lucky number is displayed is performed, and the "opening pattern A" It may be varied by lottery or the like each time the jackpot is set.

  In this control example, the variation display is performed each time a ball is detected by the sensor member 422 c in the jackpot where the “opening pattern A” is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variation display may be performed each time the passage of the sphere is detected a predetermined number of times (for example, twice or five times) by the sensor member 422c. By this configuration, even if the ball continuously wins the first variable winning device 82a, it is possible to provide a sufficient time interval from the completion of each change to the start of the next change. (It is possible to prevent the start condition of the next change from being established during the change). Therefore, it is possible to make the player more surely confirm the result of each variable display.

  In addition, although illustration was omitted, at the big hit of the open pattern (open pattern B) in which only one open of 0.052 seconds per round is performed, it is immediately notified whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode". Ru. That is, when shifting to the "preparation mode" after a big hit, a lucky number is displayed to the effect unit 422a when the first variable winning device 82a is opened regardless of whether or not the ball has won a prize. On the other hand, when not transitioning to the "preparation mode", a number (pattern) different from the lucky number is displayed when the first variable winning device 82a is opened.

  The jackpot for which the “opening pattern B” is set will be described in detail. The jackpot for which "Open Pattern B" is set consists of an opening period of 3 seconds, a round period of 0.052 seconds (for 2 rounds), an interval period of 0.5 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds. It is done. That is, the jackpot ends in about 6.6 seconds. The variable display of the symbol is executed in the effect part 422a using the 6.6 seconds. Then, when transitioning to the "preparation mode" after a big hit, the lucky number is stopped and displayed on the effect unit 422a when 5.6 seconds have elapsed, and the lucky number continues to be displayed for about 1 second of the remaining big hit. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the player has shifted to the “preparation mode”. On the other hand, when shifting to the “normal mode” after a big hit, a number different from the lucky number is stopped and displayed on the effect section 422a. This makes it easy to recognize transition to the “normal mode”. By performing the presentation of whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode" during the jackpot in which the "opening pattern B" is set, it is possible to cause the directing unit 422a to focus attention during the jackpot period. That is, even if the "open pattern B" is set, in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened only for a short time (0.052 seconds) (that is, it is extremely difficult to obtain a winning ball), During the opening period, the player's attention can be diverted from the first variable winning device 82a. Therefore, it can be made difficult to recognize that "the open pattern B" has been set as a jackpot, so that it can be recognized as if it is one aspect of the fluctuation effect selected in the "normal mode". That is, the player can be made to recognize as if the “normal mode” is directly shifted to the “preparation mode”. Therefore, the "open pattern A" is set to be a big hit, and a lucky number is given to the effect portion 422a by a short suggestion effect executed by causing the ball to win the first variable winning device 82a during the big hit. Because it can be recognized that there may be a transition to the "preparation mode" without going through multiple steps of displaying the "," it may be easier for the player to transition to the "preparation mode" It can make you feel like that. Thus, the player's motivation for the game can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93 to FIG. 96, an example of effects in the case of transitioning to the “preparation mode” after completion of the big hit (one or seven short-durations are given) will be described. As described above, in the present control example, when the jackpot occurs in the time saving state of the normal symbol, after the jackpot is finished, the “long-running mode” (next jackpot and advantageous) for the player with high probability (for example, 97.5%). Transition to the time saving condition of the normal symbol which continues until it becomes. In the "run mode", the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily performed. When the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is achieved, the jackpot type (probable jackpot H to K, usually jackpot B) in which the second specified winning opening 65a is opened is selected, so more prize balls for the player It can be earned. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a game with one goal to shift to the advantageous “continuous mode”.

  In order to shift from the “normal mode” to the “continuous mode”, it is basically necessary to shift to the “preparation mode” and to win a jackpot during the “preparation mode”. Therefore, whether or not to become a big hit in the "preparation mode" will determine the degree of advantage of the player playing the game on the pachinko machine 10, and this is one of the most important scenes in the game. For this reason, in the present control example, in this "preparation mode", a relatively large (flashy) "representative mode suggestive effect" involving the rotational operation of the rotary member 640 (see FIG. 45) (see FIGS. 94 and 95). Is configured to perform.

  Although the details will be described later, in this "series continuous mode suggestive effect", the ball B is thrown by the throwing device 650 while the rotary member 640 (see FIG. 45) configured to imitate the roulette operates. Depending on the type of the pocket (the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647) in which the ball B falls, an effect of notifying whether or not the mode has been shifted to the "continuous mode" is executed. More specifically, the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotating member 640 are divided into a hit pocket and an out pocket, and the ball B thrown from the throwing device 650 falls into the hit pocket. By doing this, it is informed that the mode has been shifted to the "continuous mode". A back surface LED 625 is provided on the back surface side of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 97). The back side LED 625 is controlled to light so that the back side of the hit pocket is lit and the back side of the disengaging pocket is turned off. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the position of the hit pocket by visually recognizing the lit pocket.

  Specifically, “Renso mode suggestive effect” is an effect (lucky number increase effect) for setting (lighting) a hit pocket and an effect for throwing ball B to any pocket of the rotating member 640 (roulette chance) And an ending effect. In the lucky number increase effect, each time a ball enters the second entrance 640a, a lottery is performed to determine whether to increase the hit pocket (lucky number). Since the player can be made to think that it has become easier to shift to the “continuous mode” by increasing the hit pocket, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, in the lottery whether or not to increase the hit pocket, whether the transition to the "continuous mode" has been decided (is it changing during the probability change jackpot, or "in continuous mode" in the holding ball Depending on whether or not the probability variation jackpot is present), the lottery probability of whether or not to increase the hit pocket is made different. Specifically, when the transition to the “continuous mode” has been determined, the increase in the hit pocket with a high probability (the ratio of 25% every time the ball enters the second entrance 640 a) Is determined. On the other hand, if the transition to "Running mode" is undecided, or if it is determined to return to "Normal mode" without shifting to "Running mode" (the end of the short period when set) In the case where the drawing of the special symbol is out), the increase of the hit pocket is determined with a low probability (the ratio of 5% every time the ball enters the second entrance 640a). Since the hit pocket is more likely to be increased when the transition to the "run mode" is decided, the player's expectation for the "run mode" is improved by the hit pocket being increased. Can.

  In addition, before increasing the hit pocket, a pocket with the same number as the lucky number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as the hit pocket. That is, the lucky number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has a role for informing the big hit of the special symbol in the "normal mode" (see FIG. 91 (a)), and after the big hit is finished, the "prepare mode". In addition to the role for informing whether or not to shift (see FIG. 92B), it also serves as informing of whether or not to shift to the “continuous mode”. Since the lucky number is used for various notices that are advantageous to the player, it is possible to easily make the player understand the result of each effect by grasping the lucky number. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easier to understand. In addition, the notification of the jackpot of the special symbol in the "normal mode" and the notification of the "preparation mode" (time saving state of the normal symbol) executed in the jackpot, and the "run mode" executed in the "preparation mode" In the notification of, all the effects aimed to obtain a lucky number are executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if it were one effect for these three types of different notifications. Therefore, an effect with a sense of unity can be performed.

  The details of the lucky number increase presentation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 (a) is a diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the lucky number increase effect. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), during the effect of increasing the lucky number, the character "in preparation for roulette chance" is displayed for the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the roulette chance effect is performed by the rotating member 640 configured to simulate the roulette.

  Further, below the letters "in preparation for roulette chance", the letters "right-handed and increase lucky number !!" are displayed. By this character being displayed, it is possible for the player that the hit pocket may be increased by hitting (right hitting) the ball toward the right side of the game board 13 while the lucky number increase effect is being executed. It can be informed. Therefore, in the "preparation mode" where the lucky number increase effect is set, the player can be made to hit the right, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is advantageous for the player is executed in the time saving state of the normal symbol. It will be easier. Therefore, since the game can be played under the advantageous conditions of the player, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 93 (b) is a diagram showing display contents when the hit pocket (lucky number) is increased in the lucky number increase presentation. As shown in FIG. 93, when a winning (in-ball) to the second entrance 640 a is detected during execution of the lucky number increase effect, and the winning lottery for the winning pocket is won, the third symbol display device 81 adds an additional A hit pocket (lucky number) is notified. That is, in the large area Dm, the characters “10 GET !!” are displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the hit pocket has increased by one point, so that the player can be pleased. When an increase in the hit pocket is notified, the back side of the hit pocket is set to the lighting state. Thereby, the position of the contact pocket in the rotation member 640 can be easily determined.

  In the first control example, it is configured that a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the hit pocket (lucky number) is to be increased in response to the ball entering the second entrance 640a. The opportunity to increase the pocket (lucky number) is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to perform lottery for whether or not to increase the hit pocket (lucky number) triggered by passing through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, or according to the elapsed time (for example, big hit end It may be configured to make a lottery to determine whether or not to increase the pocket (lucky number) every 3 seconds from the beginning, or every 5 spheres are fired according to the number of balls ejected (for example, A lottery may be performed to determine whether to increase the hit pocket (lucky number).

  In the first control example, the lottery probability of whether or not to increase the hit pocket during execution of the lucky number increase effect is made to differ depending on whether or not the transition to the “continuously mode” is determined. However, the variation of the lottery probability may be further increased. For example, when the transition to the “continuous mode” is determined, and when it is undecided whether to shift to the “continuous mode” (when the number of start winnings in the time saving state is set, the short period of time) The probability (proportion) that the increase in the hit pocket is determined may be different between the case where it does not meet the condition and the case where it is decided not to shift to the “continuous mode”. Specifically, for example, when the shift to the “continuous mode” is determined at the time of the lottery, a relatively high probability (for example, 25% of the case of entering the second entry ball opening 640a If it is determined that the hit pocket (lucky number) is increased at a ratio of 1) and it is determined not to shift to the “continuous mode”, then a relatively high probability (for example, the second entry ball opening 640a It may be configured such that the hit pocket is increased at a rate of 5% when entering the ball. In addition, if it is undecided whether or not to shift to the “continuous mode”, the probability between the above two cases (for example, the ratio of 10% when entering the second entrance 640 a) The pocket may be configured to be increased. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give variation to how to increase the hit pocket, so the interest in the lucky number increase presentation is further improved, and further, for example, it is not decided whether or not to shift to the "continuously mode". In this case, the probability that the pocket is increased may be different according to the number of times set as the "preparation mode". That is, when the "preparation mode" in which the short time is once is set, the probability that the hit pocket is increased is low as compared with the case where the "shortcut mode" is set in seven times. You may More specifically, for example, the configuration may be such that the hit pocket (lucky number) is increased at a rate of 8% when the short time is once and 12% when the short time is seven. As a result, since it is possible to predict a short period of time from the degree of increase of the hit pocket (lucky number), it is possible to expect to shift to the “continuous mode” by increasing the hit pocket. In addition, it is possible to expect a short period of time of seven times which is advantageous for the player (there is a lot of chance to shift to the "continuous mode").

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94 and FIG. 95, the roulette chance presentation, which is one of the presentation that constitutes the “continuous presentation mode suggestion presentation”, will be described. In this roulette chance effect production, as described above, it is an effect for informing whether or not to shift to the “continuous mode” depending on whether or not the ball B falls into the pocket.

  When the roulette chance effect is executed, first, the character "roulette chance !!" is displayed for the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and a "ball in the bright pocket" appears below the character. When it falls down, the text "Ranso mode" is displayed. Thus, it is possible to make the player understand that the ball B falls into the pocket of which the back surface side is set to the lighting state among the pockets of the rotating member 640 to shift to the "continuous mode". .

  FIG. 94 (b) is a view showing a state in which the arm member 664 of the ball throwing device 650 is rotated (see FIG. 65) and the ball B performs a swing operation on the holding piece 677 in the projecting position. In FIG. 94 (b), the contact pocket of the rotation member 640 is hatched, and the loose pocket is white.

  In the roulette chance effect, the ball B is dropped to the target pocket (either the out-of-pocket or the hit pocket) when the cycle of the rocking motion of the ball B becomes less than a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 second) (The holding piece 677 is immersed into the immersion position). By causing the ball B to rock once on the holding piece 677 and dropping the ball B after the period of the rocking becomes small, it can be thought as if the ball B is falling naturally. That is, since the movement of the ball B can be made to pay more attention when the ball B is swinging on the holding piece 677, it is possible to improve the interest to the player's roulette chance effect presentation. In the following description, of the roulette chance effects, a series of effects from when the ball B is thrown toward the holding piece 677 to when it falls into any pocket is referred to as a swing effect.

  FIG. 95 (a) is a view showing the case where the ball B is dropped into the pocket. Here, when the ball B falls out into the pocket, specifically, the swing effect is executed without making a big hit in the drawing of the special symbol during the "preparation mode" (start of the swing effect) At the time, outliers are being executed, or in the case of a fluctuating stop). In this case, since the transition to the “continuous mode” is not determined at the start of the swing effect, control is performed so that the ball B falls into the out pocket.

  When the swing effect is started without becoming a big hit of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. The ball B is controlled to fall from the holding piece 677 as it is placed. Further, the character “Sorry” is displayed on the effect part 422 a of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the transition from the "preparation mode" to the "continuous mode" can not be made.

  On the other hand, when it is determined to shift to the “continuous mode” at the start of the swing production, as shown in FIG. The ball B is controlled to fall from the holding piece 677 in accordance with the placement of the In addition, the characters “big success” are displayed on the effect part 422 a of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. As a result, the player can be easily recognized to shift to the "continuous mode".

  In addition, when the ball B falls into the disengaging pocket or the hitting pocket, as described above, the cantilever plate 683 of the guide member 680 is pushed down by the weight of the ball B, and the limit switch is turned on. By detecting the on state of the limit switch, it can be easily determined that the ball B falls normally. When the drop of the ball B is detected, the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 is stopped. In other words, the pocket (the pocket into which the ball B fell) to which the number (identification information) indicating the rendering result in the present “continuously mode suggestive presentation” is attached is stopped immediately below the holding piece 677 as the ball B falls. Ru. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the result of the effect by observing the same position (immediately below the holding piece 677) in each of the “continuous mode suggestive effects”. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect in which the result of the effect is easier to understand.

  As described above, the arrangement of each pocket while the rotating member 640 is rotating monitors the output of each of the detection sensors A to F (see FIG. 76) disposed on the guide member 680, and outputs It is determined by the combination of That is, the combination of the outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F (rotational position detection sensor 684) determines the type of the pocket disposed immediately below the holding piece 677. In the following description, the position immediately below the holding piece 677 will be referred to as the falling position.

  In this control example, in the state where the ball B is swinging on the holding piece 677, the pocket type of the drop position is specified (discriminated) from the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F. Then, according to the determination result, the type of the pocket (pocket adjacent to the pocket currently disposed at the drop position) disposed to the drop position next to the pocket currently disposed at the drop position is discriminated Be done. The pocket type to be placed next to the falling position corresponds to the pocket type (whether it is a hit pocket or a loose pocket) to which the ball B is dropped in the swing effect of this time, and the ball B swings. If the operation cycle is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 second), the ball B is dropped to the pocket to be placed next to the drop position.

  Here, not the type of the pocket at the drop position but the type of the pocket to be disposed at the next drop position by the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 is actually determined after the ball B is determined to be dropped. It takes time for the ball to reach the pocket at the falling position. That is, it is because a time lag occurs from the start of the operation of the holding piece 677 to the retracted position by driving the drive motor (motor for holding piece) 675 and the actual falling of the ball B. Assuming that the pocket type of the drop position is determined to execute drop control of the ball B (operation to the immersive position of the holding piece 677), it takes a long time until the ball B actually drops, For example, there is a possibility that the ball B may drop after the target pocket passes. Also, for example, while the ball B is dropping the ball throwing passage 655a, the ball B is thrown by moving the dividing plate 647 provided on the right side in a front view of the pocket arranged at the dropping position. The passage 655a and the partition plate 647 may pinch the member, which may hinder the rotational operation of the rotating member 640.

  On the other hand, in this control example, the determination of the type of the pocket to be placed next at the drop position and the drop control of the ball B based on the determination result are executed before the pocket is placed at the drop position. Are configured to That is, when the ball B is dropped, the holding piece 677 is moved to the retracted position at a timing when it can be dropped sufficiently to the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the dropped position). It can be immersive. Therefore, the ball B can be dropped to the target type pocket more reliably. Therefore, despite the fact that the ball B does not shift to the "connected mode", the ball B falls into the pocket and, conversely, the transition to the "connected mode" is determined, The ball B can be prevented (suppressed) from falling off and falling into the pocket.

  In this control example, the type of the pocket disposed at the drop position next to the pocket currently disposed at the drop position is determined to execute the drop control of the ball B, but It is not limited to this. For example, the type of the pocket two pieces ahead or the pocket three pieces ahead from the current drop position may be determined in advance, and the drop control of the ball B to the determined pocket may be executed. With this configuration, the drop control can be executed with more margin, so that the ball B can be reliably dropped to the targeted pocket.

  When the rotation of the rotating member 640 is stopped based on the fact that the ball B is detected to be out of the pocket or dropped into the hit pocket, and a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from that stop, The ending which shows the end of "mode suggestion production" is started. In the ending, the third symbol display device 81 notifies the result of the effect anew, and the rotating member 640 is in the opposite direction to the direction of the rotational operation (that is, the clockwise direction in front view) in the “in continuous mode suggestive effect”. Make it rotate. This rotation operation is performed until the rotation member 640 is disposed at a position (for example, for five pockets in the counterclockwise direction) where the ball B dropped from the holding piece 677 can be rolled to the return passage 655b. continue. In the process of the rotation operation of the rotation member 640, when the pocket in which the ball B has fallen in the upper right direction in front view is arranged with respect to the return passage 655b, the ball B falls from the opening of the pocket to the return passage 655b. . When the ball B falls into the return passage 655 b, the ball B rolls along the inclination of the rolling portion 655 b 1 and is disposed to the ball holding portion 652. In this manner, during the ending, by returning the ball B to a state where it can be thrown by the throwing device 650, an effect of causing the ball B to fall into any pocket is executed in each "continuous home mode suggestive effect" can do.

  In addition, when the rotation operation for returning the ball B performed during the ending to the ball holding portion 652 is finished, the rotating member 640 is kept in the stopped state until “the continuous rendering mode suggestion effect” is performed next. Get down. That is, the arrangement of the rotary member 640 after the end of the "in-line mode suggestive effect" varies depending on the pocket in which the ball B falls. The time until the end of the rotation operation can be shortened by causing the arrangement of the rotation member 640 not to return to a predetermined position, but to rotate by five pockets from the position where the ball B is merely dropped. Therefore, the operation of the rotating member 640 can be reliably ended during the ending of the “in-line mode suggestive effect”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, an additional effect to be performed to make the player expect to shift to the "preparation mode" or the "continuous mode" in the "normal mode" will be described. The term "overlay" as used herein means adding (adding) the number of winning pockets (number of lucky numbers) in the roulette chance production of "continuously mode-promptive directing", and it takes up all of the holding balls If “Renso mode suggestive rendering” is executed in the meantime, the number of pockets that hit the player is increased by the number added by the additional rendering. By adding a winning pocket (lucky number), it can be thought as if the roulette chance effect is more likely to be hit, so the player's expectation for the roulette chance effect can be enhanced.

  Whether or not the additional effect is to be executed is determined by a lottery (an additional lottery) which is executed when the winning of the first entrance 64 is suspended in the “normal mode”. In this additional lottery, the proportion of the determined additional effect differs depending on the content of each holding ball. Specifically, among the holding balls, the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "preparation mode" (the jackpot for which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set), and the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "series mode" The execution of the additional effect is determined at the highest rate (25%) when there is (a probability variation jackpot during the time saving state of the normal symbol) (when it is determined that the roulette chance effect will be successful). On the other hand, when the holding ball does not include the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "continuous mode" or the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "preparation mode" (when the roulette chance effect is not executed) In addition, the execution of the additional effect is determined at the lowest rate (5%). Furthermore, when the holding ball does not include the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “continuous mode”, but only the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “preparation mode” is included (only execution of the roulette chance effect is performed Is determined, and when the rendering result is undecided), the execution of the additional rendering is determined at a ratio (15%) between the two cases described above.

  As described above, as the lottery result included in the holding ball is more advantageous to the player, the execution of the additional effect is determined more easily, so that the additional effect is performed, By digesting the holding balls, it can be expected that the player will be in an advantageous state. Thus, the player's willingness to play can be improved.

  Next, a specific aspect of the additional effect will be described with reference to FIG. 96 (a). As shown in FIG. 96 (a), when the holding ball increases in the "normal mode", the holding symbol (symbol indicated by a black circle) displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is increased by one. There are three. In addition, when the execution of the additional effect is decided by the additional lottery which is executed triggered by the increase of the holding balls, the character of "over !!!! + 1" is displayed on the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, “+1” indicating the cumulative addition number is displayed below the lucky number displayed in the small area Ds2. The display of the number of additions to the small area Ds2 is performed until the effect of increasing the number of pockets added for the number added in the case of the “in continuous mode suggestive effect” is performed when the “in continuous mode suggestive effect” is executed. Continue to be displayed. On the other hand, although the addition effect is executed, the execution of the addition effect is determined when the “continuously suggestive mode indication effect” is not executed (when the holding ball does not include the jackpot for which the time saving state is set) The accumulated number of additions continues to be displayed until the holding ball that triggered the game is consumed (the drawing of the special symbol based on the holding ball ends).

  FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing the display content when one hit pocket (lucky number) is added by the additional effect, and then "in-line mode suggestive effect" is started during digestion of the holding ball. is there. As described above, the "continuous mode suggestive effect" is executed when the special symbol is a big hit in the "normal mode" and the time saving state of the normal symbol is set after the big hit. Therefore, at the start of the "in-line mode suggestive effect", the lucky numbers (i.e., "17", "25", "2", "13") displayed at the time of notification of the big hit for each of the display portions 331a to 331d. The symbol) is continuously displayed, and the lucky number (that is, the symbol of "7") displayed at the time of notification of the "preparation mode" is further displayed to the effect part 422a (see FIG. 96 (b)).

  In addition, when "Sansu mode suggestion effect" is started in the added state, as part of the lucky number increase effect, the effect of notifying the lucky number added in the added effect in the "normal mode" is executed Ru. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the characters “The added lucky number” is displayed for the large area Dm. Then, the letters "5 GET !!" are displayed below the letters. Since this character is displayed inside the balloon generated from the location where the cumulative addition number is displayed, the player had the lucky number “5” added by the addition effect before becoming a jackpot. You can recognize that. Moreover, the pocket of the rotation member 640 corresponding to the lucky number notified by this effect is newly set as a hit pocket. That is, the pocket to which the number "5" is attached is set to the lighting state. By performing the effect of increasing the hit pocket (lucky number), it is felt as if the possibility of being notified of the hit (transition to the “continuous mode”) being high in the roulette chance effect performed subsequently is increased be able to. Thus, the player's expectation for the roulette chance effect can be enhanced.

  As described above, in this control example, in the “normal mode”, an additional effect that is easy to be executed as the lottery result advantageous to the player is held is provided. As a result, the player can be expected to shift to various advantageous states only by executing the additional effect. For example, since the percentage to be executed when the jackpot type for which the "preparation mode" is set is set after the jackpot is held is high, the jackpot effect usually becomes a jackpot (when the jackpot effect is not executed) You can play games with greater expectation than you can. This is because if the jackpot is achieved, the degree of expectation for transitioning to the "preparation mode" also increases.

  Also, if the player is expected to win a jackpot, the player can be made to recognize that the degree of expectation to shift to the "prepare mode" is higher than normal (when the additional effect is not executed). It is possible to more strongly expect the lucky number to be displayed to the effect unit 422a during the jackpot game. Furthermore, at the time of execution of the additional effect, the case where the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "continuous mode" is suspended is compared with the case where the transition to the "continuous mode" is not determined. Since the execution ratio of the additional effect is configured to be high, if the player is notified of the "preparation mode" as expected by the player, the player is expected to shift to the "continuously mode" more than usual. It can be made to recognize. Therefore, the player can be more strongly expected to shift to the “continuous mode”. Therefore, by performing the additional effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in stages, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In this control example, the case where it is decided to shift to the "continuous mode" within the range of the holding ball, and the case where only the transition to the "preparation mode" is decided within the range of the holding ball The ratio (probability) for performing the extra effect is different in the three cases where the transition to the "preparation mode" is not made (25%, 10%, 5%, respectively), but the extra effect is executed The lottery probability of whether or not may be divided more finely. More specifically, for example, in the case where all the holding balls are out, the additional effect is executed at a rate (probability) of 3%, the holding balls include the lottery result corresponding to the big hit, and as the big hit type If only the jackpot type to shift to the “normal mode” is included after the jackpot, the additional effect may be performed at a rate (probability) of 5%. In addition, it is 7% when it is decided that it does not shift to the "continuously mode" at the time of the addition lottery that the big hit type which shifts to the "preparation mode" is included in the reserve ball, and it is decided at the time of the addition lottery. The additional effect may be executed at a ratio (probability) of Here, in the case where it is determined that the shift to the “continuous mode” is not determined, for example, only the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot type to which a short time is given at one time is suspended. This is the case, for example, when the additional lottery is executed because the holding ball corresponding to the lottery result is newly reserved. Furthermore, when only the transition to the "preparation mode" is decided at the time of the additional drawing lottery, the additional effect is determined at a rate (probability) of 10%, and the "continuously mode" is selected. If the transition is determined, the additional effect may be performed at a rate (probability) of 25%.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to divide into finer stages and have a sense of expectation for various advantageous states. That is, it is possible to make the jackpot stronger than usual (when the additional effect is not performed) at the time the additional effect is performed. This is because if the jackpot is achieved, expectations for the transition to the “preparation mode” and the transition to the “continuous mode” increase. Then, when a jackpot is achieved as the player expects, it can be expected that the switch to the "preparation mode" will be notified in the jackpot more than usual. This is because if the transition to the "preparation mode" is made after the addition effect, the degree of expectation for the transition to the "continuous mode" becomes high. Furthermore, when a jackpot occurs as expected by the player, it is more strongly expected that the roulette chance rendition performed in the "preparation mode" will notify the hit (that is, the transition to the "continuous mode"). It can be done.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 to 102, lighting control of the rear surface LED 625 will be described. As described above, the back surface LED 625 is provided to light the contact pocket of the rotation member 640 from the back side. As shown in FIG. 97, the rear surface LED 625 is configured of three arc-shaped LED bars 625a, 625b, and 625c, and these are combined to form an annular shape in a front view. In addition, as shown in FIG. 97, in each of the LED bars 625a, 625b, and 625c, six lighting areas in which four LED chips are densely provided are provided at equal intervals (lighting areas A1 to A18). By lighting each of the lighting regions A1 to A18, it is possible to emit light in a region having substantially the same area as one pocket of the rotating member 640. Therefore, by lighting the lighting area disposed on the back side of the hit pocket, it is possible to make the hit pocket look shiny.

  Here, each LED chip included in the rear surface LED 625 is controlled to be lit by a known LED driver. The LED driver can switch the ratio between the on period and the off period (DUTY ratio) of the LED or change the lighting frequency based on the lighting control command received from the audio lamp control device 113. For example, if a lighting control command indicating an ON period of 80% (duty ratio 80%) and a frequency of 320 Hz is output to the LED driver, the LED driver calculates 80% of one cycle (1/320 seconds) The on period of the width and the off period of the 20% duration are set repeatedly. This operation is continued until a new lighting control command is received.

  A method of specifying the on period by the lighting control command output to the LED driver will be described more specifically. The data (lighting rate data) indicating the length of the on period (lighting rate) described above is composed of data of a plurality of bits (for example, 8 bits). If the lighting rate data is 00H (0 in decimal notation), it means the lighting rate (DUTY ratio) 0%, and if the lighting rate data is FFH (255 in decimal notation), the lighting rate (DUTY ratio) It means 100%. In addition, as the lighting rate data goes from 00H to FFH, the lighting rate is set to increase at equal intervals. For example, when 80H (128 in decimal notation) is set as lighting rate data, the lighting rate is 50% (that is, 128/255).

  The reference signal (synchronization signal) that is the reference of the lighting frequency of the LED can also generate the frequency specified by the lighting control command by the LED driver itself (set to free run) or be input from the outside of the LED driver Synchronization signal (external synchronization signal) can also be used. In addition, it is possible to specify whether to use a free run or to use an external synchronization signal by a lighting control command. When an external synchronization signal is input to the LED driver, it is not necessary to set a lighting frequency using a lighting control command.

  In addition, in one cycle of turning on and off the LED, the position of the on period can be varied by the lighting control command. That is, the on period of the LED can be set simultaneously with the detection of the sync signal, and the off period of the LED can be set after the end of the on period. It is also possible to set the on period after the end of the period.

  A specific example of the lighting control command for setting the position of the on period will be described in detail. The setting start position of the on period is designated, for example, by 8-bit data. Specifically, one period is equally divided into 255, and it is possible to designate from which section the on period is to be started by 8-bit data. If the data specifying the position of the on period is 00H, the on period is started from the first section of one 255 divided equally (that is, simultaneously with the start of one period). Also, if the data specifying the position of the on period is 1EH (ie, 30 in decimal notation), the on period starts from the 31st section of the 255 equally divided one period.

  The lighting control command also includes data for specifying a lighting area. That is, a part or all of the lighting areas A1 to A18 can be designated to set the lighting rate, the lighting frequency, the lighting phase, and the like described above. The setting of the lighting area is specified by, for example, 3-byte (24 bits) data. Specifically, a bit corresponding to each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is set (for example, the lighting areas A1 to A18 are associated in order from the lower bits), and the lighting area corresponding to the on bit is set. The lighting condition designated by the lighting control command is reflected by the LED driver.

  As described above, the LED driver for controlling the LED of the present embodiment is configured to be able to receive the lighting control command including a plurality of data. The plurality of pieces of data are output by, for example, a serial transfer method such as an I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) method. That is, from the audio lamp control device 113, a signal corresponding to various lighting control data (serial data) such as a lighting rate and a serial data currently being output is what data (what bit of data is it) And a signal (serial clock) indicative of

  More specifically, for example, 24-bit data corresponding to the lighting area, 8-bit data corresponding to the lighting rate of the specified lighting area, and lighting frequency are supported as serial data from the audio lamp control device 113. 8 bits of data, 8 bits of data indicating the setting start position of the on period, and the like are output. The LED driver outputs, to the audio lamp control device 113, a signal (so-called ACK) indicating that the data has been received normally, for example, every time data of 8 bits is received. The voice lamp control device 113 waits until receiving an ACK, and outputs the next 8-bit data when an ACK is received. This makes it possible to prevent data reception leaks. In addition, the output order of the various data output from the audio lamp control device 113 is fixed each time, and the order of the data types output from the audio lamp control device 113 is also stored in the LED driver. You can easily grasp what data has been received. Each data is output in synchronization with a serial clock which repeats ON (1) and OFF (0) at a predetermined frequency (for example, 100 kHz). That is, the bit indicated by the serial clock is on among the output data depending on whether the state of the serial data in the state of the serial clock is on (1) is on (1) or off (0). Determine if it is off.

  Here, a specific example of the aspect of the serial clock and the serial data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a diagram showing an example of a lighting control command composed of a serial clock and serial data. The serial clock and serial data can be set to either on or off values, respectively. The data of each bit constituting the lighting control command can be notified according to the state of serial data in the state of the serial clock being on (1). In this example, commands for setting the lighting state of the lighting rate 100% to the lighting areas A1 and A2 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 234, the serial clock and the serial data are set to ON (1) when the data is not output. Then, when the lighting control command is output, the serial data is displaced from on (1) to off (0) while the serial clock is on (1). Due to this displacement, the LED driver can easily recognize that the lighting control command is notified from now.

  When the serial data is displaced from on (1) to off (0) and notification of the output start of the lighting control command is made, first, lighting region data (data for specifying to which of lighting regions A1 to A18 data is to be output) Is output. This data is composed of 24 bits, and is output in three divided 8-bit portions. As shown in the figure, after notification of the start of output of the lighting control command, while the serial clock repeats ON and OFF twice, serial data is set to ON. That is, it is notified that the 0th bit and the 1st bit of the lighting area data are on. Then, although not shown, serial data is set to be off while the serial clock is repeatedly turned on and off 22 times. That is, it is notified that all the 3rd to 24th bits of the lighting area data are off. Thus, the LED driver can easily recognize that the current lighting control command is a command for notifying the lighting state of the lighting areas A1 and A2 corresponding to the 0th bit and the 1st bit of the lighting area data. Can.

  Note that the on period of serial data is configured such that its start point is earlier than the timing at which the serial clock rises from off to on, and its end is later than the timing at which the serial clock falls from on to off. It is configured to be As a result, while the serial clock is on, serial data can be more reliably kept on. That is, although the ON data is output, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the LED driver side determines that the OFF data is received, and to notify various data more accurately. For the same reason, the beginning of the serial data off period is configured to be earlier than the timing at which the serial clock rises from off to on, and the end is later than the timing at which the serial clock falls from on to off. It is configured to be late.

  The lighting area data is divided into 8 bits and output in 3 times, and ACK is returned from the LED driver for the output for 3 times (notified that the LED driver received each data of 8 bits normally) Then, 8 bits of data are output as lighting rate data. As described above, in this specific example, the lighting rate of 100% (in binary notation, 11111111B) is notified, so while the serial clock is set to be on eight times, serial data is set to be on. Thus, “11111111B” can be notified to the LED driver as the lighting rate data. Although illustration is omitted, other data (8-bit data corresponding to the lighting frequency, 8-bit data indicating the setting start position of the on period, etc.) is also output according to the same rule. Then, when all data constituting the lighting control command is output, the serial clock is first set to the on (1) state, and then the serial data rises from the off (0) state to the on (1) state . By turning on the serial data from the off (0) state to the on (1) state during the on (1) state of the serial clock, it is possible to notify the LED driver that all data has been output.

  As described above, in the present control example, the lighting state can be accurately notified by using two types of signals: serial clock and serial data. Since it is not necessary to use different wires for each data type, the number of wires can be saved. Therefore, the unit cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of wires.

  The LED driver is not limited to one that receives the lighting control command of the above-described aspect. For example, a driver capable of designating the position and length of the on period by a simpler lighting control command may be employed. For example, an LED driver may be used that can receive a lighting control command in which the lighting state of each section when one cycle is equally divided into eight bits is associated with each bit of 8-bit data. More specifically, sections that are earlier in time are associated in order from the lower bit, a section corresponding to a bit of 1 is turned on, and a section corresponding to a bit of 0 is turned off. For example, if the control data is 07H (that is, 00000111 B in binary notation), among the sections obtained by equally dividing one cycle into eight, the first three sections are turned on, and the last five sections are turned off. Thus, the lighting control command output from the MPU 221 to the LED driver can be simplified, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced. Moreover, you may employ | adopt what can change the LED electric current value (anode voltage value) of each lighting area | region A1-A18 as a LED driver.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a state in which the lighting areas A13, A15, and A17 are set to the lighting state (lighting rate 100%), and the other lighting areas are set to the lighting off state (lighting rate 0%). . Note that what is indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 98 is the outer shape of the rotation member 640 disposed on the front surface of the back surface LED 625. As shown in FIG. 98, in each of the divided members DV (each pocket) disposed in a first section S1 (see FIG. 54) in which the divided members DV (each pocket) are circumferentially connected at a first interval. The arrangement matches the arrangement of the lighting areas A1, A2 and A12 to A18.

  And, FIG. 99 is a view showing the appearance of the rotation member 640 when the lighting state shown in FIG. 98 is set. As shown in FIG. 99, when the lighting areas A13, A15, and A17 are set to the lighting state of the lighting rate of 100%, the pockets P2, P28, and P30 disposed on the front side look like lighted (The hatching display part of FIG. 99). Thus, by setting the lighting area disposed on the back side of the hitting pocket to the lighting state of the lighting rate of 100%, it is possible to make the hitting pocket look shiny. Therefore, the player can easily distinguish the hit pocket and the out pocket from the appearance.

  The rear surface LED 625 is controlled to follow the rotating member 640 and rotate at the same rotational speed as the rotating member 640 about the rotation axis O of the rotating operation of the rotating member 640. Therefore, since the lighting area of lighting ratio 100% can be made to follow a hit pocket during rotation operation of the rotation member 640, it is possible to keep the hit pocket in a glorious appearance in the roulette chance effect presentation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the correspondence relationship between the lighting position and the hit pocket is broken and the player mistakenly recognizes the hit pocket and the out pocket.

  As described above, in the rotation member 640, the first section S1 in which the divided members DV are circumferentially connected to each other at a first interval, and the second interval in which the divided members DV are narrower than the first interval. A second section S2 connected in the circumferential direction is formed, and a total of 30 divided members DV in the circumferential direction are formed in an annular shape in a front view. On the other hand, in the rear surface LED 625, 18 lighting regions are arranged at equal intervals. That is, since the rotation member 640 can perform only 18/30 rotations while the back surface LED 625 makes one rotation, the type of each division member DV (pocket) and the lighting region disposed on the back side of the division member DV (pocket) The type is shifted according to the progress of the rotation operation. For example, in the example of FIG. 98 and FIG. 99, the lighting area A17 is set to the lighting rate of 100%, so that the pocket P2 looks like it glows. When the LED 625 is rotated until the back surface LED 625 makes a round, the pocket disposed on the front side of the lighting area A17 changes. That is, while the back surface LED 625 makes a round, the rotation member 640 moves by 18 as the number of pockets, so the type of the pocket arranged on the front side of the lighting area A17 changes to the pocket P20. Therefore, if the same position is simply kept on, the illuminated pocket changes each time the back surface LED makes a turn, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in this control example, the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is corrected every time the back surface LED makes a 1/3 turn (that is, in units of one LED bar), and the hit pocket is always Control is done to look shiny. More specifically, each time any LED bar matches the correction section RA shown in FIG. 98, the lighting state of the LED bar corresponding to the correction section RA is adjusted to the deviation from the arrangement of the rotary member 640. Correction (switch).

  Here, the correction section RA is a section shielded from being invisible to the player by the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 disposed at the rising position. Therefore, even if the lighting state of each lighting area arranged in the correction section RA is switched, it is impossible (or difficult) for the player to visually recognize the switching. That is, in the player's appearance, the hit pocket is always kept in a glowing appearance. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably distinguish the hit pocket and the out pocket from the appearance of the pocket.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 100 to FIG. 102, correction (switching) of the lighting state will be described by showing a specific example. FIG. 100 is a view showing an example in which pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, and P28 to P30 are set to be in the hit pocket. In the present control example, each time the arrangement of the LED bars 625a and the correction section RA coincide with each other after the rotating member 640 is operated to rotate when the “continuous mode suggestive effect” starts. Lighting control of the lighting area is started. Here, it is detected by a rotational position detection sensor 684 (not shown) for detecting the rotational position of the rear surface LED 625 whether or not the correction section RA and the LED bar 625a are arranged in the same state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 100, when the LED bar 625a is placed first in alignment with the correction section RA after the rotating member 640 starts its rotation operation, the pocket placed at the dropped position is the pocket P1. (See FIG. 100 (b)). In this case, the types of pockets (pockets P25 to P30) corresponding to six pockets (pockets P25 to P30) in the advancing direction of the rotational movement from the pocket P1 (whether it is a hit pocket or a lost pocket) The types of 12 pockets (pockets P1 to P12) are read out in the direction, and the lighting state corresponding to the type of each pocket is set for each of the lighting areas A1 to A18. That is, the types of the pockets P25 to P30 are read out, and the lighting states corresponding to the lighting areas A7 to A12 are reflected. Further, the types of the pockets P1 to P12 are read out, and the lighting states corresponding to the lighting areas A6 to A13 are reflected.

  More specifically, of the pockets P25 to P30, since the pockets P28 to P30 are hit pockets, the corresponding lighting areas A10 to A12 are set to the lighting state of the lighting rate 100%, respectively. Further, among pockets P1 to P12, pocket P3 and pockets P9 to P11 are hit pockets, so the lighting area A15 corresponding to pocket P3 and the lighting areas A3 to A5 corresponding to pockets P9 to P11 have lighting rates The lighting state is set to 100% (see FIG. 100A). As a result, the pocket P3 and the pockets P28 to P30 in the lower half of the rotation member 640 (arrangeable for visual recognition by the player) look like glowed (see FIG. 100 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that these bright looking pockets are hit pockets. Note that the type of each pocket P1 to P30 (whether it is a hit pocket or a lost pocket) is stored in a hit position storage area 223k provided in the RAM 223.

  FIG. 101 is a view showing the arrangement of the back surface LED 625 and the rotation member 640 when the back surface LED 625 makes a turn 1/3 from the state of FIG. As shown in the figure, the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear surface LED 625 are maintained in the state set in FIG. 100 until the one-third rotation is performed. That is, while the lighting areas A3 to A5, A10 to A12, and the lighting area A15 are kept in the lighting state of the lighting rate 100%, the circuit rotates 1/3 round at the same rotational speed as the rotating member 640. As a result, the LED bars 625b are arranged to coincide with the correction section RA. Since the rear surface LED 625 rotates in the state described in FIG. 100, the lighting areas A7 to A12 constituting the LED bar 625b are in the lighting state according to the type of the pockets P25 to P30 (whether or not they are hitting pockets). It has been left. However, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the order of the pockets in the correction section RA is that of the pocket P13 to the pocket P30. That is, if the rotation operation is further continued while maintaining the state of each lighting area A7 to A12 of the LED bar 625b, the lighting corresponding to the pockets P25 to P30 with respect to the six pockets P13 to P18 The state is applied. Therefore, the correspondence relationship between the hit pocket and the out-of-pocket may be broken, which may cause the player to be confused.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when one of the LED bars 625a to 625c is disposed in the correction section RA, the lighting state of the lighting area constituting the LED bar included in the correction section RA is corrected (switched) It is configured as follows. More specifically, six types of pockets arranged in the correction zone RA are read from the beginning of the zone (that is, in the order of being earlier arranged to the non-correction zone NA by the rotation operation) and read It is controlled to reflect the lighting state according to the type in each lighting area included in the correction section RA. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the types of all the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA and the lighting state of the lighting area arranged on the back side of each pocket are shifted.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a case where the states of the lighting regions A7 to A12 constituting the LED bar 625b are corrected in accordance with the types of the pockets P13 to P18. As described above, of the pockets P13 to P18, the hit pockets are two of P15 and P16. That is, due to the rotation operation, the pockets arranged third and fourth out of the six pockets to be arranged in the non-correction section NA become the hit pockets. Therefore, the third and fourth lighting areas A9 among the lighting areas A7 to A12 constituting the LED bar 625b are arranged such that the third and fourth pockets look like they look shiny. , A10 are set to the lighting state of the lighting rate 100%, respectively (see FIG. 102). Thereby, the appearance of the pockets P13 to P18 disposed to the non-correction section NA by the rotation of the rotation member 640 from now on looks in advance corresponding to the type of each pocket (lighting state at 100% lighting rate, or 0% lighting rate It can be set to "off".

  After that, during the rotation operation of the rotation member 640, the lighting state of the lighting area constituting the LED bars arranged in the correction section RA every time any of the LED bars 625a to 625c is arranged in the correction section RA. Is corrected. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in an appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (the appearance that the hit pocket is illuminated and the out pocket is darkened). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misidentifying the hit pocket and the off pocket.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, in the case where the ball B performs the swing operation on the holding piece 677, a configuration for determining the cycle of the swing operation will be described. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), the movable piece 677 and the front case 672 disposed on the back side with respect to the ball B that performs the swing operation in the upper part of the movable piece 677 have a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape. An opening 678 is provided. Inside the opening 678, a ball detection sensor 679 for determining whether or not the ball B is disposed on the front side is provided. When the ball B is not disposed on the front side of the ball detection sensor 679 in front view (see FIG. 103A), the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is L (low). On the other hand, when the ball B is placed on the front side of the ball detection sensor 679 as the ball B swings (see FIG. 103 (b)), the ball B is detected and the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is Becomes H (high). In this control example, when the ball B performs a swinging operation, the cycle of the swinging operation of the ball B is determined by an interval (period) in which the output of the ball detection sensor 679 becomes H. For example, if the period from the detection of the H output of the ball detection sensor 679 to the detection of the next H output after detection of the H output of the ball detection sensor 679 (see FIG. 103 (b)) is one second, Since it means that one half of the period of the swinging motion being performed is one second, the period of the swinging motion is determined to be 2 seconds.

  As described above, in the present control example, in a state where the ball B is performing the rocking operation, the cycle of the rocking operation is determined, and the ball B is allowed to fall if it becomes equal to or less than a predetermined cycle (1 second) It is configured to That is, the cycle of the rocking motion is sufficiently short, and even if the ball B is dropped, the ball B is dropped at such a timing that the player does not feel unnaturalness. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from giving an impression of intentionally operating the type of the pocket in which the ball B falls in the roulette chance effect. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the production to the end without making any doubt about the result of the roulette chance production.

  The holding piece 677 in this control example is configured to have a width sufficient to hold the ball B at the upper part when the amplitude of the rocking motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined period (1 second). Therefore, the ball B can be reliably dropped by immersing the holding piece 677 into the immersion position in a state where the amplitude of the rocking motion of the ball B is equal to or less than the predetermined cycle (1 second).

  Next, a method of driving various drive motors (upper lifting motor 341, liquid crystal lifting motor 441, left swing motor 531, rotation motor 631, throwing motor 665, holding piece motor 675) will be described. These various drive motors are, for example, configured by known stepping motors, and in order to operate the respective products mounted on the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of such motors are provided in association with the respective products. The various drive motors are driven by corresponding motor control ICs (motor drivers). Specifically, a command including at least the number of rotation steps, the rotational direction (positive direction or negative direction), and the rotational speed from the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC (motor driver) Output The control IC (motor driver) drives corresponding various drive motors based on the output command. As the motor control IC (motor driver), a single IC capable of setting the operation to a plurality of drive motors may be adopted, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor driver) are provided. Alternatively, drive motors corresponding to different items may be operated. When adopting a motor control IC (motor driver) capable of setting the operation to a plurality of drive motors, the command for transmitting the number of rotation steps etc. includes information for specifying the type of the drive motor. You just need to output it.

  Here, the operation of the drive motor will be described by taking the upper lifting motor 341 as an example. When the control IC (motor driver) operates the upper lifting motor 341 based on the set command, the operation is performed to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 every time the operation of one step is performed A signal (execution signal) for notifying that it has been made is output. By this execution signal, the MPU 221 can grasp the progress of the set operation. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a step counter (not shown). The step counter is provided for each character and is a counter that counts how many steps each character has operated from the origin (retraction) position. That is, with the origin (retraction) position as the position of 0 step, the value is updated by one each time the execution signal from the control IC is received. More specifically, the value is incremented by one each time the accessory is operated in one step in the direction (positive direction) from the origin (retraction) position to the end point (overhang) position. In addition, each time one step operation is performed in the direction (negative direction) from the end point (overhang) position to the origin (retraction) position, the value is decremented by one. Therefore, the operating position of each bonus item can be easily grasped based on the value of the step counter.

  Here, the origin position refers to a specific position set for each character, and is a position at which a transition is made in origin return based on power-on. Specifically, each prize is provided with an origin sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not it is an origin position, and if the origin sensor is not on when the power is turned on, the origin sensor is on. The character is varied until it is detected (ie, various drive motors are driven). This origin position is the reference position of the motion of each item. The above-described step counter is reset to 0 when the accessory becomes the home position due to the home position return (that is, when the home position sensor detects the on state). Then, as described above, the value of the step counter is updated one by one based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

  Next, an example of control of various drive motors (here, upper and lower lifting motors 341) by the motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. In order to make the description easy to understand, a stepping motor which rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, makes one rotation in four steps) will be described as an example, but the actual upper lifting motor 341 is one step. The rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once in one step.

  First, FIG. 104 (a) is a view showing an outline of the upper lifting motor 341 formed of a stepping motor. The upper elevating motor 341 is configured to send the excitation control data from the voice lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC so that the part corresponding to the excitation control data is excited. Specifically, the motor control IC is excited by excitation control data constituted by a 4-digit binary number corresponding to "A, B, C, D" shown in FIG. 104 (a). Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part (that is, any of A, B, C, and D) of the upper elevating motor 341 is "1", the excitation control data is "0". If it is, it is not excited. For example, if the data of excitation control is “1100”, A and B are excited and C and D are not excited. The excitation control data is defined in an excitation table (see FIG. 104B) provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Also, the voice lamp control device 113 has an excitation counter used to select and set one excitation control data from among a plurality of excitation control data defined in the excitation table (see FIG. 104 (b)). It is provided. This excitation counter can be updated one by one in the positive direction starting from "0", and a loop counter whose value returns to "0" when the value is updated after the value of the excitation counter becomes "3" It has become. Each time the excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, the excitation of each part based on the excitation control data is immediately performed (that is, the upper lifting motor 341 operates with no time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). Furthermore, the excitation counter can also be updated in the negative direction. That is, the value can be updated in the order of “0” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0” starting from “0”. In the case of updating in the negative direction, the direction of rotation of the upper lifting motor 341 is opposite to that in the case of updating in the forward direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (positive direction or negative direction) and the update frequency of the excitation counter are determined in advance for each type of accessory for which the operation is set. The maximum value of the excitation counter changes in accordance with the number of steps of the drive motor. Specifically, for example, in the case of a drive motor that rotates once in one step (that is, requires 360 steps for one rotation of the motor), the excitation counter is updated in the range of “0” to “359” It becomes a loop counter.

  Next, a specific example of excitation control data for exciting each part of the upper lifting motor 341 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the excitation table defining the excitation control data and the state of the upper lifting motor 341 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. . As shown in FIG. 104 (b), excitation control data is defined in the excitation table for each value of the excitation counter.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the excitation control of "1100, 0110, 0011, 1001" in the order of the excitation counters "0" to "3" as sequence data corresponding to the upper lifting motor 341. Each data is specified. Further, when “1100”, which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “0”, is set, the respective positions of A and B of the upper lifting motor 341 are excited. In addition, when the sequence data "0110" corresponding to the excitation counter value "1" is set, the respective positions B and C of the upper lifting motor 341 are excited, so the excitation counter value is "0". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of. When "0011", which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "2", is set, the positions of C and D of the upper lifting motor 341 are excited, and the state of the excitation counter value "1" Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from. In addition, when the sequence data "1001" corresponding to the excitation counter value "3" is set, the respective positions of A and D of the upper lifting motor 341 are excited, so the excitation counter value is "2". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 104, the upper lifting motor 341 rotates clockwise by 90 degrees each time the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 in the positive direction. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the upper elevating motor 341 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

  As described above, the control of the upper elevating motor 341 has been described using a simplified operation model, but the upper elevating motor 341 actually used in the present embodiment has one step per step (ie, one excitation counter). Each update can be rotated once. That is, when making each item variable, the value of the excitation counter is updated one by one the number of times corresponding to the number of steps to be changed, and excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter is set for each update of the excitation counter. It is possible to accurately change each part.

  As described above, in this control example, by setting a command to the motor driver, various drive motors can be driven at the rotation speed, the rotation direction, and the number of rotation steps designated by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize a variety of rendering operations using the characters.

  Note that a unique operation pattern (operation scenario) corresponding to the effect is set for each role. Although details will be described later, this operation pattern (operation scenario) defines commands set for the above-described motor control IC (motor driver) for each elapsed time.

  Further, in the present control example, it is determined based on the number of steps at which the various drive motors have operated whether or not the various drive motors have completed operation based on the command set for the motor driver. That is, based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of receptions of the execution signal output from the motor driver each time the motor driver sets the operation one step, whether the operation set to the various drive motors is completed Although it is judged whether or not it is not limited to this. For example, an elapsed time after setting a command for operating various drive motors may be measured, and it may be determined based on the elapsed time whether or not the operation of the various drive motors is completed. .

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Control Example
Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described. In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and display in third symbol display device 81 Execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 105, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are lottery of special symbols, lottery of normal symbols, setting of display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, setting of display in the second symbol display device 83, and display in the third symbol display device 81 Is used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to perform setting and the like.

  For the setting of the display of the lottery of special symbols and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, select the first hit random number counter C1 used for lottery of special symbols and the jackpot type of the special symbols The first contact type counter C2 used to set the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial used to set the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 A value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 130), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 139) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a common execution area and a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a consisting of four holding areas (the first to fourth holding areas), and each of these areas has a first winning The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are respectively stored according to the ball entering timing to the port 64 and the second entry ball port 640a. A lottery of special symbols is executed based on various counter values stored in the common execution area. On the other hand, for the various counter values stored in the respective reserve areas of the special symbol 1 reserve ball storage area 203a, the execution of the lottery is suspended until the lottery condition of the special symbol is established. In this control example, only the lottery of the special symbol 1 is held, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is not held. For this reason, when the ball entering the second entrance 640a is detected, the lottery of the special symbol 1 is not held, and various counter values are stored in the common execution area when the symbol is not changing A lottery of symbol 2 is executed.

  In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and a ball is common in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 999). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 139).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second entrance 640a. It is stored in the common execution area of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 106 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the first random number counter C1 If the value matches the value of the jackpot random number set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, this first per random number table 202a is for high probability (special symbol low probability state period) of special symbol and high probability when special symbol is more likely to be a big hit than low probability (special symbol special It can be divided into two types, one for the high probability state of the symbol). That is, the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (b)) is composed of the first hit random number table for the low probability time and the first hit random number table for the high probability time, and is included in each table. The number of random numbers to be jackpots is different. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B when the special symbol is a big hit, and is sequentially 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999). , And returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second entrance 640a Are stored in the common execution area of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area or the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that will be a big hit of the special symbol, that is, a random number that will be out of the special symbol In this case, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is the one at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area or the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that makes a big win for the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol to be displayed is the one at the time of the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same common execution area or the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this first random number counter C1, at the low probability of the special symbol, there are 40 random number values that become the big wins of the special symbol, and the random number "0 to 39" is the first random number for low probability It is stored in the table 202a (see FIG. 106 (b)). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 1000, so the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 40, so the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1/25".

  On the other hand, at the high probability of the special symbol, there are 41 random value values that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values “500 to 540” are the first hit random number table 202a for high probability (FIG. 106 (b )) Is stored. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 1000, so the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 41, so the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1 / 24.4". That is, the probability of becoming a jackpot of the special symbol is almost equal between the high probability of the special symbol (the probability variation state of the special symbol) and the low probability of the special symbol. This is because the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has little benefit to the player if it becomes a jackpot in the “normal mode”. That is, as described above, in the "normal mode", the first variable winning device 82a is likely to be a big hit when it is opened (that is, relatively few winning balls can be obtained), and in many cases the big hit is After that, instead of shifting to the "Running mode", shifting to the "normal mode" again. Therefore, since it is easy to repeat the jackpot that can be acquired relatively little jackpot and the normal mode, it is disadvantageous for the player while staying in the "normal mode".

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, the transition to the “continuous mode” is extremely advantageous for the player. And, in order to shift to the “continuous mode”, it is necessary to become a big hit mainly in the “preparation mode”, and to shift to the preparation mode, the jackpot given the short time status in the “normal mode” It is necessary to assign the type. Therefore, the jackpot in the "normal mode" merely plays the role of shifting to the "preparation mode", and the player plays the game in the "normal mode" mainly for the purpose of becoming a jackpot. is not. Under this situation, if the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is extremely lowered compared to the high probability state of the special symbol, it will be rather than shifting to the "continuous mode" or "prepare mode", There is a possibility that the player's motivation for the game may be seriously impaired since the situation where even the jackpot that is the previous stage is not won may continue for a long time. Therefore, in this control example, the probability of becoming a jackpot is almost common between the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the special symbol, and it is configured to be relatively easy to win the jackpot in either case There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent (prevent) the situation that the situation does not even occur in the jackpot which is the previous stage of the “continuous mode” and the “preparation mode” lasts (prevents), so the player's motivation for playing can be kept high.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999, and the value of the first collision type counter C2 is provided in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106C). The correspondence between the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the determined jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIGS. 106 (c) to 108.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengaging displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach is generated, the final stop symbol stops at other than the reach symbol. Two stop (rendering) patterns are selected, for example, a range of 90 to 99, and a "completely out of range" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second entrance 640a. Or the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 determines the detailed fluctuation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 139) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that the variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 110B) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. Provided in

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. , Is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 110 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set. When the second random number matches the value of the random number which is set by the random number table (see FIG. 110 (a)), it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for high probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) and high probability of high probability of being hit with normal symbol from low probability (general symbol It is divided into two types, one for the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers for making a big hit included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (a), at the time of low probability of a normal symbol, there is one random number value which is a hit of the normal symbol, and the value is "5". The random number value is stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240 while the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/240".

  When the ball passes through the ordinary ball entry port (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 The symbol change display is usually performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is "5", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, "○ as a stop symbol (second symbol)" The symbol of “” is lighted and displayed, and the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640a is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the second entrance ball opening 640a is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 The variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (normal symbol) As the symbol of "o" is lighted and displayed, the second ball entry port 640a is opened "one second x 2 times". Thus, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of fluctuation indication becomes very short with “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, furthermore, opening of the 2nd ball entrance 640a Since the period is very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first winning opening 64. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second entrance ball opening 640a is opened only for “one second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit, but it is open The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  As described above, in this control example, the probability of hitting the normal symbol at low probability of the normal symbol is significantly lower than that at the high probability of the normal symbol, and the second entering ball is hit when the normal symbol is hit. By reducing the number of times the opening 640a is opened and by reducing the opening period of the second entrance 640a, the ball is secondly selected in the low probability of the normal pattern (ie, "normal mode"). It is comprised so that it may become difficult to enter into the ball entrance 640a. As a result, a relatively large number of winning balls that can be obtained by entering the second entrance ball hole 640a at a low probability (that is, "normal mode") of the normal symbol, the second specific winning hole 65a is open It is possible to suppress the irregular game method of aiming for the type of jackpot). If an extraordinary game method is carried out and the second specified winning opening 65a is opened and won in succession, it will be a payout rate that greatly exceeds the payout rate in the design of the pachinko machine 10 It may cause an unforeseen disadvantage to the hole. On the other hand, in this control example, since it is extremely difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640a at the time of low probability of the normal symbol (that is, "normal mode"), it becomes a game It is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method in which a player shoots a ball by aiming at the second entrance 640 in the “normal mode”. Therefore, the payout rate as designed can be realized.

  Second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 139).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 to be performed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of display and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 116. As described above, the ROM 202 stores various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and fixed value data.

  FIG. 106A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 106a, the ROM 202 includes a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, a game result setting table 202e, and a state setting table 202f. Is at least provided.

  The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106B) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first random number counter C1 is stored as described above. Specifically, as the jackpot judgment value in the low probability state of the special symbol, 40 judgment values of "0 to 39" are defined, and as the jackpot judgment value in the high probability state (probability state) of the special symbol, "500 41 judgment values of “540” are defined. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning combination matches one of the determination values defined in the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (b)), the special symbol It is determined that the jackpot of.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 106 (c)) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the jackpot type is stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is for each jackpot type. It is defined in association with it. Here, the details of the first hit type selection table 202 b will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 (c) to 108.

  FIG. 106 (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b described above. As shown in FIG. 106 (c), the first hit type selection table 202b is used to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot of the special symbol 1 is achieved, the type selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 used to determine the jackpot type. And, when it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is configured by the special figure 2 per type selection table 202b2 used to determine the big hit type. First, the details of the type selection table 202b1 per special drawing 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing defined contents of the type selection table 202b1 per special view 1. In this special figure 1 type selection table 202b1, eight types of jackpots from "probably large jackpot A" to "probably variable jackpot G" and "usually large jack A" in association with the possible values of the first per-class type counter C2. The type is defined.

  More specifically, "probably variable jackpot A" is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". As described above, the first collision type counter C2 is a counter that can take 1000 values of "0 to 999". Among these, since the number of judgment values to be “permanent variation big hit A” is five of “0 to 4”, the probability of becoming “probable variation big hit A” is 0.5% when becoming a big hit in the drawing of the special symbol 1 (5/1000).

  "A certainty big hit A" is a big hit where the number of rounds is 2 and the second specified winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (30 seconds or 10 balls won) in each round. is there. In many cases, if the player keeps hitting the ball continuously, it is possible to get 10 balls to the second specified winning opening 65a sufficiently before 30 seconds have passed. A relatively large number (300) of winning balls can be obtained. In addition, after the end of the "probable jackpot A", it shifts to the special symbol oddity state, and shifts to the normal symbol short time state. In addition, the time saving state of the normal symbol given after the end of the “probable big hit A” is the state at the time of winning (whether the “normal mode”, the “preparation mode” or the “continuous mode”). Continue until the next big win. That is, after the end of the “probable jackpot A”, the mode is directly shifted to the “continuous mode” without the intervention of the “preparation mode”. Among the jackpot types that can be selected in the special symbol 1 drawing, the “probable jackpot A” can be obtained because a relatively large number of prize balls can be obtained and the game directly shifts to the “continuous mode” most advantageous to the player. , Is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Therefore, particularly in the “normal mode”, when the big hit is notified (a lucky number is displayed on all of the effect parts 331a to 331d), it is strongly expected that the player will be “certainly hit big hit A”. It can be done.

  The "permanently variable big hit B" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "5 to 84". Among the 1000 judgment values (random number values) that can be taken by the first collision type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "certainly hit big B" is 80 in "5-84", so the big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The probability (percentage) of becoming “probable variation jackpot B” is 8% (80/1000).

  The "permanent variation big hit B" has 2 rounds, and in each round the first variable winning apparatus 82a releases an opening pattern A (an opening pattern in which 0.6 seconds of opening and 0.9 seconds of closing are repeated 20 times) It is a jackpot opened and closed according to. The maximum opening time per round is 12 seconds (0.6 seconds × 20 times), which is shorter than the maximum opening time (30 seconds) of the second specified winning opening 65a, and there is one opening period. The short time of 0.6 seconds makes it difficult to win the ball continuously. Therefore, compared to the jackpot type in which the second specified winning opening 65a is opened, the number of winning balls that can be obtained in one jackpot decreases, so compared to the jackpot type in which the second specified winning opening 65a is opened It is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the number of winning balls.

  In addition, after the end of the "probable jackpot B", it shifts to a special symbol in the probable state. In addition, the classification of the time reduction state of the normal symbol granted after the end of the “probable big hit B” is the gaming state at the time when the “probable change big hit B” becomes (the time saving state of the normal symbol or the low probability state of the normal symbol) Depends on the More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, in the case of "probable variation big hit B" in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol continuing until the next big hit. That is, it shifts to the "continuous mode". As described above, since the "continuous mode" is the most advantageous state for the player, it is possible to please the player by becoming the "probable variation jackpot B" in the time saving state of the normal symbol.

  On the other hand, when it becomes "probable variation big hit B" in the low probability state (non-short time state) of the normal symbol, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol which continues until the lottery of the special symbol is finished seven times after the big hit end. Do. That is, it shifts to the "preparation mode". As described above, if the special symbol is a big hit in the "preparation mode", the game mode shifts to the "continuous mode" which is most advantageous to the player with high probability (97.5%). Therefore, in the "preparation mode", which shifts after the end of the "permanent variation big hit B", it is possible to play a game expecting to be a big hit. In addition, if you do not win a big hit with a limited number of lottery times (7 times), you will not shift to "Ranso mode", so you may not feel anxious about returning to "Normal mode" without a big hit, " The player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation for transitioning to the continuous mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the "preparation mode".

  In addition, since it becomes easy to enter a ball into the 2nd ball entrance 640a in the time saving state of a normal symbol as mentioned above, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is basically executed. Conversely, it is unlikely that the special symbol 1 lottery will be executed in the "normal mode". However, since the drawing of the special symbol 1 is held up to 4 times, it is possible that “probability jackpot B” in “preparation mode” is included in the reserve ball when transitioning to “preparation mode” There is sex. In this case, it is not good for the player to shift to the "continuous mode" (shift to the "preparation mode"). Therefore, in the present control example, the holding ball of the special symbol 1 to be digested in the "preparation mode", or the case where the ball is shot out in the direction of the first entrance 64 by mistake in the "series mode". In order to save money, when it becomes "probable variation big hit B" in the time saving state ("preparation mode" or "continuous mode") of the normal symbol, it is configured to shift to "continuous mode". As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling dissatisfaction with the game, and to enjoy the game more enjoyable. In addition, similarly, for the other odd variable big hits (that is, “positive odds big hit C to G”) defined in the special figure 1 hit type selection table 202b1, similarly, when winning in the time saving state of the normal symbol, It is configured to shift to "Shuang mode".

  In the range where the first hit type counter C2 is "85 to 274", "probably variable jackpot C" is associated. Among the 1000 judgment values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit classification counter C2, the number of judgment values to be “permanent variation big hit C” is 190 of “85 to 274”, so the big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The probability (percentage) of becoming “probable variation big hit C” when becoming is 19% (190/1000).

  The "permanent variation big hit C" has 2 rounds, and in each round the first variable winning apparatus 82a releases an opening pattern A (an opening pattern in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times) It is a jackpot opened and closed according to. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot is reduced as in the case of the "permanent change jackpot B", so the player can receive the number of prize balls compared to the jackpot type in which the second specified winning opening 65a is opened. It is against you.

  In addition, as shown in Figure 107, when it becomes "probable variation big hit C" in the time saving state of the normal symbol, while transitioning to the special variation state of the special symbol, the time duration of the normal symbol continues until the next big hit Transition to the state. That is, it shifts to the "continuous mode". On the other hand, when it becomes "probable change big hit C" in the low probability state (non-short time state) of the normal symbol, it shifts to the special variation state of the special symbol and the lottery of the special symbol ends once after the big hit end. It shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol which continues until it continues. That is, it shifts to the "preparation mode". The "preparation mode" set after the end of the "probable jackpot C" has a smaller number of drawing special symbols than the "prep mode" set after the end of the "probability jackpot B", so the "normal mode" (non-probability variable) In the state, "probably big hit C" is more disadvantageous than "probably big hit B".

  In the range where the first hit type counter C2 is “275 to 774”, “probably variable jackpot D” is associated. Among the 1000 judgment values (random number values) that can be taken by the first collision type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are “certainly hit big D” is 500 of “275 to 774”, so the big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The probability (percentage) of becoming “probable variation big hit D” when it becomes is 50% (500/1000).

  "Perhaps a big hit D", the number of rounds is 2 rounds, and in each round, the first variable winning device 82a releases an opening pattern A (an opening pattern in which 0.6 seconds of opening and 0.9 seconds of closing are repeated 20 times) It is a jackpot opened and closed according to. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot is reduced as in the case of "permanent jackpot B" or "permanent jackpot C", and therefore the prize ball is compared to the jackpot type in which the second specified winning opening 65a is opened. It is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the number.

  In addition, as shown in Figure 107, when it becomes "probable big hit D" in the time saving state of the normal symbol, while transitioning to the special variation state of the special symbol, the time duration of the normal symbol continues until the next big hit Transition to the state. That is, it shifts to the "continuous mode". On the other hand, when it becomes "probable variation jackpot D" in the low probability state (non-short time state) of the normal symbol, although it shifts to the special variation state of the special symbol, the time short state of the normal symbol is not set. That is, since it does not shift to the "preparation mode", there is no opportunity to shift to the "continuous mode". Therefore, if it becomes "probable variation big hit D" in "normal mode" (non-definite change state), "probably big change A" which shifts directly to "continuous mode", or "probably big hit" transitioning to "ready mode" after big hit This is a disadvantage for the player as compared to the case where it becomes "B" or "probable big hit C".

  In the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “775 to 804”, “probable variation jackpot E” is associated. Among the 1000 judgment values (random number values) that can be taken by the first collision type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "certainly hit big E" is 30 of "775-804", so the big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The probability (percentage) of becoming “probable variation big hit E” is 3% (30/1000).

  The “probable jackpot E” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 2 and the first variable prize device 82a is opened and closed in accordance with the opening pattern B (opening pattern in which opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once) in each round. is there. Since the opening time per round is 0.052 seconds at maximum, the opening period is significantly shorter than when the second specified winning opening 65a is opened or when the opening pattern A is set, the jackpot During this time, it is difficult to win the ball against the first variable winning device 82a, and in many cases, the jackpot is ended without being able to win even one ball. Therefore, “probable jackpot E” is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types in terms of winning balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when it becomes "probable big hit E" in the time saving state of the normal symbol, while transitioning to the special variation state of the special symbol, the time duration of the normal symbol continues until the next big hit Transition to the state. That is, it shifts to the "continuous mode". On the other hand, when it becomes "probable jackpot E" in the low probability state (non-short time state) of the normal symbol, it moves to the positive variation state of the special symbol as well as "probably jackpot B", and after the big hit end It shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol which continues until the drawing of the special symbol is completed seven times. That is, it shifts to the "preparation mode". Because it is a kind of jackpot type in which the "preparation mode" (time saving state of the normal symbol) continues for the longest lottery number, except for the "permanent change big hit A" which directly shifts to the "continuous mode", so "normal mode" In the case of “probable jackpot E”, it is advantageous to the player as compared to “probable jackpot C” in which the number of drawing times for the “preparation mode” is small and “probable jackpot D” not transitioning to the “preparation mode”.

  The "probability variation jackpot F" is associated with the range where the first hit type counter C2 is "805 to 874". Among the 1000 judgment values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit classification counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "certainly hit big F" is 70 of "805 to 874", so the big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The probability (percentage) of becoming “probable variation big hit F” is 7% (70/1000).

  The “permanent variation big hit F” is a big hit where the number of rounds is 2 and the first variable prize device 82a is opened and closed in accordance with the opening pattern B (opening pattern in which opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once). Therefore, as in the “probable jackpot E”, it is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types for the player in terms of the number of prize balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when it becomes "probable big hit F" in the time saving state of the normal symbol, while transitioning to the special variation state of the special symbol, the time duration of the normal symbol continues until the next big hit Transition to the state. That is, it shifts to the "continuous mode". On the other hand, when it becomes "probable variation big hit F" in the low probability state (non-short time state) of the normal symbol, it shifts to the special variation state of the special symbol and the lottery of the special symbol ends once after the big hit end It shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol which continues until it continues. That is, it shifts to the "preparation mode". The "preparation mode" set after the end of the "probable jackpot F" has a smaller number of drawing special symbols than the "prep mode" set after the end of the "probability jackpot B" or "probability jackpot E". In the normal mode "(non-deterministic state), the" probable jackpot F "is more disadvantageous than the" probably jackpot B "and the" probably jackpot E ". On the other hand, compared with the "probable jackpot D" in which the "preparation mode" is not set, the player is given an opportunity to shift to the "continuous mode" although it is only one time, which is advantageous for the player.

  In the range where the first hit type counter C2 is "875 to 974", "probably variable jackpot G" is associated. Among the 1000 judgment values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit classification counter C2, the number of judgment values to be “certainly variable big hit G” is 100 of “875 to 974”. The probability (percentage) of becoming “probable variation big hit G” when it becomes is 10% (100/1000).

  The “permanent variation big hit G” is a big hit where the number of rounds is 2 and the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed in accordance with the opening pattern B (an opening pattern in which opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once) in each round. is there. Therefore, like "probable jackpot E" and "probable jackpot F", it is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types for players in terms of the number of prize balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when it becomes "probable big hit G" in the time saving state of the normal symbol, while transitioning to the special variation state of the special symbol, the time duration of the normal symbol continues until the next big hit Transition to the state. That is, it shifts to the "continuous mode". On the other hand, when it becomes "probable variation jackpot G" in the low probability state (non-short time state) of the normal symbol, although it shifts to the positive variation state of the special symbol, the time reduction state of the normal symbol is the same as "probably big hit D" Is not set. That is, since it does not shift to the "preparation mode", there is no opportunity to shift to the "continuous mode". Therefore, if it becomes "probable variation big hit D" in "normal mode" (non-definite change state), "probably big change A" which shifts directly to "continuous mode", or "probably big hit" transitioning to "ready mode" after big hit This is a disadvantage for the player as compared with the case where B, B, C, E, and F, respectively.

  The “normal jackpot A” is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is “975 to 999”. Among the 1000 judgment values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, since the number of judgment values that are "normally big hit A" is 25 of "975 to 999", the big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The probability (percentage) of “normal jackpot A” is 2.5% (25/1000).

  "Normal jackpot A" has 2 rounds, and in each round, the first variable prize device 82a performs an opening pattern A (an opening pattern in which 0.6 seconds of opening and 0.9 seconds of closing are repeated 20 times) It is a jackpot opened and closed according to. Therefore, the number of winning balls that can be obtained is smaller than the type of jackpot in which the second specified winning opening 65a is opened, as in the case of “probable jackpot B” to “probable jackpot D”. On the other hand, as compared with the jackpot type for which the open pattern B is set, the number of winning balls that can be acquired increases. Therefore, in terms of the number of winning balls, “usually the jackpot A” is more disadvantageous than the “probable jackpot A” but is more advantageous than the “probably jackpot E” to the “probably jackpot G”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when it becomes "normal big hit A" in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, but does not shift to the time shortening status of the normal symbol . That is, it shifts to the "normal mode". For this reason, if "normal jackpot A" in the "preparation mode", the transition to the "normal mode" is made regardless of the remaining number of times, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to other jackpot types. Also, in the case of "normal jackpot A" in the "run mode", the game mode shifts to the "normal mode" after the big hit, so the "run mode" which is most advantageous to the player ends. For this reason, in the "preparation mode" and the "continuous mode", the "normal jackpot A" results in a disadvantageous result for the player.

  On the other hand, when it becomes "Normal jackpot A" in the low probability state (non-short time state) of the normal symbol, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol and the lottery of the special symbol ends once after the big hit end. It shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol which continues until it does. That is, it shifts to the "preparation mode". The "preparation mode" set after the end of the "normal jackpot A" has a smaller number of drawing special symbols than the "preparation mode" set after the end of the "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot E". In the normal mode "(non-deterministic state), the" normal jackpot A "is more disadvantageous than the" probability jackpot B "and the" probability jackpot E ". On the other hand, compared to the "probable jackpot D" or "probably jackpot G" in which the "preparation mode" is not set, the chance to shift to the "run mode" is given though it is only one time, which is advantageous for the player. Become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the details of the per-figure 2 hit type selection table 202b2 to be referred to in order to determine the big-off type when the big win is made by the lottery of the special symbol 2 will be described. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing defined contents of the special type 2 use type selection table 202b2. In this special view 2 per type selection table 202b2, five types of jackpots of “probably large jackpot H” to “probably large jackpot K” and “ordinary jackpot B” in association with the possible values of the first per type selector C2. The type is defined.

  In the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4”, “probable variation jackpot H” is associated. Among the 1000 judgment values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit classification counter C2, the number of judgment values that are “certainly hit big H” is five “0 to 4”, so the big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery The probability (ratio) of becoming “probable variation big hit H” is 0.5% (5/1000).

  The “probable variation big hit H” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 2 and the second specified winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won). Therefore, as in the case of the "probable big hit A", the player receives a large amount of prize balls compared to the big hit types ("proy big hit B to G," "usually big hit A") in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened. You can earn In addition, all the jackpot types that can be determined when it becomes a jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery, the second specified winning opening 65a is opened in the same manner as the "probability jackpot H" or "probability jackpot A" described above Ru. Therefore, when it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2, it becomes more advantageous than the jackpot by the lottery of the special symbol 1 in terms of the number of prize balls that can be acquired (except "probably hit big hit A").

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 108, when it becomes “probable big hit H”, regardless of the state at the time of winning (whether or not it is a time saving state of the normal symbol), while transitioning to the special variation state of special symbol , Transition to the time saving state of the normal symbol to continue until the next jackpot. That is, it shifts directly to the "continuous mode". Therefore, in particular, when it becomes "probable variation big hit H" in the "normal mode" (non-short time state), the player is compared with the jackpot type transitioning to the "preparation mode" or the jackpot type transitioning to the "normal mode". It is advantageous.

  “Probably variable jackpot I” is associated with the value “5” of the first hit type counter C2. Among the 1000 judgment values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, since the number of judgment values that are "certainly hit big I" is one, when it is a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery The probability (percentage) of becoming a definite variation jackpot I is 0.1% (1/1000).

  As shown in FIG. 108, in the case of “probable variation big hit I” in the time saving state of the normal symbol, while transitioning to the special variation state of the special symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol continuing until the next big hit And transition. That is, it shifts to the "continuous mode". On the other hand, when it becomes "probable variation big hit I" in the low probability state (non-short time state) of the normal symbol, it shifts to the special variation state in the same manner as "probable variation big hit B" and "probable variation big hit E". At the same time, after the big hit ends, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol which continues until the drawing of the special symbol is finished seven times. That is, it shifts to the "preparation mode". It is a kind of jackpot type in which the "preparation mode" (time saving state of the normal symbol) continues for the longest number of times of drawing, except for the "something big hit A" or "the big thing big hit H" Therefore, in the "normal mode", when it becomes "probable jackpot I", the number of times the drawing becomes the "preparation mode" is small "probability jackpot C", "probably jackpot F", and "usually jackpot A" or "preparation mode" It is advantageous to the player as compared to the “probable jackpot D” and “probability jackpot G” that do not shift.

  In addition, as described above, in the case of the "normal mode" to shift to the "preparation mode" in which the short period of time is seven times when the "probable variation big hit I" in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol This is to prevent (suppress) the irregular game method of striking the second entrance ball 640 a and hitting the ball. More specifically, even in the "normal mode", even if one of the definite variation big hits (i.e., the "positive variation big hit H-K") is obtained by the drawing of the special symbol 2, the mode is shifted to the "continuous mode". In the case of the configuration, it is possible for a player to hit a ball (so-called right-handed) by aiming at the second ball entry port 640a even in the "normal mode" for the purpose of shifting to the "continuous mode". There is sex. If the game mode is changed from the "normal mode" to the "continuous mode" directly due to the unusual game method, it is possible that the number of prize balls far exceeding the designed payout rate may be paid out, May cause unforeseen disadvantages. Therefore, in the present control example, when the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is a big hit, the game state after the big hit is made different depending on whether or not the time of the big hit is the time saving state of the normal symbol. It has composition. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to eliminate the merits for the player when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed in the normal state (that is, the “normal mode”) of the normal symbol, so that the unusual gaming method Can be prevented (suppressed). As a result, since the payout rate of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the hole can be more reliably contained within the range of design, it is possible to easily estimate the sales of the hole and the like.

  “Probably variable jackpot J” is associated with the value “6” of the first hit type counter C2. Among the 1000 judgment values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "certainly hit big J" is one, so when it is a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery The probability (percentage) of becoming a definite variation jackpot J is 0.1% (1/1000).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 108, when it becomes “probable jackpot J” in the time saving state of the normal symbol, while transitioning to the special variation state of the special symbol, the time symbol of the normal symbol continues until the next big hit Transition to the state. That is, it shifts to the "continuous mode". On the other hand, when it becomes "probable jackpot J" in the low probability state (non-short time state) of the normal symbol, it shifts to the special variation state of the special symbol and the lottery of the special symbol ends once after the big hit end. It shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol which continues until it continues. That is, it shifts to the "preparation mode". The "preparation mode" set after the end of the "probable jackpot J" is a special symbol than the "prep mode" set after the end of the "probability jackpot B", "probability jackpot E", and "probability jackpot I" Since the number of times of drawing is small, in the “normal mode” (non-determination state), “probability jackpot J” is more disadvantageous than “probability jackpot B”, “probability jackpot E”, and “probability jackpot I”. On the other hand, compared to the "probable jackpot D" or "probably jackpot G" in which the "preparation mode" is not set, the chance to shift to the "run mode" is given though it is only one time, which is advantageous for the player. Become.

  The "permanent variation jackpot K" is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is "7 to 974". Among the 1000 judgment values (random number values) that can be taken by the first collision type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "certainly hit big K" is 968 of "7 to 974", so a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery The probability (percentage) of becoming “probably K” is 96.8% (968/1000).

  As shown in FIG. 108, in the case of “probable variation big hit K” in the time saving state of the normal symbol, while transitioning to the special variation state of the special symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol continuing until the next big hit And transition. That is, it shifts to the "continuous mode". On the other hand, when it becomes "probable variation jackpot K" in the low probability state (non-short time state) of the normal symbol, it shifts to the special variation state of the special symbol, but it is the same as "probable variation jackpot D" or "certainly variation jackpot G" The time saving state of the normal symbol is not set to. That is, since it does not shift to the "preparation mode", there is no opportunity to shift to the "continuous mode". Therefore, the player is most at a disadvantage when the "probable variation jackpot D" is reached in the "normal mode" (non-deterministic variation state).

  The “normal jackpot B” is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is “975 to 999”. Among the 1000 judgment values (random number values) that can be taken by the first collision type counter C2, the number of judgment values for “normally big hit B” is 25 of “975 to 999”. The probability (percentage) of becoming “normally big hit B” is 2.5% (25/1000).

  As shown in FIG. 108, in the case of “normal jackpot B” in the time saving state of the normal symbol, transition to the low probability state of the special symbol is made, but transition to the time shortening state of the normal symbol is not made. That is, it shifts to the "normal mode". For this reason, as in "normal jackpot A", if it becomes "normal jackpot B" in "prepare mode", it shifts to "normal mode" regardless of the remaining number of times, so comparison with other jackpot types Is a disadvantage to the player. In addition, even in the case of “normal jackpot B” in the “run mode”, since the mode shifts to the “normal mode” after the big hit, the “run mode” most advantageous to the player ends. For this reason, in the "preparation mode" and the "continuous mode", the "normal jackpot B" results in a disadvantageous result for the player.

  On the other hand, when it becomes "normal big hit B" in the low probability state (non-short time state) of the normal symbol, while it moves to the low probability state of the special symbol, after the big hit end, the drawing of the special symbol ends once It shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol which continues until it does. That is, it shifts to the "preparation mode". The "preparation mode" set after the end of the "normal jackpot B" is a lottery with a special symbol than the "preparation mode" set after the end of the "probability jackpot B", "probability jackpot E" and "probability jackpot I" Since the number of times is small, in the “normal mode” (non-deterministic state), the “normal jackpot B” is more disadvantageous than the “probability jackpot B”, the “probability jackpot E” or the “probability jackpot I”. On the other hand, as compared with the "permanent jackpot D", "permanent jackpot G" and "permanent jackpot K" in which the "preparation mode" is not set, there is only one chance to shift to the "run mode". , It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, in the present control example, there are provided a plurality of jackpot types different in the number of prize balls that can be acquired and the state after the jackpot ("normal mode", "prepare mode", or "continuous mode"). By providing a wide variety of jackpot types, it is possible to make the player more interested as to which jackpot type the jackpot becomes. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in this control example, even if it becomes a big hit of the special symbol 2 in the "normal mode", a big hit (that is, "probably big hit H") to shift to the "continuous mode", or the "ready mode" Although it is set as the structure which provides the transition jackpot (ie, "probability jackpot I" and "probability jackpot J"), it is not necessary to provide all these. For example, when it becomes a big hit by the lottery of special symbol 2, "probably big hit K" is determined with a probability of 97.5%, and "usually big hit B" is determined with a probability of 2.5%. It is also good. That is, when it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2 in the "normal mode", it shifts to the "normal mode" again after the big hit (in the case of "probably big hit K"), or a short time is 1 after the big hit It may be configured to shift to the “ready mode” of the cycle (in the case of “normally big hit B”). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the disadvantage of hitting the ball at the second entrance 640 a in the “normal mode” greater, so the game method more irregular (“normal mode”) In the second ball entry port 640a to prevent the game method of striking out the ball).

  Next, the state transition performed by determining the jackpot type based on the special symbol 1 use type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 107) and the special symbol 2 use type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 108) This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing conditions for going back and forth between three types of states ("normal mode", "prepare mode", and "continuous mode") in this control example. First, state transition in the “normal mode” (non-short time state) most disadvantageous to the player will be described. This "normal mode" is shown on the upper side of FIG. As shown in FIG. 109, in the “normal mode”, when a jackpot occurs, the game mode is shifted to another game state. As described above, the jackpot probability in this control example is approximately equal to 1 / 24.4 in the low probability state of the special symbol and 1/25 in the high probability state of the special symbol. For the sake of simplicity, the jackpot probability is denoted as 1/25 in FIG. As described above, since this "normal mode" is a low probability state (non-short time state) of a normal symbol, it is difficult for the player to easily open the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640a. The ball is shot to aim at the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, since the lottery of the special symbol 1 is executed, the jackpot type is basically determined from the type selection table 202b1 per special drawing 1.

  In the "normal mode" (probable variation non-shortening condition and non-probability variation non-shortening condition), when it is a big hit in the drawing of the special symbol 1, "probably big hit D" (50%) or "probably big hit G" at 60% (10%) is determined (see FIG. 107). When these jackpot types are reached in the "normal mode", the "normal mode" is entered again after the jackpot ends (see the upper left side in FIG. 109). That is, the "normal mode" is looped. Even if you win "Decisive Big Hit D" or "Qual Fit Big Hit G", you can still get "Predictive Big Hit D" and "Pretty Variation Big Hit G" (the "Normal Mode" loop, because you can earn relatively few prize balls. And, in many cases, more balls will be consumed in the "normal mode" than winning balls obtained with a jackpot. Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player.

  Moreover, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1, it becomes one of "probably big hit B, C, E, F" and "ordinary big hit A" at a rate of 39.5%. In this case, after the end of the jackpot, it shifts to the "preparation mode" (non-probable variation non-short time state) (see the upper central portion in FIG. 109). That is, since the transition to a state where it is relatively easy to shift to the “continuous mode” is achieved, the player is more advantageous than the “probable jackpot D” or the “probable jackpot G”.

  And, when it becomes "a certainty jackpot A" to be won by 0.5% when it becomes a jackpot by lottery of special symbol 1, it shifts directly to "the continuous mode" after the end of the jackpot (Fig. 109 See top right)). As described above, in this "run mode", a jackpot which continues until the next jackpot and a jackpot which is relatively easy to obtain a large number of prize balls ("permanent jackpot H" to "permanent jackpot K", "normal jackpot B" Because it is easy to be repeated, it is most advantageous for the player.

  Thus, in the “normal mode” (probable variation non-shortening state, non-probability variation non-shortening state), the same state (ie, “normal mode”) is looped at a rate of 60% when the jackpot is achieved. At the rate of%, it is configured to shift to the "prepare mode" or the "continuous mode" which is more advantageous than the current state. Therefore, the player can play a game paying attention to the state after the big hit.

  Next, state transition in the "preparation mode" that is more advantageous for the player than the above-described "normal mode" (it is easier to shift to the "continuous mode") will be described. This "preparation mode" is shown in the central part of FIG. Since this "preparation mode" is a time-short state of a normal symbol, the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640a is likely to be released. Therefore, since the player basically targets the second entrance 640 a to play a game, the drawing of the special symbol 2 is facilitated. However, when the lottery of special symbol 1 is suspended before becoming a jackpot or during a jackpot, the “preparation mode” is started from the lottery of special symbol 1 which has been suspended. For this reason, in the "preparation mode", when the player is playing a game as usual, it may happen that the jackpot of the special symbol 1 will be a big hit, or the lottery of the special symbol 2 will be a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 109, in the "preparation mode", transition to another state is made by passing a short period of time of a normal symbol given after the previous big hit or becoming a big hit. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 109, in the "preparation mode", when it is a regular jackpot winning at a ratio of 2.5% (when it is "normal jackpot A" in the special symbol 1 lottery , And in the special symbol 2 lottery "normal jackpot B"), after the end of the jackpot transition to the "normal mode" (see the central lower left of FIG. 109). That is, since the player falls into a disadvantageous state, in the "preparation mode", it is possible to cause the player to play the game, hoping that the player does not normally win a jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the "preparation mode", a probability variation jackpot won at a rate of 97.5%. In the case where one of "probable jackpot H" to "probably jackpot K" is selected, the mode is shifted to the "link mode" (see the central part of FIG. 109). For this reason, since the player can be expected to obtain a large number of winning balls in the “continuous mode”, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 109, in the "preparation mode", when the set number of time reductions (1 or 7 drawing times of the special symbol) elapses, it is more disadvantageous than the current situation, as in the case of the normal jackpot. Transition to the "normal mode" (fall). For this reason, it is possible to play the game in the "preparation mode" in anticipation of becoming a certain probability variation jackpot before time-shortening times elapse. In a typical gaming machine, the time saving state of the normal symbol is simply that holding balls are difficult to reduce, and the jackpot benefit does not change depending on whether it becomes a big hit in the short time status or a big hit in the non-time saving status. Is most. On the other hand, in this control example, the player changes to the most advantageous “continuous mode” by becoming a probability change jackpot during the “preparation mode” (time reduction state), but the “normal mode” (non-short time state ) Even if it becomes a jackpot, the majority will loop the most disadvantageous "normal mode". Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game characteristic that whether or not it is possible to win the probability change jackpot during the time saving state greatly affects the subsequent development. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, the “continuous mode” shown at the bottom of FIG. 109 will be described. In addition, as described above, since the "continuous mode" is a time-short state of a normal symbol, the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640a is easily released. Therefore, since the player basically targets the second entrance 640 a to play a game, the drawing of the special symbol 2 is facilitated. In addition, in order to shift from the "preparation mode" where the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easy to be performed in many cases, the "stationary mode" becomes the "stationary mode" with the lottery of the special symbol 1 being suspended. Things are rare. Therefore, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is basically executed in the "run mode".

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 109, in the "connected mode", there is a possibility of transition to another state only when the special symbol is a jackpot. Specifically, in "Running mode", if it becomes "Normal jackpot B" determined by the ratio of 2.5% when it becomes a jackpot by lottery of special symbol 2, "Normal mode" after the end of the jackpot (Refer to the lower left of FIG. 109). That is, the player falls from the most advantageous state to the most disadvantageous state, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, if it becomes "probable jackpot H" to "probability jackpot K" determined by the ratio of 97.5% when it becomes a jackpot by lottery of special symbol 2, it will be re-entered into "runso mode" again after the jackpot end. Transition (loop "run mode"). For this reason, in the "run mode", as long as winning any probability variation jackpot, a jackpot capable of acquiring a relatively large number of prize balls (a jackpot for which the second specified winning opening 65a is opened) and the following Since the time saving state of the normal symbol which continues to the jackpot is repeated, it is extremely advantageous for the player. Therefore, since the player can be made to play a game expecting the player to continue winning the jackpot in the "run mode", the player's interest in the game in the "run mode" can be improved. Can.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to shift to the "preparation mode" in which it is easy to shift to the "continuous mode" at a part of the jackpot in the "normal mode". Then, by winning one of the odd variable jackpots in the "preparation mode", after the jackpot ends, the mode is shifted to the "connection mode". In this "Rakuso mode", it is easy to become a big hit that can get a large number of winning balls, and when it comes to a definite variation jackpot determined by the ratio of 97.5% of the big hit, it will be "Rangoso" again. Mode is set. Therefore, by continuing to win the jackpot, it is possible to obtain a large number of winning balls continuously, which is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game by making the player shift to the "continuous mode" and make the "continuous mode" loop more times. The interest to the game can be improved.

  Referring back to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 110 (a)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, as described above, "5" is defined as the determination value for the hit of the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol (see FIG. 110 (a)). Moreover, in the high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol, "5-204" is prescribed as a judgment value used as a hit of the normal symbol (see FIG. 110 (a)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the second hit random number counter C4 value obtained based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 and the second hit random number table 202c are referred to, and a hit is made with a normal symbol. It is determined whether there is any.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is a data table that specifies the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation indicating the lottery result of the special symbol this time in association with the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 (b) to 113.

  FIG. 110 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d in this control example. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202d is for determining the variation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in the normal state of the normal symbol (ie, "normal mode"). Normal middle-big hit table 202d1 and normal out-of-table table 202d2 for determining the fluctuation time when the drawing result of the special symbol is out in the normal state of the normal symbol, and time saving state of the normal symbol (ie, "preparation mode" Or, if the lottery results of special symbols in the "Sourcing mode") is a big hit, if the lottery results of the special symbols are out in the time reduction state of the regular symbol in the time reduction state of the big hit table 202d3 for determining the fluctuation time And a time out-of-time out table 202d4 for determining the fluctuation time. Each of these tables will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 111 (a), the normal middle and large hitting table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 111 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the normal middle-large jackpot table 202d1. As described above, the normal middle / large jackpot table 202d1 is a data table used to determine the fluctuation time (variation pattern) when the lottery result of the special symbol is the jackpot in the normal state of the normal symbol. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, two kinds of normal fluctuation (7 seconds) and long fluctuation (10 seconds) are provided, and for each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined as a judgment value. It is set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), "0 to 99" fluctuates for normal fluctuation (7 seconds), and "100 to 198" fluctuates for long fluctuation (10 seconds). It is defined as the determination value of the type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in the normal state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the normal middle / large jackpot table 202d1.

  FIG. 111 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the normal drop-in table 202d2. As described above, the normal breakout table 202d2 is a data table used to determine the fluctuation time (variation pattern) when the lottery result of the special symbol is out in the normal state of the normal symbol. There are two types of deviation fluctuation patterns: deviation normal fluctuation (7 seconds) and deviation long fluctuation (10 seconds). For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is used as a judgment value. It is set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), “0 to 150” for out-of-normal variation (7 seconds) and “151 to 198” for out-of-long variation (10 seconds), respectively. It is defined as the determination value of the type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the special symbol is deviated in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the normal middle / large jackpot table 202d1.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the contents of the hour, middle, large jackpot table 202d3. At this time, as described above, the short / medium / big hit table 202d3 determines the fluctuation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot in the time-short state of the normal symbol (that is, "preparation mode" or "continuous mode") as described above. Data table used for There are nine types of fluctuation patterns when a big hit occurs during a short time state: short fluctuation (0.2 seconds), middle fluctuation (3 seconds), and long fluctuation A (90 seconds) to long fluctuation G (72 seconds) Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 112, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the variation pattern (variation time) which varies according to the previous jackpot type and the number of times of drawing the special symbol executed after the previous jackpot is finished (variation number) Are configured to be selected. This is to ensure a sufficient effect period for executing the “continuous mode suggestive effect” (see FIGS. 93 to 95) in the “preparation mode”. In addition, the "continuously mode suggestive effect" performed in the "preparation mode" is a fixed effect of 90 seconds for the effect time. However, as described above, the maximum number of times of change in the "preparation mode" is two, one or seven times (see FIGS. 107 and 108). Furthermore, even in the "preparation mode" in which seven short periods have been set, if the jackpot occurs before the end of the seven variations, it is possible to switch to another state before executing all the seven variation displays. Transition. For this reason, the number of drawing times of the special symbol for which the "preparation mode" continues differs every time according to the set number of times, the drawing result in the time-saving state, and the like.

  Therefore, in the present control example, the previous jackpot type and its jackpot type so that it is possible to shift from the "preparation mode" to another mode at the same timing regardless of the set number of time-shortening times and the lottery result during time-shortening state. The variation pattern (variation time) is selected in accordance with the number of variations (number of lottery times of special symbols) after the end of the jackpot. And, the fluctuation time to be selected is the same time (90 seconds which is the rendering time of “Sansu mode suggestion effect”, regardless of the set number of short times (once or seven times) and the lottery result during the short time Is configured to end all the variable display. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to secure a sufficient rendering period of the “continuous mode suggestive effect” performed in the “preparation mode”. In addition, since the rendering time of the “in continuous mode suggestive rendering” can be unified, there is no need to prepare rendering modes of a plurality of patterns having different rendering times. Thus, the processing load can be reduced and the storage capacity can be reduced.

  The specified contents of the hour-time, medium-duty, big-hit table 202d3 will be described more specifically. As shown in FIG. 112, when the previous jackpot type is any of “probably variable jackpot A, D, G, H, K”, the number of times of fluctuation since the end of the jackpot (number of lottery times of special symbol) Regardless of), the variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to the table for continuous use (at the time of big hit) shown in the lower part of FIG. This consecutive table (at the time of big hit) is used to determine the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time) in the "continuous mode". In addition, regardless of the number of times of fluctuation (number of times of drawing of special symbol), the fluctuation time is decided as "Sanso mode" to shift to "Preparation mode" after "probably variable jackpot A, D, G, H, K". It is because there is no such thing. That is, when the time reduction state of the normal symbol is reached after the end of each jackpot, it is always in the "run mode", so it is not necessary to secure the production period of the "run mode suggestion effect".

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 112, in the table for continuous use (at the time of big hit), the short variation (0.2 seconds) as the variation type is associated with the range where the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 99”. There is. On the other hand, middle variation 3 seconds is associated as a variation type with the range where the variation type counter CS1 is "100 to 198". As described above, in the "run mode", a short change time is determined as compared to the run time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the "normal mode". Can be run speedily. Further, since the period until the next big win can be shortened, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the game in the "continuously mode" becomes monotonous.

  As shown in FIG. 112, when the previous jackpot type is any of “probable jackpot B, E, I”, the fluctuation time (the number of lottery times for special symbols) varies depending on the number of fluctuation after the jackpot ( The fluctuation pattern is determined. More specifically, if it becomes a big hit in the first drawing of the special symbol after "probably big hit B, E, I", the long variation A as a variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (90 seconds) is determined. This makes it possible to match the fluctuation time of long fluctuation A (90 seconds) with the production time of "Ranso mode suggestion effect", so the timing when the preparation mode ends and the jackpot becomes "Ranso mode suggestion" It is possible to coincide with the timing at which the effect ends.

  In addition, if it becomes a big hit in the second drawing of the special symbol after "probable big hit B, E, I", long change B (87 seconds) as a change pattern regardless of the value of change type counter CS1 Is determined. Here, the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 113, but in the present control example, when the drawing of the special symbol comes off in the "preparation mode", the fluctuation time is irrelevant to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. There is a middle change of 3 seconds. For this reason, after the "certain variation big hit B, E, I", the first drawing of the special symbol will be missed, and if it is a big hit in the second drawing, 3 seconds of middle fluctuation and 87 of long fluctuation B After a total of 90 seconds of variation time with the second, the "preparation mode" ends and becomes a jackpot. That is, even after the "permanent change jackpot B, E, I", the variation time until the "preparation mode" is ended is also "Joso mode suggestive presentation effect", even when the big win is made by the special symbol lottery performed for the second time. It can be set to 90 seconds, which is the presentation time of

  Similarly, even if the third to seventh wins of the special symbol lottery after the "probable big hit B, E, I", the variation showing the removal of the special symbol executed until the jackpot Long variation C so that the total of the variation time of display (middle variation) (3 seconds x number of deviations) and the variation time of variation display (one of long variations C to G) indicating a big hit is 90 seconds The fluctuation time of ~ G is set. For example, when the jackpot is the fifth after the jackpot, the fluctuation time of the 1st to 4th deviation display is 3 seconds (middle fluctuation), and 78 seconds (the fluctuation time of the 5th fluctuation display) Since the long fluctuation E) is determined, the total fluctuation time is 90 seconds (3 seconds × 4 + 78 seconds). Therefore, in the "preparation mode" in which 7 short-term times have been set, even if a big hit is made in any of the first to seventh variations (the number of drawing special symbols), it is executed until the big hit The sum of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (middle fluctuation) corresponding to the out of the special symbol selected and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (long fluctuation A to long fluctuation G) corresponding to the big hit, It can be set to 90 seconds, which is the presentation time of. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient rendering period of the “continuous mode suggestive effect” performed in the “preparation mode”. In addition, since the rendering time of the “in continuous mode suggestive rendering” can be unified, there is no need to prepare rendering modes of a plurality of patterns having different rendering times. Thus, the processing load can be reduced and the storage capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, when the number of changes (the number of times of drawing of special symbol) after "the probability variation big hit B, E, I" is over 7 times, the table for continuous use shown in the lower part of Figure 112 (big hit The variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to time). When transitioning to the "preparation mode" after the end of "Positive variable jackpot B, E, I", seven short periods are always set, so after the end of "Positive variable jackpot B, E, I", 7 When the time saving state of the normal symbol continues beyond the number of times, it is to mean that it is the "continuous mode".

  Here, even when the mode is switched to the "continuous mode" after the end of the "probable big hit B, E, I", since the time-speaking medium hit table 202d3 is referenced, seven times after the "continuous mode" is entered If the jackpot falls within, a long fluctuation time (72 seconds to 90 seconds) is set. When a long fluctuation time is set in the "run mode", the period until the big hit becomes long, and the game may be extended. In this respect, in the present control example, when the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is made a big hit, the probability (percentage) for determining the “probability change jackpot I” is extremely low, such as 0.1%. (See Figure 108). Further, in the "run mode", since the ball is shot at the second ball entry port 640a, it is difficult to draw the special symbol 1 lottery. That is, it does not become the "probable jackpot B" or the "probably jackpot E" while the "run mode" and the jackpot of the special symbol are repeated (the "run mode" is looping). Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the "continuous mode" becomes long.

  As shown in FIG. 112, when it becomes a big hit in the first drawing of the special symbol after “probable change big hit C, F, J”, long change A as a change pattern regardless of the value of change type counter CS1 (90 seconds) is determined. This makes it possible to match the fluctuation time of long fluctuation A (90 seconds) with the production time of "Ranso mode suggestion effect", so the timing when the preparation mode ends and the jackpot becomes "Ranso mode suggestion" It is possible to coincide with the timing at which the effect ends.

  In addition, when the number of changes (number of drawing times for special symbols) from the end of "probable big hit C, F, J" is two or more, the table for continuous use shown at the bottom of Fig. 112 (at the time of big hit) The variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to. If you switch to the "preparation mode" after the end of the "perhaps C, F, J", the time period is always set only once, so after the end of the "C, F, J", 2 When the time saving state of the normal symbol continues beyond the number of times, it is to mean that it is the "continuous mode".

  As shown in FIG. 112, if the previous big hit type is a big win in the first special symbol lottery after “normal big hit A, B”, the previous big hit type is “probable big hit C, F, J As in the case of “1”, the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. This makes it possible to match the fluctuation time of long fluctuation A (90 seconds) with the production time of "Ranso mode suggestion effect", so the timing when the preparation mode ends and the jackpot becomes "Ranso mode suggestion" It is possible to coincide with the timing at which the effect ends.

  On the other hand, the fluctuation time in the case where the number of fluctuation (the number of lottery of special symbol) is two or more is not defined. There is no case to shift to "Running mode" after the end of "Normal jackpot A, B" (see Fig. 107, Fig. 108), and the time saving status is set after the end of "Normal jackpot A, B" It is because the short time is always one "preparation mode".

  As described above, the total variation time until the jackpot becomes “Running Mode” regardless of the number of times in the “Preparing Mode” and the lottery result of the special symbol in the “Preparing Mode”. It is configured to coincide with 90 seconds which is the presentation time of the "suggestion effect". Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient rendering period of the “continuous mode suggestive effect” performed in the “preparation mode”. In addition, since the rendering time of the “continuously mode suggesting rendering” can be unified, it is not necessary to prepare rendering modes of a plurality of patterns having different rendering times. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced and the storage capacity can be reduced.

  Further, the time-span, medium-duty, and big-hit table 202d3 is configured such that the variation time in the “continuous mode” is shorter than that in the “normal mode”. As a result, the game can be speedily executed in the "continuous mode". Further, since the period until the next big win can be shortened, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the game in the "continuously mode" becomes monotonous.

  Here, even in the case where the mode is switched to the continuous mode after the end of the "probably big hit C, F, J", since the time record medium to large hit table 202d3 is referred to, the first time after the "continuous mode" is entered When it is a big hit, a long fluctuation time (90 seconds) is set. When a long fluctuation time is set in the "run mode", the period until the big hit becomes long, and the game may be extended. In this respect, in the present control example, when the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is a big hit, the probability (percentage) of determining the “probable jackpot J” is extremely low at 0.1%. (See Figure 108). Further, in the "run mode", since the ball is shot at the second ball entry port 640a, it is difficult to draw the special symbol 1 lottery. That is, it does not become "probably hit jackpot C" or "probably hit jackpot F" while the "run mode" and the jackpot of the special symbol are repeated ("run mode" is looping). Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the "continuous mode" becomes long.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the hour-time middle drop-off table 202d4 will be described. At this time, as described above, when the drawing result of the special symbol is out in the time shortening state of the normal symbol (that is, the "preparation mode" or the "continuous mode") as described above, the variation table 202d4 determines the fluctuation time Data table used for There are four types of fluctuation patterns when falling out during a short time state: short fluctuation (0.2 seconds), middle fluctuation (3 seconds), long fluctuation A (90 seconds), and long fluctuation G (72 seconds) Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 113, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, different fluctuation patterns (variation time) according to the previous jackpot type and the number of times of drawing the special symbol executed after the previous jackpot ended (number of fluctuations). Are configured to be selected. This is to secure a sufficient rendering period (90 seconds) for executing the "continuous mode suggestive effect" (see FIGS. 93 to 95) in the "preparation mode" as in the case of the time saving medium and large hitting table 202d3. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 113, when the previous jackpot type is any of "probably variable jackpot A, D, G, H, K", the number of times of fluctuation since the end of the jackpot (number of lottery times of special symbol) Regardless of), the variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to the linkage table (at the time of removal) shown at the bottom of FIG. The table for consecutive loafing (when out of alignment) is used to determine the variation pattern (varying time) in the "continuously loaf mode". In addition, regardless of the number of times of fluctuation (number of times of drawing of special symbol), the fluctuation time is decided as "Sanso mode" to shift to "Preparation mode" after "probably variable jackpot A, D, G, H, K". It is because there is no such thing. That is, when it becomes a time saving state of a normal symbol after the end of the above each big hit, since it is always "continuously mode", it is not necessary to secure the rendering period (90 seconds) of "continuously mode suggested effect" It is.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 113, in the table for continuous use (at the time of disconnection), a short fluctuation (0.2 seconds) as a fluctuation type is associated with the range of fluctuation type counter CS1 of “0 to 160”. There is. On the other hand, in the range of “161 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1, middle variation 3 seconds is associated as a variation type. As described above, in the "run mode", a short change time is determined as compared to the run time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the "normal mode". Can be run speedily. Further, since the period until the next big win can be shortened, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the game in the "continuously mode" becomes monotonous. Further, when the lottery of the special symbol is out in the "run mode", the middle fluctuation (0.2 seconds) is more difficult to be selected than in the case of the win. As a result, in the continuous mode, by determining a relatively long (3 seconds) fluctuation time, it is possible to enhance the expectation for the jackpot of the special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to play the game paying attention to the fluctuation time, it is possible to prevent the game in the "continuously mode" from becoming monotonous and to improve the interest in the game.

  As shown in FIG. 113, when the previous jackpot type is any of “probable jackpot B, E, I”, the fluctuation time (the number of lottery times for special symbols) varies depending on the number of fluctuation after the jackpot ( The fluctuation pattern is determined. More specifically, in the case where the first to sixth special symbol lottery is lost after "probability big hit B, E, I", it is used as a variation pattern regardless of the value of variation type counter CS1. Middle fluctuation (3 seconds) is determined. On the other hand, when the seventh drawing of the special symbol goes out after "Perhaps B, E, I", the long fluctuation G (72 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Is determined. As a result, after the end of the "probable big hit B, E, I", it shifts to the "preparation mode" (7 times for a short time), and when all seven drawing of special symbols are out, the fluctuation time The total can be 90 seconds (3 seconds x 6 + 72 seconds). That is, the total variation time from the end of the "preparation mode" to the transition to the "normal mode" can be made to coincide with the rendering time of the "continuously mode suggestive effect".

  In addition, when the number of changes (the number of times of drawing of special symbol) after "the probability variation big hit B, E, I" is over 7 times, the table for continuous use shown in the lower part of Figure 112 (big hit The variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to time). When transitioning to the "preparation mode" after the end of "Positive variable jackpot B, E, I", seven short periods are always set, so after the end of "Positive variable jackpot B, E, I", 7 When the time saving state of the normal symbol continues beyond the number of times, it is to mean that it is the "continuous mode".

  Here, even when the mode changes to the "continuous mode" after the end of the "probable big hit B, E, I", since the time-scaling out-of-time table 202d4 is referred to, seven times after entering the "continuous mode" If it goes out continuously, a long fluctuation time (72 seconds) is set. When a long fluctuation time is set in the "run mode", the period until the big hit becomes long, and the game may be extended. In this respect, in the present control example, when the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is made a big hit, the probability (percentage) for determining the “probability change jackpot I” is extremely low, such as 0.1%. (See Figure 108). Further, in the "run mode", since the ball is shot at the second ball entry port 640a, it is difficult to draw the special symbol 1 lottery. That is, it does not become the "probable jackpot B" or the "probably jackpot E" while the "run mode" and the jackpot of the special symbol are repeated (the "run mode" is looping). Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the "continuous mode" becomes long.

  As shown in FIG. 113, when it is missed in the first drawing of the special symbol after “probable variation big hit C, F, J”, the long variation A as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (90 seconds) is determined. In this way, it is possible to match the fluctuation time of long fluctuation A (90 seconds) with the production time of "Renso mode suggestive effect", so the "preparation mode" of which one short period of time ends is completed and the "normal mode" It is possible to make the timing of the transition to “” coincide with the timing of the end of the “in-line mode suggestive effect”.

  In addition, when the number of changes (number of special symbol drawouts) after the end of "probable big hit C, F, J" is 2 or more, the table for continuous use shown at the bottom of Fig. 113 (at the time of removal) The variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to. If you switch to the "preparation mode" after the end of the "perhaps C, F, J", the time period is always set only once, so after the end of the "C, F, J", 2 When the time saving state of the normal symbol continues beyond the number of times, it is to mean that it is the "continuous mode".

  Here, even when the mode is shifted to the "continuous mode" after the end of the "probable big hit C, F, J", the time-scaling out-of-time table 202d4 is referred to, so the first time after the "continuous mode" When the lottery of the special symbol is out, a long fluctuation time (90 seconds) is set. When a long fluctuation time is set in the "run mode", the period until the big hit becomes long, and the game may be extended. In this respect, in the present control example, when the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is made a big hit, the probability (percentage) for determining the “probable change jackpot C” is extremely low at 0.1%. (See Figure 108). Further, in the "run mode", since the ball is shot at the second ball entry port 640a, it is difficult to draw the special symbol 1 lottery. That is, it does not become "probably hit jackpot C" or "probably hit jackpot F" while the "run mode" and the jackpot of the special symbol are repeated ("run mode" is looping). Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the "continuous mode" becomes long.

  As shown in FIG. 113, when the previous jackpot type is "off in the first special symbol lottery after the" normal jackpot A, B ", the previous jackpot type is" probable jackpot C, F, J As in the case of “1”, the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, since the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) can be matched with the presentation time of the "Sansu mode suggestive effect", the timing at which the "preparation mode" ends and the transition to the "normal mode" And the timing at which the “continuously mode suggestive effect” ends can be made to coincide with each other.

  On the other hand, the fluctuation time in the case where the number of fluctuation (the number of lottery of special symbol) is two or more is not defined. There is no case to shift to "Running mode" after the end of "Normal jackpot A, B" (see Fig. 107, Fig. 108), and the time saving status is set after the end of "Normal jackpot A, B" It is because the short time is always one "preparation mode".

  Thus, regardless of the number of times of the "preparation mode", the total fluctuation time until the end of the preparation mode is 90 seconds, which is the production time of the "continuously mode suggestive effect", regardless of the number of times of the "preparation mode" It is configured to match. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient rendering period of the “continuous mode suggestive effect” performed in the “preparation mode”. In addition, since the rendering time of the “continuously mode suggesting rendering” can be unified, it is not necessary to prepare rendering modes of a plurality of patterns having different rendering times. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced and the storage capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, the time saving / mid-out table 202 d 4 is configured such that the variation time in the “continuous mode” is shorter than that in the “normal mode”. As a result, the game can be speedily executed in the "continuous mode". Further, since the period until the next big win can be shortened, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the game in the "continuously mode" becomes monotonous.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, the correspondence of a fluctuation time and a presentation mode is demonstrated, when the number of times of time saving of 7 times of a normal symbol is set in "preparation mode." FIG. 114 (a) is a diagram showing a case where the time reduction number of the normal symbol is set seven times, and the lottery of all the special symbols is out. That is, it is the figure which showed the case where deviation was alert | reported by roulette chance production | presentation.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (a), when the variable effect corresponding to the disconnection is executed seven times in the "preparation mode", the first (time reduction 1) to the sixth (time reduction 6) fluctuation display fluctuates for 3 seconds. The time is set. On the other hand, in the seventh (time saving 7) fluctuation display, a fluctuation time of 72 seconds is set. Then, when the seventh drawing of the special symbol is finished, the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended by the passage of the number of time reduction, and the mode shifts to the "normal mode". In this total of 90 seconds, "Running mode suggestive effect" is executed.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), when the jackpot ends and the shift to the "preparation mode", first, the lucky number increase effect (see FIGS. 93 (a) and (b)) is executed Be done. As described above, this lucky number increase effect is an effect of executing a lottery each time a ball enters the second entry ball opening 640a, and increasing the lucky number (hit pocket) when the lottery is won. . The lucky number increase effect is a fixed effect for 20 seconds.

  When the lucky number increase presentation ends, the roulette chance presentation (see FIGS. 94 and 95) is started. As described above, this roulette chance effect is an effect to notify whether or not to shift to the “continuous mode” depending on the type of the pocket in which the ball B falls. This roulette chance production is a production with a fixed production time of 65 seconds. After the end of the roulette chance effect, a five-second ending effect for notifying the end of the “continuous mode suggestive effect” is set. The rendering time of the ending effect may extend depending on the situation of the game in the "preparation mode".

  In this way, the "Sansu mode suggestive effect" of this control example is basically a 90-second total of the 20-second lucky number increase effect, the 65-second roulette chance effect effect, and the 5-second ending effect. , Will be executed in this order. The variation time of each variation display (variation presentation) executed in the "preparation mode" is set in accordance with the presentation time of 90 seconds, seven variation displays are executed without intervals, and all the variation displays are performed. When it ends, it is constituted so that "the continuous sorrow mode suggestion production" just ends. As a result, although the "preparation mode" has not ended, the "series mode suggestive effect" has ended, or conversely, the "series mode" has been made endlessly even though the "preparation mode" has ended. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the fact that the effect is continued to be executed, and link the gaming state and the effect to be executed. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize whether or not the present is the "preparation mode" by the effect to be executed.

  Note that by setting the lucky number increase effect to 20 seconds, it is possible to execute roulette chance effect, taking into consideration the lottery results of all the special symbols executed in the “preparation mode”. That is, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed without interruption, the seventh lottery is executed after 18 seconds at the longest, so whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol executed the seventh time is a hit or not After determining and determining whether or not to shift to the “continuous mode” according to the determination result, it is possible to start roulette chance presentation. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not to shift to the “continuous mode” in the middle of the roulette chance production, and execute processing such as rewriting the result in the middle of the production, and the result of the production at the start of the roulette chance production The processing load can be reduced while the roulette chance effect is being performed, since it can be set including up to.

  Next, referring to FIG. 114 (b), when the time reduction number of the normal symbol is set 7 times and it becomes out by lottery of all the special symbols, it is special in the middle of 7 times of variable display corresponding to out. An effect mode when the lottery of the symbol is interrupted will be described. That is, a case will be described where there is a period in which the ball does not enter the second ball entry port 640 a in the middle of the “preparation mode”. In FIG. 114 (b), since the ball did not enter the second entry port 640a for 5 seconds after the end of the second variation display, the second variation display and the third variation display Shows a case where a 5-second fluctuation stop state occurs between the

  As shown in FIG. 114 (b), even if the fluctuation stop state occurs in the middle of the "preparation mode", the effect times of the lucky number increase effect and the roulette chance effect are not changed. That is, when the "preparation mode" is started, a lucky number increase presentation for 20 seconds is performed, and then a roulette chance presentation for 65 seconds is performed. On the other hand, the execution period of the ending effect is extended for 5 seconds in accordance with the fluctuation stop period. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the ending effect is performed for 10 seconds. As described above, in this control example, when the fluctuation stop state occurs in the "preparation mode" and the period in the "preparation mode" is shifted from 90 seconds, the effect time of the ending effect is varied. Is configured to be able to absorb the misalignment. As a result, even if the fluctuation stop state occurs, the period in which the "preparation mode" is in effect can be made to coincide with the effect period of "in-line mode suggestion effect".

  In this control example, the fluctuation stop period is absorbed by varying the effect period of the ending effect, so that the period in which the "preparation mode" is in effect matches the effect period of the "in continuous mode suggestive effect". However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect time of the lucky number increase effect may be changed, or the effect period of the roulette chance effect may be changed. In addition, when the fluctuation stop is detected, it is possible to constitute so as to interrupt “continuous mode indication suggestion effect”, and to be able to resume the effect when the fluctuation start is detected after that.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (a), the relationship between the effect mode and the fluctuation time in the case of becoming a big hit by lottery of special symbols in the "preparation mode" will be described. FIG. 115 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a case in which a big hit is made in the fourth special symbol lottery of which the number of time reductions of the normal symbol is set seven times. As shown in FIG. 115 (a), in the drawing of the special symbol executed in the "preparation mode", the first time (time reduction 1) to the third time (time reduction 3) are removed and the fourth time (time reduction 4) is a big hit Then, 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first (time reduction 1) to 3 (time reduction 3) fluctuation display, and 81 seconds (long fluctuation D) is set as the fluctuation time of the fourth (time reduction 4) fluctuation display. Be done. As a result, the total of the fluctuation time can be made to coincide with 90 seconds which is the production period of the "Sansu mode suggestion effect". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), the "Renso mode suggestive effect" of 90 seconds in total of the lucky number increase effect of 20 seconds, the roulette chance effect of 65 seconds, and the ending effect of 5 seconds is ended. At the timing, the "preparation mode" can be ended. Therefore, since the gaming state and the effect to be executed can be linked, the player can be made to recognize whether or not the present is the "preparation mode" by the effect to be executed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 115 (b), when the time reduction number of the normal symbol is set 7 times and it becomes a big hit in the fourth special symbol lottery, the lottery of the special symbol in the middle of the four variable display The presentation aspect in the case of having interrupted is demonstrated. That is, a case will be described where there is a period in which the ball does not enter the second ball entry port 640 a in the middle of the “preparation mode”. In FIG. 115 (b), since the ball did not enter the second entry ball opening 640a for 40 seconds after the end of the third variable display (time reduction 3), the third variable display and the fourth Shows a case where a 40 second fluctuation stop state occurs with the fluctuation display of.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (b), even if the fluctuation stop state occurs in the middle of the "preparation mode", the effect times of the lucky number increase effect and the roulette chance effect are not changed. That is, when the "preparation mode" is started, a lucky number increase presentation for 20 seconds is performed, and then a roulette chance presentation for 65 seconds is performed. In addition, at the start of execution of this roulette chance effect, since it is undecided whether or not to shift to the “continuous mode”, it is informed that this roulette chance effect is out (the ball B falls in the out pocket) ). And in the example of FIG. 115 (b), it enters into the 2nd ball entrance 640a in the middle of the roulette chance effect which announces detachment, and it becomes a big hit by lottery of a special symbol. For this reason, in this control example, in order to notify transition to the “continuous mode”, once the deviation is notified by the roulette chance effect being executed, and after setting the ending effect of 5 seconds as usual, It is configured to execute roulette chance production again (make back roulette chance production). The resurrection roulette chance effect is performed for 30 seconds, and finally the ball falls in the hit pocket and the transition to the "continuous mode" is notified. Then, after the end of the revival roulette chance effect, an ending effect of 10 seconds is set. The ending effect is set to absorb the difference between the effect period due to the occurrence of the fluctuation stop period and the period of the "preparation mode", and the effect period can be varied according to the difference.

  As described above, when the shift to the “continuous mode” is determined in the middle of the roulette chance presentation for notifying the disconnection, the player can be pleased by executing the revival roulette chance. In addition, even if the fluctuation stop period occurs, since it is possible to execute the effect of the length according to the fluctuation stop period, it is possible to prevent the production period and the period of the "preparation mode" from being shifted (suppression) can do. In addition, when the fluctuation stop period is shorter than 30 seconds and the resurrection roulette chance can not be executed, the short display effect ending in a relatively short time (for example, 5 seconds) without the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 is performed. Be done. When the fluctuation stop period is shorter than 30 seconds, it is informed by this short display effect whether or not to shift to the "continuous mode", so it is determined whether the transition to the "continuous mode" is made or not Can be made sure that

  Referring back to FIG. 106 (a), the description will be continued. The game result setting table 202e is a data table that defines information (state setting information) for determining the game state after the big hit is ended by the lottery of the special symbol. In addition, the state setting table 202f determines various setting values (probability change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving counter 203h) regarding the game state after the big hit end based on the state setting information selected from the game result setting table 202e Data table used to

  In the pachinko machine 10, the state setting information provided in the RAM 203 from the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 116 (a)) according to the jackpot type won based on winning in the jackpot. It stores in the storage area 203j (see FIG. 117). The state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is held during the big hit, and at the end timing of the big hit, various setting values regarding the gaming state after the big hit end (probability change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving It is used to read and set the counter 203 h) from the state setting table 202 f (see FIG. 116 (b)). More specifically, a state setting table 202f (see FIG. 116 (b)) which defines various setting values (probability change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving counter 203h) regarding the gaming state for each value of the state setting information. Are used to select and set combinations of various setting values. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the random number value (counter value) itself acquired upon entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640a (counter value) itself ends the big hit Continue to hold until the time, not based on the random value (counter value) to determine the gaming state after the end of the big hit, the first ball entrance 64, or the second ball entrance 640a Only the state setting information value selected from the game result setting table 202e is held during the big hit based on the random number value (counter value) acquired along with the start winning).

  Here, when the random number value to be the big hit is held during the fluctuation pattern production at the big hit or during the big hit state thereafter, the big hit random number will be the big hit because the fraudulent player reads the big hit random number. Random numbers may be identified. Therefore, the timing at which the specified random number value appears is analyzed, and there is a possibility that the jackpot may easily be incorrectly assigned based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, in the present control example, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into the state setting information value and held until the big hit end time point, and the gaming state after the big hit ends based on the state setting information value. Since it is configured to set, it is possible to limit the period in which the random value itself which is the jackpot of the special symbol is held to a short time. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the random symbol value which is the big hit of the special symbol to be illegally obtained from the outside from the outside, so analyze the timing when the random value which is the big hit appears and analyze the fraud that draws the big hit based on the analyzed timing. It can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set as a so-called hanging board, random numbers are acquired at the timing when the random number value that becomes the big hit appears, and the cheating that controls to make the success or failure of the big hit be suppressed Can.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, during display of various set values (probability change flag 203f, time reduction flag 203g, and time reduction counter 203h) related to the gaming state after the big hit ends, , And is not held during the subsequent jackpot (the bonus game state), it is configured to hold only the state setting information. Instead of providing a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various setting values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to merely provide an area for holding the status setting information value, so the storage area of the RAM 203 is used efficiently. can do.

  The game result setting table 202e and the state setting table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 (a) and 116 (b). As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in the game result setting table 202e, the jackpot ends for each type of jackpot which is won by the gaming state at the time when the drawing of the special symbol is executed and the drawing of the special symbol. The value of the state setting information, which is information for setting the gaming state after play, is defined. Further, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the state setting table 202f, for each value of the state setting information, set values regarding the gaming state after the big hit is defined.

  More specifically, in the game result setting table 202e, "00H" is associated as the value of the state setting information with "probability big hit A to K" in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol "05H" is associated with the "normal jackpot A, B" in the table as the value of the state setting information. Similarly, "00H" is associated as the value of the state setting information to "probable variation jackpot A, H" in the normal state (non-short time state) of the normal symbol, and the normal state (non-short time state) of the normal symbol “01H” is associated with the “probability variation jackpot B, E, H” in the above as the value of the state setting information. Furthermore, "02H" is associated as the value of the state setting information with "probability variation big hit C, F, J" in the normal state (non-shorting state) of the normal symbol, and the normal state (non-shorting state) of the normal symbol ) Is associated with "03H" as the value of the state setting information for "probable variation jackpot D, G, K", and for "normal jackpot A, B" in the normal state (non-short time state) of the normal symbol “04H” is associated as the value of the state setting information.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the state setting table 202f, for the value “00H” of the state setting information, “on” is set as the probability change flag 203f, the short time flag 203g, and the short time middle counter 203h. , "On", and "0" are associated with each other. In addition, although the details will be described later, the probability change flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is a probability change state, and the time reduction flag 203g is a time reduction state of the normal symbol continuing to the next jackpot (ie, " It is a flag indicating whether or not it is a continuous mode, and the time saving counter 203 h is a counter for counting the number of time saving times of the normal symbol (that is, the number of time saving times remaining in the “preparation mode”). Therefore, if the probability change flag 203f is "on", the short time flag 203g is "on", and the value of the time low / middle counter 203h is "0", the normal pattern which continues the special symbol after the big hit and continues until the next big hit It shifts to the time saving state of the symbol (that is, "the continuous mode"). As mentioned above, if it becomes a definite variation jackpot (certain variation jackpot A to K) in the time saving state of the normal symbol, or if it becomes a "constant variation jackpot A, H" in the normal state of the normal symbol, the "continuously mode" Since the game is shifted to (see FIGS. 107 and 108), by referring to the game result setting table 202e and the state setting table 202f, it is possible to set the correct gaming state after the end of the jackpot.

  In the state setting table 202f, for the value "01H" of the state setting information, "ON", "OFF", and "7" are respectively the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, and the time saving middle counter 203h. It is associated. Therefore, when “01H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203 j when “definitely big hit B, E, I” is obtained in the normal state (that is, “normal mode”) of the normal symbol (FIG. a) See) After the jackpot, it is possible to shift to the "preparation mode" in which the number of time savings is seven.

  In the state setting table 202f, "on", "off", and "1" are associated with the value "02H" of the state setting information as the probability change flag 203f, the short time flag 203g, and the short time counter 203h, respectively. It is done. Therefore, when “02H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203 j in the normal condition (that is, “normal mode”) of the normal symbol, it becomes “probable variation big hit C, F, J” (FIG. 116 ( a) See) After the jackpot, it is possible to shift to the "preparation mode" in which the number of time savings is one.

  In the state setting table 202f, "on", "off", and "0" correspond to the value "03H" of the state setting information as the probability change flag 203f, the short time flag 203g, and the short time counter 203h, respectively. It is done. Therefore, when "03H" is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j in the normal condition (that is, "normal mode") of the normal symbol, it becomes "probable variation big hit D, G, K" (Fig. 116 ( a) Reference), after the jackpot, can be shifted to the "normal mode".

  In the state setting table 202f, "off", "off", and "1" are associated with the value "04H" of the state setting information as the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, and the time saving middle counter 203h, respectively. It is done. Therefore, in the normal state (that is, "normal mode") of the normal symbol, when it becomes "normal large hit A, B" and "04H" is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (Fig. 116 (a) Reference), it is possible to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, and to shift to the "preparation mode" in which the number of time savings of the normal symbol is one.

  In the state setting table 202f, "off", "off", and "0" are associated with the value "05H" of the state setting information as the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, and the time saving middle counter 203h, respectively. It is done. Therefore, when it becomes "normal big hit A, B" in the time saving state (that is, "preparation mode" or "continuous mode") of the normal symbol, and "05H" is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j. (See FIG. 116 (a)), it is possible to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot and to shift to the normal state of the symbol normally (ie, the “normal mode”).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the value of the state setting information according to the big hit type is read out from the game result setting table 202e and stored in the state setting information storage area 203j. By reading out and setting various setting values corresponding to the state setting information from the state setting table 202f at the end of the state transition, the state transition as shown in FIG. 109 can be realized. That is, it is possible to realize the game characteristics of going back and forth between the three states of "normal mode", "preparation mode" and "continuous mode".

  Further, in this control example, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into the state setting information value and held until the big hit end time point, and the gaming state after the big hit end is set based on the state setting information value. Since it is configured, it is possible to limit the period in which the random value itself that is the jackpot of the special symbol is held to a short time. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the random symbol value which is the big hit of the special symbol to be illegally obtained from the outside from the outside, so analyze the timing when the random value which is the big hit appears and analyze the fraud that draws the big hit based on the analyzed timing. It can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set as a so-called hanging board, random numbers are acquired at the timing when the random number value that becomes the big hit appears, and the cheating that controls to make the success or failure of the big hit be suppressed Can.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, during display of various set values (probability change flag 203f, time reduction flag 203g, and time reduction counter 203h) related to the gaming state after the big hit ends, , And is not held during the subsequent jackpot (the bonus game state), it is configured to hold only the state setting information. Instead of providing a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various setting values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to merely provide an area for holding the status setting information value, so the storage area of the RAM 203 is used efficiently. can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the present control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 117, the RAM 203 of this control example has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. The winning information storage area 203e, the probability variation flag 203f, the short time flag 203g, the hour counting counter 203h, the winning number counter 203i, the status setting information storage area 203j, the status storage area 203k, and the prefetch probability variation flag 203m And a counter buffer 203y and other memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing winnings on the first winning opening 64, and has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data includes four holding areas (the first holding area). Among the vacant areas of the area to the reserved fourth area), the areas with the smallest area number (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is the common execution area After being shifted (moved), determinations such as a lottery of a special symbol are performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the common execution area.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins to the first winning opening 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the big hit lottery of the original special symbol and Besides, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from each value of the acquired counters C1 to C3. Thus, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning combination From now on, it is described that the prediction is made by prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, a pass / fail, stop classification, a fluctuation pattern etc. correspond as various information.

  Then, when the pre-reading is finished, a winning information command including various information (appropriate, variation pattern, etc.) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pass / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. Store in 223a.

  In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. From this, various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning combination is predicted. In addition, this prediction (prefetching) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability variation gaming state) at the time when the variation corresponding to the start winning is started. . Thereby, it is possible to accurately predict the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding first Among the vacant areas of area 4), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserve area to the execution area, the first reserve area becomes empty, so the prizes stored in the other reserve areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserve ball storage area 203a. The shift process is performed to pack the data in the area 1 into a small reserved area of area number 1. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c is a holding ball of the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B based on the entry of the first winning opening 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number (waiting count) up to 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases to 1 for the maximum value 4 each time Are added one by one (see S404 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 131).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 131 and S405 in FIG. 133). ). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the fluctuation display suspended in the main control device 110 by the suspension ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 retention ball number counter 203 c is changed. You can get the value of the ball number itself. Thereby, the number of holding balls of the variable display controlled by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the holding ball of the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command received.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is based on the passage of the ball in the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, and the number of holding balls of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed in the second symbol display device 83 Is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 every time the ball passes through the normal entry hole (through gate) 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Up to one is added (see S704 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 135).

  When the ball passes through the ordinary entry (through gate) 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of suspension display of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the ordinary entrance (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. (S703 of FIG. 136: No).

  The probability change flag 203 f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state (high probability state of special symbol) of the special symbol. If the value of this probability change flag 203f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special variation state of the special symbol, and if off, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal condition of the special symbol (the low probability state of the special symbol) Indicates that there is. The probability change flag 203f has its initial value set to OFF, and whenever the jackpot ends, the state corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f. The probability change flag 203f is set. That is, when "on" is read from the state setting table 202f, the probability change flag 203f is set to "on", and when "off" is read, the probability change flag 203f is set to "off". Ru. Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probability change state in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 132) or the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) (S302 in FIG. 132, FIG. 134). When the next jackpot game is started, the game is set to off (see S213 in FIG. 131).

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 132) or the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) is performed, a lottery of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 132) or the special symbol 2 winning process (FIG. 134), the value of the probability change flag 203f is referred to, and if the value is on, the first random number table for high probability time While a lottery of special symbols is performed based on 202a, if the value of the probability change flag 203f is off, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  The time saving flag 203g is a flag indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol continuing until the next jackpot (that is, whether it is the "continuous mode") or not. At this time, if the value of the short flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol continuing to the next big hit, and if off, the pachinko machine 10 is not in the "continuous mode". Show. As described above, in the present control example, in addition to the "run mode", the "shortening mode" of the normal symbol also occurs in the "preparation mode". The remaining number of times in the "preparation mode" is counted by the hour / minute counter 203h. That is, in the present control example, the normal state (i.e., the "normal mode") of the normal symbol is established only when the time saving flag 203g is off and the value of the time saving counter 203h is zero.

  The short time flag 203g has an initial value set to off, and whenever the jackpot ends, the state corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f. The time saving flag 203g is set. That is, when "ON" is read from the state setting table 202f, the time saving flag 203g is set to "ON", and when "OFF" is read, the time saving flag 203g is set to "OFF". Ru. Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 135) (see S608, S614, and 619 in FIG. 135), and the next jackpot game is started. Is set to off (see S213 in FIG. 131).

  The time saving counter 203h is a counter for counting the time saving count of the normal symbol (that is, the remaining time saving count in the "preparation mode"). At this time, if the value of the short / mid counter 203h is larger than 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 normally has the number of times of symbol reduction remaining (that is, the "preparation mode") and If there is, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the "preparation mode". As described above, even if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, if the time saving flag 203g is on, it means that the time saving state of the normal symbol is established. That is, in the present control example, the normal state (i.e., the "normal mode") of the normal symbol is established only when the time saving flag 203g is off and the value of the time saving counter 203h is zero.

  The hour / short counter 203h has an initial value set to 0, and the value corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read out from the state setting table 202f every time the big hit ends. And set as the value of the hour / minute counter 203h. That is, when “0” is read from the state setting table 202 f, the value of the time saving / slow counter 203 h is set to “0”, and when “1” is read, the value of the time saving / slow counter 203 h is When “1” is set and “7” is read, the value of the time saving / midday counter 203 h is set to “7”. Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 135) (see S608, S614, and 619 in FIG. 135), and the next jackpot game is started. The value is initialized to 0 (see S213 in FIG. 131).

  The winning number counter 203i is a counter for counting the total number of balls winning to the first variable winning device 82a or the second variable winning device 65 in each round of the big hit. In each round of the jackpot, it is determined whether the end condition of each round is satisfied or not according to the value of the winning number counter 203i. The winning number counter 203i is incremented by one each time a winning on the first variable winning device 82a or the second variable winning device 65 is detected in a big hit (see S1203 in FIG. 141). Then, when it is detected that the winning number counter 203i is 10 or more in the jackpot, the round being executed is ended (see S1207 in FIG. 141). The winning number counter 203i has an initial value set to 0, and the value of the winning number counter 203i is initialized to 0 at the end of each round. The value of the winning number counter 203i is backed up even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off.

  The status setting information storage area 203j stores (holds) the status setting information read from the game result setting table 202e according to the jackpot type until the jackpot is finished, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won. It is a storage area for storing. As described above, based on the state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203j, various setting values corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit end are read from the state setting table 202f and set (FIG. See S1115).

  The state storage area 203 k is a storage area in which information indicating which period the present is in the jackpot is stored. Here, the jackpot is an opening period for informing the start of the jackpot, a round period in which the first variable winning device 82a or the second specified winning opening 65a is opened and closed, and an ending period for informing the end of the jackpot. And at least. The state storage area 203k stores information for identifying which one of the plurality of types of periods the current period is. More specifically, the jackpot is started, "01H" is stored in the state storage area 203k in the opening period, and "02H" is stored in the state storage area 203k in the first round, and two rounds are performed. In the eye, "03H" is stored in the state storage area 203k, and "04H" is stored in the state storage area 203k in the ending period. On the other hand, in the state other than middle hit, "00H" is stored in the state storage area 203k.

  The initial value of the status storage area 203k is set to "00H", and the stored value is backed up even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. The value stored in the state storage area 203k is referred to when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and based on the value stored in the state storage area 203k notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the current gaming state. State commands are set. As a result, even if the power is shut off during the game, the gaming state grasped by the main control unit 110 at the time of power return can be matched with the gaming state grasped by the voice lamp control unit 113. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that a wrinkle is generated between the actual gaming state and the effect.

  The pre-read certainty change flag 203m is a probability change state of the special symbol (high of the special symbol) when the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read based on the random number value (counter value) acquired according to the start winning combination A flag indicating whether you should analyze winning data as being a probability state) or analyzing winning data as if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (special symbol low probability state) of a special symbol It is.

  When the flag 203m in the pre-read certainty change flag is on, the winning data is analyzed as the pachinko machine 10 is in the special variation state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. On the other hand, when the flag 203m in advance is changed, the winning data is analyzed as that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched. The pre-read certainty changing flag 203m is initialized to off at the time of initial setting of the RAM (see S916 in FIG. 138), and is set to on each time it is determined that the pre-read lottery result is a probability change jackpot (see FIG. 133, S410, and FIG. 134, S514). On the other hand, each time it is determined that the pre-read lottery result is normally a big hit, it is set to off (see S412 in FIG. 133 and S515 in FIG. 134).

  The counter buffer 203y includes the above-described counters (first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, first initial value random number counter CINI1, fluctuation type counter CS1, second random number counter C4 , And a storage area for storing the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2). The counter value stored in the counter buffer 203y is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the MPU 201 Stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the control program and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (work area) where various flags, counters, and I / O values are stored. Have.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 139), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 138) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 137) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b). The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 defines at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, an operation scenario table 222b, a rotational position determination table 222c, and an addition determination table 222d.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is already known and will be briefly described. However, the voice lamp control device 113 performs rough fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110. Further detailed fluctuation content is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a from the content (variation time). Thereby, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from main controller 110, one fluctuation mode is determined from among a plurality of types by lottery.

  The operation scenario table 222b is an operation of an accessory in the case of executing a movable effect in which at least one type of each accessory (upper elevator unit 300, liquid crystal elevator unit 400, left swing unit 500, rotation unit 600, etc.) is movable. It is a data table that defines the content (operation scenario). More specifically, it is a data table in which setting values (operating speed, operating step number, operating direction, etc.) to be set for various drive motors corresponding to each item are defined. The details of the operation scenario table 222b will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120.

  FIG. 119 (a) is a block diagram showing an operation scenario table 222b. Data is stored in the operation scenario table 222 b for each type of actable (variable) role. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), the upper lifting unit table 222b1 referred to when the effect for driving the upper lifting unit 300 is set, and the effect for driving the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 are set. The liquid crystal lifting unit table 222b2 referred to in the case, the left rocking unit table 222b3 referred to when the effect for driving the left rocking unit 500 is set, and the effect for driving the rotation unit 600 are set. In this case, a rotating unit table 222b4 to be referred to in the case is defined. In addition, in the case of a jackpot type (specific jackpot type) in which the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left rocking unit 500 are connected, a specific opening in which the operation content of each part in the opening period of the jackpot is defined. Table 222b5, a specific ending table 222b6 in which the operation content of each item in a specific jackpot type ending period is defined, and an operation content of the initial operation of each item executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on An initial operation table 222b7 defined for each item is defined.

  Each of these tables will be more specifically described with reference to FIGS. 119 (b) to 120. FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the upper lifting unit table 222 b 1 described above. As shown in FIG. 119 (b), in the upper lift unit table 222b1, settings are made for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223g indicating the progress of setting based on the operation scenario. Values (operating speed, operating step number, and operating direction) are defined.

  Here, the operating speed indicates the frequency with which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) for setting the operation of one step to the corresponding drive motor (motor for upper and lower elevations 341), per second. It represents by the number (pps, puls per second) of the signal (pulse) output to. For example, if the operation speed is 333 pps, this means that the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) 333 times per second to the upper lifting motor 341. That is, it means driving the upper lifting motor 341 at a speed of 333 steps per second. The number of operation steps indicates the number of operations performed by the upper elevating motor 341. In other words, a signal (pulse for setting the operation of one step from the motor driver to the upper elevating motor 341) Indicates the number of times to output). For example, the operation step number 127 means that the operation for one step is set 127 times for the upper lifting motor 341. Furthermore, the operating direction means the driving direction (rotational direction of the motor) of the upper lifting motor 341, and two types of directions, a positive direction and a negative direction, can be set. In the upper lifting motor 341, the direction from the raised position (origin position) to the lowered position is a positive direction, and the direction from the lowered position to the raised position (an origin position) is a negative direction. By setting these set values for the motor driver for driving the upper lifting motor 341, the corresponding operation can be accurately performed.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (b), an operation for moving down the elevator 330 of the upper elevator unit 300 from the ascent position (origin position) to the down position to the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g (operation of the forward path) Are associated. Specifically, 333 pps is defined as the operation speed, 127 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. The setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when it is time to drive the upper lifting unit 300 in the effect. Note that step 127 means the number of steps up to the lowered position.

  An operation for stopping (resting) the elevator 330 of the upper elevator unit 300 at the lowered position is associated with the value "02H" of the operation pointer 223g. Specifically, 333 pps is defined as the operation speed, 1000 is defined as the operation step, and “stop” is defined as the operation direction. That is, it is defined that a stop command is continuously issued 1000 times continuously at an operation speed of 333 pps. Thus, the lift 330 of the upper lift unit 300 can be stopped at the lowered position for about 3 seconds (1000 times / 333 pps).

  The value (03H) of the movement pointer 223g is associated with an operation (operation on the return path) for raising the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 from the lowered position to the raised position (origin position). Specifically, 333 pps is defined as the operation speed, 127 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. Further, END data is associated with the value "04H" of the action pointer 223g. By reading out the END data, it is determined that all operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  Similarly for the liquid crystal lifting unit table 222b2, the left swinging unit table 222b3, and the rotating unit table 222b4, a motor driver corresponding to a drive motor for driving each item for each value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to each item Setting contents to be set to are specified.

  Further, FIG. 119 (c) is a view showing the defined contents of the above-mentioned specific opening table 222b5. As described above, when the specific opening table 222b5 becomes the jackpot type (specific jackpot type) to which the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swinging unit 500 are connected, the respective prizes in the opening period of the jackpot Is a data table in which the operation content of is defined. Note that the specific jackpot type is, specifically, in each round of the jackpot, the opening pattern A (opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds 20 times to the first variable winning device 82a It is a jackpot type in which the open pattern to be repeated is set.

  As described above, when the jackpot type in which the opening pattern A is set in the "normal mode" is won, the drive side slide member 420 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 are connected. By arranging in the above, it is configured to cause all the balls winning to the first variable winning device 82 a to flow down to the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520. Then, every time the ball entering the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 (every time passage of the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c of the second passage forming member 422), a normal symbol The short suggestion effect is executed to indicate whether or not the short time state is set.

  In this control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 are driven in the opening period of the big hit where the open pattern A is set in order to execute the short suggestion effect at this time. Configured to move these items to the connected position before the first round of the jackpot is started (ie, before the ball is ready to enter the first variable winning device 82a). It is done. The operation content of each role during the opening period is defined in the specific opening table 222b5.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (c), in the specific opening table 222b5, the liquid crystal lift unit 400 is driven from the lowered position to the connected position (see FIG. 9) for the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g. The action of is associated. Specifically, 500 pps is defined as the operation speed, 250 is defined as the operation step, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. By setting the operation content, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 can be disposed at the connection position.

  Further, for the value “02H” of the operation pointer 223g, an operation content for causing the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 to swing from the release position (origin position) to the connection position is defined. ing. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 200 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. By setting the operation content, the first passage forming member 520 can be disposed at the connection position. Therefore, since it is possible to connect the first passage forming member 520 with the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 previously arranged to the connecting position, the ball winning to the first variable winning device 82a can be made the first passage forming member It can be guided (flowing down) to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 via 520.

  Further, END data indicating the end of the operation is associated with the value “03H” of the operation pointer 223 g. By reading out the END data, it is determined that all operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  The operation content of the left swing unit 500 and the operation content of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 are also defined for the specific ending table 222b6 as in the case of the specific opening table 222b5. Specifically, the setting contents for driving the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 from the connection position to the release position, and the settings for driving the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 from the connection position to the lowering position The content and is prescribed. The specific ending table 222b6 is not shown in the figure because it has only the direction of movement and the order of movement of the special items opposite to that of the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)).

  Next, details of the above-described initial operation table 222b7 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the initial operation table 222b7. As shown in FIG. 120, this initial operation table 222b7 is associated with the value of the operation pointer 223g, the type of the role setting the operation, and the setting value for setting the motor driver corresponding to the position Is defined.

  Unlike the other tables defined in the operation scenario table 222b, the initial operation table 222b7 does not specify the number of operation steps, but defines the operation end condition and the number of steps for determining an abnormality. That is, in the initial operation in the present control example, the operation speed and the operation direction defined in the initial operation table 222b7 are one step operation until the arrival at the various sensors provided corresponding to each prize is detected. It is configured to run repeatedly. For example, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is provided with a plurality of sensors for determining the lifting position. That is, when the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position (origin position), the output is H (high), and when it is disposed at the connection position, the output is H (high). And an intermediate sensor 419 for liquid crystal. In the initial operation of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 corresponding to the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g, it is detected by the liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 that the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 has reached the connection position (the output of the liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 becomes H) It is driven one step at a time in the forward direction (rising direction) at an operation speed of 500 pps.

  If it is determined that the abnormality determination step value defined in the initial operation table 222b7 is reached while the arrival at the connection position is not detected by the liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 during execution of the initial operation, the process proceeds to the connection position. This means that the connection position has not been reached despite setting the operation with the number of steps that can be reached sufficiently. Therefore, in this case, the liquid crystal raising and lowering motor 441 for driving the liquid crystal raising and lowering unit 400 is broken, and an operation corresponding to the instruction of the motor driver can not be executed, or the gear and the motor deviate. There is a possibility that a malfunction such as the lifting motor 441 idling has occurred. Therefore, when the abnormality determination step value (step 1050) is reached before the operation termination condition of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is satisfied in the initial operation, an error is notified. By notifying the error, the store clerk in the hall can immediately recognize the occurrence of the failure, so that it is possible to execute an appropriate response such as repair.

  Although the operation in the case of the operation pointer "01H" has been described as an example, as shown in FIG. 120, the operation speed of each item, the operation end condition, the number of abnormality determination steps, and the other operation pointer values The operating direction is likewise defined. By executing the initial operation according to the initial operation table 222b7, it can be checked every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, whether or not all the items are operating normally. Therefore, by causing the player to play the game after the initial operation is completed, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in a state in which each bonus works normally.

  Referring back to FIG. 118 (a), the description will be continued. The rotational position determination table 222 c is a data table in which information for specifying the current arrangement of the rotary member 640 is defined from the output of the rotational position detection sensor 684. The details of the rotational position determination table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing defined contents of the rotational position determination table 222c. As shown in FIG. 121, the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 have pockets to be detected 641 c so that they differ depending on the phase (arrangement) of the rotation member 640. (Divided member DV), a pocket (divided member DV) not provided is set. The rotational position determination table 222c in the present control example is a data table in which a combination of outputs of the detection sensor A to the detection sensor F specified from the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c is defined for each pocket disposed at the drop position. Since the pockets P1 to P30 are arranged counterclockwise in this order, the arrangement of all the pockets can be specified if the pocket at the drop position can be specified.

  As shown in FIG. 121, for the combination “L, L, H, H, L, H” of the outputs of detection sensors A to F, a pocket P1 is defined as a pocket at the falling position. Therefore, when it is detected that the combination of the outputs of the detection sensor A to the detection sensor F is L, L, H, H, L, and H, respectively, during the rotation operation of the rotation member 640, the present It is determined that the rotation member 640 is the rotation position at which the pocket P1 is disposed at the drop position.

  Similarly, for combinations “L, L, L, H, H, L” of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F, P 2 is defined as a pocket at the falling position. Therefore, when it is detected that the combination of the outputs of the detection sensor A to the detection sensor F is L, L, L, H, H, and L, respectively, during the rotation operation of the rotation member 640, the present It is determined that the rotation member 640 is the rotation position at which the pocket P2 is disposed at the drop position.

  Similarly, for the pockets P3 to P30, combinations of outputs of the corresponding detection sensors A to F are defined with respect to the rotational position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121). As described above, since combinations of outputs of different detection sensors are associated with the pockets P1 to P30, the phase (arrangement) of the rotary member 640 is set each time any pocket is arranged to the falling position. It can be accurately identified.

  Referring back to FIG. 118 (a), the description will be continued. The additional discrimination table 222d detects a ball entering the second ball entrance 640a during execution of the lucky number increase effect (see FIGS. 93 (a) and 93 (b)), and in the “normal mode” It is a data table used to determine whether or not to increase the hit pocket (lucky number) when the lottery of symbol 1 is newly suspended. Although illustration is omitted, the additional determination table 222d includes an additional high probability table in which increase of the lucky number is determined with a relatively high probability (25%) and lucky with a relatively low probability (5%). There is provided an additional low probability table in which an increase in number is determined, and an additional probability table in which an increase in lucky number is determined by a probability (10%) between the two. When the determination condition for determining whether to increase the lucky number is satisfied, the three types of tables described above are used according to the situation (for example, whether or not the transition to the “continuous mode” is determined). One of them is selected and used to determine whether to increase the lucky number. Here, a random number value (counter) used to determine (determine) whether or not to increase the lucky number (hit pocket) is provided, for example, in the RAM 223, and the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 145). The value is updated for each execution of.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 118 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. In this RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a step counter 223e, an operation scenario flag 223f, and an operation pointer 223g An origin return flag 223i, an initial operation flag 223j, a hit position storage area 223k, a lighting position storage area 223m, a probability change status flag 223n, a time saving status flag 223o, a time saving status counter 223p, a hit status Storage area 223q, operable type storage area 223r, correction position counter 223s, initial setting completed flag 223t, rotational position storage area 223u, oscillation not detected flag 223v, oscillation timer 223w, designated pocket storage Area 223x and above Setting counter 223av, effect timer 223bv, increase effect flag 223cv, roulette flag 223dv, swing effect flag 223ev, ball fall possible flag 223fv, winning counter 223gv, discharge counter 223hv, power off flag At least the memory area 223z and the other memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas for the special symbol 1), and the winning information is stored in each of these areas. Ru. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various information (such as pass / fail, fluctuation pattern, etc.) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed, and the predicted various information is The control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, various information (such as pass / fail, fluctuation pattern, etc.) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area. It is stored in 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas) of the special symbol, the extracted winning information is in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). It is memorized. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  Similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is a variation effect ((1) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (and the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter which is a fluctuation display) and which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect of the special symbol 1 held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the ball to first winning opening 64, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and is suspended. If the number of balls has been subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S2107 in FIG. 150). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the number counter 203c.

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is used for displaying the number-of-holding-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223 b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on in the fluctuation pattern reception process executed when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 151), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set. (See S3302 in FIG. 162). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, and the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81 and the rendering unit 331, etc.) in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started so that the fluctuation display of the third symbol is performed in.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2104 in FIG. 150) and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S3307 in FIG. 162). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the fluctuation effect is performed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The step counter 223 e is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of each accessory driven by the drive motor. The reference of the count (the position where the number of operation steps is 0) is set at the origin position of each role. The step counter 223 e is configured to be able to separately count the number of operation steps for each type of bonus. That is, the step counter 223 e is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of the lifting and lowering operation of the lifting and lowering body 330 in the upper lifting and lowering unit 300 and the number of operation steps of swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 in the left swinging member 500. There are provided separate counters such as a counter for counting the number of the drive motors for driving the prizes.

  The step counter 223 e is a drive that outputs an execution signal (execution command) every time it receives an execution signal indicating that one step operation has been performed from any of various drive motors provided in the pachinko machine 10 The counter value corresponding to the type of motor is updated one by one (see S2601 in FIG. 155). Also, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, a home position return operation is performed to return various types of goods to the home position, but when various types of goods return to the home position due to the home position return operation, the step counter 223 e 0 is set to the value. By this origin return operation, the position where the value of the step counter 223e becomes 0 can be reliably set as the origin position of each prize, so that the operating condition (drive position) of each prize can be accurately grasped. it can.

  The operation scenario flag 223 f is a flag indicating which operation scenario is set among the operation scenarios corresponding to the rendering operation of each of the prizes defined in the operation scenario table 222 b. The operation scenario flag 223 f is formed of, for example, 1 byte (8 bits), and the type of the operation scenario is associated with each bit. For example, the 0th bit of the operation scenario flag 223f corresponds to the upper lifting unit table 222b1, and if the 0th bit is 1 (on), the upper lifting unit table 222b1 is set as the operation scenario If it is 0 (off), it means that the upper lift unit table 222b1 is not set. Similarly for the other bits, if the operation scenario corresponding to each bit is set, the corresponding bit is set to 1 (on), and the corresponding bit is 0 if the corresponding operation scenario is not set. It is set to (off).

  When the operation scenario is set based on the variation pattern command (see S2204 in FIG. 151) in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 151), the bit corresponding to the scenario is 1 (the operation scenario flag 223f). Set to on). In addition, each time the variation presentation in which the operation scenario is set ends, the bit corresponding to the set scenario is set to 0 (off). The type of operation scenario currently set can be easily determined by the operation scenario flag 223 f.

  The action pointer 223g is a pointer used to identify the progress of the set action scenario. As described above, in each data table constituting the operation scenario table 222b, the value of the operation pointer 223g and the content of the operation to be set (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction) are defined in association with each other. In this control example, the operation of the setting content of 1 is set to the drive motor, and when the operation according to the setting content is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223g is updated.

  Also, the action pointer 223 g can update the pointer value separately for each set action scenario. That is, the action pointer 223g is a generic name of different pointers provided for each action scenario. Each pointer constituting the motion pointer 223g has its value “01H” set by newly setting the corresponding motion scenario. Thereafter, every time the operation content corresponding to the pointer value is completed, the pointer value is updated (see S2612 in FIG. 155 and S2706 in FIG. 156), and the operation content corresponding to the updated pointer value is set. In addition, when the change effect setting in which the corresponding operation scenario is set is ended, the pointer value is reset to “00H”. By using this action pointer 223g, it is possible to accurately grasp the set action scenario.

  The home position return flag 223i is executing a home position return operation (operation for returning a character shifted from the home position to the home position) which is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It is a flag indicating whether or not. If the in-home position return flag 223i is on, it indicates that the home position return operation is being performed, and if off, it indicates that the home position return operation is not in progress. The in-home position return flag 223i is set to ON when the home position return operation is set in the home position return process (see FIG. 144) (see S1505 in FIG. 144). On the other hand, in the origin return operation, when it is determined that all the prizes have returned to the origin position, it is set to be off (see S2605 in FIG. 155). Whether or not the home position return operation is in progress can be easily determined by using the home position return flag 223i.

  The initial operation flag 223 j is a flag indicating whether or not the initial operation to be executed to determine whether or not each item normally operates is under execution after the origin return operation is completed. . If the in-initial operation flag 223 j is on, it indicates that the initial operation is being performed, and if off, it indicates that the initial operation is not being performed. During the initial operation, if it is determined that all the items are arranged at the home position when the power is turned on (S1507 in FIG. 144), or after the home position return operation performed after the power is turned on is completed. It is set to ON (see S2605 in FIG. 155), and is set to OFF when all the operations defined in the initial operation table 222b7 are finished (see S2709 in FIG. 156). By using the in-initial operation flag 223 j, it can be easily determined whether or not the initial operation is being executed.

  The hit position storage area 223k is a storage area for storing the type of each pocket P1 to P30 of the rotating member 640 (whether it is a hit pocket or an out-of-pocket) in the "representative mode suggestion effect". In this control example, the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 of the rear surface LED 625 is set with reference to the hit position storage area 223k. That is, the lighting area disposed on the back side of the hit pocket is set to the lighting state of the lighting rate 100%, and the lighting area disposed on the back side of the release pocket is set to the light off state. In addition, when the ball B is dropped from the holding piece 677 to any pocket, the type of each pocket stored in the hit position storage area 223k is compared with the pocket arranged at the drop position, Is determined to be dropped to the next pocket of the pocket placed at the drop position.

  The details of the hit pocket storage area 223k will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 122, the hit pocket storage area 223k is provided with a storage area corresponding to each pocket, and information corresponding to each storage area whether it is a hit or not (is it a hit pocket or an out pocket) Can be stored. The storage area corresponding to each pocket is allocated one bit each, and when each bit is H (1), it means that the corresponding pocket is a hit pocket, and if L (0) , Which means that the corresponding pocket is a loose pocket.

  Here, as described above, when the transition to the "run mode" is decided at the start of roulette chance production (in the "run mode suggestive effect" which is in the "preparation mode", the probability variation is caused by the drawing of the special symbol) In the case of a jackpot), it is permitted to drop the ball B into any of the hit pockets, and the drop of the ball B into the out pocket is regulated. On the other hand, at the start of roulette chance production, the transition to the "Running mode" has not been confirmed (when all the special symbol runs performed by the start of the production are out of alignment) Dropping the ball B is permitted, and dropping the ball B into the hitting pocket is regulated. In this control example, when the condition for dropping the ball B is satisfied (when the cycle of the rocking motion of the ball B becomes 1 second or less), the type of each pocket is determined with reference to the hit position storage area 223k. Then, it is determined whether or not the pocket placed to the dropping position next to the pocket currently placed at the dropping position is a pocket which is permitted to drop the ball B in the present roulette chance effect. Then, if the next pocket is a pocket which is allowed to drop, control is made to drop the ball B against that pocket. Thereby, the ball B can be prevented (suppressed) from falling in the pocket different from the pocket of the type of the aim, so the ball B asks the player whether or not it has been shifted to the "continuous mode". Accurate notification can be made according to the type of the dropped pocket.

  In FIG. 122, when the pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, and P28 to P30 are set as the hit pockets and the remaining other pockets are set as the release pockets, they are stored in the hit position storage area 223k. Data are shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 122, H (1) indicating a hit pocket is stored in the storage area corresponding to the pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, and P28 to P30, and the other pockets are stored. L (0) indicating an out-of-pocket for the storage area corresponding to.

  The lighting position storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the state of each lighting area A1 to A18 of the rear surface LED 625 (the lighting state at 100% lighting rate or the lighting off state at 0% lighting rate). Lighting of each LED of the rear surface LED 625 is controlled in accordance with the information stored in the lighting position storage area 223m.

  The details of the lighting position storage area 223m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the lighting position storage area 223m. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), the lighting position storage area 223m is a three of the first storage area 223m1 to the third storage area 223m3 indicating the lighting positions of the three LED bars 625a to 625c that constitute the rear surface LED 625. It consists of one storage area.

  The first storage area 223m1 is a storage area for storing the state of each lighting area A1 to A6 of the LED bar 625a. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), H (1) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area of 100% of the lighting rate among the lighting areas A1 to A6, and the storage corresponding to the lighting area of the unlit state L (0) is stored in the area. In the example of FIG. 123 (b), H (1) indicating a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% is set in the storage areas corresponding to the lighting areas A3 to A5. On the other hand, in the storage areas corresponding to the lighting areas A1, A2 and A6, L (0) indicating the non-lighting state of the lighting rate 0% is set.

  The second storage area 223m2 corresponding to the LED bar 625b and the third storage area 223m3 corresponding to the LED bar 625c have the same configuration as the first storage area 223m1. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 123 (c) and 123 (d), data (H or L) corresponding to the lighting state of the lighting areas A7 to A12 is set in the second storage area 223m2. A storage area is provided, and a storage area for setting data (H or L) corresponding to the lighting state of the lighting areas A13 to A18 is provided in the third storage area 223m3.

  These three storage areas are sequentially updated according to the arrangement of the hit pockets, and by controlling the states of the lighting areas A1 to A18 according to the information stored in the respective storage areas, only the hit pockets appear as if they were illuminated can do. In addition, as described above, since the rotating member 640 can perform only 18/30 rotation while the rear surface LED 625 makes one rotation, the type of each pocket and the type of the lighting area disposed on the back side of the pocket rotate Depending on the progress of Therefore, in this control example, the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is corrected every time the back surface LED makes a 1/3 turn (that is, in units of one LED bar), and the hit pocket is always Control is done to look shiny. That is, each time the back surface LED makes a turn, it is configured to correct the information of the storage area corresponding to the LED bar disposed in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) in accordance with the displacement caused by the rotation operation. ing. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in an appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (the appearance that the hit pocket is illuminated and the out pocket is darkened). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misidentifying the hit pocket and the off pocket.

  Referring back to FIG. 118 (b), the description will be continued. The probability variation state flag 223 n is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state. If this probability change state flag 223n is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability change state, and if off, it indicates that it is not the probability change state. The certain variation state flag 223 n is updated according to a state command output to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the gaming state is changed in the main control device 110. That is, when the definite variation state of the special symbol is notified by the state command, the definite variation state flag 223n is set on (updated) and when the low probability state of the special symbol is notified, the definite variation state flag 223 n is set to OFF (updated) (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The time saving state flag 223o is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol (that is, the "continuous mode") which continues until the next jackpot. At this time, if the short status flag 223o is on, it indicates that it is in the "continuous mode", and if it is off, it is not in the "continuous mode" (that is, it is in the "normal mode" or "preparation mode") Indicates At this time, the short state flag 223o is updated according to the state command output to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the gaming state is changed in the main control unit 110, as in the definite change state flag 223n. That is, when the "continuous mode" is notified by the status command, the short status flag 223o is set (updated) on at this time, and when the "normal mode" or the "prepare mode" is notified. The time saving state flag 223o is set to OFF (updated) (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The time saving state counter 223p is a counter for counting the remaining number of times in the "preparation mode". If the value of the time reduction counter is 1 or more, it indicates that the "preparation mode" (that is, the time reduction state of the normal symbol) continues until the lottery of the special symbol is performed the number of times according to the counter value. On the other hand, if the counter value is 0, it indicates that the "preparation mode" is not performed. At this time, the short state counter 223p, like the probability change state flag 223n and the time reduction state flag 223o, responds to the state command output to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the gaming state is changed in the main control device 110. It will be updated. That is, when the number of times of the "preparation mode" is notified by the state command (one time or seven times), the value of the time saving state counter 223p is updated to 1 or 7 according to the notified number of times. . On the other hand, when the “normal mode” or the “continuous mode” is notified by the status command, the value of the short status counter 223p is set (updated) to 0 at this time (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The hit state storage area 223 q is a storage area in which information indicating which period the present is in the big hit is stored, and has the same configuration as the state storage area 203 k of the main control device 110. That is, "01H" is stored in the hit state storage area 223q in the opening period of the big hit, "02H" is stored in the first round, "03H" is stored in the second round, and "ending" in the ending period. "04H" is stored. On the other hand, in the state other than the big hit, "00H" is stored in the hit state storage area 223q. At this time, the short state counter 223p is updated according to the state command output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The operable type storing area 223r is information indicating whether or not it is permitted to operate each item in an origin return operation performed on each item or when an initial operation is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Is a storage area in which is stored. The operable type storage area 223r is formed of, for example, one byte, and each role (upper lift unit 300, left swing unit 500, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is associated with each bit of one byte. There is. And when 0 is stored in each bit (set to H), it is a state where it is restricted to operate the goods corresponding to the bit. It means that the operation can not be performed), and if 1 is stored (set to L), it means that it is possible to operate the item corresponding to the bit.

  In addition, in the state where the operation (home position return operation and initial operation) of the prize is limited, for example, when the power is shut off during the big hit where the open pattern A is set to the first variable winning device 82a, etc. It is. As described above, when the opening pattern A is set, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting and lowering unit 400 are connected to the first variable winning device 82a. The ball that has won is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. For this reason, if it is configured to execute the origin return operation and the initial operation for all the items regardless of the state when the power is shut off, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 are connected when the power is shut off. Even in this case, the connection is released by the origin return operation or the initial operation. Therefore, for example, when the ball enters the first passage forming member 520, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is momentarily shut off, and when the power is restored immediately, it passes through the first passage forming member 520. During this time, the origin return operation and the initial operation may be started, and the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 may be released. That is, the ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 may enter the back side or the like of the pachinko machine 10 without entering the second passage forming member 422. As a result, there is a possibility that a defect such as a short circuit of a wiring or a circuit may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the voice lamp control device 113 side can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 when the power is turned on by the state command output from the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on. When the gaming state grasped from the state command is in the middle of the jackpot set to the opening pattern A, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swinging unit 500 in the operable type storage area 223 r For a bit, 1 is stored (set to L), meaning that the operation is restricted. Therefore, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off in a state where the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected, it is prevented (suppressed) that the connection is released at the time of the power supply return. be able to. Therefore, even if the power is restored while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, the ball can be reliably made to flow down from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) occurrence of a defect such as a short circuit of a wiring or a circuit due to the ball getting into the base portion and the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

  The correction position counter 223 s stores any storage area when rewriting the data of the lighting position storage area 223 m in order to correct the deviation of the correspondence relationship between the state of the lighting area provided on the rear surface LED 625 and the pocket of the rotating member 640. It is a counter indicating whether the data stored in (the first storage area 223m1 to the third storage area 223m3) should be rewritten. As described above, the rotating member 640 is provided with thirty pockets P1 to P30. On the other hand, 18 lighting areas A1 to A18 are provided as lighting areas for turning on or off each pocket. In addition, in order to cause the lighting area arranged on the back side to follow the pocket arranged in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54) (that is, visible to the player), the rotating member 640 and The rear LED 625 is configured to rotate at the same rotation speed. For this reason, since the rotating member 640 has only 18/30 turns while the rear surface LED 625 makes a round, the correspondence relationship between the pocket and the lighting area is shifted each time the second section S2 is entered. Therefore, in the present control example, when any of the LED bars 625a to 625c is disposed for the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) which can not be recognized (difficult) by the player, each LED bar is configured. By switching the state of the lighting area, the deviation of the correspondence between the pocket and the lighting area is corrected. When performing the correction, the type of the LED bar 625 to be corrected is specified from the value of the correction position counter 223s. Thereby, even if the rear surface LED 625 performs the rotation operation, the correspondence relationship between the type of each pocket in the first section visible to the player and the lighting state of the lighting area disposed on the back side of each pocket Can be fixed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the position of the hit pocket from the appearance of each pocket.

  The correction position counter 223s is configured as a loop counter that counts up by one in the range of "0" to "2" and returns to "0" when the value is updated in the state of "2". If the value of the correction position counter 223s is "0", it indicates that the correction is performed for each of the lighting areas A1 to A6 that constitute the LED bar 625a, and if the value is "1", the LED bar 625b is configured. The correction is performed for each of the lighting areas A7 to A12, and when the value is “2”, the correction is performed for each of the lighting areas A13 to A18 configuring the LED bar 625c. The correction position counter 223s is updated one by one in the lighting setting process for setting and correcting the lighting states of the lighting regions A1 to A18 (see S2912 in FIG. 158).

  The initial setting completion flag 223t lights the first lighting areas A1 to A18 after the rotating member 640 (and the back surface LED 625) configured to simulate a roulette starts rotating operation in the "continuous-mode suggestive effect". It is a flag indicating whether setting of the state has been executed. If this initial setting completed flag 223t is on, it means that the setting of the first lighting state has been executed after the start of the rotation operation, and if it is off, the setting of the first lighting state is not yet executed It means that. When the rotating member 640 and the rear surface LED 625 are rotating, the first set flag 223t is referred to, and when the first setting flag 223t is off, all the lights are turned on when the rear position of the rear surface LED 625 is reached. The lighting state of the areas A1 to A18 is set. On the other hand, when the initial setting completion flag 223t is on, it means that the setting of the first lighting state has already been executed, so the back surface LED 625 makes a 1/3 turn, and the placement of any LED bar is corrected It is configured to correct the lighting state of the LED bar disposed in the correction section RA each time it matches the section RA. It is detected that the arrangement of the rear surface LED 625 has become the origin position (the output of the origin sensor has become H) at first after the start of the “set continuous mode suggestion effect” for this initial setting completed flag 223t, and each lighting area It is set to ON when the lighting state of A1 to A18 is set (see S2908 in FIG. 158). On the other hand, it is set to be off at the end of the "Running mode suggestive effect".

  The rotational position storage area 223 u is a storage area for storing the current arrangement of the rotary member 640. In this rotational position storage area 223u, during rotation of the rotary member 640, every time it is detected that any pocket is placed at the drop position based on the detection sensors A to F that constitute the rotational position detection sensor 684 Information corresponding to the pocket placed at the dropped position is stored (S2803 in FIG. 157). Based on the information stored in the rotational position storage area 223u, the current arrangement of the rotary member 640 can be specified while the rotary member 640 is rotating.

  The swing non-detection flag 223v is a flag indicating whether the ball B has been detected at least once by the ball detection sensor 679 after the start of the swing effect. If the swing non-detection flag 223v is on, it means that the ball B has not been detected by the ball detection sensor 679 even once. On the other hand, if the swing non-detection flag 223v is off, it means that the ball B has been detected at least once by the ball detection sensor 679 during the execution of the swing effect.

  As described above, in the present control example, the cycle (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the ball B is determined based on the time interval at which the ball detection sensor 679 detects the ball B during execution of the swing effect. It is configured to allow the ball B to fall when it becomes short (the cycle becomes less than 1 second). However, when the sphere detection sensor 679 detects the sphere B first, the previous detection result does not exist, and the time interval can not be calculated. Therefore, in the present control example, the swing non-detection flag 223v is provided, and whether or not passage of the ball B has already been detected once or more by the ball detection sensor 679 (whether the period can be determined from the previous detection result) The period of the rocking motion of the ball B is determined only when the ball detection sensor 679 is off. Thereby, it can be determined more accurately than the period of the swinging motion of the ball B.

  The swing non-detection flag 223v is set to ON based on the fact that the ball B has been thrown by the throwing operation of the throwing device 650 during the execution of the “in-progress mode suggestive effect” (see S3507 in FIG. 164). On the other hand, based on the fact that the passage of the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679 in a state where the swing not-detected flag 223v is on, the flag is set to off (see S1704 in FIG. 146).

  The rocking timer 223 w is used to measure a time interval at which the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679 when the ball B is rocking on the holding piece 677. The initial value of the swing timer 223w is set to 0, and the value is incremented by one each time the swing effect process for executing various settings during the swing effect is executed (see S1707 in FIG. 146). . Since this swing rendering process (see FIG. 146) is a process executed every one millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the swing timer 223w The update of is also performed in 1 millisecond units. On the other hand, the value is reset each time passage of the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679 (that is, the output of the ball detection sensor 679 becomes H) (see S1704 and S1710 in FIG. 146). The cycle (amplitude) of the rocking motion is determined by the rocking timer 223w, and the ball B is naturally dropped by dropping the ball B after the cycle becomes sufficiently small (when the cycle becomes 1 second or less). It can seem as if it is falling. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to doubt that the swinging motion of the ball B is being controlled, and therefore it is possible to further entertain the player in the swinging motion of the ball B.

  The designated pocket storage area 223x has a hit symbol (see FIG. 91 (a)) in the "normal mode", a "preparation mode" notification symbol (see FIG. 92 (b)) in the jackpot, and a hit pocket position (see FIG. 92) It is a storage area in which information corresponding to the lucky number (hit pocket) used as 95 (b) is stored. In accordance with the information stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x, it is used for display of a lucky number in the "normal mode" (see Ds2 in FIG. 90A), lighting control of the hit pocket, and the like. The player can select five types of lucky numbers.

  Here, the lucky number can be selected by the player from the displayed game menu screen, for example, by pressing the frame button 22 at the time of the change stop. Specifically, selection of a lucky number is provided in one of the items of the game menu screen. Then, on the lucky number selection screen, five numbers can be selected from among the 30 types of numbers shown in each pocket (division member DV). The designated pocket storage area 223x stores information corresponding to the five types of numbers selected on the lucky number selection screen.

  When the lottery result of the special symbol in the "normal mode" is displayed on each display unit 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331 based on the storage content of the designated pocket storage area 223x, it is stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x The display content is determined according to the lucky number. That is, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, it is controlled so that four types among the five types of lucky numbers are selected and one type is displayed on each of the display portions 331a to 331d (FIG. 163 See S3408). On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, control is performed such that out numbers other than the lucky number are displayed on at least one of the display portions 331a to 331d (see S3407 in FIG. 163).

  In addition, when it becomes the big hit type which moves to “preparation mode” after the big hit, one kind of lucky number which was not displayed for each display part 331a to 331d at the time of notification of the big hit, the notification of “ready mode” It is set as a number, and is controlled so as to be displayed to the effect part a during the jackpot. Furthermore, in the "representative mode suggestive effect" executed when transitioning to the "preparation mode", the pocket corresponding to the lucky number selected by the player is hit first based on the memory content of the designated pocket storage area 223x. Is set (S3102 in FIG. 160).

  In this way, the lucky number designated (selected) by the player is the notification of the jackpot in the "normal mode", the notification of the "preparation mode" in the jackpot, and the "junisure mode" in the "juniose mode suggestion effect". Commonly used for notifications that are advantageous for three types of players, that is, notification. As a result, it is possible to give the player the fun of selecting a lucky number, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The additional counter 223 av is a counter for counting the total number of hit pockets added in the “addition effect” (see FIG. 96A) executed in the normal mode. The additional counter 223 av is incremented by one at the time of setting the “addition effect” (see S2312 in FIG. 152). At the start of the "Running mode suggestive effect", the hit pocket is added by the hit pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) based on the count value of the addition counter 223av.

  The effect timer 223bv is a timer that measures an elapsed time from when the "continuous mode suggestive effect" is started. The value of the effect timer 223bv is set to an initial value of 0, and is incremented by one each time the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed during the execution of the "in-line mode suggestive effect". (See S2007 in FIG. 149). Since the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed every one millisecond, the effect timer 223bv is counted up in units of one millisecond. For example, if the value of the effect timer 223bv is 1000, it means that one second (1000 milliseconds) has passed since the "continuous mode suggestive effect" is started. Whether or not the effect time has ended is determined according to the value of the effect timer 223bv, and the effect mode is switched. That is, switching from lucky number increase presentation to "roulette chance presentation" or "roulette chance presentation to ending presentation" is performed ("S2004, S2008: Yes in Fig. 149"). In the following description, the lucky number increase presentation will be simply referred to as "increase presentation" for the sake of simplicity.

  The increase effect in-progress flag 223 cv is a flag indicating whether the increase effect is being executed. If the increase effect in-progress flag 223cv is on, it indicates that the increase effect is being executed, and if off, it indicates that the increase effect is not being executed. The increase production flag 223 cv is notified of the transition to the “preparation mode” in the state command output from the main control unit 110 after the end of the big hit (the value of the time saving state counter is set to 1 or 7 by the state command) Is set to ON (see S3006 in FIG. 159). On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is a value indicating the end of the increase effect (the start of the roulette chance effect) (that is, a counter value which indicates 20 seconds after the start of the “continuous mode suggestive effect”). It is set to off if it is

  The roulette flag 223 dv is a flag indicating whether the roulette chance effect is being performed. If the roulette 223dv is on, it indicates that a roulette chance effect is being performed, and if off, it indicates that a roulette chance effect is not being performed. The roulette flag 223 dv is a value indicating that the value of the effect timer 223 bv indicates the start of the roulette chance effect (end of the increase effect) (that is, a counter value that indicates 20 seconds after the start of the “continuous mode suggestive effect”) Is determined to be on (see S2005 in FIG. 149). On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is a value indicating the end (the start of the ending effect) of roulette chance effect (that is, a counter value indicating 85 seconds after the start of the “in continuous mode suggestive effect”) It is set to off when it is set (see S2009 in FIG. 149).

  The swing effect flag 223 ev is a flag indicating whether a swing effect is being executed. If the swing effect flag 223 ev is on, it indicates that a swing effect is being executed, and if off, it indicates that a swing effect is not being executed. The swing effect flag 223 ev is a driving timing of the pitching device 650 during the execution of the roulette chance effect, and is set to ON when the ball B is thrown (see s 3505 in FIG. 164). In this control example, the time when 50 seconds have elapsed since the start of the "roulette chance effect presentation" is set as the drive timing of the throwing device 650. On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is a value indicating the end (the start of the ending effect) of roulette chance effect (that is, a counter value indicating 85 seconds after the start of the “in continuous mode suggestive effect”) It is set to off when it is set (see S2009 in FIG. 149).

  The ball fallable flag 223fv is a flag indicating whether or not the ball B can be dropped into any pocket when the ball B is swinging at the upper portion of the holding piece 677. . If the ball fall enable flag 223fv is on, it means that the ball B can be dropped, and if it is off, it means that the ball B is restricted to drop. Do. In this control example, when the momentum of the ball B performing the rocking operation weakens and the cycle (amplitude) of the rocking operation becomes equal to or less than a predetermined cycle (1 second), the ball B may be dropped. It is determined that the ball can be dropped, and the ball droppable flag 223fv is set to on (see S1711 in FIG. 146). Also, when falling of the ball B is set, it is set to be off (see S1807 in FIG. 147).

  The winning counter 223gv is a counter for counting the number of winning balls from the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a and the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 65a in a big hit. The value of the winning counter 223 gv in the big hit (probable large hit B to D, normal big hit A) in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 are connected. The number of balls winning to the first variable winning device 82a is counted based on the above, and the coincidence with the number of balls discharged through the second passage forming member 422 is determined. The connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released when the winning number and the discharging number coincide with each other. As a result, since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the connection from being released during passage of the first passage forming member 520, the ball having entered the first variable winning device 82a is reliably transmitted to the second passage forming member 422. It can be drained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) occurrence of a defect such as a short circuit of a wiring or a circuit due to the ball getting into the base portion and the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The winning counter 223gv has an initial value set to 0, and is incremented by one each time a large opening opening winning command for notifying winning of a ball is received (see S2413 in FIG. 153). On the other hand, it is determined that the number of winning and the number of discharged match, and initialization is set to 0 when disconnection of the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set (S2505 in FIG. 154). reference).

  The discharge counter 223 hv is used for the large hit (probable large change hit B to D, normal large hit A) in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 are connected. It is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the second passage forming member 422. The value of the discharge counter 223 hv is compared with the value of the above-mentioned winning counter 223 gv in the ending period of the big hit. Then, when the values match, release of the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set. The discharge counter 223 hv has an initial value set to 0, and is incremented by 1 each time ball discharge is detected (the passage of the sensor member 422 c is detected) (see S 1902 in FIG. 148). On the other hand, it is determined that the number of winning and the number of discharged match, and initialization is set to 0 when disconnection of the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set (S2505 in FIG. 154). reference).

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether a momentary power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main control device 110, and is set to ON before the power-off process is performed (see S1619 in FIG. 145). Since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a predetermined time (for example, 100 milliseconds) elapses. Therefore, if the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1308 in FIG. 142: Yes) in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 142), the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then constant. This is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 has started up before the time (e.g., 100 milliseconds) has elapsed, that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information which is incomplete because only a part of the information is erased) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information of the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1309 in FIG. 142). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 150) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, on the output side of the output port 239, the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331 of the upper lifting unit 300, and the rendering unit 422a of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 are connected.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the third symbol display device 81 etc. based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main controller 110 (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331 and the display content of the effect unit 422a). The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer 231a, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Is stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). ing.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is configured to read the control program directly from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes because the speed associated with the reading is slow, the instruction for the control program can be read. It sometimes takes time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) can be diversified and complicated. Can easily be performed.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). , And MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. Further, an image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 into the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237 or for normal use. Transfer to video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and most of the control program executed by the MPU 231, the third symbol display device 81, etc. (third symbol display device 81, Second program storage area 234a1 storing fixed value data for driving the rendering unit 331 and the rendering unit 422a), and the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit And at least a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on 422a).

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily enlarged. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) may be diversified or complicated. it can.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. As described above, the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the like) without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the character ROM 234 provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the rendering unit 422a) can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. It is possible to suppress an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c while the address specified by the bus line 240 points to the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is a NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data, as described above. There is a problem with

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, as a result, the control of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) in the display control device 114 is instantaneously The problem arises that it may not start.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM 234 d is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the third symbol display device 81 etc. in the display control device 114 (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, And control of the effect part 422a) can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S3602 in FIG. 165) executed after the boot process (see S3601 in FIG. 165) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM 233 configured by a DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 draws an image, and causes the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. DSP). The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 129) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81 etc. by outputting the image information drawn in the buffer to the third symbol display device 81 while expanding the image drawn in the buffer and at the other frame buffer) An image is displayed on the display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The parallel processing is performed within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example).

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 167 (b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and the image developed by the drawing first is the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331 and a process for causing the effect unit 422a) to display.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates the increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time taken for the readout can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) Can.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) displays any image It can be kept high.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so the image is immediately drawn and the third symbol display device 81 etc. (third symbol display device 81, Images rendered on the rendering unit 331 and the rendering unit 422a) can be displayed.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time not being used for display processing on the device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance is started. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control unit 110 by the fluctuation effect when entering the mouth 640 a is detected. This fluctuation display (variation effect) based on the power-on fluctuation image is the gaming state when the power is turned on (whether it is "normal mode", "prepare mode", or "continuous mode") Regardless, it is executed in the third symbol display device 81. By displaying both the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image on the third symbol display device 81, the portions displayed according to the type of the image (third symbol display device 81, effect part Since it is not necessary to determine either 331 or the rendering unit 422a), the processing can be speeded up. Therefore, it is possible to further shorten the period from when the power is turned on to when the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are displayed.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S3603 and S3604 in FIG. 165).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after power-on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to generate the main power-on time shown in FIG. 125 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control unit 114 is shown in FIG. 125 (b). As shown in Fig. 125 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" on the display screen of the main image at power-on and at the bottom right of the screen, as shown in Fig. 125 (c) The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 125 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stoppage of the fluctuation effect if it is “big hit of the special symbol”, and it is shown in FIG. 125 (c) if it is “out of special symbol”. The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player starts the game, and the ball entering to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640a is detected. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and (c) alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected at the first entrance 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately Can.

  Referring back to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 14, the range of the rear surface image and the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c among the rear surface image will be described. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the two types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image; FIG. 126 (b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage" while the back surface A corresponding to the "town stage" is shown.

  As the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, as shown in FIG. 126, images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "image for scrolling") are configured such that the back surface images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to "at-the-city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between position a and position a 'of the corresponding back image first. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 126 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the stage in the city, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the stage in the city displayed frequently is the back image area By being resident on 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage is a partial area of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b Is stored in the rear image area 235c of

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at any timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at any timing. In order to change the back image instantly, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but in such a case, it becomes very useful as the resident video RAM 235. A large amount of RAM must be used, which may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image to be displayed first when the stage is changed is in the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range of FIG. 125 (a) to (b) Image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIG. 125 (a) and (b)) including its initial position, and the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the resident video RAM 235 is used when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. The initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of Shown to be possible, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, as for the back surface B, only the image data corresponding to the partial image range is stored, so that the increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Also, the back surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 124) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed. Further, in the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data corresponding to the image between the position b 'and the position b overlap. Stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Referring back to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed in the effect section 331. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described 30 types of numbers (main symbols) having the numerals "1" to "30", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when performing the change effect in the effect unit 331, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the effect unit 331 quickly starts the change effect. be able to. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640a, although the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the effect portion 331 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the change effect is not immediately started in.

  In the third symbol area 235d, main symbols consisting of a rear symbol such as a wooden box as main symbols without a number from "1" to "30", and characters such as a rear symbol and a flannel, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the effect unit 331 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one change effect was stopped. Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the effect unit 331, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing from the display image of the effect unit 331 without a number.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man" and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. Since the display control device 114 changes the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 by being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, and is used for residence. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out image data previously resident in the character pattern area 235 e of the video RAM 235. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236a is resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). It is an area for storing image data that is not stored. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, read out the image information of one frame which has been expanded first from the other frame buffer, and the third symbol display device 81 etc. By transmitting the image information to the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit In 422a), the process of displaying the image for one frame is executed.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. , The image for one frame developed earlier from the other frame buffer is read, and the one frame read to the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) An image of a minute can be displayed.

  Then, an image for one frame is displayed to display an image on a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) The frame buffer from which information is read is specified by the MPU 231 by alternately replacing one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when drawing of an image for one frame is completed. Be done.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b earlier is read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) At the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) At the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b displays the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit along with the passage of time with respect to one effect to be displayed based on the command from the main controller 110). A display data table describing display contents to be displayed in 422a), transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one of the effects displayed by the display data table, and This is an area in which a transfer data table defining transfer timing is stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter uses the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b, and the like to display the third symbol display device 81 etc. (third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) are controlled. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated renderings.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, in the display data table, the effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) based on a command from the main control device 110 One for each is prepared, and for example, a display data table corresponding to fluctuation presentation, opening presentation, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) when the display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. It is an effect. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is to inform the player that the first variable winning device 82a or the second specified winning opening 65a, which is normally closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state from now on, is repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is “0” to the effect unit 331 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not having the numbers “9” to “9” is stopped and displayed, the rear surface image in the third symbol display device 81 changes to a rear surface image for demonstration. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the effect unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table is a time during which an image of one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) (20 milliseconds in this control example) The content (drawing content) of an image of one frame to be displayed at that time is defined in detail in correspondence with the address represented as one unit.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) to render sprites is defined. ing.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates of the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) to display the sprite. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, four third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates either of the back surfaces A, B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either “in the town stage” or “empty stage”), or a back surface different from the back surfaces A, B Information specifying whether to display an image is described. Further, in the case of specifying to display a rear surface image different from the rear surfaces A and B, the rear surface type also describes information specifying which rear surface image to display.

  When it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A and B as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present control example, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81 or the like) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at a stage where drawing of the image (or display of the third symbol display device 81 or the like) is started based on the display database. It specifies based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81 etc.) indicated by the position information is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Etc.) may be shown, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information Information indicating the elapsed time since the display of the back surface of the image or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81 etc.) is started (Information indicating whether the image is displayed) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 127) indicates the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 129) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. Thereby, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined in the display data table is the third symbol display device 81 etc. (third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, etc.) only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 And the effect image to be displayed on the effect section 422a).

  Here, like a conventional pachinko machine, it is executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) is changed. When the program is configured to be activated, processing of the display control device 114 is limited because a large load is imposed on the activation and execution of the program which is complicated and enormous with the diversification of effect images. There is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  Also, in this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, and a display data table buffer 233d according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is provided frame by frame according to the set data table. In the pachinko machine 10, the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect can be created in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning combination) This is because the effect to be displayed on the part 422a) is determined. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, the display data table buffer 233 d corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. In the configuration to be created, the pachinko machine 10 causes the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) to be displayed in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. It can be realized for the first time based on the configuration of determining the presentation mode.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident data among the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 128 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 128).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 128) In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 129) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 128, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since timing of transfer start can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed in the third symbol display device 81 etc. 3 symbol display device 81, effect part 331, and effect part 422a It can be displayed on.

  The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not the power-on images (the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 165) executed by the MPU 231 (see S3605 in FIG. 165). Then, to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the image transfer process. , And off (see S5205 in FIG. 176 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3901 in FIG. 167 (b)). If the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S3908 in FIG. 167 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (figure) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 167 (b) (see S3909) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 168 to 172) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 173 to 175) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S5101 of FIG. 176A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 176 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 177) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233 d is configured to display the third symbol display device 81 or the like (a third symbol display device 81, a rendering unit 331, a display unit 331, etc.) according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 And it is a buffer for storing the display data table corresponding to the production | presentation aspect displayed on production | presentation part 422a). The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113. Then, the display data table corresponding to the presentation mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 129) in which the contents of an instruction for image drawing for the image is described is generated. As a result, effects corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) .

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 129) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, effects corresponding to the display data table are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 129) described later that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite designated in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process of one frame (FIG. 167 (b In S3903), the pointer updating process (S4805 in FIG. 167 (b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one (see S5001 in FIG. 175).

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. As shown in FIG. 129, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422 a). Therefore, only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, effects to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) can be easily displayed. It can be changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite designated in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. This drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 127, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (pattern 1 , Symbols 2, ...), effects (effect 1, effect 2, ...), characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ..., Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as an error pattern). Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the effects of the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) It is a counter that counts time. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is an image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) (20 milliseconds in this control example) It is the value divided by.

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4807 in FIG. 173). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5402 in FIG. 178).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and the third symbol display device 81 etc. (third symbol display) By transferring the image information to the device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) Execute display processing to display an image.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Processing is performed each time drawing processing (see S3906 in FIG. 167 (b)) is performed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b earlier is read, and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) are read. While the new image is expanded to the second frame buffer 236c.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) At the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The rear image change flag 233 w is used to determine whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). It is a flag. If the back image change flag 233 w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233 w is set to ON when the rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S 4601 in FIG. 172A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 177), and is set to off when the rear image change process is performed (see S5310 in FIG. 177). As a result, it is possible to display a rear surface image corresponding to the rear surface image change command and the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The rear image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. The flag is formed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear surface image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear surface image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear surface image notified by the command is set to on (see FIG. 172 (a). See S4602)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The rear face type currently set can be easily specified by the rear face image determination flag 233x.

  The demonstration display flag 233 y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that demonstration is in progress, and if it is off, it means that demonstration is not in progress. The demonstration display flag 233 y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d in the display setting process (see FIG. 173) (see S 4821 in FIG. 173). When another display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S4106 in FIG. 169 (a), S4305 in FIG. 170 (a), S4405 in FIG. 170 (b), 171 S4506)). This demonstration display flag 233y makes it possible to easily determine whether a demonstration effect is currently being performed.

  The finalized display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the finalized display effect is being executed. Here, the finalized display effect refers to an effect of stopping and displaying (finalized display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the finalized display flag 233z is on, it means that a static display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the static display effect is not on. The finalized display flag 233z is set to ON when the finalized display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 173) (S4814 in FIG. 173), except for the finalized display data table When another display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S4106 in FIG. 169 (a), S4305 in FIG. 170 (a), S4405 in FIG. 170 (b), 171 S4506)). It is possible to easily determine whether or not the current display effect is being performed by the finalized display flag 233z.

<About control processing of main controller in first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. 130 to 141. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated with power on and a main process executed after the start-up process, and activated periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment) There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start-up. The processing and the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When each reaches 999, 999, 99, 239), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). In addition, the details of the special symbol variation process (S104) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132.

  After the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, the start winning process (S105) accompanying the passage of the ball at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640a is executed. The details of the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134.

  After the start winning process (S105) is performed, a normal symbol variation process is performed to perform a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the normal symbol variation processing is performed, a through gate passage processing (S107) is performed to perform processing accompanying the passage of a ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67. The details of the through gate passing process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the through gate passing process (S107) is executed, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, special symbol variation processing (S104) which is one processing of timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and the variation display of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) performed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B Or, it is a process for controlling the fluctuation display of the symbol performed in the effect display portions 331a to 331d.

  In this special symbol variation process (FIG. 131, S104), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit game of a special symbol is currently being played (S201). As the jackpot of the special symbol, during the display showing the jackpot of the first special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the effect display portions 331a to 331d , The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the first special symbol is included. When it is determined that the present is during the jackpot of the first special symbol (S201: Yes), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether the variable display of the first special symbol is in progress (S202).

  If it is determined in the process of S202 that the variable display of the first special symbol is not being displayed (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c (the holding ball number N of special symbol 1) is acquired ( S203) It is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c ( S205), a ball holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 ball holding ball counter 203c changed by subtraction is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process for starting variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S208). In addition, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S209: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is updated (S210), and the present process is ended.

  In the process of S209, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed (S209: Yes), the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B The display mode corresponding to is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process is executed, a drawing of a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 The jackpot type (see FIGS. 107 and 108) is determined.

  After the process of S211 is finished, when the variable display under execution is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (this lottery result ) Determines whether the special symbol is a jackpot (S212). If the lottery result this time is the big win of the first special symbol (S212: Yes), the probability variation flag 203f and the time saving flag 203g are set to OFF, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is initialized to 0 (S213). And the start of the jackpot of a special symbol is set (S214), and it shifts to processing of S218. When the start of the jackpot of the first special symbol is set by the process of S214, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 139) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command Is set. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  In the process of S212, if the lottery result this time is a special symbol out of place (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S215), the value of the time saving counter 203h is from 0 If the value is larger (S215: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S216), and a status command for notifying the value of the hour / minute counter 203h after subtraction is set (S217). Do. The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 139) to be described later executed by the MPU 201 It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a status command, it updates the values of the probability change status flag 223n, the time saving status flag 223o, the time saving status counter 223p, and the hit status storage area 223q according to the gaming status notified by the status command. Do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, when it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S215: No), the process of S216 and S217 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and then the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 132, S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S208). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol 1 variation process (see FIG. 131) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a On the basis of the values of various counters stored in the execution area of, the lottery of "big hit of the special symbol" or "off of the special symbol" is performed (decision determination), the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the display device 81.

  In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process, first, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a Is acquired (S301).

  Next, with reference to the state of the probability variation flag 203f, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation of the special symbol (S302). When it is determined in the process of S302 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the special symbol (ie, the probability change flag 203f is on) (S302: Yes), the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301. The lottery result of whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is acquired based on the value of and the first random number table 202a for high probability time (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 41 stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. As mentioned above, 41 pieces of "500-540" are set as a random number which becomes a big hit of a special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per 1st and the random number which becomes these hits coincide If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a definite variation (that is, the definite variation flag 203f is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of special symbol, Based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first hit random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether the jackpot of the first special symbol is hit or not is obtained (S304) . Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 40 random numbers stored in the first jackpot random number table 202a for low probability. As described above, 40 random numbers from "0 to 39" are set as the random numbers for the first special symbol, and the first random number counter C1 and the random number for these hits. When it matches, it determines with it being a jackpot of a special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes), The present jackpot type is specified based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the hit type selection table 202b1 for Special Drawing 1, and the big hit of the special symbol with eight types It is determined what kind of jackpot type is among (probable variation big hit A to true variation big hit G, usually big hit A). As described above, if the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined that the probability variation jackpot A (2R probability variation jackpot) is in the range of "5 to 84". If it is determined that the probability variation jackpot B (2R probability variation jackpot) is in the range of "85 to 274", it is determined that the probability variation jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot) is in the range of "275 to 774" If it is determined that the probability variation jackpot D (2R probability variation jackpot) is in the range of "775-804", it is determined that the probability variation jackpot E (2R probability variation jackpot) is in the range of "805 to 874" If it is determined that the probability variation jackpot F (2R probability variation jackpot) is in the range of "875 to 974", it is determined that the probability variation jackpot G (2R probability variation jackpot) is in the range of "975 to 999" Normal jackpot It determines that (2R Normal jackpot) (see FIG. 107).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the determined jackpot type (one of the probability variation jackpot A to the probability variation jackpot G and the normal jackpot A). It is set. Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (probability variation jackpot A to probability variation jackpot G, normal jackpot A) is set as the stop type.

  Next, state setting information corresponding to the identified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e (S307), and the value of the read state setting information is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (S308). Thereafter, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S309), and the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S310). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S310, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and until it stops at the big hit symbol in the third symbol display device 81 The fluctuation time of the third symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 110B), and a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Determine the (variation time).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S305 that the lottery of the special symbol 1 is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S311). In the process of S311, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. The stop type to be displayed in the effect unit 331 is set based on the value of.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S312). Here, the display time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the stoppage with the dislocated symbol is determined in the effect part 331. At this time, similarly to the processing of S310, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Determine the fluctuation time).

  When the process of S310 or S312 is finished, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S310 or S312 is set (S313). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S309 or S311 is set (S314). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 139). Be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114 (S315). When the process of S315 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol 1 variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and determines whether or not the first ball entry 64 and the second ball entry 640a have a prize (start prize). When there is a start winning, it is a process for executing pre-reading etc. of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c (number N of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) ). Then, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No) or if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c is 4 If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding The value (N) of the ball number counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a ball holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 ball holding ball number counter 203c after the addition is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  After the process of S406, each value of the flag 203m of the pre-reading certainty change and the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 Based on and, the lottery of the special symbol, the stop type and the variation pattern are predicted (pre-read) (S407), and the winning information command including the lottery of the predicted special symbol, the stop type and the variation pattern is set S408). Next, it is determined whether the success or failure of the lottery of the special symbol predicted (prefetched) in the process of S408 is a probability change jackpot (S409), and if the success or failure of the lottery of the special symbol predicted (prefetched) is a probability change jackpot (S409) : Yes), the flag 203m during pre-reading confirmation change is set to on (S410), and the process proceeds to the processing of S413.

  On the other hand, in the process of S409, if the success or failure of the predicted special symbol lottery is not a probability change jackpot (S409: No), then it is determined whether the predicted success or failure of the predicted special symbol lottery is usually a jackpot (S411). If the success or failure of the predicted special symbol lottery is normally a big hit (S411: Yes), the pre-reading certainty change flag 203m is set to OFF (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. Moreover, in the process of S411, when the success or failure of the lottery of the predicted special symbol is not a big win normally (S411: No), the process of S412 is skipped and it transfers to the process of S413.

  In the process of S413, it is determined whether the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second entrance 640a (S413). If there is no winning on the second entry ball opening 640a (S413: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if there is a winning on the second entrance 640a (S413: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the winning on the second entrance 640a (entry) has been detected. A special figure 2 prize command is set (S414). The special figure 2 winning command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines whether to increase the lucky number (hit pocket) when receiving the special figure 2 prize command during execution of the increase effect (lucky number increase effect).

  When the process of S414 is finished, next, special symbol 2 winning a prize processing for executing the lottery of the special symbol 2 on the basis of various counter values (random number values) acquired based on the start winning to the second entrance 640a Is executed (S415), and the process ends and returns to the timer interrupt process. The details of the special symbol 2 winning process (S415) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing this special symbol 2 winning process (S415). As described above, the special symbol 2 winning process (FIG. 134, S415) is based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area by detecting the start winning on the second entrance 640a, “special symbol A process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the effect unit 331 while performing the lottery (judgment determination) of the "big hit" of It is.

  In the special symbol 2 winning process, first, it is determined whether the current display mode is changing (S501), and when it is determined that the current display mode is changing (S501: Yes), the process is directly performed. finish. On the other hand, if the current display mode is not changing (S501: No), the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c is acquired (S502), and it is determined whether the value is 0 (S503) ). When it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S503: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S503: Yes), each counter (first random number counter C1, first first type counter C2, and stop) The value of the type selection counter C3) is stored in the common execution area (S504). Next, with reference to the state of the probability change flag 203f, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change of the special symbol (S505), and the probability change of the special symbol is in progress (ie, the probability change flag 203f is on) If it is determined that there is a (S505: Yes), whether the jackpot of the special symbol based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S504 and the first random number table 202a for high probability? The lottery result of whether or not is acquired (S506). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 41 stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. As described above, 41 random numbers from "500 to 540" are set as the random numbers for the second special symbol, and the first random number counter C1 and the random number for these hits When it corresponds, it determines with it being a jackpot of the 2nd special symbol. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to the process of S508.

  On the other hand, in the process of S505, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a definite variation (that is, the definite variation flag 203f is off) (S505: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of special symbol, Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S504 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S507). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 40 random numbers stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As described above, 40 random numbers from "0 to 39" are set as random number values for the big wins of special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S508.

  In the process of S508, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol 2 acquired by the process of S506 or S507 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S508), and it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is S508: Yes, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S504, identify the current jackpot type (see FIG. 108), and play the state setting information corresponding to the specified jackpot type, It reads from the result setting table 202e (S509).

  Next, the value of the read out state setting information is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (S510). After that, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S511), and the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S512). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S512, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and until it stops at the jackpot symbol in the third symbol display device 81 The fluctuation time of the third symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 110B), and a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Determine the (variation time).

  Next, it is determined whether the jackpot determined in the process of S512 is a probability variation jackpot (S513), and if the determined jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S513: Yes), the pre-read probability variation flag 203m is set to ON. Then (S514), the process proceeds to S518. On the other hand, if the determined jackpot is not a definite variation jackpot (S513: No), the pre-reading certainty variation flag 203m is set to off (S515), and the process proceeds to the processing of S518.

  In the process of S508, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S508: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S516). In the process of S516, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the effect section is generated based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the common execution area. At 331, the type of stop to be displayed is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S517). Here, the display time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the stoppage with the dislocated symbol is determined in the effect part 331. At this time, similarly to the processing of S512, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Determine the fluctuation time).

  When the process of S517 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S512 or the process of S517 is set (S518). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S511 or S516 is set (S519). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 139). Be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S519 is completed, the process returns to the start winning process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 130), and the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed in the second symbol display device 83 (not shown), It is a process for controlling the open time etc. of the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second ball entrance 640a.

  In this normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640a is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not in contact (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating display (S602). If it is determined that the variable display is not in progress (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 1 or more (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving state of a normal symbol (S608). In the process of S608, if the time saving flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on or the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more, it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is established.

  When it is determined in the process of S608 that the time saving state of the normal symbol is determined (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609). As the jackpot of the special symbol, during the display showing the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the effect unit 331, and the jackpot of the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table 202c for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not the hit is a normal symbol is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is within the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239" , It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 110 (a)).

  If it is determined in the process of S608 that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not determined (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the second random number table 202c for probability time, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is "5", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is within the range of "0, 4, 6 to 239", the normal symbol is detached It is determined that (see FIG. 110 (a)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S 613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “o” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the time saving state of the normal symbol is determined (S614), and it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is determined (the time saving flag 203g is on or the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more). If it is (S614: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, The opening period of the motorized accessory 640b attached to 640a is set to 1 second, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619.

  If it is determined in the process of S614 that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not determined (i.e., the normal state of the normal symbol) (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the opening period of the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second entrance port 640a is While setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to one (S617), and the process proceeds to processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the time symbol is a normal symbol (S619), and the time symbol is a normal symbol (the time flag 203g is on or the value of the time counter 203h is 1 or more). If it is determined (S619: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S619 that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not determined (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol) (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is 30 seconds Is set (S621), and the process ends. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a becomes very long as "0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times", the ball enters the second entrance ball port 640a. It becomes easy to do.

  In the process of S602, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is in the variable display (S602: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed Is determined (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83 (not shown).

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S 622 that the variation time of the normal symbol being variably displayed has elapsed (S 622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S 623) . In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the second symbol display device 83 (not shown) is displayed as a normal symbol (second symbol). "" Is set so that the stop display (lighting display) is performed. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set in the process of S 618, the second symbol display device 83 (not shown) is displayed as a normal symbol (second symbol). The symbol “×” is set to be stopped (displayed in a lit state). When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S613 and the process of S618. 2 Stop display (lighting display) is performed on the symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S624). If it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S 624: Yes), the start of the open / close control of the motorized role object 640 b attached to the second ball entry port 640 a is set (S 625). If the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the motorized part is performed when the motorized part opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 139) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the motorized part is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and it is judged whether or not the passing of the ball at the ordinary ball entry port (through gate) 67 has occurred, and the passing of the ball has occurred. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of variable display in normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  If the ball has not passed through gate 67 (S701: No), or if the ball has passed through gate 67, the value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S703) : No), end this processing. On the other hand, if the ball passes through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 138, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  The start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 138), first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the processing shifts to S914 also in this case.

  In the process of S905, when it is determined that the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907) No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S914. As described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 139, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S914). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start payout control of the gaming ball. . After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S 915, S 916) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S915, S916) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S 915, S 916) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S915, S916), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the values of the probability variation flag 203f, the short time flag 203g, the hour low / middle counter 203h and the state storage area 203k are read (S910), and the read probability variation flag 203f, the hour short flag 203g, the hour / minute counter 203h and the state storage area 203k. The state command is set based on each value of (S911). The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the device 113. By receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at power-on (whether it is a probability change state of a special symbol or a big hit etc.). As a result, it is possible to specify the type of the functional item that can be operated in the origin return operation and the initial operation, and to execute an effect corresponding to the state.

  When the process of S911 is completed, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S912), and an interrupt is permitted ( In step S913, the processing shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up processing will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 130) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 130), and if there is the winning detection information, corresponds to the winning ball number to the payout control device 111. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 131) or the start winning process (see FIG. 133) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning combination information command set in the start winning combination processing is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, the ending command and the like set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 140) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or A jackpot control process for opening or closing the 1 variable winning device 82a and the second specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the first variable winning device 82a or the second specified winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or the ball has won a prescribed number. Then, when any one of these conditions is satisfied, the round is ended. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. The details of the jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640a (S1005). In the motorized part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set in the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), the opening / closing control of the motorized part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, the variation pattern by the process of S310 or the process of S312 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 132) and the process of S512 or the process of S517 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) Is set, variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, until the fluctuation time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED And turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, the process of S310 or S312 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 132) and the process of S512 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) or the process of S517. When the fluctuation time corresponding to the set fluctuation pattern is ended, the fluctuation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is ended, and the process of S309 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 132) The stop symbol (the first symbol) is stopped at the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in the display mode set by the processing of S311 and the processing of S511 or the processing of S516 of the special symbol 2 winning processing (see FIG. 134). Display (light on).

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 135), the variation display is performed in the second symbol display device 83 Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 135), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 in the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 135), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lights up)

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), it means that the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009) ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, ie, until the execution timing of the next main process Within the time, the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (both in the present embodiment, 255). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 137 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1012 is executed. In the process at the time of the power shutoff, first, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S1012), and the power shutoff command indicating that the power shutoff is issued to another controller (the payout control unit 111 or the voice lamp control unit 113). Etc.) (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power supply shutoff, in the process of initial setting (see S901 in FIG. 138) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. The process of S1001 can be started by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value). Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be alleviated, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the first variable winning It is a process for executing the opening / closing control of the device (first large opening) 82a or the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 65a.

  In this jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot of a special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 131) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), "01H" indicating the opening period is stored in the state storage area 203k (S1102), and the opening command is set. (S1103), this processing ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control device Sent towards 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1104). As a jackpot of special symbols, during the display showing the jackpot of the special symbols (including during the jackpot game of the special symbols) in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and special The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol is included. In the process of S1104, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1104: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the opening of the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 65a according to the jackpot type A pattern is set (S1106). Specifically, as described above, if the jackpot type is any of the probability variation big hit B to D and the normal jackpot A, the open pattern A (0 (0) as the open pattern of the first variable winning device (first large open port) 82a. . If the jackpot type is set to open 20 seconds and open for 0.9 seconds 20 times, and the jackpot type is definite variation jackpot E to G, the first variable winning apparatus (first opening jack) 82a An opening pattern B (an opening pattern in which opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once) is set as the opening pattern. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is any of the probability variation big hit A, the probability variation big hit H to K, or the normal jackpot B, until the second specified winning opening (second large opening opening) 65a passes for a predetermined time (30 seconds), Alternatively, an open pattern is set which is released until 10 balls are won.

  When the process of S1106 is finished, a number-of-rounds command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1107). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S1107, the state storage area 203k is updated according to the number of rounds (S1108), and the process ends. Specifically, as described above, "02H" is stored in the state storage area 203k if the current round is one round of big hit, and "03H" is stored if it is two rounds. The reason for not notifying the updated value to the voice lamp control device 113 is to make the voice lamp control device 113 grasp the number of rounds started by the round number command set in the process of S1107. It is because you can. Since the number of command outputs can be reduced, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all two rounds) in which a lot of prize balls are paid out from the normal time is finished, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is the start timing of ending effect (S1109: Yes), an ending command is set (S1110), 04H is stored in the state storage area 203k (S1111), and this process is executed finish. The ending command set in the process of S1110 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an external output process (S1001) of the main process (refer to FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201 is a voice. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the selected display mode of the ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is not the ending start timing (S1109: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special gaming state) (S1112). When it is determined in the process of S1112 that the end timing of the big hit is determined (S1112: Yes), the state setting table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is read (S1113), and the present big hit is notified. At the start of the variable display for this purpose, the state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203 j is read out (S 1114).

  Next, a combination of setting values (certainty change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving counter 203h) corresponding to the state setting information is read out from the read state setting table 202f (S1115), and the read setting is changed to the probability changing flag 203f, The time saving flag 203g and the time saving medium counter 203h are set (S1116). As described above, in this control example, the state setting information selected from the game result setting table 202e is held during the big hit, and the game state is set based on the held state setting information at the end of the big hit. doing. By configuring in this way, there is no need to set the gaming state after the big hit from the various counter values (random number values) acquired at the start winning, so the state setting information It can be limited to a short time until it is stored in the state setting information storage area 202 j. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the random symbol value which is the big hit of the special symbol to be illegally obtained from the outside from the outside, so analyze the timing when the random value which is the big hit appears and analyze the fraud that draws the big hit based on the analyzed timing. It can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set as a so-called hanging board, random numbers are acquired at the timing when the random number value that becomes the big hit appears, and the cheating that controls to make the success or failure of the big hit be suppressed Can.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, during display of various set values (probability change flag 203f, time reduction flag 203g, and time reduction counter 203h) related to the gaming state after the big hit ends, , And is not held during the subsequent jackpot (the bonus game state), it is configured to hold only the state setting information. Instead of providing a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various setting values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to merely provide an area for holding the status setting information value, so the storage area of the RAM 203 is used efficiently. can do.

  After the processing of S1116, “00H” which means not being in big hit is stored in the state storage area 203k (S1117), the gaming state after big hit (probability change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, time saving middle counter 203h, state A status command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the storage area 203k etc.) is set (S1118), and this processing ends. The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a status command, it updates the values of the probability change status flag 223n, the time saving status flag 223o, the time saving status counter 223p, and the hit status storage area 223q according to the gaming status notified by the status command. Do.

  In the process of S1112, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the big hit (special game state) (S1112: No), the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specified winning opening (second) When the ball wins to the large opening port 65a, a winning process for executing the control corresponding to the winning is executed (S1119), and this process ends. The details of the winning process (S1119) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1119). In this winning process (FIG. 141, S1119), it is first determined whether it is a round effective period (S1201). The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the opening pattern is set for the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specified winning opening (large opening) 65a. Period and the interval period (3 seconds) after the end of the round. When it is determined in the process of S1201 that the current period is out of the round effective period (S1201: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1201: Yes), the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 65a It is determined whether a winning is detected (S1202), and if it is determined that a winning is detected (S1202: Yes), the winning number counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1203), and the winning of a big hit is controlled by voice lamp A large open mouth winning command for notifying the device 113 is set (S1204), and the process proceeds to S1205. The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 can determine the number of winning balls based on the received large opening prize winning command.

  Also, in the big hit where the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 are connected (probable variation big hit B to D, normal big hit A), this large open The number of balls winning to the first variable winning device 82a is counted based on the number of winnings (value of the winning counter 223gv) grasped based on the mouth winning command, and is discharged through the second passage forming member 422 A match with the number of balls is determined. The connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released when the winning number and the discharging number coincide with each other. As a result, since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the connection from being released during passage of the first passage forming member 520, the ball having entered the first variable winning device 82a is reliably transmitted to the second passage forming member 422. It can be drained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) occurrence of a defect such as a short circuit of a wiring or a circuit due to the ball getting into the base portion and the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the winnings to the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a and the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 65a are not detected (S1202: No), the process of S1203 and S1204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1205. In the process of S1205, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203i is 10 or more (S1205), and if the value is 10 or more (S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to S1207. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1205 that the value of the winning number counter 203i is less than 10 (S1205: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1206). Here, the round time means the end time of the opening pattern set in the first variable winning device 82a or the opening time (30 seconds) set in the second specified winning opening 65a.

  If it is determined in the process of S1206 that the round time has not elapsed (S1206: No), this means that the round end condition is not satisfied, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1206 that the round time has elapsed (S1206: Yes), the process proceeds to S1207. The process of S1207 is executed when the upper limit number of balls wins the first variable winning device 82a or the second specified winning opening 65a (S1205: Yes), or when the round time has elapsed (S1205) S1206: Yes). That is, it is a case where the end condition of the round is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the end of the round being executed is set (S1207), the value of the winning number counter 203i is initialized to 0 (S1208), and this processing is ended.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 142 to 164, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 142, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed according to the power on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1620 (see FIG. 145) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S1302). As described later with reference to FIG. 145, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (S1617 in FIG. 145: Yes), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1620. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1620 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1620 It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. ) Is judged to be data destruction of the RAM 223 (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1620 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the start of the process is started, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308. .

  In the process of S1302, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1302: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure occurs and during the execution of the power-off process of S1620, The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304), and it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1305). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined in the process of S1305 that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data ( S1306). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  After the process of S1306, it is determined whether the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process (see S1620 in FIG. 145) is performed (see S1619 in FIG. 145). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process (see S1620 in FIG. 145), the process of S1308 is performed in the current state when the power-off flag 223y is turned on. This is the case where the power-up process is started after the instantaneous power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process (see S1620 in FIG. 145) is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1309), and the power-off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1310) Then, the process proceeds to step S1311. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1308 when the power-off flag 223y is turned off is, for example, because the power-on processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1304 to S1306 is performed. Or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 and S1310 which is a process of setting the power-off flag 223y off are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1311.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1309 is that, when the process of S1308 is reached via the processes of S1304 to S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  In the process of S1311, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1311), and then interrupt permission is set (S1312). Thereafter, based on the state command received from the main control unit 110, the insertion state setting process for identifying the gaming state at the time of power on is executed (S1313), and the character mutated from the origin position is set to the origin position. Is executed (S1314), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The details of the on-coming-up state setting process (S1313) and the origin return process (S1314) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144, respectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the closing state setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the closing state setting process (S1313). The entry state setting process (S1313) is executed in the startup process (see FIG. 142), and as described above, is a process for identifying the gaming state when the power is turned on.

  In the on state setting process (S1313), first, according to the state command output from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, the probability change state flag 223n, the short time state flag 223o, the short time state counter 223p and the middle hit The value of the state storage area 223 q is updated (S 1401).

  As described above, the state command notifies each value of the probability change flag 203f, the short time flag 203g, the short time counter 203h, and the state storage area 203k at the time of power on in the start-up process of the main controller 110. (See S911 in FIG. 138). Based on this status command, in the process of S1401, the probability variation status flag 223n is updated to match the status of the probability variation flag 203f, and the time saving status flag 223o is updated to match the status of the time saving flag 203g. The short time state counter 223p is updated to match the value of the counter 203h, and the hit state storage area 223q is updated to match the value stored in the state storage area 203k. Thereby, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the gaming state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched in the start-up process.

  Next, it is determined whether the stored value of the updated hit state storage area 223 q is a value indicating a big hit (S 1402). Here, as described above, if "01H" is stored in the hit state storage area 223q, it indicates that it is the opening period of the jackpot, and if "02H" is stored, a round of one round It indicates that it is a period, and if "03H" is stored, it indicates that it is a round period of two rounds, and if "04H" is stored, it indicates that it is an ending period. On the other hand, if "00H" is stored, it indicates that the present is not in the jackpot.

  If it is determined in the process of S1402 that the value of the hit state storage area 223q is not a value indicating a big hit (that is, "00H" is stored) (S1402: No), the process proceeds to S1403. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit state storage area 223q is a value indicating a hit (ie, it is any of "01H" to "04H") (S1402: Yes), then the hit is in the hit state. It is determined whether "04H" indicating the ending of the ending period is stored in the state storage area 223q (S1404).

  If it is determined in the process of S1404 that the present is in the ending period (S1404: Yes), a wait period of 1.5 seconds is set (S1405), and the process proceeds to S1403. The wait period set here is set to delay the execution of the origin return process (see FIG. 144). By setting the weight period, it is possible to prevent the return-to-origin operation from being performed and the connection with the second passage forming member 422 being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 does not enter the second passage forming member 422 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  More specifically, in the big hit (probable big hit B to D and normal big hit A) where the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected, the connection is released during the ending period, Is driven to the home position. The driving to the home position is executed after confirming that the value of the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharge counter 223hv match in the ending period and that no ball remains in the first passage forming member 520. Ru. However, when the power is shut off during the ending period and the power is turned on again, the RAM 223 is initialized in the start-up process (see S1311 in FIG. 142), and the value of the winning counter 223gv or the value of the discharge counter 223hv. Since the value is also cleared, it can not be determined whether or not the ball remains in the first passage forming member 520 when the power is turned on. Therefore, in the present control example, when it is determined that the power supply is shut off and turned on during the big hit ending period, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected, and Even if the ball remains in the first passage forming member 520, the period in which the ball in the first passage forming member 520 can sufficiently reach the second passage forming member 422 is 1.5 seconds. It is configured to wait for the home position return operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent an origin return operation from being performed while the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520, and to prevent the connection with the second passage forming member 422 from being released. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the ball is ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 without entering the second passage forming member 422 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the player is not in the jackpot (S1402: No), and in the process of S1403 executed after the process of S1405, the operation is performed on the bits corresponding to all features of the operable type storage area 223r. The value 1 indicating possible is set (S1403), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the start-up process. By setting the value (1) indicating that all items are operable by the process of S1403, it is possible to execute the origin return operation and the initial operation for all the items. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether all the items are in the normal operating state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1404 that the present is not in the ending period (a value other than "04H" is stored in the hit state storage area 223q) (S1404: No), the current is next It is determined whether it is in the opening period (whether "01H" is stored in the hit state storage area 223q) (S1406). If it is determined in the process of S1406 that the opening period is in progress ("01H" is stored in the hit state storage area 223q) (S1406: Yes), the first passage forming member 520, the second passage forming member Each of 422 is set as the connection position (S1407), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1408. On the other hand, if the present time is not in the opening period in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), the process of S1407 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1408.

  When the start-up process (see FIG. 142) is performed in the opening period, setting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 in the connecting position is performed by initializing the RAM 223 in the start-up process (see FIG. 142). This is because the step counter 223e is initialized by S1311 in FIG. Therefore, when the power is shut off in the middle of the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 in the opening period of the probability variation big hit B to D and the normal hit A, the power is turned on again. Sometimes the arrangement of each member becomes unknown. So, in this control example, it is set as the structure which sets the drive to a connection position again irrespective of arrangement | positioning of each member. Thereby, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 can be reliably connected in the opening period.

  In the process of S1408, the bit corresponding to the item (the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swinging unit 500) set at the connection position in the operable type storage area 223r is set to 0, and 1 is set to the other bits. The setting is made (S1408), and this processing ends. As a result, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 can be removed from the target of the origin returning operation and the initial operation, so that the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 And can be kept connected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, so It is possible to suppress a defect that is ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the origin return process (S1314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the origin return process (S1314). This origin point return process (S1314) is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 142) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the origin of the character that is mutated from the origin position when the power is turned on It is a process for returning to the position.

  In the origin return process, first, it is determined whether the present time is in the wait period (S1501). If it is in the wait period (S1501: Yes), the present process is ended as it is. Note that, as described above, this weight period is set when the closing state setting process is executed in the ending period of the big hit (see S1405 in FIG. 143), and the origin is set while the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520. It is set to prevent the return operation from being performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1501 that the present is not in the wait period (S1501: No), the value stored in each bit of the operable type storage area 223r is read (S1502), and the value is 1 It is determined whether the origin sensors of the corresponding role are all in the H output state (S1503). When it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of at least one of the accessories corresponding to the bit having a value of 1 is in the L state (S1503: No), the output corresponds to the origin sensor in the state of L The operation in the direction of the origin (home position return operation) is set for the character to be played (S1504). Then, in order to indicate that the home position return operation is being performed, the home position return flag 223i is set to on (S1505), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1503 that all outputs of the origin sensor of the character corresponding to the bit having a value of 1 in the operable type storage area 223r are in the H state (S1503: Yes), origin return Since it is not necessary to execute the operation, the start of the initial operation is set (S1506), and in order to indicate that the initial operation is being executed, the initial operation flag 223j is set to ON (S1507). End the process.

  By executing the origin point return process (S1314), since each accessory can be returned to the origin position, the subsequent initial operation can be started from the origin position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S1601 was performed (S1601), and one millisecond If the above has not elapsed (S1601: No), the processing proceeds to S1614 without performing the processing of S1602 to S1613. In the process of S1601, the process of determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is mainly the process relating to display (rendering) in S1602 to S1613 and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1614 and the variable display setting process of S1615 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1614 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception failure of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the process of S1615 is executed in a short cycle to execute the command received by the command determination process. Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1603 to S1616 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1602). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1604). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1605 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high speed change period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a rear surface image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1607 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is finished, the lamp editing process is executed (S1608), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1609, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the effect unit 331 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1609 is also executed in time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the rendering unit 331.

  When the process of S1610 is completed, the swing effect process is executed to perform control during the swing effect in which the ball B performs the swing operation on the upper portion of the holding piece 677 (S1611). Next, the ball which has passed through the second passage forming member 422 (discharged from the pachinko machine 10) is detected, and a discharge detection process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S1612). Next, an effect setting process for controlling various effects executed during the execution of the “in-the-row mode suggestive effect” is executed (S1613), and the process shifts to the process of S1614. The details of the swing effect process (S1611), the discharge detection process (S1612), and the effect setting process (S1613) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the process of S1614, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1614). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1615). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to execute fluctuation presentation (variation display) in the rendering unit 331, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. Then, after the end of the variation display setting process (S1615), a bonus item action setting process for setting the action of each bonus item is executed (S1616). Note that the details of the part product operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1616 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1617). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S1617 that the occurrence information of the power-off is stored (S1617: Yes), the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are both set to ON (S1619), The disconnection process is executed (S1620). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1621), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored in the process of S1617 (S1617: No), it is judged whether the RAM 223 is destroyed or not based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1618) and the RAM 223 is destroyed If not (S1618: No), the process returns to S1601, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1618: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the main processing is not executed when the loop is infinite, the display contents in the effect part 331 and the third symbol display device 81 do not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the swing effect process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the swing effect process (S1611). The swing production process (S1611) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, various controls are performed during the execution of the swing production. It will be.

  In the swing production process, first, it is determined whether the swing production flag 223 ev provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is on (S 1701), and if the swing production flag 223 ev is off (S 1701: No Since the swing effect is not being executed, the present processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the swing production flag 223ev is on (S1701: Yes), it is then determined whether the swing non-detection flag 223v is on (S1702). If the detection flag 223v is on (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the output of the ball detection sensor 679 (see FIG. 103) is in the H state (S1703). That is, it is determined whether or not the ball B has passed the front side of the ball detection sensor 679 provided at the upper central portion of the holding piece 677.

  If it is determined in the process of S1703 that the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is not in the H state (that is, the output is in the L state) (S1703: No), the ball passes the front side of the ball detection sensor 679 This means that the process is not performed, so the process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1703 that the output of the ball detection sensor is in the H state (S1703: Yes), the ball B is thrown by the throwing device 650, and then the ball B is detected at first. Therefore, the swing non-detection flag 223v is set to OFF, and the swing timer 223w is reset (S1704), and the process is ended. As a result, every time passage of the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679 after that, it is possible to determine the cycle of the swing operation from the measurement value of the swing timer 223 w.

  If it is determined in the process of S1702 that the swing not-detected flag 223v is off (S1702: No), it is next determined whether the ball drop enable flag 223fv is on (S1705). If it is determined in the process of S1705 that the ball drop enable flag 223fv is on (S1705: Yes), the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion performed by the ball B is sufficiently small, and the condition for causing the ball B to drop In order to mean that the following condition is established, the drop control process (S1706) for determining the arrangement of the rotary member 640 and controlling the drop of the ball B is executed, and this process is ended. The details of the drop control process (S1706) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1705 that the ball fall enable flag 223fv is off (S1705: No), 1 is added to the value of the swing timer 223w (S1707), and then the output of the ball detection sensor 679 Is determined to be in the H state (S1708). In the process of S1708, when it is determined that the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is not H (that is, the output is L) (S1708: No), the ball B is not returned to the upper center of the holding piece 677 Since the cycle can not be determined, the present processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1708 that the output of the ball detection sensor is in the H state (S1708: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the oscillation timer 223w is larger than 500 (S1709) ). In the process of S1709, if the value of the rocking timer 223w is 500 or less (S1709: No), the period from when the ball B was detected to pass by the ball detection sensor 679 last time until the passage is detected again this time is It means that it is 500 milliseconds or less. That is, since it means that the oscillation cycle has decreased to 1 second (500 milliseconds × 2) or less, the ball drop enable flag 223 fv is set to ON (S 1711), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1709, if the value of the oscillation timer 223w is larger than 500 (S1709: Yes), it means that the cycle of the oscillation operation performed by the ball B is relatively long (the amplitude of the oscillation operation is large). Since dropping the ball B in this state may cause an unnatural appearance, the value of the swing timer 223 w is reset without establishing the dropping condition (while keeping the ball drop enable flag 223 fv off). (S1710), and then return to the main processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the drop control process (S1706) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the drop control process (S1706). The drop control process (S1706) is performed in the swing effect process (see FIG. 146) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the drop control process (S1706), first, it is determined whether all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are L (S1801). If it is determined that the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are all L (S1801: Yes), the positions of the detection target parts 641c and the detection sensors A to F are shifted, and the rotating members Since the arrangement of 640 can not be specified, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1801, when at least one output of the detection sensors A to F is determined not to be L (that is, at least one output is H) (S1801: No), the detection sensors A to Based on the output of F and the rotational position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121), the pocket arranged at the drop position (directly below the holding piece 677) is specified (S1802). Next, from the hit position storage area 223k (see FIG. 122), the pocket type of the pocket located at the drop position next to the pocket currently located at the drop position ) Is specified (S1803). Then, the identified pocket type is compared with the current roulette chance (whether or not the transition to the “continuous mode” has been determined) (S1804), and it is determined whether the comparison results match ((1804) S1805).

  In the process of S1805, if the comparison results do not match (S1805: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if the comparison results agree (S1805: Yes), the ball B is set to drop after 100 steps (that is, the holding piece 677 is driven to the immersion position) (S1806), the ball drop enable flag 223fv is set to OFF (S1807), and the process ends. Note that 100 steps is the number of steps in which the holding piece 677 is driven to the retracted position 0.2 seconds before reaching the next pocket. This 0.2 second is set to be substantially the same as the falling time of the ball B dropped from the holding piece 677. This allows the ball B to enter the next pocket just at the timing when the next pocket is placed at the falling position.

  Thus, in the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the present control example, the determination of the type of the pocket to be placed next at the drop position and the drop control of the ball B based on the determination result It is configured to run prior to being placed on. That is, when the ball B is dropped, the holding piece 677 is moved to the retracted position at a timing when it can be dropped sufficiently to the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the dropped position). And can be driven (immersed). Therefore, the ball B can be dropped to the target type pocket more reliably. Therefore, despite the fact that the ball B does not shift to the "connected mode", the ball B falls into the pocket and, conversely, the transition to the "connected mode" is determined, The ball B can be prevented (suppressed) from falling off and falling into the pocket.

  In this control example, when it is determined to drop to the next pocket, the holding piece 677 is retracted into the retracted position after the rotation operation of 100 steps by the rotating member 640 regardless of the arrangement of the ball B. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the holding piece 677 may be inserted into the immersing position in consideration of the timing at which the ball B reaches the central portion of the holding piece 677 in the swing operation. More specifically, for example, even after the pocket to be dropped is specified, the period (amplitude) of the rocking operation is determined each time the ball B reaches the central portion of the holding piece 677, and the determination is made. The cycle of the rocking operation is configured to be able to be stored (updated) in the RAM 223. Then, when reaching 100 steps, the value of the oscillation timer 223 w (the elapsed time since the passage of the ball B was detected by the ball detection sensor 679 last time) is referred to, for example, the latest oscillation stored in the RAM 223 If it is determined that the value is close to the period of the movement operation (for example, a value of 90% or more of the period of the latest rocking operation), control may be performed to immerse the holding piece 677 as it is. On the other hand, if the value is less than a predetermined ratio (for example, 90% of the latest oscillation operation cycle) with respect to the latest oscillation operation cycle, the holding piece 677 is immersed after waiting until the predetermined ratio is reached. It may be controlled to immerse into position. With this configuration, when the ball B rolls toward the outer side (left end or right end) of the holding piece 677, or in the vicinity of the end (left end or right end) of the holding piece 677 It is possible to prevent (suppress) the holding piece 677 from immersing into the immersing position when it is held. That is, when the holding piece 677 is sunk, the ball B can be reliably dropped in the direction of the drop position without advancing in the other direction. Therefore, since the time from the immersion of the holding piece 677 into the immersion position to the start of the falling of the ball B can be shortened, the ball B can be more surely dropped into the target pocket.

  In this control example, when it is determined that the ball B can be dropped to the pocket located at the drop position next to the pocket currently located at the drop position, the rotation operation for 100 steps is executed. After that, the holding piece 677 is immersed into the immersing position, but is not limited to this. A range (for example, after 100 steps to 120 steps) in which the ball B can be surely dropped to the pocket at the dropping position without the ball B dropping to the pocket at the dropping position and the pocket next to the dropping position. It may be configured to be dropped randomly each time in the range). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the timing at which the ball B falls, so it looks more natural compared to the case where the ball B is dropped at the same timing each time (the action of the ball B is only gravity. The ball B can be dropped with the appearance as if it were falling.

  Next, the discharge detection process (S1612) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The discharge detection process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, passes through the second passage forming member 422 (pachinko machine This is processing for detecting a sphere (discharged from 10) and performing corresponding control.

  In the discharge detection process (see FIG. 148), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has been detected into the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 (S1901), and if the ball is not detected (S1901: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1901 that the ball entering the second passage forming member 422 is detected (S1901: Yes), the ball winning the first variable winning device 82a is through the first passage forming member 520 Since this means that the second passage forming member 422 is normally reached, 1 is added to the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S1902).

  When the process of S1902 ends, it is then determined whether the discharge standby flag (not shown) is on. This discharge standby flag is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period (discharge standby period) set after all the rounds of the jackpot have ended, in order to discharge all the winning balls to the first variable winning device 82a. is there. In the process of S1903, if it is determined that the discharge standby flag is off (S1903: No), it means that it is not the discharge standby period, and it means that it is in the round period of the jackpot, so the time saving state of the normal symbol The execution of the short time suggestion effect (see FIGS. 92A and 92B) indicating whether or not to be set is set (S1904), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1903 that the discharge standby flag is on (S1903: Yes), the value of the winning counter 223gv is read (S1905), and the read value of the winning counter 223gv is the discharging counter. It is determined whether or not it matches the value of 223 hv (S1906). In the process of S1906, when the value of the winning counter 223gv read out does not match the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S1906: No), this process is ended as it is in order to continue the discharge standby period.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1906 that the value of the read winning counter 223gv matches the discharge counter 223hv (S1906: Yes), all the balls winning to the first variable winning device 82a are normally the second It means that it has been discharged from the passage forming member 422. Therefore, the process for releasing the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is performed. Specifically, "01H" is set to the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to the specific ending table 222b6 (S1907), and an action command for notifying the action content according to the value of the action pointer 223g is set. (S1908). Then, the value of the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharge counter 223hv are reset to 0 (S1909), and this processing is ended.

  By executing this discharge detection process, after all the balls entering the first variable winning device 82a are discharged through the second passage forming member 422, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage are formed. The connection (connection) with the member 422 can be released. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) occurrence of a defect such as a short circuit of a wiring or a circuit due to the ball getting into the base portion and the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the effect setting process (S1613) in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This effect setting process (S1613) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 145), and as described above, is a process for controlling various effects executed during the execution of the "in-line mode suggestive effect". It is.

  In the effect setting process (see FIG. 149), first, it is determined whether or not the increase effect in-progress flag 223cv is on (S2001), and if the increase in-effect flag 223cv is on (S2001: Yes), 1 for the effect timer 223bv Is added (S2002), and it is determined whether the value of the effect timer 223bv after addition is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (lucky number increase effect) (S2003).

  In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the effect timer 223bv is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003: Yes), the roulette chance effect is set (S2004), and the increase effect flag 223cv is turned off. At the same time as setting, the roulette flag 223 dv is set to ON (S 2005), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2003 that the value of the effect timer 223bv is not the timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003: No), the process of S2004 and S2005 is skipped and the process is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2001 that the increase effect in-progress flag 223cv is not on (S2001: No), then it is determined whether the roulette flag 223dv is on (S2006), it is determined that it is off In the case of (S2006: No), this means that the execution of the "Running mode suggestive effect" is not being performed, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2006 that the roulette flag 223 dv is on (S2006: Yes), the roulette chance effect (see FIGS. 95A and 95B) is currently being executed. This means that 1 is added to the effect timer 223bv (S2007), and it is determined whether the value of the effect timer 223bv after addition is a timer value indicating the end of roulette chance effect (S2008) ).

  If it is determined in the process of S2008 that the effect timer 223bv is not the timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance effect (S2008: No), the process is ended as it is to continue the roulette chance effect. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2008 that the value of the effect timer 223bv is a timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance effect (S2008: Yes), the roulette chance effect is terminated, and the “continuously suggestive mode suggestive effect” First, the roulette flag 223 dv and the swing effect flag 223 ev are set to OFF in order to set the ending effect of (S 2009).

  When the process of S2009 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the transition to the "continuous mode" has been notified (the ball B has been dropped into the pocket) in the roulette chance production this time (S2010). When the transition to the "Running mode" (falling to the winning pocket) is notified (S2010: Yes), the display time of the ending image is continued so that the ending image is continuously displayed until the jackpot fluctuation under execution is ended. Is set (S2011), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2010 that the transition to the “continuous mode” is not notified in the current roulette chance production (S2010), next, the out of the current roulette chance presentation is reported If it is determined that the ball B is dropped to the pocket) (S2012) and it is determined that the detachment is not notified (the ball B is not dropped to the pocket) (S2010: No), the roulette chance effect is produced This means that the ball B is not dropped (the result of the roulette chance effect is not notified) even though it has reached the end timing of There is a possibility. Therefore, in this case, the display of the error is set by setting the display error command (S2013), and this processing is ended. Since the error display is executed by the display error command, the store clerk in the hall can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has a problem. Therefore, appropriate measures such as repair can be promptly performed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2012, when it is determined that the detachment has been notified (the ball B has been dropped to the detachment pocket) (S2012: Yes), next, whether or not the variation display of the special symbol is currently displayed. It discriminate | determines (S2014), and when it is not in a fluctuation | variation (S2014: No), the display of an ending image is set to 5 seconds (S2015), and this process is complete | finished. In addition, at the end timing of the roulette chance effect (at 85 seconds from the start of the “Renso mode suggestive effect”), the fluctuation stop state is the lottery of special symbols for the number of time reductions set as the “preparation mode” Before the variable stop is performed. Therefore, when it becomes a definite variation jackpot within the remaining number of time intervals thereafter, the mode shifts to the “continuous mode” after the termination of the definite variation jackpot. In this case, the resurrection roulette chance effect (see FIG. 115 (b)) is executed, and the ball B is controlled to fall into the hit pocket.

  In the process of S2014, if it is determined that the current display of the special symbol is being displayed as being changed (S2014: Yes), it is determined whether the type of the change is out of change (S2016). (S2016: Yes) As the display time of the ending image, the remaining time until the out-of-process variation is ended is set (S2018), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2016 that no out-of-out fluctuation is found (that is, a big hit fluctuation is being executed) (S2016: No), a revival roulette chance presentation (see FIG. 115 (b)) is set (S2017) , End this process. By executing this effect setting process (see FIG. 149), an appropriate effect can be executed in the "in-line mode suggestive effect".

  Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the command determination processing (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1614). This command determination process (S1614) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process for

  In this command determination process, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether it has been received (S2101). If it is determined in the process of S2101 that a variation pattern command has been received (S2101: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S2102), and the process returns to the main process. The details of the fluctuation pattern command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2101: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2103). When the stop type command is received (S2103: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2104), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2105). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S2103: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2106). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S2106: Yes), the value contained in the received hold ball number command, that is, of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 The value (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2107). Further, in the processing of S2107, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S2107 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number of holding balls command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins at the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when the drawing of the special symbol is performed, the starting winning combination is performed. Every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S2107 and the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 It can be adjusted to the value of the number counter 203c. Therefore, even when the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. When the special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S2107 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S2106 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S2106: No), it is then determined whether a winning information command has been received (S2108). In the process of S2108, if the winning information command is received (S2108: Yes), a winning information command process for setting an effect according to the winning information is executed (S2109), and the present process is ended. The details of the winning information command process (S2109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received in the process of S2108 (S2108: No), then the command regarding the jackpot (ie, opening command, number of rounds command, large opening aperture winning command, ending command It is determined whether or not any one is received (S2110). If it is determined in the process of S2110 that the command regarding the big hit is received (S2110: Yes), the hit related command process for executing the process according to the various commands regarding the big hit is executed (S2111), and this process Finish. The details of the hit related command process (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 153 and 154.

  On the other hand, if the command related to the jackpot has not been received in the process of S2110 (S2110: No), then it is determined whether or not the execution command has been received from any of the motor drivers (S2112). In the process of S2112, if the execution command is received (S2112: Yes), the progress of the operation of the accessory driven by the motor driver is determined according to the execution command output from the various motor drivers, and the progress is made The execution command process for performing control according to is executed (S2113), and this process ends. The details of the execution command process (S2113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2112, if the execution command is not received (S2112: No), it is then determined whether the status command is received (S2114), and if the status command is received (S2114: Yes) The gaming state notified by the state command is determined, and state command processing for performing the corresponding control is executed (S2115), and this processing is ended. The details of the state command processing (S2115) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160.

  On the other hand, if the status command has not been received in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is then determined whether the special figure 2 prize command has been received (S2116). In the process of S2116, if the special figure 2 prize command is received (S2116: Yes), the special figure 2 prize command processing for setting the corresponding production according to entering the ball to the second entrance 640a The process is executed (S2117), and the process ends. The details of the special view 2 winning command process (S2117) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2116 that the special figure 2 prize command has not been received (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not other commands have been received, and the process according to the received command Is executed (S2118) to return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 151, fluctuation pattern command processing (S2102) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S2102). The fluctuation pattern command process (S2102) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and is a process for specifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) from the fluctuation pattern command and setting the operation of the bonus. is there.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 151), first, the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to ON (S2201), and a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S2202). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a bonus feature scenario (S2203), and if there is no bonus item scenario (S2203: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2203 that there is a bonus game action scenario (S2203: Yes), the action scenario of the corresponding bonus article is set (S2204), and then this process ends.

  Next, the details of the winning information command process (S2109) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The prize information command process (S2109) is a process executed when a prize information command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and as described above, a process for setting an effect according to the prize information. It is.

  When this winning information command process (see FIG. 152) is started, first, pass / fail, stop types and fluctuation patterns are extracted from the received winning information command, and they are used as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 233. It stores (S2301). Next, each process of S2302 to S2313 for setting the additional effect (see FIG. 96A) is executed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. As described above, this additional effect is executed when the winning of the first entrance 64 is suspended in the "normal mode", and it is switched to the "preparation mode" or the "continuous mode" in the holding ball. It is an effect to make the player expect the transition.

  The processes of S2302 to S2313 for setting the additional effect will be described more specifically. First, in the process of S2302, it is determined whether or not the time saving state flag 223o is on (S2302), and if it is determined that it is on (S2302: Yes), the current is the "Running mode" (" This means that the normal mode is not “), and since the additional effect is not executed regardless of the success or failure of the winning information, the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the time saving state flag 223o is off (S2302: No), it is then determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 223p is a value larger than 0 (S2303).

  If it is determined in the process of S2303 that the value of the time saving state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S2303: Yes), it means that the present is the "preparation mode" (not "the normal mode"), Since the additional effect is not executed regardless of the process, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2303 that the value of the time saving state counter 223p is 0 (S2303: No), then whether the value of the additional counter 223av (the number of additional items) is the upper limit value 3 or not. If it is the upper limit value, the process is ended without setting the additional effect. In the present control example, the upper limit value of the additional number is uniformly set to three, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit number may be increased as the lottery result advantageous to the player is suspended. As a result, since the number of executions of the additional effect is more likely to be held as the lottery result advantageous to the player is held, the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced as the additional effect is performed.

  If it is determined in the process of S2304 that the value of the additional counter 223av is less than the upper limit (less than 3) (S2304: No), then each hold currently held from each area of the winning information storage area 223a Read out the prize information corresponding to the ball (S2305), and among the prize information read out, does any of the probability variation jackpots B, C, E, F, and the normal jackpot A be included (pending)? It is determined whether or not it is (S2306). That is, it is determined whether the jackpot type for transitioning to the "preparation mode" is suspended.

  In the process of S2306, when it is determined that the jackpot to shift to the "preparation mode" is not suspended (S2306: No), the player falls out of the suspension and the jackpot type to which the "prepare mode" is not given This is the case where only the normal mode “) is included, and this is the case where the lottery result disadvantageous to the player is held as compared with other cases. Therefore, in this case, it is determined whether the additional effect is to be executed or not based on the lowest (that is, 5%) additional low probability table in which the additional effect is determined among the additional determination table 222 d ( S2310), the process proceeds to S2311.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2306 that the jackpot type for transitioning to the "preparation mode" is suspended (S2306: Yes), then setting after the jackpot type for transitioning to the "preparation mode" is over If it is determined that a definite variation jackpot is held within the "preparation mode" (normal symbol short time state) (S2307), and it is determined that the probability variation jackpot during the "preparation mode" is held (S2307: Yes), which means that the transition to the most advantageous “continuous mode” has been determined, so the percentage at which the additional effect is determined in the additional determination table 222d is the lowest (ie, 25%) Based on the low probability table, it is determined whether or not to execute the additional effect (S2308), and the process proceeds to S2311.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2307, when the probability change jackpot in the "preparation mode" (normal symbol time reduction state) is not held (S2307), only the "preparation mode" relatively advantageous for the player is Since it is decided, the proportion at which the additional effect is determined in the additional discrimination table 222d is based on the intermediate probability table (ie 10%) of the low probability table and the high probability table, and the additional effect is executed. It is determined whether or not to do (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2311.

  In the processing of S2311, which is executed after any of S2308 to S2310, it is determined whether the execution of the additional rendering is determined in the processing of S2308 to S2310 (S2311), and the execution of the additional rendering is determined For example (S2311: Yes), 1 is added to the additional counter 223av (S2312), execution of the additional effect is set (S2313), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2311 that the execution of the additional effect has not been determined (S2311: No), the processes of S2312 and S2313 are skipped, and the process ends.

  By this prize information command process (see FIG. 152), it is possible to vary the rate at which the additional effect is determined according to the content of the holding ball. As a result, the player can be expected to shift to various advantageous states only by executing the additional effect. For example, since the percentage to be executed when the jackpot type for which the "preparation mode" is set is set after the jackpot is held is high, the jackpot effect usually becomes a jackpot (when the jackpot effect is not executed) You can play games with greater expectation than you can. This is because if the jackpot is achieved, the degree of expectation for transitioning to the "preparation mode" also increases.

  Also, if the player is expected to win a jackpot, the player can be made to recognize that the degree of expectation to shift to the "prepare mode" is higher than normal (when the additional effect is not executed). It is possible to more strongly expect the lucky number to be displayed to the effect unit 422a during the jackpot game. Furthermore, at the time of execution of the additional effect, the case where the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "continuous mode" is suspended is compared with the case where the transition to the "continuous mode" is not determined. Since the execution ratio of the additional effect is configured to be high, if the player is notified of the "preparation mode" as expected by the player, the player is expected to shift to the "continuously mode" more than usual. It can be made to recognize. Therefore, the player can be more strongly expected to shift to the “continuous mode”. Therefore, by performing the additional effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in stages, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 153, the hit related command processing (S2111) will be described. This hit related command process (S2111) is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and as described above, in the process for performing corresponding control when a command related to the jackpot is received. is there.

  When the hit related command processing (see FIG. 153) is started, it is first determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2401), and if the opening command has been received (S2401: Yes) It is determined whether it is an opening indicating the start of any of ~ D and normal jackpot A (S2402). That is, it is determined whether or not the opening pattern A is set to the first variable winning device 82a.

  When it is determined in the process of S2402 that the opening command is for any of the probability variation big hits B to D and the normal hit A (S2402: Yes), the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are selected. In order to drive to the connection position, “01H” is set to the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)) (S2403). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g is read out from the specific opening table 222b5, and an operation command for setting the read operation content in the motor driver is set (S2404). Transfer to S2405. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2402 that the opening command corresponding to the jackpot different from any of the probability variation jackpot B to D and the normal jackpot A is received (S2402: No), the first passage forming member 520 and the second Since it is not necessary to connect the passage forming member 422, the processing of S2403 and S2404 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S2405.

  In the process of S2405, in order to start the opening effect of the big hit, an opening command for display is set (S2405), this process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 150). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display opening command, display control of the opening effect is started so that the jackpot opening effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S2401 that the opening command is not included in the command received from the main control unit 110 (S2401: No), it is then determined whether or not the round number command has been received. (S2406) If the round number command has been received (S2406: Yes), first, the number of rounds of the jackpot is extracted from the received round number command (S2407). Next, it is determined whether the specified number of rounds is the first round (S2408), and if it is the first round (S2408: Yes), the operation pointer corresponding to the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)) It is determined whether the value of 223g is "00H" (S2409). That is, it is determined whether or not the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 are in operation. Then, when it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223g is a value other than "00H" (S2409: No), the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500, although the opening period is completed, This means that the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is in operation. The opening period is set to a specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)) at the start of one round, since the opening period is set to a sufficient length of time to arrange each of the above items at the connection position. If the operation content is not completed, the drive motor may be stopped or idle due to some abnormality, or the communication between the motor driver and the drive motor may be abnormal. Therefore, in this case, in order to display an error image for notifying an error, a display error command is set (S2410), and this processing ends.

  By displaying the error image by the error command, it is possible to make it easy for the store clerk in the hall to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality. Therefore, appropriate measures such as repair can be performed on the pachinko machine 10 in which the abnormality has occurred.

  When it is determined in the process of S2408 that the number of rounds extracted from the round number command is not the first round (ie, the second round) (S2408: No), and in the process of S2409, the specific opening table 222b5 (FIG. 119). When it is determined that the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to (c) is “00H” (S2409: Yes), a display round number command for displaying the number of rounds extracted in the process of S2408 The setting is made (S2411), and this processing ends.

  When it is determined in the process of S2406 that the round number command has not been received from the main control unit 110 (S2406: No), it is then determined whether or not the large opening prize winning command has been received (S2412), If the large opening prize winning command has been received (S2412: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 223gv (S2413), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2412 that the large opening opening winning command has not been received (S2412: No), then it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S2414), and the ending command has been received. (S2414: Yes), it is determined whether the odd change jackpot B to D or the normal jackpot A is the ending (S2415). That is, it is determined whether the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are the jackpot type endings to be driven to the connection position. Then, in the process of S 2415, when it is determined that it is the ending of any of the definite variation big hit B to D or the normal big hit A (S 2415: Yes), the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 The connection release determination processing for releasing the connection (connection) is executed (S2416), and the processing proceeds to S2417. The details of the connection release determination process (S2416) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2415, when it is not determined that it is not the ending of any of the probability variation big hit B to D or the normal big hit A (S2415: No), the process of S2416 is skipped and the process shifts to S2417 Do. In the processing of S2417, a display ending command is set (S2417), and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the connection release determination process (S2416) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The connection release determination process (S2416) is a process for releasing the connection (connection) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422.

  In this connection release process (see FIG. 154), first, the values of the winning counter 223gv and the discharge counter 223hv are read (S2501), and it is determined whether these counter values match (S2502). If it is determined in the process of S2502 that the read counter values match (S2502: Yes), all the balls winning to the first variable winning device 82a have reached the second passage forming member 422 (first passage) Since it means that there is no ball passing through the forming member 520, the processing of S2503 to S2505 for releasing the connection (connection) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is performed. .

  Specifically, "01H" is set to the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to the specific ending table 222b6 (S2503), and the operation content according to the value "01H" of the action pointer 223g is read from the specific ending table 222b6 Then, an operation command for notifying the motor driver of the read operation content is set (S2504). Then, the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharge counter 223hv are both reset to 0 (S2505), and this processing is ended. Thus, after determining that the ball winning the first variable winning device 82a has reached the second passage forming member 422, the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 ( By releasing the connection, it is possible to prevent the connection from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the problem that the ball is ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharging counter 223hv do not match in the process of S2502 (S2502: No), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 223gv is larger than the value of the discharging counter 223hv (S2506) ), If the value of the winning counter 223gv is larger (S2506: Yes), it means that a part of the ball entering the first variable winning device 82a has not reached the second passage forming member 422 In order to wait until the unreached ball reaches the second passage forming member 422, the discharge standby flag is set to ON (S2507), and the process is ended. By setting the discharge standby flag to ON, the match between the value of the winning counter 223 gv and the value of the discharge counter 223 hv is determined each time the above-described discharge detection process (see FIG. 148) is executed, When they coincide, the connection (connection) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released.

  If it is determined in the process of S2506 that the value of the winning counter 223gv is less than or equal to the value of the discharging counter 223hv (S2506: No), the number of balls having won more than the first variable winning device 82a is the second passage Since this means that the ink is discharged through the forming member 422, some abnormality may have occurred. Therefore, in this case, in order to display an error image for notifying an error, a display error command is set (S2508), and this processing ends. By displaying the error image by the error command, it is possible to make it easy for the store clerk in the hall to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality. Therefore, appropriate measures such as repair can be performed on the pachinko machine 10 in which the abnormality has occurred.

  Next, the details of the execution command process (S2113) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This execution command process (S2113) is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and as described above, is a process for executing control according to the progress of the operation set for each role .

  When execution command processing (see FIG. 155) is started, first, 1 is added to the value of the step counter 223e of the role corresponding to the received execution command (S2601). Next, it is determined whether the home position return flag 223i is on (S2602). If the home position return flag is on (S2603: Yes), this means that the home position return operation is in progress. It is determined whether it exists (S2603). That is, it is determined whether or not all the items have returned to the home position by the home position return operation. If it is determined in the process of S2603 that there is an origin sensor in the state of L output (S2603: Yes), this means that the origin return operation of the accessory corresponding to the origin sensor has not been completed. In order to execute the home position return operation, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2603 that the outputs of all the origin sensors are in the H state (all the items have returned to the origin position) (S2603: No), the origin return operation has been completed In this case, the start of the initial operation is set (S2604). This initial operation is performed to determine whether each item is in a normally operable state by setting a predetermined operation for each item. As described above, the operation content in this initial operation is defined in the initial operation table 222b7. That is, in the process of S2604, while setting "01H" to the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to the initial action table 222b7, the action content corresponding to the value "01H" of the action pointer 223g is read from the initial action table 222b7 Set the command. When the process of S2604 is completed, the in-return-to-origin-point flag 223i is set to OFF, and the in-initial-operation flag 223j is set to ON (S2605), and this process is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S2602 that the in-origin point return flag 223i is off (S2602: No), it is then determined whether the in-initial operation flag 223j is on (S2606). That is, it is determined whether the initial operation is being executed, and when it is determined that the initial operation flag 223 j is on (S2606: Yes), an initial operation process for executing control according to the progress of the initial operation Is executed (S2607), and the process ends. Details of the initial operation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S2606 that the flag 223j during initial operation is off (S2606: No), then the execution command received this time is the execution command output from the motor driver of the rotation unit 600 or not. It is determined (S2608). That is, it is determined whether the command is an execution command for notifying that the rotation operation for one step of the rotation member 640 has been performed. If it is determined in the process of S2608 that the command is an execution command output from the motor driver of the rotation unit 600 (S2608: Yes), the rotation setting process for controlling the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 (and the rear LED 625) is performed. The process is executed (S2609), and a lighting setting process for controlling the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 of the rear surface LED 625 is executed (S2610), and this process is ended. Details of the rotation setting process (S2609) and the lighting setting process (S2610) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, respectively.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2608 that the execution command received this time is not a command corresponding to the rotating unit 600 (S2608: No), then the role corresponding to the execution command is received by the execution command received this time. It is determined whether the number of operation steps set for the object has been reached (S2611). For example, when an execution command corresponding to the motor driver of upper elevating unit 300 is received, the number of operation steps is made from the set operation scenario (upper elevating unit table 222b1) and the value of operation pointer 223g corresponding to the operation scenario Read out. Then, if the value of the step counter 223e is equal to or more than the operation step defined in the operation scenario, it is determined that the set number of steps has been reached.

  If it is determined in the process of S2611 that the set number of steps has been reached (S2611: Yes), then 1 is added to the action pointer 223g of the character (operation scenario) corresponding to the execution command received this time (S2612 ), The operation content corresponding to the added pointer value is read out from the operation scenario table 222 b (S2613). Then, an operation command for instructing the corresponding motor driver of the read operation content is set (S2614), and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the initial operation processing (S2606) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This initial operation processing (S2606) is one of the execution command processing (see FIG. 155), and as described above, is processing for executing control in accordance with the progress of the initial operation.

  When this initial operation process (see FIG. 156) is started, first, the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the operation scenario of the initial operation is read (S2701), and it is determined whether the end condition of the operation corresponding to the pointer value is satisfied. (S2702). For example, if the value of the current operation pointer 223g is "02H", it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied when the upper lifting unit 300 has reached the lowered position and the left swinging unit 500 has reached the connected position. (See Figure 120).

  If it is determined in the process of S2702 that the currently set operation termination condition is not satisfied (S2702: No), then the initial operation is performed based on the current operation pointer 223g and the value of the step counter 223e. It is determined whether the number of abnormality determination steps defined in the table 222b7 (see FIG. 120) has been reached (S2703). If it is determined in the process of S2703 that the number of abnormality determination steps has not been reached (S2703: No), an operation for one step is additionally set (S2704), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of abnormality determination steps has been reached (S2703: Yes), the fact that the end conditions are not satisfied despite setting an operation with a sufficient number of steps to satisfy the end conditions means. For this reason, there is a possibility that the drive motor is not operating normally or there is an abnormality in communication between the motor driver and the drive motor. Therefore, in this case, the error display setting is performed by setting the display error command (S2705), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2702 that the end condition of the currently set operation is satisfied (S2702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the initial operation (S2706), The value of each bit of the operable type storage area 223r is read (S2707). Then, it is determined whether the data in the initial operation table 222b7 corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g after addition is END data (whether the initial operation has been completed) (S2708), and END data is read (initial operation is completed In the case where it is determined (S2708: Yes), the in-initial operation flag 223j is set to OFF, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2708 that the initial operation has not been completed (S2708: No), it is next determined whether the initial operation of the character corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g is executable. (S2710). That is, it is determined whether it is the initial operation of the role corresponding to the bit whose value is set to 1 in the operable type storage area 223r. If it is determined in the process of S2710 that the initial movement of the accessory corresponding to the value of the movement pointer 223g is executable (S2710: Yes), the value of the movement pointer 223g after 1 is added by the process of S2706 The operation content corresponding to is read out from the initial operation table 222b7 (S2711), an operation command corresponding to the read operation content is set (S2712), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2710 that the initial operation of the character corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g is not executable (the corresponding bit of the operable type storage area 223r is 0) (S2710: No ), The process proceeds to S2706, and the process of S2706 to S2710 is repeated until the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to the character capable of executing the initial action is reached.

  Next, the details of the rotation setting process (S2609) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This rotation setting processing (S2609) is one of the execution command processing (see FIG. 155), and is executed to control the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 (and the rear surface LED 625) as described above.

  When this rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) is executed, it is first determined whether all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are L (S2801), and all the detection sensors If the output of A to F is in the state of L (S2801: Yes), the state where the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can not be specified (all non-detection parts 641c are arranged outside the detection range of the rotational position detection sensor 684) This process is ended because it means that the

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that one of the detection sensors A to F is in the H state (S2801: No), then the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F and By comparing the rotational position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121), the arrangement (pocket of the drop position) of the rotational member 640 that matches the combination of the current output is specified (S2802). Then, the rotational position storage area 223 u is updated from the specified arrangement (S 2803).

  When the process of S2803 is completed, it is then determined whether the ball drop enable flag 223fv is on (S2804). If it is off (S2804: No), it means that the condition for dropping the ball B is not satisfied. This process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2804 that the ball drop enable flag 223fv is on (S2804: Yes), based on the arrangement stored in the rotational position storage area 223u and the storage content of the hit position storage area 223k. Then, the type of pocket for five pockets (whether it is a hit pocket or a loose pocket) is read out from the pocket at the drop position (S2805). Then, the type of five pockets read out is compared with the type of pocket in which the ball B is dropped in the present roulette chance effect (S2806).

  When the process of S2806 is completed, it is next determined whether the comparison results in the process of S2806 are all unmatched (S2807), and when all are not matched (S2807: Yes), the ball B is dropped. The rotation speed of the rotation member 640 is set to a high speed (for example, 300 pps) since the pocket that can be placed is not placed in the fall position while rotating at least five pockets by the rotation operation (S2808). This makes it possible to shorten the time until the targeted pocket type is placed at the falling position, so that the ball B does not fall for a long time after the cycle of the rocking operation becomes short (one second or less). It is possible to prevent the rocking operation from continuing. Therefore, the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2807, it means that a pocket of the target type is disposed at the falling position before passing through five pockets by the rotation operation. Therefore, in this case, since the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance without changing the rotation speed, the processing of S2808 is skipped, and the present processing ends.

  Next, the details of the lighting setting process (S2610) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This lighting setting process (S2610) is one process in the execution command process (see FIG. 155), and as described above, is a process for controlling the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 of the rear surface LED 625.

  When this lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is executed, it is first determined whether the initial setting completion flag 223t is on (whether the lighting state of the lighting areas A1 to A18 has been set) (S2901), If it is off (S2901: No), it is then determined whether the output of the origin sensor (not shown) of the rear surface LED 625 is on (H) (S2902). That is, it is determined whether the LED bars 625a are arranged to coincide with the correction section RA (see FIG. 100A) (S2902). If it is determined in the process of S2902 that the output of the origin sensor is off (L) (S2902: No), it is not the timing to set the lighting state, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2902 that the output of the origin sensor is on (H) (S2902: Yes), a process for setting the lighting state for each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is performed . More specifically, first, the value of the step counter 223e corresponding to the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 is reset (S2903), and the rotation position determination table 222c is read (S2903). Next, based on the read rotational position determination table 222c and the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684, the current arrangement of the rotary member 640 is specified (S2905).

  When the process of S2905 is completed, next, the types of all the pockets arranged in the range from the pocket at the current drop position to the pocket five pockets before and the pocket twelve pockets ahead are read from the hit location storage area 223k (S2906 ). That is, the type of the pocket arranged on the front side of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is specified. Then, the lighting position storage area 223m (see FIG. 123) is updated according to the type of each pocket read out in the process of S2906. As described above, H is stored as data in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area disposed on the back side of the hit pocket, and the data is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area disposed on the back side of the removal pocket. As L is stored. Based on the data (lighting data) stored here, the LED of the lighting area corresponding to the storage area where H is stored is set to the lighting state of the lighting rate 100% (that is, lighting corresponding to the lighting rate 100%) The control command is output), and the LED of the lighting area corresponding to the storage area where L is stored is set to the light-off state of the lighting rate of 0%. When the process of S2907 ends, the value of the correction position counter 223s is initialized, and the initial setting completion flag 223t is set to ON (S2908), and this process ends.

  When it is determined in the process of S2901 that the initial setting completed flag 223t is on (S2901: Yes), the states of the lighting areas A1 to A18 are switched according to the progress of the rotation of the rotating member 640 (correction Execute the process for Specifically, first, the value of the step counter 223e corresponding to the rotation operation of the rotary member 640 is 864 (that is, the number of steps for 1⁄3 rotation from the home position) or 1728 (that is, 2/3 from the home position). It is determined whether or not the number of steps is equal to the number of rounds) (S2909). If it is determined in the process of S2909 that the value of the step counter 223e is neither 864 nor 1728 (S2909: No), this means that the LED bars 625b and 625c do not match the correction section RA, and then, It is determined whether the output of the origin sensor of the rear surface LED 625 is on (S2910).

  If it is determined in the process of S2910 that the output of the origin sensor of the rear surface LED 625 is off (S2910: No), neither the LED bar 625a nor the correction section RA matches (any of the LED bars 625a to 625c is also a correction section Means not matching RA). Therefore, in this case, since this is an arrangement in which the correction (switching) of the lighting state can not be performed, the present processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2910 that the output of the origin sensor of the rear surface LED 625 is on (S2910: Yes), the step counter 223e of the rotation operation is reset to 0, and the process proceeds to S2912. If it is determined in the process of S2909 that the value of the step counter 223e is 864 or 1728 (S2909: Yes), each process of S2910 and S2911 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2912.

  In the process of S2912, the value of the correction position counter 223s indicating the type of the LED bar for which the current lighting state is to be corrected (switched) is updated by 1 (S2912). Next, the rotational position determination table 222c is read (S2913), and based on the read rotational position determination table 222c and the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684, the current rotational member The arrangement of 640 is specified (S2914). Then, from the hit position storage area 223k, the type (whether it is a hit pocket or an out pocket) of each pocket arranged in the correction section RA is read (S2915), and the lighting position is stored according to the read pocket type. In the area 223m, the storage area corresponding to the LED bar indicated by the correction position counter 223s is updated (S2916), and this processing is ended.

  By performing this lighting setting process (see FIG. 158), the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 is corrected each time the rear surface LED makes a turn of 1/3 (that is, in units of one LED bar). Can. That is, each time the back surface LED makes a turn, information on the storage area corresponding to the LED bar disposed in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98), each pocket of the rotating member 640 generated by the rotation operation, and the lighting area The correction can be made in accordance with the deviation of the correspondence with A1 to A18. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in an appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (the appearance that the hit pocket is illuminated and the out pocket is darkened). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misidentifying the hit pocket and the off pocket.

  Next, the details of the state command processing (S2115) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This state command process (S2115) is one process of the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and is a process for executing various controls in accordance with the state command received from main controller 110.

  In this state command processing (see FIG. 159), first, based on the received state command, the probable change state flag 223n, the short time state flag 223o, the short time state counter 223p, and the hit middle state storage area 223q are updated (S3001) . Next, it is determined whether the current state command is a command output at the end of the big hit (S3002), and if it is not a command output at the end of the big hit (S3002: No), this processing ends. . Note that whether or not output at the end of the jackpot is determined, for example, by the storage value of the hit state storage area 223q. Specifically, when a status command is newly received with "04H" indicating the ending of the ending period stored in the hit status storage area 223q, the status command output at the end of the jackpot To determine. This is because the state is not changed during the jackpot ending period.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3002 that the status command received this time is the command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002: Yes), the value of the time saving status counter 223p after being updated based on the status command. Is determined if it is greater than 0 (S3003). That is, it was determined whether or not the number of times that the time saving was changed to one or seven "preparation modes" after the big hit, and it was determined that the mode was not shifted to the "preparation mode" (the time saving state counter 223p is 0). In the case (S3003: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S3003: Yes), the hit pocket distribution processing (S3004) for determining the placement of the hit pocket is executed. The details of the hit pocket distribution process (S3004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After setting (determining) the hit pocket by the hit pocket distribution process (S3003), the start of the increase effect (see FIGS. 93 (a) and (b)) is set (S3005) to indicate that the increase effect is being performed. In order to increase the effect, the flag 223cv is set to ON (S3006). Then, by resetting the effect timer 223bv, the timing of the effect period after the start of the "in-line mode suggestive effect" is started (S3007), and this processing is ended.

  Next, the details of the hit pocket distribution process (S3004) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 160. The hit pocket distribution process (S3004) is a process for determining the position of the hit pocket, as described above.

  When the hit pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) is started, first, five pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x are read out (S3101), and the read out pocket is used as a hit pocket in the hit position storage area 22k. The setting is made (S3102). That is, H is stored in the storage area corresponding to the read pocket.

  When the process of S3102 is completed, the value of the additional counter 223av is read (S3103), and it is determined whether the value of the read additional counter 223av is greater than 0 (S3104). If it is determined in the process of S3104 that the value of the superimposition counter 223av is 0 (S3104: No), there is no need to increase the hit pocket, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3104 that the read value of the added counter 223av is larger than 0 (is 1 or more) (S3104: Yes), the hit pocket is additionally set for the value of the added counter 223av ( The processing of S3105 to S3110 is executed to add the information. Specifically, first, the hit pocket (hit position) is read from the hit position storage area 223k (S3105), and it is determined whether or not there is a place where 5 or more hit pockets (hit position) are continuous. (S3106).

  In the process of S3106, when it is determined that there is a place where five or more consecutive hit pockets are present (S3106: Yes), except for ones before and after one place of the place where five or more consecutive hit positions exist among the out pockets. One additional position is selected from the out-of-pocket pocket (S3108), and the process proceeds to S3109. The reason for further restricting the addition of the hitting pocket before and after the five or more continuous points is that it may be difficult to naturally drop the ball B if the hitting is continued too much. That is, when it is detected that the period of the rocking motion of the ball B has become short at the timing when the hit pocket has come to a continuous location during execution of the roulette chance effect to notify the release, the hit pocket is continuous It is necessary to drop the ball B after passing through the part. Therefore, since the period of the rocking motion is short (the rocking motion is weakened) continues for a long time, there is a possibility that the player feels uncomfortable for the ball B not easily falling. Therefore, in the present control example, a limit is provided to the number of consecutive hit positions to prevent a state in which the ball B can not be dropped from continuing for a long time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3106 that there is no location where 5 or more consecutive hit pockets are present (S3106: No), one additional position is selected from all the outset pockets (S3107) ), The process proceeds to S3109. In the processing of S3109 executed after the processing of S3107 or S3108, the hit position storage area 223k is updated so that the selected added position becomes the hit position (S3109), and the value of the added counter 223av is decremented by 1 (S3110) The processing shifts to S3104 again. Then, thereafter, each process of S3104 to S3110 is repeatedly executed until the value of the additional counter 223av becomes 0, and when the value of the additional counter av becomes 0, the present process is ended.

  Next, the special figure 2 winning command process (S2117) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This special figure 2 prize command processing (S2117) is 1 processing in command decision processing (figure 150 reference), when the ball enters the 2nd ball entrance 640a during the increase production, hitting pocket Is a process for determining whether to increase.

  In this special figure 2 prize command processing (see Figure 161), first, it decides whether or not the increase production underway flag 223cv is on (S3201), if it is off (S3201: No), because it is not during the increase production, This processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that the increase effect in-progress flag 223cv is on (S3201: Yes), then data of the winning information storage area 223a is read out (S3202). Then, it is determined whether the number of hit pockets is the upper limit value 5 (S3203), and if it is the upper limit value (S3203: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that the number of hit pockets is less than the upper limit (S3203: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a hit ball in the winning information (S3204) If there is no per-retention ball (S3204: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot variation is in progress (S3205). And if there is no holding ball per hit and it is not even during the execution of jackpot variation (S3204: No, S3205: No), the percentage for which the addition is selected is 5% based on the low probability table. If it is determined (S3206), the process proceeds to S3208. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a big hit holding ball in the process of S3204 (S3204: Yes), and if it is determined that big hit fluctuation is being performed in the process of S3205 (S3205: Yes) Based on the 25% added high probability table, it is determined whether or not to perform the addition (S3207), and the process proceeds to S3208.

  In the process of S3208 executed after the process of S3206 or S3207, it is determined whether or not the addition is determined (S3208). If the addition is not determined (S3208: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3208, if the overlay is determined (S3208: Yes), the hit pocket (hit position) is read out from the hit position storage area 223k, and 5 or more hit pockets (hit position) continue. It is determined whether or not there is a place (S3209).

  In the process of S3209, when it is determined that there is a place where five or more consecutive hit pockets are present (S3209: Yes), except for one out of front and rear of the place where five or more consecutive hit positions exist among outlier pockets. One additional position is selected from the out-of-pocket pocket (S3211), and the process proceeds to S3212. The reason for further restricting the addition of the hitting pocket before and after the five or more continuous points is that it may be difficult to naturally drop the ball B if the hitting is continued too much. That is, when it is detected that the period of the rocking motion of the ball B has become short at the timing when the hit pocket has come to a continuous location during execution of the roulette chance effect to notify the release, the hit pocket is continuous It is necessary to drop the ball B after passing through the part. Therefore, since the period of the rocking motion is short (the rocking motion is weakened) continues for a long time, there is a possibility that the player feels uncomfortable for the ball B not easily falling. Therefore, in the present control example, a limit is provided to the number of consecutive hit positions to prevent a state in which the ball B can not be dropped from continuing for a long time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3209 that there is no location where 5 or more consecutive hit pockets are present (S3209: No), one additional position is selected from all the outset pockets (S3210) ), The process proceeds to S3212. In the process of S3212 executed after the process of S3210 or S3211, the hit position storage area 223k is updated so that the selected added position becomes the hit position (S3212), and notification of the added hit position (FIG. 93 (b) Set the reference) and end this processing.

  By executing this special view 2 prize command processing (refer to FIG. 161), during execution of the increase effect, it is drawn whether or not the hit pocket is increased each time the ball enters the second ball entrance 640a. If you win the lottery, you can increase your pocket. Therefore, during the execution of the increase effect, it is possible to positively aim at the second entrance 640 a to strike a ball, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the special figure 2 prize command processing of this first control example, the lottery probability of whether or not to increase the hit pocket is made to differ depending on whether or not the transition to the “continuously mode” is decided. However, the variation of the lottery probability may be further increased. For example, when the transition to the “continuous mode” is determined, and when it is undecided whether to shift to the “continuous mode” (when the number of start winnings in the time saving state is set, the short period of time) The probability (proportion) that the increase in the hit pocket is determined may be different between the case where it does not meet the condition and the case where it is decided not to shift to the “continuous mode”. Specifically, for example, when the shift to the “continuous mode” is determined at the time of the lottery, a relatively high probability (for example, 25% of the case of entering the second entry ball opening 640a If it is determined that the hit pocket (lucky number) is increased at a ratio of 1) and it is determined not to shift to the “continuous mode”, then a relatively high probability (for example, the second entry ball opening 640a It may be configured such that the hit pocket is increased at a rate of 5% when entering the ball. In addition, if it is undecided whether or not to shift to the “continuous mode”, the probability between the above two cases (for example, the ratio of 10% when entering the second entrance 640 a) The pocket may be configured to be increased. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give variation to how to increase the hit pocket, so the interest in the lucky number increase presentation is further improved, and further, for example, it is not decided whether or not to shift to the "continuously mode". In this case, the probability that the pocket is increased may be different according to the number of times set as the "preparation mode". That is, when the "preparation mode" in which the short time is once is set, the probability that the hit pocket is increased is low as compared with the case where the "shortcut mode" is set in seven times. You may More specifically, for example, the configuration may be such that the hit pocket (lucky number) is increased at a rate of 8% when the short time is once and 12% when the short time is seven. As a result, since it is possible to predict a short period of time from the degree of increase of the hit pocket (lucky number), it is possible to expect to shift to the “continuous mode” by increasing the hit pocket. In addition, it is possible to expect a short period of time of seven times which is advantageous for the player (there is a lot of chance to shift to the "continuous mode").

  Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the variable display setting process (S1615) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1615). This variation display setting process (S1615) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the main control device to execute the variation effect in the rendering unit 331 This is processing for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3301). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, off) (S3301: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S3306. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S3301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S3302), and then fluctuation is performed in S2202 of fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 151). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3303).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3304). In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command, the variation pattern of the display is displayed in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command so that the variation pattern of the symbol is displayed in the display of the variation effect. Control is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3305). In the process of S3305, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process moves to the process of S3306.

  In the process of S3306, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S3306). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S3306: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S3306: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S3307), and then in the process of S2105 of the command determination process (see FIG. 150) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3308).

  Next, display number selection processing for determining the display number displayed in the effect unit 331 is executed (S3309). The details of the display number selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S3309 is finished, a display stop type command for notifying the display control unit 114 of the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control unit 110 is generated, and the command is displayed control unit 114. The setting is made for transmission to (S3310), and this processing ends. In the display control device 114, when the display stop type command is received, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed by the effect unit 331, so that the variation effect is displayed. Stop indication is controlled.

  Next, the details of the display number selection process (S3409) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This display number selection process (S3409) is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162), and as described above, is a process for determining the display number displayed in the rendering unit 331.

  When this display number selection process (see FIG. 163) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the current time is a time saving state of a normal symbol (S3401). That is, it is determined whether the time saving state flag 223o is on or the value of the time saving state counter 223p is 1 or more. Then, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is in progress (S3401: Yes), the present processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3401, when it is determined that the time symbol is not a normal symbol (ie, it is the "normal mode") (S3401: No), then the lucky number (big hit symbol) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x ) Is read out (S3402), and then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S3403).

  In the process of S3403, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out (S3403: No), three different types are randomly selected from 30 types of numbers (numbers respectively attached to the pockets P1 to P30). (S3404). Then, it is determined whether all the selected three types of numbers are lucky numbers (big hit symbols) defined in the designated pocket storage area 223x (S3405), and at least one of the at least three types of numbers is a lucky number If it is determined that the out-of-order number is different (S3405: No), one of the remaining 27 types of numbers excluding the 3 types selected in the processing of S3404 is selected as the stop symbol (S3406). End the process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3405, when it is determined that all three types are lucky numbers (big hit symbols) (S3405: Yes), the remaining one type number (pattern) is the number of unselected unselected numbers. The process is randomly selected (S3407), and the process ends. The four types of numbers (designs) selected in the processing of S3404 to S3407 are set as stop symbols of detachment displayed on the effect unit 331.

  In S3403, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S3403: Yes), 4 types out of 5 types of lucky numbers (hit numbers) read from the designated pocket storage area 223x It chooses at random (S3408). Then, it is determined whether or not the present lottery result is a jackpot to which the "preparation mode" (normal symbol time reduction state) is given (S3409), and if the "preparation mode" is not given (S3409: No), In the short-time suggestion effect (see FIGS. 92 (a) and (b)), one number (informing symbol) displayed on the effect section 422a is selected from the outnumbers (S3410), and this processing ends Do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3409, when it is determined that the "preparation mode" is a jackpot to be given (S3409: Yes), in the time-shortening suggestion effect (see FIGS. 92 (a) and (b)) in the jackpot, One kind of numbers (informing symbols) displayed on the effect unit 422a is selected from among the lucky numbers (hit numbers) (S3411), and the process is ended.

  By this display number selection processing (see FIG. 163), it is possible to set five types of lucky numbers, which the player has selected in advance, as jackpot symbols. In addition, the lucky number selected by the player can also be set as a notification symbol of the "preparation mode".

  Next, details of the bonus game operation setting process (S1616) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The accessory function setting process (S1616) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 145), and as described above, is a process for setting the operation of each prize.

  When the bonus game action setting process (see FIG. 164) is started, first, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the wait period (S3501). This wait period may be set when the power is turned on, and as described above, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of power on is the ending period of the jackpot, the start of the origin return operation is delayed to It is set in order to reliably discharge the ball in the first passage forming member 520.

  When it is determined in the process of S3501 that the end timing of the weight period is reached (S3501: Yes), next, the origin return process for returning the character mutated from the origin position to the origin position is executed. Then (S3502), the process ends. In this origin return process (S3502), the same process as the origin return process (S1314) described with reference to FIG. 144 is performed, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3501 that it is not the end timing of the wait period (S3501: No), then it is determined whether it is the operation start timing of any one of the prizes (S3503). If it is not the operation start timing (S3503: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3502 that it is the operation start timing of the bonus (S3503: Yes), then "01H" is set to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the bonus to be operated (S3504) And the action content corresponding to the value “01H” of the action pointer 223g is read out of the action scenario table 222b from the table corresponding to the character whose action is to be started this time (S3505).

  When the process of S3505 ends, it is determined whether the operation of the pitching device 650 is read out next (S3506). If the operation of the pitching device 650 is read (S3506: Yes), the swing not detected flag 223v and the swing Each effect flag 223ev is set to ON to indicate that the ball B has been thrown (S3507), and the process proceeds to S3508. As described above, the throwing device 650 is set to operate 50 seconds after the roulette chance effect is started.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3506 that the read is not the operation of the pitching device 650 (S3506: No), the process of S3507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3508. In the process of S3508, an operation command is set based on the operation content read in the process of S3505, and the process ends.

Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, as a result, the control of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) in the display control device 114 is instantaneously The problem arises that it may not start.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the third symbol display device 81 etc. in the display control device 114 (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, And control of the effect part 422a) can be started immediately.

  As described above, when the main process is executed, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3601), and the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and The display control device 114 is activated so that various controls on the rendering unit 422a) can be performed.

  Here, the boot process (S3601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S3601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not provided with a dedicated program ROM and stored as in the conventional gaming machine, but the third symbol display device 81 etc. The character ROM 234 provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the (third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is slow particularly when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S3701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3701.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S3702, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S3702, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S3703). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S3704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S3601 in FIG. 165) ends. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S3602 in FIG. 165) (S3705), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is ended.

  As described above, when the boot process (S3601) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 166, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3701 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3701 is a boot program that executes the boot processing to be processed following the processing of S3702. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S3703 to S3705 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S3701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S3701. And after repeating the process of S3702 several times including the process of S3702, you may make it perform the process of S3703-S3705.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3703 to S3705 without performing the processes of S3701 and S3702. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image of a specific color is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). The image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so as to be displayed on the whole. Thereby, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) immediately after the power is turned on corresponds to the model of the pachinko machine It is set to be a different color. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of the color according to the model is the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a It can be simply and immediately judged whether or not the pachinko machine 10 can be started normally by checking whether or not it is displayed.

  Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 (S3603). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S3603, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S3604). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S3604, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S3605). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 176A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S5102 in FIG. 176A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (the main image at power-on or the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIG. 125 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)) A determination process (see S3908 in FIG. 167 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S3909 in FIG. 167 (b)) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 If the display variation pattern command has been received via the device 113, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and (c) is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, Simple change effects can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S3605, the interrupt permission is set (S3606), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S3606, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 167 (a), a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 167 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3801), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 167 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 167 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and After specifying an image to be displayed on the effect unit 422a), a drawing list (see FIG. 129) of the image is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. It instructs execution of drawing processing and display processing.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 167 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3901: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a), the command determination process (S3902) is executed, and then the display setting process (S3903) Run.

  In the command determination process (S3902), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172.

  In the display setting process (S3903), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3902) and the like, the third symbol display device 81 etc. (third symbol display device 81, effect part The contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specifically identified in 331 and the effect section 422a). Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 173 to 175.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S3904). In this task processing, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) specified by the display setting processing (S3903) or the simplified display setting processing (S3909) is displayed. Specify the type of sprite (display object) that composes the image based on the contents of the next frame of the image, and for each sprite, various items necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Determine the parameters.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S3905). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S3906). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S3904), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S3905) The drawing list shown in FIG. 129 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3907). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S3907, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop symbol counter, and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) are finally set the stop symbols after the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3901 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 125 on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S3908) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S3909) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172, details of the above-mentioned command determination processing (S3902) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 168, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4001), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S4001: No), The command determination processing ends and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4001: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S3903) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S4002). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S4003).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4004), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S4004: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S4005), the process returns to the process of S4001.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S4005) will be described with reference to FIG. 169 (a). FIG. 169 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S4101).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S4101, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When instructed by the 110, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) displays the change effect according to the set change display data table Since the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control unit 110 while the user is in the middle, another variation display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display The display of the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) is performed by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received. Since it is controlled, the player can feel comfortable with the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect It may continue watching a variation of the third symbol in 422a).

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4101 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102).

  Next, the data table determination flag is set to on (S4103). Thereafter, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4101, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4104) 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 4105), and both of the demonstration display flag 233 y and the final display flag 233 z are set to OFF (S 4106), and this processing ends.

  By performing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 169A), in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S4105 is updated and set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4101. At the same time as the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the variable display data table The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e by the processing, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is Character ROM 234 As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a Luo normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4104, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the stop symbol according to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) Control the setting of the stop display.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4004 that there is no display variation pattern command (S4004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4006), If there is a display type-of-stop command (S4006: Yes), the type-of-stop command processing is executed (S4007), and the process returns to the processing of S4001.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S4007) will be described with reference to FIG. 169 (b). FIG. 169 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S4201), and the stop type table and the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)) The variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) by comparing the value of the stop symbol counter updated each time the is executed The final stop design is set (S4202).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4202 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S4203), and the processing of this type-of-stop command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, etc.) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table. And offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S4202 is described as type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed in the effect section 422a). In the above-described task processing (S3904), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S4202 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S4203, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S4201, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S4202.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol is displayed even if it is actually "the special symbol is removed" (the third symbol The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is displayed on the display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), and the player is mistaken that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol". It may cause the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 to be reduced. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol is actually displayed if it is a "big hit of a special symbol") Even if the stop symbol completely dismounted is displayed on the display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a), the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of a special symbol".

  Referring back to FIG. 168, the description will be continued. In the process of S4006, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S4006: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S4008), and display If there is the opening command for the command (S4008: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S4009), and the process returns to the process of S4001.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. 170 (a). FIG. 170 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 4301). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4302), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S4303). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 4304). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S4305), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 168, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4008 that there is no display opening command (S4008: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S4010), and display is performed. If there is a command for the number of rounds (S4010: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S4011), and the process proceeds to S4001.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S4011) will be described with reference to FIG. 170 (b). FIG. 170 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S4401). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4402).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4404). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S4405), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4010 that there is no display round number command (S4010: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S4012), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S4012: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S4013), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S4013) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 4501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502).

  Next, the data table determination flag is set to on (S4503). Thereafter, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4501, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S4505). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S4506), the ending command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4012 that there is no display ending command (S4012: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4014), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S4014: Yes), a rear image change command process is executed (S4015), and the process returns to the process of S4001.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 172 (a), the details of the rear image change command processing (S4015) will be described. FIG. 172 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (refer to FIG. 177) that the rear surface image is changed in response to the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on. (S4601). Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags 233x provided for each of the back surface image types (back surface A to C), the back surface image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type is set to off (S4602), the back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set in the process of S4601 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in the process of S4602. Identify. Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is not resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In addition, in the task processing (S3904), when it is specified that either the back surface A or B is displayed by the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back surface image discrimination flag set in S4602 The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified from 233x, and the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4602, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4014 that there is no rear image change command (S4014: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4016). For example (S4016: Yes), an error command process is executed (S4017), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S4017) will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 172 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S4701). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4702), and the error command is The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4701, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4702, and the error type is handled. A process is performed so as to cause the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) to display a warning image to be displayed.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in S4702, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4016 that there is no error command (S4016: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S4018), and the process returns to the process of S4001.

  In the process of S4001 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4001: Yes ), The processing of S4002 to S4018 is executed again. Then, the processes of S4001 to S4018 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S4001 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S3908) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 125, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 169 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 169 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 169A) executed in this case, in the processing of S4101, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4102, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S3903) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 173, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S4801), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S4801: No), It is determined that the new command is not processed in the command determination process executed first, and the processes of S4802 to S4804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4805. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4801: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S4802). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S4803, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S4803). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4803: YES), warning image setting processing is executed (S4804).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for expanding image data to display a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) First, referring to the error determination flag, a warning image of an error corresponding to all the error determination flags set to ON is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. The warning image data to be displayed on the) is expanded (S4901).

  In task processing (S3904), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4901, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4902), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4804), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S4803 (S4803: No), the process proceeds to S4805.

  In S4805, pointer update processing is executed (S4805). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 5001). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S5001, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information Is determined (S5002). As a result, if it is the End information (S5002: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S5003), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S5003: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S5004), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S5005), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, and so the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a The demonstration effect can be displayed repeatedly in).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5003 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S5003: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S5003) S5006), end this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S5002, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S5002: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 173, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4806). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S4806 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as zoom ratio and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4807), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S4808). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4808: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4808: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to stop the variable display and stop the display, so it is confirmed whether the finalized display flag 233z is on or not. (S4809).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is on (S4809: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed on the display data table buffer 233d. (S4810), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4811). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4812), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4813). Then, after setting the decision display flag 233z indicating that the decision display effect is being performed in the on state (S4814), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. Then (S4815), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol according to the end of the effect) The drawing contents can be set so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 etc. can be easily obtained by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the finalized display data table (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit The effect to be displayed on 422a) can be changed to the fixed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4815 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) in the fluctuation effect to be performed next It is used to identify the third design to be done. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S3904), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S4815, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag 233z is off in the process of S4809 (S4809: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is on (S4816). Then, if the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S4816: No), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data The contents are set in the table buffer 233d (S4817), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4818). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4819). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4820), and the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that demonstration is being performed in the on state is set on (S4821), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. .

  As a result, after the finalized display effect is finished, the third symbol display device 81 etc. is automatically displayed when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect start or the opening command is not received. The drawing contents can be set such that the demonstration effect is displayed on the three-symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a.

  In the process of S4816, if the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S4816: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is performed as it is End and return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) until a new display change pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S3909) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 167B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display the image of (FIG. 125 (b) or (c)) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S3905) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 176 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5101). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5101: YES), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process Is executed (S5102) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 176 (b).

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S5101, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off (S5101: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S5103), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 176 (b), the resident image transfer setting process (S5102), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 176 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S5102).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S5201), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S5201: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S5202). In the process of S5202, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S5202 (S5202: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S5202: Yes), the process proceeds to S5203. Also, as a result of the process of S5201, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5203.

  In the process of S5203, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S5203), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S5203: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S5204), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the resident video RAM 235 is not used. To the designated address of the video RAM 235 for residence. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S5203, if all resident object image data has been transferred (S5203: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S5205), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S3908 in FIG. 167 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S3909 in FIG. 167 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 168 to 172) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 173 to 175) are performed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 etc. The third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) display a normal image. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 177) (see S5101: No in FIG. 176A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) display an image.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 177, a normal image transfer setting process (S5103) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S5103).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4805) of the display setting process (S3903) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S5301). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S5302), and if it is transfer data information (S5302: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S5303) Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S5304), and the process shifts to the processing of S5305.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S5302 (S5302: No), the process of S5303 and S5304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5305. In the process of S5305, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S5305), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S5305: Yes), it is further determined based on the transfer instruction whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S5306).

  In the process of S5306, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S5306 (S5306: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S5306: Yes), the process proceeds to S5307. Also, as a result of the process of S5305, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S5305: No), the process proceeds to S5307.

  In the process of S5307, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5307), and if the transfer start flag is on (S5307: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S5308), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S5303 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to S5313. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S5307: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag 233w is on (S5309).

  Then, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S5309: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, and therefore, the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S5310), and provided for each back image type. The image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the on state among the back image determination flag 233x is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S5311). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S5312), and the process proceeds to S5313.

  If it is determined in the process of S5309 that the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S5309: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  If the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so it should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no image data. Therefore, in the process of S5315, if the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S5313, it is determined whether transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5313). The determination in the process of S5313 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Then, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S5313 (S5313: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S5313 (S5313: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S5314). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S5314, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S5315), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S3906) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3904) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) From the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3905), the drawing list shown in FIG. 129 is generated (S5401). That is, in the processing of S5401, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S3904), for each sprite, the storage RAM type storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified. The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3905), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S 5402). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. And so on (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Thus, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). In addition, the image drawn from one frame buffer is displayed on the third symbol display 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) while the image drawn in the one frame buffer is expanded. The drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously and in parallel.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S5402, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S5403). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 167 (b)) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b earlier is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) New image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) New image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is configured to be provided with three types of modes: “normal mode”, “preparation mode”, and “continuous mode”. Then, in order to shift to the most advantageous "continuous mode", basically, it is necessary to shift from the "normal mode" to the "prepare mode". That is, it is necessary to shift to a short time state once or seven times for a short time. And, by becoming a definite change jackpot during the "preparation mode", it is possible to shift to the "continuous mode" which is most advantageous to the player.

  For this reason, it is possible to make the player strongly expect that the probability variation jackpot will be made within the range of the limited number of times (one or seven times) set as the “preparation mode”. Therefore, the interest to the game in the "preparation mode" can be improved.

  Further, in this control example, a plurality (five types) of identification information (lucky numbers) used to notify a player of an advantageous state is set. Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with display devices such as liquid crystal display devices are known. In this conventional game machine, a symbol variation display is performed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, whereby a winning game advantageous to the player is given. However, in this conventional game machine, only a combination of predetermined symbols is used for the notification of a hit, and different notification modes (for example, the notification of a probability change state, etc.) are performed. In general, it is configured to notify by a display effect etc. to fight against the enemy. That is, there is a problem that the content of the notification is difficult to understand because there is no uniformity in the notification mode. Further, in the notification mode when notifying an advantageous result for the player, it is general to execute a predetermined mode, and there is little room for the player to intervene.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the identification information (lucky number) for notifying an advantageous state plays a role of notifying a jackpot of a special symbol in the “normal mode” (see FIG. 91 (a)), The role for notifying whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode" after the jackpot (see FIG. 92 (b)) and whether to shift to the "continuous mode" from the "prepare mode" It doubles with a role. Since the lucky number is used for various notifications that are advantageous to the player, it is possible to easily make the player understand the result of each effect only by grasping the lucky number. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easier to understand. In addition, the notification of the jackpot of the special symbol in the "normal mode", the notification of the "preparation mode" performed in the jackpot, and the notification of the "series mode" performed in the "preparation mode" are all lucky A presentation aimed at acquiring a number is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if it were one effect for these three types of different notifications. Therefore, an effect with a sense of unity can be performed. Further, in this control example, the player can arbitrarily select (set) identification information (lucky number) for notifying a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, since the notification mode adapted to the taste of each player can be executed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

  Further, in the present control example, when a big hit is made in the "normal mode", an entertaining effect (time-short notice announcing effect) notifying whether to shift to the "preparation mode" more advantageous than the "normal mode" It is configured to run during. At this time, the short notice effect is executed each time it is detected that the ball has reached the second passage forming member 422 via the first passage forming member 520 provided on the downstream side of the first variable winning device 82a. . Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to strike the ball actively in an attempt to cause the ball to enter the first variable winning device 82a. Thus, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be enhanced.

  In addition, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected during the opening period of the big hit, and are configured to be released from the connection when the big hitting ends. Here, if the connection is immediately released at the end of the final round (two rounds) of the jackpot, if there is a ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 at the end of the final round, the ball There is a possibility that the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 may separate from each other before reaching the second passage forming member 422. That is, the ball flowing down the first passage forming member 520 may be ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 in an unexpected direction without entering the second passage forming member 422. . In this case, the injected ball may get into the substrate portion or the wiring portion and cause a failure such as a short circuit.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the first passage forming member 520 when the number of winning to the first variable winning device 82a and the number of discharges from the second passage forming member 422 match in the ending period of the big hit. And the second passage forming member 422 are released. As a result, it is possible to prevent (inhibition) that the connection is released during passage of the ball through the first passage forming member 520, so that the ball having entered the first variable winning device 82a is formed as the second passage. It can be made to flow down to the member 422 reliably. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) occurrence of a defect such as a short circuit of a wiring or a circuit due to the ball getting into the base portion and the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in this control example, as an entertaining effect for suggesting whether or not to shift to the most advantageous "continuous mode" for the player when entering the "prepare mode", "continuous mode suggest" It is comprised so that "a production | presentation" may be performed. In this "representative mode suggestive effect", transition to the "simply mode" based on which pocket of the plurality of pockets provided on the rotating member 640 configured to simulate a roulette falls. Report if you More specifically, a plurality of (30 types) of pockets are divided into a hit pocket and an out pocket, and when the ball B falls into the hit pocket, it indicates that the mode has been shifted to the "continuous mode". Therefore, since it is possible to pay attention to the type of the pocket in which the ball B falls, it is possible to improve the interest to the player's "send mode suggestion effect".

  A rear surface LED 625 is provided on the back side of the rotation member 640 to illuminate the pocket from the back side in order to make the touch pocket stand out (make it look shiny). The rear surface LED 625 is configured to rotate in the same direction at the same rotational speed as the rotating member 640. On the rear surface LED 625, a plurality of lighting regions (lighting regions A1 to A18) for illuminating a region equivalent to one pocket from the rear surface are arranged at equal intervals. On the other hand, there are 30 types of pockets provided in the rotation member 640, and by providing a plurality of sections in which the intervals between the pockets are different, the diameter of the rotation member 640 and the diameter of the back surface LED 625 are configured to be substantially the same. It is done. For this reason, since the rotating member 640 can perform only 18/30 rotation while the rear surface LED 625 makes a circle, each pocket provided on the rotating member 640 and each lighting area A1 to A18 according to the rotation amount of the rotating member 640 Correspondence with is deviated.

  Here, as a method of matching the correspondence between the lighting area and each pocket, it is conceivable to match the number of areas of each lighting area of the back surface LED with the number of pockets provided on the rotating member 640. When the number of regions is increased according to the number of pockets, the number of LEDs increases, which leads to an increase in cost and increases power consumption. In addition, since the size of the LED bar (LED substrate) is increased, there is a problem that the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 is wasted. Furthermore, in the case where each lighting area of the rear surface LED 625 has a configuration in which the intervals between the lighting areas are variable according to the rotation position (a configuration similar to that of the rotation member 640) in order to save space, the first section of the rotation member 640 It is necessary to provide a section in which the LED bar is in a folded state (that is, the intervals between the lighting regions are narrow) in correspondence to S1. Therefore, each LED bar needs to be configured to be switchable between the normal state (see FIG. 97) and the folded state according to the rotation. However, unlike the pocket, since the LED bar is provided with a circuit for lighting each LED, when folded, the circuit pattern printed on the substrate, wiring, etc. are disconnected, and the LED May not light up. On the other hand, when the number of pockets of the rotation member 640 is reduced to 18 so that the intervals between the pockets are always constant (the intervals when disposed in the second section in this control example) (on the back surface LED 625) In the case of a structure in which each provided lighting area A1 to A18 and each pocket are completely in one-to-one correspondence), there is a problem that variations in effects are reduced due to the reduction in the number of pockets.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, operation (lighting state) of one (that is, the back surface LED 625) of the members (the rotation member 640 and the back surface LED 625) performing the rotational operation each time the predetermined condition is satisfied The configuration is such that correction (switching) is performed in accordance with the other operation, every time the amount of rotation of the LED 625 reaches 1/3 turn). By this correction, of the pockets of the rotating member 640, the lighting area disposed on the back side of the contact pocket is controlled to always look like a glow. That is, each time the back surface LED makes a turn, it is configured to correct the information of the storage area corresponding to the LED bar disposed in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) in accordance with the displacement caused by the rotation operation. ing. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in an appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (the appearance that the hit pocket is illuminated and the out pocket is darkened). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misidentifying the hit pocket and the off pocket.

  Further, in this control example, in the “normal mode”, “addition effect” for making it possible to expect that the lottery result advantageous for the player is being held can be executed. Here, conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine which executes a specific effect (so-called hold notification effect) each time the holding ball increases. The on-hold notice effect is generally controlled to be easy to be executed when an advantageous lottery result (for example, a hit or the like) is on-hold. However, in this conventional type gaming machine, it merely indicates whether a favorable lottery result is held, and a holding ball other than the holding ball for which the holding advance presentation effect is performed (for example, the holding for which the holding advance is performed) I was not able to get a sense of expectation for the holding ball (which was held before the ball).

  On the other hand, in this control example, a plurality of advantageous states are provided, and the state is gradually shifted (ranked up) to a more advantageous state according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Then, the additional effect is more easily performed as the holding ball that shifts to a more advantageous state is reserved by the pre-reading. As a result, the player can be expected to shift to various advantageous states only by executing the additional effect. For example, since the percentage to be executed when the jackpot type for which the "preparation mode" is set is set after the jackpot is held is high, the jackpot effect usually becomes a jackpot (when the jackpot effect is not executed) You can play games with greater expectation than you can. This is because if the jackpot is achieved, the degree of expectation for transitioning to the "preparation mode" also increases. Also, if the player is expected to win a jackpot, the player can be made to recognize that the degree of expectation to shift to the "prepare mode" is higher than normal (when the additional effect is not executed). It can be strongly expected that the lucky number is displayed to the effect unit 422a during the jackpot game. Furthermore, at the time of execution of the additional effect, the case where the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "continuous mode" is suspended is compared with the case where the transition to the "continuous mode" is not determined. Since the execution ratio of the additional effect is configured to be high, if the player is notified of the "preparation mode" as expected by the player, the player is expected to shift to the "continuously mode" more than usual. It can be made to recognize. Therefore, the player can be more strongly expected to shift to the “continuous mode”. As described above, in the present control example, it is possible to expect the player to gradually shift to a plurality of advantageous states by executing the 1 addition effect. Therefore, since it is possible to have a sense of expectation for all the lottery corresponding to the holding ball held at the time when the additional effect is executed, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In this control example, when the ball B is dropped into the pocket of the rotating member 640, the ball B is swung on the holding piece 677, and then it is moved to the target type pocket (collision pocket or out pocket). It is configured to be dropped.

  Here, in the case where the ball B swings on the holding piece 677, in the case where the ball B is allowed to fall independently of the swing condition (period, amplitude, etc.) Despite the state where the cycle (amplitude) is large (the state in which the rocking motion of the ball B is likely to continue for a while), the ball B may fall or the cycle (amplitude) of the rocking motion is extremely small ( The ball B may continue to be held on the holding piece 677 regardless of the appearance that the ball B is likely to fall. That is, there is a risk that the motion of the ball B may look unnatural (falling in an operating condition unlikely to fall, never falling in an operating condition likely to fall, etc.). Also, measure the time elapsed since the start of the rocking motion, and consider a method of dropping the ball B when it has reached a time (amplitude) that would allow a natural appearance of a drop that can be dropped. However, since the swinging motion of the ball B can be influenced by various conditions such as the pitching time, the initial speed, and the method of assembling the holding piece 677, it has a cycle (amplitude) that can be dropped naturally. There is a possibility that individual differences may occur in the time to

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when the ball B is dropped, the period of the swinging operation is determined from the time interval when the ball B passes through the central portion of the holding piece 677, and the period of the swinging operation is sufficiently small. It is configured to drop the ball B after determining that it has become. Thereby, the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance without being influenced by the individual difference of the pachinko machine 10 and the conditions (angle and initial speed) at the time of throwing the ball B, and the like. That is, since the player can be made to pay attention to the movement of the ball B while the ball B is performing the rocking motion on the holding piece 677, the interest for the roulette chance effect of the player can be improved. it can.

  Further, in this control example, it is possible to specify the pocket disposed at the dropping position from the outputs of the detection sensors A to F each time any pocket is disposed at the dropping position. Here, if it is determined whether the ball B can be dropped to the pocket every time the pocket is placed to the drop position, the ball B drops after the pocket is placed at the drop position. In some cases, the ball B can not be dropped into the pocket at the dropping position (it falls into the next pocket). In addition to the time lag for the holding piece 677 to move from the projecting position to the retracted position, there is also a time lag for the ball B to fall from the top of the holding piece 677. It is because there is a possibility that the pocket of the drop position may be passed by rotation before reaching it.

  On the other hand, in this control example, when any pocket is placed at the drop position, the current arrangement of the rotary member 640 is specified from the pocket at the drop position, and the next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position. The type of the pocket placed at the drop position is specified, and it is determined whether it is possible to drop the ball B in the pocket. When it is determined that it is possible to drop the ball B to the pocket located at the drop position next to the pocket currently located at the drop position, the drop control of the ball B (immersion position of the holding piece 677 Operation control) is configured to be performed before the pocket is placed in the drop position. That is, when the ball B is dropped, the holding piece 677 is moved to the retracted position at a timing when it can be dropped sufficiently to the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the dropped position). It is configured to be immersive. By configuring in this way, the ball B can be more surely dropped into the target type pocket. Therefore, despite the fact that the ball B does not shift to the "connected mode", the ball B falls into the pocket and, conversely, the transition to the "connected mode" is determined, The ball B can be prevented (suppressed) from falling off and falling into the pocket.

  Also, in this control example, it is possible to execute a specific effect (i.e., "Running mode suggestive effect") over one or more (one or seven) time reductions set as the "preparation mode". It is configured. Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine capable of executing effects of the same system over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a variable display for the number of holding balls held at the start of presentation) , "Continuous notice production"). In such a conventional game machine, the player can be expected to have a sense of expectation over a plurality of fluctuations, depending on the number of times the same system of effects is executed, the contents of the effects, and the like. However, in such a conventional game machine, the number of times the effect is executed, the effect time, and the like depend on the holding balls, so when the holding balls do not exist or are small, sufficient effect time can not be secured. Was reduced.

  On the other hand, in this control example, it is possible to execute fixed-time rendering (that is, "Running mode suggestive rendering") regardless of whether or not variable display is being executed, and the number of holding balls, etc. There is. And, even if it becomes a big hit in the middle of the time reductions so that the "preparation mode" does not end during the fixed time production, even if all the lottery of special symbols for the time reductions are out, "the preparation mode The fluctuation pattern selection table 202 d is defined so that the total fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in “1. By configuring in this manner, the execution time of the "preparation mode suggestion effect" can be sufficiently secured, so that the effect effect can be enhanced. In addition, according to the progress status of the game at the time the ending effect is started in the "Renso mode suggestive effect" (such as the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display during execution, the remaining number of time reductions, etc.), the ending effect period It was configured to be variable. By configuring in this manner, the end timing of the "preparation mode suggestion effect" and the timing at which the "preparation mode" actually ends can be made to coincide with each other, so the player can more accurately grasp the gaming state It can be done. Also, in this control example, after the game is stopped in the "preparation mode suggestion effect", and after the "preparation mode suggestion effect" is informed that the game is out, the player resumes the game and becomes a definite change jackpot, and When the transition to “mode” is determined, a special effect (reproduction roulette chance effect effect) can be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the ending effect from being continued continuously for the duration of the game suspension period, so it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being bored. In addition, it is possible to appropriately notify the player whether or not the mode has been shifted to the "continuous mode".

  In this control example, the identification information (lucky number) is used for the notification of the jackpot, the notification of the "preparation mode", and the notification of the transition to the "continuous mode", but notification using the lucky number The advantageous state to be performed is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be used in which only a part of the above three advantageous states is notified using a lucky number, or in addition to the above three states, another advantageous state may be notified. Also, an advantageous state different from the above three states may be notified. As another advantageous state, for example, a lucky number may be used to notify whether it is a jackpot type in which many winning balls are easily obtained in the opening period of the jackpot. Also, for example, as an advantageous state, a lucky number may be used to notify whether the special symbol is in a definite variation state.

  In this control example, the rotating member 640 and the back surface LED 625 having different times required for one cycle operation (rotation operation for one rotation) are configured to rotate at the same rotation speed, and In the section where the player can visually recognize, each time the lighting state of each lighting area becomes a predetermined amount of rotation so that the correspondence between the pocket type and the lighting area arranged on the back side of each pocket becomes fixed ( Although the configuration is such that the correction is made each time the back surface LED 625 makes a 1/3 turn, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to apply to any configuration if it is a plurality of movable objects operating in different operation cycles. it can. For example, instead of the rear surface LED 625, a rotary body capable of rotating and operating in the same cycle as the rear surface LED 625 is provided on the rear side of the rotary member 640. May be provided. As the movable object of the rotating body, for example, a movable object that can be varied between an immersion position on the back side in the front view and a projection position on the front side in the front view may be provided. Then, each pocket is provided with a passage hole which can pass when the movable object is changed to the projecting position, and the pocket in which the movable object is projected to the front side through the passage hole is hit to the pocket It is good also as composition shown as. In this case, control is performed so that the correspondence between the movable object and the hit pocket that are changed to the projecting position in the section (for example, the first section S1 and FIG. 54) visible to the player becomes fixed. The movable object arranged in an arrangement which is difficult for the user to visually recognize (impossible) may be corrected in accordance with the pocket type of the pocket arranged to be visible to the section by the subsequent rotation operation. Thus, in the section where the player can visually recognize, the correspondence between the rotary member 640 and the rotary body can be made constant regardless of the operation amount of the rotary operation or the like.

  In this control example, every time a predetermined condition is satisfied for the operation (lighting state) of one (i.e., the rear surface LED 625) of the accessories (the rotating member 640 and the rear surface LED 625) performing the rotational operation with each other Correction is performed (switched) in accordance with the operation of the other in every 1/3 round)), but it is not limited to the rotation operation. In a plurality of features operating in a section visible to the player and in a section invisible (difficult) to the player, the operation of a part of the prize is performed on another section in the invisible (difficult) section The present idea is applicable as long as it is corrected according to the movement of the object. For example, in two types of bonus products that reciprocate a section that can be viewed by the player and a section that is difficult to view, the operation of the bonus item arranged in the difficult-to-view section is matched to the operation of the other features. The correction may be performed so that the correspondence between the two types of prizes in the section visible to the player matches.

  In this control example, in the rotating member 640 performing the rotation operation and the back surface LED 625, the lighting pocket that illuminates the per-contact pocket is made different according to the timing (the amount of rotation of the back surface LED 625), thereby always emitting light Although the configuration is to maintain the appearance, it is not necessarily limited to the rotating feature. The present concept may be applied to a display device capable of changing display content and a backlight which illuminates part or all of the display device from the back side. Specifically, for example, while displaying the image of the roulette rotating on the display device, the back pocket disposed on the back side of the display area where the image of the hit pocket is displayed It may be set to be brighter than the display area to be displayed. Then, the lighting position of the backlight may be dynamically switched in accordance with the operation of the image of the hit pocket. By configuring in this way, the hit pocket can always have a bright appearance, so it can be more easily recognized whether it is a hit pocket or not.

  In this control example, when one type of identification information (lucky number) of five types is displayed for each of the display portions 331a to 331d of the effect portion 331, a big hit is notified, and further, at the big hit, the effect portion 422a In contrast to this, when the remaining lucky numbers are displayed, the "preparation mode" is notified. However, the information used for the notification is not limited to the lucky numbers. For example, a plurality of conditions (so-called missions) for transitioning to an advantageous state may be notified to the player, and a jackpot may be notified when a part of the notified conditions is achieved. . In addition, by achieving a part or all of the remaining unachieved conditions during the jackpot, it may be configured to shift to the "ready mode". Furthermore, in the “preparation mode”, the transition to the “continuous mode” may be notified by achieving some or all of the unachieved conditions. In addition, as conditions for shifting to the advantageous state, for example, “generate an effect that a specific character appears”, “generate an effect that urges pressing of the frame button 22”, “hold” One or more balls can be stored. These conditions may be displayed in place of the lucky number, for example, in the third symbol display device 81. Further, when each condition is displayed, it may be displayed in an aspect (for example, a double line is drawn to the already achieved condition) that can easily recognize whether each condition is achieved. As described above, by achieving a plurality of conditions, the game is performed paying more attention to whether each condition is achieved or not by configuring to step up to a more advantageous state. It can be done. Thus, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. Note that some or all of the achieved conditions may be returned to the unachieved state under the specific conditions. The specific condition is, for example, when a special symbol is drawn a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) since the previous condition was achieved, or when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the previous condition was achieved It is. Further, the condition may be configured to be selectable by the player, or may be configured to be automatically selected (for example, at random when the power is turned on).

  In this control example, when the ball passes the sensor member 422c provided in the second passage forming member 422, the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a is discharged (the first passage forming member 520 It was determined that the Then, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected until the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 82a matches the number of discharges from the second passage forming member 422. The configuration is to maintain, but is not limited to. It is only necessary to prevent the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, for example, simply winning the ball It may be configured to limit the disconnection from being detected for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds). Note that 1.5 seconds is a value obtained by adding a margin to the time required for the ball to pass through the first passage forming member 520, and the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a has a margin. It is a time during which the second passage forming member 422 can be lowered and brought down. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect that the ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 is ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  In this control example, the lighting area on the back side of the hit pocket is set to the lighting state of 100% lighting rate, and the back side of the disengaging pocket is set to the lighting off state of 0% lighting rate. The lighting rate can be determined arbitrarily. For example, the lighting rate of the lighting area disposed on the back side of the loose pocket may be set to 10%. This makes it possible to make the numbers attached to the pockets more visible while keeping the appearance darker than the hit pockets. Also, for example, the lighting rate of the lighting area disposed on the back side of the hit pocket may be set to 80%. The power consumption of the LED can be reduced by reducing the lighting rate of the lighting area disposed on the back side of the hitting pocket.

  In the present control example, only two types of contact pockets and disengagement pockets are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the pocket type, there may be provided a pocket type which has either a possibility of winning or a possibility of falling (for example, an expected degree of hitting is 50%). As a result, even if the ball B falls due to the roulette chance effect, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the “continuous mode” if it falls into the pocket of the expected degree 50%, so the player has a sense of expectation. It can last longer.

  In this control example, only two types of lighting states, the lighting rate of 100% and the lighting state of 0%, are set as lighting states, but the present invention is not limited to this, and variations may be increased. For example, the lighting area disposed on the back side of a part of the pocket is set to the lighting rate 100%, the lighting frequency 320 Hz, and the lighting area disposed on the back side of the pocket different from the part of the pocket. May be lighted at a lighting rate of 80%. As a method of selecting a different lighting rate, for example, the back side of the hitting pocket where the both sides are dislocated pockets is lit at a lighting rate of 100%, and the location where the hitting pocket is continuous is a relatively dark lighting rate of 80%. It may be set. When the hit pocket is continuous, it looks brighter than in the case where both sides are off (lighting rate 0%), so even if the lighting rate is dropped to 80%, it can be made bright enough. This can reduce the power consumption of the LED without significantly changing the appearance. Further, for example, the lighting area disposed on the back side of each hit pocket may be turned on at a lighting rate of 50% and a frequency of 12 Hz, and the on period may be reversed between the closest hit pockets. By lowering the frequency to 12 Hz, it is possible to make the on period and the off period perceptible to the player, and reversing the on period (lighting phase) makes the respective pockets more noticeable.

  In the case where the lighting state of the lighting area on the back side of the hitting pocket has variations, the lighting control command may be output at different timings for each lighting state. As described above, in this control example, the lighting control command is output to the LED driver by the serial transfer method. Therefore, compared to the parallel transfer method, it takes time from the start of data (lighting control command) output to the end. More specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 234, in order to notify the LED driver of a command for notifying the lighting state of 1, a plurality of data such as lighting area data, lighting rate data, etc. Must be output in order (see FIG. 234). Also, in order to confirm whether each output data is received normally by the LED driver, every time 8 bits of data are output, a signal indicating that 8 bits of data have been received is received from the LED driver. It is configured to wait until. Therefore, after the lighting control command for notifying the setting of a part of the lighting area is output, the lighting control command for notifying the setting of the other lighting area is continuously output. It takes a longer time to finish outputting all the lighting control commands to the LED driver. For this reason, there is a possibility that it may become impossible to shift to another process for a relatively long time. On the other hand, the lighting control command may be output at different timings for each lighting state (for example, one lighting state for each loop of one main process (see FIG. 145)). With this configuration, the process of setting the lighting control command can be distributed to a loop of main processes (see FIG. 145) a plurality of times. Therefore, since one processing time for outputting a lighting control command can be shortened, other processing can be performed normally. Moreover, since the lighting control command generated per loop of the main processing can be reduced, the processing load at the time of generating the lighting control command can be reduced. In addition, as a method of distributing the setting timing of the lighting control command to the loop of the main processing of multiple times, for example, the lighting position storage area 223m of the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is updated and the corresponding lighting control command is set. In the process (see S2907 and S2916 in FIG. 158), a flag (lighting unset flag) indicating that only the lighting control command corresponding to the lighting state of 1 is output and another light state not yet set exists You may set it to on. Then, in the next loop of the main processing (see FIG. 145), or when the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is executed after the execution command is received, the lighting unset flag is in the on state. For example, the lighting control command corresponding to the lighting state of 1 that is not set may be output.

  In this control example, in the “in-line mode suggestive effect”, the lighting state of the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA is corrected so as to conform to the arrangement of the hitting pocket every time the back surface LED 625 makes a turn 1/3. However, it is not always necessary to make corrections in LED bar units. The correction section RA can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the player can not visually recognize (difficult). For example, the lighting areas arranged at symmetrical positions of the falling position may be corrected one by one, or the lighting states of nine lighting areas arranged in the upper half may be corrected each time the back surface LED 625 makes a half turn. It is good also as composition.

  In the present control example, in the “representative mode suggestive effect”, every time any LED bar is arranged in the correction section RA, the arrangement of the hit pockets is read out from the hit position storage area 223k and switched to the corresponding lighting state Although it had composition, it is not restricted to this. A data table (lighting control scenario) may be defined in advance in the ROM 222, which defines combinations of winning pockets and time-dependent changes in lighting state of each lighting area in each combination. That is, according to the combination of the hit pockets, the corresponding relationship between the lighting state of the lighting area disposed in the lower half visible to the player among the rear surface LEDs 625 and the pocket disposed in front of each lighting area is rotation. The time change of the lighting state may be defined in the ROM 222 so as to be unchanged regardless of the progress status of the operation. In this case, in order to make the arrangement of the rotary member 640 at the start of the lighting control the same as the arrangement of the lighting areas A1 to A18, the ending of the "recommended mode suggestive effect" or the "preparation mode" During the jackpot game before transitioning, the rotary member 640 and the rear surface LED 625 are operated to rotate until the predetermined specific arrangement (for example, the arrangement in which the pocket P1 is the fall position and the rear surface LED 625 is the origin position) You may Then, the lighting control scenario may define the time change of the lighting state from the predetermined specific arrangement as a starting point. By configuring in this way, it is sufficient to set the lighting state of each lighting area simply according to the lighting control scenario during execution of the “continuous mode suggestive effect”, and any LED bar is arranged to the correction section RA. Since it is possible to omit the determination processing of the lighting, the determination processing of the lighting state of each lighting area included in the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA, etc., the processing load of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. it can. Also, instead of defining the lighting control scenario in advance, the lighting control scenario is generated from the arrangement of the rotating member 640 and the arrangement of the rear surface LED 625 at the start of the “Running mode suggestive effect”, and stored in the RAM 223 It is good also as composition to keep. With this configuration, the lighting control scenario can be set regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 640 and the rear surface LED 625.

  In this control example, it is determined from the lottery result of the special symbol executed in the “preparation mode” whether or not the transition to the “continuous mode” is determined, and the pocket type (falling pocket or It was configured to identify the outset pocket). Then, after the cycle (amplitude) of the rocking motion of the ball B becomes 1 second or less, when the pocket type that can drop the ball B first is disposed at the drop position, the ball B is dropped to the pocket However, the pocket to be dropped is not limited to this. For example, in the case where the ball B is dropped to the out pocket (the transition to the "continuous mode" is not determined), the ball B is controlled to be dropped to the out pocket adjacent to the hit pocket. Good. Thereby, even in the case of detachment, it can be expected that the ball B falls into the pocket immediately before falling. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the player's roulette chance presentation. Similarly, in the case of dropping into the hit pocket, control may be performed to drop into the hit pocket adjacent to the loose pocket. This makes it difficult to determine which pocket type the ball B falls into, even when it is dropped to the hit pocket, so that the roulette chance effect can be enjoyed to the end.

  In this control example, when the game is stopped in the "preparation mode", etc., the rendering time for the "continuous mode suggestive rendering" is constant (fixed), and the time until the "preparation mode" ends In the case of a shift, the shift was able to be absorbed by varying the effect time of the ending effect of "Sanso mode suggestive effect", but the shift between the end timing of the "preparation mode" and the effect period has been eliminated The configuration for doing this is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that the player is not in the state where the player is not playing a game, the “play mode suggestive effect” may be interrupted until the game is resumed. That is, it is good also as composition which makes an execution period of "continuous relief mode suggestion production" match with change time of a special symbol. In this case, whether or not the game is stopped may be determined by, for example, whether or not the handle 51 is operated, or a predetermined time (for example, 10) after entering the second ball entry port 640a. It may be determined depending on whether or not the second has elapsed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the effect time of the “continuous mode suggestive effect” and the time until the “preparation mode” ends are shifted. In addition, the first special symbol after transitioning to "preparation mode" to match the time until "preparing mode" ends with the rendering time for "continuous mode suggestive effect" (to reduce the gap) It is also possible to make the start of the “continuous mode suggestive effect” wait until the fluctuation of is performed. By configuring in this way, even if the balls are shifted to the "preparation mode" with the number of holding balls being zero, the start timing of the "preparation mode suggestion effect" and the first drawing of the special symbol in the "preparation mode" Since it is possible to match the execution timing of the time to the end of the "preparation mode", it is possible to match (reduce the deviation) the presentation time of the "continuous mode suggestion effect".

  In this control example, when increasing the number of hits in the increase effect, the number of hits per pocket is limited to a predetermined number (five runs) or less, but limiting the number of hits is limited to the number of hits. It is not something that can be done. The number of consecutive out-of-pockets may be limited to a predetermined number (five consecutive) or less. That is, in the increase effect, the hit pocket may be arranged preferentially to the section in which the out-of-pocket is six or more consecutive. By configuring in this manner, when the ball B is dropped to the hit pocket in the "roulette chance effect", the drop (falling) occurs when the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined period (1 second). It can control that only a pocket passes out of position and passes. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the unnatural appearance such as the swinging motion of the ball B being stopped before the hit pocket is disposed to the drop position, so that the player is distrusted. Can be more reliably prevented.

  In this control example, one is added to the value of the additional counter 223av each time the additional effect is executed. That is, although it was set as the structure in which the per capita pocket is determined to be determined for one superimposing effect, the number of the impinging pocket to be superimposed in one superimposing effect is not limited to one, it is arbitrary It may be set to the number of Also, in consideration of the pending lottery results and the five types of hit pockets (lucky numbers) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x, the number of balls B to be dropped naturally is set. It is good also as composition. Specifically, for example, when performing the additional effect based on the fact that the lottery result corresponding to the probability variation jackpot in the "preparation mode" is suspended (when the ball B is dropped into the pocket), or Designated pocket, when performing the additional effect based on the jackpot that is given 7 preparation modes is held (if there is a possibility of falling ball B into the pocket by the subsequent lottery results) From the storage area 223x, the player previously reads out the hit pocket (lucky number) selected and determines the initial arrangement of the hit pocket and the out pocket. Then, the number of sections having six or more consecutive out pockets is determined, and a numerical value of at least the number of sections is added to the additional counter 223 av (the number of hits is increased by more than the determined number of sections). It may be Then, in the case of determining the position of the hit pocket that has been added in the "preparation mode", the hit pocket may be preferentially arranged to the section in which the out pockets are six consecutive or more. By configuring in this way, the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion of the ball B becomes equal to or less than the predetermined period (1 second), and when falling the ball B into the pocket, the dislodging pocket continues to the drop position. It can be prevented (suppressed) that the ball B can not be dropped due to being arranged. That is, after the condition for dropping the ball B is established, the swing operation of the ball B is performed until the pocket (hit pocket) of the type corresponding to the presentation result of the roulette chance presentation this time is disposed at the drop position. Can be prevented (suppressed), and the ball B can be surely dropped into a target pocket (collision pocket) while the ball B is performing a swing operation. Therefore, the ball B can be dropped with a more natural appearance. Also, for example, if it is determined to drop the ball B into the hitting pocket, if there is a possibility to drop the ball B into the hitting pocket, and if it is dropped to the falling pocket Depending on the case where it does, it is possible to make the number of additions which is selected differ. That is, when it is determined that the ball B is dropped to the hit pocket, it is determined that a larger number of additional pieces can be easily selected and the ball B is dropped to the out pocket. In this case, a small number may be selected to be easily selected. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as to whether or not to shift to the “continuous mode” to the player by the notified additional number.

  In this control example, when the ball B performs the swing operation at the upper portion of the holding piece 677, the amplitude of the swing operation is determined from the time interval at which passage of the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679. Is configured to allow the drop (the ball drop enable flag 223 fv is set to ON), but different control may be executed based on the detection result of the ball detection sensor 679. For example, the aspect of the music may be changed according to an interval at which passage of the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679. More specifically, for example, when the ball B is thrown from the throwing device 650, the sound (music) of the drum roll is set to flow, and the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion of the ball B decreases. The music may be controlled so that the tempo of the drum roll becomes faster. Thus, as the tempo of the music is faster, it can be felt that the falling timing of the ball B is approaching, so that the expectation of the player can be improved in accordance with the tempo of the music.

  In this control example, the arrangement of the LED bars matches the correction section RA regardless of the arrangement of each lighting area (whether or not the arrangement is at a position where the player can visually recognize) during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640. Although the change (switching) of the lighting state has not been performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lighting area arranged at a position where the player is difficult to visually recognize (for example, the correction section RA) may be set to the light-off state of the lighting rate of 0%. Then, when the arrangement of any of the LED bars matches the correction section RA, the new (correction) lighting state set for each lighting area constituting the LED bar is not reflected (immediately without reflecting ) A configuration in which the new lighting state stored is successively reflected on the lighting area which has been stored and which has exited the correction section RA (moving to the arrangement which may be viewed by the player) It is also good. By configuring in this manner, correction is performed while maintaining the correspondence between the type of pocket (hit pocket or out pocket) placed at the position where the player can visually recognize and the lighting area placed on the back side. It is possible to set all the lighting areas arranged in the section RA (a position where a player is difficult to visually recognize) to the extinguished state of the lighting rate of 0%. Thus, power consumption consumed by the rear surface LED 625 can be reduced while the rotating member 640 is rotating.

  In this control example, in the drop control process (see FIG. 147), when it is determined that the drop is made to the next pocket of the pocket currently disposed at the drop position, the rotating member 640 is irrelevant to the arrangement of the ball B. Although the holding piece 677 is inserted into the immersing position after the rotation operation of 100 steps (about 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the dropping position) according to the above, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the holding piece 677 may be inserted into the immersing position in consideration of the timing at which the ball B reaches the central portion of the holding piece 677 in the swing operation. More specifically, for example, even after the pocket to be dropped is specified, the period (amplitude) of the rocking operation is determined each time the ball B reaches the central portion of the holding piece 677, and the determination is made. The cycle of the rocking operation is configured to be able to be stored (updated) in the RAM 223. Then, at the stage when 100 steps are reached, the value of the oscillation timer 223 w (the elapsed time since the passage of the ball B was detected by the ball detection sensor 679 last time) is referred to, and the timer value is the latest stored in the RAM 223 If it is determined that the value is close to the period of the swing operation (for example, 90% or more of the period of the latest swing operation), control may be performed so as to immerse the holding piece 677 as it is. On the other hand, if the timer value is less than a predetermined ratio (for example, 90% of the latest oscillation operation cycle) with respect to the latest oscillation operation cycle, the holding piece is waited until the predetermined ratio is reached. Control may be made to immerse 677 into the immersive position. With this configuration, when the ball B rolls toward the outer side (left end or right end) of the holding piece 677, or in the vicinity of the end (left end or right end) of the holding piece 677 It is possible to prevent (suppress) the holding piece 677 from immersing into the immersing position when it is held. That is, when the holding piece 677 is sunk, the ball B can be reliably dropped in the direction of the drop position without advancing in the other direction. Therefore, since the time from the immersion of the holding piece 677 into the immersion position to the start of the falling of the ball B can be shortened, the ball B can be more surely dropped into the target pocket.

  In this control example, when the ball B performs a swing operation, it is determined that the ball B can be dropped to the pocket disposed at the drop position next to the pocket currently disposed at the drop position. In the case where the holding operation is performed for 100 steps, the holding piece 677 is immersed into the immersing position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Each time within a range (for example, after 100 steps to 120 steps) the ball B can be dropped into the pocket which is surely placed in the drop position next to the pocket currently disposed in the current drop position It may be configured to be dropped. More specifically, in the process of S1806 in the drop control process (see FIG. 147), a process of randomly selecting the number of steps in the range of 100 steps to 120 steps instead of setting the drop after 100 steps, A process of setting to immerse the holding piece 677 into the immersion position may be executed after the selected number of steps has elapsed. By this configuration, it is possible to vary the timing at which the ball B falls. Therefore, compared with the case where the ball B is dropped at the same timing every time, the ball B can be dropped with a more natural appearance (look as if the ball B is dropped by the action of gravity only).

  In this control example, when the type of the pocket disposed at the drop position next to the pocket currently disposed at the drop position is determined, and it is determined that the ball B can be dropped, the next drop occurs. Although the ball B is controlled to be dropped to the pocket placed in the position, it does not necessarily have to be dropped into the pocket placed next to the drop position. For example, each time a new pocket is placed in the dropping position, in addition to determining the type of the pocket placed in the dropping position next to the pocket, the type of the pocket currently placed in the dropping position is determined It is more than a configuration. Then, when it is determined that the pocket currently disposed at the dropping position and the pocket disposed next at the dropping position are both of the pocket type in which the ball B can be dropped, the ball is positioned at the dropping position. A drop control (immersion operation of the holding piece 677) may be set at a timing at which it may fall into the arranged pocket. More specifically, for example, the timing of the drop control may be randomly determined in the range of 5 steps to 120 steps. The range after 5 steps to 99 steps is the timing when the ball B may fall to the pocket currently disposed at the drop position, and after 100 steps to 120 steps, the drop position is next It is the timing when the ball B falls into the pocket placed in the. By configuring in this manner, the timing at which the ball B falls can be made more random, so it is difficult for the player to suspect that the ball B is intentionally dropped into the determined pocket. Can. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest to the roulette chance effect presentation of the player. Also, for example, the configuration may be such that the pocket type of the pocket to be disposed next to the drop position and the pocket type to be disposed next to the next drop position are discriminated. Then, when it is determined that the two types of pockets determined are both pockets in which the ball B can be dropped, drop control is performed at random within a range in which the two types of pockets can be dropped. Immersion) timing may be set. Further, the type of the pocket at the drop position, the type of the pocket to be disposed at the drop position next, and the type of the pocket to be disposed at the next drop position may be determined. Then, the pocket disposed at the next drop position is a type capable of dropping the ball B, and any pocket next to the pocket disposed at the next drop position is also a type capable of dropping the ball B In such a case, the timing for drop control of the ball B (incorporating the holding piece 677) may be set at random within a range in which the ball B can be dropped to any of the plurality of adjacent pockets that can drop it. Good. Also in this configuration, the ball B can be dropped with a more natural appearance as described above. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest to the roulette chance effect presentation of the player.

  In this control example, the type of the pocket disposed at the dropping position next to the pocket currently disposed at the dropping position is determined to determine whether the ball B can be dropped, but it is not always necessary to add a new pocket. It is not necessary to be configured to determine the type of the next pocket each time the is placed at the drop position. It is sufficient that the drop control of the ball B can be set before the pocket of the type capable of dropping the ball B is placed at the drop position, for example, one of the pockets capable of dropping the ball B It may be configured to be able to identify whether or not the pocket is located on the front side. That is, for each of the pockets P1 to P30, a flag may be provided in the RAM 223 to indicate whether the pocket is one pocket before the pocket to which the ball B is dropped. Then, at the stage where the type for dropping the ball B is determined in the roulette chance effect, the flag corresponding to the pocket placed one in front of the type of pocket that can drop the ball B is set to ON, and the other pockets Set the corresponding flag to off. Thereafter, after the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion of the ball B becomes equal to or less than the predetermined period (1 second), every time a new pocket is placed at the drop position, a flag corresponding to the pocket at the drop position It may be determined whether or not it is set to ON, and in the case of ON, drop control after 100 steps may be set, for example. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to determine the pocket type of the pocket to be placed next at the dropping position, and to determine whether it is possible to drop the ball B, and only determining whether the flag is on. It is possible to determine whether or not the ball B is dropped only by doing so, so that the processing load required to determine whether the ball B can be dropped can be reduced.

  In this control example, in the rotational position determination table 222c of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113, a pocket placed at the drop position when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F and the output thereof are combined. Defined the correspondence relationship with In addition, the order in which the pockets provided on the rotating member 640 are arranged is also defined. Then, the arrangement of the current rotating member 640 is specified from the pocket at the falling position specified from the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F and the order in which the pockets are arranged. The method for identifying the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, a combination of outputs of the detection sensors A to F and an arrangement of pockets starting from the falling position in the case of the combination may be defined in the rotational position determination table 222c. Then, a storage area may be provided in the RAM 223 to store the current sequence of pockets starting from the falling position. Then, each time a new pocket is placed at the drop position (that is, the output of any of the detection sensors is displaced to the state of H from the state in which all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are L) The arrangement of the current pocket starting from the drop position corresponding to the combination of the outputs of the above may be read out from the ROM 222 and stored in the RAM 223. In this manner, by configuring the RAM 223 to store the current arrangement of the pockets starting from the drop position, it is determined whether the ball B can be dropped or not. When specifying a pocket to be placed next to the pocket located at the dropping position in the control process (see FIG. 147), it is only necessary to read the pocket from a predetermined storage area of the RAM 223 (ie, dropping There is no need to perform the two-step process of specifying the position arrangement and specifying the next pocket of the falling position), and the process can be simplified. The same applies to the case of changing the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 of the rear surface LED 625, and it is sufficient to simply read the pocket from the determined storage area of the RAM 223 and determine the type of each read pocket. It can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 179 to 194, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. In the first control example described above, the ball B passes the center of the holding piece 677 (the front side of the ball detection sensor 679) when the ball B performs the swing operation on the holding piece 677 in the roulette chance effect The period (amplitude) of the rocking motion performed by the ball B is determined from the interval at which the ball B is moving. When the determined cycle is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle (that is, 1 second), the ball B is allowed to fall. As a result, the sphere B can be dropped into any pocket after the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion becomes sufficiently narrow. As a result, the ball B looks like naturally dropped as compared to dropping the ball B in a state in which the cycle of the rocking motion of the ball B is large, such as immediately after the ball B is thrown by the ball throwing device 650 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling unnaturalness with respect to the falling position of the ball B and to be suspicious of the roulette chance production result, and therefore it is possible to further enjoy the roulette chance production.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, in place of the holding piece 677 in the first control example, a holding piece 6770 that can be driven so as to be inclined in the left-right direction is provided. The inclination of the holding piece 6770 is made variable according to the arrangement of the ball B in the upper portion of the holding piece 6770. The inclination is configured such that as the ball B moves away from the center of the holding piece 6770 by the swinging operation, the inclination in the downward direction toward the center of the holding piece 6770 becomes larger. As a result, the inclination of the holding piece 6770 while the ball B is performing the rocking motion always causes the ball B to flow downward toward the center of the holding piece 6770. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from being ejected to the outside of the holding piece 6770 when the momentum of the rocking motion performed by the ball B is too strong. It can be held securely on top and dropped into any pocket.

  In the first control example described above, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 (pocket arranged at the falling position) by the combination of the outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F of the rotational position detection sensor 684 It was configured to identify. As a result, when performing lighting control of the rear surface LED 625, only the lighting region disposed on the back side of the pocket set to the hitting pocket can be accurately set to the lighting state according to the arrangement of the rotating member 640. The player was able to easily recognize the hit pocket from the appearance. In addition, also when dropping the ball B, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is determined, and the drawing result of the special symbol executed in the "preparation mode" (ie, whether or not to shift to the "continuous mode") It was configured to be able to fall into the appropriate type of pocket accordingly.

  In addition to this, in the second control example, detection of displacement of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F (output of at least one detection sensor becoming H) is followed by detection sensors over a plurality of operation steps. It is configured to monitor the outputs of A to F, and to determine the current arrangement of the rotary member 640 (pocket arranged at the falling position) based on the detection results of the plurality of operation steps. With such a configuration, the output of any detection sensor is displaced due to noise or the like, or the rattled portion of the rotating member 640 causes the detection target portion 641c provided in each pocket to move to the detection position. Even if the timing at which they are placed is shifted, the placement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately identified.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in configuration in that a holding piece 6770 is provided instead of the holding piece 677, and the voice lamp control device 113 The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. . The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the structure of the holding piece 6770 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b). As described above, the holding piece 6770 is provided instead of the holding piece 677 in the first control example, and temporarily causes the ball B to swing before the ball B is dropped into any pocket. Used for

  FIG. 179 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece projecting and retracting mechanism 6700. FIG. As shown in FIG. 179 (a), the holding piece advancing / retracting mechanism 6700 in this control example includes a holding piece 6770, a pivot portion 6740 connected to the back side of the holding piece 6770, and an inclination provided on the pivot portion. Gear 6730a, a retracting gear 6730b, a driving gear 6730c meshing with the tilting gear 6730a, a tilting motor 6750a for applying a driving force to the driving gear 6730c, and a meshing engagement with the projecting gear 6730b The drive gear 6730d is composed of a drive gear 6730d and a motor 6750b for projecting and retracting the drive gear 6730d. Note that the configuration (the shaft support 6740, the tilting gear 6730, etc.) provided behind the holding piece 6770 is provided on the back side of the front case 672 and can not be viewed by the player. It is configured to be

  Similar to the holding piece 677 in the first control example, the holding piece 6770 is configured to be capable of holding the ball B thrown from the throwing device 650 at the upper part thereof. The holding piece 6770 drives the advancing / retracting motor 6750b in the forward direction (clockwise direction) to drive the advancing / retracting gear 6730b meshed with the drive gear 6730d in a direction to push it back to the front view. As a result of being given, it changes from the holding position to the separated position. On the other hand, by driving the motor 6750b for emergence and retraction in the negative direction (counterclockwise direction), a driving force in the direction to pull out to the front side of the front view is given to the engagement gear 6730b meshed with the drive gear 6730d. As a result, it is variable from the separated position to the holding position.

  Further, the holding piece 6770 in this control example can be inclined by driving the inclination motor 6750a. Specifically, by driving the tilt motor 6750a in the positive direction (clockwise direction), the drive gear 6730c is also driven in the positive direction, and the tilt gear 6730a meshed with the drive gear 6730c rotates counterclockwise. It is driven. As a result, the rotational force of the tilting gear 6730a is transmitted to the holding piece 6770 via the pivot portion 6740, and the holding piece 6770 rotates counterclockwise. As a result, the holding piece 6770 inclines downward from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction.

  On the other hand, by driving the tilt motor 6750a in the negative direction (counterclockwise direction), the drive gear 6730c is also driven in the negative direction, and the tilt gear 6730a meshed with the drive gear 6730c is driven clockwise. . As a result, the rotational force of the tilting gear 6730a is transmitted to the holding piece 6770 via the pivot portion 6740, and the holding piece 6770 rotates clockwise. As a result, the holding piece 6770 inclines downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction.

  Next, referring to FIG. 179 (b), a state in which the holding piece 6770 is inclined will be described. FIG. 179 (b) is a front view in the case where the holding piece 6770 is inclined in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 179 (b), the holding piece 6770 can be tilted (rotated) to the left and right around the pivot portion 6740. When it is detected that the ball B has swung to the right, the holding piece 6770 is turned counterclockwise by the tilt motor 6750a to form a tilt downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction of the front view (See the solid line portion in FIG. 179 (b)). As a result, the momentum with which the ball B moves to the right in a front view by the rocking motion is offset by the inclination formed by the holding piece 6770. Thus, the ball B can be reliably prevented from being ejected (projected out) out of the range of the holding piece 6770. In the present control example, the inclination angle in the case of inclining the holding piece 6770 can be set in steps of one degree. In addition, the maximum value of the inclination angle is 6 degrees in the left-right direction. The 6 degrees is an angle at which the player can not perceive the inclination (it becomes difficult) even if the holding piece 6770 is inclined. By setting the tilt angle to an angle that can not be perceived by the player, it can be felt as if the ball B is performing a swinging motion naturally.

  In addition, when it is detected that the ball B swings to the left, the holding piece 6770 is rotated clockwise by the tilt motor 6750a, and tilts downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in front view (See dotted line in FIG. 179 (b)). As a result, the momentum with which the ball B moves in the left direction in a front view by the rocking motion is offset by the inclination formed by the holding piece 6770, so the ball B is ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770 ( Can be reliably prevented.

  As described above, the holding piece advancing and retracting mechanism 670 in the present control example is provided with two types of drive motors (tilt motor 6750a and advancing and retracting motor 6750b), and projects and retracts between the holding position and the separated position. In addition to the operation, it is configured to be capable of tilting operation in the left and right direction. Thereby, when the ball B swings at the upper portion of the holding piece 6770, the momentum of the rocking operation is too strong to prevent the ball B from being ejected outside the range of the holding piece 6770 (suppression )can do. Therefore, the ball B can be surely dropped into any pocket in the swing effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 180, a configuration for specifying the arrangement of the balls B that perform the swing operation on the holding piece 6770 will be described. FIG. 180 is a front view of the holding piece 6770. FIG. As shown in FIG. 180, on the back side of the ball B that performs the swing operation on the holding piece 6770, in place of the ball detection sensor 679 provided in the front case 672 in the first control example, a ball detection sensor 6790a ̃ 6790i is provided. These ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i respectively have the same function as the ball detection sensor 679 in the first control example, and it is detected that the ball B is disposed on the front side of the front view (passed) The output becomes H, and when the ball B does not block the front side, the output becomes L. These ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i are disposed inside the opening 6780 provided in the front case 672 in the second control example.

  Specifically, as the arrangement of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i, a ball detection sensor (oscillation center sensor) 6790e is provided above the center position of the holding piece 6770. In addition, when the holding piece 6770 is equally divided into eight sections (first to eighth sections) in the horizontal direction, a sphere detection sensor (first section sensor) 6790a to sphere detection above the center position of each section A sensor (fourth section sensor) 6790 d and a ball detection sensor (fifth section sensor) 6790 f to a ball detection sensor (eighth section sensor) 6790 i are provided. That is, the sphere detection sensors 6790a to 6790d and 6790f to 6790i are arranged at equal intervals in this order from the left direction in the front view to the right direction. In this control example, when the ball B performs a swing operation, the arrangement of the ball B in the upper part of the holding piece 6770 can be specified based on the output information of each sensor. For example, if the sphere detection sensor 6790g is on, it indicates that the sphere B is disposed in the sixth section (passing). Also, for example, if the sphere detection sensor 6790b is on, it means that the sphere B is disposed in the second section (passing).

  In this control example, it is determined in which section the ball B is disposed (passing) from the detection results of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i, and the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 is varied according to the section. It is composed of That is, as the position of the ball B moves away from the center of the holding piece 677, the inclination angle toward the center of the holding piece 6770 is increased, and the maximum inclination angle when the first section and the eighth section are reached That is, it is configured to be 6 degrees). As a result, since the force (gravity) in the direction of returning the ball B toward the center increases as the ball B moves away from the center of the holding piece 6770, the ball B is ejected outside the range of the holding piece 6770. Can be prevented. Therefore, the ball B can be surely dropped into any pocket in the swing effect.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 181 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG.

  The ROM 222 in this control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example in that an amplitude discrimination table 222 e and a swing angle discrimination table 222 f are provided. The other configuration is the same as that of the ROM 222 in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The amplitude discrimination table 222e includes the sphere B according to the outputs of the sphere detection sensor (first section sensor) 6790a to the sphere detection sensor (eighth section sensor) 6790i and the sphere detection sensor (oscillation center sensor) 6790e. Is a data table used to identify the amplitude of the swinging motion being performed. The amplitude determination table 222 e is referred to when the output of any of the sensors is switched from L to H during the swing operation of the ball B, and the amplitude of the swing operation of the ball B is determined. In this control example, it is determined whether or not the amplitude (period) of the swing operation of the ball B has become sufficiently short based on the amplitude specified using the amplitude determination table 222e, and the fall condition is established (ie, , Ball drop possible flag 223 fv is set to on). The amplitude referred to here is in units of the width of the section (see FIG. 180). That is, it is a value indicating how many minutes the ball B is swinging. For example, when the amplitude is "4", it indicates that the ball B performs the swing operation with an amplitude of four sections to the left and right from the center of the holding piece 6770. In this control example, the ball fall enable flag 223fv is set to ON when this amplitude is “1” (that is, one section to the left and right) (see S5511 in FIG. 187).

  Details of the amplitude determination table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 181 (b). As shown in FIG. 181 (b), in the amplitude discrimination table 222e, the type of the ball detection sensor in which it was detected that the output was H last time and the ball detection sensor in which the output this time was H was detected The amplitude of the rocking motion performed by the ball B is defined in association with the combination with the type of. More specifically, for the combination where the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the sensor for the first section 6790a, and the sensor type in which the H output is detected this time is the sensor for the second section 6790b, "Is defined. The combination of the sensor types reaches the first section when the ball B rolls in the left direction in the rocking operation, and reaches the second section when the ball B changes direction and rolls in the left direction. I mean what I did. Therefore, since the ball B performs the swing operation with an amplitude of four sections from the center of the holding piece 6770, "4" is set as the amplitude.

  Also, for the combination where the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the sensor for the second section 6790b, and the sensor type in which the H output is detected this time is the sensor for the third section 6790c, "3" is defined as the amplitude. ing. The combination of the sensor types is read out because the ball B rolls to the left in the rocking operation, reaches the second section, turns to the left, and rolls to the left. It is a case where it reached 3 sections. Therefore, since the ball B performs the swing operation with an amplitude of three sections from the center of the holding piece 6770, "3" is set as the amplitude. When the direction is changed in the first section and the second section and the third section are passed (when the amplitude is determined to be “4”), the amplitude is not overwritten. That is, in this control example, once the amplitude of the rocking motion is determined based on the amplitude discrimination table 222e, the amplitude is not overwritten until the ball B is detected by the rocking center sensor 6790e. . Thereby, the amplitude of the rocking motion performed by the ball B can be determined more accurately.

  Likewise, for combinations where the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the sensor for the third section 6790c, and the sensor type in which the H output is detected this time is the sensor type for the fourth section 6790d, the amplitude is "2" A combination of the sensor type in which the H output is detected last time is the sensor for the fourth section 6790d, the sensor type in which the H output is detected this time is the swing center sensor 6790e, and the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is For the combination of the fifth section sensor 6790f and the sensor type in which the H output is detected this time is the swing center sensor 6790e, "1" is defined as the amplitude. For the combination where the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the sixth section sensor 6790g, and the sensor type in which the H output is detected this time is the fifth section sensor 6790f, "2" is defined as the amplitude. For the combination where the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the sensor for the seventh section 6790h, and the sensor type in which the H output is detected this time is the sensor for the sixth section 6790g, "3" is defined as the amplitude, For the combination where the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the sensor for the eighth section 6790i and the sensor type in which the H output is detected this time is the sensor for the seventh section 6790h, “4” is defined as the amplitude .

  As described above, in the present control example, the amplitudes can be determined according to the order in which the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i are in the H output state. Thus, the amplitude of the ball B can be accurately determined, so that the ball B can be dropped to any pocket at a more natural timing (after the amplitude of the rocking motion becomes "1"). Can.

  Referring back to FIG. 181 (a), the description will be continued. The swing angle determination table 222 f is a data table used to set an inclination angle set for the holding piece 6770 based on the arrangement of the balls B on the holding piece 6770. The details of the swing angle determination table 222f will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram showing defined contents of the swing angle determination table 222f. As shown in FIG. 182, the rocking angle determination table 222f is referred to when the output of one of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i is in the H state, and the amplitude of the rocking operation and the current H are detected. An inclination angle (swing angle) to be set with respect to the holding piece 6770 is defined in association with the type of sensor (the present type).

  More specifically, 6 degrees is specified as an inclination angle (swinging angle) set to the holding piece 6770 with respect to the combination of the amplitude "4" and the type this time for the first section sensor 6790a. For this reason, when the ball B performs the swing operation with the amplitude for four sections, the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 is 6 degrees which is the upper limit value when detected by the first section sensor 6790a. It is set. As a result, the holding piece 6770 is inclined 6 degrees downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in front view, so the momentum of the rocking motion performed by the ball B is offset and the direction is changed in the first section. Can be rolled towards the center of the

  Similarly, 4 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle) for the combination that the amplitude is "4" and the type is the second section sensor 6790b, the amplitude is "4", and the type is the third section. For the combination of the sensor 6790c, 2 degrees is defined as the tilt angle (swing angle), and for the combination of the amplitude of "4" and the present type of the sixth section sensor 6790g, the tilt angle (swing angle)- Two degrees are prescribed. Also, for the combination that the amplitude is "4" and the type is the seventh section sensor 6790h, -4 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle), the amplitude is "4", and the type is the eighth section. For the combination of the sensor 6790i, -6 degrees is defined as the tilt angle (swing angle). In addition, a negative angle means the angle which makes the holding piece 6770 incline from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in a front view.

  In addition, for the combination that the amplitude is "3" and the type is the second section sensor 6790b, 5 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle), the amplitude is "3" and the type is the third section sensor For the combination of 6790c, an inclination angle (oscillation angle) of 3 degrees is defined, and for the combination of the amplitude "3" and the present type of the sixth section sensor 6790g, the inclination angle (oscillation angle) is -3. The degree is defined, and for the combination of the amplitude “4” and the type this time for the seventh section sensor 6790 h, −5 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle).

  Furthermore, 4 degrees is specified as an inclination angle (swing angle) with respect to the combination that the amplitude is “2” and the type is the third section sensor 6790c, and the amplitude is “2” and the type is the sixth section sensor For the combination of 6790 g, -4 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle).

  Thus, the ball B is ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770 by changing the inclination angle (swing angle) according to the arrangement of the ball B and the amplitude of the rocking motion of the ball B. Can be suppressed. The reason why the inclination angle is increased as the amplitude of the rocking operation decreases is to prevent (suppress) the possibility of stopping immediately when the amplitude decreases. If the amplitude decreases and it is determined that the condition for dropping the ball B is satisfied and the period until the rocking motion of the ball B stops is short immediately, the pocket where the ball B can be dropped is the dropping position The rocking motion of the ball B may be stopped before being placed in the case, and the player may feel distrust. On the other hand, in the present control example, since the inclination angle (swing angle) becomes larger as the amplitude is smaller, the swing operation can be continued longer. Therefore, while the rocking operation is being performed (before the rocking operation is stopped), the ball B can be reliably dropped into the aimed pocket.

  In this control example, the type of sensor that detected the ball B for each amplitude and the swing angle were defined, but regardless of the swing motion amplitude, only the sensor type and the tilt angle (swing angle) May be defined. Specifically, for example, the correspondence in the case of the amplitude “4” in the present control example may be applied regardless of the amplitude of the swing operation. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data of the swing angle determination table 222f while preventing the ball B from being ejected outside the range of the holding piece 6770.

  In the present control example, the upper limit value of the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 is set to 6 degrees, but the player may arbitrarily set the inclination of the holding piece 6770 in a range where it becomes difficult to perceive. Further, the correspondence relationship between the sensor type and the swing angle can also be determined arbitrarily within the range in which the ball B does not eject outside the range of the holding piece 6770.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 183, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example described above, the RAM 223 in this control example is in the process of specifying the amplitude counter 223 iv, the previous type storage area 223 jv, the current type storage area 223 kv A flag 223 mv, an arrangement specified flag 223 nv, a detection value storage area 223 ov, and an amplitude determination flag 223 pv are provided.

  The amplitude counter 223iv is a counter that indicates the amplitude of the swing operation, and stores the amplitude (one of values 1 to 4) read from the amplitude determination table 222e. The amplitude counter 223iv is overwritten on the read out amplitude each time a different amplitude is read out in the amplitude determination processing (see FIG. 187) (S5509 in FIG. 187). On the other hand, when it is determined that the amplitude of the rocking motion has become 1, the value is initialized to 0 after the ball drop enable flag 223fv is set to ON (see S5512 in FIG. 187). The amplitude counter 223iv determines whether the falling condition of the ball B is satisfied or not, and the inclination angle (swinging angle) of the holding piece 6770.

  The previous type storage area 223 jv and the current type storage area 223 kv are storage areas for storing information indicating the type of sensor (one of the ball detection sensors 6790 a to 6790 i). The previous type storage area 223jv stores the type (previous type) of the sensor at which passage of the ball B was detected last time, and the current type storage area 223kv is the type of the sensor at which passage of the ball B is detected this time Type is stored. The amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the ball B is determined based on the sensor type stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv. This time, the type storage area 223kv is the sensor of the H output state when it is detected that one of the sensors is in the H output state in the swing effect processing 2 (see FIG. 185). The type is stored (see S1722 and S1727 in FIG. 185). The sensor type stored in the current type storage area 223kv is transferred to the type storage area 223jv last time until a sensor whose output is newly set to H is detected (see S1726 in FIG. 185).

  The in-place identification flag 223 mv is a flag indicating whether the placement of the rotating member 640 is being identified. If this arrangement specifying flag 223mv is on, this means that the arrangement of the rotary member 640 is being specified, and if it is off, this means that the arrangement of the rotary member 640 is not being specified. The arrangement specifying flag 223 mv is set to ON when the output of any of the sensors from the state of output of the rotational position detection sensor 684 becomes H from the state of all L (see S 5903 in FIG. 193). On the other hand, when the specification of the rotational position of the rotary member 640 is completed from the detection results of a plurality of steps, the process is set to OFF (see S5809 in FIG. 192 and S6009 in FIG. 194).

  The arrangement specifying flag 223 nv is a flag indicating whether the specification of the arrangement of the rotary member 640 is completed. If the arrangement specifying flag 223 nv is on, it indicates that the specification of the current arrangement of the rotary member 640 is completed, and if it is off, it means that the specification of the rotary member 640 is not completed. This layout specification completed flag 223nv is set to ON when the specification of the rotational position of the rotary member 640 is completed from the detection results of the rotational position detection sensor 684 across multiple steps (see S5809 in FIG. 192 and S6009 in FIG. 194). ). On the other hand, when it is detected that all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 have been switched to L after the specification of the arrangement of the rotation member 640 is completed (OFF) ( See S5906 in FIG. 193).

  The detection value storage area 223 ov is a storage area capable of storing detection values of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 for a plurality of steps (15 steps). When the above-described arrangement specifying flag 223mj is set to ON, the detection values of the detection sensors A to F are stored in the detection value storage area 223ov every time the rotating member 640 performs one step rotation operation. Then, when the detected values for 15 steps are stored, if the stored values are normal, the rotational position member 640 is identified based on the stored values (S5807 in FIG. 192, FIG. 194 See S6007).

  The amplitude determination flag 223 pv is a flag indicating whether or not the amplitude is determined based on the amplitude determination table 222 e when the ball B performs the swing operation on the upper portion of the holding piece 6770. If this amplitude determination flag 223pv is on, it means that the amplitude has been determined (the ball B is rolling toward the center of the movable piece 6770), and if it is off, the determination of the amplitude is completed. It does not mean that the ball B is rolling away from the center of the movable piece 6770. The amplitude determination flag 223pv is set to ON when the amplitude is determined from the detection result of the ball detection sensor when the ball B is performing the swing operation (see S5506 in FIG. 187). On the other hand, whenever passage of the ball B is detected by the rocking center sensor 6790e, it is set to off.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Second Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 184, main processing 2 (see FIG. 184) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. The main process 2 (see FIG. 184) is a process that is executed instead of the main process (see FIG. 145) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

  Of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 184) in the second control example, in each of the processing of S1601 to S1610 and S1612 to S1621, S1601 to S1610 and S1612 of the main processing (see FIG. 145) in the first control example. The same processing as each processing of ̃S1621 is executed. Further, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 184) in the second control example, when the process of S1610 ends, the swing effect process 2 (S1631) is executed instead of the swing effect process (S1611) in the first control example Be done. In the swing effect processing 2 (S1631), the ball B throws the ball pitching device 650 in the case where "the continuous play mode suggestion effect" is being executed, as in the swing effect processing (see FIG. 146) in the first control example. Is a process for executing various controls (during a swing effect) until the ball B is thrown into any pocket after being thrown. The details of the swing effect processing 2 (S1631) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in main processing 2 (see FIG. 184) in the present control example, rotation setting processing 2 (S1632) and lighting setting processing 2 (S1633) are executed after the effect setting processing (S1613) ends, and processing is performed in S1614. Migrate to Rotation setting processing 2 (S1632) is performed while the rotation member 640 is rotating, similarly to the rotation setting processing (see FIG. 155) which has been executed in the execution command processing (see FIG. 155) in the first control example. This is a process for changing the rotational speed of the rotating member 640 under the conditions. The lighting setting process 2 (S1633) is a process for performing lighting control of the rear surface LED 625, as in the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) in the first control example.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 185, the above-described swing effect process 2 (S1631) will be described. In the processes of S1701, S1702, S1704, and S1705 of the swing production process 2 (S1631) in the second control example, the processes of S1701, S1702, S1702, S1702, The same process as each process of S1704 and S1705 is performed.

  Further, in the swing effect process 2 (see FIG. 185) in the second control example, when it is determined that the swing not-detected flag 223v is on in the process of S1701 (S1701: Yes), the ball detection sensor 6890a It is determined whether or not all the outputs of ~ 6890i (see FIG. 180) are in the L state (S1721), and if it is determined that all are L (S1721: Yes), the ball B is thrown, but the holding piece 6770 Since this means that the event has not been reached, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1721 that the output of any of the ball detection sensors 6890a to 6890i is in the H state (S1721: No), then the type of the detection sensor whose output is in the H state is The corresponding information is stored in the current type storage area 223kv (S1722). Next, the maximum value of 4 is stored in the amplitude counter 223iv, and the amplitude determination flag 223pv is set to ON (S1723). This is because, immediately after the ball B is thrown, the amplitude is supposed to be maximum since the momentum of the ball B is the strongest. After the process of S1723, the process proceeds to S1704.

  Further, in the swing effect process 2 (see FIG. 185) in the present control example, when it is determined that the ball drop enable flag 223 fv is on in the process of S1705 (S1705: Yes), the drop control in the first control example In place of the process (see FIG. 147), the drop control process 2 is executed (S1724), and the process ends. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 186, in the drop control process 2 (S1724), the ball B is attached to any pocket as in the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example. It is processing to make it fall.

  In the swing effect processing 2 (see FIG. 185) in the present control example, the ball detection sensor 6790a to 6790i (S1705: No) determines that the ball fall enable flag 223fv is off in the processing of S1705 (S1705). It is determined whether all the outputs (see FIG. 180) are in the L state (S1725), and if all the outputs are L (S1725: Yes), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1725 that the output of any of the sensors is in the H state (S1725: No), the information stored in the type storage area 223kv this time is transferred to the previous type storage area 223jv (S1726), overwrites the information according to the type of the sensor that has detected the state of H in the process of S1725 in the current type storage area 223kv (S1727). Thereby, the type of the sensor that detected the output of H this time is stored in the type storage area 223kv this time, and the type of the sensor that detected the output of H in the previous processing of S1722 or S1727 is stored in the previous type storage area 223jv Can be

  After the process of S1727, the amplitude for the swing operation performed by the sphere B is determined based on the stored contents of the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv updated in the processes of S1726 and S1727. Amplitude discrimination processing is performed (S1728). The details of the amplitude determination process (S1728) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the amplitude determination process (S1728) is completed, a swing angle control process is performed to set the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 in accordance with the arrangement of the ball B (S1729), and this process ends. . The swing angle control process (S1729) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the details of the above-described drop control process 2 (S1724) will be described. As described above, the drop control process 2 (S1724) is a process that is executed instead of the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example in order to drop the ball B to any pocket. is there.

  Of the drop control process 2 (see FIG. 186) in the second control example, the processes of S1803 to S1806 are the same as the processes of S1803 to S1806 of the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example. Processing is performed. Further, when the drop control process 2 (see FIG. 186) in the present control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not the arrangement specification completed flag 223nv is on (S1811). As described above, the arrangement specifying flag 223nv is a flag indicating whether the specification of the arrangement of the rotary member 640 is completed. If it is determined that the arrangement specifying flag 223nv is not on (ie, off) (S1811: No), the current arrangement of the rotary member 640 is unknown, and it is possible to drop the ball B? Since this means that the determination as to whether it is not possible can not be made, the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1811 that the arrangement specifying flag 223nv is on (S1811: Yes), then the pocket of the falling position is read out from the rotational position storage area 223u, and the arrangement of the current rotating member 640 is performed. Are identified (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1803.

  In the same manner as in the first control example, the ball B is dropped into the pocket of an appropriate type according to whether or not the transition to the “continuous mode” is determined by the drop control process 2 (see FIG. 186). Can. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the player whether or not to shift to the "continuous mode".

  Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the details of the amplitude determination process (S1728) will be described. The amplitude determination process (S1728) is a process in the swing effect process (see FIG. 185), and is a process for determining the amplitude of the swing operation performed by the ball B as described above. In this amplitude determination process (see FIG. 187), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rocking center sensor (ball detection sensor) 6790e is in the H state (S5501). (S5501: Yes), since it means that the ball B has reached the upper center of the holding piece 6770 by the swing operation, the amplitude determination flag 223pv is set to ON (S5502), and this processing is ended. Thus, when the ball B passes through the upper center of the holding piece 6770 and rolls to the opposite side, the amplitude can be determined. Therefore, each time the ball B rolls (swings) to the upper right side or the left side of the holding piece 6770, the amplitude of the rocking operation can be determined, so that the amplitude can be determined more accurately.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5501 that the output of the rocking center sensor (ball detection sensor) 6790e is not H (that is, the output is L) (S5501: No), then the amplitude determination flag 223pv is turned on. It is determined whether it is (S5503). If the amplitude determination flag 223pv is on (S5503: Yes), it means that the amplitude of the rocking operation has already been determined, and means that it is in the process of rolling toward the center of the holding piece 6770. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5503 that the amplitude determination flag 223pv is off (S5503: No), the amplitude determination table 222e (see FIG. 181 (b)) is read out to determine the amplitude (S5504). ).

  Then, the sensor type stored in the previous type storing area 223jv and the sensor type stored in the current type storing area 223kv is compared with the specified content of the read amplitude determining table 222e, and the sensor type is defined in the amplitude determining table 222e It is determined whether it is (S5505). If it is determined in the process of S5505 that a combination not specified in the amplitude determination table 222e is stored (S5505: No), it is determined that the ball B has not reached the left end or the right end of the swing operation. This means that the amplitude can not be determined from the combination of the current sensor types (the combination of the previous type storage area 223jv and the sensor type stored in the current type storage area 223kv), so this process is ended and the oscillation is performed. The process returns to effect processing 2 (see FIG. 185).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5505 that the combination of the sensor type stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv is defined in the amplitude determination table 222e (S5505: Yes), the amplitude is determined The flag 223pv is set to ON (S5506), and the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is read (S5507). Next, it is determined whether or not the read value of the amplitude counter 223iv matches the amplitude corresponding to the combination of sensors specified in the amplitude determination table 222e (S5508).

  If it is determined in the process of S5508 that the amplitudes match (S5508: Yes), this means that the amplitude of the rocking operation has not changed, so the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is not updated, and as it is. This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5508 that the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is different from the amplitude corresponding to the combination of sensors defined in the amplitude determination table 222e (S5508: No), from the amplitude determination table 222e The read amplitude value is updated by overwriting the amplitude counter 223iv (S5509), and it is determined whether the value of the amplitude counter 223iv after update is 1 (S5510). If the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is 1 (S5510), the amplitude of the rocking motion performed by the ball B is sufficiently reduced (the condition for causing the ball B to fall into any pocket is satisfied). This means that the ball fall enable flag 223fv is set to ON (S5511), the amplitude counter 223iv is initialized to 0, and the amplitude determination flag 223pv is set to OFF (S5512), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5510 that the value of the updated amplitude counter 223iv is not 1 (S5510: No), the amplitude of the rocking motion performed by the ball B is relatively large, and the ball B is dropped. Because there is a risk that the image looks unnatural, the process ends.

  By performing this amplitude determination process (see FIG. 187), the amplitude of the swinging motion can be accurately determined based on the outputs of the plurality of ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i provided in the front case 661. Therefore, since the ball B can be dropped after the amplitude of the rocking motion performed by the ball B is sufficiently reduced, the ball B can be dropped from the holding piece 6770 in a natural appearance.

  Next, details of the swing angle control process (S1729) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The swing angle control process (S1729) is one process of the swing effect process (see FIG. 185), and as described above, the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 according to the arrangement of the ball B. Is a process for setting.

  When the swing angle control process (see FIG. 188) is executed, first, the value of the amplitude counter 223iv and the sensor type stored in the current type storage area 223kv are read (S5601), and further, the swing angle determination table 222f (see FIG. 182) is read (S5602). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the combination of the value of the amplitude counter 223iv read in the process of S5601 and the sensor type stored in the type storage area 223kv this time is defined in the swing angle determination table 222f ( S5603), when it is determined that the combination is not defined in the swing angle determination table 222f (S5603), it means that there is no need to change the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770. , This processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5603 that the combination read in the process of S5601 is defined in the swing angle determination table 222f (S5603: Yes), the swing angle is associated with the combination. The inclination angle (oscillation angle) defined in the determination table 222f is set to the inclination angle (oscillation angle) of the holding piece 6770 (S5604), and the process is ended.

  By executing this swing angle control process (see FIG. 188), the tilt angle (swing angle) can be varied according to the arrangement of the ball B and the amplitude of the swing motion of the ball B (ball B (ball B) As the distance from the center of the holding piece 6770 can increase the inclination toward the center of the holding piece 6770), the ball B may be ejected (projected out) out of the range of the holding piece 6770. This can be suppressed more reliably. Further, as described above, the rocking angle determination table 222f is configured such that the inclination angle increases as the amplitude of the rocking operation decreases, so that the rocking operation is instantaneous when the amplitude decreases. Stop (stop) can be prevented. Therefore, the rocking operation can be continued longer, so that the ball B can be surely dropped into the target pocket while the rocking operation is being performed (before the rocking operation is stopped). .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the rotation setting process 2 (S1632) will be described. The rotation setting process 2 is one of the main processes 2 (see FIG. 184), and as described above, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is varied under predetermined conditions while the rotating member 640 is rotating. It is a process. Of the rotation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189) in the second control example, in each of the processes of S2801 and S2805 to S2808, S2801 and S2805 to S2808 of the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) in the first control example. The same processing as each processing of is executed.

  Further, in the rotation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189) in the present control example, when it is determined in the process of S2801 that the ball drop enable flag 223fv is on (S2801: Yes), the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on. It is determined whether or not (S2811). If it is determined that the arrangement specifying flag 223nv is not on (that is, off) (S2811: No), the current arrangement is unknown and the pocket that can drop the ball B is in the vicinity of the dropping position. Since it can not be determined whether or not it has been allocated, the present process is ended and the process returns to the main process 2 (see FIG. 184).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2811 that the layout specification completed flag 223nv is on (S2811: Yes), the information corresponding to the pocket placed at the drop position is read out from the rotational position storage area 223u ( S2812), the process proceeds to S2805.

  By executing this rotation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189), the positional relationship between the current falling position and the closest pocket to which the ball B can be dropped is grasped, and the rotational speed of the rotating member 640 is determined. It can be varied according to the relationship. As a result, since it is possible to prevent the rocking operation from being continued for a long time after the cycle (amplitude) of the rocking operation performed by the ball B becomes smaller, it is possible to look more naturally to any pocket. The ball B can be dropped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 190, in command determination processing (see FIG. 150), description will be made of execution command processing 2 (S2121) executed instead of execution command processing (S2113, see FIG. 155) in the first control example. Do. Similarly to the execution command processing (see FIG. 155) in the first control example, the execution command processing 2 (see FIG. 190) is a combination driven by the motor driver according to the execution command output from various motor drivers. It is a process for determining the progress of the movement of the object and performing control according to the progress.

  Of the execution command processing 2 (see FIG. 190) in the second control example, the processing of S2601 to S2608 and S2611 to S2614 respectively includes S2601 to S2608 of the execution command processing (see FIG. 155) in the first control example. The same processing as each processing of S2611 to S2614 is executed. In execution command processing 2 (see FIG. 190) in the present control example, when the processing of S2608 is completed, the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are monitored over a plurality of steps (15 steps). (Sampling), an arrangement specifying process for specifying a pocket arranged at the drop position is executed (S2621), and this process is ended. Details of the arrangement specifying process (S2621) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned layout specifying process (S2621). When this arrangement specifying process is executed, it is first determined whether the swing effect flag 223 ev is on (S5701). If it is determined that the swing effect flag 223ev is off (S5701: No), the ball B swings. A specific process during rotation for specifying the arrangement of the rotary member 640 is executed at the stage before the operation is performed (S5702), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5701 that the swing production flag 223 ev is on (S5701: Yes), the swing specific process for identifying the arrangement of the rotary member 640 during the execution of the swing production is performed. The process is executed (S5703), and the process ends. Details of the in-rotation identification process (S5702) and the in-swing identification process (S5703) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 192, details of the in-rotation identification process (S5702) will be described. When the identification processing during rotation (see FIG. 192) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the flag 223mv for placement identification is on (S5801), and it is determined that the flag is not on (that is, off). In the case (S5801: No), whether the output of the rotational position detection sensor 684 is displaced (all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are switched to L and the output of any of the sensors is switched to H) or not When the output is displaced, a non-specification process for starting the specification of the arrangement of the rotary member 640 is executed (S5802), and this process is ended. The details of the non-specification process (S5802) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5801 that the flag 223mv during placement specification is on (S5801: Yes), a combination of detection values (outputs) of the detection sensors A to F is stored in each storage area of the detection value storage area 223ov. Are stored in a free area where no data is stored (S5803). Then, it is determined whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is stored in the detection value storage area 223 ov as the upper limit 15 sets (S 5804), and it is determined that the upper limit is not reached (S 5804) (No), which means that the number of times of detection required to determine the arrangement of the rotary member 640 has not been reached, and thus the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5804 that the combination of the detection values of the upper limit number (15 sets) is stored in the detection value storage area 223ov (S5804: Yes), the detection value storage area 223ov is stored. It is determined whether the combination of all the detected values is the same (S5805). When it is determined that a combination of different detection values is stored in the detection value storage area 223ov (S5805: No), all data stored in the detection value storage area 223ov is reset (S5806) , End this process. By resetting all data, the detection value storage area 223 ov can be stored again until the upper limit (15 sets) of combinations of detection values is reached for each operation step.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5805 that the combination of all the detection values stored in the detection value storage area 223ov is the same (S5805: Yes), the rotational position determination table 222c is read and the detection sensors A to F are detected. The pocket specified in association with the combination of the detected values of is identified (S5807), and the information corresponding to the identified pocket is stored in the rotational position storage area 223u (S5808). Then, the in-position identification flag 223 mv is set to be off, and the in-position identification flag 223 nv is set to be on (S5809), and this processing ends.

  By executing this specific processing during rotation (see FIG. 192), the combination of the outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over 15 operation steps and changed to the detection result It is possible to identify a pocket corresponding to the detection result after determining whether there is a. Therefore, the output of any detection sensor is displaced due to noise or the like, or the timing at which the detection target portion 641c provided in each pocket is disposed to the detection position due to the rattling of the rotation member 640, etc. Even in the case of misalignment, the arrangement of the rotation member 640 can be accurately identified.

  In this control example, if at least one set of the combinations of detection values for 15 steps is different, detection value storage is performed regardless of the timing at which the combination is stored or the number of times different combinations are stored. Although the area 223 ov is configured to be reset, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, among the combinations stored in the detection value storage area 223ov, only the storage area in which different combinations are stored is cleared, and the detection value is additionally acquired and cleared for the number of times different combinations are stored. It may be stored and it may be determined whether all combinations match. As a result, when combinations of different detection values are included, it is not necessary to acquire combinations of detection values for 15 additional steps each time, so the time required to specify a pocket at the falling position can be shortened. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the details of the non-identifying process (S5802) will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing this non-specification process (S5802). In this non-specification process (S5802), as described above, the output of the rotational position detection sensor 684 is displaced (from the state where all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are L, the output of any of the sensors is H It is a process for determining whether or not the switching has been performed, and for starting the specification of the arrangement of the rotating member 640 when the output is displaced.

  When this non-specifying process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the layout identifying flag 223nv is on (S5901), and if it is off (S5901: No), the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are It is determined whether all are L (S5902). If it is determined in the process of S5902 that the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are all L (S5902: Yes), this means that no pocket is arranged at the falling position, and the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is detected. Since this can not be done, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5902 that one of the detection sensors A to F is in the H state (S5902: No), the cause is that any pocket is placed at the falling position. Means that the output of the sensor has been displaced. Therefore, in this case, in order to monitor (monitor) the outputs of the detection sensors A to F over a plurality of operation steps in the rotation operation, the flag 223mv during placement specification is set to ON (S5903), and the rotation position is stored. The information corresponding to the pocket placed in the previous drop position stored in the area 223u is cleared and reset (S5904), and the process is ended. By setting the flag 223mv during placement identification to ON, in the subsequent identification processing during rotation (see FIG. 192), in the processing of S5801, to monitor the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F over multiple steps. Each processing of S5803 to S5809 can be executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S5901 that the layout specification completed flag 223nv is on (S5901: Yes), then whether all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are L or not If it is determined that the outputs of all the sensors are L (S5905: Yes), the layout specification completed flag 223nv is set to OFF (S5906), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the output of at least one of the detection sensors A to F is H (S5905: No), the process ends. By executing the processes of S5905 and S5906, the period during which the arrangement specifying flag 223nv is turned on can be limited only while the detected portion 641c passes the positions of the detection sensors A to F. it can. That is, the period during which the arrangement of the rotary member 640 stored in the rotational position storage area 223u is referred to can be limited while the detected portion 641c passes the position of each of the detection sensors A to F. Therefore, the to-be-detected part 641c passes through the positions of the detection sensors A to F, and, for example, in a state where two pockets straddle the dropping position, a defect such as falling of the ball B is suppressed be able to.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 194, the details of the swinging identification processing (S5704) will be described. The swinging specifying process (S5704) is one process in the arrangement specifying process (see FIG. 191), and as described above, is a process for specifying the arrangement of the rotary member 640 while the swing effect is being performed. is there.

  When this swinging identifying process (see FIG. 194) is started, first, it is determined whether the arrangement identifying flag 223mv is on (S6001), and it is determined that the flag is not on (ie, off). In the case (S6001: No), the non-specification process described above is executed (S6002), and this process ends. Since this non-identification process (S6002) is the same as the non-identification process (S5802, see FIG. 193) which is one process in the rotation identifying process (see FIG. 192), its details are described. The explanation is omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6001 that the allocation specifying flag 223mv is on (S6001: Yes), a combination of detection values (outputs) of the detection sensors A to F is stored in each storage area of the detection value storage area 223ov. Among the above, the data is stored (stored) in a free area where no data is stored (S6003). Then, it is determined whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F has been stored (stored) in the detection value storage area 223ov as the upper limit (S6004), and it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached. Since (S6004: No) means that the number of times of detection required to determine the arrangement of the rotary member 640 has not been reached, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6004 that a combination of detection values of the upper limit number (15 sets) is stored in the detection value storage area 223ov (S6004: Yes), the detection value storage area 223ov is stored. It is determined whether 80% (two or more) of the combinations of the 15 detected values are the same detection result (S6005). When it is determined that the combination of the same detection results is less than 80% (S6005: No), all the data stored in the detection value storage area 223ov are reset (S6006), and this processing ends Do. By resetting all data, the detection value storage area 223 ov can be stored again until the upper limit (15 sets) of combinations of detection values is reached for each operation step.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6005, when it is determined that the combination of 80% or more of the detection values is the same among the 15 combinations of detection values stored in the detection value storage area 223ov (S6005: Yes), the rotational position The discrimination table 222c is read out, a pocket specified in association with the combination of detection values of the detection sensors A to F is specified (S6007), and information corresponding to the specified pocket is stored in the rotational position storage area 223u ( Storage) (S6008). Then, the arrangement specifying flag 223mv is set to off, and the arrangement specifying flag 223nv is set to on (S6009), and this processing is ended.

  By executing this specific processing during swing (see FIG. 194), combinations of outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F are monitored (sampled) over 15 operation steps, and 80% or more The pocket corresponding to the matching detection result can be specified by the ratio of. That is, since the conditions for specifying the pocket are made sweet as compared with the specific processing during rotation (see FIG. 192), the arrangement of the rotation member 640 (the pocket at the falling position) can be specified more quickly. It should be noted that the specific processing during swing (see FIG. 194) is performed only during the execution of the swing effect. The swing effect is an effect of finally dropping the ball B into any pocket, as described above. Therefore, if it takes time to specify the position of the rotating member 640, the timing for dropping the ball B may be delayed, and the ball B may not be dropped into the target pocket. On the other hand, in this control example, while the rocking rendition is being performed, the determination condition is sweet (that is, the time until the arrangement is specified is performed for a relatively short time) and the rocking specifying process (see FIG. 194) is performed. To be configured. Thereby, the arrangement of the rotation member 640 can be specified more quickly, so that the ball B can be more surely dropped into the pocket of the target type.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the holding piece 6770 capable of changing the tilt angle is provided, and the tilt angle of the holding piece 6770 is variable according to the arrangement of the ball B in the upper portion of the holding piece 6770. It is supposed to be configured. Here, assuming that the arrangement of the holding pieces 6770 is fixed when swinging the ball B, if the momentum when throwing the ball B is too strong (the initial speed is too fast), the ball B is a holding piece There is a possibility that the vehicle may get into an unexpected position, such as the back side of the pachinko machine 10, passing through the upper surface of 6770. Also, as a method of swinging the upper part of the holding piece 6770 regardless of the force of the ball B, the width of the holding piece 6770 is broadened or the inclination from the both sides of the holding piece 6770 toward the center is made steep. However, if the width of the holding piece 6770 is increased, it is necessary to secure a space for that, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design is reduced. In addition, when the inclination toward the center of the holding piece 6770 is made steep, the amplitude (period) of the rocking operation tends to be small, so the time for the ball B to rock is shortened, and the ball B is dropped. There is a risk that the ball B may stop before being moved. That is, there is a risk that the ball B will look extremely unnatural, i.e. not falling into the pocket even though it is stationary.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is configured to be variable. Then, the inclination angle is controlled such that the inclination of the downward direction toward the upper center of the holding piece 6770 becomes larger as the ball B moves away from the upper center of the holding piece 6770 by the swing operation. Thus, the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 while the ball B is performing the rocking operation can be set so that the ball B always flows down toward the center of the holding piece 6770. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from being ejected to the outside of the holding piece 6770 when the momentum of the rocking motion performed by the ball B is too strong. It can be held securely on top and dropped into any pocket. Further, by holding the ball B on the upper portion of the holding piece 6770 by varying the inclination angle (swinging angle), the enlargement of the holding piece 6770 can be suppressed, thereby achieving space saving. be able to. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the design of the pachinko machine 10 can be enhanced. Furthermore, in the second control example, the inclination angle (swinging angle) decreases as the ball B approaches the upper center of the holding piece 6770. It can be made difficult. Therefore, the rocking motion can be continued for a longer time, so that the ball B can be dropped into any pocket reliably before the rocking motion of the ball B is stopped.

  In the second control example, when the outputs of the detection sensors A to F for detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 640 are displaced (the output of at least one detection sensor becomes H), the plurality of operation steps Monitoring (sampling) the outputs of the detection sensors A to F, and determining the current arrangement of the rotary member 640 (pocket arranged at the falling position) based on the detection results of the plurality of operation steps. It is configured. With such a configuration, the output of any detection sensor is displaced due to noise or the like, or the rattled portion of the rotating member 640 causes the detection target portion 641c provided in each pocket to move to the detection position. Even if the timing at which they are placed is shifted, the placement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately identified.

  In this control example, as a method of specifying the rotational position of the rotating member 640, two types of specifying methods are provided. As a first method, a combination of outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over operation steps of predetermined steps (15 steps), and all detections of predetermined steps (15 steps) are performed. When the combination of values is the same, a method of specifying a pocket corresponding to the detection result is set. In this method, when the combination of at least one detection result is different from the combination of the other detection results, the combination of the detection results for the predetermined step is reacquired again, and the combination of all the detection results is identical. Identify the type of pocket only if you According to the first method, the output of any detection sensor is displaced due to noise or the like, or the rattled portion of the rotating member 640 causes the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket to be the detected position. Even if the timing at which they are placed is shifted, the placement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately identified.

  On the other hand, as a second method, a combination of the outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over operation steps for a predetermined step (15 steps), and for a predetermined step (15 steps) Among the combinations of detection values, when the combination of detection values of 80% (ie 12 steps) or more is the same, a method is specified to specify the pocket corresponding to the combination of detection results occupying that 80%. ing. This second method is configured to allow a maximum of 20% of displacement of the detection result compared to the first method, so it is inferior in terms of accuracy, but there is little reworking of detection, so until the pocket is identified Can reduce the time required for This second method is employed when the ball B is dropped into the pocket. In order to determine whether or not the ball B is to be dropped, when specifying the position of the rotating member 640, if it takes time to specify the position, the timing at which the ball B is dropped is also delayed. There is a possibility that the ball B can not be dropped into the pocket of the. On the other hand, in this control example, while the rocking rendition is being performed, the determination condition is sweet (that is, the time until the arrangement is specified is performed for a relatively short time) and the rocking specifying process (see FIG. 194) is performed. To be configured. Thereby, the arrangement of the rotation member 640 can be specified more quickly, so that the ball B can be more surely dropped into the pocket of the target type.

  In the second control example, in the first method and the second method, the detection results of the rotational position detection sensor 684 for 15 steps are monitored (sampled), and based on the detection results for the 15 steps. Although the determination of the arrangement of the rotation member 640 or the determination of redetection has been made, the number of monitoring (sampling) steps is not limited to 15. It may be determined arbitrarily according to the number of steps that can be detected and the like.

  In the second control example, it is determined which of eight sections (first section to eighth section) the ball B is passing in the swing effect, and the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is determined. Although it was made variable, it is not restricted to this. The number of sphere detection sensors may be increased as the interval is increased, or the number of sphere detection sensors may be decreased as the interval is decreased. When the section is increased, the arrangement of the ball B can be specified more accurately, so that the angle of the holding piece 6770 can be set more finely. On the other hand, when the section is reduced, the number of sensors can be reduced, so that the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. In addition, the failure rate can be reduced.

  In this control example, in the rocking angle determination table 222f (see FIG. 182), the type of sensor that detects the ball B and the rocking angle are defined for each amplitude of the rocking motion of the ball B. Only the sensor type and the inclination angle (swing angle) may be defined regardless of the amplitude of the movement operation. Specifically, for example, the correspondence (see the amplitude “4” in FIG. 182) in the case of the amplitude “4” in the present control example may be applied regardless of the amplitude of the swing operation. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data of the swing angle determination table 222f while preventing the ball B from being ejected outside the range of the holding piece 6770.

  In this control example, the upper limit value of the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is set to 6 degrees, but the player can arbitrarily change the tilt of the holding piece 6770 within a range that makes it difficult to perceive It may be determined. Further, the correspondence relationship between the sensor type and the swing angle can also be determined arbitrarily within the range in which the ball B does not eject outside the range of the holding piece 6770.

  In the second control example, when the rotating member 640 is rotating and any pocket is disposed to the dropping position before the ball B is thrown, the detection sensor A ~ is performed over 15 steps. The output of F is monitored, and if at least one set of combinations of outputs for 15 steps is different, the detection value storage area regardless of the timing at which the combination is stored or the number of times different combinations are stored. Although it was comprised so that 223 ov was reset (that is, monitoring of the output of detection sensor AF was performed for additional 15 steps), it is not restricted to this. For example, among the combinations stored in the detection value storage area 223ov, only the storage area in which different combinations are stored is cleared, and the detection value is additionally acquired and cleared for the number of times different combinations are stored. It may be stored and it may be determined whether all combinations match. As a result, when combinations of different detection values are included, it is not necessary to acquire combinations of detection values for 15 additional steps each time, so the time required to specify a pocket at the falling position can be shortened. it can.

  In the second control example, when any pocket of the rotary member 640 is disposed at the drop position, the combinations of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are monitored for 15 steps, and all the combinations coincide. (The first method above) or when 80% of the 15 steps match (the second method above), the pocket at the drop position is specified, but the pocket at the drop position The number of steps for specifying (arrangement of the rotation member 640) is not limited to this, and may be determined arbitrarily. By adopting a smaller number of steps (e.g., 10 steps) than 15 steps, it is possible to more quickly identify the drop position pocket (arrangement of the rotating member 640). Further, by adopting the number of steps (e.g., 18 steps) greater than 15 steps, it is possible to more accurately identify the pocket (the arrangement of the rotation member 640) at the falling position. Further, the number of steps for specifying the drop position pocket (arrangement of the rotating member 640) in the first method and the second method is not necessarily the same, and different numbers of steps are adopted. It is also good.

  In the second control example, when any pocket of the rotary member 640 is disposed at the drop position, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored for 15 steps, and the detection result for 15 steps is obtained. If at least one combination of different detection values is included in (the first method above), or if the coincidence of the combination of detection values is determined to be less than 80% during the 15 steps (the second method above) Although the detection value of 15 steps was additionally monitored, it is not necessary to monitor 15 steps. For example, in the first method, when a detection value changes in the middle of 15 steps, monitoring of additional 15 steps may be started at that time. Also, for example, in the second method, if it is determined that the matching detection value is less than 80% of the 15 steps (12 steps) even if the step is less than 15 steps, additional processing is performed at that time. It may be configured to start 15 steps of monitoring. With this configuration, the pocket can be identified more quickly.

  In this control example, when it is determined that the output of any of the detection sensors A to F is displaced while the rotary member 640 is in rotation (the output of the sensor changes from the state where the outputs of all the detection sensors are L). However, regardless of the type of sensor whose output has been displaced, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored while performing the rotation operation for 15 steps from that point, but this is limited to this is not. For example, a detection value of a sensor (for example, after reaching the first section S1) which has a high possibility of detecting the detection target 641c latest among the detection sensors in consideration of rattling or the like of the rotation member 640 is taken. It is also possible to start monitoring of the detection value of 15 steps in response to the displacement of the detection sensor A) disposed at the position where the shortest distance is rotated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the possibility that there is a combination of detection values that are unmatched among the detection values for 15 steps, so it is possible to make it difficult for the monitoring to be retried. Therefore, the arrangement of each pocket of the rotation member 640 can be identified more quickly.

  In this control example, regarding the configuration for determining the arrangement from the combination of the outputs of the six detection sensors, the first method (corresponds to the output determined to be the same when all the outputs for predetermined steps are the same) Although the method of applying the method of performing control) is applied, the first method can be applied not only to the one configured by six detection sensors. The number of sensors may be large (for example, 10) or small (for example, a single sensor). In addition, the first method can be applied to applications other than the use for specifying the arrangement. For example, when it is detected that the output of any of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i has switched from the state of L to the state of H, the output of the detection sensor is detected a predetermined number of times (for example, five main processes) ) If the output is all H during a predetermined number of monitoring periods, it may be determined that the ball B has passed the detection sensor. By this configuration, when the output of the detection sensor instantaneously becomes H regardless of the passage of the sphere B due to the influence of noise etc., the sphere B passes the corresponding sensor from the H output. It is possible to prevent false recognition. Therefore, when the ball B is performing the rocking motion, the arrangement of the ball B can be determined more accurately.

<Third control example>
Next, the present third control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example described above, it is configured to determine whether the hit pocket (lucky number) is to be increased (added) in the “normal mode” or in a predetermined period after the “preparation mode” starts. . Then, when the addition is determined, in the increase effect performed in the "preparation mode", an increase (addition) is made to be randomly determined from the out pockets. This makes it possible for the player to feel as if the ball B is likely to fall into the hitting pocket in the "roulette chance effect" to be executed thereafter, so that the player can play the game "Jo Expectations for “mode” can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, when the addition is determined and the hit pocket is determined in the increase effect, a section having a high ratio of the hit pocket is intentionally provided. As a result, it is possible to make the player watch more carefully the correspondence relationship between the arrangement of the section having a high proportion of the hit pocket and the momentum (period) of the rocking motion performed by the ball B above the holding piece 677. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest to the player's game in the "roulette chance production".

  Further, in the first control example described above, the control and presentation modes in the “normal mode” and the “preparation mode” have been mainly described.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, a description will also be given of the chance series continuous effect which is one of the entertaining effects to be executed in the "continuously mode" in the third symbol display device 81. Although the details will be described later, the chance line continuous effect is a kind of entertaining effect for suggesting whether or not it is a big hit in the “continuously mode”.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above is the effect mode executed during the "run mode", "opportunity continuous effect" Is added, the distribution method of the pocket to be distributed during the "preparation mode" is changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 and the RAM 223 are partially changed, and The partial process performed by MPU221 of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 is a point changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the 1st control example mentioned above. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described above. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example described above, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 195 to FIG. 196, the “sequential opportunity continuous presentation” performed during the “continuous mode” of the third control example will be described. This "chance-point continuous effect" is an effect of notifying that the result of the lottery is a big hit by stopping and displaying the chance a plurality of times (three times) at predetermined intervals (1.2-second intervals).

  Here, as in the first control example described above, the “continuous mode” in the third control example is a fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit as a hit pattern (0.2 seconds) and a hit variation (3 seconds). Are selected to be selected at a ratio of about one to one. Further, as a fluctuation pattern at the time of out-of-plane, out-of-short fluctuation (0.2 seconds) and out-of-middle fluctuation (3 seconds) are selected at a ratio of about 4: 1.

  As a result, in the "run mode", a short change time is determined as compared to the run time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the "normal mode", so it is possible to play the game in the "run mode". It can be run speedily. Further, since the period until the next big win can be shortened, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the game in the "continuously mode" becomes monotonous.

  Also, in the “run mode”, which is short, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second entry port 640a is likely to be in the open state, and the second entry port 640a is opened. Since it is easy to win, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 toward the second entrance 640 a (so-called “right strike”), and the through gate 67 is allowed to pass. A game (so-called "right-handed game") aiming to be a big hit by winning the second ball entry port 640a is executed while the electric role product 640b is opened.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the drawing of the special symbol 2 executed based on the ball entering the second entrance ball hole 640a is It is configured not to be put on hold.

  In a conventional gaming machine, in a predetermined gaming state (such as time saving) in which a fluctuation time shorter than that of the normal gaming state is determined, the player is informed whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or not Since it is difficult to perform the effect to be performed in one fluctuation time, an effect using a plurality of fluctuation times is performed based on the prize information stored on hold (a so-called "pre-reading effect").

  However, in the third control example, as described above, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is not held, and the above-described "pre-reading effect" can not be performed. Therefore, in the third control example, in a predetermined gaming state ("series mode") in which a variation time shorter than the normal gaming state is determined, the player is made special for the player without using "prefetch effect" As an effect which suggests whether the result of the lottery of the symbol is a big hit, it is configured to be able to execute the "sequential opportunity continuous effect".

  FIG. 195 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the effect mode corresponding to the hit middle fluctuation among the “chance continuous effect” performed in the “continuous mode”. The hit middle change is a change pattern selected when winning a big hit, and is composed of a change time of 3 seconds and a determined time of 0.5 seconds. The presentation mode corresponding to the hit middle change is selected with reference to the continuous jackpot middle hit table 222a3 (see FIG. 198) in the change pattern selection process (S6107 in FIG. 206).

  More specific contents will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (a). FIG. 195 (a) is a timing chart showing a state in which "three consecutive chances rendition" is executed as an example of the rendition mode corresponding to the hit middle fluctuation among "chances continuous rendition". When this "three consecutive chances rendition" is executed, the chances are stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals within one fluctuation time.

  First, as shown in FIG. 195 (a), when the middle change is started (executed) when the "three consecutive chances effect presentation" is set, the pseudo change is started (executed) (the pseudo change period is 0.2). Seconds). This pseudo fluctuation is a fluctuation pseudo display of fluctuation until pseudo stop (temporary stop) of the third symbol at the chance eye, 0.2 seconds same as the fluctuation time when the short fluctuation is executed The fluctuation time of is set.

  It should be noted that a plurality of symbols may be displayed as long as the display mode (non-stop display mode) in which the player does not recognize that the third symbol has stopped at a specific symbol is being executed during the period in which the pseudo variation is performed. The display mode may be changed so as to switch, or the display mode may be such that only a specific symbol is rotated. In addition, it may be a display mode in which the symbol itself is moved at a high speed or reduced to a level where it is difficult to visually recognize so that the player can not recognize the symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  After that, when the pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds) elapses, the chance eye (the first chance eye) is stopped and displayed (the chance eye stop period is 0.5 seconds). The stop display of this chance eye is to display the third symbol in a display mode (temporary stop display mode) that causes the player to recognize that the third symbol is stopped at a specific symbol (short stop variation). The same time as the determined time (0.5 seconds) when is executed is set.

  As this temporary stop display mode, a display mode which slightly shakes a specific symbol is included in addition to the display mode in which the third symbol completely stops. By executing the stop display of the chance eye in this manner, it is possible to make the player recognize that one fluctuation has been completed before the fluctuation time of the special symbol (3 seconds in the case of the middle fluctuation) ends. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute an effect that makes it possible to recognize that a plurality of fluctuations are being performed while the fluctuation of one special symbol is being executed.

  As described above, when the middle change is executed, the pseudo change period (0.2 seconds) and the chance stop period (0.5 seconds) are the short change change period (period) (0.2 seconds). Since it is set to be performed in the same period as the determined time (period) (0.5 seconds), it is possible to display the chance eye stop display in the middle fluctuation without a sense of discomfort to the player.

  Then, when the chance stop period has passed, the third symbol is pseudo-stopped (the pseudo-stop period is 0.7 seconds). The pseudo stop is a pseudo display of a period until the next fluctuation is performed. In the third control example, as described above, since the right-handed game is executed in the "long-running mode", the ball enters the second ball entry port 640a after the variation of the special symbol is stopped (start winning) The non-playing period may occur before the special symbol variation is executed again.

  Specifically, when the ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the "continuous mode" where time is short, the normal symbol (the second symbol) fluctuates for 3 seconds (see S620 in FIG. 135), and then the current normal If the lottery result of the symbol is a hit (S 615 in FIG. 135: Yes), the motorized control object 640 b attached to the second entrance port 640 a is movably controlled to execute opening for 1 second twice (FIG. 135) See S616). Therefore, after the variation of the special symbol stops, a time lag may occur between the time when the motorized accessory 640b is opened and the ball enters the second ball entry port 640a. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example is configured such that the drawing of the special symbol 2 executed based on the ball having entered the second entrance 640 a is not held. Therefore, there may be a non-playing period in which a new special symbol variation is not executed.

  Referring back to FIG. 195 (a), the description will be continued. The period in which the third symbol is artificially stopped is a period for artificially displaying the period corresponding to the non-playing period described above, and by providing this pseudo-stop period, the case in which the short fluctuation is executed plural times It becomes possible to execute the same variation mode as the variation pattern of the special symbol in one middle variation.

  Here, the display mode in the case of performing the pseudo stop may be any display mode that allows the player to recognize that it is a non-playing period, and, for example, the third symbol of the chance eye stop period It may be a display mode in which the swing width is smaller than the display mode, or a display mode in which the background image of the third symbol display device is switched from the background image corresponding to the variation of the special symbol to the background image corresponding to the non-playing period.

  In the third control example, the player is not given a sense of incongruity as a pseudo-variational effect that produces effects such as performing a plurality of changes while one middle change is being executed. Set the pseudo fluctuation period which is the same time as the fluctuation period of the short fluctuation, set the chance stop period which is the same time as the symbol determination period of the short fluctuation, and display the non-gaming period in a pseudo manner It is not necessary to provide all of these configurations, although a pseudo stop period is provided for this purpose.

  For example, the configuration of the pseudo stop period may be eliminated by extending the chance stop period by a period corresponding to the pseudo stop period and setting the chance stop period to 1.2 seconds. Even with such a configuration, the effect of being able to execute the pseudo change effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player is exhibited.

  The “three consecutive chances effect presentation” shown in FIG. 195 (a) is based on the above-mentioned pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds), chance eye stop period (0.5 seconds) and pseudo stop period (0.7 seconds). The constructed pseudo effect (1.4 seconds) is executed twice, and after the second simulated effect is finished, the third simulated fluctuation (0.2 seconds) is executed. Execute until the end of the third simulated fluctuation in the range of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (3 seconds), stop display of the third chance (0.5 seconds), the determined time of the special symbol (0) Execute using .5 seconds). Then, the jackpot is started (executed) after the third stop display period (the determination time of the special symbol) has elapsed.

  Thus, the "three consecutive chances directed" shown in FIG. 195 (a) is 0.2 seconds, 1.6 seconds, and 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation, that is, 1.4 seconds. Since the chance eyes are stopped and displayed three times at intervals, it is possible to execute an effect mode in which the chances are stopped plural times at predetermined intervals within the one variation time period during the “continuous mode”. ing. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the effect is being executed across a plurality of fluctuations without using the “prefetch effect”.

  In addition, in "3 consecutive chance eyes effect presentation" explained with reference to Fig. 195 (a), the stop display of the third chance eye is executed using the determined time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol. For example, until the period when the stop display of the third chance is executed is performed in the range of the variation time of the special symbol (3 seconds), and the determination time of the special symbol (0.5 seconds) is the hit of the special symbol A combination of the third symbols corresponding to (for example, a combination in which the same numeral symbols are aligned) may be stopped and displayed. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the current change is a win.

  On the other hand, FIG. 195 (b) is a timing chart showing an example of the effect mode corresponding to the out-of-middle variation in the “chance continuous effect” performed in the “continuous mode”. This out-of-middle change is a change pattern that is selected when the jackpot is not won (due to a special symbol lottery) and is composed of a change time of 3 seconds and a determination time of 0.5 seconds. Ru. The presentation mode corresponding to the out-of-middle fluctuation is selected with reference to the consecutive jackpot jackpot table 222a3 (see FIG. 198) in the fluctuation pattern selection process (S6107 in FIG. 206).

  More specific contents will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (b). This FIG. 195 (b) is a timing chart showing a state in which "out-of-two consecutive opportunity eye effect" is executed as an example of the effect mode corresponding to the out-of-middle variation in the "chance line continuous effect". When this "two consecutive chances for off-stage effect" is executed, after the chance eyes are displayed and stopped twice at predetermined intervals within one variation time, the third symbol is finally stopped at the completely out-of-order eye Is displayed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 195 (b), when the out-of-middle fluctuation with the “two consecutive chances for detour purpose” set is started (executed), the “third consecutive chance” described above with reference to FIG. 195 (a) As in the case of the effect, the pseudo fluctuation is executed twice. After that, the third pseudo fluctuation is executed (0.2 seconds), and the complete out-of-focus stop display (0.5 seconds) is executed using the determined time of the special symbol (0.5 seconds).

  As described above, in the “for 2 consecutive chances for out-of-order production” shown in FIG. 195 (b) as described, the chances are stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after and 1.6 seconds after the change is started. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect mode in which the chance is stopped plural times at predetermined intervals within the one fluctuation time during the “continuous mode”. As a result, even if the player does not use the "prediction effect", the effect can be recognized as if the effect is being executed across a plurality of fluctuations.

  In addition, it is configured to stop and display the first and second chances at the same timing (timing after 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the start of fluctuation) as the "3 consecutive chances production" described above. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the jackpot until the current fluctuation ends (until the complete declination stops).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196 (a), among the "chance continuous effects" executed during the "continuous mode", the effect mode in the case where the out-of-short variation and the per-short variation are executed will be described. Do. In FIG. 196 (a), of the "chance continuous effects" performed in the "continuous mode", "chance effect" is performed continuously for two consecutive times as a production mode corresponding to the out-of-short variation, and then, It is the figure which showed the timing chart in, when "chance eye production" is performed as a production | presentation aspect corresponding to a win short fluctuation. The out-of-short variation is a variation pattern that is selected when the jackpot is not won (is out-winning), and is composed of a variation time of 0.2 seconds and a determination time of 0.5 seconds. The effect mode corresponding to the out-of-range short variation is selected with reference to the consecutive-inside-out table 222a4 (see FIG. 199) in the variation pattern selection process (S6107 in FIG. 206). Also, the per-short variation is a variation pattern selected when winning a big win, and the process of selecting a variation time and a decision time, and a presentation mode is the same as the above-described out-of-short variation, so the description thereof is omitted. Do.

  More specific contents will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (a). First, as shown in FIG. 196 (a), when out-of-short-range fluctuation for which “chance effect presentation” is set is started (executed), fluctuation is started (executed) (a fluctuation period is 0.2 seconds). Then, when the fluctuation period has passed, a chance is displayed to stop showing that the present fluctuation is not a hit (it is out of place), and the symbol is fixed (fixed period of 0.5 seconds).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example, the fluctuation time (0.2 seconds) in which the fluctuation time (0.2 seconds) and the settling time (0.5 seconds) in the short fluctuation are executed during the middle fluctuation And the chance eye stop period (0.5 seconds) are set to be the same timing. Therefore, since it becomes possible to execute at the same timing as the simulated effect performed during the middle change and the change effect for the short change, it is possible for the player to feel discomfort with the simulated effect performed during the middle change. There is an effect that it can be eliminated.

  Referring back to FIG. 196 (a), the description will be continued. After the stop display of the chance eye (the first time) is executed, the fluctuation of the symbol stops until the next fluctuation is started (until a new ball entry (start winning) occurs at the second entrance 640a) Yes (duration stop period). During this fluctuation stop period, the third pattern is stopped and displayed, and the background screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed from the changing background screen to make the player recognize that the special symbol has not fluctuated. It is displayed by switching to the background screen during fluctuation stop.

  Then, when a new start winning combination occurs, the out-shorting variation for which “chance effect effect” is set as the next variation is started (executed), and the second chance display is stopped and displayed. With regard to the out-of-range short fluctuation, an effect based on the same effect mode as the first chance display described above is displayed.

  Next, the winning short is performed, the third winning chance is stopped and the jackpot is started (executed) after the chance stop period has elapsed.

  In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 198, in the third control example, the jackpot is won by being displayed three times at a predetermined interval (an interval of 1.4 seconds). In the situation where the out-for-short fluctuation set for “chance-point effect” is executed twice in a row, the next short-circuit fluctuation hits and “chance-eye effect” is displayed. It is configured such that the effect can be set, and in the case where the next change is out and the short change is made, the "opportunity effect" is not set.

  In this way, when the short fluctuation continues a plurality of times, even though the lottery result is out, the chances are displayed several times at predetermined intervals across a plurality of fluctuations. Can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196 (b), of the "chance continuous effects" executed in "in continuous mode", the effect mode in the case where the short-circuit fluctuation is executed three consecutive times will be described . In FIG. 196 (b), of the "chance continuous effects" performed in the "continuous mode", the "chance effect" is executed continuously for two consecutive times as a production mode corresponding to the out-of-short variation, and thereafter it is out It is the figure which showed the timing chart in, when "normal production" is performed as a production | presentation aspect corresponding to a short fluctuation | variation. The out-of-short variation is a variation pattern that is selected when the jackpot is not won (is out-winning), and is composed of a variation time of 0.2 seconds and a determination time of 0.5 seconds. The effect mode corresponding to the out-of-range short variation is selected with reference to the consecutive-inside-out table 222a4 (see FIG. 199) in the variation pattern selection process (S6107 in FIG. 206).

  First, as shown in FIG. 196 (b), when the short circuit variation fluctuates again after the short circuit fluctuation with the "chance eye effect" set is executed for two consecutive times, the effect corresponding to the short circuit fluctuation. As an aspect, “chance eye effect” is not selected (see FIG. 199), and “normal effect” is executed as shown in FIG. 196 (b).

  The "normal effect" corresponding to the out-of-range short variation is an effect mode in which the chance eye is not displayed in a stopped state, and the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state with a completely out-of-focus state after 0.2 seconds of the changed display.

  In the third control example, a presentation (so-called "chance sequence continuous presentation") that suggests the result of the lottery is executed by the presentation mode in which the chances are stopped and displayed a plurality of times at predetermined intervals, but the predetermined intervals You may use aspects other than the stop display of the chance eye as a mode performed by. For example, the upper lifting unit 300 may be moved at a predetermined interval. As a result, it is possible to suggest the result of the lottery using a configuration other than the display of the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect with enhanced interest.

  Further, in the third control example, an interval of 1.4 seconds is provided as the predetermined interval, but the interval may be shifted within a range where it is difficult for the player to recognize; It may be taken as a predetermined interval including. As a result, in the gaming state in which the winning information of the special symbol 2 is not stored on hold, even when the variation of the special symbol is not immediately started, it is possible to execute the "chance line continuous effect".

  Furthermore, instead of stopping the chances at predetermined intervals, the result of the lottery may be able to be suggested by the number of times the chances are stopped and displayed within a predetermined period (variation time or variation number). .

  Next, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 to 199. FIG. 197A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the third control example is different from the control examples described above in that the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a are partially changed, and the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 is used. The difference is that an additional area selection table 222g is added.

  Here, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a of the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 197 (b). FIG. 197 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in the third control example. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 222a in the first control example, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the third control example is roughly represented by the variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. It is a data table used to determine more detailed variation content from the variation content (variation time).

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is composed of a normal middle-large hit table 222a1, a normal middle-off table 222a2, a continuous-home medium-sized hit table 222a3, and a continuous-line middle-off table 222a4.

  In the normal middle-large hit table 222a1, based on the change pattern command output from the main control unit 110, a detailed effect aspect corresponding to change types of 7 seconds and 10 seconds is defined (shown in FIG. ). Here, the presentation mode defined in the normal middle-large hit table 222a1 will be described. First, a seven second stop pattern and a ten second stop pattern are defined as the stop patterns of symbols variably displayed on each of the display portions 331a to 331d of the effect portion 331 in the normal middle-large hit table 222a1.

  The 7-second stop pattern is a stop pattern in which each symbol variably displayed on each of the display portions 331a to 331d is stopped and displayed at equal intervals, and the 10-second stop pattern is the last one of the display portions 331a to 331d. The time from the symbol (for example, “2”, “7”, “13”) corresponding to the lucky number is stopped and displayed on the display unit other than the display unit 331 d to be stopped until the symbol is stopped on the display unit 331 d is long It is a stop pattern to be set.

  In addition, the normal dropout table 222a2 also has a detailed effect corresponding to the change types of 7 seconds and 10 seconds based on the change pattern command output from the main control unit 110 similarly to the normal medium / big hit table 222a1. Aspects are defined (not shown).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are selected as the fluctuation patterns to be selected when the player wins a middle-large win. The ratio is defined to be about 1 to 1 (see FIG. 111 (a)), and the fluctuation pattern selected in the case of normal dropout is a fluctuation pattern of 7 seconds and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds. It is defined that the rate at which the variation pattern of is selected is about 3 to 1 (FIG. 111 (b)). Thus, when the 10-second stop pattern is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit.

  In addition, the table for a jackpot middle jackpot 222 a 3 is a table in which a detailed rendering aspect is defined for the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 during the “table for a train”. A detailed description will be given of the consecutive jackpot jackpot table 222a3 with reference to FIG. 198.

  FIG. 198 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the consecutive jack middle hitting table 222a3. In the table 222a3 for the large hit in the consecutive villas, "performing short variation (0.2 seconds)" and "performing middle variation (3 seconds)" which are variation types indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, "Normal jackpot effect", "performing single shot chance eye effect", "performing 2 consecutive chance eye effect", "3 consecutive chances" as the presentation mode in association with the value of the chance eye number counter 223qv and the value of the presentation counter 223rv Four types of effect modes of "eye effect" are defined.

  More specifically, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is "performing short variation", the value of the chance number of times counter 223 qv is "0, 1", the value of the effect counter 223 rv is In the case of "0 to 99", "normal jackpot effect" is selected as the effect mode.

  The “normal jackpot effect” is, for example, a character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an effect of informing the player that the result of the current lottery is a jackpot within the fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds. But various symbols that appear around it (for example, a symbol with the letter "V" indicating a probability variation jackpot, a symbol with an 髑髏 mark indicating a normal jackpot (falling to the "normal mode", etc.) The effect of acquiring the is executed. Also, for example, an effect in which a mode (for example, the letter “V”) indicating a probability variation jackpot is simultaneously displayed on each of the display units 331 a to 331 d of the effect unit 331, or a normal jackpot (fall to “normal mode”) An effect is simultaneously performed in which an aspect (e.g., an eyelid mark) indicating.

  Here, after the execution of the "normal jackpot effect" is determined, a character or various symbol symbols (symbol symbols with the letter "V", symbol symbols with an eyelid mark, etc.) are made to appear, and the character When it is configured to execute the effect to obtain the symbol pattern, it becomes necessary to perform a series of effects in 0.2 seconds, the effect time is too short, the player can fully understand the effect content There is a risk of being lost. On the other hand, if it is set as composition which secures presentation time by raising the ratio by which a long fluctuation time is selected (decided) temporarily, after a lottery of one special symbol is executed, a lottery of a special symbol will be performed next There is a problem that the time required for the game becomes long and the game is postponed. In addition, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the possibility of entering the second entrance 640a during the fluctuation, but the entrance to the second entrance 640a is not held, so in the "run mode" As the ball enters the second ball entrance 640a, there is a risk that the ball may be felt as wasted. That is, there is a possibility that the player may feel dissatisfaction.

  Therefore, in the "run mode" in the present control example, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to always display the character regardless of whether or not the special symbol is changing. That is, the character performing the effect of whether or not to acquire the symbol in the change effect is displayed as a part of the back image. And, in the fluctuation effect, it is configured to execute the fluctuation effect of the effect aspect of acquiring the symbol using the character previously displayed as the back surface image. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the back image before the start of the fluctuation rendering start appear as if it is a part of the fluctuation rendering, so that the fluctuation time is extremely short (for example, 0.2 seconds) Even when the pattern is determined, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, as in the case of characters, images of various symbol patterns (symbols with the letter "V", symbol with an 髑髏 mark, etc.) are also made to appear randomly as part of the back image, The display position is also switched at random. That is, for example, a symbol symbol with the letter "V" is framed in from the outside of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 and comes close to the character, stays near the character for a predetermined time, and then moves away from the character. , The pattern of the back image of the aspect of frame-out to the outside of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol pattern with the 髑髏 mark similarly perform an operation to move away from the character Similarly, prepare a pattern of the back image in a mode in which both the pattern of the back image and the symbol pattern with the letter "V" and the symbol pattern with the 髑髏 mark are approaching and then leaving the character. No, they are configured to switch these back images at random. Then, in a state in which any symbol pattern is close to the character (a distance at which the character can naturally obtain the symbol pattern in a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds), the fluctuation effect of the lottery result corresponding to the symbol pattern is started In this case, the symbol pattern that has been displayed as the back image is configured to set a variation pattern of an aspect that the character acquires. By configuring in this way, as if the effect has started before (when the corresponding symbol pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as part of the back image) before the change effect is started. It can make you think. Therefore, even when the fluctuation effect of a short fluctuation time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is performed, the effect can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to execute a natural flow effect as compared to the case where the effect is performed in a short fluctuation time. In this control example, when the game stop state is detected, various symbol patterns are close to the character as a demonstration screen (the distance that the character can naturally acquire the symbol pattern in the fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds) The back image of the aspect which stands still by is set. By configuring in this way, after resuming the game, if a variation time of 0.2 seconds is determined in the drawing of the special symbol to be executed first, the character approaches the character while in the game suspension state It is possible to execute an effect of acquiring a symbol corresponding to the current hit type among symbol symbols that have been stopped in a state of being closed. Therefore, even when the fluctuation effect of a short fluctuation time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is performed through the fluctuation stop state, it is possible to perform the effect of the aspect with less discomfort.

  The variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is “performing short variation”, the value of chance number of times counter 223 qv is “2”, and the value of effect counter 223 rv is “0 to 49”. In the case, "normal jackpot effect" is selected as the effect mode. About this "normal jackpot effect", since it is the same as the content mentioned above, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  On the other hand, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is "hit short variation", the value of chance number of times counter 223 qv is "2", and the value of effect counter 223 rv is "50 to 99". In the case, "performing single shot chance eye effect" is selected as the effect mode.

  In this "one-time chance for single-shot production", when the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "2", that is, in the state in which the chance is stopped and displayed twice at a predetermined interval (about 1.4 seconds interval) It is an effect to be executed and an effect in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of the change. As a result, the two chance eyes stopped and displayed before the "one-time chance shot effect production" is performed, and the one chance displayed at the stop stage in the "single-shot chance event production" this time. It is possible to notify the player that the total of three chance eyes have been stopped and displayed.

  If the change type indicated by the change pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is “hit middle change”, the value of the chance number counter 223 qv is “0”, and the value of the effect counter 223 rv is “0 to 29” "Normal jackpot effect" is selected as the effect mode. In the "normal jackpot effect" in the middle fluctuation when the fluctuation time is 3 seconds, the third symbol is displayed as an effect to notify the player that the result of the current lottery is a jackpot within the fluctuation time of 3 seconds. An effect of acquiring a mode (for example, a V mark) in which the character indicates a big hit with the device 81, and an effect in which a mode of showing a big hit on each of the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331 is stopped and displayed in order are executed.

  On the other hand, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is “hit middle variation”, the value of chance number counter 223 qv is “0”, and the value of effect counter 223 rv is “30 to 99”. In this case, “three consecutive chances effect presentation” is selected as the presentation mode. This “three consecutive chances effect presentation” is an effect mode described in FIG. 195 (a), and is an effect mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed three times within one fluctuation time.

  If the change type indicated by the change pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is “hit middle change”, the value of the chance number counter 223 qv is “1”, and the value of the effect counter 223 rv is “0 to 49” "Normal jackpot effect" is selected as the effect mode. Since this "normal jackpot effect" is the same effect mode as the "normal jackpot effect" at the time of the hit middle change described above, the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is “hit middle variation”, the value of chance number counter 223 qv is “1”, and the value of effect counter 223 rv is “50 to 99”. In the case, "performing second consecutive chance eye effect" is selected as the effect mode. This "performing for 2 consecutive chances" is an effect that is executed when the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "1", that is, when the chances are stopped and displayed once, and the change starts. It is an effect mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed at two timings 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after being sent. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the chance eye has been stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals, together with the effect mode executed in the previous fluctuation.

  Therefore, since it is possible to stop and display three chances at predetermined intervals across a plurality of fluctuations, the plural fluctuations can be performed without using the "prefetch effect" based on the stored winning information. By straddling, it is possible to execute an effect indicating to the player whether or not the result of the drawing of the special symbol is a big hit.

  If the change type indicated by the change pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is “hit middle change”, the value of the chance number counter 223 qv is “2”, and the value of the effect counter 223 rv is “0 to 9” "Normal jackpot effect" is selected as the effect mode. Since this "normal jackpot effect" is the same effect mode as the "normal jackpot effect" at the time of the hit middle change described above, the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is “hit middle variation”, the value of chance number counter 223 qv is “2”, and the value of effect counter 223 rv is “10 to 99”. In the case, "performing single shot chance eye effect" is selected as the effect mode.

  This "performing for single shot chance effect" is an effect executed when the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "2", that is, when the chance number is stopped and displayed twice at a predetermined interval, Is a presentation mode in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of. In this way, it is possible to notify the player that the chance eyes have been stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals (about 1.4 seconds apart), together with the effect mode executed in the previous change. .

  In addition, when "performing for single shot chance eye effect" is executed as the production mode corresponding to the middle fluctuation change, 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation is started chances (the third time at a predetermined interval together with the previous fluctuation) The third symbol display device 81 displays an image notifying the player that the jackpot has been won for a period (2.8 seconds) until the fluctuation is ended after the chance eye is stopped and displayed. In addition, a voice blessing the jackpot is output by the voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, and the effect of turning on the lamp display device (such as the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) is performed.

  As described above, in the third control example, in order to realize the “continuous opportunity effect presentation” in which it is notified that the result of the lottery is the big hit when the multiple chances are stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals, The presentation mode to be executed is selected by the consecutive jackpot jackpot table 222a3. Furthermore, since the number of chance eyes to be stopped and displayed in the present fluctuation is selectable based on the value of the chance eye number counter 223 qv, the chance eyes are stopped plural times at predetermined intervals across plural fluctuations. It can be displayed. Therefore, even in the case where one fluctuation time is short, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the result of the lottery using a plurality of fluctuations in an effect mode that can be easily recognized for the player.

  Referring back to FIG. 197 (b), the description will be continued. The consecutive room disengaging table 222a4 is a table in which a detailed rendering aspect is specified for the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 during the "continuous line mode". A detailed description will be given of this consecutive sofa inside removal table 222 a 4 with reference to FIG. 199.

  FIG. 199 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the consecutive sofa middle release table 222a4. In the table 222a4 for out-of-range connection, the out-of-range short-out (0.2 seconds) and the out-of-middle change (3 seconds), which are the change types indicated by the change pattern command output from the main controller 110 Three types of effects: "normal effect", "single out-of-place opportunity" effect, and "out-of-two continuous opportunity effect" as the effect mode in association with the value of the chance eye number counter 223qv and the value of the effect counter 223rv. Aspects are defined.

  More specifically, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is "outside short variation", the value of the chance number counter 223 qv is "0, 1", and the value of the effect counter 223 rv is In the case of “0 to 79”, “normal effect” is selected as the effect mode.

  In the "normal effect", an effect of notifying the player that the result of the current lottery is out within a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds is executed. Specifically, an effect (a failure effect) in which the third symbol display device 81 can not acquire a mode (for example, a V mark) indicating a big hit (a failure effect) or an embodiment in which each display portion 331a to 331d of the effect portion 331 shows a gap. Is displayed at the same time.

  In addition, since this "normal effect" is a change for a short time of 0.2 seconds, the effect that the next change is executed without emphasizing and notifying the player that the result of the lottery is out of order May be used. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's willingness to play is reduced when the "outside short fluctuation" is continuously executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 199 (b), the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "out-of-short variation" and the chance number counter 223 qv is "0, 1", the effect counter 223 rv. When the value of is “80 to 99”, “single-shot opportunity for outliers effect” is selected as the effect mode.

  This "out-of-place single-shot chance effect" is an effect that is executed when the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "0, 1", that is, when the chance is stopped once or less due to the previous fluctuation. , 0.2 seconds after the start of the change is an effect that the chance eye is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the value of the chance number counter 223 qv is “1”, when the “out-of-place single-shot chance effect” is executed, the chance number is twice for the previous variation and the current variation. The display is stopped and the value of the chance number counter 223 qv is added to be “2”. Therefore, for example, when "performing short variation" is selected as the next variation, and "performing for single shot chance eye effect" is performed as the presentation mode, the chance is displayed three times and stopped over three variations. It is possible to perform a jackpot after having

  Next, when the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is "outside short variation", the chance number of times counter 223 qv is "2", and the value of the effect counter 223 rv is "0 to 99" The “normal effect” is selected as the effect mode. Since this "normal effect" is the same effect mode as the "normal effect" at the time of the out-of-short variation described above, the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, when the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is "outside short fluctuation" and the chance number counter 223 qv is "2", that is, the chance number is twice at predetermined intervals. In the case of selecting the effect mode of "displacement short fluctuation" in the state of stop display, it is defined that the effect mode in which the chance eye is stop displayed is not selected. This is to prevent the chance screen from being stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals across a plurality of fluctuations. As a result, the effect mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed is executed a plurality of times continuously, and the chance eyes are plural at predetermined intervals across the plurality of fluctuations even though the lottery result is out. It is possible to eliminate the situation where the display is stopped once. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a highly reliable rendering mode.

  On the other hand, in the case where the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is "outside short fluctuation" and the value of the chance number of times counter 223 qv is "2", the above-mentioned does not matter regardless of the value of the effect counter 223rv. The “normal effect” which is the same effect mode as the “normal effect” is selected.

  Next, when the change type indicated by the change pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “outside middle change” and the value of the chance number counter 223 qv is “0”, the value of the effect counter 223 rv is “0 to 0”. In the case of 59 "," Normal production "is selected, in the case of" 60 to 89 "," One-shot chance for out-of-focus chance effect "is selected, and in the case of" 90-99 "," For two consecutive chance eyes for off-feature "is selected. Ru.

  This "out-of-place single-shot chance rendition" is an effect mode in which the chance is stopped after 0.2 seconds from the start of fluctuation, and "out-of-round second consecutive chance rendition" is shown in FIG. 195 (b). As shown, it is an effect mode in which the chance eyes are stopped 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. As a result, since the effect mode corresponding to the out-of-middle change can be made halfway to be similar to the effect mode corresponding to the middle change, the player is made interested in the effect mode up to the end of the change. And the effect of the pachinko machine 10 can be enhanced.

  When the change type indicated by the change pattern command output from main controller 110 is “outside middle change” and the value of chance number counter 223 qv is “1”, the value of effect counter 223 rv is “0 to 59”. In the case, “normal effect” is selected, and in the case of “60 to 99”, “single-shot opportunity for outliers” is selected.

  Finally, if the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is “outside middle variation” and the value of chance number counter 223 qv is “2”, regardless of the value of effect counter 223 rv "Normal production" is selected.

  Referring back to FIG. 197 (a), the description will be continued. The additional region selection table 222g is referred to in determining an increasing hit pocket in the "increment effect" for increasing the hit pocket of the rotary member executed in the "preparation mode" (S6001 in FIG. 203). As described above, this "incremental effect" is an effect of adding (adding) the number of winning pockets (the number of lucky numbers) in the roulette chance production, and the roulette chance is achieved by adding the winning pockets (lucky numbers). It can be made to seem as if it becomes easier to hit by the rendition (it becomes easier to shift to the “continuous mode”). Therefore, this is an effect that can increase the player's expectation for the roulette chance effect.

  In the third control example, in determining the additional (additional) winning pocket (lucky number) in the "increase effect", a region where it is easy to be added (easy selection region) and a region where it is difficult to be added (hard selection region) Is different from the above-described first control example in that a configuration is added in which the hit pocket (lucky number) to be added (added) by the “addition effect” is intentionally biased (not equalized).

  As described above, 30 pockets provided on the rotating member 640 by providing a configuration for intentionally biasing (not equalizing) the hit pockets (lucky numbers) to be added (added) by the “increase effect” It is possible to intentionally provide an area (place) in which the setting of the hitting pocket is large and an area (place) in which the setting of the hitting pocket is small with respect to the pockets P1 to P30). Therefore, since the area which is easy to hit by roulette chance effect (the area with many settings of the hit pocket) and the area which is hard to hit (the area with the few settings of the hit pocket) will pass, Looks interesting and can enhance the stage effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 199 (b), the details of the additional area selection table 222g will be described. FIG. 199 (b) shows the defined contents of the additional area selection table 222g. In the additional area selection table 222g, "easy selection area" and "hard selection area" are defined in association with possible values of the effect counter 223rv.

  More specifically, the “easy selection area” is associated with the range of the value of the effect counter 223rv of “0 to 74”. As described above in the first control example, the effect counter 223rv is configured of a loop counter that can take 100 values of "0 to 99". Among these, since the value for which the “easy selection area” is selected is 75 of “0 to 74”, the probability (proportion) that the “easy selection area” is selected by the additional area selection table 222 g is 75% (75/100) ).

  The “difficult selected area” is associated with the range of “75 to 99” of the value of the effect counter 223rv. Of the 100 possible values of the effect counter 223rv, since the value for which the “difficult area” is selected is 25 of “75 to 99”, establishment of the “refractory area” selected by the overlay area selection table 222 g Is 25% (25/100).

  That is, for example, in the case of adding (increasing) four hit pockets (lucky numbers) by "add on effect", an average of three from the "easy selection area" and an average of one hit pocket from the "hard selection area" (lucky Number) will be selected. Thus, it is possible to bias the pocket against the area where the easy selection area is set. The configuration for dividing 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotation member 640 into the "easy selection area" and the "hard selection area" will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 200 and 201, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 200 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 200, the third control example is different from the control examples described above in that the content of the hit position storage area 223k is partially changed, the chance eye number counter 223qv and the effect counter 223rv. It is different in the added point. The other contents are the same as those of the above-described control examples, so the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the hit position storage area 223k in which the contents are partially changed in the third control example will be described. The hit position storage area 223k is a storage area for storing the type (whether it is a hit pocket or an out-of-pocket) of each pocket P1 to P30 of the rotary member 640 in the "representative mode suggestive effect" as described above. It is. In the hit position storage area 223k, the hit position is set based on the pocket stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x in the hit pocket sorting process 3 (S3102 in FIG. 202). Next, differences with the above-described first control example will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 201 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the hit position storage area 223k. In the third control example, the category corresponding to each pocket P1 to P30 is stored, and each pocket P1 to P30 is configured to be divided into a "first area" and a "second area". . As shown in FIG. 201, the "first area" is an area including pockets P1 to P15, and the "second area" is an area including pockets P16 to P30. By reading out the stored information stored in the hit position storage area 223k configured in this way, in addition to the types set in the pockets P1 to P30, the information is set in each area (first area, second area) It becomes possible to grasp the number of hit pockets. In this control example, at the start of the increase effect (when only the hit pocket stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x is reflected as the hit position), the number of hit pockets included in the first area and the second area is set. An area in which the number of hit pockets is set is determined is set as the above-described easy selection area, and an area in which the number of hit pockets is small is set as the hard selection area. Thus, the increase presentation can be performed in a state where the number of pockets included in the easy selection area is larger, so that the arrangement of the hit pockets can be biased to the easy selection area.

  Referring back to FIG. 200, the description will be continued. The chance eye number counter 223 qv is a counter that counts the number of times the chance eye has been stopped and displayed across a plurality of fluctuations in the above-described “chance eye continuous presentation”. The value of the chance eye number counter 223 qv is referred to in the variation pattern selection process (S6106 in FIG. 206), and when “chance eye effect” is determined, a value corresponding to the determined “chance eye effect”, ie, A value corresponding to the number of times the chance is stopped and displayed in the determined variation pattern is added (S6109 in FIG. 206). Then, in the case where the “chance effect presentation” is not determined, that is, when the normal presentation is determined, the value of the counter is initialized (S6110 in FIG. 206). Although not shown, the value of the counter is also initialized when the jackpot is executed in a state where the value of the chance number counter 223 qv is not initialized.

  In this control example, the value of the chance number counter 223 qv is initialized when the chance effect is not determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the value of the number-of-chances counter 223 qv may not be initialized until a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses since the last display of the chance eye is stopped. In this way, when the chance eyes are broken, it is possible to set a period in which the chance eyes do not appear at least for 5 seconds, so that it is possible to recognize more clearly whether the chance eyes are continuous or not. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misidentifying the continuous number of chance eyes, so it is possible to provide a more easily understandable effect.

  The effect counter 223 rv is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for selection of various effects (“chance continuous effect”, “superimposed effect”, etc.), various lottery, etc. It is configured as a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99 in the main process (see FIG. 145) of the apparatus 113. By using this effect counter 223rv, randomness can be secured when selecting various effects.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Third Control Example>
Next, various control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 202 is a flow chart showing the third embodiment (S3011) of pocket distribution processing to be executed instead of the pocket distribution processing (see FIG. 160) in the first control example in the state command processing (see FIG. 159). In the processes of S3101 and S3102 among the process of distributing the pocket in this process, the same processes as the processes of S3101 and S3102 in the process of distributing the pocket on the pocket (see FIG. 160) in the first control example described above are executed. Ru.

  Also, in the hit pocket distribution process 3 (see FIG. 202) in this control example, after the read pocket is set to the hit position of the hit position storage area 223k by the process of S3102 (S3102), The number of pocket pockets included in the first area and the second area is calculated (S3121). For example, if the pockets stored in designated pocket storage area 223x are pockets P9, P10, P11, P20 and P28, three pockets are included for the first area (pockets P1 to P15). It is calculated that two pockets are included in the second region (pockets P16 to P30).

  When the process of S3121 is completed, it is then determined whether the number of pocket pockets included in the first area is larger than that of the second area, based on the number of pockets in each area calculated in the process of S3121 (S3122) ). If it is determined in the process of S3122 that the first area has a larger number of pocket hits (S3122: Yes), the first area is set as the easy selection area and the second area is set as the hard selection area. (S3123), the process proceeds to S3103.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3122 that the number of pocket hits is larger in the second area than in the first area (S3122: No), the second area is set as the easy selection area and the first area is set. After setting the difficultly selected area (S3124), the process proceeds to S3103.

  That is, in the processing of S3122 to S3124, processing is performed to set an area having a large number of hit pockets as an "easy selection area" in which the hit pocket can be easily added (added) in "add on effect". As a result, it is possible to further bias the area in which the hit pocket is set with respect to the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotation member 640, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the number of hit pockets set in the first area and the second area is the same, "easy selection area" and "hard selection area" may be set randomly, or a predetermined area May be set to be the “easy selection area”. Also, the number of types corresponding to the hit position stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x is set to be an odd number, and the number of hit pockets set for the first area and the second area is not the same. It may be configured.

  Further, in the third control example, a configuration is used in which the "easy selection area" and the "hard selection area" are set based on the number of hit pockets set in the first area and the second area defined in advance. However, when the hit pocket is added (added) by “add on effect”, any configuration may be used as long as the area in which the hit pocket is located is biased, for example, the center where the hit pocket is continuously set. The "first area" may be set to

  This makes it possible to set the "first area" and the "second area" based on the contact pocket position, and therefore, for 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotating member 640. It is possible to further bias the area in which the hit pocket is set, and to improve the rendering effect.

  Returning to FIG. 202, the description will be continued. In each process of S3103 and S3104, the same process as each process of S3103 and S3104 in the first control example described above is executed. Then, if it is determined in the process of S3104 that the value of the overlay counter is greater than 0 (S3104: Yes), an overlay position determination process is executed to determine an increase (overlap) pocket (S3125). ). Details of the additional position determination process (S3125) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S3125 is completed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the additional counter 233av (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3104. After that, the processes of S3104, S3110, and S3125 are repeatedly executed until the value of the superimposition counter 223av becomes zero.

  Next, the details of the additional position determination process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the additional position determination process (S3125). This additional position determination process (S3125) is a process for determining the position of the winning pocket to be added (added) in the "increase effect".

  In the additional position determination process (S3125), first, the additional area selection table 222g is read (S6001), and the additional area corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223rv is determined (S6002). Specifically, when the value of the acquired effect counter 223rv is "0 to 74", the area set in the "easy selection area" is determined as the additional area, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223rv is "75". In the case of ~ 99 ", the area set in the" difficult area "is determined as the overlay area (see FIG. 199 (b)). As described above, the easy-to-select area and the hard-to-select area are set according to the arrangement of the hit pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x at the start of the increase effect.

  After the process of S6002, the hit position storage area 223k is read out to determine whether there is a place where the number of consecutive hits is 5 or more, that is, a place where 5 or more consecutive hit pockets are present (S6003). ). If it is determined in the process of S6003 that there is no place where the number of consecutive hits is 5 or more (S6003: No), one additional position is selected from the pockets in which the type of detachment is set (S6004) .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6002 that there is a place where the number of consecutive hits is 5 or more (S6003: Yes), five consecutive hits are made out of the pockets for which the type of disconnection is set. One additional position is selected from out-of-place pockets other than the front and rear one places (S6005).

  Here, the process executed in S6005 will be described. In the third control example, when executing roulette chance effect, the hit pockets are continuously set in order to drop the ball B into the designated pocket (hit pocket or out pocket) without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. The upper limit of the number is set to five. If the hit pocket is made too continuous, it will take time for the hit pocket to pass through the continuous position, and if it gets out due to the roulette chance effect, the swinging motion of the ball B will stop while passing Or, there is a risk that it will be a rocking motion with extremely small amplitude. In this case, the fact that the ball B does not fall and remains at the upper portion of the holding piece 677 looks extremely unnatural, which may cause the player to feel distrustful. Therefore, it is necessary to control so that six or more hit pockets do not continue by the addition during execution of "the increase production". Then, the situation where the pocket set as a hit pocket has already been continued is grasped, and the position of the hit pocket to be added (added) is set by the "increase effect". Thereby, the roulette chance presentation can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  When the process of S6004 or S6005 is finished, the hit position storage area 223k is updated so that the selected additional position becomes the hit position (S6006), and the process is ended. This additional position determination process is also executed in the special figure 2 winning command process 3 (S2121) shown in FIG.

  Next, special figure 2 winning command processing 3 (S2121) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 145) of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. Among the special figure 2 winning command process 3 (S2121), in each process of S3201 to S3208, it is identical to each process of S3201 to S3208 of the special figure 2 winning command process (refer to FIG. 161) in the first control example described above. Processing is performed.

  Then, if it is determined in the process of S3208 that the addition is performed (S3208: Yes), the addition position determination process is executed (S3221), and then the process ends. Since the additional position determination process executed in S3221 is the same as the additional position determination process performed in S3125 described above, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the third control example, the additional position determination process is executed also in the special figure 2 prize command process 3 (S2121), so 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P1) provided on the rotating member 640 With respect to P30), it is possible to further bias the area in which the hit pocket is set, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  In the special figure 2 winning command process 3 (see FIG. 204) described above, the superposing position determination process is executed when it is determined in the process of S3208 that the superimposing is performed, but at this timing The “easy selection area” and the “hard selection area” may be set again. As a result, it is possible to further bias the area in which the hit pocket is set with respect to the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotation member 640, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206, fluctuation display setting processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The variation display setting process 3 is different from the variation display setting process of the first control example described above in that a variation pattern selection process (S3321) is added. In this variation pattern selection process (S3321), a process of selecting a variation pattern for executing the above-mentioned "chance line continuous presentation" is executed.

  First, FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 (S1641) executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. In the processes of S3301 to S3303 of the variable display setting process 3, the same processes as the processes of S3301 to S3303 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example described above are executed.

  When the process of S3303 ends, next, a variation pattern selection process (S3 21) for selecting an effect mode corresponding to the current variation pattern command is executed. Details of the variation pattern selection process (S3321) will be described later with reference to FIG. When this variation pattern selection process (S3321) is finished, the processes of S3 05 to S3 10 are then executed, and the present process is ended. In the processes of S3305 to S3310, the same processes as the processes of S3305 to S3310 in the first control example described above are performed.

  Next, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection processing (S3321) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern selection process. As shown in FIG. 206, when the variation pattern selection process is executed, first, it is determined whether the time saving state flag 223o is set to ON, that is, whether the "continuous mode" is in progress (S6101).

  If it is determined that the time saving state flag 223o is set to ON (S6101: Yes), a table for continuous use corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern is read out from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (S6105). Specifically, for example, if the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 indicates a variation type (variation pattern) corresponding to "per-middle variation", then the variation pattern selection table 222a generates a large hit from the continuous pattern Table 222a3 is read out.

  Next, the value of the effect counter 223rv and the value of the chance number counter 223qv are read (S6106), and the effect mode corresponding to the read values of the counters (the effect counter 223rv and the chance number counter 223qv) is determined (S6107) . Specifically, for example, when the table 223a3 for consecutive jacks during the large jackpot is read out, the value of the obtained performance counter 223rv is "60", and the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "1", “2 consecutive chance eye effect presentation” is selected (see FIG. 198).

  When the process of S6107 described above is finished, it is then determined whether a chance eye effect is determined (selected) as the current effect mode (S6108). If it is determined in the process of S6108 that the chance eye effect is determined (selected) (S6108: Yes), the corresponding value is added to the chance number counter 223qv (S6109), and the process proceeds to S6111.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6108 that the chance eye effect is not determined (selected) (S6108: No), the value of the chance number counter 223 qv is initialized (S6110), and the process proceeds to S6111.

  On the other hand, if the time saving state flag 223o is not set to ON (set to OFF) in the process of S6101 (S6101: No), a table for normal use corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern is selected as a fluctuation pattern selection. It reads from the table 222a (S6102). Specifically, for example, if the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 indicates a variation type (variation pattern) corresponding to "outside middle variation", for middle outlier from the variation pattern selection table 222a The table 222a2 is read.

  After the process of S6102, the value of the effect counter 223rv is read (S6103), the effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223rv read is determined (S6104), and the process proceeds to S6111.

  After the processing of S6109, S6110, or S6104 is executed, in the processing of S6111 to be executed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the effect mode determined in each processing is set (S6111), and this processing is ended. Do.

  As described above, in the third control example, when the addition is determined and the hit pocket is determined in the increase effect, a section having a high ratio of the hit pocket is intentionally provided. Here, if the arrangement of the hit pockets is determined completely randomly, there is a possibility that the hit pockets may be evenly distributed to the entire rotating member 640. In this case, even when the ball B falls from the holding piece 677, there is no difference in the degree of expectation of falling into the hitting pocket. That is, even if the ball B is caused to perform the rocking motion and the player predicts the section (pocket) in which the ball B falls from the cycle (amplitude) of the rocking motion, the degree of expectation can not be differentiated. There is a risk. Therefore, there is a problem that the rendering effect of the swing production is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, since the section having a high percentage of the hit pocket is intentionally provided, the arrangement of the section having the high percentage of the hit pocket and the swing operation performed by the ball B on the upper portion of the holding piece 677 It is possible to make the player watch over the correspondence with the momentum (cycle) more carefully. That is, the position (section) where the ball B falls is predicted from the period (amplitude) of the rocking operation, with the expectation that the position (section) where the ball B falls is a section where the percentage of the hit pocket is high. Can. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest to the player's game while the swing effect is being executed.

  Further, in the third control example, in the “run mode” in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is mainly executed, the chance eye is continuously displayed one or more times for which the chance eye is stopped and displayed. . Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine capable of executing effects of the same system over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a variable display for the number of holding balls held at the start of presentation) , "Continuous notice production"). In such a conventional game machine, the player can be expected to have a sense of expectation over a plurality of fluctuations, depending on the number of times the same system of effects is executed, the contents of the effects, and the like. However, in the conventional game machine, the number of times the effect is executed, the effect time, and the like depend on the holding balls, so that the continuous advance notice effect is applied to the game machine that does not have the function of holding the lottery result in the first place. I could not In addition, in the conventional game machine, it is possible to execute an effect of an aspect as if a plurality of variable displays are being performed pseudo in a single variable display, and the pseudo operation of the multiple times is configured. Some of the continuous notice effects described above are executed with one variable display by executing the effect of the same system in the variable display. In this conventional game machine, continuous notice effects can be executed regardless of the number of balls held, but since it is necessary to execute effects within the range of fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display, a sufficient effect period is secured. There is a problem that it may be difficult.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, a specific effect (effect in which a chance is displayed) can be executed one or more times in one variable display. Then, when the variable display is performed, whether or not a specific effect is set for the variable display, and the number of times of execution in the case of executing the specific effect are performed prior to the variable display. The determination is made based on the history of the specific effect. And based on the lottery result of the special symbol which becomes the trigger of the said variable display, it is set as the structure which changes the maximum continuous frequency | count of specific presentation by the case of a dropout and the case of big hit. By configuring in this manner, in the variable display based on the drawing of the special symbol 2 in which the drawing result of the special symbol is not held, the player can continuously receive the specific effect over the plurality of variable displays. Can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  Also, in the present control example, when the display of the chance eye is determined in the short variation with a variation time of 0.2 seconds, the chance eye is 0.5 seconds after the 0.2 second pattern variation is executed. Stop display. In addition, when the chance continuous effect is determined in the middle change with a change time of 3 seconds, the pseudo change period (0.2 second) and the chance eye temporary stop period (0.5 second) have a change period of 3 seconds. It is set one or more times during. In this way, the pseudo fluctuation period during the middle fluctuation and the settling time become the same as the fluctuation time (period) (0.2 seconds) of the short fluctuation and the settling time (period) (0.5 seconds), respectively. As a result, it is possible to display the chance eye stop display in the middle fluctuation without a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In addition to the pseudo fluctuation period and the temporary stop period, as the pseudo effect performed during middle fluctuation, since the pseudo stop period which artificially represents the period when new symbol fluctuation is not started is provided, the lottery of the special symbol is memorized In the case of using a non-conventional configuration (a configuration in which the variable display is performed discretely (non-continuously) even if the ball is punched out continuously without having a storage function). Can be expressed.

  In the third control example, when it is determined that the next short fluctuation is hit and the short fluctuation is performed in a state where the short circuit fluctuation for disconnection for which the “chance number effect production” is set is performed twice consecutively, Is configured so as to be settable, and in the case where the next fluctuation is out and the short fluctuation is made, it is configured so as not to set the “opportunity effect presentation”. That is, only when the special symbol is a big hit, it is permitted to stop and display the chance eyes three times in a row, and when the special symbol lottery is out, the number of consecutive chance eyes is limited to two times. To be configured.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the continuous number of chance eyes, so it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. In addition, regardless of whether a chance line continuous effect is set in the middle change or a short line change in which the stop display of the opportunity is set is repeated several times, the chance line is displayed multiple times (three times) at a predetermined interval. It can be prevented (suppressed) from being done. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate effect.

  In the third control example, as described above, the control for restricting the stop display of the chance is performed on the continuous variable display, but other configurations may be used, for example, After the chance eyes are displayed twice in a row, the presentation mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed as the presentation mode corresponding to the change won by the disconnection is not selected until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. You should do it. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate effect.

  In the third control example, the interval at which the chance eyes stop is set to be a predetermined interval as “the chance series continuous effect”, but another configuration may be used, for example, a predetermined period (for example, A plurality of timings at which the chances are stopped are provided within 3 seconds, which is the fluctuation time in which middle fluctuation is executed, and a predetermined number of times (three times) may be stopped and displayed at any one of the timings. You may configure it. As a result, it becomes difficult to grasp at what timing the chance eye is displayed during the change of the special symbol, so it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored early in the game.

  In addition, as the display mode of the chance eye in the case where the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the color of the third symbol to be stopped and the color of the background are made plural patterns beforehand, and the chance eye displayed in the specific display mode is 1 If the display is stopped once, the same chance value may be given as when the normal chance eye is displayed three times. As a result, when it became difficult for the chance eyes to be stopped and displayed for a predetermined number of times, that is, even if the chance eyes were not stopped and displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation was started, the jackpot was won Because it is possible to execute the effect of notifying that, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the third control example, although the chance eye displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as an object appearing a plurality of times (three times) at predetermined intervals (1.4 seconds), The upper lift unit 300 may be moved at a predetermined interval, for example, as long as it can be recognized by a person. As a result, it is possible to suggest the result of the lottery using a configuration other than the display of the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect with enhanced interest.

  Furthermore, in the case of using a configuration for moving the movable accessory attached to the pachinko machine 10, such as the upper lift unit 300, in addition to a configuration in which the same operation (swinging motion) is performed multiple times, for example, By moving the movable part a predetermined number of times, the movable part may be moved to the final stage. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to recognize that the jackpot is approaching the player, so it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  In addition, even in the case of using the configuration in which the predetermined display mode (such as the chance eye) is stopped and displayed a plurality of times by the third symbol display device 81 as in the third control example, the predetermined display mode is stopped and displayed The third symbol display device 81 may display the number-of-times display displaying the number of times performed and the target display displaying the number of stop display of the predetermined display mode necessary to notify that the player has won the jackpot. As a result, each time the predetermined display mode is stopped and displayed, it is possible to recognize that the jackpot is approaching the player, so it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  In the third control example, since the process of counting the number of chances is executed with respect to the continuously executed variation, the variation in which the presentation mode in which the chances are displayed is stopped is selected multiple times continuously In this case, the chances can be stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times across a plurality of fluctuations, and the production modes are controlled so that the predetermined number of chance eyes are not stopped and displayed by the rendering mode corresponding to the fluctuation winning the off Because it is doing, the effect of presentation is enhanced.

  As described above, the configuration is such that the stop display effect of the chance eye is executed for the fluctuation continuously executed, and the stop display effect of the chance eye is performed for the fluctuation executed within the predetermined period. May be That is, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of selecting a variation pattern having a short variation time as in the third control example, even if non-continuous variation is used, a predetermined number of chances can be stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals. It is. In the case of using such a configuration, a presentation mode in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed a plurality of times in a predetermined period is determined in advance, and the chance eye is displayed in a variable display corresponding to the timing at which the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the presentation mode. To stop it.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to preferably perform the chance eye continuous presentation using the non-continuous fluctuation. In addition, when using this structure, it is good to provide some tolerance | permissible_range in the timing by which the chance eye | ball is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to increase the fluctuation that makes it possible to execute the chance series continuous rendering, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  Also, in the third control example, when "out-of-middle variation" is determined in the "sequential opportunity continuous presentation", one or two chances are the first (0.2 seconds after the variation is started) Although it is configured to be able to stop display at the stop display timing after the second time (1.6 seconds after the start of the change) or the second time (for example), the third time (the change is started The chance eye may be stopped and displayed at the stop display timing of 3 seconds after that). With this configuration, it is possible to stop and display a plurality of chances at predetermined intervals across the middle fluctuation and the short fluctuation.

  In addition, in the third control example, when executing “superimposition effect”, a configuration is provided in which the hit pockets (lucky numbers) intentionally added (added) by the “superimpose effect” are intentionally biased (not evenly). In the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotating member 640, intentionally provide an area (place) where the setting of the hitting pocket is large and an area (place) where the setting of the hitting pocket is small Can. Therefore, since the area which is easy to hit by roulette chance effect (the area with many settings of the hit pocket) and the area which is hard to hit (the area with the few settings of the hit pocket) will pass, Looks interesting and can enhance the stage effect.

Fourth control example
Next, with reference to FIGS. 207 to 214, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. In the first control example described above, the control and presentation modes in the “normal mode” and the “preparation mode” have been mainly described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, a method of improving the player's interest by the effect using the character (upper lifting unit 300) as one aspect of the entertainment effect in the "continuous mode". explain.

  Further, in the first control example described above, the position of the hit pocket to be added when the hit pocket addition is determined in the increase effect performed in the first half (20 seconds from the start of the effect) of the "continuously mode-prompted effect" The point is to be determined randomly within a range in which the hit pocket does not become 6 consecutive or more. Then, in the case of dropping the ball B in the roulette chance effect, after the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion of the ball B becomes sufficiently small, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 may be determined to drop the ball B. The ball B is held on the holding piece 677 until the possible pocket reaches a position before the dropping position (0.2 seconds before reaching the dropping position).

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 in the roulette chance effect is reversely calculated in advance during the execution of the increase effect, and the winning pocket is determined. Here, to describe the back calculation method in detail, since it becomes the throwing operation timing of the throwing device 650 70 seconds after the start of the “in-line mode suggestive effect”, the ball B can be dropped after the swinging operation, About 75 seconds to about 82 seconds after the start of the "Renso mode suggestive effect". Therefore, when performing the addition of the hit pocket in a state where the transition to the “continuous mode” is determined, the drop position is about 75 seconds to 82 seconds after the start of the “continuous mode mode suggestive effect”. A pocket to be placed (or a pocket close to the dropping position) is determined from the current elapsed time and the rotational speed of the rotating member 640 to be determined as the superimposed position. On the other hand, when the transition to the “continuous mode” is not determined, the superposing position is determined avoiding the pocket predicted to be placed in the dropping position after about 75 seconds to about 82 seconds described above. As described above, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 at the start time of the “continuously mode suggestive effect” is different depending on the pocket in which the ball B is dropped in the previous “continuously mode suggestive effect”. By arranging the rotating member 640 and configuring the elapsed time to be grasped, it is possible to easily predict the pocket to be disposed to the dropping position after about 75 seconds to 82 seconds. As a result, the ball B can be dropped into the pocket that hits or falls out accurately, depending on whether or not to shift to the "continuous mode".

  In the first control example described above, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 (pocket arranged at the falling position) by the combination of the outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F of the rotational position detection sensor 684 It was configured to identify. As a result, when performing lighting control of the rear surface LED 625, only the lighting region disposed on the back side of the pocket set to the hitting pocket can be accurately set to the lighting state according to the arrangement of the rotating member 640. The player was able to easily recognize the hit pocket from the appearance. In addition, also when dropping the ball B, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is determined, and the drawing result of the special symbol executed in the "preparation mode" (ie, whether or not to shift to the "continuous mode") It was configured to be able to fall into the appropriate type of pocket accordingly.

  In addition to this, in the fourth control example, when detection results of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are acquired, the detection results are displayed on the next pocket (current fall It is configured to hold until the pocket (a pocket placed in the dropping position next to the pocket placed in the position) is placed in the dropping position. Then, the held detection result is compared with a new detection result obtained by arranging the next pocket to the drop position, and the presence or absence of abnormality is determined. That is, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined by determining whether the previous detection result and the current detection result are the detection results of consecutive (adjacent) pockets. Thereby, damage to the detection sensors A to F (or damage to the detected portion 641c) can be detected.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in configuration in that the configuration of the RAM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed The partial process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electric configuration in the fourth control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 207, the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. As shown in FIGS. 207 (a) to 207 (d), the ROM 222 of this control example has the variation pattern selection table 222a and the operation with respect to the configuration (see FIG. 118 (a)) of the ROM 222 in the first control example. The difference is that the contents of the scenario table 222b are partially changed. The contents of the other ROM 222 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. Hereinafter, the same parts as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 207 (a). FIG. 207 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a of the fourth control example. Similar to the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in the first control example, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in the fourth control example is roughly represented by the fluctuation pattern command based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110. It is a data table used to determine more detailed variation content from the variation content (variation time).

  As shown in FIG. 207 (a), the variation pattern selection table 222a in the present control example is composed of a normal middle / large jackpot table 222a1, a normal dropout table 222a2, and a continuous variation fluctuation pattern selection table 222a5. There is.

  In the normal middle-large hit table 222a1, based on the change pattern command output from the main control unit 110, a detailed effect aspect corresponding to change types of 7 seconds and 10 seconds is defined (shown in FIG. ). Here, the presentation mode defined in the normal middle-large hit table 222a1 will be described. First, a seven second stop pattern and a ten second stop pattern are defined as the stop patterns of symbols variably displayed on each of the display portions 331a to 331d of the effect portion 331 in the normal middle-large hit table 222a1.

  The 7-second stop pattern is a stop pattern in which the symbols variably displayed on each of the display portions 331a to 331d are stopped and displayed at equal intervals, and the 10-second stop pattern is the last one of the display portions 331a to 331d. The time from the symbol (for example, “2”, “7”, “13”) corresponding to the lucky number is stopped and displayed on the display unit other than the display unit 331 d to be stopped until the symbol is stopped on the display unit 331 d is long It is a stop pattern to be set.

  In addition, the normal dropout table 222a2 also has a detailed effect corresponding to the change types of 7 seconds and 10 seconds based on the change pattern command output from the main control unit 110 similarly to the normal medium / big hit table 222a1. Aspects are defined (not shown).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are selected as the fluctuation patterns to be selected when the player wins a middle-large win. The ratio is defined to be about 1 to 1 (see FIG. 111 (a)), and the fluctuation pattern selected in the case of normal dropout is a fluctuation pattern of 7 seconds and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds. It is defined that the rate at which the variation pattern of is selected is approximately 3 to 1 (see FIG. 111 (b)). Thus, when the 10-second stop pattern is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 207 (b), details of the continuous change pattern selection table 222a5 will be described. The continuous pattern variation pattern selection table 222a5 is a variation pattern selection table to be referred to in the "continuous pattern mode" in which time is short.

  As shown in FIG. 207 (b), when the change type is a hit short change (0.2 seconds), a normal big hit effect is set for the value “0 to 99” of the effect counter 223sw. When the change type is the hit middle change (3 seconds), the upper swing effect is set for the value “0 to 99” of the effect counter 223sw. When the variation type is out of range and the short variation (0.2 seconds), an out-of-order effect is normally set for the value "0 to 79" of the effect counter 223sw, and the value "80 to 99" in the effect counter 223sw. On the other hand, the upper swing effect, which is an effect mode accompanied by the operation of the upper moving unit 300, is set. When the fluctuation type is out of position and middle fluctuation (3 seconds), a normal off effect is set for the value “0 to 89” of the effect counter 223 sw, and the upper portion for the value “90 to 99” of the effect counter 223 sw. The swing effect is set.

  Here, the upper swing effect is an effect in which the upper swing operation in which the elevating body 330 of the upper lift unit 300 moves up and down is performed a predetermined number of times. Specifically, in the case where a variation in which the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is executed, the upper swing operation is performed 3 times (0 seconds after the start of the variation, 1.4 seconds after, 2.8 seconds after) The upper swing effect is performed. In the upper swing effect performed when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed once or twice is performed. As described above, since the number of times of the upper swing operation when the upper swing effect is set is made different depending on whether or not it becomes a big hit, it is possible to pay attention to the number of the upper swing operation. That is, the upper elevating unit 300 can be observed in hope that the upper swing operation is performed three times in a row. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the "continuous mode".

  Next, the contents of the operation scenario table 222b in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 207 (c). As shown in FIG. 207 (c), the operation scenario table 222b in the fourth control example swings to the upper part with respect to the configuration of the operation scenario table 222b in the first control example described above (see FIG. 119 (a)). The difference is that an effect table 222 b 8 is added. The upper swing presentation table 222b8 is a table to be referred to when the upper swing presentation performed in the present control example is set.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 207 (d), the defined contents of the upper swing presentation table 222b8 will be described. Similarly to the other data tables defined as the operation scenario table 222b, the upper swing presentation table 222b8 is a motor control IC (motor driver for each value of the operation pointer 223g indicating the progress of setting based on the operation scenario). The set values (operating speed (pps), the number of operation steps, and the operating direction) to be set for are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 207 (d), an operation for moving down the elevator 330 of the upper elevator unit 300 from the ascent position (origin position) to the down position to the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g (operation of the forward path) Are associated. Specifically, 635 pps is defined as the operation speed, 127 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when it is time to drive the upper lifting unit 300 in the upper swing effect. Note that step 127 means the number of steps up to the lowered position.

  Here, the operating speed 635 pps means that the motor driver outputs a signal instructing the upper lifting motor 341 to drive for one step at a frequency of 635 pulses (steps) per second, so The time required for the elevating body 330 of the elevating unit 300 to perform the 127-step operation (move from the origin position to the lowered position) is 127/635 seconds (0.2 seconds).

  The value (02H) of the movement pointer 223g is associated with an operation (operation on the return path) for raising the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 from the lowered position to the raised position (origin position). Specifically, 635 pps is defined as the operation speed, 127 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. Therefore, the elevating body 330 of the up and down elevating body unit 300 moves from the lowered position to the raised position in 0.2 seconds. Further, END data is associated with the value "03H" of the action pointer 223g. By reading out the END data, it is determined that the execution of all the operations defined in the operation scenario is completed.

  Thus, in the upper swing effect, the lift 330 of the upper lift unit 300 is lowered from the raised position to the lowered position in 0.2 seconds, and then is lowered from the lowered position to the raised position in 0.2 seconds. It is an effect that the swing operation of 0.4 seconds in total is performed a predetermined number of times (three times in the case of a big hit, and one or two times in the case of a loose hit). As described above, this upper swing production is executed as a production that suggests an expectation of becoming a big hit during the continuous mode.

  Thus, whether or not the swing operation is performed at a predetermined timing (after 0 seconds (immediately after the start of fluctuation), after 1.4 seconds, after 2.8 seconds) after the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed (started). The player can be made interested in the game.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. In contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 118B), the RAM 223 in the present control example has an upper swing presentation timer 223pw, an upper swing presentation flag 223qw, and a sensor information storage area 223rw. , And the effect counter 223sw is added, the other configuration is the same. The same parts as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The upper swing effect timer 223pw is a timer counter for counting (counting) the effect time of the upper swing effect (the elapsed time from the start of the effect). The upper swing presentation timer is initialized to 0 when the upper swing presentation is determined in the variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213) (see S6135 in FIG. 213), and the upper swing presentation is executed. When the upper swing presentation process (see FIG. 214) is executed, the upper swing presentation process is added by one each time (see S6204 in FIG. 214).

  The upper swing effect flag 223qw is a flag for determining whether or not the upper swing effect is being executed. The upper swing effect flag 223qw is an upper portion in the variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213). It is set to ON when the swing effect is determined (see S6133 in FIG. 213), and it is determined that the upper swing effect has ended in the upper swing effect process (see FIG. 214) (big hit is started In the case (S6201: Yes), the third rocking operation timing (S6207: Yes)) is set to OFF (S6202, S6208).

  The sensor information storage area 223 rw is an area for storing (updating) the output values of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684, and the output values of the detection sensors A to F It is configured to be able to store (update) at least once. In the sensor information storage area 223 rw, the output values of the detection sensors A to F are stored (updated) in the rotation setting process 4 (see FIG. 210) (see S2836 in FIG. 210).

  Although the details will be described later, in the rotation setting process 4 (see FIG. 210), the output values of the detection sensors A to F stored last time are compared with the output values of the current detection sensors A to F (S2833 in FIG. And the presence or absence of abnormality with respect to the detection values of the detection sensors A to F). Specifically, it is determined whether the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F and the current output values of the detection sensors A to F match, and if they match, no abnormality, no match Is determined to be abnormal.

  Here, the output values of the detection sensors A to F are a total of six pieces attached to a total of five pockets including the pocket at which the ball B falls and the two right and two left pockets of the pocket. It changes with the presence or absence of to-be-detected part 641c. As shown in the rotational position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121), when the pocket to be the drop position changes by one, the detection target 641c which has been detected by the detection sensors A to E is the detection sensor B to It is moved to the position detected by F. The to-be-detected part 641c currently detected by the detection sensor F remove | deviates from the detection range of detection sensor AF, and the new to-be-detected part 641c is moved to the position detected by the detection sensor A. Therefore, when the output values of the detection sensors A to E do not match the output values of the detection sensors B to F after one pocket at the falling position has changed, a defect such as breakage of the detected portion 641 c Can be determined to have occurred.

  The effect counter 223 sw is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for selection of various effects (such as “upper swing effect” and the like, various lottery and the like, and although not shown, the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 4 (see FIG. 209) is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. 209 to 214. First, main processing 4 executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The main process 4 in the fourth control example includes an upper swing presentation process (S1651) added to the main process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example, and a command determination process (S1614). In place of rotation setting processing (see FIG. 157), rotation setting processing 4 (S2609, see FIG. 210) is executed, and in place of special figure 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161) in command determination processing (S1614) The special figure 2 prize command processing 4 (S2117, refer to Figure 211) is executed, the point which executes the fluctuation indicator setting processing 4 (S1652, refer to Figure 212) instead of fluctuation indicator setting processing (S1615) And the other parts are identical. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the main process 4 in the fourth control example, after the processes of S1601 to S1610 are performed as in the main process (see FIG. 145) of the first control example, the upper lifting unit 300 is used in the “continuous mode”. The upper swing presentation process for setting the created presentation is executed (S1651), and the process proceeds to S1611. The details of the upper swing presentation process (S1651) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Also, in main processing 4 (see FIG. 209) in the present control example, after executing the processing of S1611 to S1614, in place of the fluctuation display setting processing (see FIG. 162) in the first control example, fluctuation display setting processing 4 is performed. The process is executed (S1652), and the process proceeds to S1616. The details of the variable display setting process 4 (S1652) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 210, the details of the rotation setting process 4 (S2609) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. Rotation setting processing 4 (S2609) in the fourth control example is processing that is executed instead of the rotation setting processing (see FIG. 157) in the first control example in the execution command processing (see FIG. 155), Similar to the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157), this is a process for controlling the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 (and the rear LED 625).

  In rotation setting processing 4 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example, the processing of S2831 is executed instead of the processing of S2801 with respect to the rotation setting processing (see FIG. 157) in the first control example, and S2832. To S2836 are added, and the other points are the same. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals will be given to the same parts, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When this rotation setting process 4 (S2609) is started, first, it is determined whether or not all the outputs of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 have changed from the L state. (S2831). That is, it is determined whether each detection target 641c provided in the pocket is displaced from outside the detection range of the detection sensors A to F within the detection range, and all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F remain in the L state. When it is determined that (each detected portion 641c is arranged outside the detection range of the detection sensors A to F) (S2831: No), a new (next) pocket is arranged at the falling position of the ball B (If the output value of the detection centers A to F is stored in the sensor information storage area 223 rw last time) the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the rotating member 640 is less than or equal to the unit rotation amount (rotation amount of movement by one pocket) In this case, the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2831, when all the output values of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are L, the output of at least one of the detection sensors A to F is If it is determined that H has been displaced to H (S 2831: Yes), if a new (next) pocket is placed at the falling position of the ball B (previous detection center A to F in the sensor information storage area 223 rw Since the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotary member 640 is the unit rotation amount since the time when the output value is stored, in this case, the process proceeds to S2802. In addition, even if the output values of the detection sensors A to F are not all L, if the output values of any of the detection sensors A to F change from L to H (S2831: No), already, Since this is the case where the processing after S2802 is executed, in this case, the present processing ends.

  In the process of S2802, the pocket at the falling position of the ball B is specified as in the first control example (S2802), and the rotational position storage area 223u is updated based on the specified pocket (S2803). Next, it is determined whether or not the detection by the detection sensors A to F after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is the first time (S2832). Specifically, it is determined whether an initial value is stored in the sensor information storage area 223 rw. In the sensor information storage area 223 rw, L (0) is set to all bits of a storage area of 2 bytes as an initial value when the power is turned on. In the process of S2832, when L (0) is stored in all the bits allocated to the sensor information storage area 223 rw, it is determined that this is the first detection.

  In the process of S2832, if it is determined that the detection by the detection sensors A to F is not performed for the first time after the power is turned on (that is, the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F are stored) (S2832) : No), the output value of the previous detection sensor A to F stored in the sensor information storage area 223 rw (before the pocket position changes by one), and this time, any pocket is newly disposed at the drop position The output values of the detection sensors A to F displaced as a result of comparison are compared (S2833). Specifically, as described above, among the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F, five types of output values of the detection sensors A to E and the detection sensor B of the output values of the current detection sensors A to F The five output values of ~ F are compared. The drop position can be determined only from the detection results of the detection sensors A to F for the pocket placed at the previous drop position and the detection results for the pocket placed at the current drop position, with respect to the detection result of the sensor It is because to-be-detected part 641c currently detected by detection sensor AE is moved to the position detected by detection sensor B-F, when the pocket which becomes one changes. Therefore, when the output values of the detection sensors A to E do not match the output values of the detection sensors B to F before one pocket at the falling position changes, at least one of the detected portions 641 c is damaged. Then, it can be determined that a defect such as the detection sensor can not be detected.

  When the process of S2833 ends, it is then determined whether the comparison result executed by the process of S2833 is abnormal (S2834). Specifically, it is determined that there is no abnormality if the output values of the previous detection sensors A to E and the current output values of the detection sensors B to F match, and that the output values of the previous detection sensors A to E do not match. If it is determined in the process of S2834 that the comparison result is abnormal (S2834: Yes), error information is output (a display error command is set) (S2835), and the process proceeds to S2836.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2832 that the detection by the detection sensors A to F is the first time (S2832: Yes), the process of S2833 to S2835 is skipped because comparison with the previous detection result is impossible. Then, the process proceeds to step S2836. If it is determined in the process of S2834 that the comparison result is normal (S2834: No), the process of S2835 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2836.

  In the process of S2836, the value of the sensor information storage area 223 rw is updated based on the current output values of the detection sensors A to F, and the process proceeds to the process of S2804. In the processing of S2804 to S2808, the same processing as the processing of S2804 to S2808 of the first control example is executed, and the present processing is ended.

  Thus, in the rotation setting process 4 in the fourth control example, a plurality of detection information (output values) of the detection sensors A to F can be stored in the sensor information storage area 223 rw, and predetermined timing (any pocket Within the detection information (the detection information of the detection sensors A to F stored last time and the detection information acquired this time) obtained at the timing when the object is placed at the fall position, the same detection information will be obtained. By comparing the detection information in the range), it is possible to detect the failure of the detection sensors A to F or the breakage of the detected portion 641c.

  In the fourth control example, a configuration is used that compares the previous detection information (pocket placed at the previous drop position) with the current detection information (pocket placed at the current drop position). The detection information may be compared at three or more timings (for example, this time, the timing when the pocket was placed at the drop position last time and the last time), and in this way, it is possible to make an abnormality more accurately. The presence or absence of can be determined.

  Furthermore, in the fourth control example, failure of the detection sensors A to F or breakage of the detected portion 641 c using detection information (output values) of the detection sensors A to F used to specify a pocket of the rotating member 640 Since it is comprised so that abnormality detection like this may be performed, it is not necessary to acquire separately the detection information for detecting abnormality of detection sensor AF or the to-be-detected part 641c. Therefore, the processing load by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  The configuration for detecting the failure of the detection sensors A to F or the breakage of the detection portion 641c is the combination of the detection result obtained when the pocket was placed at the drop position last time and the pocket falling this time The present invention is not limited to a mode in which a combination of detection results obtained when being arranged at a position is compared to determine the presence or absence of abnormality. For example, the arrangement pattern of the detected portion 641c is stored (stored) in advance. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which it is determined whether an output value (detection information) output from at least one of the detection sensors A to F matches a previously stored arrangement pattern. Even with this configuration, the same effect as that of the fourth control example can be obtained.

  Further, based on the output values (detection information) of the detection sensors A to F stored in the sensor information storage area 223 rw, prediction detection information in which at least a part of detection information to be stored next is predicted is created, and the prediction detection It may be determined whether or not the information matches the detection information stored next time.

  Next, special view 2 prize command processing 4 (S2117) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The special figure 2 winning command process 4 (S2117) in the fourth control example is different from the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the first control example (see FIG. 161) in S3231 to S3234 instead of the process of S3209 to S3211. The difference is that the processing is performed, and the other points are the same. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals will be given to the same parts, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special figure 2 prize command processing 4 (S2117) in the 4th control example is started, first, processing of S3201-S3208 is executed like the 1st control example. Then, in the process of S3208, when it is determined to be to be added (S3208: Yes), a pocket that falls within the fallable range is specified from the throwing operation timing of the throwing device 650 (S3231). Here, the timing at which the throwing device 650 performs the throwing operation (the ball B is thrown to the holding piece 677) is 50 seconds after the roulette chance effect presentation is started (70 seconds from the start of the “continuously suggestive presentation effect” Later). Then, after the ball B is thrown, the period from the swinging operation on the holding piece 677 to the falling of the ball B is about 7 seconds to 10 seconds. Therefore, for example, if the processing of S3231 is executed 5 seconds after the "continuously mode suggestive effect" is started, the throwing device 650 performs the throwing operation 65 seconds later, and after 72 seconds to 75 seconds. It can be determined that the ball B falls. Then, the rotation member 640 rotates at a rotation speed that can move by one pocket in one second. For this reason, in this example, the ball B drops after performing rotation operations for 72 to 75 pockets (that is, 12 to 15 pockets ahead of the pocket currently positioned at the drop position) Then it is determined. Note that in the process of S3231, seven pockets including the margin are determined as the droppable range. For example, in the above-mentioned specific example, the pocket of eight to seventeen is determined to be the fallable range. That is, two margins are taken forward and backward.

  When the process of S3231 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a holding ball which is a probability variation jackpot in the "preparation mode" (when the time saving state counter is larger than 0) (S3232). In the processing of S3232, when it is determined that there is a holding ball which is a probability variation jackpot in the "preparation mode" (S3232: Yes), the pocket specified in the processing of S3231 is selected as the additional position (S3234), and the processing of S3212 Transition to

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3232 that there is no holding ball that will be a positive jackpot in the preparation mode (S3232: No), a pocket different from the pocket specified in the process of S3231 is selected as the superposing position (S3233) ), Shift to the processing of S3212.

  After the process of S3212, the process of S3212 and the process of S3213 are performed as in the first control example, and the process ends.

  Thus, in special processing 2 prize command processing 4 (S2117) of this control example, when it is determined in the processing of S3232 that there is a holding ball which is a probability variation jackpot in the "preparation mode" (ie, in roulette chance effect production When dropping the ball B into the pocket), the pocket in the fallable range specified in the process of S3231 is selected as the superposing position. Thereby, since the pocket which becomes a fall possible range can be added as a hit position, there are many hit pockets (lighted pockets) in the range which can be dropped at the time of the effect of dropping the ball B (roulette chance effect) It will be arranged. As a result, it becomes easy to drop the ball B into the hit pocket (the lit pocket).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3232 that there is no holding ball that is a probability variation jackpot during the preparation mode (ie, the ball B falls into the out-of-pocket pocket in the roulette chance effect production), A pocket different from the pocket which is the fallable range is selected as the superposing position. Since the pocket which becomes a fall possible range is not added as a hit position by this, it comes out of the range which becomes fallable at the time of the effect (roulette chance production effect) which drops the ball B (pocket which is extinguished) Will be placed a lot. As a result, it becomes easy to drop the ball B into the disengaging pocket (the extinguished pocket).

  As described above, in the special view 2 prize command processing 4 (see FIG. 211) in the fourth control example, the range in which the ball B can fall is calculated based on the throwing operation timing of the throwing device 650 in the roulette chance effect effect. The 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotating member 640 are divided into a range (first area) where the ball B can fall and a range (second area) where the ball B does not fall (hard) It is classified.

  Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not there is a hold that is a probability variation jackpot during the preparation mode, that is, based on the determination result as to whether the ball B is made to hit or fall into the pocket or out pocket by the roulette chance effect, Since the area to be added is set to either the first area or the second area, even if the frequency of the effect of adding (adding) the winning pocket is increased, the ball B is appropriately applied to the lottery result of the special symbol. Can be dropped.

  In the fourth control example, as the first area which is the fallable range of the ball B, the range which is more than five which is the number of hit pockets (lucky numbers) which can be designated by the player (ie, pocket 7) Is configured to set the number of pieces). By this, even if the player sets the lucky number to five consecutive pockets and the consecutive five pockets are all included in the possible drop range (the first area), the fallable range (the first range) can be obtained. It is possible to set at least one outset pocket in one area). Therefore, it becomes possible to drop the ball B appropriately to the lottery result of a special symbol.

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process 4 (S1652) in the present control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Variable display setting processing 4 (S1652) in the fourth control example executes fluctuation pattern selection processing 4 (S3331) in place of the processing of S3304 with respect to the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. The other points are the same. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals will be given to the same parts, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the variable display setting process 4 (S1652) in this control example, as in the first control example described above, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on in the process of S3301 (S3301: Yes), from S3302 The processing of S3303 is executed. Then, the variation pattern selection process 4 is executed (S3331), and the process proceeds to the process of S3305, and the processes of S3306 to S3310 are performed as in the first control example, and the process is ended. The variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) is a process for selecting a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Details of the variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The flowchart of FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection processing 4 (S3331) described above. The variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) is a modification of a partial process of the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 206) in the third control example. Specifically, instead of the process (S6106, S6108 to S6110) relating to the chance item effect, it is different in that the process (S6131 to S6135) relating to the upper swing effect is changed, and the other The points are the same. Hereinafter, the same parts as those in the third control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331), first, it is determined whether or not the time saving state flag 223o is on (S6101). If it is determined in the process of S6101 that the time saving state flag 223o is off (S6101: No), the effect mode for normal use is determined as in the variation pattern process (refer to FIG. 206) in the third control example. Then (S6102 to S6104), a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined effect mode is set (S6111), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6101 that the time saving state flag 223o is on (S6101: Yes), the table for consecutive loafing (variation pattern selection table for consecutive loaf 222a5) is read from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S6105). Then, the value of the effect counter 223sw is read out (S6131), and the effect mode is determined based on the read out continuous change pattern selection table 222a5 and the value of the effect counter 223sw (S6107).

  Next, it is determined whether the upper swing effect flag 223 qw is off and the effect mode determined in the process of S6107 is the upper effect mode (S6132). If it is determined in the process of S6132 that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is on (that is, the upper swing effect is already being executed) or the upper swing effect is not determined in the process of S6107 ( S6132: No, a variation pattern command for display for notifying a normal jackpot effect as an effect mode is set (S6111), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6132 that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is off and the upper swing effect is determined (S6132: Yes), the upper swing effect flag 223qw is turned on. The setting is made (S6133), and the upper swing operation is set (S6134). By setting the upper swing operation in the process of S6134, the elevating body 330 of the upper lift unit 300 is vertically moved based on the upper swing presentation table 222b8 of the operation scenario table 222b described above.

  Thereafter, the upper swing presentation timer 223pw is initialized to 0 (S6135), and a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined presentation mode is set (S6111), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) in the present control example, when the upper swing effect is determined (S6132: Yes), the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 is set to move up and down. At the same time, the upper swing presentation timer 223pw is initialized to zero. The elapsed time from the start of the upper swing effect is measured using the upper swing effect timer 223pw, and the upper lift unit 300 is again operated when a predetermined time (1.4 seconds or 2.8 seconds) has elapsed. An upper swinging operation can be performed to move the lifting body 330 up and down.

  Next, the details of the upper swing presentation process (S1651) in the present control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the upper swing presentation process (S1651), when the upper swing presentation is determined (started) in the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) described above, a predetermined time from the start of the upper swing presentation (in this control example) It is a process for measuring the progress of 1.4 seconds and 2.8 seconds and performing the upper swing operation when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the upper swing production process (S1651), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit game has been started (S6201). If it is determined in the process of S6201 that a big hit game has been started (S6201: Yes), although a top swing effect has been started, then a big hit game has been started due to the occurrence of a big hit due to a short circuit fluctuation Since this is the case, in order to end the upper swing effect, the upper swing effect flag 223qw is set to OFF (S6202), and the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6201 that the jackpot game has not been started (S6201: No), it is then determined whether the upper swing presentation flag 223qw is on (S6203).

  If it is determined in the process of S6203 that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is off (S6203: No), since the upper swing effect has not been started, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6203 that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is on (S6203: Yes), the process moves to the process of S6204 to execute the upper swing effect.

  In the process of S6204, the value of the upper swing presentation timer 223pw is incremented by 1 (S6204). This upper swing presentation process (S1651) is a process that is executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 209) executed by the above-described audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the value of the upper swing presentation timer 223pw is added every 1 ms by the process of S6204.

  When the process of S6204 is finished, it is then determined whether the value of the upper swing presentation timer 223pw after the addition is 1400 (S6205). That is, it is determined whether or not 1.4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the upper swing effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S6205 that the value of the upper swing presentation timer 223pw after the addition is 1400 (S6205: Yes), the upper portion of the upper lifting unit 300 is operated to move the lifting body 330 up and down. The swing operation is set (S6206), and the process proceeds to the process of S6207.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the upper swing presentation timer 223pw is not 1400 (S6205), the process of S6206 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S6207. In the process of S6207, it is determined whether or not the value of the upper swing presentation timer 223pw is 2800 (S6207). That is, it is determined whether or not 2.8 seconds have passed since the start of the upper swing effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S6207 that the value of the upper swing presentation timer 223pw is 2800 (S6207: Yes), it is the end timing of the upper swing presentation, so the upper swing presentation flag 223qw is turned off. The setting is made (S6208), and the process proceeds to the process of S6209.

  In the process of S6209, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation that causes a big hit is being executed (S6209). If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation is being executed in the process of S6209 (S6209: Yes), the upper swing operation is set (S6210).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot variation is not executed in the process of S6209 (S6209: No), the process of S6210 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Here, the upper swing effect in the present control example is an effect in which the upper swing operation in which the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 moves up and down is performed up to three times as described above. If this upper swinging operation is performed three times, it is limited to the case of a big hit after that, and the upper swinging operation is performed three times, thereby informing the player that the big hit has been won. it can.

  The process of S6209 is executed at the first upper swing operation (immediately after the upper swing effect starts) of the upper swing effects and at the second time (after the upper swing effects are started) 1.4. Second) is performed. In this case, if the fluctuation which is a big hit is under execution, the upper swing operation is set to execute the third upper swing operation (after 2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect start). (S6210).

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation that causes the big hit is not executed (S6209: No), the upper swing effect is not set, and the present process is ended. As a result, it is possible to prevent such a problem that the upper swing effect is performed three times in which the upper swing operation is performed, although it does not become a big hit thereafter.

  As described above, the upper swing presentation performed by the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331 in FIG. 213) and the upper swing presentation process (S1651 in FIG. 214) of the fourth control example is output from the main control device 110. The first upper swing operation is executed based on the variation pattern command, and the second upper swing operation is performed based on the passage of a predetermined time (1.4 seconds) after the upper swing effect is executed. To be executed. Then, when a predetermined time (1.4 seconds) elapses after the second upper swing operation is executed, the third upper swing operation is performed when the variation of the special symbol winning the jackpot is executed. Is configured to be performed.

  Thus, the upper swing effect configured by the operation mode (upper swing operation) performed a plurality of times (three times) at predetermined intervals (1.4 seconds) is a variation pattern of a special symbol (variation time) It can be performed without being affected by

  Therefore, as in the case of "performing middle fluctuation (fluctuation time 3 seconds)" selected by the continuous change pattern selection table 222a5, three upper swing operations are completed during one change as the upper swing effect. In the case other than the above case, the upper swing effect is started by the “outside short fluctuation (fluctuation time 0.2 seconds)”, and the “short circuit fluctuation (fluctuation time 0.2 seconds) different from the fluctuation at which the upper swing effect is started. Even when the upper swing effect is started 2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect, it is possible to execute the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed three times.

  Therefore, notification that the predetermined operation result (upper swing operation) is executed a plurality of times (three times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 seconds) is a notification notifying that a predetermined lottery result (big hit) has been won. The effect (upper swing effect) can be executed across a plurality of fluctuations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, even if a configuration in which the lottery of the special symbol is not stored (a configuration without a so-called hold storage function) is used as in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, an effect that associates multiple variations of the special symbol Can be performed.

  In addition, the configuration of the fourth control example may be used for the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration (configuration for storing and retaining) a lottery (winning information) of special symbols, and for example, the third upper swing operation is performed At the timing at which it is determined, it is determined whether or not there is winning information for a big hit among the winning information stored on hold, and if there is winning information for a big hit, the third upper swing operation is It may be configured to be executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the upper swing effect, in which the upper swing operation is performed three times, is performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the fourth control example, although the second upper swing operation is necessarily performed 1.4 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect, for example, the upper swing effect is started. If 1.4 seconds have passed since it is determined whether the special symbol is in motion, and it is determined that the second swing operation is performed when it is determined that the special symbol is in motion It is also good. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is executed is the effect related to the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and it is possible to enhance the effect. effective.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 in the roulette chance effect is reversely calculated in advance during the increase effect, so that the winning position of the hitting pocket is determined. That is, when the ball B is thrown, the period (amplitude) of the rocking operation performed on the upper part of the movable piece 677 becomes smaller, and the timing (period) that looks natural when the ball B is dropped is calculated back. The position where the hit pocket is to be added is determined from the back-calculated period and the result of the present roulette chance presentation (whether or not to shift to the “continuous mode”). Here, after the amplitude of the rocking motion of the ball B is simply reduced, the process waits until the pocket type corresponding to the result of the current "continuous mode suggestion effect" is placed at the drop position, and the corresponding pocket type is If the ball B is dropped at the timing of being placed at the dropping position, the ball B may be stopped before the ball B is dropped because the corresponding pocket type is not placed at the dropping position for a long time. There is. That is, there is a risk that the ball B will look extremely unnatural, i.e. not falling into the pocket even though it is stationary.

  On the other hand, in this control example, a section in which the ball B can be dropped (a section disposed at the dropping position when the cycle of the swing operation of the ball B becomes equal to or less than a predetermined cycle) At the start of the “mode indication effect”, when the hit pocket is increased by the increase effect, the distribution between the hit pocket and the out pocket in the section where the ball B can be dropped (the addition is determined In this case, whether or not to set the pocket newly in the section concerned is determined according to the result of the effect (whether the ball B is dropped to the pocket or dropped to the out pocket). By configuring in this way, it is possible to surely arrange the pocket of the type corresponding to the rendering result in the section where the ball B can be dropped. Therefore, the cycle (amplitude) of the rocking motion of the ball B becomes equal to or less than a predetermined cycle (1 second), and the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target pocket before the rocking motion of the ball B stops. it can. Therefore, the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance and with high accuracy.

  In the fourth control example, when the detection results of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are acquired, the detection results are placed in the next pocket (disposed at the current drop position) It is configured to hold until the pocket) placed in the dropping position next to the pocket being placed is placed in the dropping position. Then, the held detection result is compared with a new detection result obtained by arranging the next pocket to the drop position, and the presence or absence of abnormality is determined. That is, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined by determining whether the previous detection result and the current detection result are the detection results of consecutive (adjacent) pockets. Thereby, damage to the detection sensors A to F (or damage to the detected portion 641c) can be detected.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, as one aspect of the entertaining effect in the “continuous mode”, the interest of the player is improved by the effect using the character (upper lift unit 300). Specifically, it is possible to execute an effect of raising and lowering the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 at a predetermined time interval (1.4 seconds interval) one or more times. The number of operations of the elevator 330 varies depending on whether it is a big hit or not, and in the case of detachment, the number of operations is 2 times or less, and in the case of a big hit, 3 lifting operations are permitted. Thus, the player can play the game paying attention to the number of times of the lifting and lowering operation of the lifting and lowering body 330, so that it is possible to suppress that the game in the "continuously running mode" becomes monotonous. .

  The effect (upper swing effect) in which the elevating body 330 moves up and down is determined a number of times regardless of the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol unless the jackpot is started (even if the variation time has elapsed) The lifting operation is continued until the predetermined time interval (1.4 seconds interval) is executed. Therefore, as in the case of "performing middle fluctuation (fluctuation time 3 seconds)" selected by the continuous change pattern selection table 222a5, three upper swing operations are completed during one change as the upper swing effect. In the case other than the above case, the upper swing effect is started by the “outside short fluctuation (fluctuation time 0.2 seconds)”, and the “short circuit fluctuation (fluctuation time 0.2 seconds) different from the fluctuation at which the upper swing effect is started. Even when the upper swing effect is started 2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect, it is possible to execute the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed three times. Therefore, notification that the predetermined operation result (upper swing operation) is executed a plurality of times (three times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 seconds) is a notification notifying that a predetermined lottery result (big hit) has been won. The effect (upper swing effect) can be executed across a plurality of fluctuations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the fourth control example, a section in which the ball B can be dropped (the cycle of the rocking motion of the ball B is in a state of a predetermined cycle or less) during the execution of the "in-line mode suggestion effect" In the case where the hit pocket is newly set, the position of the new hit pocket is determined in consideration of the section in which the ball B falls, in addition to this. Is there any change in the section where the ball B will fall at a predetermined timing (for example, the start time of the roulette chance effect presentation, the throwing timing of the ball B by the throwing device 650, etc.) May be determined. Then, in a section where the ball B is predicted to fall at the time when the hit pocket is newly set, and at a predetermined timing (for example, the start time of roulette chance effect presentation, the throwing timing of the ball B by the throwing device 650, etc.) When the ball B is out of alignment with the section predicted to fall, the deviation may be corrected. As a method of correcting the deviation, for example, by varying the rotational speed of the rotating member 640, a section in which the ball B can actually fall is made to coincide with the section predicted when the hit pocket is added. The ball B may actually fall by shifting the pitching timing by the pitching device 650 from a predetermined timing (that is, 70 seconds after the start of the “in-situ mode suggestion effect”). The section may be configured to coincide with the section predicted when the hit pocket is added. By configuring in this way, it is possible to ensure that the ball B looks more natural (the cycle of the rocking motion of the ball B is equal to or less than the predetermined cycle and the appearance of the range in which the ball B is not stationary). It can be dropped into the pocket.

  In this control example, when the detection results of the detection sensors A to F are acquired, the next pocket (the pocket placed next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position) falls when the detection result is dropped The configuration is such that the presence or absence of abnormality is determined by holding the position to the position and comparing it with the new detection result acquired by the next pocket being arranged at the drop position. The determination method is not limited to this. For example, every time when the detection results of the detection sensors A to F are acquired, a combination of the detection results of the pocket to be disposed next at the falling position is predicted in advance from the disposition of the rotating member 640 specified by the detection result. It is good also as composition. That is, a combination of outputs of the detection sensor of the pocket to be placed next to the falling position may be read out from the rotational position determination table 222c and stored in the RAM 223. Then, when the next pocket is actually disposed at the falling position, the combination of the output of the detection sensor previously predicted (stored in the RAM 223) matches the combination of the output of the actual detection sensor. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is. With this configuration, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth control example, the presence or absence of an abnormality such as breakage of each of the detection sensors A to F or breakage of the detected portion 641c can be accurately determined. . Further, for example, all combinations of outputs of the detection sensors A to F are stored in the order of arrangement of the pockets, and detection results according to the order of arrangement of the pockets each time a new pocket is arranged at the fall position It may be configured to determine whether With such a configuration, it is possible to easily determine the presence or absence of abnormality in the detection sensors A to F and the detection target 641 c. Furthermore, for example, when the rotating member 640 makes one rotation, it may be configured to determine whether or not at least a part of the detected portion 641c is damaged by determining the number of times the detected portion 641c is detected. . As described above, the detection target portion 641c is provided in 16 of the 30 pockets. Therefore, when the rotary member 640 makes one rotation, the outputs of the detection sensors A to F should be H 16 times each. Under this circumstance, if it is determined that the number of H outputs per round is less than 16 times, any one of the detection portions 641c becomes undetectable by the detection sensors A to F due to breakage or the like. There is a high possibility of Therefore, in this case, by reporting the abnormality, it is possible to promptly cope with a failure such as breakage of the detected portion 641c. Furthermore, at the time of one rotation, the number of times each of the detection sensors A to F is in the H output state may be compared to determine whether the numbers coincide. Since the number of times the output is in the H state during one rotation (the number of times each detected portion 641c is detected) should be common to all the detection sensors, if the number of times of detection does not match, any detection sensor It can be determined that a failure such as a failure has occurred in the Therefore, the defect of detection sensor AF can be discriminate | determined easily.

  In the fourth control example, in the "representative mode suggestive effect" in which the effect time is fixed, the rotating member 640 is rotated at the start of the effect, and a rough section in which the ball B falls is predicted from the effect time or the like. However, the presentation time and the timing for starting the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 may not be fixed. For example, the control of the fourth control example can be applied also to a configuration in which variation is given to the rendering time of "continuously mode suggestive rendering" and one rendering time is determined by lottery. That is, when the rendering time is determined, a rough section in which the ball B is dropped may be predicted based on the rendering time and the rotation speed of the rotating member 640. Similarly, even when a plurality of effect patterns having different one or both of the rotation timing and the timing for starting the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 are provided, the timing at which the rotation operation is started is from the presentation time The time until the ball B is thrown may be reversely calculated, and a rough section in which the ball B is to be dropped may be predicted from the rotational speed of the rotating member 640. By configuring in this way, when a hit pocket is added, a new hit pocket may be arranged so that a pocket of the type that drops the ball B is surely included in the section predicted in consideration of the rendering result. it can. Therefore, the ball B can be dropped with respect to the pocket of the type corresponding to the rendering result in each "continuously mode suggestive rendering". Furthermore, the control of the fourth control example is performed even when the timing at which the rendering time in the "Running mode suggestive effect" is determined is later than the timing at which the rotation member 640 starts the rotation operation. Can be applied. That is, at the timing when the rendering time is determined, the section in which the ball B may fall is roughly predicted from the rotational speed of the rotating member 640, and the type corresponding to the presentation result for the predicted section The configuration may be such that the top of the hit pocket is placed so that the second pocket is placed. As a result, the ball B can be dropped into the pocket corresponding to the rendering result without fail before the ball B completely stops the rocking motion.

<Fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 215 to 225, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. In the first control example described above, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 is moved to the connection position in the case where a part of the big hits (a big hit where the open pattern A is set) becomes The configuration is such that the ball that has won the winning device 82 a is used as a flow-down passage for flowing to the second passage forming member 422. In addition to this, in the present control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 is configured to move as an effect that suggests an expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. This can improve the player's interest.

  Further, in the first control example described above, when the ball B is dropped in the “continuous mode suggestive effect”, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is performed after the period (amplitude) of the rocking operation of the ball B becomes sufficiently small. And the ball B is held on the holding piece 677 until the pocket which can drop the ball B is at a position before the dropping position (0.2 seconds before reaching the dropping position). .

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, the drop position (pocket) at which the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect is set in advance. And according to the lottery result of a special symbol, it was constituted so that it might be decided whether a predetermined fall position was set as a hit position (whether it was made to light or not). As a result, since the ball B may be dropped to a predetermined pocket, the control process can be simplified.

  Further, in the first control example described above, the timing at which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 is constant (70 seconds after “the continuous play mode suggestion effect is started”). On the other hand, in this control example, in the roulette chance effect production, a period for receiving the operation of the frame button 22 (for example, 3 seconds in one roulette chance effect production) is provided, and the player operates the frame button 22 The ball B is thrown by the throwing device 650 when it is detected. In addition, during a period in which the frame button 22 can be received, a pitching depression effect (see FIG. 216) for urging the player to press the frame button 22 is executed. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period suggested by the pitch pressing effect, the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650. As a result, the player can throw the ball B to the rotating member 640 at any timing, so that the player's willingness to participate in roulette chance presentation can be improved.

  In addition, the timing (period during which operation of the frame button 22 is received) to start the pitching depression effect is determined based on the rotational position of the rotating member 640. As a result, the pitching depression effect can be started at a timing at which the pitching depression effect can be easily dropped to a predetermined falling position (pocket). In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 1.5 seconds) after the pitching depression effect described above is started, the timing at which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 is delayed. Configured. This makes it possible to limit the timing at which the ball B is thrown in the pitching depression effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem in which the ball B falls in a pocket other than a predetermined pocket.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configuration of the RAM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed The point is that the partial process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 215, an effect aspect of the notice effect by the left swinging unit 500 in the present control example will be described. As described above in the first control example, in the "normal mode" of the pachinko machine 10, the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is a big hit by the numbers (numbers) displayed for the effect part 331 of the upper lift unit 300. Informing you of the In addition to this, in this control example, it is possible to execute an effect (left swing effect) in which the left swinging unit 500 is moved up and down as an effect that suggests the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a big win It is done. In addition, as a left swing effect, a first left swing effect with a relatively low expectation for becoming a big win, and a second left swing effect with a high expectation for becoming a big win compared to the first left swing effect At least two types are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 215 (a), in the first left swing effect and the second left swing effect, first, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is at the release position and at the connection position from the release position. It is operated to rise to the middle position with. Thereafter, in the first left swing effect, the left swing unit 500 is moved downward from the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position to the release position.

  On the other hand, in the second left swing effect, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), the lifting operation is performed from the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position to the connection position. Then, the lower position is moved from the connection position to the release position.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present control example, the left swing effect (the first swing forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is moved according to the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit A left swing effect or a second left swing effect is performed. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the second left swing effect with a high degree of expectation of becoming a big hit is executed (it pays attention to whether the left swing unit 500 rises from the middle position), The interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 216, the pitching depression effect in the fifth control example will be described. The roulette chance production in the present control example is executed in the order of pitching preparation, pitching production, and swing production. As shown in FIG. 216 (a), in the pitching depression preparation effect, the characters “pitching chance!” Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying this pitching preparation effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect of throwing the ball B by pushing the frame button 22 (pitching depression effect) is executed. Although the details will be described later, the timing for shifting from the pitching preparation to the pitching pressing effect (that is, the timing when the pitching pressing effect is displayed) is based on the position information of the rotating member 640 and the information on the falling position storage area 223ex. Is determined. As a result, the pitching depression effect can be started so that the pocket to be dropped during the execution of the pitching depression effect for a total of 3 seconds (during effect) is disposed at the falling position.

  In the pitching depression effect, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), an effect that urges the player to press the frame button 22 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the frame button 22 is pressed while the pitching depression effect is being performed (displayed), the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650, and a transition to a rocking effect is made (see FIG. 216 (c)). On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is not pressed during execution of the pitch depression effect (during display), the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 after a predetermined time (3 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, and transition to rocking effect occurs (See FIG. 216 (c)).

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed before 1.5 seconds have passed since the pitch pressing effect was started, the ball B is thrown after 1.5 seconds have passed since the pitch pressing effect was started. (Ie pitching is delayed). On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is pressed 1.5 seconds after the pitching depression effect is started, the ball B is thrown at the timing of the depression. Thus, the timing at which the ball B is thrown can be limited to 1.5 seconds in the second half of 3 seconds. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a problem that the ball B falls in a pocket other than a predetermined pocket.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example
Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The ROM 222 of this control example is different from the configuration (see FIG. 118) of the ROM 222 in the first control example in that the contents of the left rocking unit table 222 b 3 are partially changed. The contents of the other ROM 222 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. Hereinafter, the same parts as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (a), the left rocking unit table 222b3 in this control example executes the first rocking unit table 222b3a for performing the first rocking effect and the second rocking effect. And a second left swing unit table 222 b 3 b for the purpose. Setting values (operating speed (pps), operation) to be set to the motor control IC (motor driver) in the left rocking unit table 222b3 for each value of the operation pointer 223g indicating the progress of setting based on the operation scenario The number of steps and the operation direction are defined.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 217 (b), the defined contents of the first left rocking unit table 222b3a will be described. As shown in FIG. 217 (b), in the first left rocking unit table 222b3a, the left rocking unit 500 is released from the release position (origin position) to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g from the release position and the connection position. An operation for moving up to the middle of the above (operation on the forward path) is associated. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. The setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when it is time to drive the left swing unit 500 in the first left swing effect. The 100 steps mean the number of steps from the release position to the intermediate position.

  Here, as described above, the operating speed (pps) indicates the frequency (the number of outputs per second) that the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) instructing the operation of one step to the corresponding drive motor . Therefore, it takes 100/200 seconds (0.5 seconds) to displace the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 by 100 steps at an operating speed of 200 pps and displace it from the release position to the intermediate position.

  The value “02H” of the movement pointer 223 g is associated with the movement for stopping (resting) the left rocking unit 500 at the intermediate position. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 1000 is defined as the operation step, and “stop” is defined as the operation direction. That is, it is defined that a stop command is continuously issued 1000 times continuously at an operation speed of 200 pps. Thus, the left rocking unit 1000 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 5 seconds (1000 times / 200 pps).

  The value (03H) of the movement pointer 223g is associated with an operation (operation on the return path) for lowering the left rocking unit 500 from the intermediate position to the release position (origin position). Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left swinging unit 500 is lowered from the intermediate position to the release position in 0.5 seconds.

  The END data is associated with the value "04H" of the action pointer 223g. By reading out the END data, it is determined that all operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  Next, contents of the second left rocking unit table 222b 3 b will be described with reference to FIG. 217 (c). As shown in FIG. 217 (c), the left swinging unit 500 is released to the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g in the second left swing unit table 222b3b, similarly to the first left swing unit table 222b3a. An operation (operation on an outward path) for raising from a position (origin position) to an intermediate position is associated. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left rocking unit 500 is raised from the release position to the intermediate position in 0.5 seconds (100 steps / 200 pps).

  The value “02H” of the movement pointer 223 g is associated with the movement for stopping (resting) the left rocking unit 500 at the intermediate position. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 500 is defined as the operation step, and “stop” is defined as the operation direction. That is, it is defined that the stop instruction is continuously output 500 times continuously at the operation speed of 200 pps. Thereby, the left rocking unit 500 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 2.5 seconds (500 times / 200 pps).

  The value “03H” of the movement pointer 223 g is associated with the movement for moving the left rocking unit 500 from the intermediate position to the connection position (movement on the outward path). Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left rocking unit 500 is raised from the intermediate position to the connection position in 0.5 seconds.

  An operation for stopping (resting) the left swinging unit 500 at the connection position is associated with the value “04H” of the action pointer 223 g. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 300 is defined as the operation step, and “stop” is defined as the operation direction. That is, it is defined that the stop instruction is continuously issued 300 times at an operation speed of 200 pps. Thereby, the left rocking unit 500 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 1.5 seconds (300 times / 200 pps).

  The value (05H) of the movement pointer 223g is associated with the movement (movement in the return path) for lowering the left swinging unit 500 from the connection position to the release position (origin position). Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 200 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left swinging unit 500 is lowered from the connection position to the release position in one second.

  The END data is associated with the value "06H" of the action pointer 223g. By reading out the END data, it is determined that all operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 (see FIG. 118B) in the first control example, the effect counter 223ax, the pitch pressing effect setting flag 223bx, the pitch pressing effect in-progress flag 223cx, and the delayed pitch flag 223dx And drop position storage area 223 ex are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The effect counter 223 ax is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for selection of various effects (such as “left swing effect”) and various lottery, etc. Although not shown, the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99 in (see FIG. 145).

  The pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx is a flag used to determine whether or not the setting of the pitching depression effect is to be performed. The pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx is set to ON in the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222) when it is the start timing of the pitching depression effect in the roulette effect (see S2003 of FIG. 222: Yes). The pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx is referred to in the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222), and when it is determined to be on (see S2023 of FIG. 222: Yes), the pitching depression effect setting process (see FIG. 223) Is executed. When the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 in the pitching depression effect setting process (see FIG. 223), the ball is set to off.

  The pitching depression effect flag 223cx is a flag for determining whether or not a pitching depression effect (see FIG. 216) prompting the player to depress the frame button 22 in order to throw the ball B is displayed. . When it is determined that it is the pitching timing of the ball B in the pitching depression effect setting process (see FIG. 223), the pitching depression effect flag 223cx indicates that the pitching depression effect is displayed (see S6404 of FIG. 223: Yes). Along with the setting (see S6406 in FIG. 223), it is set to ON (see S6407 in FIG. 223). The pitch pressing effect in-progress flag 223cx is referred to in the pitch pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 223), and when it is determined to be on (S6408 in FIG. 223: Yes), based on pressing the frame button 22. The pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is set (see S6414 in FIG. 223), and the process shifts to swing production. Even when the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6408: No), the throwing operation of the throwing device 650 is set based on the passage of a predetermined time (3 seconds in this control example) (see S6414 in FIG. 223). Move to production. Although details will be described later, the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is set to be delayed since pitching is not permitted for a certain period (1.5 seconds) after the pitching depression effect is started. Become.

  The delayed pitching flag 223dx is a flag for determining whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed outside the pitching allowable period of pitching pressing effect (period in which pitching is not permitted). When the frame button 22 is pressed outside the pitching allowable period of the pitching depression effect (within 1.5 seconds from the start of the pitching depression effect) in the pitching depression effect setting process (see FIG. 223), the delayed pitching flag 223dx is It is set to on (see S6410 in FIG. 223). In the pitching depression effect setting process (see FIG. 223), when the pitching permission period of the pitching depression effect is reached, it is referred to whether the delayed pitching flag 223dx is on (see S6412 in FIG. 223) and the delayed pitching flag 223dx is on. If it is determined that there is, the throwing operation of the throwing device 650 is executed. That is, the pitching operation is delayed and executed until the pitching allowable period. Thereafter, the delay throwing flag 223 dx is set to off (see S6415 in FIG. 223).

  The drop position storage area 223 ex is an area for storing information on a drop position (pocket) at which the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect. In the falling position storage area 223ex, the next holding ball (lottery result of the special symbol to be executed first) is the hit pocket distribution process 5 (refer to FIG. 224) executed at the start of the “continuously mode suggestive effect”. It is determined based on whether it is a definite variation jackpot or not. Specifically, if the next holding ball is a probability change jackpot, one of the pockets (pockets designated by the player) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223 av is set as the drop position (S 3122 in FIG. 224). If the next hold does not result in a big hit, the pocket other than the pocket stored in the designated pocket storage area 223 av is designated as the drop position (see S 3123 in FIG. 224). The drop position (pocket) stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is used to determine the start timing of the pitching depression effect described above (see S6404 in FIG. 223) or to increase the hit pocket in the increase effect (FIG. 224). Reference is made to S3124 and S3221 in FIG.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Fifth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. First, the drop control processing 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  The drop control process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and drops the ball B (see FIG. 147) in the same manner as the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example. Operation of the holding piece 677). The same parts as those in the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof will be omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  In the fall control process 5 in the fifth control example, first, the processes of S1801 to S1802 are executed as in the fall control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example. Then, the next pocket is calculated based on the pocket specified in the process of S1802 (S1831). Here, the next pocket means a pocket placed at the dropping position next to the pocket specified in the process of S1802, for example, when the pocket specified in the process of S1802 is the pocket P1 , Pocket P2 is identified as the next pocket. The calculation of the pocket is calculated with reference to pocket placement information (not shown) stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  After the process of S1831, the information on the pocket (pocket for dropping the ball B) stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is acquired next (S1832), and then stored in the drop position storage area 223ex It is determined whether the pocket and the pocket (next pocket) calculated by the process of S1831 match, that is, the pocket to be placed next at the dropping position is a pocket for dropping the ball B (S1833) ).

  If it is determined in the process of S1833 that the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex matches the pocket calculated by the process of S1831 (S1833: Yes), the process moves to S1806. On the other hand, in the process of S1833, if the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex does not match the pocket calculated by the process of S1831 (S1833: No), then the value of the oscillation timer 223w is 100. It is determined whether it is smaller than (corresponding to 0.1 second) (S1834). In the process of S1834, it is determined whether the interval at which H (high) is output from the ball detection sensor 679, that is, half of the cycle in which the ball B swings on the movable piece 677 is less than 0.1 second. There is. In this 0.1 second, the ball B moves the movable piece 677 during the time until the ball detection sensor 679 outputs H (high) until the timing for setting the falling operation of the next ball B comes. It is set as a value indicating that there is a possibility of stopping at the top.

  If it is determined in the process of S1834 that the value of the oscillation timer 223w is 100 or more (S1834: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the swing timer 223w is smaller than 100, that is, there is a possibility that the ball B may stop on the movable piece 677 (S1834: Yes), all of the lighting position storage area 223m Is cleared (all bits are set to L) (S1835), and the process shifts to the processing of S1806.

  Here, the process of S1835 described above will be specifically described. The lighting position storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the state (lighting state or light off state) of each lighting area A1 to A18 of the rear surface LED 625 (see FIG. 97) as described above. Lighting of each LED of the rear surface LED 625 is controlled according to the information stored in the lighting position storage area 223m. Therefore, all information in the lighting position storage area 223m is cleared (all bits are set to L) in the process of S1835, so that all the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear surface LED 625 are controlled to be turned off. .

  In the process of S1806, an operation setting in which the effect ball (ball B) is dropped after 100 steps is set, and then the ball drop enable flag 223fv is set to OFF (S1807), and this process is ended.

  As described above, in the drop control process 5 (see FIG. 219) of the fifth control example, the pocket for dropping the ball B in the roulette chance effect is stored in advance in the drop position storage area 223ex and then placed at the drop position. When it is determined that the pocket to be stored is the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex, the ball B is dropped. Thereby, since the ball B can be appropriately dropped to the preset pocket, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the ball B falls to the pocket other than the predetermined pocket.

  In the fifth control example, after the swing effect is executed, the condition for dropping the ball B is not satisfied (the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223 ex and the pocket calculated by the processing of S 1831) (The next pocket does not match), the amplitude of the sphere B swinging on the movable piece 677 has a predetermined size (in the present control example, the amplitude is such that half of the amplitude period is 0.1 seconds) When it becomes smaller, all the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear surface LED 625 are set to be in the extinguished state, and thereafter, a process (abnormal process) for dropping the ball B is executed. Thereby, the ball B can move the movable piece 677 during the swing production by continuing the situation where the ball B can not be dropped into the target pocket (the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223 ex) during the swing production. Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation of stopping at the top, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the swing effect performed based on the winning of the jackpot, when the process of S1835 described above is performed (all of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear surface LED 625 are set to be in the extinguished state), The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an effect notifying that the jackpot has been won after the swing effect is finished. Thereby, even when the ball B can not be dropped, it can be thought as if it is one aspect of notification in roulette chance production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the fifth control example, the dropping operation of the ball B is set when the pocket disposed at the dropping position next is the pocket stored in the dropping position storage area 222 ex, for example, The pocket specified based on the value (H (high) or L (low)) output from the detection sensors A to F and the rotational position determination table 222c, and the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 222ex The number of pockets separated may be calculated, and the timing of setting the falling operation of the ball B may be set based on the calculation result. With this configuration, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the fifth control example, it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the falling operation of the ball B using the number of steps output by the motor control IC (motor driver) of the rotation motor 631. A configuration other than the above may be used, and for example, the determination may be made using a counter that is updated each time the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 220, the variable display setting process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The variable display setting process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 as in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. The same parts as those of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example are indicated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  In the variable display setting process 5 in the fifth control example, the left swing unit is used as a notice effect after the processes of S3301 to S3305 are performed as in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) of the first control example described above. A preview effect setting process for setting an effect for moving 500 is executed (S3321), and the process proceeds to S3306. The details of the preliminary announcement effect setting process (S3321) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also in the process of S3301, when the change start flag 223d is off (S3301: No), the process proceeds to S3306. Thereafter, the processing of S3306 to S3310 is executed, and the variable display setting processing 5 ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 221, the advance notice effect setting process (S3321) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The notice effect setting process (S3321) in the fifth control example is one of the variation display setting processes 5 (see FIG. 220) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. .

  In this advance notice effect setting process (S3321), a process of setting a notice effect for moving the left swing unit 500 is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223ax. When the preview effect setting process (S3321) is executed, first, the value of the current effect counter 223ax is acquired, and it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223ax is 0 to 9 (S6301). If the value of the effect counter 223ax is not 0 to 9 (S6301: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the effect counter 223ax is 0 to 9 in the process of S6301 (S6301: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6302 in order to set the advance notice effect for moving the left rocking unit 500. As described above, since the effect counter 223ax is a loop counter of 0 to 198, a notice effect of moving the left swing unit 500 with a probability of 10/199 (approximately 5%) is set (executed).

  In the process of S6302, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S6302), and if the lottery result of this special symbol is out (S6302: No), the first left swing unit table 222b3a “01H” is set to the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to (see FIG. 217 (b)) (S6303), and the process proceeds to the process of S6307. By the processing of S6303, the first left swing effect is performed in which the left swing unit 500 is moved to the intermediate position.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6302 that the current lottery result is a big hit (S6302: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223ax acquired in S6301 is a multiple of 4 (S6304). When it is determined in the process of S6304 that the value of the effect counter 223ax is a multiple of 4 (S6304: Yes), the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the first left rocking unit table 222b3a (see FIG. 217 (b)) The value “01H” is set to the value (S6306), and the process proceeds to the process of S6307. On the other hand, in the process of S6304, if the value of the effect counter ax is not a multiple of 4 (S6304: No), the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the second left rocking unit table 222b3b (see FIG. 217 (c)) “01H” is set (S6305), and the process shifts to the process of S6307. In the process of S6307 which is shifted after one of the processes of S6303, S6305 and S6306 is executed, the operation content corresponding to the set operation pointer 223g is read out, and the operation content is notified to the motor driver (instruction Setting an operation command to execute (S6307), and then the process ends.

  When the process of S6307 is executed via the process of S6306, the first left swing effect for moving the left swing unit 500 to the intermediate position is executed, and the process of S6307 is executed via the process of S6305. Then, the second left swing effect is performed in which the left swing unit 500 is moved to the connection position. As the ratio at which each swing effect is set is set in the process of S6304, the first left swing effect is set with a probability of 3/4, and the second left swing effect with a probability of 1/4. It is set. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out and the notice effect is set, the first left swing effect is set with a high probability (1/4), and the 1st with a low probability (1/4) 2 Left swing effect is set. On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol, and the advance notice effect is set, only the second left swing effect is set. Therefore, the second left swing production is a production with a high expectation of becoming a big hit, and the first left swing production is a production with a low expectation of being a big hit). Therefore, when the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 is moved to the middle position, it is possible to play a game in the expectation of further moving from the middle position to the connection position. That is, since the operation of the first passage forming member 520 can be focused on, it is possible to improve the interest during the advance presentation of the player.

  In addition, the selection ratio of advance notice effects is not limited to the form of this control example, and may be determined arbitrarily. For example, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, the first left swing effect may be selected at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1/10), or in the case of the removal of the special symbol. The second left swing effect may not be selected.

  Further, the mode of the advance notice effect accompanied by the operation of the left swinging unit 500 is not limited to two, and may be more diversified. By diversifying the mode of the advance notice effect, more various effects can be realized, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. As a different mode of the notice effect, for example, a mode in which the intermediate position (or connection position) and the release position are reciprocated a plurality of times, a mode in which it stops at different intermediate positions (for example, 50 steps from the release position), an intermediate position And the like. Also, conversely, the mode of the preview effect may be reduced to one type. In this case, the amount of data of the left rocking unit table 222b3 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the fifth control example, by moving the left swinging unit 500 provided with the flow path for passing the ball that has won the first specified winning opening 82 during the big hit, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the big hit It is configured to be able to produce an effect that indicates the degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to share the member that configures the flow path through which the ball passes and the member that is used for rendering, and the limited space in the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively used.

  In addition, the left swinging unit 500 provided with a flow path that allows the ball to pass through the first specified winning opening 82 where the ball can be won during the big hit, timing other than during the big hit (the timing when the special symbol fluctuates) Even if the left swinging unit 500 is moved, the ball flow is not affected. That is, it is possible to use the left swinging unit 500 as a ball passage for passing a ball during a bonus game (during a big hit), and as a movable member for effect during a normal game (during special symbol variation).

  The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is configured such that the jackpot game is executed in a state where the left swinging unit 500 is raised from the release position to the connection position. Therefore, for example, as an operation scenario of the left rocking unit 500 defined by the left rocking unit table 222b3 shown in FIG. 217 (a), the operation scenario which continues to stop at the connected position only when the jackpot is won is selected. You may provide. By configuring in this manner, the left swinging unit 500 is not only an effect that suggests the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a big hit, but also as a notification means to notify that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win It becomes possible to use. Moreover, since the number of times the left swinging unit 500 moves can be suppressed, failure of the movable member can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is preferable to provide a determination unit that determines whether the left swinging unit 500 is moving normally when the left swinging unit 500 is moved as an effect. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the abnormality of the left swing unit 500 before the big hit game is started, and the left swing unit 500 can not rise to the connecting position during the big hit game, thus becoming abnormal. It becomes possible to prevent (suppress).

  If it is determined that the left swinging unit 500 is abnormal when moving the left swinging unit 500 as an effect, the determination result is notified and the left swinging unit 500 is It is good to constitute so that the production which is not made to move is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from giving a sense of discomfort to the effect in the big hit game. Here, the left rocking unit 500 is provided with a flow-down passage 515 (see FIG. 36), and is configured to discharge a ball won in a state of being positioned at the release position out of the game area. That is, even if the left swinging unit 500 is not moved, when the ball wins to the first variable winning device 82a, the ball which has won is normally entered into an unexpected position such as the back side of the pachinko machine 10 Can be discharged without

  As an effect that the left swinging unit 500 is not moved, for example, a big hit game is started with the left swinging unit 500 positioned at the release position, and a ball winning in the first specified winning opening 82 flows down the down flow passage 515 In addition to the left swing unit 500, the effect may be performed by the effect unit 422a of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 in a state where it is not connected to the left swing unit 500. In this case, the ball flowing down the left swing unit 500 does not pass through the sensor member 422c provided in the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, so the progress of the effect displayed in the effect section 422a is the first specified winning hole Instead of executing based on the ball that has won the prize 82, for example, it may be configured to execute by operating the frame button 22. That is, for example, whenever the player presses the frame button 22, the symbol (number) is variably displayed in the effect section 422a, and when the stop is displayed with the lucky number, the effect of notifying the transition to the "preparation mode" is executed. It is good also as composition.

  Furthermore, the prohibition process may be executed so that the notice effect using the left swing unit 500 is not selected until a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the end of the jackpot game. The fluctuation time that the period from the end of the notice effect (6 seconds (see Fig. 217 (c)) of the left swinging unit 500 to the start of the big hit game is within a predetermined period (for example 2 seconds) In the variation pattern to be set, the prohibition process may be executed so as not to select the preview effect using the left swing unit 500. Thus, a predetermined interval (for example, 2 seconds) is provided between the movable operation of the left rocking unit 500 executed during the jackpot game and the movable operation of the left rocking unit 500 executed during the normal game. be able to.

  As the predetermined interval, it is preferable to set an interval which is longer than the retry period which is executed when a failure occurs in the movable operation of the left rocking unit 500. Thereby, even if the retry operation is performed in the movable operation of the left rocking unit 500 in the jackpot game or the normal game, the influence is exerted on the movable movement of the left rocking unit 500 which is executed when the other conditions are satisfied Can be suppressed, and appropriate presentation can be provided to the player.

  Next, the effect setting process 5 (S1613) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The effect setting process 5 (S1613) in the fifth control example is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) instead of the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) in the first control example, and executed during the roulette chance effect It is the process for performing the setting of the pitch pressing preparation preparation effect (refer FIG. 216 (a)) and the pitch pressing effect (refer FIG. 216 (b)). The same parts as those in the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) in the first control example are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  When the effect setting process 5 (S1613) is executed, first, after performing each process of S2001 and S2002 as in the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) of the first control example described above, the value of the effect timer 223bv It is determined whether or not the timer value indicates the end of the increase effect (S2003). In the process of S2003, if the value of the effect timer 223bv is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003: Yes), the pitch press preparation effect, which is an effect notifying the player that the pitch depression effect is started (See FIG. 216 (a)) is set (S2021), next, the increase production flag 223cv is set to off, the pitch depression effect production setting flag 223bx is set to on (S2022), and this processing is ended as it is . When it is determined in the process of S2003 that the value of the effect timer 223bv is not the timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003: No), the process of S2021 and S2022 described above is not executed, and the process is directly performed. finish.

  If it is determined in the process of S2001 that the increase effect in-progress flag 223cv is off (S2001: No), it is then determined whether or not the pitch depression effect setting flag 223bx is on (S2023). If the pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx is on (S2023: Yes), the pitching depression effect setting for setting the pitching depression effect which is an effect capable of determining the timing at which the player throws the ball B in the process of S2023. The process (S2024) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2006. The details of the pitching depression effect setting process (S2024) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if the pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx is off in the process of S2023 (S2023: No), the process of S2024 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2006. Next, the processes of S2006 to S2017 are executed in the same manner as the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) of the first control example described above, and then the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 223, a pitching depression effect setting process (S2024) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The pitching depression effect setting process (S2024) in the fifth control example is one process of effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. The pitching depression effect setting process (S2024) is a process for setting the pitching depression effect, which is an effect that enables the player to determine the timing of throwing the ball B in the roulette chance effect by operating the frame button 22. is there.

  When the pitch pressing effect setting process (S2024) is executed, it is first determined whether the pitch pressing effect flag 223cv is on (S6401), and if the pitch pressing effect flag 223cx is off (S6401: No) The information of the drop position storage area 223ex is acquired (S6402), and the information of the rotation position storage area 223u is acquired (S6403). That is, the information of the pocket for dropping the ball B determined in advance is acquired by the processing of S6402, and the information of the pocket currently arranged at the dropping position is acquired by the processing of S6403.

  Next, it is determined whether the present time is the pitching possible timing (S6404). Here, “a continuous play mode suggestive effect” performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, a continuous play period suggestive period of 90 seconds when transitioning to the "preparation mode". Is configured to be executed, and this "continuously mode suggestive effect" is an increase effect (effect time 20) to increase (add) a hit pocket based on the ball entering the second entrance 640a. S), roulette chance production (during 65 seconds) to produce whether or not ball B falls in the winning pocket, and ending effect (duration 5 seconds) indicating that the roulette chance production has ended ing.

  Furthermore, the roulette chance effect mentioned above (production time 65 seconds) is a notification mode indicating that the roulette chance effect has been executed, a notification mode that explains the roulette chance effect, and a first half where the effect proceeds by the notification mode of liveliness The middle part (maximum presentation time 8 seconds) where the pitching preparation (the presentation time 5 seconds) and the pitch pressing the effect (maximum presentation time 3 seconds) are executed (the maximum presentation time 8 seconds), and the throwing device 650 After the ball B swings at the upper portion of the holding piece 677 and then falls into the pocket, a swing effect is performed.

  Here, the pitch pressing effect (maximum rendering time of 3 seconds) is a pitching non-permission period (1.5 seconds) in which the pitching device 650 does not allow the pitching of the ball B even if the frame button 22 is operated by the player. A pitching allowance period (1.5 seconds) for allowing the pitching of the ball B by the pitching device 650 based on the fact that the frame button 22 is operated. That is, even if the frame button 22 is operated for 1.5 seconds after the pitching depression effect is started, the ball B is not thrown by the throwing device 650, and the pitching depression effect is started 1.5. During the second to third seconds, the pitching device 650 throws the ball B at the timing when the player operates the frame button 22.

  Therefore, the timing at which the ball B can be thrown in the pitch depression effect is 1.5 seconds after the start of the pitch depression effect at the minimum, and 3 seconds after the start of the pitch depression effect in the longest (the presentation time of the pitch depression effect is It will be 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds). In addition, when the effect time of the pitching depression effect is less than 3 seconds, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated during the pitching depression effect and the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650, in the second half of the roulette chance effect The difference is configured to be absorbed. Thereby, when the player operates the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (within a period of 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the pitching depression effect is started), the player immediately operates based on the timing of operating the frame button 22. Since the ball B is thrown, it is possible for the player to make it possible for the player to determine the pocket in which the ball B falls by himself, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Although details will be described later, in the fifth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated within 1.5 seconds after the pitching depression effect is executed, the pitching is performed at a timing when 1.5 seconds have elapsed. A throwing action of the device 650 is configured to be performed. As a result, with respect to a period (3 seconds) of the pitching depression effect in which the player can operate the frame button 22, a period (1 .5 seconds) can be shortened.

  In the fifth control example, the swing effect (rendering period 15 seconds), which is the second half of the roulette chance effect, swings the ball B thrown by the throwing device 650 at an amplitude that the ball B can not fall on the movable piece 677. During the swinging ball falling prohibition period (7 seconds) which is a moving period (a period in which the value of the swing timer 223w is larger than 500 (see S1709 in FIG. 146: Yes)) The period during which the ball B is allowed to fall (maximum 3 seconds) and the period in which the ball B performs the falling operation, which is a period (a period in which the value of the oscillation timer 223w is smaller than 500 (see S1709 in FIG. 146: No)). It consists of a ball falling period (5 seconds).

  Among them, during the swinging ball falling possible period (maximum 3 seconds), a period longer than the period (1.5 seconds) in which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 in the pitching depression effect described above is set. Since the player operates the frame button 22 at any timing during the pitching depression effect, the ball B can be dropped into a predetermined pocket. In addition, since a period in which a plurality of (three) pockets move is set as the period during which the ball can drop during swinging, the accuracy with which the ball B falls in a predetermined pocket can be enhanced.

  The ball falling period (5 seconds) is a period during which notification effects are performed according to the type of the dropped pocket (hit pocket or out pocket) after the ball B is dropped into the pocket, and the pitching allowable period described above Alternatively, it is configured to be extended by a time lag (a difference between an actual rendering time and a set maximum time) that occurs in a swingable ball falling possible period. As a result, even if the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 or the timing at which the throwing device 650 throws the ball B is different, the rendering period of the “in-progress mode suggestion effect” can be made equal to 90 seconds.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, high-speed rotation (setting an operation speed (500 pps) at which the time required to move one pocket is 0.25 seconds) is set as the rotation speed of the rotating member 640; It is configured to be able to control two rotational speeds at a low speed (the operating speed (125 pps) in which the time required to move one pocket is 1 second). This rotational speed is configured to be switched by outputting a signal for setting an operating speed (125 pps or 500 pps) from the audio lamp control device 113 to the motor driver.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth control example, the rotating member 640 is rotated at high speed to execute the pitch depression effect from the time when the “continuously connected mode suggestion effect” is executed to the time the pitch depression effect is performed. Then, the rotating member 640 is configured to rotate at a low speed.

  Referring back to FIG. 223, the description will be continued. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above, the ball B can be dropped within a range of 10 seconds to 11.5 seconds after the pitching depression effect is executed. Specifically, the ball B is dropped into the pocket after a pitching depression effect (maximum 3 seconds), a rocking ball falling prohibition period (7 seconds), and a rocking ball falling possible period (maximum 3 seconds). However, since there is a possibility that the pitching depression effect will be at least 1.5 seconds, the pitching depression effect of 10 seconds which is the total of the pitching depression effect (3 seconds) and the swinging ball falling prohibition period (7 seconds) The minimum period of time during which the ball can fall after it is executed, pitch depression effect (1.5 seconds), the swinging ball falling prohibition period (7 seconds), and the swinging ball falling possible period (3 seconds) A total of 11.5 seconds is the longest period in which the ball can fall after the pitching depression effect is executed.

  Then, the pocket corresponding to the range 10 seconds to 11.5 seconds after the pitching depression effect is executed during the pitching depression effect in which the rotating member 640 is moving at a low speed is 10 from the pocket at the current falling position. Is the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223 ex acquired in the process of S 6402 10 or 11 ahead of the current pocket acquired in the process of S 6403 because it is 11 pockets ahead? It is determined whether the present time is the pitching possible timing (S6404).

  If the current time is not the pitching possible timing (S6404: No), this processing ends. In the fifth control example, the rotational speed of the rotating member 640 is increased (500 pps) until the pitch depression effect is executed in order to shorten the period until it is determined that the pitching possible timing is reached in the process of S6404. (The time required to move one pocket is 0.25 seconds)). On the other hand, if the present time is the pitching possible timing (S6404: Yes), the rotational speed of the rotating member is set to low speed (125 pps (one second for moving one pocket)) (S6405). After the display of the effect is set (S6406) and the pitch depression effect flag in effect 223cx is set to ON (S6407), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the pitch pressing effect in-progress flag 223cx is on in the process of S6401 (S6401: Yes), it is then determined whether the button (frame button 22) is pressed (S6408). If the button (frame button 22) is pressed (S6408: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present time is a pitching allowable period (a period of 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after pitching depression effect is executed) (S6409) ), If it is not the pitching permissible period (S6409: No), the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to ON (S6410), and the present processing ends. If it is a pitching allowable period (S6409: Yes), a pitching effect command is set (S6411), and the process proceeds to S6414.

  On the other hand, if the button is not pressed in the process of S6408 (S6408: No), it is determined whether or not the current time is the pitching permitted period and the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to ON (S6412). If the current time is the pitching allowable period, and the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to ON (S6412: Yes), the processing of S6411 is executed, and the processing shifts to the processing of S6414. On the other hand, if the current pitch is not the pitching permissible period or if the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to OFF (S6412: No), it is determined whether or not the pitching depression effect display period has passed (S6413). If the pitching depression effect display period has not elapsed (S6413: No), this processing ends, and if the pitching depression effect display period has elapsed (S6413: Yes), the process proceeds to S6414.

  In the process of S6414, the pitching operation of the pitching position is set (S6414), and the pitch depression effect flag 223cx, the pitch depression effect setting flag 223bx, and the delayed pitch flag 223dx are set to OFF (S6415). Is set (S6416), and the swing not-detected flag 223v and the swing effect flag 223ev are set to ON (S6417), and then the process ends.

  As described above, in the fifth control example, the operation timing of the throwing device 650 can be set based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible for the player to determine the pocket in which the ball B falls by himself, and the effect of presentation can be enhanced. Further, in this control example, the period (second half 1.5 seconds) in which the pitch of the ball B is permitted is shorter than the period (3 seconds) in which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective. . And when the pitch of the ball B is permitted and the frame button 22 is operated in the first half 1.5 seconds, the pitch of the ball B is delayed until the start timing of the period in which the pitch of the ball B is permitted. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of control for dropping the ball B into a predetermined pocket while showing that the player can determine the pocket in which the ball B falls by itself.

  In addition, the period during which the ball can be dropped (3 seconds) is longer than the difference period (1.5 seconds) at which the ball B is thrown by the throwing device 650 based on the player operating the frame button 22. Since it is configured to be set, it is possible to enhance the accuracy of dropping the ball B in a predetermined pocket regardless of the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22.

  In the fifth control example, the pitch depression effect is executed when the pitching possible timing is reached based on the information of the falling position storing area 223ex and the information of the rotational position storing area 223u, so roulette It is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable with the swinging motion of the ball B in the chance effect.

  Furthermore, the rotational speed of the rotation member 640 is high (500 pps (the time required to move one pocket) 0.25 seconds) and low (125 pps (the time required to move one pocket one second)) The rotational speed of the rotary member 640 is set to a high speed until it is determined that it is possible to throw a ball. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period until it is determined that it is the pitching possible timing, and the roulette chance presentation can be smoothly performed.

  In addition, after the pitching depression effect in which the player can operate the frame button 22 is executed, the rotational speed of the rotating member 640 is set to a low speed during the period until the rocking effect in which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 is ended. It is set to. As a result, the player can be made to watch over the roulette chance effect carefully, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 224, the process 5 for distributing the pocket pockets to be executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described.

  The hit pocket distribution process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, similarly to the hit pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example. In the first control example, the same parts as those of the hit pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) are denoted with the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  In the hit pocket distribution process 5 in the fifth control example, a process for setting in advance a pocket in which the ball B falls with roulette chance effect is executed. When the hit pocket distribution process 5 is executed, first, after the process of S3101 is executed similarly to the hit pocket distribution process (refer to FIG. 160) in the first control example described above, it is determined whether or not the next suspension is a big hit. (S3121). If the next hold is a big hit (S3121: Yes), one of the read-out pockets is set as a drop position in the drop position storage area 223ex (S3122), and the process proceeds to S3104.

  On the other hand, if the next hold is not a big hit in the process of S3121 (S3121: No), a pocket different from the read pocket is set as the drop position in the drop position storage area 223ex (S3123), and the first control example described above The processes of S3104 and S3105 are executed in the same manner as the hit pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160). Thereafter, the hit position is read out from the drop position storage area 223ex (S3124), and a position other than the hit position and the drop position is selected as the additional position (S3125), and the hit pocket distribution processing of the first control example described above (see FIG. 160). The processing of S3109 and S3110 is executed in the same manner as in. After the process of S3110 is performed, the process returns to the process of S3104 and the subsequent processes are repeated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth control example, the drop position (pocket) for dropping the ball B in the roulette chance effect is set in advance. And according to the lottery result of a special symbol, it is constituted so that it may be decided whether a predetermined fall position is set as a hit position (whether it is made to light or not). As a result, since the ball B may be dropped to a predetermined pocket, the control process can be simplified.

  In the fifth control example, one pocket is stored in the drop position storage area 223ex. However, a plurality of continuous pockets may be stored in the drop position storage area 223ex.

  Next, special figure 2 winning command processing 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The special figure 2 winning command process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the first control example. . The same parts as those of the special view 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the first control example are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  Special figure 2 winning command processing 5 in this fifth control example is stored in the drop position storage area 223 ex when a winning command winning a big hit is output in the increase effect executed in “in preparation mode” A process is carried out to change an existing pocket into a hit pocket.

  When the special figure 2 prize command processing 5 in the fifth control example is executed, first, S3201 is executed in the same manner as the special figure 2 prize command processing (see FIG. 161) of the first control example described above. In the process of S3201, if the flag 223cv during increase effect is off (S3201: No), the process proceeds to S3213. If the increase effect flag 223cv is on (S3201: Yes), the drop position is read out from the drop position storage area 223ex (S3221), and then a big hit occurs in the short time (while the short time counter is larger than 0) It is determined whether or not it is a winning (S3222). If the winning is a big hit during the short time (S3222: Yes), the drop position is selected as the additional position (S3223), and the process proceeds to S3212.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3222, if the winning is not a big hit during a short time (S3222: No), the hit position is read from the hit position storage area 223k (S3224), and a position different from the hit position and the drop position is selected as the overlay position. (S3225), and the process proceeds to the process of S3212. Thereafter, the processes of S3212 and S3213 are executed, and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 is configured to move as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit. . Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine including a variable member operated by a motor or the like in its configuration. Among such gaming machines, there are some which can execute various kinds of rendering operations by operating a plurality of variable members. However, if the number of variable members is increased in order to improve the rendering effect, the increase in power consumption, the increase in failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts, the increase in the cost of gaming machines, etc. Various problems arise.

  On the other hand, in this control example, for the player, the channel (first passage forming member 520) for discharging the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a in the big hit game to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is It arranges in the position which can be recognized visually (left side in front view to the 3rd symbol display device 81). The flow path (first passage forming member 520) swings between an arrangement (connection position) for discharging a ball that has won a prize to the first variable winning device 82a at a big hit and a home position (release position). It is configured to be possible. Then, as one type of entertainment effect (effect that suggests the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit) performed at the normal time (a state in which the big hit is not in progress), it is possible to execute movable effect that swings the flow path. That is, the flow path (the first passage forming member 520) for discharging the winning balls is also used as an entertaining effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of prizes (variable members) from increasing excessively, so reduction of power consumption of the pachinko machine 10, reduction of failure rate and cost, simplification of routing of wiring etc. It can be realized.

  In addition, in this control example, as an entertaining effect using the flow path (the first passage forming member 520), the first passage forming member 520 moves (moves) from the release position to the intermediate position and then returns to the release position A left swing effect and a second left swing effect for returning to the release position after the first passage forming member 520 moves (moves) from the release position to the connection position are provided. And 2nd left swing production is easy to be selected when the lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit compared with 1st left swing production, and it is constituted so that it is hard to be chosen in the case of detachment. That is, the second left swing effect with a large amount of movement of the first passage forming member 520 is configured to have a higher expectation of becoming a big hit compared to the first left swing effect. Therefore, when the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 starts the operation, the operation can be observed in expectation of the operation to the connection position. Therefore, the interest of the player in the "continuous mode" can be improved.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, it is comprised so that the fall position (pocket) which drops the ball B in roulette chance production | presentation may be previously defined in one place. And according to the lottery result of a special symbol, it was constituted so that it might be decided whether a predetermined fall position was set as a hit position (whether it was made to light or not). As a result, since the ball B may be dropped to a predetermined pocket, the control process can be simplified.

  Further, in this control example, in the roulette chance production, a period for receiving the operation of the frame button 22 (for example, 3 seconds in one roulette chance production) is provided, and it is detected that the player operates the frame button 22. In this case, the ball B was thrown by the throwing device 650. In addition, during a period in which the frame button 22 can be received, a pitching depression effect (see FIG. 216) for urging the player to press the frame button 22 is executed. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period suggested by the pitch pressing effect, the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650. As a result, the player can throw the ball B to the rotating member 640 at any timing, so that the player's willingness to participate in roulette chance presentation can be improved.

  In the fifth control example, one pocket for dropping the ball B is set in advance, but it is not necessary to be limited to one. A section in which a plurality of pockets continue may be defined as a position where the ball B is dropped, and the section may be dropped into any of the pockets constituting the section. By configuring in this manner, the degree of freedom when dropping the ball B can be increased, as compared with the case where the dropping position is limited to only one pocket. That is, when it is determined that the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion is relatively large (for example, exceeding one second) at the stage when the ball B is dropped into the section, it is disposed behind the section The ball B can be dropped after the cycle is reduced by dropping it into the pocket. Conversely, if it is determined that the period (amplitude) of the swing motion becomes too small (for example, 0.5 seconds or less) at the stage when the ball B is dropped into the section, the section The ball B can be dropped before the ball B is completely stopped by dropping it into the pocket arranged in the front side pocket.

  In the fifth control example, the period of the rocking motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) before one pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223 ex is placed at the drop position. When it becomes, it is set as the structure which performs special presentation, but it may control so that the pocket which is aimed at a fall position may be arranged before it becomes a predetermined cycle (0.2 seconds). More specifically, for example, when the roulette chance effect starts, a pocket that can drop the ball B is predicted from the time until the pitching effect effect starts and the pocket currently positioned at the drop position. Also, it may be determined whether or not it matches the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex. Then, when it is expected that the ball B can not be dropped to the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex, the remaining time until the ball B can be dropped and the drop position storage area 223ex The rotational speed of the rotating member 640 may be changed based on the position of the stored pocket so that the pocket stored in the dropped position storage area 223 ex is disposed to the dropped position at the timing when it can be dropped. Good. Also, instead of or in addition to changing the rotation speed of the rotation member 640, for example, the execution timing of the pitch depression effect may be changed. That is, by changing the timing at which the ball B is thrown from the throwing device 650, the ball B can be made to fall at the timing at which the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is disposed at the drop position. It is good also as composition. By configuring in this manner, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target pocket.

Sixth Control Example
Next, with reference to FIGS. 226 to 233, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described. In the first control example described above, by displaying symbols (numbers) on the display portions 331a to 331d of the effect portion 331, notification of whether or not a big hit is performed is performed. Then, the third symbol display device 81 is basically used to display an entertaining effect, display of the number of holding balls, a breakdown of a symbol (lucky number) to be a big hit, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the sixth control example, also in the third symbol display device 81, dynamic display (variation display of decorative symbols) of identification information indicating a lottery result of special symbols is executable. This variation display of the decorative symbol is executed regardless of the mode, and is executed corresponding to the variation display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, so the lottery result of the special symbol can be confirmed regardless of the mode .

  The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in the configuration in that the decorative symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the audio lamp control The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example It is a point. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227. FIG. 226 (a) is a diagram showing display contents in the case where the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the "normal mode" and the decorative symbol (third symbol) is variably displayed. As shown in FIG. 226 (a), when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the "normal mode", the variable display of the symbol is executed in the display portions 331a to 331d as in the first control example. In addition, in the sixth control example, in the third symbol display device 81, the decorative symbol (third symbol) is displayed in the variable display region (lower right region) Dd1 formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape on the lower right in front view. ) Is displayed.

  More specifically, in the variable display area (lower right side area) Dd1, three left, middle and right symbol columns are displayed. In each symbol column, a decorative symbol (third symbol) given any one of numbers 0 to 9 is displayed in a prescribed order (a descending order of numbers or an ascending order). These three symbol rows are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity, and variable display is performed. In particular, in the left symbol row, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row and the right symbol row, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order. In this variation display of the decorative symbols, it is indicated that the jackpot is achieved by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols (the third symbol) having the same numbers attached to the respective symbol rows. On the other hand, if at least one of the decorative symbols (the third symbol) stopped and displayed in each symbol row is a decorative symbol (the third symbol) with a different number, the lottery of the special symbol this time is out Indicates that there is. The variable display area (lower right side area) Dd1 is configured to have a smaller area than the display portions 331a to 331d. Therefore, it is possible to make the player confirm the lottery result of the special symbol by the variable display executed in each of the display portions 331a to 331d.

  FIG. 226 (b) is a diagram showing the display content when the variable display corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is finished in the "normal mode" and the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 226 (b), when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the "normal mode" elapses, one number (pattern) stops at each of the display portions 331a to 331d as in the first control example. Is displayed. In addition, in the sixth control example, in the variable display area (lower right side area) Dd1 of the third symbol display device 81, the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in combination of the deviation. In the example of FIG. 226 (b), the decorative symbol with the number “6” attached to the left symbol row is stopped and displayed, and the symbol row attached with the number “4” is stopped displayed in the middle symbol row, right The symbol row in which the number "3" is attached to the symbol row is stopped and displayed. By displaying the decorative symbols (the third symbol) to which different numbers are attached, it can be shown that the lottery result of the special symbol is out.

  Next, display contents in the "preparation mode" will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 (a) and 227 (b). FIG. 227 (a) is a diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the decorative symbol (third symbol). As shown in FIG. 227 (a), when the lottery for the special symbol is executed in the "preparation mode", as in the "normal mode", the decorative symbol (third symbol) is displayed in the variable display area (lower right side area) Dd1. Is displayed. This indicates that it is changing.

  FIG. 227 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the variation time has elapsed in the "preparation mode" and the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 227 (b), the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in a display region different from the variable display region (lower right side region) Dd1. FIG. 227 (b) is an example in the case where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left side region Dq1 of the horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape formed on the upper left of the front view on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this example, in the upper left region Dq1, the decorative symbol with the number "1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row, and the decorative symbol with the number "8" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row, The decorative symbol with the number "9" attached to the right symbol column is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the "preparation mode", the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in the display area different from the variable display because it is difficult to recognize the number of time reductions in the current "preparation mode" from the decorative symbol stopped and displayed. In order to Assuming that the variable display area Dd1 is also configured to perform the variable display and the stop display even during the "preparation mode", the fluctuation display time of the decorative symbol performed in the "preparation mode" is easy by observing the variable display area Dd1. Be recognized by As described above, in the "preparation mode" in which the short time is once, the long fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 112 and 113). On the other hand, in the "preparation mode" where the short-term time is 7 times, long fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in the case of a big hit of a special symbol (see FIG. 112). Middle variation of seconds is selected. Therefore, if the decorative symbol is not displayed stopped after 3 seconds have passed since the start of the "Renso mode suggestive effect" (when long variation A is selected), it is either a jackpot or a short-term 1 It is set only once and it is determined that the special symbol is removed. In this case, the drawing of the special symbol is not performed, and the possibility of shifting to the “normal mode” is increased after the change, so that the player may not be able to enjoy the subsequent “run mode suggestion effect”. There is. In addition, when the first to sixth special symbol drawing out in the “preparation mode” for which the short time period is 7 times is out, the middle fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected (see FIG. 113). Conversely speaking, if the fluctuation continues for 3 seconds or more in the second to sixth fluctuation displays, it is a big hit without confirming the rendering result of "Sanso mode suggestive presentation" (with 97.5% probability) It will be recognized that it will shift to "Running mode". For this reason, there is a high probability of shifting to the “continuous mode”, and the player may feel that it is not necessary to confirm the subsequent “continuous mode suggestive effect”.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the stop display of the decorative symbol is configured to be performed in a display area different from the variable display. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who has confirmed the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to recognize whether or not the stop display has been performed. Therefore, it can be difficult to predict whether or not to shift to the "continuous mode" before confirming the result of the "continuous mode suggestive effect". The expectation of the player can be sustained.

  In addition, in this control example, in order to make it difficult to understand the stop display timing, the decorative symbol is displayed each time the variable display is performed for 3 seconds while the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) to the long fluctuation G (72 seconds) are being executed. The display position is switched to a display area different from the variable display area Dd1 (for example, the upper left area Dq1). The state in which the display position is switched continues for 0.5 seconds, and when 0.5 seconds elapses, the display position is switched to the fluctuation display area Dd1 again. That is, the fluctuation display of 3 seconds in the fluctuation display area Dd1 and the fluctuation display of 0.5 seconds in the area (upper left side area Dq1 etc.) different from the fluctuation display area Dd1 are repeated. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the point (switching of the display position) of the fluctuation display in the fluctuation display area Dq1, it is determined whether the break is due to the stop display or is periodically set in the long fluctuations A to G It can be difficult to do. Therefore, it can be more difficult to tell whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode", so it can be difficult for the player to predict whether or not to shift to the "continuous mode". Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained until the end during execution of the "in-line mode suggestive effect".

  Furthermore, in this control example, a plurality of display areas for displaying the stop symbol are provided in addition to the upper left side area Dq1. Specifically, it is formed on the upper right side area Dq2 (see the dotted line in the upper right of FIG. 227 (b)) formed on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81 and on the lower left side of the third symbol display device 81 A lower left region Dq3 (see a dotted line in the lower left of FIG. 227 (b)) is provided. In the case of performing stop display of the decorative symbol in the "preparation mode" (when the fluctuation time has elapsed), and switching the position to perform fluctuation display during execution of the long fluctuations A to G from the fluctuation display area Dd1, One of the three display areas (upper left area Dq1, upper right area Dq2, lower left area Dq3) is selected by lottery. With this configuration, it is more difficult to visually recognize the display content (stop display or change display) when the display position is switched from the variable display area Dd1 to another display area. can do. Therefore, it can be more difficult to tell whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode", so it can be difficult for the player to predict whether or not to shift to the "continuous mode". Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained until the end during execution of the "in-line mode suggestive effect".

  In the present control example, the variable display area Dd1 is provided at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display area Dd1 can be disposed at an arbitrary position. In the present control example, the upper left area Dq1, the upper right side is displayed as a display area when the display position is switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1 when stop display is performed in the "preparation mode" and during long fluctuations A to G. Although three types of display areas, the area Dq2 and the lower left side area Dq3, are provided, the present invention is not limited to the three types. More display areas may be provided or less. Also, the arrangement of each display area may be arbitrarily determined.

  In this control example, when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1, the decorative symbol is not displayed in the variable display area Dd1 (only the display position is moved). It is not limited. For example, even after switching of the display position, the variable display area Dd1 may be subjected to the variable display in a pseudo manner. As a result, when the variable display area Dd1 is focused, it looks as if the variable display is always continued during the "preparation mode", regardless of whether the display is stopped or is changing. In the "preparation mode", it can be more difficult to understand whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

<Electric Configuration in Sixth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229. FIG. 228A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 228A, the ROM 222 in the sixth control example is provided with a symbol position selection table 222h in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 (see FIG. 118A) in the first control example. The symbol position selection table 222h is a data table used to select the display area after switching when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1 in the "preparation mode". The details of the symbol position selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 228 (b).

  FIG. 228 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the symbol position selection table 222 h. As shown in FIG. 228B, the display position of the decorative symbol (stop display or variable display) is defined in the symbol position selection table 222h for each value of the display position selection counter 223ay. The display position selection counter 223 ay is configured as a loop counter that is periodically or irregularly updated within the range of “0 to 99”.

  In the symbol position selection table 222h, the upper left region Dq1 is associated with the range where the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is "0 to 39". Of the 100 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the display position selection counter 223 ay, 40 of “0 to 39” are associated, so the decorative symbol is displayed from the variable display area (lower right side area) Dd 1 The probability (proportion) that the upper left region Dq1 is selected when switching (moving) to another region is 40% (40/100).

  The upper right area Dq2 is associated with the range of “40 to 79” of the value of the display position selection counter 223ay. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the display position selection counter 223 ay, 40 of “40 to 79” are associated, so the decorative symbol is displayed from the variable display area (lower right side area) Dd 1 When switching (moving) to another area, the probability (proportion) that the upper right area Dq2 is selected is 40% (40/100).

  Furthermore, the lower left region Dq3 is associated with the range where the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is "80 to 99". Of the 100 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the display position selection counter 223 ay, 20 of “80 to 99” are associated, so the decorative symbol is displayed from the variable display area (lower right side area) Dd 1 The probability (proportion) that the lower left region Dq3 is selected when switching (moving) to another region is 20% (20/100). The probability (ratio) that only the lower left region Dq3 is selected is high for the player only in this region because the height of the line of sight is the same as the variable display region (lower right region) Dd1. This is because there is a possibility of visual recognition when focusing on. Therefore, the selection ratio of the lower left side area Dq3 which is relatively easy to visually recognize is lowered to make it difficult to visually recognize the display content when the display position of the decorative symbol is switched. On the other hand, the reason why the ratio is not 0 is to make it difficult to predict the display position after switching. That is, it is difficult for the player to predict the display position after switching as the number of display position candidates increases, and to make it difficult to visually recognize the mode (stop display or variable display) of the decorative symbol after switching the display position. it can.

  As described above, by switching the display position of the decorative symbol using the symbol position selection table 222h, it is predicted whether or not to shift to the “continuous mode” before being notified as a result of the “continuous mode suggestive effect”. It can be prevented (suppressed) from being done. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy "the continuous mode mode suggestive production" to the end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 229, the RAM 223 in this control example has a display position selection counter 223ay, a display time timer 223by, and a display position storage in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example. The difference is that an area 223cy is provided.

  The display position selection counter 223 ay is used to select a display area for displaying a decorative symbol from the symbol position selection table 222 h described above. The display position selection counter 223 ay is configured as a loop counter updated in the range of “0 to 99”, and is updated, for example, one by one between the processing of S1616 of the main processing and the processing of S1617. As described above, when the decorative symbol is switched (moved) from the variable display area (lower right side area) Dd1 to another area, the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of "0 to 39". The upper left region Dq1 is selected as a region for displaying a decorative symbol. Further, if the value of the display position selection counter 223 ay is in the range of “40 to 79”, the upper right side area Dq 2 is selected as the area for displaying the decorative symbol, and if it is in the range of “80 to 99”, the decorative symbol is displayed. The lower left side area Dq3 is selected as an area for displaying.

  Display time timer 223by displays the decorative symbol (third symbol) in region 1 (variation display region Dd1, upper left region Dq1, upper right region Dq2, or lower left region Dq3) in the "preparation mode". Is a timer that counts the elapsed time of The initial value of this display time timer 223 by is set to 0, and a value is added one by one in the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) while the decorative symbol is changing in the "preparation mode" (see FIG. 231, S6503). Since the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) is executed every one millisecond in the main process 6 (see FIG. 230), the display time timer 223 by is counted up every one millisecond. Further, this display time timer 223 by is reset to 0 each time the area (display position) in which the decorative symbol is displayed is switched (see S6510 and S6513 in FIG. 231). Based on the value of the display time timer 223by, the decorative symbol is switched to another display position (display region) when 3 seconds have elapsed since the decorative symbol is displayed in the variable display region Dd1. In addition, when 0.5 seconds have passed after the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left region Dq1, the upper right region Dq2, or the lower left region Dq3, the display position (display region) of the decorative symbol changes to the variable display region Dd1. Can be switched.

  The display position storage area 223cy is a flag indicating whether the display position (region) of the current decorative symbol is the variable display area Dd1, the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, or the lower left area Dq3. In the display position storage area 223cy, one of four values "00H" to "03H" is stored, and if "00H" is stored, the variable display area (lower right side area) Dd1 is indicated, If "01H" is stored, the upper left area Dq1 is indicated, if "02H" is stored, the upper right area Dq2 is indicated, and if "03H" is stored, the lower left area Dq3 is indicated. Whether or not to change the display position of the decorative symbol is determined based on the value (elapsed time) of the display time timer 223by described above and the value stored in the display position storage area 223cy. That is, in the state where "00H" is stored in the display position storage area 223cy, when 3 seconds have elapsed, the decorative symbol is switched to another display position (display area). In addition, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed while any of “01H” to “03H” is stored in the display position storage area 223cy, the display position (display area) of the decorative symbol changes to the variable display area Dd1. It is switched.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Sixth Control Example>
Next, various control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 233. First, with reference to FIG. 230, main processing 6 (see FIG. 230) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. The main process 6 (see FIG. 230) is a process that is executed instead of the main process (see FIG. 145) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

  Of the main processing 6 (see FIG. 230) in the sixth control example, in the processing of S1601 to S1614 and S1616 to S1621, respectively, S1601 to S1614 and S1616 in the main processing (see FIG. 145) in the first control example. The same processing as each processing of ̃S1621 is executed. Further, in main processing 6 (see FIG. 230) in the second control example, when the processing of S1613 is finished, the display position of the decorative symbol is selected according to the elapsed time during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the "preparation mode". A display position selection process is performed (S1661), and the process proceeds to S1614. The details of the display position selection process (S1661) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the main process 6 (see FIG. 230) in the present control example, when the process of S1614 ends, the variable display setting process 6 is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. (S1662). This fluctuation display setting process 6 is a display fluctuation based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute fluctuation display of identification information (pattern) in the rendering unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81. It is a process of generating and setting a pattern command. Details of the variation display setting process 6 (S1662) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the variation display setting process 6 ends, the process proceeds to S1616, and thereafter, the same process as the main process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example is executed.

  Next, the details of the display position selection processing (S1661) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This display position selection processing (S1661) is processing for selecting the display position of the decorative symbol according to the elapsed time during the variable display of the decorative symbol in the "preparation mode", as described above.

  When the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) is started, it is first determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S6501), and when it is determined to be 0 (S6501: No ), Which means that the present is not the “preparation mode” (“normal mode” or “continuous mode”), and there is no need to change the display position (display area) of the decorative symbol, so this processing is performed as it is Finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6501 that the value of the time saving state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S6501: Yes), it means that the present is the "preparation mode", and the display position of the decorative symbol is changed. Since there is a possibility, next, it is determined whether or not the variation display of the decorative symbol is currently being performed (S6502). When it is determined in the process of S6502 that the variable display is not being performed (S6502: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6502 that the variable display is being performed (S6502: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the display time timer 223by (S6503), and the current display position (display area) Of the display position storage area 223cy (S6504).

  Next, based on the information read in the process of S6504, it is determined whether the display position (display area) of the current decorative symbol is the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (read value is "00H") If the display position of the decorative symbol is the variable display area (lower right side area) Dd1 (S6505: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the display time timer 223 by is 3000 (S6506). That is, it is determined whether three seconds have elapsed since the display position of the decorative symbol has become the variable display area (lower right side area) Dd1. If it is determined in the process of S6506 that the value of the display time timer 223 by becomes 3000 (S6506: Yes), the symbol position selection table 222h is read (S6507), and a decorative symbol corresponding to the value of the display position selection counter 223ay The display position of is identified (S6508). Specifically, as described above, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of "0 to 39", the upper left region Dq1 is specified as the area for displaying the decorative symbol, and "40 to 79" If it is in the range, the upper right side area Dq2 is selected as the area for displaying the decorative symbol, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", the lower left side area Dq3 is selected as the region for displaying the decorative pattern (see FIG. 228 (b)).

  When the process of S6508 ends, next, the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to the display position specified in the process of S6508 (S6509). Further, in accordance with this switching, the value stored in the display position storage area 223cy is also updated. That is, when switched to the upper left region Dq1, it is updated to "01H", when switched to the upper right region Dq2, it is updated to "02H", and when switched to the lower left region Dq3, it is updated to "03H" Ru. After the processing of S6509, the value of the display time timer 223by is reset to 0 (S6510), and this processing ends. By resetting the display time timer 223by, the elapsed time after changing the display position of the decorative symbol is newly measured, and the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to the variable display area Dd1 when 0.5 seconds has elapsed. be able to.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6506 that the value of the display time timer 223by is not 3000 (S6506: No), there is no need to switch the display position, so the processes of S6507 to S6510 are skipped End the process.

  Further, in the process of S6505, it is determined that the display position of the current decorative symbol is not the variable display area Dd1 (one of "01H" to "03H" is stored in the display position storage area 223cy). In the case (S6505: No), it is then determined whether the value of the display time timer 223by is 500 (S6511). That is, it is determined whether or not 0.5 seconds has elapsed since the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to any one of the upper left region Dq1, the upper right region Dq2 and the lower left region Dq3.

  If it is determined in the process of S6511 that the value of the display time timer 223by is 500 (S6511: Yes), the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to the variable display area (lower right side area) Dd1 (S6512) In the position storage area 223cy, “00H” indicating the variable display area Dd1 is stored. Then, the value of the display time timer 223 by is reset to 0 (S6513), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6511 that the value of the display time timer 223by is not 500 (S6511), the process of S6512 and S6513 is skipped because there is no need to switch the display position of the decorative symbol to the variable display area Dd1. Then, the process ends.

  By performing this display position selection process (see FIG. 231), when any of the long fluctuations A to G is executed in the "preparation mode", fluctuation display for 3 seconds in the fluctuation display area Dd1, and fluctuation display The variation display of 0.5 seconds in the area different from the area Dd1 (one of the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, and the lower left area Dq3) is repeated. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the point (switching of the display position) of the fluctuation display in the fluctuation display area Dq1, it is determined whether the break is due to the stop display or is periodically set in the long fluctuations A to G It can be difficult to do. Therefore, it can be more difficult to tell whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode", so it can be difficult for the player to predict whether or not to shift to the "continuous mode". Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained until the end during execution of the "in-line mode suggestive effect".

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1662) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The variation display setting process 6 (S1662) is one process in the main process 6 (see FIG. 230), and as described above, variation of the identification information (pattern) in the rendering unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81 In order to generate and set a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110 in order to execute display, execution is performed instead of the variation display process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example Be done.

  Of the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 232), in each process of S3301 to S3310, the same process as each process of S3301 to S3310 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example is executed. Be done. Further, in the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 232) in the present control example, when the process of S3309 is completed, stop position selection process for selecting a display position at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in "preparation mode" is executed. Then (S3331), the process proceeds to S3310. The details of the stop position selection process (S3331) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing details of this stop position selection processing (S3331). When this stop position selection process (see FIG. 233) is started, it is first determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 223p is a value larger than 0 (S6601), and if the value is 0 (S6601), This means that it is not the "preparation mode", and there is no need to change the position at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed from the variable display area Dd1 to another display position, so this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6601 that the value of the hour reduction state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S6601: Yes), it means that the present is the "preparation mode", so next, the symbol position selection table 222h Are read out (S6602), and the display position of the decorative symbol corresponding to the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is specified (S6603). Specifically, as described above, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of "0 to 39", the upper left region Dq1 is specified as the area for displaying the decorative symbol, and "40 to 79" If it is in the range, the upper right side area Dq2 is selected as the area for displaying the decorative symbol, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", the lower left side area Dq3 is selected as the region for displaying the decorative pattern (see FIG. 228 (b)). When the process of S6603 ends, next, the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to the display position specified in the process of S6603 (S6604), and the present process is ended.

  By executing this stop position selection process (see FIG. 233), stop display of the decorative symbol can be performed at a display position (display area) different from the variable display, so that the variable display area (lower right area) It is possible to make it difficult for a player who has confirmed Dd1 to recognize whether stop display has been executed. Therefore, it can be difficult to predict whether or not to shift to the "continuous mode" before confirming the result of the "continuous mode suggestive effect". The expectation of the player can be sustained.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example is configured to execute display (variation display of the decoration symbol) indicating the lottery result of the special symbol in the fluctuation display area Dd1 of the third symbol display device 81 There is. Thereby, regardless of the mode, the result of the variable display can be determined based on the stop symbol.

  Further, in this control example, in the "preparation mode", the stop display of the decorative symbol is configured to be performed at a display position different from that of the variable display area Dd1. Here, assuming that the variable display area Dd1 is also configured to perform variable display and stop display during the "preparation mode", the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in the "preparation mode" by observing the variable display area Dd1. Time is easily recognized. As described above, in the "preparation mode" in which the short time is once, the long fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 112 and 113). On the other hand, in the "preparation mode" where the short-term time is 7 times, long fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in the case of a big hit of a special symbol (see FIG. 112). Middle variation of seconds is selected. Therefore, if the decorative symbol is not displayed stopped after 3 seconds have passed since the start of the "Renso mode suggestive effect" (when long variation A is selected), it is either a jackpot or a short-term 1 It is set only once and it is determined that the special symbol is removed. In this case, the drawing of the special symbol is not performed, and the possibility of shifting to the “normal mode” is increased after the change, so that the player may not be able to enjoy the subsequent “run mode suggestion effect”. There is. In addition, when the first to sixth special symbol drawing out in the “preparation mode” for which the short time period is 7 times is out, the middle fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected (see FIG. 113). Conversely speaking, if the fluctuation continues for 3 seconds or more in the second to sixth fluctuation displays, it is a big hit without confirming the rendering result of "Sanso mode suggestive presentation" (with 97.5% probability) It will be recognized that it will shift to "Running mode". For this reason, there is a high probability of shifting to the “continuous mode”, and the player may feel that it is not necessary to confirm the subsequent “continuous mode suggestive effect”.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the stop display of the decorative symbol is configured to be performed in a display area different from the variable display. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who has confirmed the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to recognize whether or not the stop display has been performed. Therefore, it can be difficult to predict whether or not to shift to the "continuous mode" before confirming the result of the "continuous mode suggestive effect". The expectation of the player can be sustained.

  Further, in the present control example, in order to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the stop display is made, the three-second fluctuation display in the fluctuation display area Dd1 is different from the fluctuation display area Dd1 during execution of the long fluctuations A to G. The variable display of 0.5 seconds in the (upper left region Dq1 and the like) is configured to be repeated. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the point (switching of the display position) of the fluctuation display in the fluctuation display area Dq1, it is determined whether the break is due to the stop display or is periodically set in the long fluctuations A to G It can be difficult to do. Therefore, it can be more difficult to tell whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode", so it can be difficult for the player to predict whether or not to shift to the "continuous mode". Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained until the end during execution of the "in-line mode suggestive effect".

  In the sixth control example, in the "preparation mode", when it is determined that 3 seconds have elapsed since the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the variable display area Dd1, any display position of the decorative symbol is displayed. The configuration is such that switching to a position (one of the upper left region Dq1, the upper right region Dq2, and the lower left region Dq3) or drawing (determination) is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the variation display of the decorative symbol may be defined for each variation pattern (variation time) in a form including the display position for each elapsed time. Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) is notified from the main control unit 110, the display position switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1 is the upper left area Dq1 → the upper right area A mode in which Dq2 → lower left side area Dq 3 → upper left side area Dq 1 → ... and an order such that the display area is lower left side area Dq 3 → upper right side area Dq 2 → upper left side area Dq 1 → lower left side area Dq 3 → ... The display mode of the variable display of this time may be configured to be selectable from among the modes to be. That is, in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, a display mode of a plurality of variations in which display positions of the decorative symbol are different may be defined as an aspect of the variable display of the decorative symbol. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to execute the process for drawing (determining) the display position every time the time elapses by the voice lamp control device 113, so the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reduced. be able to.

  In this control example, the variable display area Dd1 is provided at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display area Dd1 can be disposed at any position. In the present control example, the upper left area Dq1, the upper right side is displayed as a display area when the display position is switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1 when stop display is performed in the "preparation mode" and during long fluctuations A to G. Although three types of display areas, the area Dq2 and the lower left side area Dq3, are provided, the present invention is not limited to the three types. More display areas may be provided or less. Also, the arrangement of each display area may be arbitrarily determined.

  In this control example, the display position of the decorative symbol is switched in 3 seconds after the decorative symbol is displayed in the variable display area Dd1 (when the timing of the stop display or during the variable display), It is not limited. Instead of switching the display position, the display mode of the variable display area Dd1 may be changed. For example, the variable display area Dd1 may be reduced and displayed for 0.5 seconds every 3 seconds, and the display mode of the normal size of 3 seconds and the display mode of the reduced display of 0.5 seconds may be repeated. When the reduction display is performed, the display may be reduced to a size (for example, 1 mm in height × 1 mm in width) which is difficult for the player to visually recognize. By this configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult to visually recognize whether the decorative symbol is stopped or displayed while being reduced and displayed, so the display position of the decorative symbol is displayed. The same effect as in the case of varying. Further, since the lottery (determination) process for switching the display position can be omitted, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In this control example, when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1, the decorative symbol is not displayed in the variable display area Dd1 (only the display position is moved). It is not limited. For example, even after switching of the display position, the variable display area Dd1 may be subjected to the variable display in a pseudo manner. As a result, when the variable display area Dd1 is focused, it looks as if the variable display is always continued during the "preparation mode", regardless of whether the display is stopped or is changing. In the "preparation mode", it can be more difficult to understand whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In this control example, when 3 seconds have passed since the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the variable display region Dd1, the decorative symbol is moved to another display position (display region). However, the display time of the decorative symbol with respect to the variable display area Dq1 is not limited to 3 seconds, and may be determined arbitrarily.

  In this control example, the decorative symbol is configured to be displayed for 3 seconds or 0.5 seconds for any of the four display positions, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display position (variation display or stop display) of the decorative symbol in the "preparation mode" may be constantly moved at high speed. Also, the moving direction may be configured to look random. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbol, so it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from predicting the result of the “continuous mode suggestive effect”. Therefore, it can be made to confirm with a feeling of expectation until the last "continuous relief mode suggestion production".

  In each of the above control examples, after the ball B is rocked at the upper portion of the holding piece 677 (or the holding piece 6770) in the "in-line mode suggestive effect", to the pocket of the type corresponding to the present effect result However, the configuration for identifying the pocket indicating the rendering result is not limited to the ball B configured by a sphere. For example, a doll imitating a character appearing in a part of the effect of the pachinko machine 10 may be dropped into a pocket corresponding to the effect result. In this case, instead of swinging at the upper portion of the holding piece 677 (holding piece 6770), a doll imitating a character is suspended above the drop position with a string or the like to perform a pendulum-like rocking operation. You may do it. Then, when the period (amplitude) of the swing operation becomes equal to or less than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the doll may be dropped into the pocket of the type corresponding to the present rendering result. By configuring in this way, even if a non-spherical doll is used, the rendering result can be clearly notified as in the case of using the ball B. In addition, after the end of the effect, collect the doll imitating the character in the same way as the ball B, and return it to the suspended state again, so that it is possible to execute the effect of causing the doll to fall in each "continuously mode suggestive effect" It may be configured.

  In each of the control examples described above, plate-like members with numbers are adopted as the pockets P1 to P30, but the invention is not limited thereto. For example, the rotating member 640 may be replaced by an image by a liquid crystal display device or the like. That is, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be increased in size, and the roulette image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to execute the “send mode suggestion effect”. In this case, the ball B may be replaced by a video. That is, after the ball B has been thrown in the "in-line mode suggestive effect", after a swing operation is performed on the holding piece 677, a series of effects of falling into any pocket is all the third symbol display device It is good also as composition performed by the picture (image) displayed to 81. By configuring in this manner, the rotation member 640, the holding piece 677, the ball B, the throwing device 650, and the like can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the embodiments described above, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced or combined with part or all of one or more other embodiments to constitute a gaming machine.

  Although the above-mentioned each embodiment explained the case where the upper end part (radial direction outside portion of distribution convex part 521e) of the 1st channel formation member 520 of left rocking unit 500 was opened, it is not necessarily restricted to this. Absent. For example, a cover member that covers the open portion of the upper end portion of the first passage forming member 520 is open on the side to which the balls are supplied in the left and right areas of the distribution projection 521e, and the side to which the balls are supplied. The opposite side may operate in a lidd manner. In this case, it is possible to prevent foreign matter other than the sphere from mixing in the left and right areas of the distribution convex portion 521e.

  Although the case where the connection member 424 contacts and rotates the first passage forming member 520 has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the arrangement of the connection member 424 may be omitted. In this case, by reducing the number of component parts required for connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422, the product cost can be reduced. Further, instead of the connection member 424, a rubber-like elastic body having an internal passage may be provided. In this case, the positional deviation between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is absorbed by the deformation of the shape of the rubber-like elastic body due to the first passage forming member 520 coming into contact with the rubber-like elastic body. be able to.

  Although the case where the drive-side slide member 420 is driven by the rack 452 of one layer has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rack for driving the drive-side slide member 420 is configured with two layers in the front and rear, and the case where the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down with the front rack and the case where the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down with the rear rack And may be configurable. In this case, the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 move up and down in conjunction with each other by making only one of the two racks abut on the driven-side slide member 430 at the top and bottom. The drive-side slide member 420 passes through the driven-side slide member 430, and can be switched to a case where it moves up and down alone.

  Although the case where the contact part 351b and the receiving part 354b were projected outside the circle which the tooth root of other gear teeth forms was explained by each above-mentioned embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, one of the abutting portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b may be configured to be recessed toward the center side than the circle formed by the tooth bases of the other gear teeth, and the other may be extended longer by that amount.

  In the above embodiments, the portion in contact with the contact portion 351b is the adjacent gear tooth 354c in the shape of a gear tooth, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a portion having a shape different from the gear tooth shape may be formed, and the portion may be in contact with the contact portion 351b.

  In each of the above embodiments, the portion that comes in contact with the contact portion 351b is the receiving portion 354b in which the tooth shape is not formed, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, by partially scraping the gear teeth of the portion configured in a tooth shape, a surface that comes in contact with the contact portion 351b may be formed.

  Although the case where the whole of the overlapping portion of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b comes into surface contact has been described in the above-described embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by providing a recessed portion which is recessed toward the rotation shaft at an intermediate position of the contact portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b, the area to be surface-contacted may be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right elevation restricting members 417 abut at the same timing as the drive-side slide member 420 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, one of the left and right elevation regulating members 417 may be in contact with the drive-side slide member 420. In this case, it is possible to apply an asymmetrical load to the drive side slide member 420, and the drive side slide member 420 is inclined even when the center of gravity of the drive side slide member 420 is either left or right (one of the left and right). It can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the end wall member 2560 is disposed at the end of the first passage forming member 2520 has been described in the second embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a mode in which a blower that blows air from the end of the first passage forming member 2520 toward the base end is disposed, or an embodiment in which a magnetic force generator is provided at the end of the first passage forming member 2520 Alternatively, the end of the first passage forming member 2520 may be vibrated in the rotational direction. In this case, the ball can be prevented from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined upward as it goes to the tip end in the release state has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an intermediate portion that sinks between the proximal end and the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 may be provided (may be configured in a U-shape). In this case, when the ball remains in the first passage forming member 2520 in the released state, the ball can be held at the middle portion (the position closer to the tip end portion than the base end portion), so the communication state changes At this time, it is possible to shorten the period until the ball is thrown from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the third embodiment described above, the case where the lowering regulating member 415 and the rising regulating member 417 are disposed on one side is described, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lower limit restraining member 415 and the upper limit restricting member 417 are disposed on the left and right sides of the base member 410, respectively, and the elastic coefficients of the torsion springs 415d and 417g for biasing the lower limit restricting member 415 and the upper limit restricting member 417 A difference may be provided between the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed and the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the right side. At this time, compared with the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the left in front view (the side on which the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is offset), the elasticity of the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the right in front view It is preferable to reduce the coefficient. In this case, the load for changing the posture of the driven slide member 3430 counterclockwise in a front view counterclockwise direction (the direction in which the driven slide member 3430 is inclined due to the deviation of the gravity center) is When the driven-side slide member 3430 changes in posture clockwise as viewed from the front due to the rapid up and down movement of the driven-side slide member 3430, the change in posture can be suppressed while suppressing.

  In the third embodiment, although the case where the driven slide member 430 is dropped after the drive slide member 420 is disposed at the lowered position has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the driven slide member 430 may be dropped in a state in which the drive slide member 420 is disposed at the intermediate position. In this state, control may be performed in such a manner that the drive-side slide member 420 is operated in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the driven-side slide member 430 (control to repeatedly switch between the raising operation and the lowering operation). In this case, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the driven side slide member 430 to repel (for example, to repel repeatedly) by the drive side slide member 420.

  In each of the above embodiments, the split member DV in a state in which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621 is one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638. Although the case of driving is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the divided member DV in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the connection link action groove 621 is It may be driven by the rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638. In this case, since the distance between the division member DV for applying the driving force and the adjacent division member DV is increased, the adjacent division member DV and the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 Interference can be suppressed, and the diameters of the one side rotation drive member and the other side rotation drive member can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to increase the driving torque applied from the one side rotation driving member and the other side rotation driving member to the division member DV (the rotation member 640).

  In the above embodiments, the period during which the engaging portion 637b of the one side rotation driving member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, and the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 is a divided member Although the case where the period engaged with the driven part 641 of DV overlaps was explained (refer to FIG. 75), it is not necessarily limited to this, and the engaging part 637b of the one side rotation drive member 637 or other While one of the engaging portions 638b of the side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, the other is not engaged, and the engaging portion of the one side rotation driving member 637 While the other of the engaging portions 638b of the 637b or the other side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the dividing member DV, one of the engaging portions 638b may be disengaged.

  In this case, it can be avoided that the engagement portion 637b of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the engagement portion 638b of the other side rotation drive member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the engaged portions 641 of the division member DV. . That is, the engagement portion 637 b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 or the engagement portion 638 b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 can be alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641. Thereby, the displacement of the rotation member 640 can be stabilized.

  That is, a phase shift occurs between the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 due to the dimensional tolerance, the assembly tolerance, the drive tolerance of the drive motor 631 or the like. In the rotation member 640 formed by endlessly connecting the DVs, the engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the engagement portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 simultaneously receive the engagement of the divided member DV. When a phase shift occurs in the state of being engaged with the portion 641, one section in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 is compressed and the other section is pulled, so that the displacement of the rotating member 640 is unstable. It becomes.

  On the other hand, as described above, the engaging portion 637b of the one side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 are alternately engaged with the engaged portions 641 of the divided members DV. By doing this, even if a phase shift occurs, it is possible to prevent the rotation member 640 from being affected by the phase shift. As a result, even with the rotating member 640 formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of divided members DV, its displacement can be stabilized.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the dividing members DV are connected in an endless manner in the rotation unit 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The dividing members DV are connected in an endless shape (from one end to the other end It is naturally possible to connect the dividing members DV up to and including one end and the other end unconnected. In this case, for example, the divided member DV coupled in an end-like shape may be displaced (moved) along the endless track in each of the above embodiments, or may be present along the endless track. The divided member DV connected in an end shape may be reciprocated (reciprocated).

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction of the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the structure in which the rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted by the locking arc portion 351c is taken as an example>
In the gaming machine, the gaming machine includes a driving means, a transmission member transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and a displacement member displaced between the raised position and the lowered position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. The member includes a first gear, and a second gear engaged with the first gear and disposed closer to the displacement member in the transmission path of the driving force than the first gear, The gear includes an abutting portion formed in a part of the tooth shape, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, a predetermined tooth of the second gear is in the abutting portion of the first gear. By being abutted, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted.

  Here, there is provided a gaming machine comprising a drive means, a transmission member for transmitting the drive force of the drive means, and a displacement member displaced between the raised position and the lowered position by the drive force transmitted by the transmission member. Are known. For example, the transmission member is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism, and the rotation of the pinion driven by the driving means is converted to the linear motion of the rack, and the linear motion of the rack raises and lowers the displacement member between the lowered position and the raised position. There is a thing (patent document 1: For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-80941). In this case, the displacement member is lowered by its own weight when the driving force of the drive means is released in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position. Therefore, it is necessary to keep applying the driving force of the driving means, and there is a problem that the energy consumption when holding the displacement member at the raised position is increased. On the other hand, by providing a crank mechanism in part of the drive means and utilizing the dead point of the crank mechanism, the displacement member is prevented from being lowered from its raised position by its own weight even if the drive force of the drive means is released. However, in this case, there is a problem that the entire transmission member is increased in size by the provision of the crank mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first gear is provided with the contact portion formed in a part of the tooth form, and in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the contact of the first gear Since the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacing member descends is restricted by the predetermined teeth of the second gear being in contact with the portion, the displacing member remains even if the driving force of the drive means is released. It can be suppressed that it is lowered by its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to suppress energy consumption when holding the displacement member in the raised position. In addition, since the structure for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be formed by the first gear and the second gear, and there is no need to interpose a crank mechanism separately, downsizing of the transmission member can be achieved. it can.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth shape, and in a state in which the displacing member is disposed at the raised position, the second gear has the first contact with the first gear. A game machine A2 characterized in that rotation of the second gear in a direction in which the displacement member moves upward is restricted by the abutment of the receiving portion of the two gear.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, when the receiving portion of the second gear abuts on the abutting portion of the first gear, the rotation of the second gear in the upward direction of the displacement member Is restricted, that is, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the rotation of the second gear is restricted in both forward and reverse directions, so that the displacement member held at the raised position is rattling Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the rotation of the first gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is permitted.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the state where the displacing member is disposed at the raised position, the rotation of the first gear in the direction to lower the displacing member is permitted. It is not necessary to separately perform an operation for releasing the contact between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined gear of the second gear, and the first gear is rotated by the driving force of the driving means to move to the raised position. The held displacement member can be lowered. That is, while the rotation of the second gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is restricted, the rotation of the first gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is permitted. Therefore, when the displacing member is about to be lowered from its raised position by its own weight, a predetermined tooth of the second gear is brought into contact with the contact portion of the first gear, thereby restricting the rotation of the second gear. Can be held in the raised position. On the other hand, when the first gear is rotated, the second gear is rotated along with the rotation, and the displacement member can be lowered.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear is formed to be able to mesh with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction to raise the displacement member, and A game machine A4 characterized in that the tooth height of the first gear is lower than that of the first gear, and a predetermined tooth of the second gear can abut on the top surface of the first gear.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the advantageous effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear meshes with the predetermined teeth of the second gear when rotating in the direction of raising the displacement member. Since it is possible to make the gear teeth lower than the teeth of the first gear and to allow predetermined teeth of the second gear to abut on the top surface of the first gear, the first gear in the direction of raising the displacement member When the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the second gear can be rotated in the direction of raising the displacement member through engagement of the contact portion and the predetermined teeth, As a result, a state in which a predetermined tooth of the second gear can contact with the contact portion of the first gear (a state in which the contact portion (tooth top surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear) It can be formed reliably.

  In the gaming machine A4, a contact portion of the first gear has a tooth thickness larger than that of the teeth of the first gear.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear is made thicker than the teeth of the first gear, so that the predetermined teeth of the second gear are in contact Possible areas can be secured. Therefore, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position can be made gentle (the allowance can be increased). As a result, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the predetermined teeth of the second gear can abut on the contact portion of the first gear.

  In addition, the contact portion of the first gear is a portion that receives a predetermined tooth of the second gear and regulates rotation of the second gear (that is, supports the weight of the displacement member), and the tooth thickness is As it is enlarged, the strength can be secured.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed so that the tooth top surface is curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the first gear. .

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed such that the tooth top surface is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation center of the first gear Therefore, the strength of the first gear can be improved while the first gear can be rotated until the predetermined teeth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact portion (tooth top surface) of the first gear. Can be

  Further, when the second gear is rotated in the direction to lower the displacement member and a predetermined tooth of the second gear abuts on the contact portion (tooth top surface) of the first gear, the predetermined position of the second gear The rotation of the first gear can be easily suppressed with the direction of the force acting on the contact portion of the first gear from the gear teeth as the direction toward the rotation axis of the first gear. As a result, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacing member descends can be easily restricted, and even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacing member can be reliably restrained from being descended by its own weight.

  In the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth shape, and the first gear is mounted on the receiving portion of the second gear when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position. A game machine A7 characterized in that the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member ascends is restricted by the abutment of the abutment portion of the gear.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes the receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth form, and the first member is disposed in the raised position. Since the rotation of the first gear in the upward direction of the displacement member is restricted by the abutment portion of the gear being in contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, the receiving portion of the second gear It can function as a stopper that stops the rotation of the first gear after being placed in the raised position.

  In the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear is concave toward the rotation shaft of the second gear at the side facing the contacting portion of the first gear and the arc of the contacting portion of the first gear A game machine A8 characterized by being curved and formed into an arc having a diameter substantially equal to the shape.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear is concaved toward the rotation shaft of the second gear at the side facing the contact portion of the first gear. Since it is curved in an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the arc shape of the contact portion of the gear, when the contact portion of the first gear is in contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, both surfaces The abutment portion of the first gear can be firmly received by the receiving portion of the second gear. As a result, the function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after disposing the displacement member in the raised position can be reliably exerted on the receiving portion of the second gear.

  Further, since the receiving portion of the second gear is curved in an arc shape that is concave toward the rotation axis of the second gear, the tooth height on both sides in the tooth thickness direction can be increased, and the strength of the receiving portion Can be enhanced. Thus, damage to the receiving portion of the second gear when receiving the contact portion of the first gear can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the engagement between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear is released, and A game machine A9 characterized in that the displacement member is located at the end of the movable range in the upward direction.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the advantageous effects of any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined teeth of the second gear And the displacement member is positioned at the end of the movable range in the upward direction, so that the displacement member is disposed at the upward position by the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member is lifted. Later, while stopping the second gear, it is possible to rotate only the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member ascends. Thereby, a state in which a predetermined tooth of the second gear can abut on a contact portion of the first gear (a state in which a contact portion (tooth top surface) of the first gear faces a predetermined tooth of the second gear) Can be formed reliably.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example the structure connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422>
A ball includes a first passage member and a second passage member formed to allow passage of balls, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other. A communication state in which the ball can be fed from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first and second passage members are separated. In a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state in which the first and second passage members can not be communicated with each other, the first passage member or the second passage member is disposed displaceably at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. A game machine B1 comprising: a connecting member which causes one end of the first passage member and the second passage member to communicate with each other in a state where the other of the two passage members abuts and is displaced.

  Here, it is provided with a first passage member and a second passage member formed so as to allow passage of a ball, and by displacement of at least the first passage member, one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other In the communication state in which the ball can be fed from the first passage member to the second passage member, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not There is known a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state to be communicated (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-171636). In this case, variations in the stop position when the first passage member is displaced and the arrangement position of the second passage member are inevitable due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the parts. Therefore, in the communication state, positional deviation occurs in the positions of the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member, which makes it difficult to stably feed the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the first passage member or the second passage member is disposed at one end, and is in contact with and displaced from the other of the first passage member or the second passage member. In the above, since the connecting member is provided to connect the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member with each other, even if the positions of the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are misaligned, one end thereof The displacement of the connecting portion interposed between the two can absorb misalignment. Thereby, it is possible to stabilize the ball feeding from the first passage member to the second passage member. Further, since the first passage member abuts on the connecting member to displace the connecting member with the displacement of the first passage member, the driving force for displacing the first passage member can also be used, and the connecting member is displaced. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving force for driving.

  In the gaming machine B1, the connection member includes one side wall portion and the other side wall portion disposed opposite to each other across the opening of one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and the one side wall portion When the first passage member is displaced on the displacement trajectory of the first passage member, and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is in contact with one side wall portion of the connection member A game machine B2 characterized in that the connecting member is displaced, and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, when the first passage member is displaced and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is in contact with one side wall portion of the connecting member The connection member is displaced, and the other side wall portion of the connection member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member, so that one side wall portion and the other side wall portion of the connection member The first passage member and one end of the second passage member can be brought closer to each other, and misalignment between the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member can be easily absorbed. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the ball feeding from the first passage member to the second passage member.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member such that one end thereof is the rotating tip end, and the connection member is a rotation shaft parallel to the rotation axis of the first passage member. The connection member is rotated when the first passage member is rotated and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is abutted against one side wall portion of the connection member. A game machine B3 characterized in that the other side wall portion of the connection member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the first passage member is rotated with its one end serving as the rotating tip end to form a communication state, and the connecting member is the first passage. Since the rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the member is provided, the displacement (rotation) of the connection member can be smoothly performed along with the displacement (rotation) of the first passage member. Moreover, the other side wall part of a connection member can be more closely approached to the other end of a 1st channel | path member or a 2nd channel | path member by utilizing both rotational operation.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, in the communication state, in the communication state, one of the opposing surfaces of the opposing surfaces of the one side wall and the other side wall has a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. A game machine B4 characterized in that it is a rolling surface at the time of being thrown, and in the communication state, the one facing surface is lowered from the first passage member to the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3, it is possible to stabilize the ball feeding of the balls in the communicating portion between the first passage member and the second passage member. That is, since the communicating portion between the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member is a portion where the positional deviation becomes large, the ball feeding of the ball becomes unstable, and the rolling surface of the ball in the communicating portion is formed. One of the opposing surfaces is inclined downward from the first passage member to the second passage member, so that the ball can be rolled to stabilize its ball feeding.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the communication state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member, and in the released state, in the first passage member A game machine B5 characterized in that it comprises a ball throwing restricting means for restricting the ball from being thrown from one end of the first passage member.

  Here, in the released state, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not in communication. When a ball is supplied to the passage member, the ball passing through the first passage member may fall out of the game area. Further, even in the communication state, even if the ball is supplied to the first passage member, the ball remains in the first passage member for some reason, and when the state is shifted to the release state as it is, the first passage member There is a risk that the ball that has stayed at may fall into the game area. If the ball falls out of the game area, the movement of the movable member such as the gear or the crank mechanism may be impeded, or the ball may be pinched to cause breakage of the movable member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the communication state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member In addition, in the released state, the ball in the first passage member is provided with the ball throwing restricting means for restricting the ball being thrown from one end of the first passage member, so for example, when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state Even when the ball stays in the first passage member and the state is shifted from the communication state to the release state, it is possible to suppress the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

  The gaming machine B5 includes a cover body which is disposed at one end of the first passage member and allows passage of the ball in the communication state and restricts the passage of the ball in the release state, and the cover body is the throwing restriction. A game machine B6 characterized in forming a means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B5, the cover as the throwing control means for permitting passage of the ball in the communication state and restricting the passage of the ball in the release state at one end of the first passage member. Because the body is disposed, for example, even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball moves from the communication state to the released state with the ball remaining in the first passage member, the first passage It is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the member.

  In the gaming machine B5, an urging member applies an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position for restricting the passage of the balls, and acts on the cover body with displacement of the first passage member. An action member for displacing the cover body in a direction allowing passage of the ball when the communication state is formed at least; game machine B7;

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, since the biasing member is provided to apply a biasing force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position to restrict passage of the ball, Careless displacement of the body can be suppressed, and as a result, the balls can be more reliably suppressed from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. On the other hand, when the communication state is formed, the cover body is displaced in the direction to allow passage of the ball, so that the ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member.

  In this case, since the displacement of the cover body in the direction to allow passage of the ball is performed along with the displacement of the first passage member by the action of the action member, the drive means for displacing the first passage member displaces the cover body. It can also be made to serve as a drive means for making it possible to reduce the product cost accordingly.

  The action member is located on the displacement locus of the cover body along with the displacement of the first passage member, and is in contact with the cover body displaced along the displacement locus to resist the urging force of the urging member. And driving the driving means for displacing the first passage member (for example, the second passage member, the connection member, the member fixed to the game board, etc.) or displacing the first passage member. Are transmitted to the cover body to displace the cover body together with the displacement of the first passage member (for example, a gear, a rack and pinion, etc. which convert the driving means and the driving force into rotational motion or linear motion and transmit it to the cover Is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine B5, the throwing control means arranges the first passage member such that one end of the first passage member is uppermost in the released state.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B5, the throwing control means arranges the first passage member in the released state in which the one end of the first passage member is uppermost. Even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball is shifted from the communication state to the released state with the ball remaining in the first passage member, the ball goes out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. It is possible to suppress falling.

  Note that the first passage member disposed in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is in the uppermost position in the released state does not have to be inclined upward as a whole of the first passage member, and the first passage member There may be a horizontal or downward slope region in part.

  In the gaming machine B5, the ball throwing restricting means is characterized in that the first passage member is disposed in the posture of rising and tilting from the other end of the first passage member to the one end in the released state. Game machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B5, the throwing control means is disposed in a posture in which the first passage member is inclined upward from the other end of the first passage member to one end in the release state. Therefore, for example, even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball moves from the communication state to the released state with the ball remaining in the first passage member, the ball from one end of the first passage member Can be easily suppressed from falling outside the game area.

  Further, in the case of forming the communication state, it is possible to form a state in which the whole of the first passage member is inclined downward from the other end to the one end, so it is easy to send balls from the first passage member to the second passage member. , You can control that the ball stays on the way. Therefore, when it transfers to a cancellation | release state, it can suppress that the ball which remained in the 1st passage member falls to a game area.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B9, a case body having an upstream passage and a downstream passage formed to allow passage of a ball, one side position for distributing the ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the first passage, And a distribution member which is displaced between the other side positions for distributing the ball, which flows down from the upstream passage, to the downstream passage, and the case body is formed such that both sides in the displacement direction of the distribution member are opened. Game machine B10 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the case body is formed open on both sides in the displacement direction of the sorting member, so one side position or the other side position Even when the ball flows down between the distributing member and the case body displaced toward the direction, it is possible to suppress that the flowed down ball is sandwiched between the distributing member and the case body.

  In the gaming machine B10, the distributing member is formed in the first passage member, and the distributing member is disposed at the one side position when the communication state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member. A game machine B11, wherein the distributing member is disposed at the other side position when the released state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B10, the distributing member is formed on the first passage member, and the displacement member is disposed at the one side position and the other side position with the displacement of the first passage member. Therefore, the drive means for displacing the first passage member can also be used as the drive means for displacing the distribution member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, in the structure in which the distributing member is displaced independently of the first passage member, for example, when a displacement occurs between the distributing member and the first passage member due to occurrence of control failure, the released state The ball may be distributed to the first passage member located at the side (i.e., the distributing member is disposed at one side position), and the ball may fall from the one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area. On the other hand, in the gaming machine B10, since the distributing member is formed on the first passage member, the displacement state of the distributing member and the first passage member can always be synchronized. Therefore, even if a control failure occurs, it can be avoided that the ball is distributed to the first passage member in the released state (that is, the distributing member is always on the other side when the released state is formed) As a result, it is possible to reliably suppress the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

  In the gaming machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion that defines a passage through which a ball passes, and a wall portion of the first passage member is used as the distributing member.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B11, the first passage member includes the wall portion that divides the passage through which the ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is the distribution member. The parts cost can be reduced by sharing parts. In addition, by using the wall portion that defines the passage through which the ball passes as the distribution member, the distributed ball can be reliably made to flow down to the passage.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the structure for restricting the rebound of the driven slide member 430 is taken as an example>
A guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member between the raised position and the lowered position, and the displacement member supported in the lowered position The displacing member is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the raising and lowering member as the raising and lowering member rises, the supporting member and a raising and lowering member formed to be able to move up and down along the guide member. In the gaming machine, the displacement member is lowered from the raised position to the lowered position by its own weight as the elevating member is lowered, and the displacement member is moved upward as the displacement member is lowered to the lowered position. A game machine C1 comprising a rise restricting member for restricting displacement.

  Here, a guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member between the raised position and the lowered position, and the displacement member supported at the lowered position And a lifting member formed so as to be able to move up and down along the guide member, and the displacement member is lifted from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the lifting member as the lift member rises. There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement member is lowered from its raised position to its lowered position by its own weight as the elevating member is lowered (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-233494). In this case, the displacement member lowered by its own weight along the guide member is placed on the support member and supported by the support member to be maintained at the lowered position. However, since the displacement member is placed on the support member and can be displaced in the upward direction along the guide member, rattle is likely to occur due to disturbance, and the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position Was unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the elevation restricting member is provided which restricts the displacement of the displacing member in the upward direction when the displacing member is lowered to the lowered position, the displacement member follows the guide member at the lowered position. It is possible to regulate displacement in the upward direction, and to suppress rattling caused by disturbance. As a result, the attitude of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized.

  The gaming machine C1 includes biasing means for biasing the rise restricting member in a direction toward the displacement member, and the displacement member abuts on the rise restricting member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. A lift acting member for displacing the lift restricting member in the direction of moving away from the displacement member; and allowing the lift restricting member to be displaced in the direction approaching the displacement member at the lowered position; A game machine C2 comprising: an engaging portion to be engaged.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the displacing member moves away from the displacing member in a direction away from the displacing member when the displacing member is lowered by its own weight; In this case, since the engaging portion that engages with the elevation restricting member is provided, the restricting state by the elevation restricting member can be formed only by the operation of lowering the displacing member to the lowered position by its own weight. There is no need to provide a separate drive source for Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion is performed after allowing the elevation restricting member to be displaced in the direction approaching the displacement member, the portion corresponding to the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion It is possible to increase the force required to release the engagement and the displacement of the elevation restricting member. As a result, even when a disturbance is input, the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion can be easily maintained.

  In the game machine C2, the release of the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacing member is released by raising the elevating member. Even in the case where it is intended that the user input the input and return, it is possible to suppress the inadvertent release of the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member.

  In addition, since the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engagement portion of the displacement member is released by raising the elevation member, there is no need to separately provide a drive source for releasing the engagement. The drive source for moving the member up and down can also be used as a drive source for releasing the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. .

  Furthermore, when separately providing a drive source for releasing the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacing member, for example, due to the occurrence of control failure, the engaging portion of the elevation restraining member and the displacing member In the state where the engagement of the lifting member is not released, there is a possibility that the lifting member may ascend and push up the displacement member. According to the gaming machine C3, the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is released. Since it can be performed according to the operation of pushing up the displacement member by the raising and lowering member as the raising and lowering member rises, when pushing up the displacement member by the raising and lowering member, the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member Can be reliably released.

  In the gaming machine C3, when the lifting member is lifted, the lifting member abuts against the lifting regulating member to displace the lifting regulating member, and the lifting regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member A game machine C4 characterized by comprising a release operation unit for releasing the engagement.

  Here, although release of the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member can be performed by a pushing force when pushing up the displacement member as the elevation member moves up and down, in this case, the pushing force It is necessary to set it in the engagement state which can be released by this, and firm engagement becomes difficult. Further, in this case, when the engagement is released, a vibration is generated by reaction, and the posture of the displacement member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the elevating member abuts on the elevating regulating member by displacing the elevating regulating member when the elevating member is elevated. Since the release action portion for releasing the engagement between the member and the engagement portion of the displacement member is provided, even when the rise restricting member and the engagement portion of the displacement member are firmly engaged, the release is reliably performed. be able to. In other words, since a strong engagement state can be formed, rattling of the displacement member caused by the disturbance can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to stabilize the attitude of the displacement member by suppressing the vibration due to the reaction when the engagement is released.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the elevation restricting member causes the elevating member to raise and lower the displacement member between the lowered position and the raised position when the engagement with the engagement portion of the displacement member is released. A game machine C5 characterized in that it is abutted.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, the rise restricting member is displaced between the lowered position and the raised position when the engagement with the engaging portion of the displacement member is released. Since it is in contact with the elevating member to be moved up and down, it functions as a guide and can suppress rattling when the elevating member is moved up and down. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacing member that is lifted and lowered along with the lifting and lowering member.

  In the gaming machine C5, the elevation restricting member brought into contact with the elevating member is biased by the biasing means in a direction approaching the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the lift regulating member in contact with the elevating member is biased by the biasing means in the direction approaching the elevating member. It can be biased to stabilize its posture. Further, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the elevating member by the elastic buffer action of the biasing means.

  The gaming machine C6 comprises a driving means, a pinion rotationally driven by the driving means, and a rack in which the pinion is engaged, and the rack is disposed on the elevating member, and the elevating member is A game machine C7 characterized in that the rack is urged by the urging means in a direction of being separated from the pinion via a rise restricting member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the rotational movement of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into linear movement of the rack, and the linear movement causes the elevating member to move up and down along the guide member. Ru. In this case, the elevating member is biased in the direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via the elevation restricting member, so that the spacing between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized. That is, when the lifting member rattles in the direction in which the gap between the rack and pinion teeth narrows, the biasing force of the biasing means acts in the direction to widen the gap, while the gap between the rack and pinion teeth widens In the case where the lifting member rattles, the guide structure of the guide member can regulate that the interval is expanded beyond a certain level. Accordingly, the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is narrowed, and it is possible to suppress an excessive meshing resistance.

  A gaming machine C8 according to any one of game machines C1 to C7, comprising: a descent regulating member for regulating displacement of the elevating member in the descent direction when the elevating member pushes the displacing member to the raised position.

  According to the gaming machine C8, since any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7 includes the descent regulating member that regulates the displacement in the descent direction of the elevating member when the elevating member pushes the displacing member up to the elevating position. The displacing member and the raising and lowering member provided can be supported by the lowering control member. As a result, since the driving force for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be eliminated, the energy consumption of the driving means for driving the elevating member can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the restraining member is regulated by elevating the elevating member, there is no need to separately provide a drive source for forming the restraining by the restraining member, and the driving source for elevating the elevating member Can also be used as a driving source for forming the restriction by the lowering restriction member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C8, the restriction by the lowering restriction member is released by lowering the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8, the release by the lowering regulating member is released by lowering the lifting member, so it is necessary to separately provide a drive source for releasing the regulation. The drive source for raising and lowering the elevating member can also be used as a drive source for releasing the restriction of the lowering regulating member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  When a drive source for releasing the restriction by the lowering restriction member is separately provided, for example, the raising and lowering member is lowered and driven in a state where the restriction by the lowering restriction member is not released due to the occurrence of control failure. Since there is a possibility that overload may act on the source or damage to the lowering restriction member etc., according to the gaming machine C9, the restriction by the lowering restriction member can be canceled in accordance with the lowering operation of the raising and lowering member. When the elevating member is lowered, it is possible to form a state in which the restriction by the lowering restricting member is reliably released.

  In the case where the lowering regulating member is a structure that regulates the displacement of the displacing member in the lowering direction, not the lifting member, the structure by which the regulation by the lowering regulating member is released along with the lowering of the lifting member is complicated. According to the gaming machines C8 and C9, since the descent regulating member is configured to regulate the displacement of the elevating member in the descent direction, the release of the regulation by the descent regulating member is accompanied by the descent of the elevating member. The structure to be carried out can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine C8 or C9, in a state in which the downward movement of the elevation member is restricted by the downward movement restriction member, the upward movement restriction member is in contact with the upward and downward movement member, and the downward movement restriction member is in contact with the upward and downward movement member. A game machine C10, wherein the direction of contact is different from the direction of contact of the elevation restricting member with the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in the gaming machine C8 or C9, the direction in which the lowering regulating member is in contact with the elevating member is different from the direction in which the rising regulating member is in contact with the elevating member. The restraining member and the elevation restricting member can respectively suppress rattling of the elevating member in different directions. As a result, the posture of the raising and lowering member can be effectively stabilized.

  The gaming machine C10 includes a driving means, a pinion rotationally driven by the driving means, and a rack in which the pinion is engaged, and the rack is disposed on the elevating member, and the lowering restriction member is A gaming machine C11 characterized in that the gaming machine C11 is in contact with the elevating member in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine C11, the rotational movement of the pinion rotationally driven by the drive means is converted into the linear movement of the rack, and the elevating member is moved up and down along the guide member by the linear movement. In this case, the rack (lifting member) can be displaced in the direction parallel to the tooth surface with respect to the pinion, while the lowering regulating member is abutted on the raising and lowering member from the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack Thus, the rack (lifting member) can be restricted from being displaced relative to the pinion in the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the rise restricting member and the support member can be in contact with the displacement member from one side and the other side across the guide member. A game machine C12 characterized in that each of the game machines is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in the state where the displacing member is disposed at the lowered position, the one side and the other side of the rising restricting member and the supporting member sandwiching the guiding member Since each of the guide members is disposed so as to be able to abut on the displacing member, rattling in either direction of one side or the other side of the displacing member relative to the guide member is restricted by the abutment of the elevation restricting member or the supporting member it can. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the rattling of the displacing member disposed at the lowered position due to the disturbance.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, when the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the support member and the elevation restricting member abut on the displacement member while the positions thereof are different along the extending direction of the guide member. A game machine C13, which is disposed as much as possible, and the support member is disposed above the rise restricting member.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the advantageous effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the support member and the elevation restricting member are positioned along the extending direction of the guide member. Since the displacement member is disposed so as to be able to abut on the displacement member, rattling of the displacement member in the oblique direction can be regulated by the abutment with the elevation regulating member and the support member. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the rattling of the displacing member disposed at the lowered position due to the disturbance.

  Further, since the support member is disposed above the elevation restricting member, the support member does not inhibit the elevation of the elevation member, and a space for the elevation member to ascend and descend can be secured. Therefore, the freedom of design can be secured.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the structure for detecting the detected portion 641 of the rotating member 640 by the detection sensor 684 is an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a movable member movably formed and detection means for detecting the movement position of the movable member, the detection means arranges the movable member at unequal intervals along the direction of movement thereof. A game machine D1 comprising: a plurality of detection target units provided; and a plurality of detection sensors provided on a movement trajectory of the detection target units.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a movable member that is rotatably formed and a detection unit that detects the rotational position of the movable member (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-46467). According to this gaming machine, the detection means includes a plurality of slits formed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the moving member, and a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit disposed opposite to each other with the slits interposed, and the light receiving unit receives light. The number of pulses of the pulse signal is accumulated and added, and based on the accumulated number of pulses, the amount of rotation (that is, the rotational position) of the movable member from the reference position is detected. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a light reception failure of the light receiving unit, a shift occurs between the rotational position of the moving member and the cumulative addition number, and the rotational position of the moving member can not be accurately detected. There was a problem. That is, when a detection failure occurs, the subsequent detection results are affected, and the effects on the detection results are accumulated each time a detection failure occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the detecting means is disposed on the moving track of the plurality of detected portions disposed on the moving member at unequal intervals along the direction of the movement, and the moving locus of the detected portions. Since the plurality of detection sensors provided are provided, the movement position of the moving member can be detected based on a combination of detection results of the plurality of detection sensors. That is, the movement position of the moving member can be detected based on only the current detection results detected by the plurality of detection sensors, and the detection result of the detection sensor needs to be detected for the movement position of the moving member. Therefore, the moving position of the moving member can be accurately detected.

  In the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction, and the detection target is one of the plurality of divided members. And a plurality of detection sensors are disposed at intervals based on the disposition intervals of the division members. The gaming machine D2 to be.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the moving member is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction, as well as including the plurality of divided members, Is disposed on a part of the plurality of divided members and not disposed on the remaining divided members, and the plurality of detection sensors are disposed on the basis of the disposition interval of the divided members Therefore, the combination of detection results of the plurality of detection sensors can be made different each time the moving member is displaced by an amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the dividing members. That is, the movement position of the moving member can be detected with the movement amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the division members as the minimum unit.

  Note that when a plurality of detection sensors are disposed at intervals based on the disposition interval of the division members, the plurality of detection sensors are disposed at positions corresponding to any of the plurality of division members. It means that. That is, this means that each of the plurality of detection sensors is disposed at a position where detection of the presence or absence of the detection target of the corresponding divided member is possible.

  In the gaming machine D2, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a second section in which the plurality of divided members are narrower than the first interval. And a plurality of second sections connected to each other at intervals of, the plurality of detection sensors are moving trajectories of the detection target in the first section at intervals based on the disposition intervals of the division members in the first section. A game machine D3 characterized in that the game machine is disposed on top.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, in the moving member, the first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval and the plurality of divided members are more than the first interval Since the second section connected at the second interval which is the narrow interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be shortened compared to the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for the disposition of the moving member can be reduced.

  In this case, the plurality of detection sensors are disposed on the movement trajectory of the detection target in the first section at intervals based on the disposition interval (first interval) of the division members in the first section. It is easy to secure the space required for the arrangement of the detection sensor. In other words, when setting the arrangement interval (the second interval) of the division members in the second section, it is not necessary to consider the space for the arrangement of the detection sensor, and hence the second interval It can be set to a narrow interval. As a result, it is possible to reduce the space required for the disposition of the moving member also from this point.

  In the gaming machine D3, the dividing member includes a main body member on which the detection target member is disposed, and a link member whose both ends are movably connected to each of the main body member and the main body of the adjacent dividing member. The distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by displacing the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent divided member, and the link member is displaced in the first section. A game machine D4 that reaches the end and is restricted from being displaced in the direction of widening the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, both ends of the dividing member can be displaced between the main body member on which the detected member is disposed and the main body of the main body member and the adjacent dividing member. The link member is connected to the link member, and the distance between the dividing member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by displacing the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member. And the structure for forming the second section can be simplified.

  In this case, in the first section, the link member reaches the displacement end, and the displacement of the dividing member in the direction to widen the distance between the adjacent dividing members is restricted. It is possible to suppress the variation in position of the part. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

  The gaming machine D4 includes a base member on which the dividing member is disposed displaceably, and the base member guides a main body guiding portion for guiding the main body member and the link member when the dividing member is displaced. And the link guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, and the main body member and the adjacent portion are adjacent to each other. A game machine D5 characterized in that the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member of the dividing member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the base member includes a main body guiding portion for guiding the main body member when the dividing member is displaced and a link guiding portion for guiding the link member. The guiding portion acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guiding portion of the base member to change the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the adjacent main body of the dividing member, The interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased according to the change in the attitude of the link member. That is, while moving the moving member, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased to form the first section and the second section.

  In the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the link guided portion of the base member is slidably inserted through the guided portion of the link member. The gaming machine D6 is formed in a groove shape and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guiding portion of the base member, and the link guiding portion of the base member is guided by the link member The portion is formed into a groove shape which is slidably inserted, and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member, so that the link member can be easily maintained at the displacement end in the first section. As a result, it is possible to reliably restrict displacement of the divided members in the direction of widening the distance between the adjacent divided members, and to suppress positional variation of the detection target in the direction of widening the gap. The detection accuracy by the detection sensor can be improved.

  In any one of the game machines D4 to D6, the dividing member includes a displacement member disposed displaceably on the main body member, and in the first section, the dividing member abuts on the main body member of the adjacent dividing member. A game machine D7 characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a position, and the displacement of the division member in a direction to narrow an interval between the adjacent division members is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the dividing member includes a displacement member disposed displaceably on the main body member, and in the first section, the dividing members are adjacent to each other. The displacement member is displaced to a position abutted against the main body member, and the displacement of the division member in the direction of narrowing the distance between the adjacent division members is restricted, so the detected portion in the direction of narrowing the distance Position variation can be suppressed. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention taking an example of the structure for adjusting the distance between the divided members DV in the moving member 640>
In the gaming machine provided with a movable member formed movably, the movable member is provided with a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the movement direction, and the movable member And a second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval smaller than the first interval. A game machine E1 characterized in that a section is formed.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a movable member formed rotatably (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of pieces of identification information may be displayed along the circumferential direction on the front of the moving member, and the player may be made to visually recognize the identification information disposed at the predetermined position. However, in consideration of the player's visibility, the identification information needs to secure a certain size or more. Therefore, when the number of display of identification information is increased, the diameter of the moving member is increased, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, reducing the diameter of the moving member reduces the number of display of identification information.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, in the moving member, the first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval, and the plurality of divided members are spaced smaller than the first interval. Since the second section connected with the second interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be shortened compared to the case where the whole is connected with the first interval. As a result, the space required for the disposition of the moving member can be reduced. That is, while securing the number of divided members, it is possible to suppress the space required for arranging the plurality of divided members. Therefore, for example, when displaying identification information on each division member, the space required for arrangement | positioning of a movement member can be suppressed, ensuring the display number of identification information.

  In the gaming machine E1, the dividing member includes a main body member and a link member whose both ends are movably connected to each of the main body member and the adjacent main body of the dividing member, and the link member is the main body member and A game machine E2 characterized in that the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by being displaced with respect to the main body of the adjacent divided member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the dividing member includes the main body member, and the link member whose both ends are movably connected to each of the main body member and the adjacent main body of the dividing member. The distance between the dividing member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by displacing the link member with respect to the main body of the main member and the adjacent divided member, thereby forming the first section and the second section. Structure can be simplified.

  The gaming machine E2 includes a base member on which the dividing member is disposed displaceably, and the base member guides a main body guiding portion for guiding the main body member and the link member when the dividing member is displaced. And the link guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, and the main body member and the adjacent portion are adjacent to each other. A game machine E3 characterized in that the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member of the dividing member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the base member includes a main body guiding portion for guiding the main body member when the dividing member is displaced and a link guiding portion for guiding the link member. The guiding portion acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guiding portion of the base member to change the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the adjacent main body of the dividing member, The interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased according to the change in the attitude of the link member. That is, while moving the moving member, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased to form the first section and the second section.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the division member includes a displacement member disposed displaceably on the main body member, and the displacement member is inclined toward the adjacent division member in the first section. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the second section is in a more upright position than the attitude in the first section.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the displacement member is inclined toward the adjacent divided member in the first section, so the displacement member can be viewed from the player It can be made easy. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on the displacement member, the visibility of the identification information to the player can be enhanced. Further, in the first section, the distance between the division members is increased, so that a space for tilting the displacement member can be secured, and the displacement member can be increased in size. Therefore, also from this point, the visibility of the displacement member, that is, the visibility of the identification information can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the second section, the displacing member is set to a posture standing up more than the posture in the first section, so that the displacing member can be separated from the main body members of the adjacent divided members. To make them closer together. That is, the second interval in the second section can be narrowed. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space necessary for the arrangement of the moving member can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed displaceably on the upper surface of the main body member, and is disposed above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member in the second section. A gaming machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed displaceably on the upper surface of the main body member, and in the second section, above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member Since it arrange | positions, interference with a displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the main body members can be brought close to contact with each other, and the distance between them can be narrowed. That is, the second interval in the second section can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space necessary for the arrangement of the moving member can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E3, a gaming machine E6 characterized in that a track of the base guiding portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, since the track of the main body guiding portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape, the structure for displacing the main body member by being guided by the main body guiding portion of the base member Can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine E3, the track of the division members in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape connects all the plurality of division members in the circumferential direction at the first interval. A game machine E7 characterized by being equivalent to the radius in the case of arranging in a circle.

  Here, a first section in which the plurality of divided members are circumferentially connected at a first interval and a second section in which the plurality of divided members are at a second interval smaller than the first interval are circumferentially connected. In the case where the second section is formed on the moving member (hereinafter referred to as "the former case"), the moving member is compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval (hereinafter referred to as "the latter"). Since the length in the circumferential direction can be shortened, it is possible to reduce the space necessary for arranging the plurality of divided members while securing the number of divided members. However, when the trajectories of the plurality of divided members are formed in a circle, the radius in the former case is smaller than the radius in the latter case. Therefore, for the player who visually recognizes the divided members in the first section in the former case, the total number of divided members forming the moving member is the actual number based on the number and the radius of the divided members in the first section. Recall the fewer numbers.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the track of the division members in the first section is formed into an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape is a plurality of divided members The radius is equal to the radius in the case of connecting in the circumferential direction at the first interval and arranging them in a circle, thus securing the number of the plurality of divided members and suppressing the space necessary for the arrangement of the plurality of divided members However, the player can recall a number corresponding to the actual number as the total number of divided members forming the moving member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Drive Mechanism 630 as an Example>
A moving member formed by connecting a base member on which a guiding portion is extended and a plurality of divided members displaced along the guiding portion of the base member, and applying a driving force to the moving member The base member includes a driving means, and the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided members to thereby set a first guide portion for setting the distance between the divided members to a first distance, and more than the first distance. And a second guide portion for setting the distance between the divided members at a narrow second distance, and the drive means includes a rotational drive member having an engagement portion engageable with the divided members, and the rotational drive thereof A game machine F1 characterized in that the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portions of the base member by rotating the members while engaging the engaging portions with the divided members.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a movable member formed rotatably (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of pieces of identification information may be displayed along the circumferential direction on the front of the moving member, and the player may be made to visually recognize the identification information disposed at the predetermined position. However, in consideration of the player's visibility, the identification information needs to secure a certain size or more. Therefore, when the number of display of identification information is increased, the diameter of the moving member is increased, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, reducing the diameter of the moving member reduces the number of display of identification information.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application forms a moving member by connecting a plurality of divided members, and a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first distance to the moving member and a section narrower than the first distance. By forming a section to which a plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval, the number of divided members can be secured while securing the number of divided members as compared with the case where the whole is connected at a first interval. The space required for arranging the dividing members can be suppressed. That is, when the identification information is displayed on each dividing member, the space required for arranging the moving members can be suppressed while securing the number of displayed identification information. I thought about it.

  However, the moving member in which the plurality of dividing members are connected, the section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at the first interval, and the plurality of dividing members are connected at the second interval smaller than the first interval. There is a problem that it is difficult to displace the moving member relative to the base member while forming the section to be

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, the guide portion of the base member acts on the dividing members to make the first guiding portion setting the distance between the dividing members to the first distance, and the first guiding portion narrower than the first distance. The drive means includes a rotation drive member having an engagement portion engageable with the division member, and the rotation drive member is engaged with the rotation guide member. Since the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portion of the base member by being rotated while engaging the parts with the divided members, a section with a wide interval and a narrow section (the first interval Such a moving member can be displaced relative to the base member while forming a section and a second interval section) on the moving member.

  In the gaming machine F1, a plurality of the engaging portions are formed on the rotation driving member.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, a plurality of engaging portions are formed on the rotation driving member, so that the transmission efficiency of the driving force from the rotation driving member to the moving member can be improved. Can.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the moving member is formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of divided body members in the circumferential direction, and the driving means includes two of the rotational driving members, and those two are rotated A game machine F3 characterized in that drive members are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the movable member.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, since the two rotation driving members are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member, the rotation driving member is applied to the moving member The driving force can be distributed to different circumferential positions of the moving member. Thereby, it is possible to stabilize the displacement of the moving member by suppressing the application of the driving force from being biased to a part of the plurality of divided members.

  In the gaming machine F3, the orbits of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are made circular, and the two rotation driving members make the phase different by 180 degrees in the circular orbit. A game machine F4 characterized in that the game machine is disposed at a fixed position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the orbits of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are made circular, and the two rotation driving members are circular orbits. , And the driving force from the rotation drive member can be applied to the two most separated portions of the moving member (a plurality of divided members). The displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, while the engagement portion of one rotation drive member is not engaged with the division member, the rotation drive member 2 is the engagement portion of the other rotation drive member The game machine F5 is arranged such that the phases of the engagement portions are different from each other so that the plurality of division members are engaged with the division members.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3 or F4, while the engagement portion of one rotation drive member is not engaged with the division member, the other two rotation drive members The engagement portions of the rotation drive member are arranged so that the phases of the engagement portions are different from each other so that the engagement portions of the rotation drive member are engaged with the divided members. It can be avoided that the engaging portion and the engaging member are not simultaneously engaged with the dividing member, and intermittent transmission of the driving force from the rotational driving member to the moving member can be suppressed. Thereby, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  That is, in the configuration in which a plurality of divided members are endlessly connected as in the present invention, when the transmission of the driving force from the rotation driving member to the moving member becomes intermittent, the division is performed along with the transmission and release of the driving force. Since the distance between the members is increased or decreased, the attitude of the moving member as a whole becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F5, any one of the engagement portion of one rotation drive member and the engagement portion of the other rotation drive member is always engaged with the divided member, and the driving force is always exerted on the moving member Can form a transmitted state, which makes it easy to keep the distance between the divided members constant. As a result, even if it is a moving member formed by connecting a plurality of divided members in an endless manner, its posture can be stabilized. That is, the displacement can be stabilized.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include engaged portions in which the engaging portions of the rotation driving means are engaged, and the engaged portions are tracks of the plurality of divided members. A game machine F6 characterized in that it is disposed on the outer peripheral side in.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members are provided with engaged portions into which the engaging portions of the rotation driving means are engaged, and the engaged portions Since the part is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the tracks of the plurality of divided members, the amount of rotation of the moving member (plurality of divided members) relative to the amount of rotation of the rotation drive member can be reduced. That is, since the reduction ratio can be reduced, the drive torque applied from the rotation drive member to the moving member can be increased accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the rotational driving member is disposed at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member guided along the first guiding portion of the guiding portions. Game machine F7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the rotary drive member is a divided member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions, that is, divided members Since the engaging portion can be engaged at the position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member guided in a state where the distance is wide, the interference between the adjacent divided member and the rotary drive member can be suppressed, and the rotary drive member The diameter of the can be increased. As a result, the driving torque applied from the rotation driving member to the moving member can be increased.

  In any one of the game machines F3 to F7, the guide portion of the base member acts on the dividing members displaced along the guiding portion to set the distance between the dividing members to the first interval or the second interval. A third guide portion for transitioning from the second distance to the first distance or the second distance, and the rotary drive member is connected to the divided member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions. A game machine F8 characterized in that the engaging portion is disposed at an engageable position.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the rotation driving member is a divided member guided along the third guiding portion of the guiding portions, that is, adjacent divisions The guide portion is disposed at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member whose distance from the member is transitioned from the first distance or the second distance to the second distance or the first distance. The division member receiving a relatively large reaction force from the (third guide portion) can be directly driven by the rotation drive member. As a result, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized by suppressing bending of the moving member formed by connecting the plurality of divided members in the middle.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the dividing member may be a main body member displaced along the guide portion, and a main body member of the dividing member having one end rotatably connected to the main body member and adjacent thereto. And a link member slidably connected at one end, wherein the one end and the other end of the link member are respectively rotated and slid with respect to the body member and the body member of the adjacent division member, whereby the division member and The distance between adjacent divided members is increased or decreased, and the engagement portion of the rotational drive member is a main body member of the divided members, from the site where the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided members is slidably connected A game machine F9 characterized in that one end of the link member is engaged at a position close to a portion connected rotatably.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the dividing member is connected to the main body member displaced along the guiding portion and one end rotatably connected to the main body member A link member whose other end is slidably connected to the body member of the adjacent divided member, one end and the other end of the link member being respectively rotated and slid relative to the body member of the body member and the adjacent divided member Thus, the distance between the dividing member and the adjacent dividing member is increased or decreased, and the engagement portion of the rotation driving member is a main body member of the dividing member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent dividing member is slidably coupled. The main body member of the dividing member is driven by the rotational drive member and displaced along the guide portion because the one end of the link member is engaged with a position closer to the rotatably connected portion than the portion where the When that can be easily transmitted through the body member to the link member of divided member adjacent the displacement of the body member. As a result, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  In the game machine F4 or F5, a game machine F10 having a drive gear which is disposed concentrically with a circle which is a track of the plurality of divided members and which is meshed with the two rotation drive members.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4 or F5, since the drive gears respectively meshed with the two rotational driving members are provided, the two rotational driving members are synchronized by rotating the driving gear. Can be rotated in the closed state. As a result, the rotation of the moving member can be stabilized. In this case, since the drive gear is disposed concentrically with the circle which is the track of the plurality of divided members, the drive gear and the rotary drive member of 2 are movable members (a plurality of divided members) in the front view of the base member. It can be disposed inward from the outer periphery of the movement trajectory of That is, since the drive gear and the rotary drive member 2 are not projected outward beyond the outer shape of the moving member, the size can be reduced accordingly.

<Feature G group> (Baby foot control)
It is determined that the first flow path in which the gaming ball can flow down and the second flow path different from the first flow path, which is configured to allow the gaming ball to flow down, and the gaming ball enters the first flow path. In the communication state in which the game ball can flow downward, at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is communicated with the first judgment means capable of communicating with the first flow path and the second flow path. The release determination means determines that the release condition capable of releasing the communication state is established based on the determination result of the movable means capable of moving, the first determination means, and the release determination means A game machine G1 comprising: maintaining means for maintaining the communication state until it is determined that the game is possible.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine which executes a lottery triggered by a start winning, and gives a player a winning condition which is advantageous when the lottery results in a specific lottery result. In this conventional game machine, a bonus is given to the player by causing the game ball to enter a specific ball entry area that is opened (or expanded) when the player enters a hit state. In addition, in such a conventional game machine, a plurality of flow paths are provided inside the ball entry area, and different types of benefits are provided according to the flow paths to pass, thereby improving interest in the hit state. (E.g., JP-A-2013-59445). Note that among the plurality of flow paths, the flow path in which the game ball advances is switched according to, for example, the type of hit, elapsed time, and the like.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the advancing direction of the gaming ball can not be completely controlled, and there is a possibility that the gaming ball can not be suitably flowed down.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine G1, the entering of the gaming ball to the first flow path is determined by the first determination means. At least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is in communication with the first flow path and the second flow path by the movable means, and the gaming ball is moved in the communication state where it can flow down. Based on the determination result by the first determination means, establishment of the release condition capable of releasing the communication state is determined by the release determination means, and the communication state is maintained by the maintenance means until the release determination means determines that the release is possible. Is maintained.

  Thus, the communication state is maintained until the release condition is satisfied, so that the game ball can be suitably flowed down.

  The gaming machine G1 includes a second determination unit that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the second flow path, and the release condition is determined by the first determination unit. A game machine G2 characterized by being established when the number of game balls and the number of game balls determined by the second determination means coincide with each other.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the fact that the game ball enters the second flow path, the second determination means executes the predetermined determination. The release condition is satisfied when the number of gaming balls determined by the first determination means matches the number of gaming balls determined by the second determination means.

  Thus, the communication state can be maintained until the gaming ball flows down from one of the first flow path and the second flow path in the communication state to the other. That is, it is possible to prevent the communication state from being released while flowing down from one flow path to the other flow path, and to allow the game ball to flow down to the other flow path with certainty. Therefore, there is an effect that the flow-off destination of the gaming ball can be suitably controlled.

  In the gaming machine G1, a gaming machine G3 characterized in that the cancellation condition is satisfied when a predetermined period has elapsed since the entry of the gaming ball is determined by the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1, the cancellation condition is satisfied when a predetermined period has elapsed after the first discrimination means determines that the game ball has entered the ball, so that the predetermined period It is possible to pass the first flow passage and the second flow passage in the communication state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the communication state from being released while the gaming ball is flowing down any of the flow paths, and it is possible to preferably flow the gaming ball down.

  The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the cancellation condition is satisfied when a predetermined period has elapsed since the first judgment means finally determined the entry of the game ball during the communication state of 1. A gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1, the release condition is satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first determination means finally determined the entry of the game ball in the communication state of 1. Therefore, it is possible to release the communication state after passing all the game balls entering the first flow path in the communication state for a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the communication state from being released while the gaming ball is flowing down any of the flow paths, and it is possible to preferably flow the gaming ball down.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the ball-closing means capable of entering the game ball, the open state in which the game ball can enter the ball-in means and the closed state in which entering the ball is more difficult than the open state A variable member capable of changing to the state, and variable means for changing the variable member from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, when the specific condition is satisfied; A game machine G5 characterized in that the flow path is disposed at a position where the gaming ball having entered the ball entering means enters the ball.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the variable member is varied between an open state where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a closed state where entry of the game ball is more difficult than the open state. When the specific condition is satisfied, the variable member is changed from the closed state to the open state by the variable means. Here, the first flow path is disposed at a position where the gaming ball having entered the ball entry means enters the ball.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the communication state is released before the gaming ball having entered the ball entry means reaches the second flow path. Therefore, in the case where the ball entering means is in the open state, there is an effect that the gaming ball having entered the ball entering means can be suitably flowed down.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, based on the fact that a predetermined elapsed time has elapsed since the entering means of the game ball is determined by the effect means for executing effects and the first determining means, the effect means A game machine G6 characterized by including effect variable means for changing an effect mode to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the rendering means is based on the passage of a predetermined elapsed period after the entry of the gaming ball is determined by the first determination means. The effect mode executed by the variable is variable by the effect variable means.

  As a result, it is possible to cause the player to hit the game ball aiming at the first path, as one enjoyment of changing the effect mode executed by the effect means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G6, the effect means is disposed on the front side of the second flow passage, and the game ball entering the first flow passage reaches the second flow passage during the predetermined elapsed period. A game machine G7 characterized in that it is configured to have a period of time or more required to

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the rendering means is disposed on the front side of the second flow path. Then, a period equal to or longer than the period required for the game ball having entered the first ball entry means to reach the second flow passage is set as a predetermined elapsed period.

  Thereby, after the game ball reaches the second flow path provided on the back side of the effect means, the effect mode executed by the effect means is changed, so that the game ball reaches the effect means for the player. It can perform appearance of appearance as if the presentation mode was changed at the opportunity of doing. Therefore, since a novel effect can be realized, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, since it can be determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second flow path based on whether or not a predetermined elapsed period has elapsed, the configuration of a sensor or the like for determining the entering of the second flow path Can be omitted. Accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine G7, at least a part of the second flow path is formed in the inside of the effect means.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G7, at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the effect means, so in the process of the game ball passing through the second flow path The game ball can be entered into the inside of the means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel effect in which the effect mode executed by the effect means is changed in response to the game ball having entered the inside of the effect means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine G1, based on the gaming ball having entered the second flow path, a second determination means for performing a predetermined determination, a rendering means for performing an effect, and a determination result by the second determination means A game machine G9 comprising: effect variable means for changing an effect mode to be executed on the effect means based on the effect.

  According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the gaming ball having entered the second flow path, the second determination means executes the predetermined determination. Then, on the basis of the determination result by the second determination means, the effect aspect performed by the effect means is varied by the effect variable means.

  As a result, in order to vary the effect mode, it is possible to cause the player to launch the game ball so that the game ball enters the second flow path. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G9, the effect means is disposed on the front side of the second flow path, and the second determination means is for determining that the game ball has reached the second flow path. A game machine G10 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G9, the following effects are exerted. That is, the rendering means is disposed on the front side of the second flow path. Then, it is determined by the second determination means that the game ball has reached the second flow path.

  Thereby, after the game ball reaches the second flow path provided on the back side of the effect means, the effect mode executed by the effect means is changed, so that the game ball reaches the effect means for the player. It can perform appearance of appearance as if the presentation mode was changed at the opportunity of doing. Therefore, since a novel effect can be realized, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine G10, at least a part of the second flow path is formed in the inside of the effect means, and the second judging means is in the inside of the effect means among the second flow paths. It is determined whether or not the game ball has flowed down the formed portion. A game machine G11 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G10, the following effects are exerted. That is, at least a part of the second flow passage is formed inside the effect means. Then, whether or not the gaming ball has flowed down a portion of the second flow path formed inside the effect means is determined by the second determination means.

  Thus, it is possible to realize a novel effect in which the effect mode to be executed by the effect means is changed in response to the game ball entering the effect means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G11, it is determined whether it is a release timing to release the communication state after at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved to the communication state by the movable means. It has a determination means, and when the determination means determines that the release timing is reached, the movable means determines that the release condition is established by the release determination means, based on the determination that the release condition is satisfied. A game machine G12 characterized in that at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved to release the communication state.

  According to the gaming machine G12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G11, the following effects are exerted. That is, after at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved to the communication state by the movable means, it is determined by the determination means whether it is the release timing to release the communication state. When it is determined that the release timing is the release timing by the determination means, at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is movable based on the determination that the release condition is established by the release determination means. It is moved by the means and the communication state is released.

  Thereby, even when the release timing comes, the communication state can be maintained until the release condition is satisfied, so that the game is played even when the game ball advances to the first flow path immediately before the release timing, etc. There is an effect that the ball can flow down suitably.

  In the gaming machine G12, the release determination means is characterized in that the release condition is satisfied based on the fact that a specific period has elapsed since the determination means determined that the release timing is reached. A gaming machine G13.

  According to the gaming machine G13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G12, it is determined that the release condition is satisfied by the release determination unit based on the fact that the specific period has elapsed since the determination unit determined that it is the release timing. Therefore, the game ball having flowed down the first flow path can be reliably discharged from the first passage and the second flow path during the specific period until the release determination means determines that the release condition is satisfied. . Therefore, there is an effect that the gaming ball can be suitably flowed down.

  In the gaming machine G13, the specific period is equal to or longer than a period in which the gaming ball having entered the first flow path is discharged.

  According to the gaming machine G14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G13, the specific period is configured to be longer than the period in which the gaming ball having entered the second flow path is discharged. Thus, the gaming ball having entered the first flow path immediately before, for example, can be discharged more reliably while the communication state is maintained.

<Feature H group> (The control target can be changed according to the operating conditions (LED control of the pocket))
A movable body on which a plurality of decorative portions are disposed, movable means for moving the movable body, and the position of the decorative portion disposed on the movable body can be varied according to the movement of the movable body It is possible to follow a variable means, the movable body, and an operating body on which a plurality of operating portions smaller than the decorative portion are disposed, and a plurality of operating portions disposed on the operating body Operation control means that can be operated for each number, determination means for determining a specific decoration from the plurality of decoration parts, and the position of the position corresponding to the specific decoration determined by the determination means A game machine H1 comprising: determination means for determining an operation part, wherein the operation control means operates the operation part based on determination information by the determination means.

  Here, a gaming machine is known which performs an entertaining effect using a plurality of effect members such as various kinds of effects and display means. Among such gaming machines, there are machines which can execute a wide variety of entertainment effects by operating a plurality of effect members in one effect. However, in such a conventional type gaming machine, it may be difficult to execute an effect having a sense of unity by using different effect members, and it may not be possible to sufficiently improve the player's interest was there. In addition, some conventional game machines can slide members for effect, which are liquid crystal display devices provided on the left and right sides of the game board, in directions in which they approach and away from each other. In this conventional game machine, the display mode displayed on the display screen of each effect member may be varied according to the distance between the left and right effect members to improve the interest (for example, in particular, Open 2014-239965 gazette). However, in such a conventional game machine, only two presentation members are made to operate as targets. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of the effect member can not be suitably set if the effect member is increased and the symmetrical operation is impossible.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, a plurality of decorative parts are disposed on the movable body, and the movable body is moved by the movable means. The position of the decorative portion disposed on the movable body is changed by the variable means in accordance with the movement of the movable body. The operating body is moved following the movable body. A plurality of actuating portions less than the decorative portion are disposed on the actuating body, and the plurality of actuating portions are actuated by the actuation control means for each predetermined number. A specific decorative portion is determined by the determination means from the plurality of decorative portions, and an operating portion at a position corresponding to the specific decorative portion determined by the determination means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the discrimination information by the discrimination means, the actuation unit is actuated by the actuation control means.

  Thereby, since the operation part corresponding to arrangement of the decoration part can be operated, operation with a sense of unity can be performed by the decoration part and the operation part. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine H1, a gaming machine H2 characterized in that the operating body is fixed to the movable body.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, since the operating body is fixed to the movable body, the decorative portion of the movable body and the operating portion of the operating pair realize an operation having a sense of unity It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the operation control means determines the operation portion determined by the determination means while the specific decoration portion is moved from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position. A game machine H3 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the discrimination means discriminates while the specific decorative portion moves from at least the first position to a second position different from the first position. Since the actuating part is operated by the actuating control means, it is possible to control the actuating part at the position corresponding to the specific decoration at least after the second position. Therefore, since an operation with a sense of unity can be realized by the decorative portion and the actuating portion, there is an effect that the operation of the decorative portion and the actuating portion different in number from each other can be suitably set.

  One of the gaming machines H1 to H3 has position determination means capable of determining the positions of the plurality of decorative portions, and the determination means is based on the position determination information determined by the position determination means. A game machine H4 for determining the operating portion at a position corresponding to the specific decorative portion.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the positions of the plurality of decorative parts are determined by the position determination means. Then, based on the position determination information determined by the position determination unit, the operation unit at the position corresponding to the specific decoration unit is determined by the determination unit.

  Thus, the operation unit can be operated corresponding to the positions of the plurality of decoration units, so that there is an effect that an operation having a sense of unity can be performed between the decoration unit and the operation unit.

  In the gaming machine H4, a plurality of projecting pieces are disposed at predetermined positions on the movable body, and each of the plurality of projecting pieces is movable each time the movable body is moved to a plurality of predetermined movable positions. It has detection means capable of detecting the one or a plurality of projecting pieces set corresponding to each of the movable positions, and the plurality of position discrimination means are based on the detection result of the detection means. A game machine H5 characterized by determining the position of the decorative portion of the above.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the plurality of projecting pieces are disposed at predetermined positions of the movable body. Every time the movable body moves to a plurality of predetermined movable positions, one or more of the plurality of protruding pieces, which are set corresponding to the respective movable positions, are detected by the detection means, and the detection is performed The positions of the plurality of decorative parts are determined by the position determination means based on the detection result of the means.

  Thus, the arrangement of the decorative portion can be determined by mechanically detecting the protruding piece by the detection means, so that the determination can be performed more accurately.

  In the gaming machine H5, different identification information is set in advance in the plurality of decorative portions, and the decorative portions corresponding to the identification information are arranged in the movable body in a predetermined order, The position determination means includes identification information determination means for determining identification information of the decorative portion located at a predetermined predetermined position based on the detection result of the detection means, and the determination is made by the identification information determination means A game machine H6, characterized in that the position of the remaining decoration part is determined based on the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exerted. That is, different identification information is set in advance in the plurality of decorative parts, and the decorative parts corresponding to the identification information are arranged on the movable body in a predetermined order. Further, in the position determination means, identification information of the decorative portion located at the predetermined position determined in advance is determined by the identification information determination means based on the detection result of the detection means, and the identification information determined by the identification information determination means The position of the remaining decoration is determined based on

  As a result, the positions of all the decorative parts can be determined only by determining the identification information of the predetermined position, so it is sufficient to provide only the detection means for detecting the decorative part arranged at the predetermined position. The number of means can be reduced. Therefore, since the number of parts can be reduced, the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine H4, the movable means is for moving the movable body with a predetermined movable pattern, and position information storage in which positional information of the plurality of decorative portions is stored corresponding to the movable pattern. Means for determining the positions of the plurality of decorative parts based on the position information stored in the position information storage means on the basis of the information of the movable pattern in which the movable body is moved. A game machine H7 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the movable body is moved by the movable means in a predetermined movable pattern. The positional information of the plurality of decorative parts is stored in the positional information storage means corresponding to the movable pattern. The positions of the plurality of decorative parts are determined by the position determination means from the position information stored in the position information storage means based on the information of the movable pattern in which the movable body is moved.

  Thus, the position of the decorative portion can be determined by a simple control of simply reading out the position information stored in the position information storage means, thereby reducing the processing load when determining the position of the decorative portion. It has the effect of being able to Further, since it is not necessary to provide detection means such as a sensor, the number of parts of the gaming machine can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In any one of the game machines H1 to H7, the movable body is disposed on the front side of the operating body, and the actuating portion is constituted by light emitting means for emitting light to the decorative portion positioned on the front side. Game machine H8 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the movable body is disposed on the front side of the operating body, and the operating portion emits light to the decorative portion located on the front side As it is constituted by means, the actuating part makes it possible for the particular decoration to look shiny. Therefore, there is an effect that a specific decorative portion can be made to stand out.

  In any one of the game machines H1 to H8, the movable means is for rotating the movable body, and the movable pattern is a predetermined rotational pattern for rotating the movable body. A game machine H9 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the movable body is rotated by the movable means on the basis of the predetermined rotation pattern defined as the movable pattern, While rotating, the actuating part corresponding to the particular decoration can be actuated. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation quality of the rotation operation can be improved.

<Feature I group> (Pocket position control)
A game machine comprising a movable body movable within a predetermined movable range, movable means for moving the movable body within the movable range, and movable control means for movablely controlling the movable means, the movable body comprising: The gaming machine has a plurality of detection units disposed at a plurality of predetermined positions determined in advance, and the gaming machine is configured to detect the plurality of detection units when the movable body is moved to the plurality of predetermined positions determined in advance. Among the above, detection means capable of detecting one or more detection units configured in a predetermined combination corresponding to each predetermined position, and a predetermined number of detection units are detected by the detection means In this case, while the movable body is moved by a predetermined amount, the position is detected based on the detection result detected by the detection unit on condition that the detection unit detected by the detection unit is constant. Discriminator who discriminates information Gaming machine I1, characterized in that the, and has a.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine capable of performing movable effects using movable means such as prizes and the like. In this conventional game machine, accurate presentation operation has been realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means using detection means such as a sensor (for example, JP-A-2010-213755). However, in such a conventional game machine, there is a possibility that the movable position of the movable means may be misidentified if an erroneous detection occurs by the detection means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the movable body is provided with a plurality of detection units arranged at a plurality of predetermined positions determined in advance. When the movable body is moved to a plurality of predetermined positions determined in advance, the detection means detects one or more detection portions configured by a predetermined combination corresponding to each of the predetermined positions among the plurality of detection portions Be done. When a predetermined number of detection units are detected by the detection unit, the detection unit is detected on condition that the detection unit detected by the detection unit is constant while the movable body is moved by a predetermined predetermined amount. Based on the detected result, the position information is determined by the determination means.

  As a result, since the detection unit can be more reliably determined, there is an effect that the positional information of the movable means can be accurately determined.

  In the gaming machine I1, the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determination means for determining the specific predetermined position from the plurality of predetermined positions based on the establishment of the predetermined condition A game machine I2 comprising: notification means for performing a notification process indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position when determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the determination means determines a specific predetermined position from a plurality of predetermined positions. When the determination means determines that the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determination means, the notification means indicates that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position.

  As a result, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the movable body has reached the specific predetermined position.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the gaming machine is characterized in that the detecting means is arranged such that a multiplier of 2 with respect to the number of the detecting means is a number larger than the plurality of predetermined positions. I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the detection means is arranged such that the multiplier of 2 for the number of detection means is larger than the plurality of predetermined positions. The combination of the presence or absence of the detection unit at the position where the detection means is disposed can be made different at all predetermined positions. That is, since the combination of the detection results by the detection means and each predetermined position can be made one-to-one correspondence, the position of the movable means can be more accurately determined from the detection results by the detection means.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the movable body is provided with a plurality of decorative parts, and the decorative parts are respectively disposed on the movable body corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions. A game machine I4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the decorative portions are arranged on the movable body corresponding to a plurality of predetermined positions, so that the appearance of decorating the movable body and can do. Therefore, since the movable body can be focused on, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the movable means is for rotating the movable body, and the plurality of predetermined positions are positions at which the movable body is rotated at predetermined angles. Feature game machine I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the movable body is rotated by the movable means. A plurality of predetermined positions are disposed at positions where the movable body is rotated at predetermined angles.

  As a result, when the movable body is rotating, the arrangement of the movable body can be determined for each predetermined angle, so that the rotation operation can be more accurately performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the determining means for determining the specific predetermined position from the plurality of predetermined positions based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the specific predetermined position determined by the determination means In the case where it is determined by the determination means that the movable body is moved, the determination is performed based on the notification means performing notification processing indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position, and the establishment of the determination condition Determining means for executing the step, and benefit granting means for awarding an advantage advantageous to the player based on the decision result of the decision means being a particular decision result, the decision means comprising A game machine I6 characterized in that the specific predetermined position is determined based on the determination result of the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the determination means determines that the specific predetermined position is determined by the determination means from the plurality of predetermined positions based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determination means In the case where the movable body is at a specific predetermined position, a notification process is performed by the notification means. Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination is performed by the determination means, and based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result, a benefit advantageous to the player is provided by the privilege giving means. Further, based on the determination result of the determination means, the specific predetermined position is determined by the determination means.

  As a result, since a specific predetermined position corresponding to the determination result of the determination means can be notified by the notification processing, there is an effect that the determination result by the determination means can be clearly understood by the player.

  The gaming machine I6 includes selection means for selecting the predetermined position indicating that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result when the movable body is stopped among the plurality of predetermined positions, If the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result, the determination means determines the specific predetermined position from the predetermined position selected by the selection means, and the determination result of the determination means is the determination result. When it is other than a specific determination result, the game machine I7 is characterized in that the specific predetermined position is determined from other than the predetermined position selected by the selection means.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I6, the following effects are exerted. That is, among the plurality of predetermined positions, when the movable body stops, a predetermined position indicating that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result is selected by the selection means. When the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the specific predetermined position is determined by the determination means from the predetermined position selected by the selection means. Further, when the determination result by the determination means is other than the specific determination result, the specific predetermined position is determined by the determination means from other than the predetermined position selected by the selection means.

  As a result, it can be expected that the predetermined position selected by the selection means is notified as a specific predetermined position, so that attention can be given to the operation of the movable body. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine I7, the movable body is one in which a plurality of the decorative portions are arranged corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions, and the notification means is configured to move the movable body to the specific predetermined position The game machine I8 is controlled to move the notification member to the decorative portion corresponding to the specific predetermined position to notify the player based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I7, the following effects are exerted. That is, the plurality of decorative parts are arranged on the movable body respectively corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions. Further, based on the fact that the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position, the notification means is controlled to move the notification member to the decorative part corresponding to the specific predetermined position to notify the player.

  Thereby, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation of the movable body and the operation of the notification member. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Feature J group> (Next pocket control)
A movable body movable in a predetermined movable range, wherein a plurality of decorative parts are arranged at different positions, movable means for moving the movable body in the movable range, and effect information determining means for determining predetermined effect information And, based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means, the movable means for causing the movable means to move the specific decorative portion of the plurality of decorative portions of the movable body to a predetermined effect position In the gaming machine having control means, storage means storing arrangement information of the decorative portion disposed on the movable body, and the effect position when the movable body is moved by the movable means The discriminator is moved to the effect position next to the decorative part discriminated by the discriminator based on the discriminator for discriminating the decorative part and the discrimination result by the discriminator Gaming machine J1, characterized in that the decorative portion are those having an identification means for identifying from the arrangement information stored in the storage means.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine capable of performing movable effects using movable means such as prizes and the like. In this conventional game machine, accurate presentation operation has been realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means using detection means such as a sensor (for example, JP-A-2010-213755). However, in such a conventional game machine, since the arrangement of the movable means can not be accurately specified until the arrangement of the movable means is detected by the sensor, the degree of freedom of the rendering operation may be reduced. . That is, there is a problem that the player's interest in the game can not be sufficiently improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the arrangement information of the decorative portion arranged on the movable body is stored in the storage means. When the movable body is moved by the movable means, the decorative portion in the effect position is determined by the determination means, and based on the determination result by the determination means, the effect position is determined after the decorative portion determined by the determination means The decorative part to be moved is identified by the identification means from the arrangement information stored in the storage means.

  In this way, it is possible to identify in advance that the specific decorative portion is arranged to the effect position before the specific decorative portion is arranged to the effect position, so the effect operation based on the effect information Can increase the degree of freedom. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine J1, identification information for identifying each decorative portion is set in the plurality of decorative portions, and the specific decorative portion determined by the effect determining unit is the specific identification information Is set, and the game machine J2 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are exerted. That is, identification information for identifying each decorative part is set in the plurality of decorative parts. Specific identification information is set in the specific decorative portion determined by the effect determination means.

  Thereby, when specific identification information is set for a plurality of decorative parts, any specific decorative part may be moved to the rendering position, so the degree of freedom of rendering can be increased. It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the specific decorative portion is moved to the effect position, that the specific decorative portion is determined to be the specific decorative portion determined by the effect information determining means, the notification member in the specific decorative portion A game machine J3 having a notifying means for notifying the player by moving the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects exhibited by either the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the specific decorative portion is moved to the effect position, the notification member is moved to the specific decorative portion, thereby performing the specific operation. Since the notification means notifies the player that the decorative member is a decorative member, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation of the notification member. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, since it is possible to identify in advance that a specific decorative member is placed at the rendering position before the specific decorative member is placed at the rendering position, it is possible to distinguish before the decorative member is placed at the rendering position In addition, it is possible to start moving the notification member to a specific decoration member. Therefore, there is an effect that the notification member can be moved to the specific decoration member more reliably.

  In the gaming machine J3, the notification means has a spherically configured sphere as the notification member, and the holding means capable of holding the sphere at the holding position and the holding of the sphere by the holding means is released. A standby rocking path capable of rocking at a position where the ball can be moved to the effect position and waiting for a predetermined period, and the ball from the standby rocking path to the effect position A game machine J4 characterized by at least having variable means for changing the direction of movement.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the informing means, the informing member is constituted by a spherical ball pair, and the spherical body is held by the holding means at the holding position. When the holding of the ball by the holding means is released, the ball is rocked at a position where the ball can be moved to the effect position on the standby rocking path, and is kept waiting for a predetermined time. The traveling direction of the sphere is varied by the variable means from the standby rocking path to the effect position.

  As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the traveling direction of the sphere is changed from the standby rocking path to the effect position. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine J4, the notification means has variable control means for changing the variable means, and the variable control means determines the timing for changing the variable means based on the identification result by the identification means. A game machine J5 characterized by being variable.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J4, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the notification means, the variable means is made variable by the variable control means. The timing to vary the variable means based on the identification result by the identification means is determined by the variable control means and varied.

  In this way, it is possible to determine the timing at which the variable means is changed before the specific decoration part changes to the effect position, so that the moving time for the sphere to move from the variable means to the effect position is taken into consideration. There is an effect that the sphere can be reliably moved to the effect position in a state where the decorative portion is disposed at the effect position.

  In any one of the game machines J1 to J5, detection units are arranged at a plurality of positions on the movable body, and the detection units respectively arranged at a predetermined number of predetermined positions may be detected. Game having a possible detecting means, wherein the judging means judges the decorative portion positioned at the effect position based on a combination of the detecting portions detected by the detecting means. Machine J6.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, detection units are arranged at a plurality of positions of the movable body. Detection means capable of detecting a detection unit are arranged at a predetermined number of predetermined positions. Based on the combination of the detection units detected by the detection unit, the decorative unit positioned at the effect position is determined by the determination unit.

  As a result, since the detection unit can mechanically detect the detection unit, there is an effect that it is possible to more accurately determine the decorative unit disposed at the presentation position.

  In any one of the game machines J1 to J6, the identification means is for identifying the type of the decorative portion to be moved to the effect position next to the decorative portion determined by the determination means. Gaming machine J7.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J1 to J6, the type of the decorative portion moved to the rendering position next to the decorative portion determined by the determining means is identified by the identifying means. At the stage where the decorative part in front of the decorative part is arranged to the effect position, it can be previously identified that the specific decorative part is to be arranged to the effect position. As a result, the degree of freedom of the rendering operation based on the rendering information can be enhanced, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature K group> (specify the pocket based on the output of multiple steps)
A movable body having a plurality of detection units at a predetermined position, a movable means for moving the movable body, and a predetermined one of the plurality of detection portions at a predetermined detection position with respect to the movable body moved by the movable means A detection means capable of simultaneously detecting the detection portion arranged in a range over a predetermined period, a judgment means for judging a detection result of the detection means plural times in a predetermined period, and a plurality of times by the judgment means A gaming machine K1 comprising: identification means for identifying the discrimination result of the above and discriminating the discrimination result identified as satisfying the predetermined condition as the discrimination result as a legitimate discrimination result.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine capable of performing movable effects using movable means such as prizes and the like. In this conventional game machine, accurate presentation operation has been realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means using detection means such as a sensor (for example, JP-A-2010-213755). However, in such a conventional game machine, there is a problem that when the detection means causes an erroneous detection, the movable position of the movable means is misidentified, and the movable means can not be suitably controlled.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, a movable body provided with a plurality of detection units at predetermined positions is moved by the movable means. With respect to the movable body which is moved by the movable means, the detection means disposed in a predetermined range among the plurality of detection means at the predetermined detection position is simultaneously detected by the detection means over a predetermined period. The detection result by the detection means is judged by the judgment means plural times in a predetermined period, and among the plural judgment results by the judgment means, the judgment result satisfying the predetermined condition determined in advance is recognized as the normal judgment result by the identification means Be done.

  Thereby, when detecting the detection unit of the movable body, since the detection can be performed based on the determination result satisfying the predetermined condition, the detection unit can be accurately detected. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable body can be suitably controlled.

  In the gaming machine K1, a plurality of different decorative portions are disposed on the movable body, and the detection means is configured by a predetermined number and is disposed corresponding to the arrangement interval of the decorative portions. A gaming machine K2 characterized in that the unit is disposed corresponding to the position of the specific decorative unit among the plurality of decorative units.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are exerted. That is, a plurality of different decoration parts are disposed on the movable body. A predetermined number of detection means are arranged corresponding to the arrangement intervals of the decorative portions. A detection part is arrange | positioned corresponding to the position of a specific decoration part among several decoration parts.

  As a result, the detection unit can be detected each time the movable body is moved. Therefore, there is an effect that the detection unit can be periodically detected while the movable body is moving.

  In the gaming machine K2, the plurality of decorative portions are disposed on the movable body at predetermined intervals, and the detection portion divides the plurality of decorative portions into units corresponding to the predetermined number. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that the units are arranged in the decoration unit so as not to be in the same arrangement relation with each other.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the plurality of decorative parts are arranged on the movable body at predetermined intervals. The detection units are arranged so as not to have the same arrangement relationship with respect to a plurality of decoration units obtained by dividing the plurality of decoration units into units corresponding to a predetermined number.

  Thus, the arrangement of the detection unit detected by the detection means and the arrangement of the movable body can be made one-to-one correspondence, so that the arrangement of the movable body can be accurately determined from the detection result by the detection means. is there.

  In any one of the game machines K1 to K3, the detection means detects the detection portion in a predetermined order based on the movable body being moved by a predetermined movable amount. A gaming machine K4.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the detection unit detects the detection unit by the detection unit in a predetermined order based on the movable body being moved by a predetermined movable amount. Therefore, the arrangement of the movable body can be accurately determined based on the order in which the detection units are detected.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, when the discrimination results of the plurality of times by the discrimination means include the same discrimination results as or more than predetermined ratio, the discrimination means A game machine K5 characterized in that the same discrimination result is identified as a legitimate discrimination result.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the same discrimination results are included in a plurality of predetermined discrimination results or more among a plurality of discrimination results by the discrimination means. In that case, since the same discrimination result is discriminated by the discrimination means as a regular discrimination result, even if some of the plurality of discrimination results become erroneous discrimination results due to the influence of noise or the like, It is possible to suppress that an incorrect determination result is identified as a normal determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that more accurate determination can be performed.

  In the gaming machine K5, in the case where it is identified by the identification means that mutually identical discrimination results included in the plurality of discrimination results by the discrimination means are less than a predetermined specific ratio, An avoidance means for avoiding identification of a normal determination result from among the determination results of the times, and the detection unit by the detection means when the identification means is prevented from being identified by the avoidance means A detection control unit configured to control to make it additionally detected over the predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K5, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the same discrimination results included in the plurality of discrimination results by the discrimination means are discriminated to be less than the predetermined ratio, the discrimination is properly performed among the plurality of discrimination results. It is avoided by the avoidance means that the result is identified. The detection control means is controlled by the detection control means to additionally detect the detection unit over a predetermined period by the detection means when it is avoided that the normal discrimination result is identified by the avoidance means.

  As a result, based on the additional detection result by the detection means, the discrimination means can discriminate the normal discrimination result again. Therefore, there is an effect that the regular determination result can be determined more reliably.

<Feature L group> (control to drop the ball to the target pocket)
A movable body on which a plurality of different identification units are arranged, movable means for moving the movable body, and the identification unit moved to a predetermined effect position when the movable body is moved by the movable means In the case where the holding means capable of holding the judgment means for judging information, the effect body used for the predetermined effect at least until the predetermined effect is started, and the holding of the effect body by the holding means is released, It is possible to detect a swinging means capable of swinging at a position where it is possible to move the effect body to the effect position, and a swinging state of the effect body which is swinged by the swinging means Detection means, a determination means for determining the identification unit for moving the effect based on the plurality of identification units based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a swing state of the presentation body being determined by the detection means. In motion And a moving means for moving the effect body to the identification unit determined by the determination means based on the determination result by the determination means when the game machine is released. .

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a plurality of flow paths is known. Among such conventional game machines, there are those that become advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the flow path through which the ball such as the game ball advances. Further, on the upstream side of the branch position of each flow path, a swing passage capable of swinging the ball is provided, and while the ball is swinging in the shape of the swing passage, the player There is a thing which can raise expectation for a spherical body to flow down to an advantageous flow path (for example, JP, 2010-179166, A). However, in such a conventional game machine, the swing action is changed by the momentum of the ball entering the swing passage, so the player swings before the expectation of the player is sufficiently increased. There were cases in which the spheres flowed down from one flow path to another. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game can not be sufficiently improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, a plurality of different identification units are disposed on the movable body, and the movable body is moved by the movable means. The movable body is moved by the movable means, and the information of the identification unit moved to the predetermined presentation position is discriminated by the discrimination means. The effect element used for the predetermined effect is held by the holding means at least until the predetermined effect is started, and it is possible to move the effect body to the effect position when the holding of the effect body by the holding means is released The stage is rocked by the rocking means at the proper position. The rocking state of the effect body rocked by the rocking means is detected by the detection means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the identification unit for moving the effect is determined by the determination unit by the plurality of identification units. If the swinging state of the effect is detected to be a predetermined swinging state by the detecting means, the effect is moved to the identification unit determined as the determining means by the moving means based on the determination result by the determining means. Ru.

  As a result, in each predetermined effect, since the effect body can be moved to the identification unit after being in the predetermined swing state, the motion quality of the effect body in the predetermined effect can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest to the rocking motion of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1, the playing body is formed of a ball, and the swinging means has a swinging path capable of swinging the playing body. L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L1, the following effects can be achieved. That is, the effect body is formed of a sphere. And in the rocking means, a rocking path capable of rocking the effect body is provided.

  Thus, the directing body can be swung by reciprocation by rolling on the swinging path, so that the directing body can be swung only by giving an initial speed in the direction of the swinging path. Therefore, since there is no need to provide a special configuration for causing the effect body to perform the swing operation, the number of parts can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine L2, the detection means detects, at a predetermined position, the effect body swinging on the swing path, and the swing width of the effect body is less than or equal to a predetermined width by the effect body detection means. And a rocking width detecting means for judging whether or not the game machine is L3.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the detection means, the effect body swinging on the swing path is detected at a predetermined position by the effect body detection means, and whether or not the swing width of the effect body is equal to or less than the predetermined width by the effect body detection means It is determined by the width detection means.

  As a result, in each predetermined effect, it is possible to move the effect body to the effect position after the swinging width of the rocking body becomes equal to or less than the predetermined width. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable in the operation of the effect body.

  In any one of the gaming machines L2 and L3, the moving means is constituted by a part of the rocking path, and formed in a rocking groove for rocking the effect, and in front of the rocking groove. A rocking piece having at least a flow-down groove for making the effect body flow down to the rendering position, and the rocking piece from a first position at which the rocking groove and the rocking path communicate with each other And a rocking piece moving means for moving the downflow groove to a second position arranged on the rocking path.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects exhibited by either the gaming machine L2 or L3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the moving means, the swing groove is formed of a part of the swing path, and is formed in front of the swing groove for swinging the effect body, and for flowing the effect body to the effect position. A rocking piece is provided at least with the downflow groove. The rocking piece moving means moves the rocking piece from a first position at which the rocking groove and the rocking path communicate with each other to a second position at which the flow-down groove is disposed on the rocking path.

  Thus, simply moving the swinging-piece moving means to the second position allows the effect body to flow down from the flow-down groove to the effect position, so a configuration for moving the effect body to the effect position is used. There is an effect that it can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine L2 or L3, the moving means has a rocking piece constituted by a part of the rocking path, and a rocking piece inclining means for inclining the rocking piece in the direction of the effect position. Gaming machine L5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2 or L3, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the moving means, a rocking piece constituted by a part of the rocking path is provided, and the rocking piece is inclined by the rocking piece inclining means toward the effect position.

  As a result, since the effect body can be moved to the effect position only by dropping the effect body from the inclined rocking piece, the configuration for moving the effect body to the effect position can be simplified. It has the effect of

<Feature M group> (Roulette dark zone)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, privilege giving means for imparting advantageous benefits to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and In the case where an identification body in which different identification units are arranged, a determination unit that determines a specific identification unit among the identification units in the identification unit, and a determination result by the determination unit is the specific determination result, Based on notification state setting means for setting the specific identification part in the notification state, and based on the establishment of the specific condition, the identification part of the identification object performs a specific effect for notifying the player of the discrimination result by the discrimination means And a specific effect execution means, wherein the determination means divides the identification body into a plurality of areas, and among the areas, a high determination area having a high proportion determined by the specific identification unit, and the specification Identification part of Gaming machine M1 proportion to be determined is low so that the low determining regions and are formed, characterized in that what determines the specific identification unit.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a judgment such as a hit is executed, and a plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of different symbols are arranged are arranged and rotated on the front side to stop the predetermined result. It is notified by the combination of As a result of the notification, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are aligned and stopped, a gaming machine is proposed in which a game in which the variable winning device is variable is executed so that the ball can be entered. (For example, JP-A-7-204318). In this case, the player plays the game with an expectation that the same symbol will stop by the predetermined number and stops, but for the rotating body that rotates, the number of combinations of hit symbols are arranged respectively The game is monotonous, and the player gets bored early. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can suppress a problem that a player gets bored early.

  According to the gaming machine M1, a plurality of different identification units are arranged, and among the identification units, a benefit is given to the player when the identification unit determined as the specific identification unit becomes a notification state, so all the identifications There is a possibility that the part becomes a specific identification part, and the degree of expectation can be varied by the identification part determined by the specific identification part. Furthermore, the identification body is divided into a plurality of areas, and a high determination area determined to be a specific identification unit is high, and a low determination area determined to be a specific identification unit is low. Since the identification unit is determined, the ratio of the specific identification unit can be changed according to the area of the identification object, and the expectation of the specific identification unit can be changed also in the identification object. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be changed, and it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous and to suppress the player from being bored with the game at an early stage.

  The gaming machine M1 includes movable means for moving the identification body, and the notification state setting means causes the identification body to be moved by the movable means, and the specific identification unit is moved at a predetermined position determined in advance. A gaming machine M2 characterized in that the notification state is set by stopping the determined identification unit.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the discrimination result is obtained by the notification state in which the identification body is moved and the specific identification unit is stopped at a predetermined predetermined position. Since the player is notified that the result is a specific determination result, the player can have an interest in where the identification body is stopped, which has an effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine M2, according to the timing at which the effect body, the moving means capable of moving the effect body to the predetermined position, and the timing at which the identification body stops, the predetermined position by the moving means A movement control means for moving the game machine to the game machine M3.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2, the effect body is moved to the predetermined position according to the stop timing of the identification body, so the player can easily understand the identification part stopped at the predetermined position. There is an effect that it can be informed.

  In the gaming machine M3, the effect body has a rotating portion, and when the holding means capable of holding the effect body and the holding by the holding means are released, the effect body sways by the rotating portion. A movable rocking path, and the moving means is for moving the effect body from the rocking path to the predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3, the directing body is moved to a predetermined position by the moving means after swinging on the rocking path by the turning portion, so identification of the directing body is made By giving an interest in whether to move to a part, it is possible to make it possible for the player to recognize the identification part that has stopped at a predetermined position for easy understanding.

  In addition, the member comprised by the spherical body, a cylindrical shape, circular arc shape etc. can be considered for a rotation part.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, when the determination result is not a specific determination result, the notification state setting unit is connected to the specific identification unit located next to the specific identification unit. A game machine M5 characterized in that an identification part not determined is set to the notification state.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, when it is not a specific determination result, it is determined to the specific identification unit located next to the determined identification unit. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player think that the specific identification part is in the notification state in a short time since there is no identification part in the notification state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature N group> (control to stabilize the swing width of the ball)
An effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect, an effect body used as part of an effect executed by the effect executing means, and an oscillating means capable of oscillating the effect body within a predetermined range When the effect body is oscillated by the oscillating means, the oscillating force applied to the effect body is adjusted based on the determination means for determining the oscillation state and the determination result by the determination means A game machine N1 characterized by having adjustment means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of winning openings are arranged on the front side of the gaming area where the gaming ball can flow, and one of them, the starting winning opening serving as a start trigger for the judgment of acceptance. A predetermined lottery is executed when the ball enters the ball. When the lottery result is a hit, a game in which the variable winning device is in an open state is executed, and the player can obtain many winning balls and the like. In such a gaming machine, a channel is formed to facilitate winning to a winning opening such as a starting winning opening, and the gaming ball entering the flow path is the gaming ball falling from directly above the starting winning opening Induced to Furthermore, even in the game ball flowing down the flow path where winning is easy, the inclination angle of the flow path is changed so that the ease of entering the start winning hole changes, and the rolling speed of the game ball varies. A gaming machine is proposed that is configured such that the game does not become monotonous by being configured to appear (for example, JP-A-2015-65977). Furthermore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that suppresses the game becoming monotonous by improving interest. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the swinging force to be applied to the effect is adjusted by the adjusting means based on the swinging state of the effect determined by the determining means. It is possible to swing the effect body in a moving state, to suppress a problem that the game becomes monotonous, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the structure is pivotally supported by a support (a thin wire such as a thread or a piano wire, a thin shaft member, etc.) so as to be pivotally supported and swung, or swings from the upper part of a swing path such as arc shape. It is conceivable to be rocked by rolling or sliding on the road. Here, when the adjusting means is rocked by the support, it is considered that a force is applied to the effect body or a force is applied to the support, and the rocking means is rocked by the rocking path. It is conceivable to change the inclination of the rocking path or to apply external force to the effect.

  In the gaming machine N1, the determination means determines at least a swing width of the effect body, and the adjustment means determines that the swing width is equal to or less than a predetermined swing width by the determination means. A game machine N2 characterized in that the rocking force on the effect body is increased.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N1, the swinging width is determined by the determination means, and the swinging force on the rendering body is increased when the swinging width is smaller than the predetermined swinging width. Therefore, the swinging state of the effect body is continued for a long time, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, when the adjusting means increases the swing force to the effect, the determination result by the determining means is determined based on the fact that the determination result is larger than the predetermined swing width. A game machine N3 characterized by stopping the increase of the rocking force to the effect.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2, the increase in the rocking force by the adjusting means is also stopped based on the fact that the rocking width of the rendering body is larger than the predetermined rocking width. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an excessively large swing width of the effect body, adjust the swing width within a predetermined range, and provide the player with a stable effect.

  In any one of the game machines N1 to N3, the adjustment means moves the position of the effect body so as to increase the potential energy to the effect body.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the adjusting means moves the position of the effect body so that the position energy to the effect body is large, so the position energy is kinetic energy By making it variable, there is an effect that the swing width of the effect can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the effect body has a rotating portion capable of rotating and rolling, and the swinging unit repeatedly changes the rotating direction of the rotating portion. A game machine N5 characterized by having a rocking path capable of turning.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines N1 to N4, since the turning portion of the producing body swings by rolling the swinging path, swinging the producing body with an easy configuration Has the effect of

  In the gaming machine N5, the rocking path is formed in an arc shape, and the gaming machine N6 is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N5, since the swinging path is formed in an arc shape, there is an effect that the rotating portion of the effect body can easily swing.

  In the game machine N5 or N6, the adjustment means changes the inclination of the swing path in the direction in which the effect body swings to increase the swing force.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N5 or N6, the adjusting means varies the inclination of the rocking path to increase the rocking power, so that the player naturally rocks the player. Has the effect of being able to make it look like it is rocking.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N7, the swinging means holds the holding means capable of holding the effect body at a position higher than the lowermost end position when swinging, and holding of the holding means. A game machine N8 characterized by having release means capable of releasing.

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N7, the rocking means is held at a position higher than the lowermost position when rocking by the holding means, and the releasing means Since the holding is released, there is an effect that the swing of the effect can be started using the potential energy.

  In the gaming machine N8, the holding means holds the effect body at a position where the effect body can be guided to the rocking path when the effect of the holding body is released by the releasing means. A game machine N9 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N8, when the holding means releases the holding by the releasing means, the rendering body is guided to the rocking path. There is an effect that it is possible to swing the effect body smoothly by its own weight even without it.

  In the gaming machines N1 to N9, the adjusting means has an oscillation damping means for adjusting the oscillation width of the rendering body to be equal to or less than a specific oscillation width when a specific condition is satisfied. A game machine N10 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine N10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines N1 to N9, when the specific condition is satisfied, the swinging width of the effect is less than the specific swinging width by the swing damping means of the adjusting means. Therefore, the swing width can be intentionally varied, and by making the effects diverse, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

<Feature O group> (predict the position of the pocket to drop)
Based on the movable body on which a plurality of different identification units are disposed, the movable means for moving the movable body, the movable control means for moving the movable body by the movable means, and the movable body based on the establishment of the movable condition. A determination means for determining a movable pattern for moving the movable body, in which a stoppable range capable of being stopped is set in advance, and the identification unit specific to a predetermined presentation position after being moved by the movable pattern are stopped In the case where the movable body is moved by the movable pattern, and in the case where the movable body is moved by the movable pattern, it is set in the stoppable range based on the establishment of the specific condition. Identification unit determination means for determining one of the identification units from the identification unit, and stop for stopping the identification unit determined by the identification unit determination means at the rendering position at a specific stop timing Gaming machine O1, characterized in that those having a control means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or the like, determination of a hit etc. is executed, a plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of different symbols are arranged are arranged on the front side, and combinations of symbols stopped at predetermined positions are determined in advance. It determines based on, and is alerted | reported by controlling rotation. As a result of the notification, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are aligned and stopped, a gaming machine is proposed in which a game in which the variable winning device is variable is executed so that the ball can be entered. (For example, JP-A-7-204318). Since the stop position of the rotating body is determined in advance before the rotation, the player can not perform novel effects such as changing the combination of symbols to be stopped according to the state of the effect, etc., and the game becomes monotonous. There was a problem of getting bored early. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and by providing a novel gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and the player may get bored early. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing problems.

  According to the gaming machine O1, the movable body is moved by the movable pattern in which the stoppable range of the movable body is set in advance, and the stoppable range is determined by the identification unit determination means based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. Since one identification unit is determined by the identification unit set and the movable body is stopped by the stop control means so that the identification unit is stopped at the effect position, the stop position of the movable body is satisfied until the specific condition is satisfied. By providing the player with a real-time effect, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous, and to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

  The gaming machine O1 has a discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of the discrimination condition, and the stop control means is configured to execute the specific identification unit when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a particular discrimination result. A game machine O2 characterized by being stopped at the effect position.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O1, when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the specific discrimination unit is stopped at the effect position, so the discrimination result by the discrimination means There is an effect that notification can be performed by the identification unit that stops at the effect position.

  A gaming machine O3 having setting means for setting the specific identification unit from the plurality of different identification units based on establishment of setting conditions in the game machine O1 or O2.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1 or O2, since the specific identification unit is set by a plurality of different identification units by the setting means, which identification unit is set as the specific identification unit Can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O3, a gaming machine O4 characterized in that the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification units based on the player's selection.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O3, since at least one of the specific identification units is set by the setting means based on the player's selection, any identification unit of the player is selected. This can be a specific identification unit, and the player can participate in the game, thereby improving the player's interest.

  In the gaming machine O3 or O4, the setting means sets the specific identification unit based on the determination result by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O3 or O4, since the specific identification unit is set by the setting unit based on the determination result of the determination unit, the set identification unit There is an effect that the player can be made to predict the determination result.

  In any one of the game machines O2 to O5, the determination means determines the movable pattern based on the determination result of the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O2 to O5, the movable pattern is determined by the determination means based on the determination result, so that the movable pattern can be varied according to the determination result. There is.

  In any one of game machines O1 to O6, a notification body for indicating that the identification unit is stopped at the effect position, and a guidance for guiding the notification body to the identification unit stopped at the effect position And a game machine O7 characterized in that it comprises:

  According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O6, since the notification member is guided by the guiding means to the identification unit stopped at the presentation position, the identification unit stopped at the presentation position is more There is an effect that the player can be easily informed.

  In any one of the game machines O1 to O7, the movable pattern is set with a variable setting period in which the identification part determined by the identification part determination means can be varied. Game machine O8.

  According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O7, the movable pattern is set with a variable period in which the identification portion determined by the identification portion determination means can be varied. Therefore, the identification portion can be varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine O8 has operation means operable by the player, and in the variable setting period, the identification unit determined by the identification determination means is variable according to the timing at which the operation means is operated. A game machine O9 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine O9, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O8, the identification portion determined by the identification portion determination means is variable according to the timing at which the player operates the operation means. It is possible to play a game to operate the operation means by aiming to stop at the effect position, and the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, the identification part determined by the timing operated by the player is variable, so that the control to stop the identification part corresponding to the determination result at the presentation position can be easily performed.

<Feature P group> (judged broken nails)
A game machine comprising a movable body movable within a predetermined movable range, movable means for moving the movable body within the movable range, and movable control means for movablely controlling the movable means, the movable body comprising: The gaming machine has a plurality of detection units disposed at a plurality of predetermined positions determined in advance, and the gaming machine is configured to detect the plurality of detection units when the movable body is moved to the plurality of predetermined positions determined in advance. And detecting means capable of detecting one or more of the detecting units configured in a predetermined combination corresponding to each predetermined position, and the detection result detected by the detecting means. A determination unit that determines movable position information of the movable body, and an abnormality determination unit that determines whether the detection result detected by the detection unit matches a preset abnormality condition based on the establishment of the predetermined condition; Have Gaming machine P1, wherein those.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or the like, determination of a hit etc. is executed, a plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of different symbols are arranged are arranged on the front side, and combinations of symbols to be stopped at predetermined positions are determined in advance. It determines based on, and is alerted | reported by controlling rotation. As a result of the notification, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are aligned and stopped, a gaming machine is proposed in which a game in which the variable winning device is variable is executed so that the ball can be entered. (For example, JP-A-7-204318). The stop position of the rotating body is generally a method of detecting the position of the rotating body by a plurality of sensors etc., but when the sensor failure etc. occurs, the rotating body may be stopped at the wrong position It is considered that there is a problem such as giving a false notification to the player. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of detecting a failure early.

  According to the gaming machine P1, when the movable body is moved to a plurality of predetermined predetermined positions, one or more of the plurality of detection units are configured in a combination predetermined for each predetermined position. Is detected by the detection means. The movable position information of the movable body is determined based on the detection result detected by the detection means. Therefore, it is possible to accurately identify to which predetermined position the movable body has been moved by the movable position information. In addition, since it is determined by the abnormality determining means whether the detection result detected by the detecting means matches the abnormal condition based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the abnormality is promptly determined even if an abnormality occurs in the detecting means or the detecting unit. There is an effect that it is possible to detect and prevent erroneous movement of the movable body.

  In the gaming machine P1, movable position information storage means for storing the determined movable position information based on the determination of the movable position information by the determination means, and the detection unit at each of the plurality of predetermined positions The detection result which should be detected when the detection means is detected normally is the collation data setting means preset as the collation data, and the abnormality judgment means is the movable position by the judgment means It is determined whether the abnormal condition is met from the movable position information determined last time by the determining means and stored in the storage means as the satisfaction of the predetermined condition that the information is determined is satisfied. A game machine P2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P1, the abnormality determination means determines whether the abnormality condition matches the movable position information determined by the previous determination means and the verification data. Is able to constantly monitor the movable position information when it is moved normally, which has the effect of being able to detect a failure early.

  In the gaming machine P2, the abnormality determination means determines whether the movable position information determined by the determination means matches the next movable position information of the previous movable position information stored in the movable position information storage means. A game machine P3 characterized in that an abnormality is judged by judging from the collation data.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, it is determined from the verification data whether the movable position information determined by the determination means matches the next movable position information of the previous movable position information. Since the abnormality is judged by the abnormality judging means by this, it is possible to judge the abnormality every time it is moved to the predetermined position, and it is possible to perform the abnormality detection earlier.

  In the gaming machine P1, whether the abnormality determining means determines that the movable body has moved a predetermined amount as satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and whether the abnormality condition matches the abnormality condition based on the number of the detection units according to the detection result of the detection means A game machine P4 characterized by determining.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P1, when the movable body is moved by a predetermined amount, it is determined whether the abnormal condition is met based on the number of detection units detected by the detection means. An abnormality can be detected each time the movable body moves by a predetermined amount, and there is an effect that an abnormality can be detected early.

  The gaming machine P4 includes detection number storage means in which the number of detections of the detection portion normally detected by the detection means is stored in advance when the movable body moves a predetermined amount, and the abnormality determination means It is determined whether or not the number of detection units detected by the detection means matches the detection number stored in the detection number storage means.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P4, the abnormality determination means determines whether the number of detection matches the number of detections stored in advance in the detection number storage means, thereby making it possible to more accurately determine abnormality. It has the effect of

<Feature Q group> (divide the lighting data of the LED)
A plurality of actuating parts and actuating means for actuating the respective actuating parts on the basis of a plurality of actuating parts for actuating the actuating parts and an actuating pattern for actuating the respective actuating parts based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions Based on the operation pattern determination means to be determined, the acquisition means for acquiring operation data of each of the operation units based on the operation pattern determined by the operation pattern determination means, and the operation data acquired by the acquisition means A game machine Q1 characterized by including setting means for dividing and setting.

  Here, a gaming machine is known which includes a light emitting means such as an LED and a rendering member such as a movable means such as a character and the like in its configuration. In such a conventional game machine, by performing a variety of rendering operations using a plurality of effect members, the interest of the player is improved. In addition, in this conventional game machine, the effect pattern of the effect member such as the light emission pattern of the light emitting means or the movable pattern of the movable means is stored in advance in the storage means such as the ROM, There is known a gaming machine which reads an effect pattern corresponding to an effect to be performed and executes an effect operation of a corresponding effect member (for example, JP-A-2014-18495). However, when the number of effect members is increased, the amount of data of setting data for setting the effect operation increases, and there is a problem that the processing load increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, each operating unit is operated by the operating means based on the operation data for operating the plurality of operating units. The operation pattern for operating each of the operating units is determined by the operation pattern determining unit based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and the operation data of each of the operating units is obtained based on the operation pattern determined by the operation pattern determining unit Acquired by means. The operation data acquired by the acquisition means is divided and set by the setting means.

  Thereby, compared with the case where operation data are set collectively by the setting means, it is possible to reduce the data amount of each time divided and set. That is, since the processing load for setting operation data can be dispersed, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine Q1, a gaming machine Q2 characterized in that the setting means can divide and set the operation data in units of the operating portion.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the operation data is divided and set for each operating portion by the setting means, so that the processing load can be dispersed more finely.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation data includes at least data specifying an operation mode when the operation unit is operated, and data specifying the operation unit operated in the operation mode. A game machine Q3.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation data includes data specifying an operation mode for operating the operating unit and data specifying an operating unit operated in the operation mode. And at least two different operating modes can be set for a plurality of operating units. Therefore, since the operation mode can be diversified, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine Q3, the acquiring means is characterized in that the data specifying the plurality of different operation modes can acquire the operation data associated with the data specifying the different operating portions. Machine Q4.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q3, the acquiring unit acquires the operation data in which the data designating a plurality of different operation modes is associated with the data designating different operation units. According to the operation data acquired by the acquisition means, different operation modes can be set to different operation units. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation modes of the plurality of operating units can be further diversified.

  In the gaming machine Q4, the setting means divides and sets the operation data for each of the operating portions to which the same operation mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q4, the same operation mode can be set for the operating portion at the same timing, so the same operation mode can be reflected at the same timing. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the visual quality of each operating unit immediately after setting the operation data.

  In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q5, the operating unit is constituted by light emitting means for emitting light, and the operation data is constituted by data for setting a light emission pattern by the light emitting means. A game machine Q6 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the operating part is constituted by the light emitting means that emits light. The operation data is composed of data for setting a light emission pattern by the light emission means.

  This has the effect of reducing the processing load when setting the light emission pattern by the light emission means.

  A game machine Q7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines Q1 to Q6, the operation data is set by a setting means in a serial communication system.

  According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q6, the operation data is set by the setting means in the serial communication mode, so data is set with a smaller number of wires compared to the parallel communication mode. can do. Therefore, the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced by reducing the number of wires.

<Feature R group> (The mission set by the player (a combination of winning symbols is selected) continues to a big hit)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, display means for displaying identification information based on discrimination results by the discrimination means, and identification information based on specific discrimination results in the display means In the gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when displayed, the bonus being advantageous to the player is provided when the specific condition is satisfied. The special effect execution means for executing a specific effect to be notified is provided, and the special effect execution means performs the benefit game by the bonus game execution means from a period during which the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means is displayed A game machine R1 which continuously executes at least the specific effect over a period of time in which the game is played.

  Here, an effect of notifying whether or not a jackpot has been won is executed during the normal gaming state, and an effect of notifying whether or not a benefit (for example, a probability change gaming state) to be awarded after an end of the jackpot is awarded There has been proposed a pachinko machine which is executed during a game (during a jackpot game) (e.g., JP-A-2009-178292). In this case, since an independent effect is executed according to each gaming state, an effect of notifying that the jackpot has been won and an effect of notifying that the benefit is given are executed in a series of effects There is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine R1, from the period in which the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means is displayed, the advantage advantageous to the player is given over the period in which the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means The specific effect for notifying that it is done is continuously performed. In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the next benefit is awarded during the period when the bonus game is being executed, by the specific effect which is continuously executed. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the specific effect which is continuously executed in the bonus game, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, the specific condition is satisfied when a plurality of different small conditions are satisfied, and the specific effect execution means is based on the result of the determination of the determination means being the specific determination result. Game machine R2 for executing the specific effect indicating that a predetermined number of the small conditions have been established.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1, the specific condition is satisfied by the establishment of a plurality of different small conditions, and the specific effect is executed when the predetermined number of small conditions are satisfied. Therefore, since the player can recognize that the predetermined number of small conditions are satisfied by the specific effect, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game machine.

  In the gaming machine R2, the specific effect execution means indicates a remaining specific effect indicating whether the remaining small conditions are satisfied among the plurality of different small conditions during the period in which the special game is performed by the special game execution means. A game machine R3 characterized by being executed as the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, the remaining specific effect indicating whether the remaining small conditions among the plurality of different small conditions are satisfied is executed as the specific effect. Therefore, since the player can recognize the number of remaining small conditions by executing the remaining specific effect, it is possible to make the player expect the specific conditions to be established, and the player can There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, at least a normal bonus game advantageous to the player and a special bonus game advantageous to the player than the normal bonus game are set as the bonus game by the bonus game execution means. A gaming machine R4 characterized by having bonus game type determination means for determining the type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, any of a normal bonus game set as a bonus game and a special bonus game which is more advantageous to the player than the normal bonus game The character is determined by the bonus game type determination means. Therefore, since the variation of the bonus game which is advantageous to the player is increased, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine R 4, the remaining specific effect indicating that the remaining small condition is established during the bonus game is executed, thereby indicating that the special bonus game is being executed by the bonus game executing means. Gaming machine R5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R4, the fact that the special bonus game is being executed is shown on the occasion that the remaining bonus effect is executed, so that the gaming machine is easy for the player to understand Has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine R4 or R5, the special bonus game is characterized in that a special gaming state which is advantageous to the player after the bonus game is provided until a predetermined condition is established.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine R4 or R5, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided until a predetermined condition is established after the bonus game. As a result, it is possible to give the player a more advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  A gaming machine R7 having any one of gaming machines R2 to R6, having a selecting means by which a player can select the small condition.

  According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines R2 to R6, the player can select the small condition by the selection means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be enhanced.

<Feature S group> (pocket increase in roulette)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, and privilege giving means for imparting a benefit that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result In the gaming machine possessed by the player, the display means for displaying a plurality of different identification information and the stop display at the predetermined stop position among the plurality of different identification information displayed on the display means Identification information determination means for determining specific identification information notifying that the determination result is a specific determination result, and the identification information displayed on the display means dynamically when a predetermined condition is satisfied And the effect determining means executes the effect of stopping the identification information of 1 at the stop position, and the effect is determined by the determining means when the effect is executed by the effect executing means. Gaming machine S1, and wherein the that the state, those having a variable setting means for variably set the identification information is determined as the specific identification information by the identification information determination means.

  Here, there has been proposed a pachinko machine having a game feature of providing a bonus game (for example, a big hit game) when a predetermined character of the plurality of characters displayed on the roulette wheel stops at a specific stop position (for example, a big hit game) For example, JP-A-2004-73580). In this case, it is necessary to control the stop position of the roulette based on the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a predetermined character is selected from a plurality of characters. There is a problem that the rotational movement of the roulette becomes an unnatural motion, the player can not provide a suitable effect to the player, and the player's willingness to play decreases. The

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, one of the plurality of identification information displayed on the display means in the effect to be executed by the effect execution means according to the state in which the determination by the determination means is executed. However, the variable setting means changes the identification result into specific identification information for notifying that the determination result is a specific determination result (that is, the player is given an advantage in favor of the player). Thereby, in the effect performed by the effect execution means, it is possible to vary specific identification information. Accordingly, it is possible to provide a suitable effect to the player, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  In the gaming machine S1, the effect to be executed by the effect executing means has a predetermined period set in advance, and the identification information determining means determines that the first period has elapsed in the predetermined period. A game machine S2 characterized in that specific identification information is determined.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine S1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the effect by the effect executing means is executed in a predetermined period set in advance. Specific identification information is determined by the identification information determination means based on the passage of the first period in the predetermined period in which the effect is executed. Thereby, since specific identification information is determined when the first period has elapsed, the identification information can be dynamically displaced without a sense of discomfort in the effect executed by the effect execution means. As a result, it is possible to provide a suitable effect to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game intention.

  In the game machine S1 or S2, a game machine S3 having acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information discriminated by the discrimination means based on establishment of acquisition conditions.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the discrimination information to be discriminated by the discrimination means is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, so the discrimination information is surely acquired. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the effect is not executed by the effect executing means despite the determination condition being satisfied.

  In the gaming machine S3, a storage means for storing at least the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means until the discrimination condition holds, and the discrimination condition corresponding to the discrimination information with the discrimination information stored in the storage means Prior determination means for performing determination before the above is established, wherein the variable setting means variably sets the identification information based on the determination result of the prior determination means. A game machine S4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means at least until the discrimination condition is satisfied. The discrimination information stored in the storage means is discriminated by the prior discrimination means before the discrimination condition is satisfied, and identification information is variably set based on the discrimination result of the prior discrimination means. Thus, the identification information can be changed before the effect based on the discrimination information for which the identification information becomes variable can be changed. Therefore, the identification information can be easily identified by the effect executed by the effect executing means. Can be displaced dynamically. As a result, it is possible to provide a suitable effect to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game intention.

<Feature T group> (Bunny foot effect)
A ball entering means having an opening through which the game ball can enter, an open state in which the game ball can enter the opening of the ball entering means, and a closing in which the game ball is difficult to enter than the open state A variable member that can be changed to a state, a variable unit that can change the variable member to the open state and the closed state, and a game ball having entered the opening flow down to a position that can be viewed by the player The first flow path disposed in the second flow path, the first position where the game ball having entered the opening can be made to flow down and A game machine T1 comprising: displacement means for displacing; and displacement control means for moving the displacing means to at least the first position during the open state of the variable member.

  Here, in the gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine which produces an effect of moving a movable member called a rendering combination on the game board as an effect for improving the interest of the player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004- 121464)). In this case, there is a problem that the installation space such as a winning opening necessary for playing the game machine is lost by providing the rendering combination.

  According to the gaming machine T1, during a period in which the variable member is changed to the open state in which the game ball can enter the opening portion of the ball entry means, the first flow path disposed at a position visible to the player Is changed to the first position so that the gaming ball entering the opening flows down. Also, the first flow path can be displaced to the first position and the second position. Thereby, when the game ball enters the opening of the ball entry means, the first flow path is changed to the first position, so that the game ball can be made to flow down, and to the opening of the ball entry means When the game ball does not enter the ball, the first flow path can be displaced to the first position and the second position, and can be diverted to effects and the like. Therefore, since the first flow path can be diverted to effect, it is possible to improve the player's interest and further to ensure the installation space on the game board.

  The gaming machine T1 has a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game in which the variable member is changed into the open state a plurality of times until a predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable means when a specific condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized in that the displacement control means displaces the first flow path to the first position until a predetermined period elapses after execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is completed. T2.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects exerted on the gaming machine T1, a bonus game in which the variable member is varied to the open state is executed a plurality of times until the predetermined condition is satisfied. The first flow path is displaced to the first position until a predetermined period of time elapses. Therefore, the first channel is not displaced to the second position despite the fact that the game ball entered into the opening of the ball entering means has not flowed down, so the ball entering into the opening of the ball entering means There is an effect that it is possible to flow down without clogged gaming balls.

  The game machine T1 or T2 has effect execution means for executing an effect, and the effect execution means, as one of the effects, controls the displacement of the first channel other than the period during which the bonus game is executed. A game machine T3 characterized by being displaced by means.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first flow path is displaced as one of the effects other than the period in which the bonus game is executed. Therefore, since the variation of the effect can be increased, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  The gaming machine T3 is provided with a determination means for performing a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the bonus game execution means is based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a specific determination result. The bonus game is executed, and the effect executing means is characterized in that the displacement control means displaces the first flow path as one of the effects indicating the determination result by the determining means. Game machine T4.

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the determination result is a specific determination result, the bonus game is performed, and the displacement of the first flow path is performed as one of the effects indicating the determination result. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the determination result is a specific determination result by the effect that the first flow path is displaced, so the player pays attention to the effect that the first flow path is displaced It has the effect of improving the interest of people with disabilities.

<Feature U group> (time out production)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, privilege giving means for imparting an advantage advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a particular discrimination result, and predetermined conditions The effect setting is performed in a predetermined period when the special game state is set by the state setting means, and the special game state is set by the state setting means, until the establishment of An effect executing means and an accompanying effect for executing an accompanying effect accompanying the effect executed by the effect executing means when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within a period in which the effect is executed by the effect executing means and the effect executing means An execution means, and a game machine U1 characterized by comprising:

  Here, there has been a pachinko machine in which a special gaming state (for example, a probability variation gaming state) different from a normal gaming state is executed for a predetermined period. In such a pachinko machine, an effect executed in a predetermined period as a technology for notifying the player using an effect executed in a predetermined period that the current gaming state is the special game state. There has been proposed a pachinko machine that changes the degree of progress of effects performed in a predetermined period when it is determined that the timing at which the special game state ends differs from the timing at which the special game state ends (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008- 173320)). In this case, when the timing at which the effect performed in a predetermined period ends and the timing at which the special gaming state ends are different, control for changing the progress of the effect performed in a predetermined period is performed. There is a problem in that the processing load is increased.

  According to the gaming machine U1, a special gaming state in which the determination condition is easily set until the predetermined condition is established is set, and when the special gaming state is set, the effect is executed in a predetermined period. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the period in which the effect is executed, the accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed. Here, in the case where the predetermined condition is not established in the period in which the effect is executed, the display period of the effect is ended although the special game state is continued. In this case, the accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed by the accompanying effect execution means. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the special gaming state is continued. In addition, the effect is executed in a predetermined period. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the period in which the effect is executed, the accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed. Therefore, control for changing the content of the effect performed in a predetermined period is performed. There is no need to do it. Therefore, there is an effect that processing load at the time of performing an effect can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine U1, an entering means capable of entering a game ball, an acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information determined by the discriminating means by the game sphere entering the ball entering means, and the acquiring means A game machine U2 comprising: storage means for storing at least the discrimination information acquired in the memory until the discrimination condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the game ball enters the ball entry means, the discrimination information is acquired, and the acquired discrimination information is stored until the discrimination condition is satisfied. Thereby, at the time when the game ball enters the ball entry means and the discrimination information is acquired, even if the discrimination condition is not satisfied, the discrimination information can be stored in the storage means . Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the case where the determination by the determination means is not executed even though the game ball enters the ball entry means, thereby suppressing an excessive disadvantage to the player. It has the effect of being able to (prevent).

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the effect executing means indicates that the specific determination result is based on the fact that the determining means determines that the specific determination result is made in a period in which the effect is executed. The game machine U3 characterized by performing in the said remaining period.

  According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1 or the gaming machine U2, when it is determined that the result of the determination is a specific determination result in the period of executing the effect, the specific effect is performed in the remaining period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the specific determination result is obtained in the period of executing the effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U3, a display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result of the determination means and a dynamic display period for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means A game machine U4 comprising: determination means, wherein the predetermined condition is established based on the passage of the dynamic display period based on the determination by the determination means for a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines U1 to U3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. The predetermined condition is satisfied based on the passage of the dynamic display period based on the determination by the determination means for the predetermined number of times. Thereby, based on the determination result in a period in which the special gaming state is set (that is, a period in which an effect is performed until a predetermined condition is established, or a period in which an accompanying effect accompanying the effect is performed). Dynamic display of identification information is displayed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, during the period in which the special gaming state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result can be made to pay attention, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Feature V group> (look-ahead in RUSH)
Based on the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the acquiring means for acquiring information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and the information acquired by the acquiring means as the establishment of the determination condition Discrimination means based on discrimination, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means until at least the discrimination condition is satisfied, and display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means And, when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the privilege giving means for providing an advantage advantageous to the player and the identification information displayed on the display means are dynamically displayed. Dynamic display means, dynamic display period determination means for determining dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic determined by the dynamic display period determination means display period Means for storing a dynamic display period storing means in which at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period by a predetermined multiple or more are stored; A first effect executing unit that executes a first effect at a timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the first dynamic display period when the first dynamic display period is determined by the unit; and the determination unit When the second dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit based on the determination result by the second determination result being the specific determination result, the second dynamic display period is started from the start of the second dynamic display period. A second effect capable of executing the first effect at a timing when one period has elapsed, and repeatedly performing the execution of the first effect a predetermined number of times at the same timing every time the first dynamic display period has elapsed. Execution means, and the discrimination means If the decision result by is not the specific determination result, a game machine, wherein the first effect are those having a limiting means for limiting the number of times to be performed in a continuous below the predetermined number of times, the V1.

  Here, an effect (so-called, pseudo continuous notice effect) is suggested that suggests the player the expectation of winning a big hit by stopping and displaying the predetermined display mode a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display (for example, JP-A 2008-161390)). In order to execute this pseudo continuous advance notice effect, it is necessary to set the variation time of one special symbol variation a predetermined display mode to a time that can be stopped and displayed a plurality of times, and the number of special symbol variations per unit time There was a problem that Further, in a pachinko machine having a function (pending storage function) capable of storing winning information of a special symbol a plurality of times, a predetermined display mode using the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the plurality of winning information stored pending. A presentation (so-called continuous advance presentation presentation) that suggests the player the expectation of winning a big hit to the player by stopping the display a plurality of times is also proposed (for example, JP-A-2010-207261). Since it is necessary to store multiple pieces of winning information of special symbols in order to execute this continuous notice effect, it is continuous for pachinko machines where it is difficult to store multiple pieces of winning information for special symbols, and pachinko machines that do not have a storage function. There was a problem that the advance notice could not be performed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine V1, a first dynamic display period determined as a dynamic display period of identification information and a second dynamic display period which is longer by a predetermined multiple of the first dynamic display period The first effect is executed at the timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the dynamic display period. In the second dynamic display period, after the first effect is displayed, the first effect is executed a predetermined number of times at the same timing each time the first dynamic display period elapses.

  Thereby, while having different dynamic display periods of the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period, the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period are performed. 1 The execution timing of the effect can be matched. Therefore, if the first effect is executed based on the fact that the second dynamic display period is set (that is, the determination result is a specific determination result) while increasing the variation of the dynamic display period. Since the player can be recognized, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, the first effect is performed a predetermined number of times based on the determination result being a specific determination result, and when the determination result is not a specific determination result, the number of times the first effect is continuously executed is limited. As a result, the first effect is not executed a predetermined number of times despite the fact that the second dynamic display period is not in progress (that is, the determination result is not a specific determination result), so that the gaming machine is easy to understand for the player. There is an effect that can be provided.

  A gaming machine V2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine V1, the dynamic display period determining means is configured to easily determine the first dynamic display period than the second dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the first dynamic display period having a shorter display period can be easily determined than the second dynamic display period. This can prevent the dynamic display period from becoming long. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored without extending the game time.

  In the game machine V1 or V2, the first effect execution means is configured to execute the first effect based on the start timing of the first dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1 or V2, the first effect is executed based on the start timing of the first dynamic display period. Thereby, the first effect can be performed only when the first dynamic display period starts at a specific start timing, and the first dynamic displayed in the first dynamic display period is the second dynamic. It can be made to coincide with the timing at which the first effect is displayed in the display period. Therefore, it can be made difficult for the player to distinguish whether the first effect is displayed in the first dynamic display period or the first effect is displayed in the second dynamic display period, There is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  One of the game machines V1 to V3, wherein the first dynamic display period is configured to be shorter than twice the effect period of the first effect.

  According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the first dynamic display period is configured to be shorter than twice the effect period of the first effect. As a result, the first effect is not performed a plurality of times in the first dynamic display period, and it is only necessary to control whether or not the first effect is given in the first dynamic display period. Therefore, in the first dynamic display period, there is an effect that the control processing for executing the first effect can be simplified.

  Further, the first dynamic display period is a period shorter than twice the effect period of the first effect, that is, the effect period of the first effect is longer than half the first dynamic display period. Thereby, even if the first dynamic display period is a short period, it is possible to sufficiently secure the effect period of the first effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the first effect.

<Feature W group> (Random display of decorative pattern)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, display means for displaying discrimination information based on discrimination results by the discrimination means, and dynamically displaying the discrimination information displayed on the display means Dynamic display means, effect executing means for executing effects, benefit giving means for giving advantageous benefits to the player after specific effects are executed by the effect executing means, and display means for the identification information And a display position determining means for determining the position to be displayed on the screen each time the determination means executes the determination.

  Here, there has been proposed a pachinko machine in which the player is notified of the lottery result of the special symbol using the identification information displayed on the display means (for example, JP-A-6-134105). In this case, since the display means is configured by the dot LED, the display position of the identification information displayed on the display means can not be changed, and the interest of the player can not be improved. .

  In addition, as a pachinko machine that displays a decorative symbol that changes based on a drawing of a special symbol on the display means, a pachinko machine that changes the display mode of the decorative symbol has been proposed (for example, JP 2012-2358336). In this case, while the special symbol is being changed, the display aspect of the decorative symbol can be changed to various aspects to enhance the interest of the game, but the decorative symbol is also predetermined along with the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Since the stop display is given at the position, the player can easily grasp whether the special symbol has stopped (whether or not the variation of the special symbol has ended) only by confirming the predetermined position. For example, when executing a series of effects using a plurality of special symbol variations, there is a problem that the stop display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display means reduces the effect of the series of effects.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine W1, in the case where a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, an advantageous benefit is given to the player. Then, each time the determination is performed by the determination means, the position at which the identification information is dynamically displayed based on the determination result is determined by the display position determination means. Thereby, it is possible to change the dynamically displayed position of the identification information each time it is displayed dynamically. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the identification information, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, by determining the display position of the identification information to be moved to a plurality of places at predetermined intervals by the display position determination means, which display position at the timing when the identification information is stopped and displayed (the timing when the special symbol is stopped) This makes it difficult for the player to grasp whether the identification information is displayed on the screen. Therefore, for example, when performing a series of effects using a plurality of special symbols, the player easily grasps the display content (whether or not it has stopped) of the identification information displayed on the display means. The effect is that it is possible to suppress the effect and to enhance the effects of the series of effects.

  In the gaming machine W1, the effect executing means causes the display means to display the effect mode as a part of the effect, and the identification information is displayed in a display area smaller than the display area in which the effect mode is displayed. A game machine W2 characterized by being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the effect execution means displays the effect mode on the display means as a part of the effect. Further, identification information is displayed in a display area smaller than the display area in which the effect mode is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether or not it is stopped). Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine W1, the effect execution means displays an effect mode as a part of the effect on an effect display means different from the display means, and the effect display means is a display area larger than the display means A game machine W3 characterized by comprising

  According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the effect display means is configured by the display area larger than the display means, and the effect execution means displays the effect mode which is a part of the effect on the effect display means as a part of the effect. As a result, it is possible to display an effect aspect which is a part of the effect by the effect display means having a display area larger than that of the display means for displaying the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect mode displayed on the effect display means, and to suppress the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether or not it is stopped). Can. Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  One of the gaming machines W1 to W3 has display position variable means for changing the display position of the identification information determined by the display position determination means while the identification information is dynamically displayed. A game machine W4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the display position of the identification information determined by the display position determination means is variable during the dynamic display of the identification information by the display position change means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the display content (whether or not the display is stopped) of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the game machines W1 to W4, the effect executing means executes the effect in a predetermined effect period in which the discrimination means can discriminate a plurality of times, and is displayed on the display means The dynamic display period determination unit determines the dynamic display period of the identification information, and the dynamic display period determination unit identifies the dynamic display period determination unit while the effect is being performed by the effect execution unit. A game machine W5 characterized in that a period more than the remaining period of the effect is set to be easily determined as a dynamic display period when the determination result of is determined.

  According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the effect is executed in a predetermined effect period in which the determination unit can determine a plurality of times by the effect execution unit. The dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means. And, in the state where the effect is executed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display period determining means determines a period equal to or longer than the remaining period of the effect as the dynamic display period when the specific judging result is judged by the judging means. It is set easily to decide. Thereby, when the specific determination result is determined by the determination means, a period more than the remaining period of the effect being executed by the effect execution means is easily determined as the dynamic display period of the identification information based on the determination result As a result, identification information based on a specific determination result is displayed in the middle of the effect, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the effect of the effect.

  In the gaming machine W5, the dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display period to be the first period based on the determination result of the determination means being a determination result other than the specific determination result. A game machine W6 characterized in that the effect period executed by the effect execution means is configured to have a period equal to or greater than a predetermined multiple of the first period.

  According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the dynamic display period to be the first period is determined by the dynamic display period determination means based on the determination result of the determination means being a determination result other than the specific determination result, and executed by the effect execution means The effect period is composed of a period equal to or more than a predetermined multiple of the first period. Thus, in the case of a discrimination result other than the particular discrimination result, the number of discriminations by the discrimination means per unit time can be increased, and there is an effect that the discrimination efficiency can be improved.

  Furthermore, while the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means is displayed on the display means during the period of the effect performed by the effect execution means, in order to determine the display position of the identification information by the display position determination means It becomes possible to make the player pay attention to the effect mode displayed on the effect display means, and it is possible to suppress the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether it is stopped or not). . Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  By selectively adopting the configuration described in any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the above-described effect can be further enhanced.

  The gaming machine W5 or W6 has state setting means for setting a special state in which establishment of the determination condition is easy until establishment of the end condition, and the effect execution means sets the special state by the state setting means. A game machine W7 for starting execution of the effect based on the game.

  According to the gaming machine W7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W5 or W6, the special state in which the establishment of the determination means is facilitated is set by the state setting means until the establishment of the termination condition. The effect execution means starts the execution of the effect based on the setting of the special state. This has the effect of being able to enhance the rendering effect of the rendering performed for a predetermined period in the special state.

<Features X group> (Variable roulette can be changed depending on the time)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, display means for displaying discrimination information based on discrimination results of the discrimination means, and display of the discrimination information showing the discrimination results specific to the display means If it is determined, among the awarding means for awarding a benefit advantageous to the player, the identification body in which a plurality of different identification portions are arranged, and the identification portion in the identification body, the specific identification portion is determined Determining means, special state setting means for setting the specific identification unit to a special state different from normal when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result, and based on the establishment of the specific condition Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect of notifying the player of the determination result by the identification unit of the identification object, and the specific identification unit based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition during execution of the specific effect Add Gaming machine X1 to the additional setting means for setting, and the probability changing means for varying a probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied, characterized in that with.

  Here, there has been proposed a pachinko machine having a game feature of providing a bonus game (for example, a big hit game) when a predetermined character of the plurality of characters displayed on the roulette wheel stops at a specific stop position (for example, a big hit game) For example, JP-A-2004-73580). However, since the number of predetermined characters is not changed (added) during the roulette game, the notification mode indicating the jackpot expectation to the player remains unchanged while the roulette game is in progress. The player's willingness to play decreases while the roulette game is being executed, and the player may get bored early.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine X1, when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the discrimination result of the particular discrimination unit among the plurality of discrimination units arranged in the discrimination body (that is, the player In the case of being given a benefit that is advantageous to the above), it is set to a special state different from normal. That is, when any one of the specific identification units is set to a special state different from a normal state, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is provided. Then, when the specific effect is performed and a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific identification unit is additionally set. As a result, when a specific identification unit is additionally set in the specific effect, the player feels that the possibility of giving an advantage to be advantageous is increased, and thus the player's interest can be improved. .

  Furthermore, the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is varied by the probability varying means. That is, the probability that a specific identification unit is added can be varied. Therefore, since a change occurs in the probability that a specific identification unit is added, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress (prevent) a defect that a player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine X1, at least one of a first gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, and a second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, are set as the benefit granting means. The probability variable means sets the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied higher than when the first gaming state is set when the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine X2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine X1, the second one of the first gaming state advantageous to the player and the second gaming state more advantageous than the first gaming state When the gaming state is set, the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is set to be high. As a result, when the predetermined condition is easily established, a specific identification unit is easily added. Therefore, the player can expect the second gaming state to be set by the addition of the specific identification unit, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine X1 or X2, an entering means capable of entering a game ball, and an obtaining means for obtaining discrimination information determined by the discriminating means based on the game ball entering the ball entering means , And the additional setting means determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the ball entering means as a trigger.

  According to the gaming machine X3, the information determined by the determining means is acquired based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (that is, the information for providing the privilege giving means is acquired) In response to the game ball entering the ball means, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied (that is, it is determined whether a specific identification unit is to be added). Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to cause the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine X3, when the game ball enters the ball entry means, the additional setting means executes a predetermined lottery, and the predetermined result is the specific lottery result. A game machine X4 characterized by determining that the condition is established.

  According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine X3, a predetermined lottery is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result. A predetermined condition is satisfied (ie, a specific identification unit is added). Therefore, since the specific identification unit is added based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery, it is possible to give the player an impression that the addition of the specific identification unit is performed fairly.

  In the gaming machine X4, a gaming machine X5 characterized in that the probability varying means varies the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means.

  According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X4, the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means can be varied by the probability varying means. Therefore, since a change occurs in the probability that a specific identification unit is added, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress (prevent) a defect that a player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine X4, the gaming machine X6 is characterized in that the probability varying means sets a probability table in which the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means is set for each number of ball entry.

  According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X4, the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means is varied by setting the probability table set for each number of ball entry of the gaming balls. Therefore, since the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means can be easily changed, the control load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine X6, the probability variable means sets a first probability table as the probability table based on the setting of the first gaming state, and is based on the setting of the second gaming state. And a second probability setting table in which the drawing probability is set relatively higher than the first probability setting table.

  According to the gaming machine X7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X6, the first probability table is set based on the setting of the first gaming state, and the second gaming state is set based on the setting. A second probability setting table is set in which the lottery probability is set higher than the first probability setting table. Therefore, by setting the probability table according to the gaming state, it is possible to easily change the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means, so that the control load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

<Features Y group> (When giving a preliminary notice in background production, stop temporarily at a position where it can be produced within 0.2Y in case of temporary stop)
A determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, a display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, and a motion for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means Display means, dynamic display period determination means for determining the dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the determination result, and the determination result specific to the display means A bonus giving means for giving a bonus which is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the symbol is displayed, a presentation dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a presentation on the display means, and the dynamic display means Stop control means for stopping the dynamic display of the effect by the dynamic effect display means when a period in which the dynamic display of the identification information is not continued continues for a predetermined period or longer; And a presentation mode determination unit that determines a specific presentation mode as the presentation mode dynamically displayed by the presentation dynamic display unit when the information is displayed dynamically, and the stop control unit A game machine Y1 characterized by stopping dynamic display of the effect in a state where it is possible to switch to the specific effect mode and display.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known one in which effects are dynamically displayed in a specific effect mode when identification information based on a specific determination result is dynamically displayed. Moreover, when dynamic display of identification information is not performed continuously for a predetermined period or more, for example, a display such as a demonstration screen is known. In such a gaming machine, when the demonstration screen or the like is displayed, if the determination result is a specific determination result, it is necessary to switch the presentation from the demonstration screen to a specific presentation mode, and it takes time to switch the presentation If this happens, there is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable.

  In addition, a character (icon) symbolizing a benefit (such as a jackpot) given to the player is displayed on the display screen of the display means, and an effect of notifying that the benefit is given by acquiring the character is proposed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-236851). In this case, after the variation of the special symbol is started, that is, after the lottery result of the special symbol is decided, the character (icon) symbolizing the benefit is displayed on the display screen, and the lottery result of the special symbol is dealt. Because an effect to be performed (an effect on whether or not to acquire a character) is executed, whether or not the character (icon) is displayed on the display screen during one variation time of a special symbol, and then that character is acquired or not There is a problem that the effect must be displayed until the result of Kano, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol must be set long.

  According to the gaming machine Y1, when the identification information based on the specific determination result is dynamically displayed, the effect is dynamically displayed in the specific rendering mode, and the dynamic display of the identification information is continuously performed for a predetermined period or more If not, the dynamic display of the effect is stopped in a state where it is possible to switch to a specific effect mode and display. As a result, in the case where the dynamic display of the identification information is not continuously performed for a predetermined period or more, the determination condition is satisfied, and even if the dynamic display based on the specific determination result is performed, the dynamic display of the effect Can be switched to a specific presentation mode and displayed. Therefore, since effects can be performed in a specific effect mode without delay, there is an effect that the player does not feel discomfort.

  In the gaming machine Y1, the specific effect mode includes a notification mode indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result in a period from the start to the first effect period, and the specific determination mode A game machine Y2, characterized in that the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is configured based on the first effect period or more based on the result.

  According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Y1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the specific effect mode includes a notification mode indicating that the determination result is the specific determination result in the period from the start to the first effect period, and the determination result is the specific determination result. The dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is configured by the first effect period or more. Thereby, when performing an effect by a notification mode indicating that it is a specific determination result, a dynamic display period longer than the first effect period is determined. Therefore, it is possible to reliably display the effect according to the notification mode indicating that it is a specific determination result, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the effect dynamic display means is configured to be able to dynamically display the effect across the dynamic display of identification information for a plurality of times, and the dynamic display of the identification information A game machine Y3 characterized by dynamically displaying an effect mode that can be switched to the specific effect mode according to the start timing.

  According to the gaming machine Y3, it is possible to dynamically display effects across multiple times of dynamic display of identification information, and it is possible to switch to a specific effect mode according to the dynamic display start timing of identification information. The various presentation modes are displayed dynamically. Thereby, when dynamic display of identification information is started, a presentation mode that can be switched to a specific presentation mode is dynamically displayed. Therefore, even when the dynamic display period of the identification information is short, it is possible to switch to a specific effect mode without delay after dynamic display is started, thus giving the player a sense of discomfort. There is no effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the effect is that the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern are dynamically displayed at least at the same time, and the specific effect mode is the first effect pattern and the effect. A game machine Y4 characterized by being displayed in contact with the second effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine Y4, in the specific effect mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, which are dynamically displayed simultaneously, are displayed in contact with each other. Therefore, the player can recognize that the specific effect mode is being executed by visually recognizing the contact between the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, so that the player can be provided with an easily understandable gaming machine. effective.

<Feature AA group> (roulette suspension control)
The discrimination result is determined based on the discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the ball entering means capable of entering the gaming ball and the gaming ball entering the ball means, and the discrimination result based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means A fixed period determination means for determining a period until the determination, and a privilege giving means for providing a player with an advantage advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being determined by the specific determination result. In the gaming machine, among the identification means in which a plurality of different identification information is set and the plurality of different identification information set in the identification means, it is determined that the discrimination result is a discrimination result specific to the player Identification information determination means for determining specific identification information to be notified, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, one piece of the identification information is selected from the identification information of the identification means in a predetermined effect period, and Selected When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect in which the notification mode indicating the identification information is informed and the specific effect executing means, the specific judging result is judged by the judging means Setting means for setting the specific identification information determined by the identification information determination means as the identification information selected in the specific effect based on the selected effect, and the discrimination for a predetermined period during the effect period A gaming machine AA1 having interrupting means for interrupting the effect period when the case where the determination is not performed by the means continues.

  Here, there has been proposed a pachinko machine that executes a specific effect regardless of the presence or absence of variation in the special symbol during the period from the start of the short game state to the end of the short game state (e.g. -236851). In this case, since the specific effect is started even if the special symbol is not changed during the time saving game, the special effect is not changed for the specific effect which is executed only during the specific period of the time saving gaming state. You can see it for a long time. Therefore, there is a problem that the expectation for a specific effect is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AA1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the decision result is decided by the decision period decision means based on the discrimination result The period of time is determined. A privilege is awarded by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the discrimination result is determined by the particular discrimination result. Then, among the plurality of different pieces of identification information set by the identification means, the identification information determination means determines the specific identification information to be notified of the specific discrimination result, and the player is notified of the specific identification information Ru. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific effect of notifying the notification mode indicating the selected one of the identification information among the identification information set in the identification device in the predetermined effect period by the specific effect execution device Is executed. When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, the identification information determined by the identification information determining means as the identification information to be selected in the specific effect based on the fact that the specific judging result is judged by the judging means The identification information of is set by the setting means. Furthermore, when the case where the determination is not performed by the predetermined period determining means continues during the effecting period, the interrupting means interrupts the effecting period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific effect performed using a predetermined effect period proceeds while the determination is not performed by the determination means, so an expectation for the specific effect performed in the effect period is expected. There is an effect that it can control that a feeling is lost.

  In addition, by controlling the effect rather than executing control to change (extend) the content of the specific effect to be performed during the effecting period so that the sense of expectation for the specific effect is not lost by interrupting the effecting period There is an effect that processing can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine AA1, the effect period is set as the first effect period until the first period elapses from the start, and the interruption means does not execute the determination for the predetermined period in the first effect period. A gaming machine AA2 characterized in that the interruption is performed based on the case continuing.

  According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the period from the start of the effect period to the elapse of the first period is set as the first effect period, and the effect period is determined by the interruption means based on the fact that the predetermined period determination is not executed in the first effect period. Interruption of is performed. Thereby, the period which discriminate | determines whether a presentation period is interrupted can be made into a part of 1st presentation period (1st presentation period). Therefore, when the effect period is resumed, it is possible to secure a predetermined effect period, and it is possible to execute a specific effect that does not impair the player's sense of expectation.

  In the gaming machine AA2, the interrupting means determines whether or not the determination of the determining means is being performed in the predetermined period until the first effect period elapses, and when the determination is not being performed, the first means A gaming machine AA3 characterized by interrupting the effect period based on the passage of the effect period.

  According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is determined that the determination of the determination means is not performed in the predetermined period until the first effect period elapses, the effect period is interrupted based on the elapse of the first effect period by the interrupting means . As a result, it is possible to make constant the timing at which the rendering period is interrupted. As a result, since the remaining effect period can be made constant when the effect period is resumed, there is an effect that the processing load for executing the specific effect after the restart can be reduced.

  In addition, it is good for a 1st presentation period to perform a predetermined | prescribed presentation regardless of the determination result by a discrimination means among presentation periods, and to comprise so that a specific presentation may be performed after a 1st presentation period passes. As a result, even when the effect period is interrupted, it is possible to execute the specific effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the determination period determining means determines the determination result of the predetermined number of times within the effect period as a period until the determination result determined by the determination means is determined. A game machine AA4 characterized by determining a period.

  According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the following effects are exerted. That is, as a period until the determination result determined by the determination means is determined, the period is determined by the determination period determination means so that a predetermined number of determination results are determined within the effect period. Thereby, the determination by the determination means can be executed a plurality of times within the effect period, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Furthermore, even if a situation where the discrimination by the discrimination means is not executed within the effect period occurs, that is, after the discrimination of 1 by the discrimination means is executed, the game ball does not enter the ball entry means, and the next discrimination is Even if a situation where it is not performed occurs, the effect period is interrupted by the interrupting means, so that the sense of expectation for the specific effect in the effect period is not impaired.

<Features AB group> (Available period of button PUSH is different from notification)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination on the basis of establishment of discrimination conditions, benefit giving means for imparting an advantage to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and game Operation means that can be operated by a person, an effective period setting means for setting an effective period in which the operation by the operation means is effective, and the effective period when the effective period is set by the effective period setting means The effect executing means for executing the effect based on the operation, the first period setting means for setting the first period within the effective period by the effective period setting means, and the operation means during the first period A game machine AB1 comprising: delay means for delaying the execution of the effect by the effect execution means until the first period has elapsed, when operated.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, after the discrimination symbol is dynamically displayed on the display device for a predetermined period, the stop display is performed with the symbol based on the determination result. During the period when the determination symbol is dynamically displayed, the effect is changed based on pressing the operation means (for example, a button) operable by the player as various effects, and the determination result is played in advance A gaming machine has been proposed which improves the player's interest by displaying a notice display etc. for giving a notice to the player (for example, JP-A-2007-185224). In this case, the period in which the player can operate the operation means is limited to the period in which the effect mode can be changed and displayed, and when the operator is notified of the operable period, the period is short and the effective period There is a problem in that the operation means can not be operated inside, and there is a problem that the game becomes difficult. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of playing an easy game.

  According to the gaming machine AB1, in the case where the effective period in which the operation by the operation means is effective is set, when the operation means is operated within the effective period after the first period of the effective period is operated Is executed. On the other hand, if the operation means is operated before the first period of the effective period elapses, the execution of the effect is delayed. Therefore, even if it is a period different from the start timing of the effect performed based on the operation means, the effective period can be set, the effective period can be set longer, and the player can operate the operation means Since the period is long, there is an effect that the player can play an easy game.

  In the gaming machine AB1, an effect executed by the effect executing means is such that an effect mode is determined based on a determination result by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB1, the effect mode of the effect to be executed by the effect executing means is determined based on the determination result by the determining means. That is, the player can grasp the determination result by the determination means by visually recognizing the effect mode of the effect. Therefore, since the player can be made to be interested in the effect mode of the effect, the operation of the operation means for displaying the effect can be executed with enthusiasm, and the player's willingness to participate can be improved. effective.

  In the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, among the identification means in which a plurality of different identification information is set, and the plurality of different identification information set in the identification means, the discrimination result for the player is a particular discrimination result Identification information determining means for determining the specific identification information to notify the information, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, one piece of the identification information is selected from the identification information of the identification means in a predetermined execution period, The specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in which the notification mode indicating the selected identification information is notified, and the specific judging by the judging means when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means The specific identification information determined by the identification information determination means is set as the identification information selected in the specific effect based on the determination of the result. A setting means, wherein the presentation execution section, the gaming machine is characterized in that to perform the notification effect indicating the selected identification information in the specific effect AB3.

  According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the specific effect is executed, when the specific determination result is determined by the determination means, the notification effect based on the specific identification information notifying that the determination result is the specific determination result by the effect execution means Is executed. Thereby, when the determination result becomes a specific determination result during the execution of the specific effect, the determination result is a specific determination in the effect by the effect executing means (that is, the effect based on the operation of the operation means). A notification effect that allows the player to recognize that it is a result is executed. Therefore, the player can be interested in the effect based on the operation of the operation means, and the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

<Feature AC group> (Set the next roulette effect based on the previous stop position of the roulette)
Based on the movable body on which a plurality of different identification units are disposed, the movable means for moving the movable body, the movable control means for moving the movable body by the movable means, and the movable body based on the establishment of the movable condition. A determination unit that determines a movable pattern in which a stoppable range that can be stopped is set in advance, and the identification unit that is specific to a predetermined effect position after being moved by the movable pattern determined by the determination unit When the movable body is moved by the movable pattern, it is set to the stoppable range based on the establishment of the specific condition when the movable body is moved by the movable pattern. The identification part determination means which determines one said identification part from the said identification part and the said identification part determined by the identification part determination means are stopped at the effect position at a specific stop timing Stopping control means for causing the stopping unit to determine a movable pattern in which the stopable range to be stopped next is set in advance, corresponding to the identification unit stopped by the stopping control means. Game machine AC1 characterized by being.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or the like, determination of a hit etc. is executed, a plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of different symbols are arranged are arranged on the front side, and combinations of symbols stopped at predetermined positions are determined in advance. It determines based on, and is alerted | reported by controlling rotation. As a result of the notification, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are aligned and stopped, a gaming machine is proposed in which a game in which the variable winning device is variable is executed so that the ball can be entered. (For example, JP-A-7-204318). Even if the rotating body is stopped by the rotation effect of 1, the degree of expectation for the next rotation effect can not be varied depending on the stop position, and the player may get bored early due to the problem that the game becomes monotonous. There was a point. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and by providing a novel gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and the player may get bored early. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing problems.

  According to the gaming machine AC1, among the plurality of identification units in the movable body, the identification unit corresponding to the stoppable range set in the determined movable pattern is stopped at the predetermined effect position. As the movable pattern, when the movable body is stopped, the movable pattern is determined in which the stopable range to be stopped next is preset. That is, the next stoppable range is determined in the state where the movable body is stopped. Therefore, from the position where the position of the movable body is stopped according to the next stoppable range, it is possible to change the expectation of whether the specific identification unit stops at the presentation position, and the specific identification unit does not stop at the presentation position If so, you can be interested in that stop position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the game becomes monotonous, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine AC1, a game machine AC2 characterized in that the movable pattern is set with a preset execution period.

  According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1, an execution period set in advance is set in the movable pattern of the movable body. Therefore, the movement of the movable body is extended, which has an effect of suppressing (preventing) a defect that the player gets bored early.

  Further, according to the configuration provided with the gaming machine AC1, since the next stopable range is determined in the state where the movable body is stopped, even if the movable period of the movable body is a preset execution period, The stoppable range can be determined based on the execution period. That is, the stoppable range suitable for the movable period (movable pattern) of the movable body can be determined. For example, an identification unit which does not reach the rendering position in the set period (movable pattern) is determined as the stoppable range I have not. As a result, the movable movement of the movable body does not become unnatural, and it is possible to provide a suitable effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  The gaming machine AC1 or AC2 has a discriminating means for performing discrimination based on establishment of the discriminating condition, and the stop control means identifies the specific when the discrimination result by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result A game machine AC3 characterized by stopping a unit at the effect position.

  According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the specific discrimination unit is stopped at the effect position, so discrimination by the discrimination means There is an effect that the result can be notified by the identification unit that stops at the effect position.

  A game machine AC4 comprising setting means for setting the specific identification unit from the plurality of different identification units based on establishment of setting conditions in any of the game machines AC1 to AC3.

  According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, since the specific identification unit is set by a plurality of different identification units by the setting means, which identification unit is set to the specific identification unit There is an effect that it is possible to give the player an interest as to whether the game is played, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the game machine AC4, the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification units based on the player's selection. Game machine AC5.

  According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC4, at least one of the specific identification units is set by the setting means based on the player's selection, so an arbitrary identification unit of the player This can be a specific identification unit, and the player can participate in the game, thereby improving the player's interest.

  A gaming machine AC6 characterized in that, in the gaming machine AC4 or AC5, the setting means sets the specific identification unit based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means.

  According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AC4 or AC6, the specific identification unit is set by the setting unit based on the discrimination result of the discrimination unit. There is an effect that the player can be made to predict the determination result.

<Feature AD group> (execute after entering the foot effect of the bunny)
A ball entering means having an opening through which the game ball can enter, an open state in which the game ball can enter the opening of the ball entering means, and a closing in which the game ball is difficult to enter than the open state A variable member that can be changed to a state, a variable means that can change the variable member to the open state and the closed state, a detection means that detects a game ball that has passed through the opening, and the opening passes The guiding balls for causing the game ball to flow down for a predetermined period, and guiding to the effect body on which the effect is to be performed, and the detection ball based on the passage of the predetermined period after the game ball is detected in the detection means A game machine AD1 comprising: an effect variable means for changing an effect.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of winning openings are arranged on the front side of the gaming area where the gaming ball can flow, and one of them, the starting winning opening serving as a start trigger for the judgment of acceptance. A predetermined lottery is executed when the ball enters the ball. When the lottery result is a hit, a game in which the variable winning device is in an open state is executed, and the player can obtain many winning balls and the like. In such a gaming machine, a gaming machine is proposed in which the gaming ball is allowed to flow to a predetermined position by connecting passage openings through which a plurality of gaming balls can pass with a flow path member in which the gaming ball can flow down. (Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2014-133036). Furthermore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that suppresses the game becoming monotonous by improving interest. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine AD1, since the effect of the effect body is changed by the effect variable means based on the passage of a predetermined period from the detection of the game ball passing through the opening to the arrival of the effect body, The effect can be produced so that the effect of the effect is changed by the ball guiding the effect. Therefore, it is easy to understand the timing at which the effect of the effect is changed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the game machine AD1, a game machine AD2 characterized in that the guide path is constituted by a visual recognition member which allows a game ball flowing inside to the player to be visible.

  According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AD1, the gaming path is made visible to the player as the guiding path makes the player flow through the inside, so it is visually recognized that the gaming ball is induced to the effect The effect is that it is possible to more easily understand the timing at which the effect of the effect is changed.

  In the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the guide path is configured to be movable at least to a first position where the gaming ball can be guided to the effect body and a second position where the gaming ball is difficult to be induced to the effect body, In the case where the movable means moves the guide path to the first position and the second position, and the variable means changes the movable member to the open state, the guide path is moved from the second position to the second position. A game machine AD3 characterized in that it is movable to one position.

  According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, when the variable member is in the open state, the guide path is moved to the first position, so the variable member is in the open state. Can be reported to the player more easily.

  The gaming machine AD2 or AD3 is characterized by having a discharge flow path for discharging the game ball entered in the opening when the guide path is not moved to the first position. A game machine AD4.

  According to the gaming machine AD4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AD2 or AD3, the game ball having entered the opening may be discharged from the discharge passage even when the induction track is not moved to the first position due to a defect or the like. It has the effect of being able to

  In any one of the gaming machines AD1 to AD4, when the discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the variable is variable until the predetermined condition is fulfilled. A game machine AD5 comprising: a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game in which a member is changed to the open state by the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine AD5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AD4, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved since the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means when the determination result is a specific determination result. .

  In the gaming machine AD5, when the determination result is the specific determination result, there is a determination means for determining whether to set a special gaming state advantageous to the player after the bonus game by the bonus game execution means A game machine AD6 characterized in that the effect body is to notify the determination result by the determination means by the effect.

  According to the gaming machine AD6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD5, it is informed whether the special gaming state is set by the effect body, so that the problem that the game becomes monotonous even during the bonus game can be suppressed. is there.

  In any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine Z1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

In any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect of notifying whether or not a jackpot has been won is executed during the normal gaming state, and whether or not a benefit (for example, a probability variation gaming state) granted after the jackpot is awarded There is one that executes the effect to be notified during a bonus game (during a big hit game) (e.g., Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-178292).
However, conventional gaming machines have a problem that the interest of the player can not be improved.
The present technical concept is made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a determination means for performing a determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. When the identification condition based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, there is provided a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player, and the specific condition is established. And a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect notifying that the player is given an advantageous benefit, wherein the specific effect executing means displays the identification information based on the determination result by the determining means. From the period, at least the specific effect is continuously executed over the period in which the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the specific condition is satisfied when a plurality of different small conditions are satisfied, and the specific effect executing means is the judging means. The specific effect indicating that a predetermined number of the small conditions are satisfied is executed based on the fact that the determination result of is the specific determination result.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, the specific effect executing unit is configured to select one of the plurality of small conditions during the period in which the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing unit. The remaining specific effect indicating whether the remaining small condition is satisfied is executed as the specific effect.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the bonus game executing means performs a bonus game as a bonus game and a normal bonus game advantageous to the player and the normal bonus game. Also, at least a special bonus game advantageous to the player is set, and a bonus game type determining means for determining a type of a bonus game to be executed by the bonus game executing means is provided.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 5, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 4, the special bonus game is performed by executing the remaining specific effect indicating that the small condition is satisfied during the bonus game. Indicates that is executed by the bonus game execution means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, from the period in which the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means is displayed, the advantage advantageous to the player over the period in which the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means A specific effect for notifying that is given is continued and executed.
This has the effect of improving the player's interest.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the specific condition is established by the establishment of a plurality of different small conditions, and the predetermined number of small conditions is established. In the case, a specific effect is performed.
This has the effect of improving the player's interest.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the remaining specific effect indicating whether the remaining small conditions among the plurality of different small conditions are established is specified Executed as an effect.
This has the effect of improving the player's interest.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, a normal bonus game set as a bonus game and its normal bonus game One of the special bonus games advantageous to the player is determined by the bonus game type determination means. This has the effect of improving the player's interest.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, it is indicated that the special bonus game is being executed when the remaining bonus effect is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
37A, 37B first symbol display device (display means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
82a 1st variable winning prize device (variable entry means)
114 Display control device ( display control means)
331a to 331d display unit (display area)
422a effect part (display area)
S305, S508 discrimination means
S310, S312 dynamic display means S214 bonus game execution means S1126 gaming state setting means

Claims (2)

Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions;
Display means capable of displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means;
Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information in the display means and then displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means;
On the display unit, on the basis in particular the first identification information corresponding to a specific discrimination results are displayed, in the gaming machine having the benefits and game execution means, a to execute the privilege game which is advantageous to the player ,
As a game state after the end of the bonus game, the first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state is set to one game state from among the plurality Game state setting means,
A plurality of display areas capable of displaying second identification information for making a predetermined suggestion;
After the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the plurality of display areas, the specific identification information determined in advance is displayed on a part of the display areas, and the specific determination result is obtained. Display control means capable of suggesting setting of the second gaming state by suggesting the second identification information of the specific combination determined in advance for the plurality of display areas ; Equipped with
The display control means is configured to, based on a start of a first period which is at least a part of a period during which the first identification information corresponding to the specific determination result is dynamically displayed, the second identification information The dynamic display is started , and at least a part of a period during which the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, the second display period is continuous in the first period , and the second display period A game machine characterized by being display-controllable so as to be in a state where the identification information of 2 is displayed .   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is provided at a position where it can be viewed by a player.

Images